mam 


K 


•FROM -THE -LIBRARY- OF- 
A.  W.   Ryder 


iDeatb's  flDoDern  Xanauage  Series 

A 
SHORTER  FRENCH  COURSE 


BY 

W.  H.  FRASER  AND  J.  SQTJAIR 

PEOFESSORS  IN  THE  ROMANCE  DEPARTMENT,  UNIVERSITY  OF  TORONTO 


D.  C.  HEATH  &  CO.,  PUBLISHERS 

BOSTON        NEW  YORK         CHICAGO 


COPYRIGHT,  1913 
By  D.  C.  HEATH  &  Co. 

II.  8 


.  UJ: 


PREFACE 

IN  preparing  this  book  the  authors  have  had  particularly  in 
mind  the  requirements  of  elementary  classes  in  schools  and  col- 
leges. 

The  amount  of  grammatical  material  in  each  lesson  is  small,  and 
in  nearly  all  cases  the  exercises  are  based  on  extracts  of  connected 
French  illustrating  the  points  of  grammar  under  observation. 
These  extracts  cover  a  wide  range  of  topics  relating  to  every-day 
life.  The  vocabulary  employed  has  been  kept  within  moderate 
limits,  and. consists  of  words  and  expressions  in  common  use. 

The  numerous  oral  exercises  based  on  the  French  extracts  are 
not  intended  to  be  exhaustive,  but  are  designed  rather  to  furnish 
suggestions  for  additional  practice  of  a  similar  kind,  to  which  the 
authors  attach  great  importance.  In  most  of  the  lessons  oral  or 
written  practice  is  also  provided  in  the  continuation  of  tense-forms 
combined  into  connected  phrases.  Such  exercises  should  be  thor- 
oughly studied  and  committed  to  memory,  particularly  since  they 
often  furnish  additional  examples  of  constructions  which  illustrate 
grammatical  points  contained  in  the  lesson. 

The  English  sentences  in  the  exercises  are  provided  for  trans- 
lation into  French  as  a  final  test  of  knowledge.  It  is  recommended 
that  written  tests  of  this  nature  should  be  required  only  after  the 
translation  has  been  mastered  orally.  Where  two  or  more  sets  of 
English  sentences  are  given,  the  first  one  is  regularly  based  directly 
on  the  French  above  it,  the  additional  set  or  sets  being  of  a  more 
difficult  and  general  character  suitable  for  extra  drill  and  review. 

For  the  convenience  of  teachers  who  prefer  to  begin  with  the 
spoken  language  rather  than  with  the  written  language,  a  phonetic 
transcription  of  the  French  of  the  first  ten  lessons  has  been  given 
at  the  end  of  the  Introduction. 

It  is  hoped  that  the  exercises  in  general  will  prove  suitable  for 
the  purposes  of  teachers  who  desire  to  combine  in  their  class-work 


iv  PREFACE 

the  advantages  of  the  direct  method  with  those  of  the  grammatical 
method. 

The  book  is  not  primarily  intended  to  serve  as  a  reference  gram- 
mar, but  the  addition  of  a  copious  index  and  the  prominent  type 
of  the  section  headings  will  render  it  easy  of  consultation  for  this 
purpose. 

The  authors  take  this  opportunity  of  expressing  their  thanks  to 
a  large  number  of  teachers  for  advice  and  criticism  in  the  prepara- 
tion of  the  work,  and  in  particular  to  Professors  Saint-Elme  de 
Champ  and  W.  C.  Ferguson,  of  the  University  of  Toronto,  for 
assistance  in  the  revision  of  the  manuscript  and  proofs. 

JANUARY,  1913 


CONTENTS 


INTRODUCTION  :  PAGE 

Pronunciation,  etc ix 

Exercises  on  Pronunciation xxiii 

Phonetic  Transcription  of  Lessons  I-X xxv 

LESSON 

I.  Indefinite  Article 1 

II.   Definite  Article 

III.  Present  Indicative  of  avoir.  —  Pronouns  in  Address    .    .  3 

IV.  Present  Indicative  of  etre.  —  Agreement  of  Pronoun  .    .  4 
V.   Present  Indicative  Interrogative  of  avoir  and  etre.  —  In- 
terrogation.—  Possessive  de 6 

VI.   Present  Indicative  Negative  of  avoir  and  etre.  —  Use  of  a  8 
VII.  Present  Indicative  Interrogative  Negative  of  avoir  and 

etre.  —  Agreement  of  Adjectives 10 

VIII.    The  Possessive  Adjective 12 

IX.  Void  and  voila.  —  Some  Personal  Pronoun  Objects    .    .  14 
X.  Present    Indicative   of   donner.  —  Interrogation.  —  In- 
direct Object 16 

XI.   Conjunctive  Personal  Pronouns 19 

XII.   The  General  and  Partitive  Noun 21 

XIII.  Expressions  of  Quantity. — Use  of  en .  23 

XIV.  Omission  of  Article  and  Partitive  Sign.  —  H  y  a     ....  25 
XV.    Irregular  Plurals.  —  Position  of  Adjectives 28 

XVI.   Irregular  Feminine  Adjectives 31 

XVII.   Use  of  ce.  —  Some  Relative  Pronouns 1    .    .  33 

XVIII.    Indefinite  Pronoun  on.  —  Use  of  y.  —  Tout 35 

XIX.   Regular   Conjugations.  —  Present    Indicative   of    don- 
ner, finir,  vendre.  —  Demonstrative  Adjective  ...  37 
XX.    Compound  Tenses.  —  Past  Indefinite  and  Word-Order  40 
XXI.   Agreement  of  Past  Participle.  —  Interrogative  Adjec- 
tive quel 42 

XXII.   Compound  Tenses  with  etre 45 

XXIII.  Disjunctive  Personal  Pronouns 47 

XXIV.  Disjunctives  (continued).  —  Present  Indicative  of  voir  48 

v 


VI 


CONTENTS 


LESSON  PAGB 

XXV.   Comparatives  and  Superlatives 50 

XXVI.   Infinitive.  —  Present  Indicative  of  aller  and  pouvoir  52 
XXVII.    Imperfect  Indicative.  —  Present  and  Imperfect  of 

faire 55 

XXVIII.    Position  of  Pronoun  Objects 58 

XXIX.   Imperative.  —  Position  of  Pronominal  Objects  ...  61 

XXX.    Future  and  Future  Anterior 64 

XXXI.    Demonstrative  Pronouns 66 

XXXII.   Possessive  Pronouns.  —  Present  Indicative  of  vouloir  69 

XXXIII.  Interrogative  Pronouns  and  Locutions 72 

XXXIV.  Relative  Pronouns.  —  Conjunction  que 75 

XXXV.   Indefinite  Adjectives  and  Pronouns.  —  Negatives     .  78 

XXXVI.   Orthographical  Peculiarities.  —  Present  Indicative  of 

dire 82 

XXXVII.   Place-Names.  —  Present  Indicative  of  partir  ....  84 

XXXVIII.    Conditional  and  Conditional  Anterior 88 

XXXIX.    Impersonal  Verbs 92 

XL.   Reflexive  Verbs 94 

XLI.   Passive  Voice 97 

XLII.   Reflexive  Compound  Tenses      99 

XLIII.   Cardinal  Numerals.  —  Money,  Weights,  Measures  .  102 
XLIV.   Ordinals.  —  Fractions.  —  Numeral  Adverbs.  —  Col- 
lectives. —  Year    Dates.  —  Numerical     Titles.  — 

Dimensions 106 

XLV.   Days.  —  Dates.  —  Age.  —  Holidays 109 

XLVI.   Time  of  Day 113 

XL VII.   Present  and  Perfect  Participle.  —  Forms  in  -ing  .    .  115 
XL VIII.   Present  Subjunctive.  —  In  Noun  Clauses.  —  Tense 

Sequence 118 

XLIX.   Subjunctive.  —  In  Adjectival  and  Adverbial  Clauses 

and  in  Principal  Sentence .    .  122 

I*   Past  Definite.  —  Pluperfect.  —  Past  Anterior    ...  125 

LI.   Imperfect  Subjunctive.  —  Tense  Sequence     ....  128 

LII.    Irregular  Verbs.  —  Principal  Parts       131 

LIII.   Verb  and  Subject.  —  Agreement  and  Position  ...  134 

LIV.   Principal  Parts:  pouvoir,  vouloir,  voir 136 

LV.   Auxiliary  Function 137 

LVI.   Principal  Parts:  aller,  devoir,  venir 139 

LVII.   Use  of  devoir,  aller,  venir 140 

LVIII.   Principal  Parts:  dire,  faire,  mettre,  prendre  ....  143 

LIX.   Causative  Use  of  faire 144 


CONTENTS 


Vll 


LESSON  PAGE 

LX.   Principal  Parts:  envoyer,  recevok,  mouvoir,  mourir  146 

LXI.   Additional  Verb-Phrases 147 

LXII.   Principal  Parts:  croire,  lire 149 

LXIII.   Infinitive  for  Noun  Clause  .  • 150 

LXIV.   Principal  Parts:  boire,  coudre,  moudre,  resoudre  .  152 

LXV.   Use  of  Infinitive 153 

LXVI.   Principal  Parts:  battre,  dormir,  servir,  nettoyer     .  155 

LXVII.    Government  of  Verbs 156 

LXVIII.   Principal  Parts:  partir,  sentir,  suivre 159 

LXIX.   Use  of  c'est  and  il  est 160 

LXX.   Principal  Parts :  traduire,  construire 163 

LXXI.    Impersonal  Verbs      164 

LXXII.   Principal  Parts:  cuke,  courir,  valoir 166 

LXXIII.   Use  of  Tenses  and  Moods 167 

LXXIV.   Principal  Parts:  asseoir,  suffire 170 

LXXV.   Remarks  on  Subjunctive 171 

LXXVI.   Principal  Parts:  offrir,  souffrir 174 

LXX VII.   Infinitive  or  Subjunctive 175 

LXXVIII.   Agreement  of  Past  Participle 177 

LXXIX.   Principal  Parts:  ecrire,  vivre 179 

LXXX.    Partitives.  —  Article  with  Titles.  —  Apposition      .  180 

LXXXI.   Principal  Parts:  plaire,  rire 183 

LXXXII.   Omission  of  Article.  —  Article  for  Possessive  .    .    .  184 

•   LXXXIII.   Principal  Parts  of  tenir 187 

LXXXI V.   Adjective  Forms  and  Agreement.  —  Comparatives  188 

LXXXV.   Principal  Parts:  cueillir,  ouvrir,  tressaillir    ....  191 

LXXX VI.    Personal,  Possessive  and  Relative  Pronouns    ...  192 

LXXXVII.   Principal  Parts:  craindre,  joindre,  peindre  ....  195 

LXXXVIII.    Pronoun  on.  —  Whoever,  Whatever 196 

LXXXIX.   Adverbs  from  Adjectives.  —  Adverbial  Distinctions  199 

XC.    Negation 203 

XCI.   Use  of  a,  de,  en,  sur.  —  Prepositional  Distinctions  207 

XCII.   Conjunctions 210 

MATERIAL  FOR  CONVERSATION 215 

REVIEW  EXERCISES 218 

APPENDIX 233 

VOCABULARIES  : 

French-English       263 

English-French       287 

INDEX  .  313 


INTRODUCTION 

A.  —  The  Alphabet 

The  letters  of  the  alphabet,  with  their  French  names,  are  as 
follows : 

a     a  h  ache  o  o  v  ve 

b     be  \  i  p  pe  w  double  ve 

c     ce  j  ji  q  ku  x  iks 

d    de  k  fca  r  er  y  i  grec 

e     e  1  eZ  s  ess  z  zed 

f     ef  m  em  t  te 

g     ge  n  en  u  u 

In  addition  to  the  letters,  the  following  orthographic  signs  are  em- 
ployed :  — 

1.  The  acute  accent  (accent  aigu),  as  in  ete. 

2.  The  grave  accent  (accent  grave),  as  in  voila,  pere,  oft. 

3.  The  circumflex  accent  (accent  circonflexe),  as  in  ame,  tete,  ile, 
cote,  fut. 

NOTE.  —  None  of  these  marks  serve  to  denote  stress. 

4.  The  cedilla  (cedille),  used  under  c  to  give  it  the  sound  of  s  before 
a,  o  or  u,  as  in  avancais,  lecon,  re$u. 

5.  The  diaeresis  (trema),  to  show  that  the  vowel  bearing  it  is  to  be 
pronounced  separately  from  the  preceding  vowel,  as  in  Noel. 

NOTES.  —  1.  Words  are  commonly  spelled  orally  by  naming  the  letters  as  above, 
together  with  the  other  orthographic  signs,  if  any,  e.g.  bonte  =  be-o-en-te-e  accent 
aigu;  when,  however,  e  has  no  accent  mark,  it  is  often  named  by  the  sound  which  it 
has  in  me,  le,  etc.  (cf.  H,  below),  e.g.  mer=  em-e-er. 

2.  According  to  a  newer  method  of  spelling,  employed  by  some,  the  letters  are 
named  thus:  a,  be,  ce,  de,  e,  fe,  gheu,  heu,  i,  je,  ke,  le,  me,  ne,  o,  pe,  ke,  re,  se,  te, 
u,  ve,  double  ve,  kse,  i,  ze. 

3.  The  names  of  the  letters  are  all  masculine,  according  to  some,  while  others 
make  the  names  of  f,  h,  1,  m,  n,  r,  s,  feminine,  thus:  un  f  or  une  f. 

B.  —  Pronunciation  and  Spelling 

The  pronunciation  will  be  explained,  as  far  as  possible,  by 
comparison  with  English  sounds,  but  it  must  never  be  forgotten 
that  the  sounds  of  any  two  languages  rarely  correspond  ex- 


X  INTRODUCTION 

actly.  Moreover,  the  spelling  of  French,  like  that  of  English, 
is  irregular  and  inconsistent;  hence,  to  avoid  confusion,  a 
phonetic  alphabet  will  be  employed,  in  which  each  sound  is 
represented  by  but  one  symbol,  and  each  symbol  represents 
but  one  sound. 

C.  —  Phonetic  Alphabet 

[The  examples  are  in  ordinary  spelling;  the  heavy  type  indicates  the  letters  which 
correspond  to  the  sounds  of  the  symbols,  and  the  phonetic  transcription  is  given  with- 
in brackets,  as  will  be  done  wherever  used  throughout  the  book.  The  alphabet  em- 
ployed is  that  of  the  Association  Phonetique  Internationale.] 

SYMBOLS         EXAMPLES  SYMBOLS  EXAMPLES 

i  (sign  of  length)  ji  agneau,  digne  [ajio,  diji] 

a  patte,  part  [pat,  pair]  o  beau,  ndtre  [bo,  noitr] 

a  pas,  passe  [pa,  pars]  o  note,  fort  [not,  foir] 

a  tant,  tante  [ta,  tait]  5  bon,  oncle  [bo,  oikl] 

b  beau,  robe  [bo,  rob]  oe  neuf,  neuve  [noef,  noeiv] 

d  dame,  fade  [dam,  fad]  ce  un,  humble  [63)  ceibl] 

e  ete  [ete]  0  peu,  creuse  [p0,  kroiz] 

8  pres,  pere  [pre,  pe:r]  p  pas,  attrape  [pa,  atrap] 

e  pin,  mince  [pe,  meis]  r  drap,  rare  [dra,  ra:r] 

a  le  [b]  s  si,  pense  [si,  pais] 

f  fort,  neuf  [fo:r,  noef]  $  chou,  vache  [$u,  va$] 

g  gant,  longue  [ga,  lo:g]  t  ta,  patte  [ta,  pat] 

h  aha!  [a(h)a]  u  tout,  tour  [tu,  iuir] 

i  ici,  vive  [isi,  vi:v]  y  tu,  mur  [ty,  my:r] 

j  hier,  soleil  [jeir,  soleij]  q  huile  [in'l] 

k  car,  roc  [kar,  rok]  v  va,  cave  [va,  kaiv] 

1  la,  cale  [la,  kal]  w  oui  [wi] 

m  mot,  dame  [mo,  dam]  z  zone,  rose  [zo:n,  roiz] 

n  ni,  une  [ni,  yn]  3  Je,  r°uge  [3©,  101:3] 

NOTE.  —  Before  studying  the  pronunciation  in  detail,  there  are  three  important 
matters  affecting  it  to  be  considered,  namely,  (1)  syllabication,  (2)  stress,  (3)  vowel 
quantity. 

D.  —  Syllabication 

When  consonants  come  between  vowels  in  French  the  fol- 
lowing rules  are  to  be  observed:  — 

1.  A  single  consonant  sound  goes  with  the  following  vowel  sound  to 
form  a  syllable:  a-mi,  fi-nir,  a-gneau,  ta-cher. 


INTRODUCTION  xi 

2.  So  also  combinations  of  consonants  which  may  be  pronounced 
together,  of  which  the  last  consonant  is  1  or  r  (but  not  rl,  Ir) :  e-clai-rer, 
ou-vrir,  pre-scrit. 

3.  Other  combinations  of  consonants  are  divided:  par-ler,  mon-trer, 
per-du,  fac-teur,  mer-cre-di. 

4.  Final  e  (usually  silent  in  prose)  is  regarded  as  forming  a  syllable: 
dou-z(e),  bra-v(e),  fi-n(e),  u-n(e). 

5.  Doubled  letters  have  regularly  only  a  single  sound,  but  are  di- 
vided where  necessary  in  writing:  pa(s)-ser. 

6.  The  prefix  ex-  is  divided  in  speaking,  but  not  in  writing:  ex-a- 
men  (  =  eg-za-men). 

NOTE.  —  Observe  from  the  above  that  French  syllables  end  in  vowel  sounds 
wherever  possible,  and  hence  that  the  consonantal  ending  of  syllables,  so  frequent  in 
English,  must  be  carefully  avoided.  Compare  in  this  respect  ci-te,  ta-bleau  with 
*cit-y,'  'tab-leau.' 

E.  —  Stress 

In  French  the  syllables  of  words  are  uttered  with  almost 
equal  force,  a  very  slight  additional  force  (" stress'7)  being 
given  to  the  last  syllable,  or  to  the  last  but  one,  in  case  the 
word  ends  in  e,  thus:  che-val,  par-ler,  par-Ions,  fa-ta-li-te,  per- 
dre,  ta-ble. 

NOTE.  —  Remember  that  accent  marks  have  nothing  to  do  with  stress. 

F.  —  Vowel  Quantity 

By  vowel  quantity  is  meant  the  length  of  time  consumed  in 
uttering  a  vowel  sound.  The  following  are  the  principal  gen- 
eral rules :  — 

1.  Final  vowel  sounds  (including  nasals)  are  short:  fini,  vie,  parler, 
tableau,  donner,  tant,  sapin. 

2.  All  stressed  vowels  are  long  before  the  stninds  [v],  [z],  [3],  [j], 
[r  final]:  cave  [kaiv],  amuse  [amyiz],  rouge  [mis'],  feuille   [fceij],  faire 
[feir],  livre  [liivr]. 

3.  Of  stressed  vowels  standing  before  other  consonant  sounds,  nasals 
are  long:  grande  [graid],  prince  [preis];  [o]  and  [0]  are  long:  faute  [foit], 
meute  [m0it];  [a]  long  (almost  always):  passe  [pa:s];  [e]  long  or  short: 
reine  [rein],  vienne  [vjen];  other  vowels  regularly  short. 

NOTE. —  It  is  also  possible  to  distinguish  between  "long"  and  "half-long"  vowels 
in  unstressed  syllables,  but  for  simplicity  only  long  vowels  will  be  indicated  in  the 
transcription. 


xii  INTRODUCTION 

G.  —  Pronunciation  of  Vowel  Sounds 

In  pronouncing  French  vowel  sounds  the  following  general 
rules  should  be  carefully  observed:  — 

1.  Never  drawl  a  vowel  sound  or  allow  it  to  become  a  diph- 
thong, as  often  happens  in  English;  French  vowels  are  uniform 
throughout  their  utterance,  the  position  of  the  organs  of  speech 
remaining  unchanged  during  the  whole  continuance  of  the  sound. 

2.  Never   slur  over   or   clip  out  vowel   sounds  (except  e  in 
certain  cases,  see  below),  but  give  each  its  full  value. 

3.  Lip   rounding    (as    observed    in   'who/    'no/    'law')   and 
lip  retraction,  that  is,  drawing  the  corners  of  the  mouth  back> 
ward  as  in  smiling  (to  be  observed  in  'let/  'hat')  are  much 
more  definite  and  energetic  than  in  English. 

NOTE.  —  Some  vowel  sounds  are  denoted  by  a  single  letter;  others  are  denoted  by 
two  or  more  letters;  see  below. 

H.  —  Single  Letters  denoting  Vowel  Sounds 

a  usually  like  a  in  'pat/  but  with  wider  mouth  opening  and  def- 
inite lip  retraction;  the  point  of  the  tongue  is  against  the  lower 
teeth  —  Symbol  [a] :  patte  [pat],  part  [pair],  chat  [$a],  malade 
[malad],  papa  [papa],  mal  [mal]. 

a        always  as  above:  la  [la],  voila  [vwala]. 

a  usually  like  a  in  'ah!'  'father/  but  with  the  mouth  well  open, 
the  lips  neither  rounded  nor  retracted,  and  the  tongue  not 
touching  the  lower  teeth  —  Symbol  [a]:  pate  [pait],  batir 
[batiir],  baton  [bat 5]. 

EXCEPTIONS:  1.  a  before  final  s,  usually  before  medial  s, 
and  also  in  some  rarer  combinations  (but  with  varying  usage) 
=  [a]:  pas  [pa],  passer  [pase],  gagner  [gajie],  nation  [nasjo],  oc- 
casion [okazjo],  bataille  [bataij].  2.  a  in  verb-endings  =  [a] ; 
nous  donnames  [donam],  vous  donnates  [donat]. 

e     almost  always  like  a  in  'patience/  but  with  definite  lip  retrac- 
tion —  Symbol  [e]:  ete  [ete],  alle  [ale],  ne  [ne],  deregle  [deregle]. 

e,  I  always  like  e  in  'let/  but  with  the  mouth  wider  open  and  the 
lips  definitely  retracted  —  Symbol  [e]:  pres  [pre],  pret  [pre], 
pere  [peir],  espece  [espes],  fete  [feit],  meme  [meim],  etes  [eit]. 

e  (1)  like  e  in  'the  boy/  but  with  slight  lip  rounding  —  Symbol 
[a].  It  is  so  pronounced  in  monosyllables  and  in  any  syllable 


INTRODUCTION  xiii 

not  final  before  a  single  consonant  sound  (but  see  note,  be- 
low): me  [ma],  le  [la],  que  [ko],  cheval  [$aval],  tenir  [tani:r], 
tu  seras  [sara],  ceci  [sasi],  mercredi  [merkradi],  appartement 
[apartama].  This  letter  is  commonly  called  e  mute  (e  muet). 

(2)  but  in  the  endings  -er,  -ez  (r,  z  silent),  in  words  like  les,  mes, 
etc.,  in  et  and  a  few  other  words,  e  =  [e]:  donner  [done],  fevrier 
{fevrje],  avez  [ave],  chez  [$e],  les  [le],  ses  [se],  et  [e],  pied  [pje], 
clef  [kle],  etc. 

(3)  it  regularly  has  the  sound  of   [e]  (cf.   e,  above),  before  a 
doubled  consonant,  or  before  two  or  more  consonant  sounds: 
cesser  [sese],  perdre  [perdr],  esperer  [espere] ;  also  before  a  final 
consonant  sound,  and  before  silent  final  t:  avec  [avek],  cet  [set], 
fier  [fjeir],  jouet  [swe]  (but  not  in  et);  also  before  il,  ill:  soleil 
[soleij],  abeille  [abeij];  further,  in  tu  es  [e],  il  est  [e]. 

EXCEPTIONS:  Observe  descendre  [desaidr],  femme  [fam],  and 
adverbs  in  -emment,  e.g.,  prudemment  [prydama].  Words  in 
eff-,  ex-  (before  vowel),  dess-  may  be  pronounced  either  with 
[e]  or  [e] :  effet  [efe  or  efe],  example  [egzaipl  or  egzaipl],  dessert 
[deseir  or  deseir],  but  observe  dessus  [dasy],  dessous  [dasu]  and 
words  like  ressembler  [rasable]. 

Silent  e:  The  letter  e  is  silent  in  prose  (1)  at  the  end  of  words: 
rue  [ry],  donnee  [done],  place  [plas],  ai-je  [ei  3],  table  [tabl], 
vendre  [va:dr];  (2)  within  words  after  a  vowel  sound:  gaiete 
[gete],  remercierons  [ramersiro];  (3)  in  the  verb-endings  -es, 
-ent:  tu  donnes  [don],  ils  donnent  [don],  ils  donnaient  [done]. 

NOTE.  —  In  ordinary  speech  the  [a]  sound  is  usually  slighted  or  wholly 
omitted  in  most  cases  where  consonantal  combinations  resulting  therefrom 
can  be  readily  pronounced,  e.g.  mad(e)moisell(e),  ach(e)ter,  maint(e)nant, 
am(e)ner;  but  mercredi,  apercevant,  lentement,  etc. 

i,  i  like  i  in  'machine/  with  energetic  lip  retraction  (never  like  i  in 
'city')  —  Symbol  [i]:  ici  [isi],  vive  [viiv],  vie  [vi],  il  [il],  ile  [il], 
famille  [famiij]. 

EXCEPTION:  For  i  =  [j],  see  Semi- Vowels,  below. 

o  usually  like  o  in  'not/  but  with  definite  lip  rounding  —  Symbol 
[o]:  note  [not],  dot  [dot],  fort  [fo:r],  robe  [rob],  ecole  [ekol],  votre 
[votr],  etoffe  [etof],  orner  [orne]. 

6  regularly  like  o  in  'ocean/  but  with  much  tenser  lip  rounding 
and  protrusion,  as  for  whistling — Symbol  [o]:  cote  [kote],  vdtre 
[voitr],  bientdt  [bjeto]. 

EXCEPTIONS:  1.  o  =  [o]  as  a  final  sound,  and  in  a  few  other 
words:  mot  [mo],  nos  [no],  gros  [gro];  rose  [ro:z],  chose  [$o:z], 


XIV  INTRODUCTION 

grosse  [grois],  fosse  [fos],  position  [pozisjo],  etc.  2.  6  =  [o]  in 
few  words:  hotel  [otel],  roti  [roti],  etc. 

u,  ft  has  no  English  counterpart;  the  tongue  position  is  the  same  i 
for  [i],  but  with  tense  lip  rounding,  without  protrusion;  be 
acquired  by  prolonging  the  [i]  sound,  meanwhile  rounding  tl 
lips,  or  by  rounding  the  lips  and  bringing  the  tongue  to  t] 
[i]  position  —  Symbol  [y] :  tu  [ty],  mur  [myir],  miir  [myi] 
vu  [vy],  rue  [ry],  utile  [ytil],  fut  [fy],  sur  [syr]. 
EXCEPTION  :  For  u  =  [q],  see  Semi- Vowels,  below. 

y  when  not  beginning  a  syllable,  y  has  the  same  sound  as  i  - 

Symbol  [i]:  syllabe  [silab]. 

EXCEPTION  :  For  y  beginning  a  syllable,  see  Semi-Vowe" 
below. 

7.  —  Combinations  denoting  Vowel  Sounds 

ai,  ai      usually  =  [e],  see  e,  above;   ai  always  thus:  mais  [me],  fai 
[feir],  j'aimais  [erne],  j'aimerais  [emre],  maitre  [meitr]. 

EXCEPTIONS:  1.  ai  =  [e],  as  in  etc,  when  final  in  verb-en 
ings:  je  donnai  [done],  je  donnerai  [donre],  j'ai  [e];  also 
gai  [ge],  and  usually  in  je  sais  [se],  il  salt  [se],  maison  [mez; 
2.  ai  =  [a],  as  in  le,  in  -ais-  of  certain  forms  of  the  verb  fair 
nous  faisons  [fazo],  je  faisais  [faze],  faisant  [foza],  etc. 

au,  eau  regularly  =  [o],  see  6,  above:  autre  [oitr],  aux  [o],  eau  [o],  ch 
vaux  [$avo],  sauter  [sote],  tableau  [tablo],  beau  [bo]. 

EXCEPTIONS  :  au  =  [o],  see  o  above,  in  the  future  and  co 
ditional  of  avoir,  and  in  a  few  other  words:  j'aurai  [or< 
j'aurais  [ore],  etc.,  Paul  [pol],  mauvais  [move],  etc. 

ay,  ey     when  a  final  sound  =  [e]:  je  paye  [pe],  Cambray  [kabre],  N 
[ne] ;  but  a  or  e  in  this  combination  =  [e]  when  the  y  belon 
to    the    next   syllable:   ayez    [eje],   payer   [peje],   grassey 
[graseje]. 
EXCEPTIONS:  pays  [pei],  paysan  [peiza]. 

ei  always  =  [e]:  reine  [rein],  Seine  [se:n]. 

eu,  eu    (1)  a  sound  which  has  no  English  counterpart;  the  tongue  p 
oeu  sition  is  the  same  as  for  [e],  as  in  ete,  with  tense  lip  roundii 

and  protrusion,  as  for  whistling;  to  acquire  the  sound,  pr 
long  [e]  and  round  the  lips,  or  round  the  lips  and  bring  t] 
tongue  to  the  [e]  position  —  Symbol  [0].  Thus  pronoun 
eu,  ceu  as  a  final  sound,  and  also  eu  before  s  and  sometim 
t  within  a  word:  peu  [p0],  feu  [f0],  il  veut  [v0],  heuret 


INTRODUCTION  XV 

[oero],  boeufs  [b0],  creuser  [kr0ze],  meute  [m0:t];  also,  eft  in 
jeune  [30:n],  jeuner  [30ne];  further,  dejeuner  [de30ne]. 

EXCEPTIONS:  eu,  eu  in  tenses  of  avoir  =  [y],  e  being  regarded 
as  silent:  eu  [y],  nous  eumes  [ym],  ils  eurent  [y:r]. 

(2)  also  a  sound  which  has  no  English  counterpart;  the  tongue 
position  is  the  same  as  for  [e],  as  in  pres,  with  definite  lip 
rounding;  best  acquired  by  combining  the  two  positions  as 
explained  for  (1)  above  —  Symbol  [ce].  Thus  pronounce  eu, 
ceu  before  a  final  consonant  sound  (not  s),  and  before  il,  ill: 
neuf  [noef],  neuve  [nceiv],  fleur  [flceir],  leur  [Iceir],  boeuf 
[beef],  feuille  [fceij]. 

ue,  ce     the  same  sound  as  eu   (2),  above:  orgueil  [orgoeij],   cueillir 
[koejiir],  ceil  [ceij]. 

ou,  oft    regularly  like  oo  in  'boot/  but  with  much  tenser  lip  rounding 
oft  and  protrusion,   as  for  whistling  —  Symbol  [u] :  tout   [tu], 

doux  [du],  tour  [tuir],  ou  [u],  ou  [u],  gout  [gu],  gouter  [gute], 
rouge  [ruisl;  observe  aout  [u],  a  being  silent. 

NOTE.  —  For  ou,  oi,  oi,  oe,  oe,  see  also  Semi-Vowels,  below. 

K.  —  The  Nasal  Vowels 

These  sounds  are  quite  foreign  to  English,  and  are  formed 
by  uttering  the  French  vowel  sounds  [a],  [e],  [o],  [oe],  and  at  the 
same  time  allowing  the  soft  palate  to  hang  freely  as  in  breath- 
ing, thus  causing  the  breath  to  escape  partly  through  the  nose. 
Control  of  the  soft  palate  may  be  acquired  by  prolonging  the 
first  part  of  the  sound  of  ang  as  in  'sang/  but  carefully  avoiding 
the  completion  of  the  sound.  It  must  be  especially  noted  that 
there  is  absolutely  no  sound  of  n,  m  or  ng,  in  French  nasal 
vowels,  and  hence  great  care  must  be  taken  neither  to  raise 
the  tongue  nor  close  the  lips  until  the  sound  is  complete. 

The  sign  of  nasality  orthographically  is  a  single  n  or  m  in 
the  same  syllable  with  the  vowel;  thus,  nasal  are:  tant,  sem- 
bler,  fin,  peindre,  plein,  legon,  bon,  tomber,  chacun;  but  if  n  or 
m  is  followed  by  a  vowel,  or  is  doubled,  or  if  mn  occurs,  there 
is  regularly  no  nasality;  thus,  non-nasal  are:  fine,  commune, 
pleine,  ennemi,  innocent,  inutile,  bonne,  condamner. 

NOTE.  —  The  rule  does  not  apply  to  certain  words  having  en-,  enn-,  emm-,  for 
which  see  note,  below.  '  • 


XVI  INTRODUCTION 

an,  am       like  nasalized  [a]  as  described  above  —  Symbof  [a]  :  tant  [taj, 
en,  em  tante  [tait],  gant  [ga],  an  [a],  riande  [vjaid],  champ  [$a],  en 

[a],  encre  [a:kr],  temps  [ta],  sembler  [sable]. 
EXCEPTIONS:  en  =  [e],  see  ain,  etc.,  below,  in  some  forms 

of  tenir,  venir,  as  a  final  sound,  and  in  some  other  words: 

vient  [vje],  tiendrai  [tjedre],  bien  [bje],  examen  [egzame], 

chien  [$je],  Benjamin  [became]. 

NOTE.  —  Observe  ennui  [anqi],  emmener  [dmne],  with  doubled  n,  m, 
and  enivrer  [anivre]. 

ain,  aim     like  nasalized  [e]  as  explained  above  —  Symbol  [e]  :  pain  [pe], 
ein,  eim        faml  [fg^  piem  [p\^}  peindre  [peidr],  Reims  [res],  pin  [pe], 


yn/ym  Prince  [preis],  jardin  fearde],  simple  [seipl],  impossible 
[eposibl],  syntaxe  [setaks],  symbole  [sebol]. 

NOTE.  —  Observe  also  the  same  sound  in  tinmes  [term],  vinmes  [ve:m]. 

on,  om  like  nasalized  [o]  as  explained  above  —  Symbol  [5]  :  bon  [bo], 
oncle  [5:kl],  mon  [mo],  ont  [o],  le£on  [bso],  tomber  [tobe], 
ombre  [oibr],  compter  [kote]. 

EXCEPTION:  on  in  monsieur  =  [o]  :  monsieur  [masj0]. 
un,  um      like  nasalized  [oe]  as  explained  above  —  Symbol  [oe]  :  un  [de], 
eun  chacun   [Jakoa],   emprunter   [aproste],   parfum   [parfce],   a 

jeun  [a  see]. 

oin  for  the  sound  of  oin,  see  Semi-Vowels,  below. 

L.  —  Semi-  Vowels 

When  i,  y,  ou  do  not  of  themselves  form  a  syllable,  but 
come  before  another  vowel  sound  in  the  same  syllable,  they  are 
pronounced  with  greater  rapidity  and  tenseness  of  the  vocal 
organs  concerned,  thus  assuming  a  partially  consonantal  value, 
as  described  below,  thus: 

i,  y  like  very  brief  and  forcible  y  in  'yes'  —  Symbol  [j]:  viande 

[vjaid],  hier  [jeir],  fier  [fjeir],  bien  [bje],  faience  [fajais], 
yeux  [j0],  ayez  [eje],  payer  [peje],  Lyon  [Ijo]. 

ou  like  very  brief  and  tense  w  in  'we/  with  close  lip  rounding 

and  protrusion,  as  for  whistling  —  Symbol  [w]  :  oui  [wi], 
jouer  [3we],  louer  [Iwe],  Louis  [Iwi]. 

NOTE.  —  When  u  of  gu,  qu  (usually  silent)  is  pronounced,  as  it 
sometimes  is,  it  has  the  sound  [w]  before  a  in  some  words:  lingual 
[legwal],  Squateur,  [ekwatoe:r]. 

oi,  oi  have  the  sound  of  [w]+[a]  or  [a],  the  latter  usually  after  r, 
and  in  a  few  other  words:  moi  [mwa],  voici  [vwasi],  boite 


INTRODUCTION  XVli 

[bwait],  froid  [frwa],  roi  [rwa],  trois  [trwa],  croire  [krwair], 
le  bois  [bwa],  le  mois  [mwa],  pois  [pwa],  etc. 

oe,  oe        in  a  few  words  =  [w]  -f  [a]  :  poele  [pwal],  moelle  [mwal],  etc. 
oin  has  the  sound  of  [w]  +  [e]:  loin  [Iwe],  joindre  [s 


u  has  no  counterpart  in  English;  best  acquired  by  substituting 

[y]  for  it  (as  in  tu,  etc.),  and  gradually  increasing  the 
speed  and  force  of  utterance:  lui  [lip],  suis  [sip],  puis 
[pip],  fruit  [frqi],  pluie  [php],  tuile  [tqil],  cuisine  [kipzin], 
nuance  [nqais],  aiguille  [egqiij  or  egipij],  questeur  [kqestceir], 
Quirinal  [kiprinal]. 

NOTE.  —  When  u  of  gu,  qu  (usually  silent)  is  pronounced,  as  it  some- 
times is,  it  commonly  has  this  sound  before  e,  i,  as  in  the  last  three 
examples. 

M.  —  Consonants 

The  sounds  of  the  consonants  can  be  sufficiently  described, 
for  the  most  part,  by  noting  the  differences  between  their  mode 
of  formation  and  that  of  the  nearest  English  sounds,  and  by 
observing  the  following  general  rules:  — 

1.  The  movements  of  the  vocal   organs  are   more   prompt, 
definite  and  vigorous  in  uttering  French  consonants  than  for 
the  corresponding  English  sounds. 

2.  Note  the  distinction  of  "voice,"  which  means  the  hum- 
ming or  droning  sound  produced  by  the  vibration  of  the  vocal 
chords  (as  observed  in  the  v  of  'vine'  as  compared  with  f  of 
'fine'),    and    remember  'that    French   voiced    consonants   are 
much  more  fully  voiced  than  corresponding  English  sounds. 

3.  Final  consonants  are  more  usually  silent,  but  final  c,  f, 
1  and  r  in  monosyllables  are  more  usually  sounded. 

4.  With  slight  exceptions,  French  doubled  consonants  have 
only  a  single  sound. 

NOTE.  —  The  doubling  of  consonant  sounds  is  characteristic  of  very  careful  speech, 
and  only  some  of  the  more  striking  cases  are  mentioned  below. 

b  regularly  like  b.  in  'bit/  'tub/  fully  voiced  —  Symbol  [b]:  bean 
[bo],  robe  [rob],  bon  [bo],  table  [tabl],  l&-bas  [laba],  tomber 
[tobe],  abbe  [abe]. 

EXCEPTION  :  b  has  the  sound  of  p  when  next  before  a  voice- 
less consonant:  absolument  [apsolyma],  obtenir  [optaniir],  etc. 


Xvill  INTRODUCTION 

c  (1)  like  k  in  Hake'  — Symbol  [k].  Thus  c  before  a,  o,  u  or  a 
consonant,  or  when  final:  car  [kar],  ecole  [ekol],  ecouter  [ekute], 
cure  [kyre],  craie  [kre],  classe  [klais],  avec  [avek],  sec  [sek]. 
(2)  c  has  the  same  sound  as  s  (1)  below  when  standing  before  e, 
i,  y  —  Symbol  [s] :  ce  [so],  ceci  [sosi],  avancer  [avase],  ces 
[se],  bicyclette  [bisiklet]. 

EXCEPTION:  c  =  [g]  in  second  [sago]  and  its  derivatives. 
c         always  like  s  (1),  below  —  Symbol  [s]:  j'avancais  [avase],  avan- 
cons  [avaso],  lecon  [laso],  recu  [rosy]. 

NOTE.  —  The  letter  Q  is  used  only  before  a,  o,  u  in  order  to  denote  the 
[s]  sound. 

ch  usually  like  sh  in  'show/  but  is  more  energetically  uttered  — 
Symbol  [$]:  chou  [$u],  vache  [va$],  chaise  [$eiz],  chercher  [$er$e], 
architecte  [ar$itekt]. 

EXCEPTION:  ch  =  [k],  in  some  words  from  Greek:  cholera 
[kolera],  choeur  [kce:r],  etc. 

d  like  d  in  'did/  fully  voiced,  with  the  point  of  the  tongue  thrust 
against  the  lower  teeth,  its  upper  surface  forming  a  closure 
with  the  upper  teeth,  gums  and  palate;  or  with  the  tongue  so 
far  advanced  that  its  point  forms  a  closure  with  the  upper 
teeth  and  gums  —  Symbol  [d] :  dame  [dam],  malade  [malad], 
dans  [da],  donner  [done],  devant  [dava],  viande  [vjaid],  addi- 
tion [adisjo],  sud  [syd]. 

NOTE.  —  It  must  be  observed  that  in  forming  English  d  (as  also  English 
1,  n,  t)  the  point  of  the  tongue  touches  the  roof  of  the  mouth  some  little 
distance  from  the  teeth,  and  that  for  corresponding  French  sounds  the  point 
of  the  tongue  must  be  brought  down  and  advanced  to  the  teeth. 

f  like  f  in  'fife' —  Symbol  [f]:  fort  tfoir],  neuf  [noef],  ceuf  [cef], 
fine  [fin],  frere  [freir],  affaire  [afeir]. 

g  (1)  like  g  in  'gig,'  fully  voiced  —  Symbol  [g].  Thus  g  before  a, 
o,  u  (but  see  gu)  or  a  consonant :  gare  [gair],  gant  [ga],  Gobelin 
[goble],  gout  [gu],  aigu  [egy],  grand  [gra],  glace  [glas]. 
(2)  like  s  in  'measure,'  but  more  energetically  uttered  and  fully 
voiced  —  Symbol  [3].  Thus  g  before  e,  i,  y:  gens  [50],  rouge 
[101:3],  agir  [asiir],  manger  [mase],  gymnase  [simnasz]. 

gu  before  e,  i,  regularly  like  g  (1) :  guerir  [geriir],  longue  [lo:g],  langue 
[la:g],  guide  [gid],  languir  [lagiir],  guere  [geir]. 

ge  always  =  [3]:  je  mangeais  [mase],  mangeons  [maso],  je  mangesi 
[mase],  Georges  [3013]. 

NOTE.  —  ge  must  be  used  to  denote  this  sound  before  a  or  o  in  the  con- 
jugation of  verbs  in  -ger- 


INTRODUCTION  xix 

gn  regularly  somewhat  like  ni  in  '  opinion  '  ;  it  is  formed  by  pressing 
the  upper  middle  surface  of  the  tongue  against  the  roof  of  the 
mouth,  the  tip  being  at  the  same  time  thrust  against  the  back 
surface  of  the  lower  front  teeth  —  Symbol  [ji]  :  agneau  [ajio]> 
digne  [diji],  campagne  [kapaji],  gagner  [gajie],  accompagner 
[akopajie],  magnifique  [majiifik],  regne  [reiji]. 

EXCEPTION:  gn  =  [g]  +  [n]  in  some  learned  words:  cognition 
[kognisjo],  etc. 

h  when  heard  at  all,  which  occurs  only  in  hiatus,  has  a  sounc 
much  weaker  than  h  in  'hat7  —  Symbol  [h]  :  aha!  [a(h)al. 

NOTE.  —  The  letter  h  is  known  as  h  mute  (h  muet)  when  it  gives  rise  to 
elision  and  liaison  (cf.  N,  O,  below),  e.g.  1'homme  [lorn],  les  hommes  [lez 
om],  and  h  aspirate  (h  aspire)  when  it  does  not,  e.g.  le  h6ros  [la  ero],  les  h6ros 
[le  ero].  The  learner  should  regard  h  as  absolutely  silent. 

j  always  has  the  same  sound  as  g  (2),  above  —  Symbol  [3]:  je  [30], 
jeu  [30],  jour  [3u:r];  so  also  je  (e  being  regarded  as  silent);  Jean 


k,  ck  always  like  k  in  Hake'  —  Symbol  [k]:  kilogramme  [kilogram], 
bifteck  [biftek]. 

NOTE.  —  k  is  a  rare  letter  in  French. 

I  regularly  like  1  in  'law/  fully  voiced,  but  with  the  tongue  ad- 

vanced as  for  [d]  —  Symbol  [1]:  la  [la],  cale  [kal],  aller  [ale], 
table  [tabl],  oncle  [5:kl],  ils  [il],  village  [vilais],  fil  [fil]. 

NOTES.  —  1.  The  sound  of  1  is  frequently  doubled  when  written  double-. 
in  initial  syllable:  illegal  [illegal],  illustre  [illystr];  and  by  some  in  words  likt 
intelligent. 

2.  The  1  is  silent  in  fils  [fis]. 

II  the  letters  11  after  i  (not  initial),  and  il  or  ill  after  other  vowels, 
*H1)         have  the  same  sound  as  that  described  for  i  as  a  semi-  vowel 

(cf.  L,  above)  —  Symbol  [j]:  fille  [fiij],  billet  [bije],  briller  [brije], 
soleil  [soleij],  feuille  [fceij],  fauteuil  [fotceij],  ecureuil  [ekyrceij], 
bataille  [bataij],  travail  [travaij],  travailler  [travaje]. 

NOTE.  —  This  sound  of  1  is  called  I  mouille. 

EXCEPTIONS:  mille  [mil],  millier  [milje],  million  [miljo],  ville 
[vil],  village  [vilais],  tranquille  [trakil],  etc. 

m  regularly  like  m  in  'maim/  fully  voiced  —  Symbol  [m]:  meme 
[me:m],  mot  [mo],  dame  [dam],  plume  [plym],  mon  [mo], 
homme  [om],  femme  [fam]. 

EXCEPTIONS  :  m  is  silent  in  automne  [oton],  condamner  [kodcme]. 


XX  INTRODUCTION 

n  regularly  like  n  in  'none/  fully  voiced,  and  with  the  tongue  ad- 
vanced as  for  [d]  —  Symbol  [n] :  non  [no],  ni  [ni],  lunettes  [lynet], 
bonne  [bon],  donner  [done]. 

EXCEPTION:  n  is  silent  in  the  3d  plural  of  verbs:  ils  parlent 
[parl],  ils  vendaient  [vade]. 

p  regularly  like  p  in  'pat/  'rap'  —  Symbol  [p]:  patte  [pafc],  at- 
trape  [atrap],  pere  [pe:r],  papier  [papje],  plume  [plym],  appor- 
ter  [aporte]. 

EXCEPTIONS:  p  is  silent  in  some  words:  sept  [set],  compter 
[kote],  sculpter  [skylte],  etc. 

ph      always  like  f  —  Symbol  [f]:  philosophe  [filozof],  Sophie  [son]. 

q,  qu  the  letter  q  always  and  qu  regularly  =  [k] :  cinq  [sek],  coq  [kok], 
qui  [ki],  que  [ka],  quand  [ka]. 

r  the  sound  of  r  has  no  English  counterpart;  it  is  formed  by  trill- 
ing the  tip  of  the  tongue  against  the  upper  gums,  or  eyen 
against  the  upper  front  teeth.  The  tongue  must,  of  course,  be 
well  advanced,  and  never  retracted  or  turned  upward.  The 
sound  may  be  best  practised  at  first  in  combinations  with  d, 
e.g.  dry,  drip,  drop  (as  in  Scotch  or  Irish  dialect)  and  after- 
wards in  combinations  in  which  it  is  less  easily  pronounced  — 
Symbol  [r]:  drap  [dra],  tres  [tre],  pret  [pre],  rare  [rair],  frere 
[freir],  sceur  [sceir],  sur  [syr],  encre  [aikr],  erreur  [erceir];  r  is 
doubled  in  the  irregular  future  and  conditional  of  certain 
verbs:  je  courrai  [kurre],  il  mourrait  [murre]. 

NOTE.  —  The  above  r  is  called  "lingual"  r  (r  lingual).  Another  r  sound 
(called  in  French  r  uvulaire  =" uvular"  r),  used  especially  in  Paris  and  in 
other  large  cities  and  towns  of  France,  is  formed  by  drawing  the  tongue 
backward  and  elevating  its  root  so  as  to  cause  a  trilling  of  the  uvula,  but 
this  r  is  usually  more  difficult  for  English-speaking  people  to  acquire. 

S  (1)  like  s  in  'see/  but  with  the  tongue  advanced;  sometimes  the 
tip  of  the  tongue  is  thrust  against  the  lower  teeth  —  Symbol 
[s].  Pronounce  s  thus  when  it  begins  a  word  (or  a  word  in  a 
compound)  and  in  general  when  not  between  vowels;  ss  al- 
ways: si  [si],  pense  [pars],  son  [so],  sceur  [sceir],  vraisemblable 
[vresablabl],  classe  [klais],  laisser  [lese],  mars  [mars],  ours  [urs], 
fils  [fis]. 

(2)  like  z  in  'zone/  s  in  'rose'  with  the  tongue  as  for  s  (1), 
fully  voiced  —  Symbol  [z].  Pronounce  s  thus  regularly  be- 
tween vowels:  rose  [ro:z],  chaise  [$e:z],  maison  [mezo],  cousin 
[kuze],  amuser  [amyze]. 


INTRODUCTION  xxi 

sc       always  like  s  (1):  science  [sjais],  scene  [se:n]. 

t         (1)  regularly  like  t  in  'time/  but  with  the  tongue  advanced  as 

for  [d]  —  Symbol  [t]:  ta  [ta],  patte  [pat],  ton  [to],  tes  [te],  tante 

[tait],  e"couter  [ekute],  lettre  [letr],  sept  [set],  huit  [in't]. 

(2)  but  in  words  whose  English  forms  have  the  sh  or  cy  sound 

t  =  [s]:  nation  [nasjo],  patience  [pasjais],  proph6tie  [profesi],  etc. 

NOTE.  —  t  is  always  silent  in  et  (conjunction). 

th       always  like  t  (1):  the  [te],  theatre  [teaitr]. 

v        always  like  v  in  'five/  fully  voiced  —  Symbol  [v]:  va  [va],  cave 
[kav],  voila  [vwala],  vous  [vu],  pauvre  [poivr],  trouver  [truve]. 

w        (1)  like  [v],  in  some  English  and  German  words:  wagon  [vago], 

Wagram  [vagram],  etc. 
(2)  like  [w],  in  some  English  words:  tramway  [tram we],  etc. 

x         (1)  usually  =  [ks] :  extreme  [ekstreim],  excellent  [eksela]. 

(2)  in   ex-  followed   by  a  vowel   x  =  [gz]:   exemple    [egzaipl  or 
egzaipl],  exercice  [egzersis  or  egzersis]. 

EXCEPTIONS:  1.  x  =  [s]  in  dix  [dis],  six  [sis],  soixante  [swasait] 
and  rarer  words.  2.  x  =  [z]  in  deuxieme  [d0zjem],  sixieme 
[sizjem],  dixieme  [dizjem],  dix-huit  [diz  qit],  dix-neuf  [diz  ncef], 
etc. 

z        Hke  s  (2)  above:  onze  [oiz],  zone  [zoin],  gaz  [gaiz]. 

N.  —  Liaison 

In  a  group  of  words  closely  connected  grammatically,  a  final 
consonant  sound  is  usually  joined  in  pronunciation  with  a  follow- 
ing word  beginning  with  a  vowel  or  h  mute  (liaison  =  "linking," 
"joining"):— 

1 .  Certain  consonants  change  their  sound  in  liaison,  thus :  d  =  t,  f  (in 
neuf)  =v,  g  =  k,  s  or  x  =  z;  moreover,  the  n  of  a  nasal  is  joined,  and  the 
nasal  sometimes  loses  its  nasality. 

2.  The  groups  requiring  liaison  are: 

(a)  Article,  noun,  adjective:  un  homme  [ce  nom],  les  autres  plumes 
[le  zoitr  plym],  bon  ami  [bo  nami]. 

(6)  Adjective,  noun:  petit  enfant  [poti  tafa],  petit  s  enfants  [poti 
zafa],  dix  ans  [di  za],  sang  humain  [sa  kyme],  des  hommes  aimables  [de 
zom  zemabl]. 

(c)  Adverb,  adjective  or  adverb:  tres  age  [tre  zase],  fort  habilement 
[for  tabilma]. 


XXll  INTRODUCTION 

(d)  Pronoun,  verb:  vous  avez  [vu  zave],  sont-ils  [so  til],  vend-il  [va 
til],  nous  y  sommes  [nu  zi  som]. 

(e)  Preposition  and  governed  word:  sans  eux  [sa  z0],  chez  un  ami  [$e 
zee  nami]. 

(/)  The  d  of  quand  (not  interrogative):  quand  il  parle  [ka  til  parl]. 
(g)  Forms  of  etre  and  avoir,  especially  as  auxiliaries:  ils  sont  ici  [il 
so  tisi],  ils  etaient  arrives  [il  zete  tarive]. 

(h)  A  few  common  phrases,  e.g.  de  temps  en  temps  [da  to.  za  ta],  etc. 

3.  The  t  of  et,  and  the  m  of  a  nasal  are  never  joined:  lui  et  elle  [Iqi 
e  el],  le  champ  est  a  moi  [b  $a  e  ta  mwa]. 

NOTE.  —  The  sounds  joined  belong  in  pronunciation  to  the  following  word,  as 
shown  above,  but,  for  simplicity,  they  will  be  indicated  in  the  transcriptions  as  final 
of  the  preceding  word,  e.g.  les  hommes  [lez  om]. 

O.  —  Elision 

The  letters  a,  e,  i  are  silent  in  certain  cases  before  a  vowel 
or  h  mute,  and  are  replaced  by  an  apostrophe  (apostrophe) :  — 

1.  Thus  a  of  la  (article  or  pronoun):  Famie  (=la  amie),  Fhuile  (=la 
huile),  nous  1'avons  (=la  avons). 

2.  Thus  e  of  le  (article  or  pronoun),  of  je,  me,  te,  se,  de,  ce,  ne,  que 
(and  some  of  its  compounds):  1'ami  (  =  le  ami),  j'aime  (=je  aime),  il 
m'ecoute  (  =  me  ecoute),  d'un  (  =  de  un),  c'est  (  =  ce  est),  n'a-t-il  (  =  ne 
a-t-il),  qu'est-ce  (  =  que  est-ce),  jusqu'a  (=jusque  a),  etc. 

3.  Thus  i  of  si  before  il  or  ils  (not  elsewhere) :  s'il  ( =si  il). 

P.  —  Punctuation 

The  same  punctuation  marks  are  used  in  French  as  in  Eng- 
lish. 

1.  Their  French  names  are: 
.     point  -       trait  d'union  [  ]  crochets 

virgule  —    tiret,  or  tiret  de          f 

J    accolade 


point  et  virgule  separation 

:     deux  points  .  .  .  points  suspensifs       *     aste*risque 

?     point  d'interrogation  "  "  guillemets                  t    croix  de  renvoi 

!      point  d' exclamation  (  )  parenthese 

2.  They  are  used  as  in  English,  but  the  tiret  (dash)  commonly 
serves  to  denote  a  change  of  speaker:  Qui  est  la?  dis-je.  — Personne. 
—  Quoi !  personne !  —  Personne. 


INTRODUCTION  XXlll 

Q.  —  Capitals 

Capitals  (lettres  majuscules  or  capitales)  are  used  much  as  in 
English.      Note  however  the  following: 

Un  livre  frangais.  A  French  book. 

Get  Anglais  parle  frangais.  That  Englishman  speaks  French. 

II  arrivera  le  mardi  10  mai.           He  will  come  on  Tuesday  the  10** 

of  May. 
Je  dis  ce  que  je  pense.  I  say  what  I  think. 

EXERCISES    ON   PRONUNCIATION 

NOTE.  —  These  exercises  contain,  for  the  most  part,  words  chosen  from  the  first 
twelve  lessons,  and  should  be  frequently  practised,  selecting  a  paragraph  or  two  at  a 
time  for  this  purpose,  with  a  review  of  the  phonetic  principles  involved.  Pronouncing 
in  unison,  either  for  the  whole  class,  or  in  groups,  will  be  found  of  great  advantage. 

1.  [a]  and  [a]  :  la,  ta,  il  a,  la,  avec,  table,  classe,  pas,  pate, 
nous  avons,  Marie,  fernme,  quatre,  arbre,  la-bas,  dame,  papa, 
nioi,  trois,  ami,  village,  boite,  voila,  donnat,  donnames,  occa- 
sion, ecraser. 

2.  [e]  and  [e]  :  ecole,  et,  eleve,  chaise,  crayon,  Seine,  fenetre, 
papier,  j'ai,  avez,  craie,  eglise,  rnes,  ses,  elle,  tu  es,  il  est,  ca- 
hier,  vous  etes,  derriere,  grammaire,  jouer,  mere,  mais,  rneme, 
lunettes,  francais,  lettre,  donnai,  il  sait,  abeille. 

3.  [0]  and  [03]  :  deux,  peu,  monsieur,  sceur,  leur,  professeur, 
feu,  il  veut,  heureux,  neuf,  bceuf,  fleur,  facteur,  creuser,  oeuf s, 
ceil,  il  cueille. 

4.  [a]:  le,  me,  te,  se,  fenetre,  devant,  maintenant,   cheval, 
ceci,  mercredi,  monsieur,  que,  petit,  promenade,  legon,  donnes- 
tu,  faisant,  je  faisais,  faisons,  venir,  tenir,  appeler. 

5.  [i]  and  [y]:  livre,  ils,  Marie,  une,  plume,  sur,  ici,  oui,  qui, 
lunettes,    amuser,   etudier,   eglise,    diligent,   fille,   jolie,   petite, 
amie,  style,  mur,  il  fut,  ile,  nous  etimes,  ils  eurent,  eu. 

6.  [o]  and  [o]:  ecole,  porte,  homme,  nos,  vos,  gros,  encore, 
fort,    joli,  aussi,    pauvre,    chapeau,  votre,  votre,    beau,  alors, 
cocher,  autre,  bonne,  donner,  pomme. 

7.  [u]:  nous,   vous,   cour,   sous,   ou,   ou,   pour,   cousin,  tout, 
beaucoup,  rouge,  gout,  gouter,  le  mois  d'aout. 

8.  [a]  and  [a]:  bas,  an,  tas,  tant,  tate,  tante,  encre,  dans, 


xxiv  INTRODUCTION 

Jean,  devant,  ensemble,  sembler,  enfant,  gant,  champ,  encore, 
content,  grande,  viande. 

9.  [e]  and  [e]:  pret,  pere,  fait,  fin,  paix,  pin,  lait,  lin,  mais, 
main,  jardin,  plein,  simple,  peintre,  plaindre,  besoin,  loin. 

10.  [o]    and   [o]:   bonne,    bon,    personne,    son,    donne,    done, 
crayon,  oncle,  mon,  ton,  onze,  maison,  content,  legon,  monter, 
accompagner,  compter,  tomber. 

11.  [ce]  and  [OB]:  leur,  un,  peur,  chacun,  quelqu'un,  parfum, 
emprunter. 

12.  [i]  and  [j]:  vie,  viande,  si,  sienne,  vienne,  fille,  pi£ce,  bille, 
papier,  cahier,  e*tudier,  crayon,  monsieur,  ayez,  travailler,  tra- 
vail, billet,  abeille,  vieil,  ceil,  yeux. 

13.  [y]  and  [q]:  su,  suis,  lu,  lui,  tulle,  tuile,  saluer,  nuage, 
pluie,  cuisine,  celui,  minuit,  juin,  juillet. 

14.  [u]  and  [w]:  ou,  oui,  loue,  louer,  bout,  boite,  Louis,  voi- 
ture,  mademoiselle,  histoire,  poire,  moi,  tramway. 

15.  [p]  and  [b]:  pas,  bas,  papa,  baba,  pere,  peur,  bon,  bonne, 
porte,  papier,  pu,  bu,  pain,  bain,  obtenir,  apporter,  appeler. 

16.  [t]  and  [d]:  ton,  don,  tant,  dans,  tout,  doux,  quatre,  jar- 
din,  lettre,  mettre,  admettre,  dame,  diligent. 

17.  [f]  and  [v]:  fin,  vin,  feu,  il  veut,  livre,  el£ve,  fr£re,  en- 
fant, avec,  affaire,  geographic,  devant,  pauvre. 

18    [k]  and  [g]:  canne,  gant,  coup,  gout,  que,  quatre,  gargon, 
langue,  craie,  grand,  grammaire,  qui,  expliquer,  exemple. 

19.  [s]  and  [z]:  son,  sa,  zone,  onze,  sous,  sur,  chaise,  e*glise, 
ici,   gargon,   dix,   six,   six   homines,   dixieme,   sixieme,  maison, 
classe,  passer,  legon,  pi£ce,  expliquer,  examen- 

20.  [$]  and  [3]:  champ,  gens,  chaise,  joli,  riche,  image,  poche, 
chapeau,  chercher,  jardin,  Jean,  Georges. 

21.  [1]  and  [n]:  le,  la,  les,  nous,  notre,  nos,  leur,  plume,  table, 
non,  canne,  bonne,  oncle,  village,  ville,  tranquille,  annee,  an- 
noncer,  automne,  aller,  allons,  semblable. 

22.  [b]  and  [m]:  bon,  mon,  bas,  ma,  homme,  femme,  Marie, 
madame,  meme,  mere,  grammaire,  nous  sommes. 

23.  [r]:  drap,  tr£s,  trois,  pres,  grand,   craie,   crayon,  porte, 
forte,  riche,  arbre,  encre,  derrifcre,  jardin,  sur,  fleur,  cour,  sceur. 

NOTE.  —  As  an  additional  exercise,  writing  \rnrds  chosen  from  the  above,  in  pho- 
netic symbols,  is  recommended. 


INTRODUCTION  XXV 


PHONETIC   TRANSCRIPTION   OF  LESSONS   I-X 

I 

A.  1.  yn  sceir.  2.  ce  freir.  3.  ce  liivr.  4.  ce  krejo.  5.  yn  plym. 
6.  yn  tabl.  7.  yn  $eiz.  8.  yn  faneitr.  9.  yn  port.  10.  yn  ekol. 

11.  yn  plym  e  oe  krejo.    12.  yn  tabl  e  yn  $e;z. 

II 

A.  1.  la  kre.  2.  laikr.  3.  la  klais.  4.  lorn.  5.  la  profesoeir. 
6.  1  oikl.  7.  la  fam.  8.  la  tait.  9.  la  papje.  10.  cen  (or  cen)  om  e  yn 
fam.  11.  lez  om  e  le  fam.  12.  cen  eleiv  e  oe  profesceir.  13.  lez  eleiv  e 
le  profesceir.  14.  1  aikr  e  la  papje.  15.  yn  bwait. 

Ill 

A.  1.  3  e  yn  bwait.  2.  vuz  ave  do  krejo.  3.  lez  eleiv  ot  ce  pro- 
fesceir. 4.  nuz  avoz  oen  oikl  e  yn  ta:t.  5.  3a  a  le  d0  plym  daz  yn  bwait. 
6.  mari  a  trwa  liivr  syr  la  tabl.  7.  la  klais  a  katr  faneitr.  8.  la  pro- 
fesceir a  la  kre  e  osi  1  aikr.  9.  la  freir  e  la  sceir  5  d0  liivr.  10.  ty  az  ce 
freir  e  osi  yn  sceir.  11.  3<i  e  mari  5  trwa  freir.  12.  le  fam  5  le  d0 
bwait.  -  13.  nuz  avo  le  d0  kle. 

IV 

A.  1.  le  liivr  so  syr  la  tabl;  il  so  syr  la  tabl.  2.  la  profesceir  e  lez 
eleiv  so  da  la  klais.  3.  la  kuir  e  derjeir  1  ekol.  4.  la  klais  a  yn  port;  el 
a  osi  d0  faneitr.  5.  nu  som  da  la  klais.  6.  vuz  eit  da  la  kuir.  7.  1  arbr 
e  dava  la  port.  8.  il  e  dava  la  port.  9.  33  stn'  dava  la  faneitr.  10.  ty 
e  derjeir  la  tabl.  11.  1  oikl  e  su  1  arbr.  12.  la  tait  et  avek  1  oikl.  13.  il 
sot  asaibl.  14.  le  fam  so  da  la  sarde.  15.  el  sot  asabl  su  lez  arbr. 
16.  la  grameir  e  la  diksjoneir  so  syr  la  tabl. 

V 

A.  1.  la  liivr  da  30.  e  la  plym  da  mari.  2.  la  papje  dy  profesceir  e 
la  liivr  da  1  eleiv.  3.  la  meir  dez  afa.  4.  lez  afa  da  la  fam. 

C.  1.  3&  a  t  il  le  plym?  2.  ki  a  le  krejo?  3.  ave  vu  le  liivr  dy  pro- 
fesceir? 4.  no,  masj0,  il  so  syr  la  tabl.  5.  lez  afa  sot  il  isi?  6.  u  so  le 
plym  dez  eleiv?  7.  mari,  e  ty  la?  8.  u  som  nu  metna?  9.  mari  et  el 
da  la  kuir?  10.  ei  3  la  plym  da  1  eleiv?  11.  lez  eleiv  ot  il  le  krejS? 

12.  la  peir  da  1  afa  et  il  isi?    13.  wi,  madam,  il  et  isi.    14.  u  so  le  meir 
dez  afa?    15.  a  ty  la  kan  dy  masj0?    16.  ki  a  le  ga  da  la  dam?    17.  avo 
nu  le  ga?    18.  u  eit  vu?    19.  u  sqiis?    20.  k  a  t  el  da  la  bwait. 


XXVI  INTRODUCTION 

VI 

A.  Continue  the  following  throughout  the  singular  and  plural:  1.  39 
n  e  pa  la  liivr  do  1  eleiv,  ty  n  a  pa  la  liivr  da  1  eleiv,  etc.    2.  30  na  sqi 
paz  a  1  ekol  osurdqi,  ty  n  e  paz,  etc.    3.  ei  3  1  aikr  e  le  plym?  etc. 

B.  1.  lez  eleiv  na  s5  paz  a  1  ekol;  u  sot  il?    2.  il  s5t  o  $a.    3.  la  mezo 
dy  profesoeir  n  e  paz  isi.    4.  el  e  la  ba  o  vilais.    5.  vu  n  ave  pa  le  liivr; 
u  sot  il?    6.  il  sot  a  la  mezo.    7.  nu  n  avo  pa  le  liivr.    8.  le  dam  na  s5 
paz  a  1  egliiz.    9.  mari,  ty  n  e  paz  a  1  ekol  osurdtn'.     10.  30  na  sui  paz 
o  sarde.    11.  la  tait  n  e  paz  a  la  kapaji  metna.    12.  el  et  a  la  vil  avek 
lez  afa.    13.  1  eleiv  n  a  pa  la  plym,  mez  il  a  la  krejo.    14.  33  n  e  pa  d0 
liivr.    15.  lez  afa  n  o  paz  akoir  1  aikr. 

VII 

A.    Continue,  as  in  Exercise  VI,  A:  1.  33  sin'  kota  (or  kotait),  ty  e, 
etc.    2.  33  sui  gra  (or  graid)  e  foir  (or  fort).    3.  sqii  3 
4    na  sin':  3  pa  ri$?    5.  n  ei  3  paz  yn  graid 


B.  Turn  into  negative  interrogative:  1.  et  el  ri$?    2.  soit  il  isi?    3.  1  oikl 
a  t  il  yn  soli  mezo?    4.  lez  afa  sot  il  kota?    5.  purkwa  e:t  vu  kotait, 
madam?    6.  ave  vuz  yn  graid  mezo?    7.  ei  3  ce  soli  liivr?    8.  a  ty  le 
ga  da  la  dam? 

C.  Answer  in  the  affirmative  and  also  in  the  negative:  1.  n  eit  vu  pa 
lez  afa  da  masj0  ribo?    2.  na  sin'i  3  pa  graid  e  fort?  3.  masj0  ribo  n  et  il 
pa  ri$?    4.  n  ave  vu  pa  do  patit  sceir?    5.  madam  ladyk  n  a  t  el  paz 
yn  graid  mezo?    6.  le  patit  fiij  na  sot  el  paz  isi?    7.  le  pati  garso  n  ot 
il  pa  le  plym?    8.  n  ei  3  pa  la  papje? 

VIII 

A.  Continue:  1.  3  e  mo  livir,  ty  a  to,  etc.  2.  u  e  mon  aikr?  u  e  ton 
aikr?  etc.  3.  33  n  e  pa  ma  plym,  ty  n  a  pa  ta,  etc.  4.  n  ei  3  pa  me 
krejo?  n  a  ty  pa  te?  etc. 

C.  1.  33  sui  la  fiij  da  masj0  lanwair.  2.  la  mezo  da  mo  peir  et  a 
kote  da  la  mezo  da  masj0  ribo.  3.  sa  mezo  e  tre  soli.  4.  notr  mezo  e 
3oli  osi.  5.  no  mezo  so  preska  sablabl.  6.  notr  mez5  a  di  pjes.  7.  loer 
mezo  a  oiz  pjes.  8.  masj0  ribo  e  m5n  o:kl.  9.  il  e  la  freir  da  ma  meir. 
10.  sa  fam  e  ma  tait.  11.  el  e  la  sceir  da  mo  peir.  12.  Icerz  afa  so  no 
para.  13.  mari  ribo  e  ma  patit  kuzin.  14.  so  freir  e  mo  kuze.  15.  nuz 
avo  le  meimz  ami.  16.  kleir  ladyk  e  moj^  ami.  17.  el  et  osi  1  ami  da 
ma  kuzin.  18.  $arl  ladyk  e  mon  ami.  19.  il  et  osi  1  ami  da  35  ribo. 


INTRODUCTION  XXV11 

D.  (Oral.):  I.  ue  lamezoda  votrpeir?  2.  votr  mezoet  el  soli?  3.  ki 
e  masj0  ribo?  4.  do  ki  et  il  la  freir?  5.  madam  ribo  et  el  votr  tait? 
6.  ki  so  vo  d0  kuze?  7.  ki  e  votr  ami?  8.  ki  e  1  ami  da  votr  freir? 
9.  u  e  mon  oitr  plym?  etc. 

IX 

A.  Continue:  1.  39  1  e,  ty  1  a,  etc.    2.  33  lez  e,  etc.    3.  30  na  I  e 
pa,  etc.    4.  3  e  ma  kan,  ty  a  ta  kan,  etc.    5.  3  e  me  ga,  ty  a  te,  etc. 

6.  n  e  :  3  pa  mo  pardasy?  n  a  ty  pa  to?  etc. 

B.  (masj0  dypo  e  Iwi)   1.  Iwi,  u  e  to  pardasy?  —  2.  33  1  e,  mo  peir. 
—  3.  a  ty  to  $apo  osi?  —  4.  wi,  mo  peir,  la  vwasi.    papa,  a  ty  te  ga?  — 
5.  wi,  mo  afa,  30  lez  e  da  ma  po$.  —  6.  e  to  $apo?  —  7.  la  vwala  syr 
la  tabl  la  ba.  —  8.  me  ty  n  a  pa  te  lynet.    u  sot  el?  —  9.  le  vwasi  su 
mo  $apo.    aloir  nuz  avo  tut  noz  afeir?  e  la  vwatyir  et  el  preit?  —  10.  wi, 
papa,  la  vwala  a  la  port.  —  11.  e  la  ko$e  et  il  la?  —  12.  la  vwala  osi  a 
kote  da  la  vwatyir.  —  13.  metna  nu  som  pre  pur  notr  promnad. 

C.  (Oral.)  1.  u  e  votr  pardasy?    2.  ave  vu  votr  $apo?    3.  ave  vuz 
osi  vo  ga?     4.  u  so  le  lynet  da  votr  peir?     5.  ave  vu  tut  voz  afeir? 
6-  eit  vu  pre  metna?    7.  u  e  la  vwatyir?    8.  u  e  la  ko$e?  etc. 

X 

A.  Continue:  1.  sa  leer  don  me  plym,  ty  .  .  .  te  plym,  etc.    2.  e  s  ka 
33  Iqi  don  mo  kaje?  e  s  ka  ty  .  .  .  to  .  .  .?  etc.    3.  33  na  hn*  (or  leer) 
parl  pa,  etc.    4.  e  s  ka  33  na  travaij  pa?  na  travaij  ty  pa?  etc.    5.  sa 
la  (or  le)  ragard,  etc.    6.  33  na  1  (or  lez)  ekut  pa,  etc. 

B.  1.  €  s  ka  vu  travaje,  mez  afa?    2.  wi,  madmwazel,  nu  travajo. 
3.  parl  ty  Iwi?    4.  e  s  ka  ty  parl,  mari?    5.  30,  ty  parl?    6.  wi,  mad- 
mwazel, nu  parlo.    7.  mari  don  la  liivr  a  la  dam.    8.  el  lui  don  la  papje 
osi.    9.  lez  afa  ragard  le  3oliz  imais.     10.  1  estitytris  leer  don  ce  gro 
Ihvr.    11.  33  travaij  boku. 

C.  1.  nu  somz  a  1  ekol.     2.  1  estitytris  don  le  kaje  oz  eleiv.     3.  nu 
travajo.    4.  el  eksplik  la  laso.    5.  nu  1  ekuto.    6.  el  parl  boku  oz  eleiv. 

7.  nu  Iqi  parlo  osi  kalkafwa.     8.  le  -pati  garso  3U  a  preza  da  la  kuir. 
9.  il  parl  e  kri  boku.    10.  le  patit  fi:j  so  su  lez  arbr.     11.  el  ragard  lez 
imai3  daz  ce  gro  liivr.     12.  lez  imais  lez  amyiz  boku.     13.  lez  imais 
amyiz  le  pati  garsoz  osi.    14.  el  loer  don  la  liivr. 


LESSON  I     . 
1.  Indefinite  .Article 

MASCULINE  FEMININE 

un  [OB]  une  [yn]        a,  an,  (as  numeral,  one) 

Un  frere  et  une  soeur.  x    A  brother  and  (a)  sister. 

Un  livre,  une  plume.  A  book,  a  pen. 

1.  There  are  only  two  genders  in  French,  the  masculine  and 
feminine,  as  seen  in  the  examples  above. 

2.  Un  is  used  before  masculine  nouns  and  une  before  femi- 
nine nouns. 

3.  The  indefinite  article  is  repeated  before  each  noun. 


EXERCISE  I 

une  chaise  [$eiz],  a  chair  un  livre  [liivr],  a  book 

un  crayon  [krejo],  a  pencil  une  plume  [plym],  a  pen 

une  ecole  [ekol],  a  school  une  porte  [port],  a  door 

et  [e],  and  une  soeur  [sceir],  a  sister 

une  fenetre  [faneitr],  a  window  une  table  [tabl],  a  table 
un  frere  [freir],  a  brother 

A.  1.  Une  sceur.    2.  Un  frere.    3.  Un  livre.    4.  Un  crayon. 
5.  Une  plume.     6.   Une  table.     7.   Une  chaise.    8.  Une  fenetre. 
9.   Une  porte.     10.   Une  e"cole.     11.   Une  plume  et  un  crayon. 
12.  Une  table  et  une  chaise. 

B.  1.  A  book  and  (a)1  pencil.    2.  A  school.    3.  A  pen  and  (a) 
book.    4.  A  chair  and   (a)   table.     5.  A  window.     6.  A  door. 
7.  One  pen.     8.  A  door  and  (a)  window.     9.  A  table.     10.  One 
book.    11.  A  brother  and  (a)  sister. 

i  English  words  in  parenthesis  to  be  expressed  in  French. 

1 


LESSON    II  [§2 


LESSON  II 
2.  Definite  Article 

MASCULINE  SINGULAR  FEMININE  SINGULAR  PLURAL 

le,P  [b,  1]  la,  P  [la,  1]  les  [le]       the 

Le  frere  et  la  soeur.  The  brother  and  (the)  sister. 

L'ami,  Phomme,  Pecole.  The  friend,  the  man,  the  school. 

Les  livres  et  les  plumes.  The  books  and  (the)  pens. 

Les  amis,  les  homines,  les  e*coles.  The  friends,  the  men,  the  schools. 

1.  Le  is  used  before  a  masculine  singular,  and  la  before  a 
feminine  singular,  beginning  with  a  consonant;  P  is  used  before 
any  singular  beginning  with  a  vowel  or  h  mute,  i.e.  the  e  or 
the  a  is  elided  (cf.  Introd.,  0);  les  is  used  before  any  plural. 

2.  The  definite  article  is  repeated  before  each  noun. 

3.  The  plural  of  nouns  is  regularly  formed  by  adding  s  to 
the  singular. 

EXERCISE  II 

NOTE.  —  The  gender  of  nouns  beginning  with  a  vowel  or  h.  mute  is  indicated  in  the 
vocabularies  by  m.  or  /.;  the  gender  of  all  other  nouns  is  known  by  the  article,  which 
should  be  carefully  learned  along  with  the  noun;  for  the  gender  of  nouns  denoting  inani- 
mate objects  the  rules  in  the  Appendix  may  be  found  useful. 

la  boite  [bwait],  box  Phomme  [om],  man 

la  classe  [klais],  classroom  Poncle  [5:kl],  uncle 

la  craie  [kre],  chalk  le  papier  [papje],  paper 

Peieve  [eleiv],  m.  f.,  pupil  le  professeur1  [profesceir],  teacher 

Pencre  [aikr],  f.,  ink  la  tante  [tait],  aunt 

la  femme  [fam],  woman,  wife 

A.  1.  La  craie.  2.  L'encre.  3.  La  classe.  4.  L'homme. 
5.  Le  professeur.  6.  L'oncle.  7.  La  femme.  8.  La  tante.  9.  Le 
papier.  10.  Un  homme  et  une  femme.  11.  Les  hommes  et  les 
femmes.  12.  Un  eleve  et  un  professeur.  13.  Les  eleves  et  les 
professeurs.  14.  L'encre  et  le  papier.  15.  Une  boite. 

1  A  teacher  in  a  secondary  school,  a  college  or  university  professor. 


§  5]  LESSON  III  3 

B.  1.  The  school.     2.  The  chairs.     3.  The  table.     4.  The  doors 
and  (the)  windows.     5.  The  teachers  and   (the)   pupils.     6.  The 
paper  and  (the)  ink.      7.  The  uncles  and   (the)   aunts.     8.  The 
pencil  and  (the)  chalk.     9.  A  man  and  (a)  woman.     10.  An  uncle 
and  (an)  aunt. 

C.  1.  One  sister  and  one  brother.     2.  The  books  and  paper. 
3.  The  pens  and  ink.     4.  The  school  and   classroom.     5.  The 
women  and  men.     6.  The  tables  and  boxes.     7.  The  man  and  the 
pupil.     8.  The  schools  and  the  classrooms.     9.  A  box  and  a  table. 
10.  The  brothers  and  sisters.     11.  The  schools  and  the  teachers. 
12.  The  pupils,  the  women,  the  uncles,  the  aunts. 

NOTE.  —  For  the  use  in  classes  of  this  and  following  English  exercises, 
see  Preface. 

LESSON  III 

3.  Present  Indicative  of  avoir,  'have* 

j'ai  [3  e],  I  have  nous  avons  [nuz  avo],  we  have 

tu  as  [ty  a],  thou  hast,  you  have  vous  avez    [vuz  ave],  you  have 
il  a    [il  a],  he  (it)  has  ils  ont       [ilz  5],  they  (m.)  have 

elle  a    [el  a],  she  (it)  has  elles  ont       [elz  5],  they  (f.)  have 

NOTE.  —  Observe  the  elision  of  e  in  je  (cf.  Introd.,  0).  A  knowledge 
of  this  principle  will  be  taken  for  granted  henceforth. 

4.  Verb  and  subject  agree  in  number  and  person: 
L'61£ve  a  un  livre.  The  pupil  has  a  book. 
Les  eleves  ont  les  plumes.  The  pupils  have  the  pens. 

5.  Pronouns  in  Address.  —  1.  In  ordinary  formal  address 
vous  =  you,  whether  singular  or  plural. 

2.  But  you  =  tu  in  familiar  or  affectionate  address,  as  usu- 
ally between  members  of  a  family,  very  intimate  friends, 
children;  usually  also  by  grown  persons  to  children,  and 
always  in  addressing  animals  and  things. 

NOTE.  —  Vous  is  to  be  used  in  the  exercises,  unless  rule  2  is  clearly  ap- 
plicable. Foreigners  in  speaking  French  will  rarely  require  *to  use  &vy 
other  form  than  vous. 


4  LESSON  IV  [§6 

EXERCISE  III 

aussi  [osi],  too,  also  Marie  [mari],  Mary 

la  clef  [kle],  key  quatre  [katr],  four 

dans  [da],  in,  within  sur  [syr],  on,  upon 

deux  [d0],  two  trois  [trwa],  three 
Jean  [35],  John 

A.  1.  J'ai  une  boite.    2.  Vous  avez  deux  crayons.    3.  Les  eleven 
ont  un  professeur.    4.  Nous  avons  un  oncle  et  une  tante.    5.  Jean 
a  les  deux  plumes  dans  une  boite.     6.  Marie  a  trois  livres-  sur  la 
table.    7.  La  classe  a  quatre  fenetres.    8.  Le  professeur  a  la  craie 
et  aussi  1'encre.    9.  Le  fr£re  et  la  soeur  ont  deux  livres.    10.  Tu  as 
un  frere  et  aussi  une  soeur.     11.  Jean  et  Marie  ont  trois  freres. 
12.  Les  femmes  ont  les  deux  boites.     13.  Nous  avons  les  deux 
clefs. 

B.  1.  The  teacher  has  three  pupils.     2.  We  have  the  ink  ard 
(the)  pens.    3.  I  have  the  chalk  in  a  box.    4.  You  have  the  books 
and  papers.    5.  The  school  has  three  doors.    6.  You  have  the  paper 
and  the  pen.    7.  John  and  Mary  have  the  pencils.    8.  The  women 
have  four  chairs  and  two  tables.    9.  We  have  two  boxes  on  the 
table.     10.  Mary  has  an  uncle  and  an  aunt. 

C.  1.  She  has  also  a  brother  and  two  sisters.    2.  The  men  have 
three  brothers.    3.  The  classroom  has  two  doors  and  four  windows. 
4.  He  has  one  uncle  and  one  aunt.    5.  The  teachers  have  the  books. 
6.  The  pupils  have  three  teachers.    7.  They  (ra.)  have  the  pen  and 
the  ink.    8.  You  (tu)  have  four  pens  in  the  box.    9.  I  have  also 
four  pens  on  the  table.     10.  We  have  the  pencils  and  the  chalk. 
11.  The  women  have  the  keys. 


LESSON  IV 

6.  Present  Indicative  of  etre,  'be* 

je  suis  [38  sqi],  I  am  nous  soihmes  [nu  som],  we  are 

tu  es     [ty  e],  thou  art,  you  are  vous  etes         [vuz  e':t],  you  are 

il  est    [i  e],  he  (it)  is  ils  sont        [il  so],  they  (m.)  or* 

elle  est    [el  e],  she  (it)  is  elles  sont         [el  so],  they  (f.)  are 


§7]  LESSON  IV  5 

7.  Agreement.  —  1.  The  personal  pronoun  regularly  agrees 
with  its  antecedent  in  gender,  number  and  person;  hence,  in  the 
third  person  il(s)  and  elle(s)  will  stand  both  for  persons  and 
things : 
Ou  est  la  plume?  —  Elle  est  sur       Where  is  the  pen?  —  It  is  on  the 

la  table.  table. 

2.  A  pronoun  referring  to  two  or  more  antecedents  of  dif- 
ferent gender  is  masculine  plural: 

Ils  ( =  Jean  et  Marie)  sont  la.          They  ( =  John  and  Mary)  are  there. 
Ils  ( =  livre  et  plume)  sont  ici.         They*  ( =  book  and  pen)  are  here. 


EXERCISE  IV 

Parbre  [arbr],  m.,  tree  le  dictionnaire  [diksjoneir],  dictionary 

avec  [avek],  with  ensemble  [osaibl],  adv.,  together 

la  cour  [kuir],  yard,  court(yard)  la  grammaire  [grameir],  grammar 

derriere  [derjeir],  behind  le  jardin  fearde],  garden 

devant  [dava],  before,  in  front  of  sous  [su],  under,  below 

A.  1.  Les  livres  sont  sur  la  table;  ils  sont  sur  la  table.    2.  Le 
professeur  et  les  eleves  sont  dans  la  classe.    3.  La  cour  est  derriere 
Fecole.    4.  La  classe  a  une  porte;  elle  a  aussi  deux  fenetres.    5.  Nous 
sommes  dans  la  classe.    6.  Vous  etes  dans  la  cour.    7.  L'arbre  est 
devant  la  porte.    8.  II  est  devant  la  porte.    9.  Je  suis  devant  la 
fenetre.     10.  Tu  es  derriere  la  table.    11.  L'oncle  est  sous  1'arbre. 
12.  La  tante  est  avec  1'oncle.     13.  Ils  sont  ensemble.     14.  Les 
femmes  sont  dans  le  jardin.    15.  Elles  sont  ensemble  sous  les  arbres. 
16.  La  grammaire  et  le  dictionnaire  sont  sur  la  table. 

A 

B.  1.  The  tree  is  in  front  of  the  door.    2.  The  pupils  are  in  the 
yard.     3.  The  yard  has  three  trees.     4.  We  are  in  the  garden. 
5.  It  is  in  front  of  the  school.     6.  The  chair  is  behind  the  door. 
7.  The  pupils  are  together  under  the  trees.    8.  You  are  in  the  class- 
room.   9.  The  aunt  is  with  the  uncle.     10.  They  are  together  in 
the  garden.     11.  The  grammars  are  on  the  table. 

C.  1.  You  (tu)  are  a  pupil.    2.  I  am  with  the  teacher.    3.  We 
have  three  books  and  you  have  two  books.    4.  They  are  on  the 
table.    5.  I  am  the  teacher;  I  am  with  the  pupils.    6.  I  have  three 


6  LESSON  V  [§8 

sisters;  they  are  in  the  classroom.  7.  The  teacher  has  a  pen;  it 
is  on  the  table.  8.  The  pens  are  on  the  table;  they  are  in  a  box. 
9.  John  and  Mary  are  in  the  yard.  10.  They  are  under  the  trees. 
11.  The  dictionary  is  on  the  chair. 


LESSON  V 

8.  Present  Indicative  Interrogative  of  avoir  and  etre 

ai-je?  [e:  3],  have  If  suis-je?  [sijii  3],  am  I? 

as-tu?  [a  ty],  have  you?  es-tu?  [e  ty],  are  you? 

a-t-il?  [a  t  il],  has  he?  est-il?  [et  il],  is  he? 

a-t-elle?  [a  t  el],  has  she?  est-elle?  [et  el],  is  she? 

avons-nous?  [av5  nu],  have  we?  sommes-nous?  [som  nu],  are  we? 

avez-vous?     [ave  vu],  have  you?  etes-vous?         [eit  vu],  are  you? 

ont-ils?          [ot  il],  have  they?  sont-ils?  [sot  il],  are  they? 

ont-elles?       [ot  el],  have  they?  sont-elles?         [sot  el],  are  they? 

1.  In  a  question  the  personal  pronoun  subject  follows  the 
verb  and  is  joined  to  it  by  a  hyphen. 

2.  When  the  third  person  singular  ends  in  a  vowel,  -t-  is  in- 
serted. 

9.  Remarks  on  Interrogation.  —  1.  When  the  subject  of  an 
interrogative  sentence  is  a  noun,  this  noun  usually  comes  be- 
fore the  verb,  and  is  repeated  after  it  in  the  form  of  a  pronoun: 

L'eleve  a-t-il  les  plumes?  Has  the  pupil  (lit.  the  pupil  has  he) 

the  pens? 

2.  Questions  may  also  be  asked  by  means  of  interrogative 
words,  as  in  English: 

Qui  a  1'encre  et  les  plumes?         Who  has  the  ink  and  the  pens? 
Oft  sont  les  plumes?  Where  are  the  pens? 

3.  These  two  forms  of  interrogation  may  be  combined: 
Ou  le  professeur  est-il?  Where  is  the  teacher? 

4.  What?  =  que,  as  direct  object  or  predicate: 
Qu'avez-vous  la?  What  have  you  there? 


§  10]  LESSON  V  7 

10.  Possessive.  —  1.  Possession  is  denoted  by  de  =  of: 
Le  livre  de  Marie.  Mary's  book. 

2.  De  is  repeated  before  each  noun: 

Les  amis  de  Jean  et  d'Albert.  The  friends  of  John  and  Albert. 

3.  De  4-  le  (article)  is  always  contracted  to  du,  and  de  -f-  les 
to  des,  but  de  la,  de  1'  are  not  contracted: 

La  plume  du  frere.  The  brother's  pen. 

Les  plumes  des  soeurs.  The  pens  of  the  sisters. 

But:  La  plume  de  la  soeur,  de  Peleve,  etc. 


EXERCISE  V 

la  canne  [kan],  cane,  stick  le  monsieur  [m9sj0],  gentleman, 

la  dame  [dam],  lady  Sir,  Mr. 

Fenfant  [afa],  m.  f.,  child,  boy,  girl  non  [no],  no 

le  gant  [ga],  glove  oft  [u],  where? 

ici  [isi],  here  oui  [wi],  yes 

la'  [la],  there  le  pere  [pe:r],  father 

madame  [madam],  madam,  Mrs.  qui  [ki],  invar.,  who?  whom? 

maintenant  [metna],  now  que,  qu'  [ka,  k],  invar.,  what? 

la  mere  [mp:r],  mother 

A.  1.  Le  livre  de  Jean  et  la  plume  de  Marie.    2.  Le  papier  du 
professeur  et  le  livre  de  1'eleve.    3.  La  m£re  des  enfants.    4.  Les 
enfants  de  la  femme. 

B.  1.  John's  father.     2.  Mary's  mother.     3.  The  windows  of 
the  school.    4.  The  child's  father.    5.  The  children's  mother. 

C.  1.  Jean  a-t-il  les  plumes?   2.  Qui  a  les  crayons?    3.  Avez-vous 
les  livres  du  professeur?    4.  Non,  monsieur,  ils  sont  sur  la  table. 
5.  Les  enfants  sont-ils  ici?     6.  Ou  sont  les  plumes  des  eleves? 
7.  Marie,  es-tu  la?     8.  Ou  sommes-nous  maintenant?     9.  Marie 
est-elle  dans  la  cour?     10.  Ai-je  la  plume  de  Thieve?     11.  Les 
Sieves  ont-ils  les  crayons?    12.  Le  pere  de  1'enfant  est-il  ici?   13.  Oui, 
madame,  il  est  ici.    14.  Ou  sont  les  meres  des  enfants?    15.  As-tu 
la  canne  du  monsieur?    16.  Qui  a  les  gants  de  la  dame?    17.  Avons- 


8  LESSON  VI  [§  11 

nous  les  gants?    18.  Ou  etes-vous?    19.  Ou  suis-je?    20.  Qu'a-t-elle 
dans  la  boite? 

D.  1.  Turn  orally  into  interrogative    form  all  the  sentences  in 
Exercises  III,  A,  and  IV,  A.    2.  Form  answers  to  the  questions  in 
part  C  of  this  exercise. 

E.  1.  Have  you  the  teacher's  cane?    2.  What  have  you  there? 
3.  Is  Mary  here  now?     4.  Where  is  she?     5.  Where  is  Mary's 
mother?    6.  Are  the  boy's  pens  and  pencils  in  the  box?    7.  Yes, 
madam,  and  the  box  is  on  the  chair.    8.  Have  the  pupils  (m.  or  /.) 
the  books? 

F.  1.  Have  we  the  pupils'  books  now?    2.  Who  has  the  lady's 
gloves?    3.  Mary,  have  you  the  child's  box?    4.  Have  I  the  gentle- 
man's paper?   5.  John,  where  are  you  (tu)!   6.  Are  you  the  teacher's 
uncle?    7.  No,  sir,  I  am  the  teacher's  brother.    8.  Are  the  ladies' 
gloves  here? 


LESSON  VI 

11.  Present  Indicative  Negative  of  avoir  and  etre 

I  have  not,  etc.  I  am  not,  etc. 

je  n'ai  pas         [30  n  e  pa]  je  ne  suis  pas        [39  na  sqi  pa] 

*  tu  n'as  pas        [ty  n  a  pa]  tu   n'es  pas  [ty  n  e  pa] 

il  n'a  pas          [il  n  a  pa]  il    n'est  pas          [il  n  e  pa] 

nous  n'avons  pas  [nu  n  avo  pa]  nous  ne  sommes  pas  [nu  no  som  pa] 

vous  n'avez  pas    [vu  n  ave  pa]  vous    n'e'tes  pas        [vu  n  e:t  pa] 

ils  n'ont  pas      [il  n  5  pa]  ils  ne  sont  pas       [il  na  so  pa] 

NOTE.  —  Elle(s)  will  henceforth  be  omitted  from  the  paradigms. 

1.  With  verbs,  not  =  ne   .  .   .  pas,  the  verb  being  placed 
between  them. 

12.  Place.  —  1.  The  preposition  a  =  to,  at,  in,  often  denotes 
place,  and  must  be  repeated  before  each  noun:    • 

II  est  a  Paris  ou  a  Rome.  He  is  in  Paris  or  (in)  Rome. 


§  12]  LESSON  VI  9 

2.  A  +  le  (article)  is  always  contracted  to  au  and  &  +  les 
to  aux,  but  &  la,  a  P  are  not  contracted: 

Les  enfants  sont  au  jardin.  The  children  are  in  the  garden. 

Les  hommes  sont  aux  champs.        The  men  are  in  the  fields. 
But:  &  la  porte,  &  Pecole,  etc. 

NOTE.  —  The  preposition  dans,  in,  within,  denotes  place  in  a  more  defi- 
nite and  restricted  sense  than  a. 


EXERCISE  VI 

aujourd'hui  [osurdqi],  to-day  la-bas  [la  ba],  over  there,  yonder 

la  campagne  [kapan],  country  mais  [me],  but 

le  champ  [$a],  field  la  maison  [mezo],  house 

Feglise  [egliiz],  f.,  church  le  village  [vilais],  village 

encore  [okoir],  yet,  still/again  la  ville  [vil],  town,  city 

&  la  campagne,  in  the  country;  &  Pecole,  at  (the)  school;  a  Feglise,  at  (the) 
church;  £  la  maison,  at  the  house,  at  home,  home;  &  la  ville,  at  or  in  the 
town,  in  town,  in  the  city 

A.  Continue  the  following  throughout  the  singular  and  plural: 

1.  Je  n'ai  pas  le  livre  de  Feleve,  tu  n'as  pas  le  livre  de  Feleve,  etc. 

2.  Je  ne  suis  pas  a  Fe*cole  aujourd'hui,  tu  n'es  pas,  etc.    3.  Ai-je 
Fen  ere  et  les  plumes?  etc. 

B.  1.  Les  Sieves  ne  sont  pas  a  F£cole;  ou  sont-ils?    2.  Us  sont 
aux  champs.     3.  La  maison  du  professeur  n'est  pas  ici.    4.  Elle 
est  la-bas  au  village.     5.  Vous  n'avez  pas  les  livres;  ou  sont-ils? 
6.  Us  sont  a  la  maison.     7.  Nous  n'avons  pas  les  livres.    8.  Les 
dames  ne  sont  pas  a  l^glise.     9.  Marie,  tu  n'es  pas  a  F£cole  au- 
jourd'hui.     10.  Je  ne  suis  pas  au  jardin.     11.  La  tante  n'est  pas  a 
la  campagne  maintenant.     12.  Elle  est  a  la  ville  avec  les  enfants. 
13.  L'eleve  n'a  pas  la  plume,  mais  il  a  le  crayon.     14.  Je  n'ai  pa&| 
deux  livres.     15.  Les  enfants  n'ont  pas  encore  Fencre. 

C.  Turn  into  negative  form:   1.  Us  sont  aux  champs.    2.  Elle 
est  au  village.     3.  Les  dames  sont  a  la  maison.    4.  L'e"cole  a  trois 
portes.     5.  Les  Sieves  ont  les  papiers.     6.  Nous  sommes  a  la  cam- 
pagne.    7.  Vous  etes  a  Fecole.     8.  Tu  as  les  crayons.    9.  Vous 
avez  les  livres.     10.  Les  enfants  sont  au  jardin. 


10  LESSON  VII  [§  13 

D.  1.  Mary  is  not  at  home;  she  is  at  school.     2.  The  uncle  and 
aunt  are  not  in  the  country.     3.  I  haven't  (have  not)  the  pen- 
cils.    4.   You  haven't  the  book,  but  you  have  the  paper.     5.  I  am 
not  yet  at  home.      6.  You  are  not  at  church  to-day.      7.  You 
haven't  the  lady's  gloves.     8.   The  teacher's  house  is  not  in  the 
village.     9.  We  are  not  yet  home.     10.  John  hasn't  the  teacher's 
chalk.     11.  Who  is  at  the  door?     12.  The  man  is  at  the  door. 

E.  1.  We  haven't  the  children's  boxes.     2.  The  pupils  haven't 
the  chairs.     3.  The  children  are  not  in  the  city.    4.  They  are  in 
the  country  to-day.     5.  Are  the  pupils  at  school?  a  6.  No,  sir,  they 
are  not  at  school.     7.  I  haven't  the  books;  they  are  not  here. 
8.  We  are  not  yet  in  the  country.    9.  The  children  are  not  yet  here. 
10.  John,  have  you  (tu)  not  the  teacher's  chalk?     11.  The  teacher's 
chalk  is  in  the  box. 


LESSON    VII 

13.  Present  Indicative  Interrogative  Negative  of 

avoir  and  &tre 

Have  I  not?  etc.  Am  I  not?  etc. 

n'ai-je  pas?  [n  ei  3  pa]  ne  suis-je  pas?  [na  sin':  3  pa] 

n'as-tu  pas?  [n  a  ty  pa]  n'es-tu  pas?  [n  e  ty  pa] 

n'a-t-il  pas?  [n  a  t  il  pa]  n'est-il  pas?  [n  et  il  pa] 

n'avons-nous  pas?  [n  avo  nu  pa]          ne  sommes-nous  pas?  [no  som  nu  pa] 
n'avez-vous  pas?    [n  ave  vu  pa]  n'£tes-vous  pas?       [n  e:t  vu  pa] 

n'ont-ils  pas?          [n  ot  il  pa]  ne  sont-ils  pas?          [no  sot  il  pa] 

14.  Agreement  of  Adjectives.  —  1.    The  feminine  of  adjec- 
tives is  regularly  formed  by  adding  e  to  the  masculine,  but 
adjectives  in  -e  do  not  change;  the  plural  is  regularly  formed 
by  adding  s  to  the  singular,  as  for  nouns: 

MASC.  FEM.  MASC.  PLUB.  FEM.  PLUB. 

petit  petite  petits  petites          small 

riche  riche  riches  riches  rich 


§14]  LESSON  VII  11 

2.  The  adjective  agrees  in  gender  and  number  with  the 
word  qualified: 

Un  petit  livre;  une  petite  maison.  A  small  book;  a  small  house. 

Les  livres  sont  jolis.  The  books  are  pretty. 

Les  maisons  sont  jolies.  The  houses  are  pretty. 

Ils  (elles)  sont  jolis  (jolies).  They  are  pretty. 

3.  An  adjective  qualifying  two  (or  more)   words  must  be 
plural  masculine  if  both  words  are  masculine  or  of  different 
gender,  and  plural  feminine  if  both  are  feminine: 

Le  pere  et  le  fils  sont  forts.  The  father  and  son  are  strong. 

La  sceur  et  le  frere  sont  grands.       The  sister  and  brother  are  tall. 
La  mere  et  la  fille  sont  jolies.  The  mother  and  daughter  are  pretty. 

4.  Agreement  with  je,  tu,  nous,  vous  is  according  to  sense: 
Nous  sommes  contents  (or  con-      We  are  satisfied. 

tentes). 

EXERCISE  VII 

content  [kota],  satisfied,  pleased,  grand  [gra],  great,  large,  tall 

glad  joli  [30!!],  pretty 

diligent  [dilisa],  diligent," 'indus-  pauvre,  [poivr],  poor 

trious    -  petit  [poti],  small,  little 

la  fille  [fiij],  daughter,  girl  pourquoi  [purkwa],  why? 

fort  [fo:r],  strong  riche  [ri$],  rich 

le  garden  [garso],  boy  tres  [tre],  very 

A.  Continue,  as  in  Exercise  VI,  A:  1.  Je  suis  content (e),  tu  es, 
etc.    2.  Je  suis  grand(e)  et  fort(e).    3.  Suis-je  diligent(e)?    4.  Ne 
suis-je  pas  riche?    5.  N'ai-je  pas  une  grande  maison? 

B.  Turn  into  negative  interrogative:  1.  Est-elle  riche?    2.  Sont-ils 
ici?     3.  L'oncle  a-t-il  une  jolie  maison?     4.  Les  enfants  sont-ils 
contents?     5.  Pourquoi  etes-vous   contente,   madame?     6.  Avez- 
vous  une  grande  maison?    7.  Ai-je  un  joli  livre?    8.  As-tu  les  gants 
de  la  dame? 

C.  Answer  in  the  affirmative  and  also  in  the  negative:  1.  N'etes- 
vous  pas  les  enfants  de  M.  ( =  monsieur)  Ribot?    2.  Ne  suis-je  pas 
grande  et  forte?    3.  M.  Ribot  n'est-il  pas  riche?    4.  N'avez-vous 
pas  deux  petites  sceurs?     5.  Mme  ( =  madame)   Leduc  nVt-elle 


12  LESSON  VIII  [§  15 

pas  une  grande  maison?  6.  Les  petites  filles  ne  sont-elles  pas  ici? 
7.  Les  petits  gardens  n'ont-ils  pas  les  plumes?  8.  N'ai-je  pas  le 
papier?  etc. 

D.  1.  Are  you  not  satisfied?   2.  Why  is  she  not  satisfied?    3.  The 
little  girls  are  not  very  industrious.     4.  Are   John's   aunts   not 
rich?     5.  Are  you  (tu)  not  Mrs.  Ribot's  little  daughter?    6.  Hasn't 
Mr.  Leduc  a  large  house  in  the  village?    7.  Haven't  you  the  little 
boy's  pencil?    8.  Haven't  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Ribot  a  pretty  house  in  the 
country?     9.  Haven't  I  a  large  garden?     10.  Mary,  haven't  you 
the  pbor  girl's  book? 

E.  1.  The  women  are  very  poor.    2.  Mr.  Ribot's  wife  is  very 
rich.    3.  Isn't  Mary's  sister  very  tall?    4.  She  is  tall  and  strong. 
5.  Why  are  you  not  satisfied,  madam?    6.  Are  the  ladies  not  sat- 
isfied?    7.  They  are  satisfied  now.     8.  Are  we  not  industrious? 
9.  You  are  not  very  industrious.    10.  Isn't  Mary's  little  box  very 
pretty? 

LESSON  VIII 

15.  The  Possessive  Adjective 

MASC.  SING.  FEM.  SING.          MASC.  OR  FEM.  PLUB. 

mon  [mo]  ma      [ma]  mes    [me]  my 

ton  [to]  ta       [ta]  tes      [te]  thy,  your 

son  [so]  sa       [sa]  ses     [se]  his,  her,  its,  one's 

notre  [notr]  notre  [notr]  nos     [no]  our 

votre  [votr]  votre  [votr]  vos     [vo]  your 

leur  [loeir]  leur    [loeir]  leurs  [loeir]  their 

16.  Agreement.  —  1.  The  possessive  adjective  agrees  in  gen- 
der and  number  with  the  noun  denoting  the  object  possessed, 
and  must  be  repeated  before  each  noun: 

Mon  oncle  et  ma  tante.  My  uncle  and  (my)  aunt. 

Votre  plume  et  vos  crayons.  Your  pen  and  (your)  pencils. 

2.  Mon,  ton,  son  are  used  instead  of  ma,  ta,  sa  before  fem- 
inines  beginning  with  a  vowel  or  h  mute: 

Mon  amie  (/.);  ton  histoire  (/.).     My  friend;  your  history. 
Son  autre  plume.  His  (her)  other  pen. 


§  16]  LESSON  VIII  13 

3.  Since  son  (sa,  ses)  =  his,,  her,  its,  it  can  be  known  only 
from  the  context  which  is  meant: 

Jean  (Marie)  a  son  livre.  John  (Mary)  has  his  (her)  book. 

Chaque  jour  a  ses  peines.  Each  day  has  its  troubles. 

EXERCISE  VIII 

Pami  [ami],  m.,  friend  dix  [dis],  ten 

Pamie  [ami],  f .,  friend  meme  [me:m],  same 

autre  [o:tr],  adj.,  other  onze  [oiz],  eleven 

Charles  [$arl],  Charles  les  parents  [para],  relatives,  rela- 
Claire  [kleir],  Clara,  Claire  tions,  parents 

le  c6te  [kote],  side  la  piece  [pjes],  room 

le  cousin  [kuze],  m.,  cousin  presque  [presk],  almos* 

la  cousine  [kuzin],  f.,  cousin  semblable  [sablabl],  like,  alike 
a  cote  de,  by  the  side  of,  beside;  de  qui?  whose?  of  whom? 

A.  Continue:  1.  J'ai  mon  livre,  tu  as  ton,  etc.  2.  Ou  est  mon 
encre?  ou  est  ton  encre?  etc.  3.  Je  n'ai  pas  ma  plume,  tu  n'as  pas 
ta,  etc.  4.  N'ai-je  pas  mes  crayons?  n'as-tu  pas  tes?  etc. 

B-.  Make  the  possessive  adjectives  agree:  1.  Le  professeur  a  son 
canne  (craie,  papiers).  2.  Les  Sieves  ont  leur  livres  (plumes). 

3.  J'ai  mon  plume   (encre,  papier).     4.  Nous  avons  noire  gants 
(chaises,    tables).      5.  Vous   avez    wire   plumes    (canne,    papier). 
6.  Marie  a  son  boite  (boites).    7.  As-tu  ton  plume  (encre,  livres)? 

C.  1.  Je  suis  la  fille  de  M.  Lenoir.    2.  La  maison  de  mon  pere 
est  a  cote  de  la  maison  de  M.  Ribot.     3.  Sa  maison  est  tres  jolie. 

4.  Notre  maison  est  jolie  aussi.     5.  Nos  maisons  sont  presque 
semblables.     6.  Notre  maison  a  dix  pieces.     7.  Leur  maison  a 
onze  pieces.    8.  M.  Ribot  est  mon  oncle.    9.  II  est  le  frere  de  ma 
mere.     10.  Sa  femme  est  ma.  tante.     11.  Elle  est  la  sceur  de  mon 
pere.     12.  Leur s  enfants  sont  nos  parents.     13.  Marie  Ribot  est 
ma  petite  cousine.    14.  Son  frere  est  mon  cousin.    15.  Nous  avons 
les  memes  amis.     16.  Claire  Leduc  est  mon  amie.     17.  Elle  est 
aussi  ramie  de  ma  cousine.     18.  Charles  Leduc   est  mon  ami. 
19.  II  est  aussi  I'ami  de  Jean  Ribot. 

D.  (Oral.)    1.  Ou  est  la  maison  de  votre  pere?    2.  Votre  maison 
est-elle  jolie?     3.  Qui  est  M.  Ribot?     4.  De  qui  est-il  le  frere? 


14  LESSON  IX  [§  17 

5.  Mme  Ribot  est-elle  votre  tante?  6.  Qui  sont  vos  deux  cousins? 
7.  Qui  est  votre  amie?  8.  Qui  est  Fami  de  votre  frere?  9.  Ou  est 
mon  autre  plume?  etc. 

E.  1.  Our  house  is  in  the  country.    2.  Your  house  is  beside  our 
house.    3.  Is  their  house  not  very  large?    4.  Are  our  houses  not 
very  pretty?    5.  His  house  has  ten  rooms.    6.  My  house  has  eleven 
rooms.     7.  Your  (thy)  aunt  has  a  house  in  the  village.     8.  Our 
relatives  are  in  (the)  town.    9.  My  mother's  brother  is  my  uncle. 
10.  My  little  sisters  have  the  same  books. 

F.  1.  Your  father's  sister  is  your  aunt.     2.  John  Ribot  is  my 
cousin.    3.  Charles  Leduc  is  my  friend's  (/.)  brother.    4.  Who  is 
your  friend?    5.  Are  your  friends  not  yet  here?    6.  Mary  Ribot 
is  my  cousin.    7.  Where  is  your  (thy)  ink?    8.  Where  is  her  other 
pen?     9.  Where  are  their  other  pens?     10.  The  two  rooms  are 
almost  alike. 

• 

LESSON  IX 

17.  Void,  voil&.  —  When   objects  are  pointed  out  by  look, 
gesture  or  the  like,  here  is,  here  are  =  void  [vwasi],  and  there  is, 
there  are  =  voil&  [vwala],  here  and  there  being  stressed: 

Voici  mon'  ami.  Here  is  my  friend. 

Voila  mes  plumes.  There  are  my  pens. 

NOTE.  —  Voici  (  =  vois  4-  ici)  means  literally  see  here,  voila  (  =  vois  + 
la),  see  there. 

18.  Some  Personal  Pronoun  Objects 

MASC.  SING.  FEM.  SING.  MASC.  OR  FEM.  PLUR. 

le,  P  [la,  l]}  him  or  it       la,  P  [la,  1],  her  or  it        les  [le],  them 

Je  le  blame;  je  Padmire.  /  blame  him;  I  admire  him  (her). 

Je  la  donne;  nous  Pavons.  /  give  it;  we  have  it  (e.'g.  pen). 

Vous  ne  les  avez  pas.  You  haven't  them  (e.g.  books,  pens). 

Ou  est  Marie?  —  La  voila.  Where  is  Mary?  —  There  she  is. 

1.  These  pronouns  denote  the  direct  object  in  the  third  per- 
son, and  have  the  same  forms  as  the  definite  article. 

2.  They  are  placed  before  the  verb  (but  see  §  72),  and  be- 
fore voici  and  voila. 


§18]                                        LESSON  IX                                           15 

EXERCISE  IX 

Paffaire  [afeir],  f.,  affair,  business,  le  pardessus  [pardosy],  overcoat 

thing  la  poche  [po$],  pocket 

alors  [aloir],  then  pour  [pur],  for 

le  chapeau  [$apo],  hat  pret  [pre],  ready 

le  cocker  [ko$e],  coachman,  driver  la  promenade  [promnad],  walk, 

Louis  [Iwi],  Louis  drive 

les  lunettes  [lynet],  f.,  spectacles,  tout  [tu],  f  .  toute,  aZZ,  every 

glasses  la  voiture  [vwatyir],  carriage 

papa  [papa], 


A  Continue:  1.  Je  Fai,  tu  Fas,  etc.  2.  Je  les  ai,  etc.  3.  Je  ne 
Fai  pas,  etc.  4.,  J'ai  ma  canne,  tu  as  ta  canne,  etc.  5.  J'ai  mes 
gants,  tu  as  tes,  etc.  6.  N'ai-je  pas  mon  pardessus?  n'as-tu  pas 
ton,  etc.  * 

B.  (Monsieur  Dupont  et  Louis)  1.  Louis,  ou  est  ton  pardessus?  - 
2.  Je  Fai,  mon  pere.  —  3.  As-tu  ton  chapeau  aussi?  —  4.  Oui,  mon 
pere,  le  voici.    Papa,  as-tu  tes  gants?  —  5.  Oui,  mon  enfant,  je  les 
ai  dans  ma  poche.  —  6.  Et  ton  chapeau?  —  7.  Le  voil&  sur  la 
table  la-bas.  —  8.  Mais  tu  n'as  pas  tes  lunettes.    Ou  sont-elles? 
•  —  9.  Les  voici  sous  mon  chapeau.     Alors  nous  avons  toutes  nos 
affaires?    Et  la  voiture  est-elle  prete?  —  10.  Oui,  papa,  la  voila  & 
la  porte.  —  11.  Et  le  cocher  est-il  la?  —  12.  Le  voila  aussi  &  cote  de 
la  voiture.  —  13.  Maintenant  nous  sommes  prets  pour  notre  pro- 
menade. 

C.  (Oral.)      1.  Ou   est  votre   pardessus?     2.  Avez-vous   votre 
chapeau?    3.  Avez-vous  aussi  vos  gants?    4.  Ou  sont  les  lunettes 
de  votre  pere?     5.  Avez-vous  toutes  vos  affaires?     6.  £tes-vous 
prets  maintenant?     7.  Ou  est  la  voiture?     8.  Ou  est  le  cocher? 
etc. 

D.  1.  Have  you  my  overcoat?    2.  Yes,  sir,  here  it  is.    3.  Where 
are  my  gloves?    4.  There  they  are  on  the  table.    5.  Have  you  your 
hat?   6.  Yes,  sir,  I  have  it.    7.  Where  are  your  glasses?   8.  I  haven't 
them.     9.  Where  is  the  carriage?     10.  There  it  is  at  the  door. 
11.  Where  is  the  coachman?    12.  There  he  is  beside  the  carriage. 
13.  Have  we  all  our  things?    14.  Yes,  papa,  we  have  them.    15.  Are 
we  ready  for  our  drive?    16.  We  are  ready. 


16 


LESSON  X 


[§19 


E.  1.  Who  has  my  ink?  2.  Haven't  you  it?  3.  I  haven't  it. 
4.  John  hasn't  it.  5.  Here  it  is;  I  have  it  now.  6.  Where  are 
your  books?  7.  Haven't  you  them  here?  8.  We  haven't  them 
here  to-day.  9.  There  they  are  on  the  table.  10.  The  teacher's 
chalk  is  here;  here  it  is.  11.  There  is  his  cane;  there  it  is.  12.  My 
pens  are  in  my  box;  here  they  are. 


19. 


LESSON  X 


Present  Indicative  of  donner,  'give* 


1.  AFFIRMATIVE 

• 

I  give,  am  giving,  do  give,  etc. 

je  donne      [39  don] 

tu  donnes    [ty  don] 

il  donne      [il  don] 

nous  donnons  [nu  dono] 

vous  donnez    [vu  done] 

ils  donnent  [il  don] 

3.  INTERROGATIVE 
Am  I  giving?  do  I  give?  etc. 
donne- je?  [done:  3] 

donnes-tu?         [don  ty] 
donne-t-il?         [don  t  il] 
donnons-nous?  [dono  nu] 
donnez-vous?    [done  vu] 
donnent-ils?      [dont  il] 


2.  NEGATIVE 

/  do  not  give,  am  not  giving,  etc. 

je  ne  donne  pas      [39  na  don  pa] 

tu  ne  donnes  pas    [ty  na  don  pa] 

il  ne  donne  pas      [il  na  don  pa] 

nous  ne  donnons  pas  [nu  na  dono  pa] 

vous  ne  donnez  pas    [vu  na  done  pa] 

ils  ne  donnent  pas  [il  na  don  pa] 

4.  NEGATIVE  INTERROGATIVE 
Am  I  not  giving?  do  I  not  give?  etc. 
ne  donne-je  pas?  [no  done:  3  pa] 

ne  donnes-tu  pas?         [no  don  ty  pa] 
ne  donne-t-il  pas?         [no  don  t  il  pa] 
ne  donnons-nous  pas?  [no  dono  nu  pa] 
ne  donnez-vous  pas?    [na  done  vu  pa] 
ne  donnent-ils  pas?  ,    [na  dont  il  pa] 


1.  Conjugate  as  above  all  regular  verbs  in  -er. 

2.  Observe  particularly  that, .most  English  tenses  have   va- 
rious forms,  e.g.   /  give,  I  am  giving,  I  do  give,  while  French 
tenses  have  only  one  form  (in  this  case,  je, donne);  so  also  for 
interrogative  and  negative  forms,  e.g.  does  he  give?  is  he  giving? 
(  =  donne-t-il),  they  are  not  giving,  they  do  not  give  ( =  ils  ne 
donnent  pas). 


LESSON  X 


17 


20.  Interrogation.  —  1.  By  prefixing  est-ce  que  [e  s  ke]  (lit. 
is  it  that?),  any  statement  may  be  turned  into  a  question: 

II  a  ses  gants.  He  has  his  gloves. 

Est-ce  qu'il  a  ses  gants?  Has  he  his  gloves  f 

NOTE.  —  This  form  usually  replaces  the  1st  sing,  interrog.,  e.g.  est-ce 
que  je  donne?  =  donne-je? 

2.  An  interrogative  word,  if  used,  precedes  est-ce  que: 
Qu'est-ce  qu'il  desire?  What  does  he  wish? 

Oft  est-ce  qu'ils  demeurent?  Where  do  they  live? 

3.  Inflection  of  the  voice  may  serve  to  indicate  interrogation: 
Vous  demeurez  ici?  Do  you  live  here? 

21.  Indirect  Object.  —  1.  The  indirect  object  is  denoted  by  £: 
Je  donne  une  plume  a  Jean.  /  give  John  a  pen  (a  pen  to  John). 
Je  parle  aux  eleves.                            /  am  speaking  to  the  pupils. 

2.  With  a  verb,  to  him,  to  her  =  lui  [Iqi],  to  them  =  leur  [lce:r]; 
they  precede  the  verb : 

Je  lui  (leur)  parle.  /  speak  to  him  or  her  (to  them). 


EXERCISE  X 


amuser  [amyze],  amuse 
beaucoup  [boku],  much,  very 

much,  a  great  deal 
le  cahier  [kaje],  exercise  book 
crier  [krie],  cry  out,  shout 
donner  [done],  give,  give  away 
ecouter  [ekute],  listen  (to) 
expliquer  [eksplike],  explain 
gros  [gro],  large,  big 


Pimage  [imais],  f.,  image,  picture 
Pinstitutrice  [estitytris],  f.,  teacher 
jouer  fewe],  play 
la  lecon  [laso],  lesson 
mademoiselle  [madmwazel],  Miss 
parler  [parle],  speak 
quelquefois  [kelkofwa],  sometimes 
regarder  [ragarde],  look  at 
travailler  [travaje],  work 


a  present  [preza],  at  present,  now 

A.  Continue:  1.  Je  leur  donne  mes  plumes,  tu  .  .  .  tes  plumes, 
etc.  2.  Est-ce  que  je  lui  donne  mon  cahier?  est-ce  que  tu  .  .  .  ton 
.  .  .?  etc.  3.  Je  ne  lui  (or  leur)  parle  pas,  etc.  4.  Est-ce  que  je  ne 
travaille  pas?  ne  travailles-tu  pas?  etc.  5.  Je  le  (or  les)  regarde, 
etc.  6.  Je  ne  F  (or  les)  6coute  pas,  etc. 


18  LESSON  X  [§  21 

B.  1.  Est-ce  que  vous  travaillez,  mes  enfants?    2.  Oui,  made- 
moiselle, nous  travaillons.     3.  Parles-tu,  Louis?    4.  Est-ce  que  tu 
paries,  Marie?     5.  Jean,  tu  paries?     6.  Oui,  mademoiselle,  nous 
parlons.     7.  Marie  donne  le  livre  a  la  dame.     8.  Elle  lui  donne  le 
papier  aussi.     9.  Les  enfants  regardent  les  jolies  images.     10.  L'in- 
stitutrice  leur  donne  un  gros  livre.     11.  Je  travaille  beaucoup. 
12.  Turn  sentences  1-11  into  negative  form. 

C.  1.  Nous  sommes  a  1'ecole.     2.  L'institutrice  donne  les  cahiers 
aux  eleves.  3.  Nous  travaillons.   4.  Elle  explique  la  legon.   5.  Nous 
Fecoutons.     6.  Elle  parle  beaucoup  aux  Sieves.     7.  Nous  lui  parlons 
aussi  quelquefois.     8.  Les  petits  gargons  jouent  a  present  dans  la 
cour.     9.  Us  parlent  et  crient  beaucoup.     10.  Les  petites  filles  sont 
sous  les  arbres.     11.  E lies  regardent  les  images  dans  un  gros  livre, 
12.  Les  images  les  amusent  beaucoup.     13.  Les  images  amusent  les 
petits  gargons  aussi.     14.  Elles  leur  donnent  le  livre. 

D.  1.  I  am  speaking.     2.  You  are  not  working.     3.  John  is 
not  listening.    4.  Doesn't  the  pupil  listen?    5.  The  pupils  speak 
to  the  teacher;  they  speak  to  her.    6.  She  speaks  to  them.    7.  Are 
you  not  working?    8.  We  work  a  great  deal.    9.  We  give  the  little 
boys  our  book.     10.  Where  are  you?     11.  What  are  you  looking 
at?     12.  We  are  looking  at  our  exercise  books.     13.  What  are 
the  little  girls  looking  at?     14.  They  are  looking  at  the  pictures. 
15.  We  are  listening  to  the  children.     16.  They  are  playing  in 
the  yard. 

E.  1.  Who  is  speaking  to  the  pupils?    2.  The  teacher  (/.)  is 
speaking  to  them.    3.  Are  the  children  playing  in  the  yard  now? 
4.  Yes,  miss,  they  are  playing  under  the  trees.    5.  The  teacher  is 
explaining  our  lessons.    6.  We  are  listening  to  her.    7.  Are  the  boys 
not  shouting  a  great  deal?     8.  We  are  amusing  the  little  boys. 
9.  We  give  them  our  pictures.    10.  Are  the  little  boys  not  working? 
11.  No,  sir,  they  are  not  working.     12.  Do  the  men  work  much? 
13.  Yes,  sir,  they  work  in  the  fields.      14.  Are  the  grammars  not 
on  the  table?     15.  Yes,  they  are  on  the  table  with  the  dic- 
tionary. 


123] 


LESSON  XI 


19 


22. 


LESSON  XI 


Conjunctive  Personal  Pronouns 


SINGULAR 

me  [ma],  me,  (to)  me 


PLUBAL 
nous  [mi],  us,  (to)  us 


te  [ta],  thee,  you,  (to)  thee,  (to)  you     vous  [vu],  you,  (to)  you 

le  [la],  m.,  him,  it 

la  [la],  f.,  her,  it 

lui  [Iqi],  m.  f.,  (to)  him,  (to)  her 


les  [le],  m.  f .,  them 

leur  [loeir],  m.  f.,  (to)  them 


•],  m.  f.,  himself,  herself,  it-     se  [sa],  m.  f.,  themselves,  (to)  them- 


self,  (to)  himself,  etc. 


selves 


(a)  These  forms  are  called  "conjunctive"  because  they  are  used  along 
with  verbs  as  objects. 

(6)  Le,  la,  les  (§  18),  lui,  leur  (§  21,  2)  are  repeated  here  for  completeness. 

23.  Use  of  Conjunctive  Objects 

II  me  (te,  nous,  vous)  frappe.  He  strikes  me  (you,  us,  you). 

II  me'  (te,  nous,  vous)  parle.  He  speaks  to  me  (to  you,  etc.). 

Ma  mere  nVaime  (t'aime).  My  mother  loves  me  (loves  you). 

II  se  coupe;  il  se  dit.  He  cuts  himself;  he  says  to  himself. 

1.  Me,  te,  se,  nous,  vous  serve  both  as  direct  and  as  indirect 
objects  of  verbs. 

2.  All  conjunctive  personal  pronoun  objects  precede  the  verb, 
unless  it  be  an  imperative  affirmative  (§  72). 


EXERCISE  XI 


accompagner  [akopajie],  accom- 
pany, go  (come)  with 

aimable  [emabl],  amiable,  kind 

apporter  [aporte],  bring 

la  bonne  [bon],  servant,  maid 

la  carte  [kart],  map 

chercher  [$er$e],  seek,  look 
for 

le  facteur  [faktceir],  postman, 
letter-carrier 


laisser  [lese],  let,  leave 
la  lettre  [letr],  letter 
montrer  [motre],  show 
preter  [prete],  lend 
quand  [ka],  when 
remercier  [romersje],  thank 
rencontrer  [rakotre],  meet 
saluer  [salije],  salute,  bow  to,  etc*. 
souvent  [suva],  often 
trouver  [truve],  find 


20  LESSON   XI  [§23 

A.  Continue:  1.  II  me  cherche,  il  te,  etc.    2.  Les  images  m'a- 
musent,  .  .  .  t'amusent,  etc.    3.  Mon  frere  me  prete  ses  livres,  .  .  . 
te  prete  ses  livres,  etc.    4.  Mes  amis  m'accompagnent  a  1'ecole, 
.  .  .  t'accompagnent,  etc.     5.  Le  professeur  m'explique  la  lec.on, 
.  .  .  t'explique,  etc. 

B.  1.  Mon  frere  m 'apporte  le  gros  livre.    2/  II  me  montre  les 
images.    3.  Les  images  du  livre   t'amusent-elles?    4.  Elles   m'a- 
musent  beaucoup.    5.  Votre  pere  nous  cherche.    6.  II  nous  accom- 
pagne  a  Fecole.     7.  Le  professeur  vous  montre  la  carte.    8.  Je 
salue  le  professeur  quand  je  le  rencontre.    9.  II  me  salue  aussi. 

10.  Louis  me  prete   souvent   ses  livres.     11.  II  est  tres  aimable. 
12.  Vous  prete-t-il  ses  livres  aussi?     13.  Oui,  et  je  lui  prete  mes 
plumesVet  mon  encre.     14.  Le  facteur  apporte  les  lettres.     15.  II 
les  laisse  dans  la  boite  a  la  porte.    16.  La  bonne  les  trouve  dans 
la  boite  et  les  apporte  a  mon  pere.    17.  II  la  remercie.    18.  Les 
enfants  s'amusent  dans  le  jardin. 

C.  (Oral.)    1.  Qui  m'apporte  le  gros  livre?    2.  Qui  nous  montre 
les  images?    3.  Qu'est-ce  qu'il  vous  montre?    4.  Saluez-vous  votre  , 
professeur?    5.  Quand  est-ce  qu'il  nous  salue?    6.  Qu'est-ce  que 
tu   pretes  a  Louis?    7.  Qui  m'apporte  les  lettres?    8.  A  qui  les 
donne-t-elle?    9.  Votre  pere  la  remercie-t-il?    10.  Est-elle  contente? 

11.  Ou  les  enfants  s'amusent-ils?  etc. 

D.  1.  I  bring  him  the  big  book.    2.  Who  is  showing  us  the  pic- 
tures?   3.  Don't  the  pictures  amuse  you?    4.  Yes,  Miss  Bibot,  they 
amuse  me  [very]1  much.    5.  My  brother  is  looking  for  you  (thee). 
6.  The  teacher  is  explaining  the  map  to  us.    7.  He  explains  the  map 

'  to  them  also.    8.  I  bow  to  him  when  I  meet  him.    9.  He  bows  to 
me  when  he  meets  me. 

E.  1.  I  am  lending  you  (thee)  my  books.     2.  What  does  the 
postman  bring  us?     3.  He  brings  the  letters  and  leaves  them  on 
the  table  at  the  door.    4.  Here  are  your  letters  on  the  table.    5.  The 
maid  brings  us  the  letters.    6.  We  thank  her.    7.  Are  the  children 
not  amusing  themselves?     8.  Do  we  not  bring  her  the  book? 
9.  There  are  our  sisters;  we  bring  them  the  pictures, 

i  Words  in  brackets  to  be  omitted  in  translating. 


§25]  LESSON  XII  21 


LESSON  XII 

24.  The  General  Noun.  —  A  noun  used  in  a  general  sense 
regularly  takes  the  definite  article  in  French,  though  not  usu- 
ally in  English: 

La  vie  est  courte.  Life  is  short. 

L'homme  est  mortel.  Man  is  mortal. 

J'aime  les  Frangais.  /  like  Frenchmen  (the  French). 

Le  fer  est  dur.  Iron  is  hard. 

Le  cheval  est  tr£s  utile.  The  horse  is  very  useful. 

25.  The  Partitive  Noun.  —  1.  /Some,  any,  either  expressed  or 
understood  with  a  noun  =  de  +  the  definite  article: 

J'ai  de  la  craie,  du  papier.  /  have  (some)  chalk,  (some)  paper. 

Avez-vous  de  Pencre?  Have  you  (any)  ink? 

A-t-il  des  freres  (amis)?  H as  he  any  brothers  .(friends)? 

2.  Thus  is  formed  the  plural  of  a  noun  with  un(e) : 
Un  livre;  des  livres.  A  book;  (some)  books. 

3.  The  general  and  partitive  sense  must  be  distinguished: 

Les  arbres  ont  des  feuilles.  Trees  (gen.)  have  leaves  (part.). 

Les  chiens  sont  des  animaux.          Dogs  are  animals. 


EXERCISE  XII 

aimer  [erne],  love,  like,  be  fond  of  la  geographic  feeografi],  geography 

Pamusement  [amyzma],  m.,  Phistoire  [istwair],  f.,  history,  story 

amusement  la  langue  [la:g],  tongue,  language 

Pargent  [arsa],  m.,  silver,  money  la  lecture  [lektyir],  reading 

la  bille  [biij],  marble  (plaything)  la  poire  [pwair],  pear 

etudier  [etydje],  study  la  pomme  [pom],  apple 

facilement  [f  asilma],  easily,  readily  la  toupie  [tupi],  top 

le  francais  [frase],  (the)  French  la  viande  [vjaid],  meat 

(language) 

j'aime  le  francais,  7  am  fond  of  (like)  French;  but  note:  parlez-vous 
francais?  do  you  speak  French? 


22  LESSON  XII  [§25 

A  Continue:  1.  J'aime  la  lecture,  tu  .  .  .  etc.  2.  Est-ce  que  je 
parle  frangais?  parles-tu  .  .  .  etc.  3.  Je  ne  parle  pas  frangais,  tu 
ne  .  .  .  etc.  4.  Je  leur  donne  des  cahiers  et  des  plumes,  tu  leur 
donnes  .  .  .  etc.  5.  J'aime  les  pommes  et  les  poires,  tu  .  .  .  etci 
6.  J'ai  de  1'encre  et  du  papier,  tu  as  .  .  .  etc.  7.  J'aime  1'argent,  tu 
aimes  .  .  .  etc.  8.  J'ai  de  1'argent  dans  ma  poche,  tu  as  .  .  .  dans 
ta,  etc. 

B.  1.  J'aime  la  viande.    2.  Avez-vous  de  la  viande?    3.  Aimez- 
vous  les  pommes?   4.  Je  les  aime  beaucoup.    5.  Les  hommes  aiment- 
ils  1'argent?    6.  Us  raiment.    7.  Avez-vous  de  1'argent  dans  votre 
poche?     8.  Je  lui  prete  de  1'argent.     9.  Les  enfants  etudient-ils 
la  geographic  et  1'histoire?    10.  N'aiment-ils  pas  la  lecture?    11.  Ils 
1'aiment  beaucoup.     12.  Avez-vous  des  pommes?     13.  Non,  mon- 
sieur, mais  nous  avons  des  poires. 

C.  Complete  the  partitive  form:  1.  J'ai  d  .  .  .  encre,  d  .  .  .  plumes 
et  d  . . .  papier.     2.  A-t-il  d  .  .  .  craie  et  d  .  .  .  crayons?    3.  Nous 
avons  d  . .  .  freres  et  d  .  .  .  sceurs.    4.  Elle  ad...  argent.    5.  Ils 
ont  d  .  .  .  pommes.    6.  A-t-elle  d  .  . .  viande?    7.  Nous  avons  d  . . . 
arbres  dans  notre  cour. 

D.  1.  Mes  freres  et  mes  so3urs  e*tudient  leurs  legons.     2.  Ils 
aiment  beaucoup  Fhistoire  et  la  geographic.    3.  Ils  aiment  aussi  le 
frangais.    4.  A  l'£cole  nous  parlons  frangais.    5.  Les  enfants  parlent 
facilement  les  langues  quand  le  professeur  les  parle.    6.  Les  eleves 
ont  des  amusements  a  1'ecole.    7.  Les  petits  gargons  ont  des  billes 
et  des  toupies.    8.  Les  petites  filles  ont  des  livres.    9.  Elles  aiment 
beaucoup  la  lecture.    10.  Elles  trouvent  aussi  des  images  dans  les 
livres.    11.  Les  images  amusent  les  enfants. 

E.  1.  Have  you  any  apples?    2.  Do  you  like  apples?    3.  I  don't 
like  them.    4.  We  like  reading.     5.  We  are  studying  history  and 
geography.     6.  I  have  some  money  in  my  pocket.     7.  Are  you 
fond  of  money?     8.  I  am  giving  them  some  money.     9.  Children 
like  apples.  10.  Has  John  any  apples?  11.  Has  he  any  ink?  12.  No, 
madam,,  but  I  am  lending  him  some  paper  and  ink. 

F.  1.  We  like  reading.     2.  Little  boys  like  marbles.     3.  They 
have  marbles  and  tops.    4.  Our  teacher  speaks  French.    5.  Do  you 
speak  French?   6.  Don't  you  like  French?   7.  Have  you  any  amuse- 


§27]  LESSON  XIII  23 

ments  at  school?  8.  Little  girls  like  books.  9.  The  little  girls  have 
books.  10.  Books  amuse  them.  11.  Do  not  men  love  money? 
12.  Have  you  any  money  in  your  pocket?  13.  Are  you  studying 
history  and  the  languages? 


LESSON  XIII 

26.  Quantity.  —  1.  The  word  limited  by  a  noun  or  adverb  of 
quantity  is  preceded  by  de,  usually  without  article: 

Une  livre  de  viande.  A  pound  of  meat. 

Beaucoup  de  the.  A  great  deal  of  tea  (much  tea). 

Beaucoup  de  pommes  (d'amis).  A  great  many  apples  (friends). 
Un  peu  de  pain;  trop  de  pain.  A  little  bread;  too  much  bread. 
Assez  d'argent.  Enough  (of)  money  or  money 

enough. 

2.  But  observe  the  following  expressions: 
La  plupart  des  hommes.  (The)  most  (of  the)  men. 

J'ai  bien  des  amis  ici.  /  have  many  friends  here. 

Desire-t-il  encore  des  pommes?        Does  he  wish  some  more  apples? 

27.  Use  of  en.  —  1.  Some  or  any,  as  a  pronoun  =  en  [a]  (lit. 
of  ~it,  of  them) ;  it  must  be  used  to  replace  a  partitive  noun,  even 
though  some,  any,  be  omitted  in  English: 

A-t-il  de  1'encre?  —  II  en  a.  Has  he  any  ink?  — He  has  (some). 

Desire-t-il  du  the?  —  II  en  desire.    Does  he  wish  tea?  —  He  does. 

2.  Similarly  en  must  replace  a  noun  preceded  by  a  numeral, 
or  the  governed  word  of  an  expression  of  quantity: 

A-t-elle  une  plume?  Has  she  a  pen? 

Elle  en  a  une  (deux,  etc.).  She  has  one  (two,  etc.). 

Elle  en  a  beaucoup.  She  has  a  great  many. 

3.  Besides  the  above  uses,  observe  that  en  in  general  has  the 
force  of  de  ( =  of,  from,  with,  etc.)  +  a  noun  or  pronoun: 

J'en  suis  content.  /  am  pleased  with  (glad  of)  it  or 

them. 

4.  En  has  the  same  position  as  a  conjunctive  pronoun  object 
(cf.  §  23,  2). 


24  LESSON  XIII  [§27 

EXERCISE  XIII 

assez  [ase],  enough  la  livre  fliivr],  pound 

1'automne  [oton],  m.  or  f .,  autumn  ramasser  [ramase],  pick  up,  gather 

cent  [sa],  a  hundred  tester  [reste],  remain,  stay 

combien  [kobje],  how  much  (many)'!  le  sac  [sak],  bag,  sack 

desirer  [dezire],  desire,  wish,  want  souffier  [sufle],  blow 

Pecureuil  [ekyroeij],  m.,  squirrel  le  the  [te],  tea 

en  [a],  in  tomber  [tobe],  fall 

la  faine  [fern],  beechnut  le  vent  [va],  wind 

la  feuille  [foeij],  leaf  le  verger  [verse],  orchard 

(un)  peu  [p0],  (a)  little,  few;  en  automne  [an  oton],  in  autumn 

NOTE.  —  Forms  like  /  do,  I  have,  with  a  verb  understood,  must  not  be 
used  in  French;  the  sentence  must  be  complete. 

A.  Continue:  1.  J'ai  beaucoup  de  pommes,  tu,  etc.    2.  J'en  ai 
beaucoup,  etc.    3.  Je  n'en  ai  pas  beaucoup,  etc.    4.  J'en  ai  dix,  etc. 
5.  J'ai  peu  d'argent,'  etc.     6.  J'en  ai  peu,  etc.    7.  J'ai  encore  de 
1'argent,  etc.    8.  J'ai  bien  de  1'argent,  etc.    9.  J'en  ai  encore  beau- 
coup,  etc.    10.  J'ai  bien  des  amis,  etc. 

B.  1.  Avez-vous  assez  d'argent?    2.  J'en  ai  assez.    3.  Que  de*- 
sirez-vous?    4.  Je  desire  une  livre  de  the.    5.  Avez-vous  beaucoup 
de  pommes?    6.  Nous  n'en  avons  pas  beaucoup.    7.  Nous  avons 
peu  de  pommes.    8.  Nous  en  avons  tres  peu.    9.  Combien  en  avez- 
vous?     10.  J'en  ai  trois.     11.  Desirez-vous  encore  des  pommes? 
12.  J'en  desire  encore. 

C.  1.  Nous  sommes  en  automne.    2.  Peu  de  feuilles  restent  sur 
les  arbres.     3.  Le  vent  souffle  et  beaucoup  de  faines  tombent. 
4.  Les  ecureuils  en  ramassent  beaucoup.     5.  Les  enfants  aiment 
les  faines  et  en  ramassent  aussi.    6.  Dans  son  verger  M.  Dupont 
a  cent  sacs  de  pommes.    7.  II  en  donne  dix  sacs  a  son  frere.    8.  Son 
frere  en  donne  a  ses  enfants.    9.  La  plupart  des  enfants  aiment  les 
pommes.     10.  Les  autres  enfants  en  desirent  aussi.     11.  Les  en- 
fants de  M.  Dupont  en  donnent  &  leurs  petits  amis. 

D.  (Oral.)     1.  Quand  les  feuilles  tombent-elles?     2.  Qu'est-ce 
que  les  ecureuils  ramassent?    3.  Est-ce  que  les  enfants  ramassegt 
des  faines?    4.  Qu'est-ce  que  vous  avez  dans  votre  verger?    5.  En 
avez-vous  beaucoup?    6.  A  qui  en  donnez-vous?    7.  fites-vous  con- 
tents de  votre  verger?    8.  Combien  de  pommes  avez-vous?  etc. 


§  29]  LESSON  XIV  25 

E.  1.  Have  you  many  apples?     2.  We  have  a  great  many. 
3.  Have  you  any  more  apples?    4.  Yes,  sir,  we  have  some  more. 
5.  What  do  the  squirrels  pick  up  in  autumn?    6.  They  pick  up  a 
great  many  beechnuts.    7.  Our  friends  have  four  sacks  of  apples. 
8.  We  have  a  great  many  also.    9.  Have  your  friends  much  money? 
10.  They  have  (=  they  have  much  of  it).   .11.  Has  the  little  boy 
any  pears?     12.  He  has.     13.  We  are  picking  up  pears  in  the 
orchard.      14.  Are  you  picking  up  any?     15.  Do  you  give  any 
[away]  to  your  relatives?    16.  We  give  some  away  to  our  cousins. 

F.  1.  Do  you  wish  any  money?   2.  No,  sir,  I  have  some.   3.  Have 
you  much?    4.  I  have  enough.    5.  Has  Louis  enough?    6.  He  has 

•  (enough  of  it). .  7.  How  many  apples  have  you?  8.  How  many 
has  John?  9.  I  have  one; 'John  has  two.  10.  You  haven't  enough; 
you  have  very  few.  11.  Here  are  some  more.  12.  Here  are  some 
on  the  table.  13.  Do  most  men  love  money?  14.  They  do  ( =  they 
love  it). 

LESSON  XIV 

28.  Omission  of  Article.  —  With  a  partitive  noun  (§  25)  the 
definite  article  is  omitted,  and  de  alone  is  used :  — 

1.  In  a  general  negation,  complete  absence  of  the  object  in 
question  being  implied: 

Je  n'ai  pas  de  pain.  I  have  no  (haven't  any)  bread. 

II  n'a  pas  d'amis  ici.  He  has  no  friends  here. 

Je  n'ai  pas  de  plume.  I  have  no  pen. 

.    2.  When  an  adjective  precedes  the  noun,  and  likewise  when  a 
noun  is  understood  after  an  adjective: 

Marie  a  de  jolies  fleurs.  Mary  has  (some)  pretty  flowers. 

J'ai  de  votre  argent.  7  have  some  of  your  money. 

De  grands  arbres  et  de  petits.        Large  trees  and  small  (ones). 

But:  Des  pommes  mures.  Ripe  apples  (adj.  following). 

NOTE.  —  For  exceptions  and  special  cases,  see  Lesson  LXXX. 

29.  Observe  the  omission  of  a  partitive  sign  in  the  following: 
II  n'a  ni  pommes  ni  poires.  He  has  neither  apples  nor  pears. 
Sans  amis  et  sans  argent.                Without  friends  and  without  money. 
Le  panier  est  plein  de  pommes.      The  basket  is  full  of  apples. 


26  LESSON  XIV  [§30 

30.  Observe  the  use  of  de  in  the  following  expressions: 
Une  robe  de  soie.  A  silk  dress  (dress  of  silk). 
Une  legon  de  frangais.                       A  French  lesson. 

Une  salle  de  classe.  A  classroom. 

31.  II  y  a.  —  There  is,  there  are,  are  rendered  thus  when  no 
stress  rests  on  the  word  there,  and  when  the  expression  is  not 
accompanied  by  look  or  gesture  (cf .  §  17) : 

II  y  a  un  livre  sur  la  table.  There  is  a  book  on  the  table. 

Y  a-t-il  des  livres  ici?  Are  there  any  books  here? 

II  n'y  a  pas  de  plumes  ici.  There  are  no  pens  here. 

N'y  a-t-il  pas  de  plumes  ici?  Are  there  no  pens  here? 

II  y  en  a.  There  is  (are)  some. 

II  n'y  en  a  pas.  There  is  (are)  none. 

Y  en  a-t-il?  7s  (are)  there  any? 

N'y  en  a-t-il  pas?  7s  (are)  there  none  (not  any)? 

(a)  Observe  that  en  follows  y. 

EXERCISE  XIV 

brouter  [brute],  browse,  crop  partout  [partu],  everywhere 

deja  [desa],  already  plein  [pie],  full  (of,  de) 

la  fleur  [floeir],  flower  pousser  [puse],  grow 

la  glace  [glas],  ice  le  printemps  [preta],  spring 

1'herbe  [erb],  f .,  grass  la  salle  [sal],  hall,  room 

la  joie  fewa],  .joy,  happiness  sans  [sa],  without 

meme  [meim],  adv.,  even  le  sud  [syd],  south 

le  mouton  [muto],  sheep  la  vache  [va$],  cow 

la  neige  [neis],  snow  vert  [ve:r],  green 

le  pain  [pe],  bread 

ne  .  .  .  ni  .  .  .  ni  [no  ni  ni],  neither  .  .  .  nor;  au  printemps,  in  spring 

A.  Continue:  1.  Je  n'ai  ni  plumes  ni  encre,  tu,  etc.  2.  J'ai  de 
jolis  livres,  etc.  3.  Je  n'ai  pas  d'argent,  etc.  4.  Je  suis  sans  gants 
et  sans  chapeau,  etc.  5.  J'etudie  ma  legon  de  frangais,  tu  .  .  .  ta, 
etc.  6.  Je  suis  dans  la  salle  de  classe,  etc.  7.  II  y  a  de  grands 
arbres  dans  ma  cour,  .  .  .  dans  ta,  etc.  8.  Y  a-t-il  de  jolies  fleurs 
dans  mon  jardin?  .  .  .  dans  ton,  etc.  9.  II  y  en  a  dans  mon  jardin, 
.  .  .  dans  ton,  etc.  10.  N'y  en  a-t-il  pas  dans  mon  jardin?..  .  .  dans 
ton,  etc. 


§  31]  LESSON  XIV  27 

B.  1.  Avez-vous  du  pain?     2.  Je  n'ai  pas  de  pain.     3.  Nous 
n'avons  ni  pain  ni  viande.   4.  Vous  avez  la  de  jolies  fleurs.    5.  Nous 
avons  beaucoup  de  jolies  fleurs.    6.  A  la  ville  il  y  a  de  grandes  mai- 
sons  et  de  petites.    7.  Avez-vous  beaucoup  d'amis?    8.  Nous  n'en 
avons  pas  ici.  9.  Y  a-t-il  de  jolies  maisons  a  la  campagne?  10.  As-tu 
de  inon  papier?    11.  J'en  ai.     12.  Y  a-t-il  des  livres  sur  la  table? 
13.  N'y  en  a-t-il  pas?    14.  II  n'y  en  a  pas. 

C.  1.  Voici  maintenant  le  printemps.     2.  II  n'y  a  ni  neige  ni 
glace.    3.  Le  vent  du  sud  souffle.    4.  Les  arbres  sont  de*ja  verts. 

5.  L'herbe  pousse  aux  champs.     6.  Les  vaches  et  les  moutons  la 
broutent.    7.  Partout  il  y  a  de  jolies  fleurs.    8.  Nous  en  trouvons 
dans  les  champs  et  dans  les  jardins.    9.  Les  arbres  des  vergers  en 
sont  pleiris.    10.  II  y  a  de  la  joie  partout.    11.  Meme  sans  amis  et 
sans  argent  les  homines  sont  contents. 

D.  (Oral.)    1.  Y  a-t-il  de  la  neige  au  printemps?   2.  Ou  trouvons- 
nous  de  jolies  fleurs?    3.  Y  a-t-il  de  la  joie  partout?    4.  Les  arbres 
sont-ils  pleins  de  fleurs?    5.  Ou  sont  les  moutons  et  les  vaches?' 

6.  Qu'est-ce  qu'ils  broutent?    7.  N'avez-vous  pas  de  fleurs?    8.  Qui 
a  de  jolies  fleurs?    9.  Qui  nous  donne  une  leg. on  de  frangais?    10.  Ou 
nous  donne-t-il  notre  legon  de  frangais?     11.  Qu'est-ce  qu'il  y  a 
sur  la  table?    12.  Y  a-t-il  des  plumes  dans  votre  boite?  etc. 

E.  1.  I  have  no  flowers.    2.  We  have  no  French  lesson  to-day. 

3.  Have  you  no  large  trees  in  your  yard?    4.  John  has  some  of  my 
paper.    5.  There  are  some  pretty  flowers  in  our  garden.    6.  There 
are  large  houses  and  small  houses  in  the  city.    7.  I  have  neither 
ink'  nor  pens  here.    8.  The  poor  boy  is  without  money.    9.  The 
teacher  is  giving  us  a  French  lesson  in  the  classroom.    10.  There 
are  a  great  many  books  on  the  table.   11.  Are  there  any  large  houses 
in  the  village?    12.  There  are  some  very  large  [ones]. 

F.  1.  Are  there  any  pretty  flowers  in  the  fields?    2.  There  are 
already  some  in  the  fields  and  gardens.    3.  Do  the  cows  crop  grass? 

4.  Yes,  sir,  and  the  sheep  crop  it  too.    5.  Sheep  and  cows  like  grass. 
6.  Sometimes  there  is  snow  in  spring.     7.  But  there  isn't  much. 
8.  We  have  neither  ice  nor  snow  now.     9.  The  grass  is  already 
green.    10.  The  south  wind  is  blowing.    11.  There  is  no  ice  to-day. 
12.  Flowers  grow  in  spring.    13.  The  gardens  are  full  of  them. 


28  LESSON  XV  [§32 


LESSON  XV 

32.  Irregular  Plurals.  —  Observe  the  following  exceptions  to 
the  general  rule  of  adding  s  to  the  singular  (cf .  §  2,  3) :  — 

1.  Nouns  in  -s,  -x,  -z,  and  adjectives  in  -s,  -x,  are  un- 
changed: 

bois,  wood(s)  nez,  nose(s)  bas          bas,  low 

voix,  voice(s)  heureux,  heureux,  happy 

2.  Nouns  in  -au,  -eu,  and  a  few  in  -ou,  add  x: 

chapeau(x),  hat(s)       jeu(x),  game(s)        bijou(x),  jewel(s) 

(a)    Also    in  -ou:   caillou(x),   pebble,   chou(x),   cabbage,   genou(x),   knee^ 
hibou(x),  owl,  joujou(x),  toy,  but  sou(s),  cent,  halfpenny,  etc. 

3.  Adjectives  in  -eau  also  add  x: 

beau(x),  fine  nouveau(x),  new 

.     4.  Nouns,  and  the  commoner  adjectives,  in  -al  take  -aux: 

animal    animaux,  animal  e"gal    egaux,  equal 

(a)  Bal(s),  ball,  carnaval(s),  carnival,  and  some  rarer  nouns  are  regular. 

5.  Seven  nouns  in  -ail  take  -aux;  the  commonest  are: 
travail    travaux,  work(s)  corail    coraux,  coral(s) 

6.  Note  also: 

ceil    yeux,  eye(s)  ciel    cieux,  sky,  skies,  heaven(s) 

33.  Position  of  Adjectives.  —  Qualifying  adjectives,  used  with 
nouns,  regularly  follow,  especially  when  denoting:  — 

1.  Physical  quality,  such  as  colour,  shape,  heat,  cold,  etc.: 
De  Pencre  noire;  de  Peau  froide.         Black  ink;  cold  water. 
Une  pierre  dure  (ronde).  A  hard  (round}  stone. 

Du  vin  doux  (aigre).  Sweet  (sour)  wine. 

2.  Nationality,  religion  and  the  like: 

Le  droit  anglais;  Feglise  catho-        (The)  English  law;  the  Catholw 
lique.  church. 

3.  So  also  participles  used  as  adjectives: 

La  cruche  cassee.  The  broken  pitcher. 

Un  tableau  frappant.  A  striking  picture. 


§33]  LESSON  XV  29 

4.  But  certain  adjectives  of  frequent  use  generally  precede: 
beau,  fine  long,  long  jeune,  young 

joli,  pretty  court,  short  vieux,  old 

vilain,  ugly  gros,  big  nouveau,  new 

bon,  good  grand,  large 

mauvais,  bad  petit,  small 

NOTES.  —  1.  Adjectives  used  figuratively,  unemphatically  or  when 
merged  in  sense  with  the  noun,  often  precede,  irrespective  of  the  above 
rules,  e.g.  une  Stroite  amitie,  an  intimate  (lit.  narrow)  friendship;  but  une 
rue  etroite,  a  narrow  street. 

2.  Many  adjectives  vary  in  meaning,  before  or  after  the  noun,  e.g.  mon 
cher  enfant,  my  dear  child;  une  robe  chere,  a  costly  dress. 


EXERCISE  XV 

abondant  [aboda],  abundant  le  feuillage  [fcejais],  leaves,  foliage 

Panimal  [animal],  m.,  animal  la  fraise  [freiz],  strawberry 
beau  [bo],  fine,  beautiful,  hand-       habiter  [abite],  inhabit,  live  in 

some,  good-looking  interessant  [eteresa],  interesting 

bleu  [b!0],  blue  mur  [myir],  ripe,  mature 

le  bois  [bwa],  wood  noir  [nwair],  black 

le  bruit  [brui],  sound,  noise  1'ceil  [oeij],  m.,  pi.  yeux  [j0],  eye 

la  cerise  [sariiz],  cherry  Poiseau  [wazo],  m.,  bird 

le  chant  [$a],  song,  singing  la  paille  [paij],  straw 

charge  [$ar5e],  laden  le  pommier  [pomje],  apple  tree 

le  cheval  Roval],  horse  la  sole  [swa],  silk 

le  clou  [klu],  nail  tendre  [taidr],  tender 
Pete  [ete],  m.,  summer 

en  ete  [an  ete],  in  summer 

A.  Continue:  1.  Je  regarde  les  beaux  chevaux  noirs,  tu,  etc. 
2.  J'ai  deux  chapeaux  de  paille,  etc.    3.  Je  n'en  ai  pas  de  soie,  etc. 
4.  Je  suis  sous  les  beaux  arbres,  etc.     5.  J'ai  deux  gros  livres  in- 
teressants,  etc.    6.  J'ai  un  sac  de  pommes  mures,  etc.    7.  J'ai  des 
yeux  bleus,  etc.    8.  J'ai  deux  gros  clous,  etc. 

B.  1.  En  e"te  nous  sommes  souvent  aux  bois.    2.  Us  sont  beaux 
et  tres  interessants.    3.  Nous  regardons  souvent  les  beaux  arbres. 

4.  Nous  e*coutons  aussi  le  bruit  des  feuilles  et  le  chant  des  oiseaux. 

5.  Beaucoup  de  petits  oiseaux  habitent  les  bois.    6.  Nous  aimons 
leur  chant.     7.  II  y  a  aussi  de  petits  animaux  dans  le  feuillage. 


30  LESSON   XV  [§33 

8.  Us  nous  amusent  quand  ils  jouent  ensemble.  9.  Aux  champs 
Fherbe  est  tendre  et  abondante.  10.  Les  vaches  et  les  chevaux 
Taiment  beaucoup.  11.  Dans  le  verger  les  pommiers  sont  charges 
de  petites  pommes.  12.  Elles  ne  sont  pas  encore  mures.  13.  Mais 
les  cerises  et  les  fraises  sont  presque  mures.  14.  II  y  a  deux  beaux 
enfants  sous  les  pommiers.  15.  Ils  ont  de  tres  beaux  yeux  bleus. 
16.  Ils  ont  de  beaux  chapeaux  de  paille.  17.  Mon  pere  a  un  chapeau 
de  soie. 

C.  (Oral.)      1.  Qu'est-ce    que   vous  regardez    dans    les    bois? 
2.  Qu'est-ce  que  nous  e*coutons  aux  bois?     3.  Que'  trouvez-vous 
aux  bois?    4.  Est-ce  que  les  petits  animaux  vous  amusent?   5.  Y 
a-t-il  beaucoup  de  fraises  mures  au  jardin?     6.  Ou  trouvons-nous 
de  Fherbe  tendre?    7.  Combien  d 'enfants  y  a-t-il  sous  les  arbres? 
8.  Avez-vous  un  joli  chapeau  de  paille?  etc. 

D.  1.  Beautiful  woods.    2.  Interesting  books.    3.  A  pretty  blue 
bird.    4.  Beautiful  blue  eyes.    5.  Fine  black  horses.    6.  The  little 
animals  of  the  woods.    7.  The  ten'der  and  abundant  grass.    8.  Ripe 
apples;  green  apples.    9.  A  straw  hat;  a  silk  hat.    10.  Black  ink; 
blue  paper.     11.  A  strong  man;  strong  men.     12.  Ripe  cherries; 

•  ripe  strawberries.  (For  13  and  14,  see  §  32.)  13.  Games,  jewels, 
works,  pebbles,  voices.  14.  New  books,  toys  and  games,  pretty 
corals. 

E.  1.  How  many  hats  have  you?    2.  I  have  two.    3.  I  have  a 
straw  hat  and  a  silk  hat.    4.  Do  you  like  straw  hats?    5.  I  do  ( =  I 
like  them),  in  summer.    6.  There  are  three  beautiful  children  under 
the  apple  trees.     7.  The  children's  eyes  are  blue.     8.  They  are 
playing  together.    9.  We  like  the  singing  of  the  birds.    10.  When 
the  little  animals  play  they  amuse  us  very  much.     11.  Do  the 
horses  like  the  tender  grass?    12.  They  do. 

F.  1.  Are  there  many  apples  in  the  orchard?    2.  The  apple  trees 
are  laden  with  (de)  apples.    3.  But  they  are  still  small.    4.  There 
are  no  ripe  apples  yet.    5.  Most  men  like  fine  horses.    6.  My  uncle 
has  two  beautiful  apple  trees  in  his  garden.    7.  We  listen  to  the 
singing  of  the  little  birds  in  the  woods.    8.  When  the  wind  blows 
there  is  a  sound  in  the  leaves.    9.  The  sounds  of  the  woods  are  very 
interesting.    10.  Many  interesting  little  animals  live  in  the  woods. 


§34]  LESSON  XVI  31 

LESSON  XVI 

34.  Irregular  Feminine  Adjectives.  —  The  stem  of  certain  ad- 
jectives is  modified  on  adding  the  ending  -e  (cf.  §  14),  thus:  — 

1.  By  change  of  final  consonant  (f  =  v,  g  =  gu,  x  =  s,  c  = 
ch,  sometimes  qu) : 

actif  active,  active  blanc       blanche,  white 

long  longue,  long  public      publique,  public 

heureux     heureuse,  happy 
(a)  But  observe:  doux,  douce,  sweet;  faux,  fausse,  false. 

2.  By  doubling  the  final  consonant  of  -el,  -eil,  -en,  -on,  and 
commonly  also  final  -s  and  -t: 

cruel       cruelle,  cruel  bon         bonne,  good 

pareil      pareille,  like  gros         grosse,  big 

ancien     ancienne,  ancient,  former    muet       muette,  dumb 
(a)  Similarly  gentil,  gentille,  nice. 

(6)  Regular  are:  gris(e),  grey,  pret(e),  ready,  and  some  others;  six  in  -et 
have  -etc,  e.g.  complet,  complete,  complete;  observe  also  frais,  fralche,  fresh, 
cool. 

3.  Adjectives  in  -er,  and  a  few  others,  change  e  to  e: 

leger     legere,  light  sec  seche,  dry  (cf.  1,  above) 

cher      chere,  dear  complet    complete,  complete  (cf. 

bref      breve,  brief  (cf.  1,  above)        2,  b,  above) 

4.  Five  adjectives  have  two  masculine  forms  in  the  singular, 
the  form  in  -1  standing  always  before  a  vowel  or  h  mute,  and 
serving  to  form  the  feminine,  like  2  above: 

beau  or  bel     belle,  fine  nouveau  or  nouvel  nouvelle,  new 

f ou  or  f ol        f olle,  foolish  vieux  or  vieil  vieille,  old 

•  mou  or  mol    molle,  soft 

EXERCISE  XVI 

la  branche  [bra:$],  branch  jaune  fooin],  yellow 

la  cave  [ka:v],  cellar  nu  [ny],  bare 

couper  [kupe],  cut,  cut  down  rouge  [mis],  red 

court  [kuir],  short  le  traineau  [treno],  sleigh 

le  flocon  [floko],  flake  (of  snow)  transporter  [trasporte],  bring 

Phiver  [iveir],  m.,  winter 

en  hiver  [an  iveir],  in  winter 
NOTE.  —  The  adjectives  of  §  34,  above,  are  not  given  in  the  vocabulary. 


32  LESSON  XVI  [§34 

A.  Turn  the  English  words  into  French  with  proper  order  and  agree- 
ment: 1.  Nous  avons  (good)  poires.     2.  Aimez-vous  (fine,  sweet) 
pommes?     3.  Avez-vous  (good,  red)  pommes?     4.  Je  leur  donne 
(big,  sweet)  pommes.     5.  Nous  avons  (fine,  white)  chevaux.    6.  II 
y  a  (little,  blue)  oiseaux  aux  bois.     7.  II  y  a  (good)  vaches  aux 
champs.    8.  Le  monsieur  a  (a  fine,  silk)  chapeau. 

B.  1.  Voici  maintenant  Phiver.    2.  Le  bel  arbre  qui  (which)  est 
devant  notre  maison  n'a  pas  de  feuilles  vertes.    3.  II  en  a  de  jaunes. 
4.  Mais  ses  longues  branches  sont  presque  nues.    5.  II  n'y  a  pas 
de  pommes  au  verger.    6.  Mais  nous  avons  de  grosses  belles  pommes 
rouges  a  la  cave.    7.  II  y  a  aussi  de  jolies  poires  douces  a  la  cave. 
8.  Peu  de  petits  animaux  sont  aux  bois.    9.  II  y  a  de  la  neige  par- 
tout.    10.  Les  champs  sont  blancs.    11.  Les  maisons  sont  blanches. 
12.  De  gros  flocons  de  neige  tombent  encore.     13.  Deux  hommes 
forts  coupent  de  gros  arbres  la-bas.     14.  Us  ont  un  traineau  et 
deux  chevaux.     15.  Avec  le  traineau  ils  transportent  le  bois  a  la 
maison. 

C.  1.  The  big  flakes  of  white  snow  are  falling.    2.  The  branches 
of  the  fine  tree  are  almost  bare.    3.  We  find  no  little  animals  in 
the  woods.    4:  There  are  no  squirrels  in  the  woods.    5.  They  do 
not  like  the  winter.     6.  Are  the  fields  white  in  winter?     7.  The 
fields  are  white,  and  the  houses  are  white  too.    8.  There  is  white 
snow  everywhere.    9.  What  are  the  men  cutting  yonder?   10.  They 
are  cutting  big  trees.     11.  They  bring  home  the  wood  with  the 
sleigh. 

D.  1.  A  long  letter;  long  letters.    2.  Are  you  happy,  (my)  chil- 
dren?    3.  Mary  is  not  happy;  the  other  little  girls  are  happy. 
4.  Our  house  is  very  old.    5.  Are  the  ladies  not  yet  ready?    6.  Clara 
is  a  dear  little  girl;  is  she  not  very  nice?    7.  Mr.  Dupont  is  a  hand- 
some man.    8.  His  wife  is  a  fine-looking  lady.    9.  There  is  an  old 
tree  before  the  old  house.    10.  Old  trees;  old  houses.    11.  We  have 
a  new  lesson  to-day.     12.  Public  affairs  are  interesting.     13.  My 
letter  is  short. 


§37]  LESSON  XVII  33 


LESSON  XVII 

35.  Use  of  ce.  —  Observe  the  English  use  of  it,  with  the 
verb  to  be,  to  anticipate  a  real  subject  following  the  verb,  e.g. 
it  is  my  brother,   it  is  they.     The  indeclinable  demonstrative 
ce  is  similarly  used  with  etre  when  the  real  subject  follows, 
and  stands  not  only  for  it,  but  also  for  he  (she,  they),  this  (that, 
these,  those),  according  to  the  context: 

C'est  Marie,  et  sa  mere.  It  is  Mary,  and  her  mother. 

C'est  une  jolie  dame.  She  (that)  is  a  pretty  lady. 

Ce  sont  des  amis  de  Jean.  They  (these)  are  friends  of  John. 

36.  Some  Relative  Pronouns.  —  1.  The  relative  pronouns  of 
most  frequent  use  are  qui  [ki]  =  who,  which,  that,  as  subject, 
and  que  [ka]  =  whom,  which,  that,  as  direct  object  of  a  verb: 

La  dame  qui  parle.  The  lady  who  is  speaking. 

Les  livres  qui  sont  ici.  The  books  which  are  here. 

Les  parents  que  nous  aimons.      The  relatives  whom  we  love. 
Les  lettres  que  j'apporte.  The  letters  that  I  bring. 

(a)  All  relative  pronouns  are  considered  as  having  the  gender,  number 
and  person  of  the  antecedent. 

2.  The  relative   pronoun   (direct   object),   often  omitted  in 
English,  is  never  omitted  in  French: 
Le  papier  qu'il  me  donne.  The  paper  he  gives  me. 

37.  Observe  the  following  interrogative  forms  involving  the 
use  of  a  relative  pronoun: 

Qui  est-ce  qui  parle?  Who  (is  it  who)  speaks? 

Qui  est-ce  que  vous  desirez?        Whom  do  you  wish? 
Qu'est-ce  qui  vous  amuse?  What  amuses  you? 

Qu'est-ce  que  vous  desirez?        What  do  you  wish? 
(a)  The  use  of  qu'est-ce  qui  is  obligatory;  the  use  of  the  others  is  op' 
tional  (cf.  §91). 

EXERCISE  XVII 


demeurer  [damcere],  live,  dwell  George  (s)  foors],  George 

difficile  [difisil],  difficult,  hard  interesser  [eterese],  interest 

facile  [fasil],  easy  le  tableau  noir  [tablo  nwair], 

frapper  [frape],  strike,  knock  toujours  [tusuir],  always,  still 


34  LESSON  XVII  [§37 

A.  1.  C'est  une  longue  legon;  elle  n'est  pas  facile;  elle  est  sur  le 
tableau  noir.    2.  Qui  est  la?    Est-ce  Marie?    3.  Non,  c'est  sa  soeur. 

4.  C'est  le  facteur  qui  nous  apporte  toujours  les  lettres.     5.  Ou 
sont  les  lettres  qu'il  nous  apporte?    6.  Les  voila.    7.  Qu'y  a-t-il  (or 
qu'est-ce  qu'il  y  a)  sur  la  table?    8.  Ce  sont  nos  lettres.    9.  Les 
pommiers  de  notre  verger  sont  grands.     10.  Us  sont  tres  grands. 
11.  Ce  sont  de  grands  pommiers.    12.  Est-ce  votre  ami  qui  frappe 
a  la  porte?     13.  Non,  c'est  un  monsieur  qui  cherche  M.  Leduc. 
14.  Qui  demeure  ici?     15.  C'est  M.  Dupont.     16.  Ce  n'est  pas 
M.  Dupont  que  je  cherche,  c'est  M.  Leduc. 

B.  1.  Marie  et  Claire  sont  tres  diligentes.    2.  Ce  sont  des  Sieves 
diligentes.     3.  Ce  sont  des  amies  de  ma  sceur.    4.  Qu'est-ce  qui 
vous  int^resse  dans  ce  livre?     5.  Ce  sont  les  jolies  images  qui 
m'inte*ressent.     6.  Qu'est-ce  que  vous  de*sirez?     7.  Je  desire  les 
fleurs  que  vous  avez  la.    8.  La  maison  de  mon  oncle  est  tres  vieille. 

9.  Elle  est  tres  vieille,  mais  c'est  une  maison  que  j'aime  beaucoup. 

10.  Qui  est-ce  qui  nous  explique  la  legon  au  tableau  noir?    11.  C'est 
notre  professeur.    12.  Qui  est-ce  que  vous  accompagnez  a  1'ecole? 
13.  J'accompagne  Georges  et  Louis.     14.  Ce  sont  des  amis  que 
j'aime  beaucoup. 

C.  1.  Our  French  lesson  is  difficult.   2.  It  is  a  very  difficult  lesson. 
3.  What  do  you  wish?    4.  I  wish  the  pens  that  are  in  your  box. 

5.  Is  Mrs.  Dupont  very  old?    6.  She  is  a  very  old  lady.    7.  Are 
your  friends  at  the  door?    8.  No,  sir,  those  are  some  friends  of  my 
brother.    9.  Who  lives  here?    10.  It  is  Mr.  Leduc  who  lives  here. 

11.  The  trees  which  are  in  our  garden  are  large.     12.  They  are 
very  large  trees.    13.  The  flowers  you  have  there  are  pretty.   14.  Our 
lesson  is  on  the  blackboard. 

D.  1.  What  is  amusing  you  now?    2.  It  is  the  little  animals 
playing  (which  play)  in  the  trees.    3.  What  is  the  postman  giving 
to  your  father?    4.  He  is  giving  him  some  letters.    5.  Here  are  the 
letters  which  he  brings  us.    6.  The  lessons  we  have  to-day  are  not 
easy.    7.  This  is  a  book  which  I  do  not  like.    8.  These  are  the  books 
which  interest  us.    9.  Who  is  knocking  at  the  door?    10.  They  are 
some  friends  (/.)  of  my  mother.    11.  It  is  George  Dupont  who  always 
goes  with  me  to  school.     12.  We  are  good  friends.     13.  He  is  a 
friend  whom  I  like  very  much.    14.  The  teacher  is  at  the  blackboard. 


[40]  LESSON  XVIII  35 


LESSON  XVIII 

38.  An  Indefinite  Pronoun.  —  1.  The  form  on  =  one,  some 
one,  we,  you,  they,  people;  its  verb  is  always  third  singular: 

On  [5]  parle  de  Jean.  We  (you,  they,  etc.)  speak  of  John. 

2.  When  following  a  verb  with  final  vowel,  on  is  joined  to  it 
by  -t-,  like  il,  etc.  (cf .  §  8) : 

Que  desire-t-on?  What  do  they  (etc.)  wish? 

3.  A  construction  with  on  often  corresponds  to  an  English 
passive,  especially  when  the  agent  is  not  mentioned: 

Ici  on  parle  frangais.  French  (is)  spoken  here, 

(a)  on  =  Pon  optionally  after  certain  words,  e.g.  et,  ou,  si,  que,  etc.,  to 
avoid  hiatus. 

39.  Use  of  y.  —  1.  The  pronominal  adverb  y  [i]  =  £  (dans, 
sur,  etc.)  +  a  noun  or  pronoun  and  means  to  (at,  in,  on,  etc.)  it 
or  them: 

Je  laisse  la  lettre  sur  la  table.          /  leave  the  letter  on  the  table. 
J'y  laisse  la  lettre.  I  leave  the  letter  on  it. 

2.  Y  =  there,  of  a  place  previously  referred  to;  it  is  less  em- 
phatic than  la,  which  regularly  denotes  a  place  not  previously 
referred  to: 

II  est  au  jardin.  He  is  in  the  garden. 

II  y  est  encore.  He  is  still  there  (in  it). 

But:  Qu'avez-vous  la?  What  have  you  there? 

3.  Y  precedes  the  verb  like  a  conjunctive  pronoun  (cf.  §  23). 

40.  Tout.  —  Every,  all,  whole  =  tout,  which  serves  either  as 
an  adjective  or  a  pronoun;  its  forms  are: 

m.  s,  tout  [tu],  f.  s.  toute  [tut],  m.  pi.  tous  [tu(s)],  f.  pi.  toutes  [tut] 

Tout  homme,  toute  femme.  Every  man,  every  woman. 

Tous  les  livres,  toutes  les  plumes.  All  the  books,  all  the  pens. 

Toute  la  journe*e.  The  whole  (all  the)  day. 

Je  les  ai  tous  [tus].  /  have  them  all. 

(a)  The  article,  when  present,  always  follows  tout. 
(6)  The  s  of  tous,  used  pronominally,  is  sounded. 


36  LESSON  XVIII  [§40 

EXERCISE  XVHI 

admirer  [admire],  admire  remarquer  [ramarke],   remark,   ob- 
anime  [anime],  animated,  lively  serve,  notice 
danser  [dase],  dance  representer  [roprezate],  represent 
le  groupe  [grup],  group  le  salon  [salo],  drawing-room,  par- 
joy  eux  [3waj0],  joyous,  merry  lour 

le  merite  [merit],  merit  sembler  [sable],  seem,  appear 

le  monde  [moid],  world,  people  surtout  [syrtu],  above  all,  especially 

patiner  [patine],  skate  le  tableau  [tablo],  picture,  paint- 

le  paysage  [peizais],  landscape  ing 

le  pin  [pe],  pine  tree,  pine  tout  [tu],  absol.,  everything 
plusieurs    [plyzjoeir],    pi.    adj.   or      tranquille  [trokil],  tranquil,  quiet 
pron.,  invar.,  several 

on  voit  [vwa],  irreg.,  one  sees;  tout  le  monde  [tu  1  moid],  everybody 

A.  Continue:  1.  On  admire  tous  mes  tableaux,  .  .  .  tous  tes,  etc. 
(also  interrogatively).    2.  Toutes  mes  fleurs  sont  jolies,  toutes  tes, 
etc.    3.  Je  suis  au  jardin,  j'y  suis,  tu  es  au  jardin,  tu  y  es,  etc, 
4.  Est-ce  que  j'y  suis?  etc.    5.  Je  les  admire  tous,  tu,  etc. 

B.  1.  Dans  notre  salon  il  y  a  plusieurs  tableaux.     2.  On  en 
admire  surtout  deux  qui  repre*sentent  des  paysages.    3.  Dans  Fun 
on  trouve  des  vaches  qui  broutent  1'herbe.    4.  On  y  remarque  aussi 
plusieurs  moutons.     5.  Tous  les  animaux  semblent  tranquilles  et 
contents.     6.  On  y  voit  aussi  des  enfants  qui  dansent  sous  les 
arbres.     7.  C'est  un  tableau  de  beaucoup  de  merite.     8.  L'autre 
tableau  represente  un  paysage  d'hiver.     9.  Presque  tout  y  est 
blanc.    10.  Mais  il  y  a  un  groupe  de  pins  qui  sont  tres  verts.    11.  A 
c6te  des  pins  on  voit  des  enfants  joy  eux  qui  patinent  sur  la  glace. 
12.  D'autres  enfants  y  jouent  avec  leurs  traineaux.    13.  C'est  un 
tableau  tres  arume*.    14.  Tout  le  monde  Taime. 

C.  (Oral.)     1.  Qu'y  a-t-il  dans  le  salon?     2.  Admire-t-on  vos 
tableaux?    3.  Tous  vos  tableaux  sont-ils  beaux?    4.  Y  voit-on  des 
vaches?    5.  Y  remarque-t-on  d'autres  animaux?    6.  Les  animaux 
qu'on  y  voit  sont-ils  tous  tranquilles?     7.  Ou  dansent  les  enfants 
qu'or^y  voit?     8.  Est-ce  un  beau  tableau?  etc. 

D.  1.  Here  are  two  pictures.     2.  We  have  several  pictures  in 
our  drawing-room.    3.  Everybody  admires  two  of  them  especially. 


§42]  LESSON   XIX  37 

4.  The  pictures  that  they  (on)  admire  are  landscapes.  5.  In  (the) 
one  we  (you,  etc.)  observe  many  trees.  6.  You  notice  in  it  also 
cows  and  sheep.  7.  All  the  animals  that  one  sees  in  it  are  quiet 
and  they  seem  happy.  8.  We  observe  also  children  dancing  (who 
dance).  9.  (Some)  other  children  are  playing  under  the  trees. 
10.  Those  (ce)  are  my  little  sisters  who  are  playing  there. 

E.  1.  In  the  other  picture  we  (you,  etc.)  see  snow.  2.  Every- 
thing is  white  (m.).  3.  There  is  snow  everywhere.  4.  There  is 
some  snow  even  on  the  green  pines.  5.  Almost  the  whole  landscape 
is  white.  6.  All  the  houses  are  white.  7.  We  observe  yonder  some 
children  (who  are)  skating.  8.  Several  other  children  are  there 
also.  9.  They  are  playing  there  with  their  sleighs.  10.  People 
play  a  great  deal  on  the  ice  in  winter.  11.  The  pictures  are  much 
admired  (use  on).  12.  Everybody  admires  good  pictures. 


LESSON  XIX 

41.  The  Regular  Conjugations.  —  1.  French  verbs  are  con- 
veniently divided  into  three  conjugations,  according  to  the  in- 
finitive endings  -er,  -ir,  -re : 

i  ii  in 

Donner,  to  give  '  Finir,  to  finish  Yendre,  to  sell 

2.  Like  these  are  conjugated  all  regular  verbs  with  corre- 
sponding infinitive  endings. 

42.  Present  Indicative  of  donner,  finir,  vendre 

I  give,  I  am  giving,  I  finish,  I  am  finish-  I  sell,'  I  am  selling, 

I  do  give,  etc.  ing,  I  do  finish,  etc.               I  do  sell.  etc. 

je  donne      [don]  finis          [fini]  vends       [va] 

tu  donnes   ^don]  finis         [fini]  vends      [va] 

il  donne      [don]  finit          [fini]  vend1       [va] 

nous  donnons  [dono]  finissons  [finiso]  vendons  [vado] 

vous  donnez    [done]  finissez    [finise]  vendez     [vade] 

ils  donnent  [don]  finissent  [finis]  vendent  [vaid] 

Learn  also  negative  and  interrogative  forms  (cf.  §  19). 

1  Vendre  is  irregular  in  this  single  form ;  the  only  wholly  regular  v^rb  of  this  conju- 
gation is  rompre,  which  has  rompt,  but  vendre  is  here  given  as  beo«  :nore  useful  for 
practice. 


38  LESSON  XIX  [§43 

43.  The  Demonstrative  Adjective 

SINGULAR  PLURAL 

m.  ce  [so],  cet  [set]  1  ,, . 

f  \  this  or  that       m.  or  L  ces  [se],  these  or  those. 

f.    cette  [set]  J 

Ce  livre,  cet  ami,  cet  homme.  This  book,  this  friend,  this  man. 

Cet  autre  livre.  This  (that)  other  book. 

Cette  plume  et  cette  encre.  This  pen  and  (this)  ink. 

Ces  plumes,  ces  homines.  These  pens,  these  men. 

Cet  arbre-ci  et  cet  arbre-la.  This  tree  and  that  tree. 

1.  Ce  becomes  cet  before  a  vowel  or  h  mute. 

2.  The  demonstrative  adjective  is  repeated  before  each  noun. 

3.  For  emphasis,  or  to  distinguish  this  (these)  from  that  (those), 
-ci,  -1£,  respectively,  are  added  to  the  noun. 

EXERCISE  XIX 

les  benefices  [benefis],  m.,  profit(s)  perdre  [perdr],  lose 

le  bout  [bu],  end  pourrir  [puriir],  decay 

fleurir    [flceriir],    blossom,    be    in  le  public  [pyblik],  the  public 

bloom  quelque  [kelk(a)],  adj.,  some 

grossir  [grosiir],  grow  larger  rendre  [raidr],  render,  do,  make 

longtemps  [lota],  a  long  time,  long  le  service  [servis],  service 

le    marchand    [mar$a],    merchant,  le  temps  [ta],  time 

dealer  tirer  [tire],  draw,  derive,  get 

murir  [myriir],  ripen  trop  [tro  or  tro],  too  much,  too 
pendant  [pada],  prep.,  during 

en  meme  temps,  at  the  same  time;  au  bout  de  quelque  temps,  after  some 
time 

A.  Continue:  1.  Je  vends  ces  pommes  au  marchand,  tu,   etc. 
2.  Je  n'en  vends  pas  beaucoup,  tu,  etc.     3.  Je  finis  cette  longue 
legon,    tu,   etc.     4.  Je  ne  finis  pas  la  legon  d'histoire,  tu,   etc. 
(also  interrogatively).    5.  Est-ce  que  je  perds  du  temps?  est-ce  que 
tu?  etc. 

B.  Supply  the  proper  form  of  ce:  1.  C  .  .  .  marchand;  c  .  . .  mar- 
chands.    2.  C  .  .  .  <§leve  (m.) ;  c  .  .  .  eleve  (/.) ;  c  .  .  .  Sieves.  3.    C  . . . 
autre  livre;  c  .  .  .   autres  hommes.     4.  C  .  .  .   autre  plume;   c  . . . 
autres  amies.    5.  C  . . .  arbre-ci;  c  . . .  arbres-la. 


§  43]  LESSON   XIX  39 

C.  1.  Mon  pere  a  beaucoup  de  pommiers  dans  son  verger.    2.  Les 
pommiers  fleurissent  au  printemps.    3.  Au  bout  de  quelque  temps 
on  voit  de  petites  pommes  sur  les  branches.    4.  Pendant  Te*te  les 
pommes  grossissent.     5.  En  automne  elles  murissent.     6.  Quand 
on  les  laisse  trop  longtemps  sur  les  pommiers  elles  tombent.    7.  Alors 
elles  pourrissent.    8.  Quand  nos  pommes  sont  mures  nous  les  ven- 
dons  aux  marchands.    9.  Les  marchands  les  transportent  a  la  ville. 
10.  Et  la  on  les  vend  au  public.    11.  Mon  pere  et  les  marchands  en 
tirent  des  benefices,  et  en  meme  temps  ils  rendent  un  grand  service 
au  public. 

D.  (Oral.)     1.  Quand  ces  pommiers  fleurissent-ils?    2.  Que  voit- 
on  sur  les  branches  des  pommiers?    3.  Quand  est-ce  que  les  petites 
pommes  grossissent?     4.  Quand  murissent-elles?     5.  Les  pommes 
tombent-elles  en  automne?     6.  A  qui  vendons-nous  les  pommes? 
7.  Ces  marchands   vendent-ils   beaucoup   de   pommes?    8.  A  qui 
en  vendent-ils?    9.  Qui  en  tire  des  benefices?  etc. 

E.  1.  When  do  apples  ripen?    2.  Are  these  apples  already  ripe? 

3.  No,  those  apples  are  still  green,  but  these  apples  are  ripe.  4.  Those 
apples  are  growing  larger.    5.  They  are  ripening  already.    6.  The 
ripe  apples  are  falling.    7.  The  apples  which  fall  decay.    8.  I  sell 
my  apples  to  the  dealer.    9.  He  derives  profit  (pi.)  from  them.    10.  I 
do  (render)  him  a  service.    11.  He  does  the  public  a  service.    12.  We- 
do  the  public  a  great  service.     13.  Are  my  father  and  the  dealer 
not  doing  the  public  a  service?    14.  They  are. 

F.  1.  These  pupils  often  lose  (lose  often)  their  books.     2.  Do 
you  often  lose  your  books?    3.  This  little  girl  often  loses  her  gloves. 

4.  We  lose  our  time  when  we  do  not  listen  to  the  teacher.    5.  I  am 
finishing  this  French  lesson.     6.  Mary. is  finishing  a  long  letter. 
7.  Why  do  you  not  finish  your  lessons?    8.  We  are  finishing  them 
now.    9.  Those  "dealers  sell  us  apples.     10.  Are  you  selling  those 
apples?    11.  I  am  not;  they  are  not  yet  ripe.    12.  We  sell  our  apples 
when  they  are  ripe.     13.  Our  cherries  and  strawberries  ripen  in 
summer. 


40  LESSON  XX  [§  44 


LESSON  XX 

44.  Past  Participles 

Given  Finished  Sold  Had  Been 

donne  [done]         fini  [fini]         vendu  [vady]          eu  [y]  ete  [ete] 

45.  Compound  Tenses.  —  The  compound  tenses  of  a  verb  are 
formed  by  adding  its  past  participle  to  the  various  simple  tenses 
of  an  auxiliary  verb  (usually  avoir,  sometimes  etre,  cf.  §  51). 

46.  The  Past  Indefinite 

/  have  given  (finished,  etc.}  or  I  gave  (I  finished ',  etc.) 

j'ai         donne  (fini,  vendu,  eu,  ete) 

tu  as        donne  (fini,  vendu,  eu,  e"te") 

il  a         donne  (fini,  vendu,  eu,  e*te) 

nous  avons  donne*  (fini,  vendu,  eu,  e*te") 

vous  avez    donne*  (fini,  vendu,  eu,  etc") 

ils  ont      donne  (fini,  vendu,  eu,  e*te*) 

47.  Use  of  Past  Indefinite.  —  It  denotes  not  ,only  what  has 
happened  or  has  been  happening,  as  in  English,  but  also  what 
happened  (  =  English  past  tense) : 

J'ai  fini  mon  ouvrage.  7  have  finished  my  work. 

II  a  travaille  au  jardin.     .  He  has  been  working  in  the  garden. 

Elle  a  ete  ici  hier.  She  was  here  yesterday. 

Nous  avons  quitte  Paris  en  hiver.  We  left  Paris  in  (the)  winter. 

NOTE.  —  The  past  indefinite  is  the  ordinary  past  tense  of  French.     For 
the  past  tense  of  narrative  in  the  literary  style,  see  §  152. 

48.  Word-Order.  —  1.  In  compound  tenses,^  rules  of  word- 
order  (cf.  §§  8,  11,  23)  regularly  apply  to  the  auxiliary: 

Nous  ne  Pavons  pas  fini.  We  have  not  finished  it. 

N'a-t-elle  pas  ete  diligente?  Has  she  not  been  industrious? 

2.  No  adverb  (except  ne)  may  come  between  the  subject  and 
the  verb: 

Je  perds  souvent  mon  temps.  7  often  lose  my  time. 


§48]  LESSON  XX  41 

3.  As  may  be  learned  from  observation,  certain  adverbs, 
such  as  bien,  deja,  pas,  plus,  jamais,  etc.,  regularly  come  be- 
tween the  auxiliary  and  the  participle: 

II  a  bien  parle.  He  has  spoken  well. 

(a)  But  aujourd'hui,  hier,  demain,  autrefois,  tard,  ici,  la,  may  not  come 
between  auxiliary  and  participle. 

NOTE.  • —  Great  variety  is  found  in  the  position  of  adverbs  and  adverbial 
phrases,  but  the  above  rules  should  be  observed  in  the  following  exercises. 


EXERCISE  XX 

abord  (d*)  [d  aboir],  (at)  first  labourer  [labure],  plough 

battre  [batr],  beat,  thresh  manger  [mase],  eat 

bien  [bje],  well,  very,  very  well  le  meunier  [m0nje],  miller 

bientot  [bjeto],  soon  le  moissonneur  [mwasonoeir],  har- 

le  ble  [ble],  wheat  vester 

le  boulanger  [bulase],  baker  la  plupart  [plypair],  the  most  part 

ensuite   [asin't],   then,  next,   after-      pour  [pur],  prep.,  for,  in  order  to, 

wards  to 

Pepi  [epi],  m.,  ear  (of  grain),  head      puis  [pin*],  then,  next,  afterwards 

la  farine  [farm],  flour  la  recolte  [rekolt],  harvest,  crop 

la  grange  [grais],  barn  semer  [some],  sow 

jaunir  [soniir],  grow  (become)  yel-      vite  [vit],  quickly 

low  vu  [vy],  p.  part,  of  voir  (irreg.),  seen 

A.  Continue:  1.  J'ai  de*ja  coupe*  mon  ble*,  tu  .  .  .  ton,  etc.    2.  Je 
1'ai  deja  coupe",  etc.    3.  Je  n'ai  pas  encore  laboure  mon  champ,  tu 
.  .  .  ton,  etc.    4.  Je  n'ai  pas  e*te  a  Fecole  aujourd'hui,  etc.    5.  Je  n'y 
ai  pas  ete,  etc.    6.  Est-ce  que  j'ai  vendu  du  pain?  as-tu  vendu?  etc. 
7.  Je  n'en  ai  pas  vendu,  etc.    8.  Je  n'en  ai  pas  eu,  etc. 

B.  1.  D'abord  on  a  laboure  les  champs.    2.  Puis  on  y  a  sem£  le 
ble*.    3.  Les  oiseaux  n'en  ont  pas  beaucoup  mange  (or  mange  beau- 
coup).    4.  Pour  la  plupart  il  a  bien  pousse.    5.  Bientot  on  a  vu  les 
beaux  e*pis.     6.  Ensuite  les  champs  ont  jauni.     7.  Au  bout  de 
quelque  temps  les  moissonneurs  ont  coupe  le  ble*.    8.  Us  Font  trans- 
porte*  a  la  grange,  et  puis  ils  Font  battu.    9.  Nous  avons  eu  une 
bonne  recolte.    10.  On  a  vendu  beaucoup  de  ble*  au  meunier.    11.  Le 
meunier  a  vendu  sa  farine  au  boulanger.   12.  Le  boulanger  a  vendu 
son  pain  au  public.    13.  Et  tout  le  monde  a  e*te*  content. 


42  LESSON  XXI  [§49 

C.  (Oral.)    1.  Avez-vous  dejiUaboure  votre  champ?   2.  Qu'est-ce 
que  vous  y  avez  seme?    3.  Les  oiseaux  en  ont-ils  mange?    4.  Le 
ble*  a-t-il  bien  pousse?   5.  Les  champs  ont-ils  jauni  tres  vite?   6.  Jau- 
nissent-ils  au  printemps?    7.  Qui  a  coupe  le  ble?    8.  Quand  Fa-t-on 
coupe?    9.  Ou  IVt-on  transported    10.  Qui  Fa  battu?    11.  A  qui 
1'avez-vous  vendu?    12.  A  qui  le  meunier  a-t-il  vendu  la  farine?  etc. 

D.  1.  We  ploughed  our  fields  in  spring.     2.  Then  we  sowed 
wheat  in  them.    3.  Did  the  birds  eat  much  of  it?    4.  They  didn't 
eat  much  of  it.    5.  The  wheat  grew  well.    6.  It  grew  very  quickly. 
7.  And  we  admired  the  fine  heads.     8.  Soon  these  heads  became 
yellow.     9.  They  became  yellow  during  the  summer.     10.  Wheat 
becomes  yellow  when  it  ripens.    11.  The  harvesters  have  cut  all 
our  wheat.    12.  They  have  been  threshing  it  to-day. 

E.  1.  The  wheat  has  been  taken  (use  on)  to  the  barn.    2.  We 
had  a  great  deal  of  it  (put  beaucoup  last).    3.  After  some  time  it 
was  threshed  (use  on).     4.  The  harvesters  threshed  it.     5.  Then 
we  sold  some  of  it  to  the  miller.    6.  But  he  didn't  get  (=  have)  all 
our  wheat.    7.  We  left  some  of  it  in  the  barn.    8.  We  gave  the 
straw  to  the  cows  and  sheep.    9.  The  miller  sold  his  flour  to  the 
baker.    10.  The  baker  sold  good  bread  to  the  public.    11.  Every- 
body ate  some  of  it.    12.  Did  you  have  some  of  it? 


LESSON  XXI 

49.  Agreement  of  Past  Participle.  —  1.  When  a  direct  object, 
noun  or  pronoun,  precedes  the  auxiliary  avoir  in  a  compound 
tense,  the  past  participle  agrees  in  gender  and  number  with 
that  direct  object: 

Quels  livres  a-t-il  achetes?  What  books  has  he  bought  f 

J'ai  vendu  mes  pommes.  /  have  sold  my  apples. 

Je  les  ai  vendues.     .  /  have  sold  them. 

La  viande  que  j'ai  achetee.  The  meat  that  I  have  bought. 

En  avez-vous  achete?  Have  you  bought  any  (of  it)? 

(a)  En  is  not  a  direct  object;  hence,  no  agreement. 


§  50]  LESSON  XXI  43 

2.  When  used  as  an  adjective,  the  past  participle  agrees  like 
an  adjective  (cf.  §  14). 

L'annee  passee.  Last  year. 

50.  Interrogative  Adj  ective 

SINGULAR  PLURAL 

m.  quel?  [kel],  f.  quelle?  [kel]  m.  quels?  [kel],  f.  quelles?  [kel] 

which?  what?  which?  what? 

Quel  livre?     Quelle  plume?  Which  (what)  book?     Which  (what) 


Quels  sont  vos  livres?  Which  are  your  books? 

(a)  In  exclamations  quel  =  what  a!  (sing.),  what!  (plur.). 

Quelle  belle  vue!    Quels  crimes!      What  a  fine  view!    What  crimes! 

EXERCISE  XXI 

acheter  [a$te],  buy  Pespece  [espes],  f.,  species,  kind 

aigre  [e:gr],  sour  Pheure  [oe:r],  f.,  hour 

Pan  [a],  m.,  year  le  panier  [panje],  basket 

Pannee  [ane],  f.,  year  passer  [pase],  pass,  spend  (time) 
le  client  [klia],  client,  customer,      la  perte  [pert],  loss 

patient  le  poirier  [pwarje],  pear  tree 

cueillir  [kcejiir],  pluck,  gather  revendre  [ravaidr],  sell  again 

donner  [done],  yield  tard  [tair],  late 
Pechelle  [e$el],  f.,  ladder 

Pannee  passee,  last  year;  de  bonne  heure,  early;  tous  les  ans  (jours), 

every  year  (day) 

A.  Continue:  1.  Voici  les  livres  que  j'ai  achetes,  .  .  .  que  tu  .  .  ., 
etc.    2.  Quelles  sont  les  langues  que  j'ai  etudiees?  . ..  .  que  tu  .  .  ., 
etc.    3.  Voila  la  maison  que  j'ai  vendue,  .  .  .  que  tu  .  .  .,  etc.    4.  Les 
legons  que  j'ai  finies,  .  .  .  que  tu  .  .  .,  etc.    5.  Le  livre  qui  m'a  amu- 
se(e),  .  .  .  qui  t'a  .  .  .,  etc. 

B.  1.  Dans  notre  verger  il  y  a  cent  poiriers.     2.  Us  nous  ont 
donne  beaucoup  de  poires  cette  annee.    3.  Us  en  donnent  beau- 
coup  tous  les  ans.    4.  Quelles  especes  de  poires  avez-vous?    5.  Nous 
en  avons  plusieurs.    6.  Nous  en  avons  de  douces  et  d'aigres.   7.  Nous 
en  avons  qui  murissent  de  bonne  heure  et  d'autres  qui  murissent 


44  LESSON   XXI  [§  50 

tard.  8.  On  les  a  de*ja  toutes  cueillies  sans  perte.  9.  Pour  les 
cueillir  on  a  des  echelles  et  des  paniers.  10.  Nous  les  avons  toutes 
vendues  dans  la  ville.  11.  M.  Liard  les  a  achetees.  12.  C'est  le 
meme  marchand  qui  a  achete*  nos  poires  Tannee  passee.  13.  Les 
poires  sont  chores  cette  anne*e.  14.  M.  Liard  les  a  re  vendues  a  ses 
clients.  15.  II  en  a  tire  de  gros  benefices. 

C.  (Oral.)     1.  Combien  de  poiriers  avez-vous?    2.  Est-ce  qu'ils 
ont  donne*  beaucoup  de  poires?    3.  Quelles  especes  de  poires  avez- 
vous?    4.  Murissent-elles  de  bonne  heure?    5.  Les  avez-vous  de*ja 
cueillies?    6.  Qu'a-t-on  pour  les  cueillir?    7.  En  avez-vous  perdu 
beaucoup?    8.  A-t-on  cueilli  les  poires  vertes?    9.  Ou  a-t-on  vendu 
les  poires?     10.  A  qui  les  avez-vous  vendues?     11.  Qui  est  M. 
Liard?    12.  A  qui  vend-il  des  poires?  etc. 

D.  1.  Our  pear  trees  yield  us  a  great  many  pears.    2.  We  have 
a  good  crop  of  them  every  year.    3.  We  have  had  many  kinds  of 
pears  this  year.    4.  We  have  gathered  them  already.    5.  They  were 
gathered  (use  on)  in  autumn.     6.  We  didn't  lose  any  of  them. 
7.  The  pears  ripened  early  this  year.     8.  Last  year  they  ripened 
late.    9.  We  have  sold  them  all.    10.  We  sold  them  to  our  customers. 
11.  What  pears  did  you  not  sell?  - 12.  We  didn't  sell  the  pears  which 
ripened  late.     13.  The  pears  we  didn't  sell  are  in   the  cellar. 
14.  Dealers  make  large  profits  from  our  apples  and  pears. 

E.  1.  Where  are  the  letters  which  the  postman  brought  me? 
2.  I  have  found  the  pen  which  you  lost.    3.  Here  are  the  gloves  I 
bought  you.    4.  The  lessons  we  had  to-day  are  too  long.    5.  What 
lessons  have  you  been  studying?    6.  What  books  have  you  brought 
me?     7.  What  pens  have  you  given  him?     8.  What  pupils  went 
with  you  to  school?    9.  What  trees  have  been  cut  down  (use  on)? 

10.  John  has  found  the  papers  which  you  have  been  looking  for. 

11.  These  are  interesting  books  which  you  have  given  me.  12.  These 
apples  that  I  have  bought  are  very  sour.     13.  We  have  baskets 
and  ladders  for  gathering  pears. 


151]  LESSON  XXII  45 


LESSON  XXII 

51.  Compound  Tenses  with  etre.  —  1.  From  etre  -f-  the  past 
participle  are  formed  the  compound  tenses  of  some  intransitive 
verbs  denoting  motion  or  change  of  condition;  such  are: 

aller,  go  monter,  go  up  retourner,  go  back 

arriver,  arrive  mourir,  die  revenir,  come  back 

descendre,  descend  naitre,  be  born  sortir,  go  (come)  out 

devenir,  become  partir,  set  out  tomber,  fall 

entrer,  enter  rentrer,  go  in  again  venir,  come 

(a)  Irregular  past  participles:  mort  (mourir),  n£  (naitre),  venu  (venir), 
e.g.  II  est  mort,  He  died  (or  is  dead) ;  II  est  n<§,  He  was  born. 

2.  The  past  participle  of  such  verbs  must  agree  with  the  sub- 
ject, like  an  adjective  (cf.  §  14): 

I  have  arrived  (I  arrived),  etc. 

je  suis  arrive  or  ee  nous  sommes  arrives  or  ees 

tu  es     arrive  or  ee  vous  etes        arrives  or  ees 

il  est   arrive  ils  sont        arrives 

elle  est   arrivee  elles  sont        arrivees 

(a)  The  auxiliary  is  to  be  translated  by  have. 


EXERCISE  XXII 

arriver  [arive],  arrive,  come  le  magasin  [magaze],  shop,  store 

la  beaute    [bote],   beauty,  fine  magnifique  [majiifik],  magnificent 

sight  (thing)  le  matin  [mate],  morning 

chez  [$e],  at  the  house  (etc.)  of  par  [par],  by,  through 

la  chose  [$o:z],  thing  le  pare  [park],  park 

entrer  [atre]  dans,  enter,  go  into  partir  [partiir],  set  out,  start,  leave 

faire  [feir],  do,  make  rentrer  [ratre],  go  (come)  in  again, 
fait  [fe],  p.  part,  of  faire  go  (come)  home 

hier  [je:r],  yesterday  la  rue  [ry],  street 

lointain  [Iwete],  distant  le  soir  [swair],  evening 

Louise  [Iwiiz],  Louisa  sortir  [sortiir],  go  (come)  out 

chez  mon  pere,  at  the  house  (place  of  business,  etc.)  of  my  father,  at  my 
father's;  faire  une  promenade,  take  a  walk  (drive,  etc.). 


46  LESSON   XXII  [§51 

A.  Continue:  1.  Je  suis  arrive*  (e)  ce  matin,  etc.    2.  Je  suis  par- 
ti (e)  hier,  etc.    3.  Je  ne  suis  pas  entre(e)  dans  la  salle,  etc.    4.  Je 
n'y  suis  pas  entre*(e),  etc.    5.  Est-ce  que  je  suis  sorti(e)  de  1'eglise? 
es-tu  .  .  .  etc.    6.  Je  n'en  suis  pas  sorti(e),  etc. 

B.  Put  into  the  past  indefinite,  supplying  proper  auxiliary  and 
past  participle:  1.  Ces  dames  .  .  .  sortir.   2.  Quand  .  .  .  -vous  arriver, 
mademoiselle?     3.  Je  ...  arriver  hier.    4.  Est-ce  que  vos  sceurs 
. . .  partir?  5.  Form  additional  examples  employing  the  verbs  in  §  51. 

C.  1.  Nous  sommes  arrives  hier  soir  chez  nos  cousins  qui  de- 
meurent  dans  une  ville  lointaine.    2.  Ce  matin  nous  sommes  partis 
de  bonne  heure  pour  faire  une  promenade.     3.  Nos  cousins  nous 
ont  accompagne*s  pour  nous  montrer  les  beautes  de  la  ville.    4.  II  y 
a  un  tr&s  beau  pare  dans  cette  ville.    5.  Nous  y  avons  passe  quelque 
temps,  et  ensuite  nous  sommes  entry's  dans  une  belle  eglise  qui 
nous  a  beaucoup  interesse*s.     6.  Quand  nous  sommes  sortis  de 
l^glise  nous  sommes  entres  dans  un  grand  magasin.    7.  Nous  n'y 
avons  pas  achete  beaucoup  de  choses.    8.  Mais  nous  avons  admir6 
les  belles  choses  que  nous  y  avons  vues.     9.  Puis  nous  sommes 
sortis  du  magasin  et  nous  sommes  rentre*s  chez  nos  cousins  par  une 
rue  magnifique. 

D.  (Oral.)     1.  Ou  demeurent  vos  cousins?    2.  Quand  etes-vous 
partis?    3.  Quand  etes-vous  arrives?     4.  Est-ce  une  belle  ville  que 
vous  avez  vue?    5.  fites-vous  sortis?    6.  Pourquoi?    7.  Qui  vous 
a  accompagnes?    8.  fites-vous  partis  de  bonne  heure?    9.  Les  rues 
de  cette  ville  sont-elles  belles?    10.  Les  avez-vous  admir£es?    11.  Ou 
etes-vous  entres?    12.  Qu'est-ce  que  vous  avez  fait  ensuite?    13.  Et 
alors  qu'avez-vous  fait?  etc. 

E.  1.  Our  cousins  arrived  this  morning.    2.  This  morning  they 
went  out  to  (pour)  take  a  walk.    3.  My  brother  accompanied  them. 
4.  They  set  out  together.    5.  He  showed  them  the  fine  sights  of  the 
city.    6.  First  they  went  into  a  magnificent  park.    7.  They  didn't 
spend  much  time  there.    8.  Then  they  went  into  the  old  church 
which  you  (on)  see  beside  the  park.    9.  It  is  a  very  beautiful  church. 
10.  My  cousins  admired  it  very  much.    11.  When  they  came  out  of 
the  church  they  went  into  one  of  the  fine  stores.    12,  Afterwards 
they  went  home. 


§53]  LESSON  XXIII  47 

F.  1.  Have  your  cousins  arrived?  2.  Louisa  arrived  yesterday, 
but  Charles  and  his  brother  haven't  come  yet.  3.  My  mother  has 
gone  out  with  my  cousin  (/.)  to  show  her  the  city.  4.  They  went 
out  together  this  morning.  5.  They  set  out  early.  6.  They  went 
into  one  of  the  large  stores.  7.  Have  they  come  home  yet  (deja)? 

8.  Yes,  they  returned  home  through  one  of  our  magnificent  streets. 

9.  My  mother  has  been  showing  us  the  fine  things  that  they  bought. 
t  10.  We  admired  them  very  much.    11.  Charles  and  his  brother  are 

here  now.  12.  They  arrived  this  evening  very  late.  13.  We  are 
all  glad  to  (de)  see  them.  14.  My  aunt  was  born  and  she  died  in 
this  city. 

LESSON  XXIII 
62.  Disjunctive  Personal  Pronouns 

SINGULAB  PLURAL 

moi  [mwa],  I,  me  nous  [nu],  we,  us 

toi  [twa],  thou,  thee,  you  vous  [vu],  you 

lui  [Iqi],  he,  him  eux  [0],  they  (m.),  them  (m.) 

elle  [el],  she,  her  elles  [el],  they  (f.),  them  (f.) 

soi  [swa],  oneself,  himself,  etc. 

(a)  These  forms  regularly  denote  persons,  and  are  called  "disjunctive" 
because  they  may  be  used  apart  from  the  verb. 

(6)  The  ordinary  rule  of  agreement  applies  (cf.  §  7). 

5,3.  Disjunctives  with  Prepositions.  —  A  personal  pronoun 
governed  by  a  preposition  takes  the  disjunctive  form: 

II  parle  de  moi  (toi,  eux,  etc.).         He  speaks  of  me  (you,  them,  etc.). 

EXERCISE  XXIII 

Alice  [alis],  Alice  avant  [ava],  prep.,  before  (of  time) 

apres  [apre],  prep.,  after  le  voisin  [vwaze],  neighbour 

a  qui  est  cette  maison?  to  whom  does  that  house  belong?  or  whose  house 
'is  that?  elle  est  a  mon  pere,  it  belongs  to  my  father  (is  my  father's) ; 
elle  est  a  lui,  it  belongs  to  him  (it  is  his) ;  mon  cousin  est  chez  nous, 
my  cousin  is  at  our  house;  notre  voisin  n'est  pas  chez  lui  (or  a  la 
maison)  aujourd'hui,  our  neighbour  is  not  at  home  to-day;  je  suis  arrive 
tard  chez  moi  (or  a  la  maison),  /  arrived  home  late;  tout  le  monde 
est  chez  soi,  everybody  is  at  home 


48  LESSON  XXIV  [§54 

A.  Continue:  1.  Mes  amis  sont  chez  moi,  .  .  .  chez  toi,  etc.    2.  Je 
ne  suis  pas  chez  moi,  tu  .  .  .  toi,  etc.    3.  Ce  livre  est-il  a  moi,  ...  a 
toi?  etc.   4.  II  n'est  pas  a  moi, ...  a  toi,  etc.    5.  Ce  matin  on  a  parle 
de  moi, .  .  .  de  toi,  etc.    6.  Charles  est  arrive  avant  moi, .  .  .  toi,  etc. 

B.  1.  Our  neighbours  are  not  at  home  to-day.    2.  My  mother  is 
not  at  home.    3.  Our  cousins  are  at  our  house.    4.  My  little  sisters 
are  playing  with  them.    5.  Alice  is  playing  with  Louisa.    6.  She  is 
playing  with  her.    7.  Why  do  you  not  play  with  me?    8.  This  pic- 
ture is  for  you  (thee).    9.  This  pencil  is  mine.    10.  Those  pencils 
are  theirs  (/.).    11.  Have  you  been  at  your  uncle's?    12.  We  haven't 
been  at  his  house  this  summer.    13.  Whose  keys  are  these? 

C.  1.  There  is  our  teacher.    2.  We  have  been  speaking  of  him. 
3.  He  spoke  of  you  (thee)  and  me  in  school  to-day.    4.  He  is  not 
pleased  with  (de)  me.    5.  Charles  arrived  before  me.    6.  I  arrived 
after  him.    7.  We  arrived  after  them  (/.).    8.  Are  these  letters  for 
them?     9.  Do  these  pens  belong  to  Louisa?     10.  Yes,  they  are 
hers.     11.  They  are  not  mine.     12.  Does  Mr.  Liard  live  here? 
13.  He  does,  but  he  is  not  at  home. 


LESSON  XXIV 

54.  Disjunctives  continued.  —  In  addition  to  their  use  after 
prepositions  (§  53),  they  are  employed  as  follows:  — 

1.  As  the  real  (or  logical)  subject  with  ce  (cf.  §  35): 

C'est  moi  (toi,  lui,  elle,  nous,         It  is  I  (thou,  he,  she,  we,  you),  it  is 

vous),  ce  sont  eux  (elles).  they. 

Est-ce  moi  (toi,  lui,  elle,  nous,  7s  it  I  (thou,  he,  she,  we,  you),  is  it 

vous),  sont-ce  eux  (elles)?  they? 

(a)  In  the  third  plural  c'est  eux  (elles),  est-ce  eux  (elles)?  are  often  found. 

2.  When  a  verb  is  implied,  but  not  expressed: 

Qui  est  la?  —  Moi  (eux,  elle).          Who  is  there?  —  I  (they,  she). 
Qui  as-tu  vu?  —  Lui  (elles).  Whom  did  you  see?  —  Him  (them), 

3.  In  comparisons,  and  after  ne  .  .  .  que: 

II  est  plus  grand  que  moi.  He  is  taller  than  7. 

II  ne  chante  pas  comine  eux.  He  does  not  sing  as  they  do. 

Je  n'ai  vu  que  lui.  7  saw  him  only. 


§  55]  LESSON  XXIV  49 

4.  In  appositions,  often  with  the  emphatic  addition  of  meme : 
Moi  je  1'ai  entendu  aussi.  I  heard  it  too. 

Vous  Favez  vu  vous-meme(s).         You  saw  it  your  self  (-selves). 

5.  When  the  subject  or  object  is  compound: 

Vous  et  lui  (vous)  Pavez  fait.  You  and  he  have  done  it. 

Son  ami  et  lui  sont  ici.  His  friend  and  he  are  here. 

Je  vous  vois,  toi  et  ton  frere.  /  see  you  and  your  brother. 

6.  Soi  regularly  has  indefinite  or  general  force: 
Chacun  pour  soi.  Everybody  for  himself. 
But:  II  est  content  de  lui  (-meme).  He  is  satisfied  with  himself . 

55.  Present  Indicative  of  voir  (irreg.),  'see' 

7  see,  7  am  seeing,  I  do  see,  etc. 

je  vois  [vwa]  nous  voyons  [vwajo] 

tu  vois  [vwa]  vous  voyez     [vwaje] 

il  voit  [vwa]  ils  voient    [vwa] 

EXERCISE  XXIV 

Pauteur  [otoeir],  m.,  author  oh  [o],  oh 

bien  [bje],  indeed,  truly  ,  penser  [pase],  think 

le  colonel  [kolonel],  colonel  la  piece  [pjes],  play  (theatre) 

comme  [kom],  as,  like  pres  de  [pre  da],  near 

la  comtesse  [kotes],  countess  le  rdle  [roil],  role,  part 

la  connaissance  [konesais],   ac-      le  theatre  [teaitr],  theatre 

quaintance  vrai  [vre],  true 
la'loge  [bis],  box  (theatre) 

en  effet  [efe],  in  fact,  indeed,  it  is  true;  de  Pautre  c6te,  on  the  other  side, 
over  there;  c'est  vrai,  it  (that)  is  true;  c'est  votre  ami,  n'est-ce  pas? 
it  is  your  friend,  is  it  not?  mais  non,  no,  no! 

A.  Continue:  1.  C'est  moi  qui  1'ai  trouve*,  c'est  toi  qui  Fas  .  .  . 
-etc.  2.  Est-ce  moi  qui  1'ai  perdu?  etc.  3.  Ce  n'est  pas  moi,  ce 
n'est  pas  toi,  etc.  4.  N'est-ce  pas  moi?  etc. 

B.  (Un  frere  et  une  so3ur  au  theatre)  1.  C'est  une  pi£ce  de  (by) 
Labiche,  n'est-ce  pas?  —  2.  Oui,  c'est  lui  qui  en  est  Tauteur.  — 
3.  C'est  Coquelin  qui  joue  le  role  de  M.  Perrichon?  —  4.  Oui,  c'est 
lui.  —  5.  Y  a-t-il  de  nos  connaissances  au  theatre  ce  soir?  —  6.  Oh 
•oui;  voil&  la-bas  deux  de  mes  amies.  —  7.  En  effet  ce  sont  elles.  — 


50  LESSON  XXV  [§56 

8.  Et  voila  de  1'autre  cote*  trois  de  tes  amis.  —  9.  C'est  vrai;  ce 
sont  eux.  Us  nous  regardent.  Us  nous  saluent.  Derriere  eux  dans 
une  loge  on  voit  [le]  colonel  D.  —  10.  Oui,  c'est  bien  lui.  Pres  de 
lui  dans  cette  autre  loge  je  vois  la  comtesse  de  B.  —  11.  Mais  non, 
ce  n'est  pas  elle,  je  pense.  — 12.  Qui  est-ce  alors?  — 13.  C'est  la 
dame  que  nous  avons  rencontre*e  chez  la  comtesse.  —  14.  Son  frere 
est  avec  elle,  n'est-ce  pas?  — 15.  Oui,  elle  et  lui  sont  toujours  en- 
semble comme  toi  et  moi. 

C.  (Oral  on  B,  above.) 

D.  1.  Is  Augier  the  author  of  this  play?    2.  He  is  not  ( =  it  is 
not  he).    3.  It  is  Labiche.    4.  It  is  not  he  who  plays  the  role  of 
Perrichon.     5.  That  is  Coquelin.     6.  Is  it  (the)  countess  (of)  B. 
whom  we  (on)  see  in  that  box?    7.  It  is.    8.  Who  is  that  lady  beside 
her?    9.  It  is  Mrs.  D.  whom  we  saw  at  her  house.    10.  Did  I  not 
see  her  at  your  house?    11.  It  was  (is)  her  sister  whom  you  saw  at 
my  house.    12.  (The)  Colonel  B.  is  in  the  other  box.    13.  His  wife 
is  with  him.    14.  It  is  they  who  live  near  us. 

E.  1.  It  is  I.    2.  It  is  they  (ra.).    3.  It  is  they  (/.)  isn't  it?   4.  Is 
it  they  (ra.)?    5.  Is  that  you?    6.  It  is.    7.  I  was  there  myself. 
8.  You  saw  him  yourselves.    9.  This  book  is  mine.    10.  It  belongs 
to  me.     11.  I  bought  it  myself  in  the  city.     12.  Mary  and  her 
brother  are  here.     13.  She  and  her  brother  are  playing  with  us. 
14.  She  and  he  are  always  together.    15.  It  is  they  who  are  going 
with  us.    16.  Who  has  seen  that  play  by  Labiche?    17.  I  [have]. 


LESSON  XXV 

56.  Comparatives.  —  1.  To  form  comparatives,  plus  =  more, 
moins  =  less,  or  aussi  =  as,  is  placed  before  the  adjective,  and 
que  =  than  or  as  after  it: 

II  est  plus  grand  que  Jean.  He  is  taller  than  John. 

II  est  moins  grand  que  moi.  He  is  not  so  tall  as  I. 

II  est  aussi  grand  qu'elle.  He  is  as  tall  as  she. 

2.  With  a  negative,  aussi  generally  becomes  si: 

II  n'est  pas  si  grand  (or  il  est         He  is  not  so  tall  as  I. 
moins  grand)  que  moi. 


§59]  LESSON  XXV  51 

57.  Superlatives.  —  1.  To    form    superlatives,    the    definite 
article  or  a  possessive  adjective  precedes  plus,  moins: 

Elle  est  la  plus  (moins)  aimable.    She  is  the  most  (least)  amiable.    . 
C'est  mon  meilleur  ami.  He  is  my  best  friend. 

OBSERVE.  —  La  plus  jeune  des  deux.     The  younger  of  the  two. 

2.  The  definite  article  must  not  be  omitted  when  the  adjective 
follows  the  noun: 

La  Ie9on  la  plus  difficile.  The  most  difficult  lesson. 

3.  After  a  superlative,  in  =  de  in  such  sentences  as: 

La  plus  jeune  de  la  classe.  The  youngest  (girl)  in  the  class. 

58.  Irregular  Comparison.  —  Observe  the  following: 
bon,  good  meilleur,  better  le  meilleur,  the  best 
mauvais,  bad            pire,  worse                   le  pire,  the  worst 
petit,  small                moindre,  less  le  moindre,  the  least 

(a)  Pire  is  less  common  than  plus  mauvais,  and  serves  also  as  a  compara- 
tive to  mechant,  bad,  evil,  wicked. 

(b)  In  general,  moindre  =  less  (in  importance),  plus  petit  =  smaller,  less 
(in  size). 

5&.  Comparison  of  Adverbs.  —  1.  They  are  regularly  com- 
pared like  adjectives,  but  le  of  the  superlative  is  invariable: 
Plus  (moins,  aussi)  facilement.      More  (less,  as)  easily. 
Le  plus  (moins)  souvent.  (The)  most  (least)  frequently. 

2.  But  observe  the  irregular  forms: 

bien,  well      mieux,  better  beaucoup,  much       plus,  more 

1  badl     I  P*S  °r  plUS  mal'          pCU'  ^e  moins,  less 

'        y  \     worse 

3.  Plus  (moins),  as  adverb  of  quantity,  requires  de  (=  than) 
before  a  numeral: 

II  en  a  plus  de  dix  livres.  He  has  more  than  ten  pounds  of  it* 

EXERCISE  XXV 

A.  Continue:  1.  Je  suis  plus  grand  que  Jean,  tu  .  .  .  etc.  2.  II 
est  moins  fort  que  moi,  .  .  .  toi,  etc.  3.  Est-ce  que  je  suis  plus  petite 
qu'elle?  es-tu  .  .  .?  etc.  4.  Je  suis  la  meilleure  eleve  de  la  classe, 
tu,  etc.  5.  N'ai-je  pas  la  legon  la  plus  difficile?  etc.  6.  J'ai  vendu 


52  LESSON  XXVI  [§60 

mes  meilleures  pommes,  tu  .  .  .  tes,  etc.  7.  Est-ce  que  j'aime 
mieux  les  fleurs  rouges?  aimes-tu  .  .  .  ?  etc.  8.  J'en  ai  moins  de 
deux  livres,  tu,  etc. 

B.  1.  I  am  as  tall  as  you.    2.  But  I  am  not  so  strong  as  you. 
3.  You  are  taller  than  your  brother,  are  you  not?    4.  John  is  as 
tall  and  as  strong  as  he.    5.  The  pears  are  not  so  ripe  as  the  apples. 
6.  John's  lesson  is  very  difficult.    7.  He  has  the  most  difficult  les- 
son.   8.  His  lesson  is  the  most  difficult  of  all  the  lessons.    9.  Alice 
is  the  most  industrious  pupil  in  our  class.    10.  George  skates  better 
than  I.    11.  He  doesn't  skate  as  well  as  you.    12.  He  skates  very 
badly,  in  fact.     13.  But  we  skate  oftener  than  he.    14.  He  skates 
very  little. 

C.  1.  The  grass  is  less  abundant  in  this  field.    2.  Your  house  is 
the  oldest  house  in  the  town.     3.  Our  house  is  much  better;  we 
like  iu  better.    4.  Our  neighbours'  house  is  larger.    5.  This  picture 
is  still  worse  than  the  other.    6.  It  is  a  picture  without  the  least 
merit.    7.  Charles  always  arrives  at  school  later  than  I.    8.  Here  is 
the  most  interesting  of  my  books.     9.  These  pens  are  very  bad. 
10.  Those  pens  are  still  worse.    11.  I  have  bought  more  than  four 
pounds  of  meat.    12.  I  wish  two  pounds  of  your  best  tea.    13.  You 
always  arrive  later  than  the  others.     14.  And  you  work  still  less 
than  they.     15.  I  have  more  friends  than  you.     16.  I  have  fewer 
{ =  less)  friends,  but  I  have  more  money. 

LESSON  XXVI 

60.  The  Infinitive.  —  The  commoner  uses  of  the  infinitive 

are:  — 

1.  Following  directly  after  certain  verbs,  such  as: 
aller,  go  faire,  make,  cause          savoir,  know  how  to 

desirer,  desire  falloir,  be  necessary       voir,  see 

devoir,  owe  laisser,  let  vouloir,  will,  wish 

esperer,  hope  pouvoir,  be  able,  can 

Pouvez-vous  me  preter  de  1'encre?      Can  you  lend  me  some  ink? 

Nous  aliens  acheter  du  the*.  We  are  going  to  buy  some  tea. 

Desire-t-il  nous  parler?  Does  he  wish  to  speak  to  us? 

II  faut  acheter  de  la  viande.  We  (you,  etc.)  must  buy  some  meat. 


62]  LESSON  XXVI  53 

2.  Preceded  by  de  after  many  verbs,  such  as: 
cesser,  cease  ordonner,  order  refuser,  refuse 
dire,  tell                    prier,  beg,  request          tacher,  attempt,  try 
eviter,  avoid 

Elle  a  cesse  de  chanter.  She  has  ceased  singing. 

Je  vous  prie  de  m'ecouter.  I  beg  you  to  listen  to  me. 

3.  Preceded  by  de  after  nouns  and  some  adjectives: 
Le  crime  de  voler.  The  crime  of  stealing. 
Je  suis  content  de  vous  voir.        7  am  glad  to  see  you. 

4.  Preceded  by  a  after  many  verbs,  such  as: 

aimer,  like  enseigner,  teach  reussir,  succeed 

apprendre,  learn       inviter,  invite 
Je  les  ai  invites  a  rester.  /  invited  them  to  stay. 

J'aime  (a)  patiner.  I  like  to  skate, 

(a)  a  after  aimer  is  sometimes  omitted. 

5.  Preceded  by  £  after  some  adjectives: 

Je  suis  pr£t  a  partir.  7  am  ready  to  set  out  (go). 

Get  ouvrage  est  facile  &  faire.       That  work  is  easy  to  do. 

6.  Preceded  by  prepositions  other  than  de  or  a: 

J'ai  parle  sans  penser.  7  spoke  without  thinking. 

II  ecoute  pour  apprendre.  He  listens  in  order  to  learn. 

7.  Observe  its  use  to  render  English  forms  in  -ing: 
II  parle  de  partir.  He  speaks  of  going. 

II  est  parti  sans  nous  parler.         He  went  without  speaking  to  us. 

61.  Present  Indicative  of  alter  (irreg.) 

7  go,  I  am  going,  I  do  go,  etc. 
je  vais  [ve]  nous  aliens  [alo] 

tu  vas  [va]  ,  vous  allez     [ale] 

il  va    [va]  ils  vont    [vo] 

62.  Present  Indicative  of  pouvoir  (irreg.) 

7  am  able  to,  I  can,  I  may,  etc. 

je  peux  or  puis  [p0,  pqi]  nous  pouvons  [puvo] 

tu  peux  [p0]  vous  pouvez     [puve] 

il  peut  [p0]  ils  peuvent  [pceiv] 

(a)  In  questions:  puis-je?  or  est-ce  que  je  peux  (puis)? 


54  LESSON  XXVI  [§62 

EXERCISE  XXVI 

diner  [dine],  vb.,  dine  le  morceau  [morso],  piece,  bit 
le  diner  [dine],  dinner  Poeuf  [cef],  m.,  pi.  oeufs  [0],  egg 
il  faut  [fo],  pres.  indie,  of  falloir,  offrir  [ofriir],  offer- 
it  is  necessary  Pomelette  [omlet],  f.,  omelet 
le  fruit  [frqi],  fruit  orner  [orne],  ornament,  decorate 
Pintention  [etasjo],  f.,  intention  reussir  [reysiir],  succeed 
inviter  [evite],  invite  six  [sis],  six 
le  legume  [legym],  vegetable  tacher  [ta$e],  attempt,  try 
le  marche  [mar$e],  market  venir  [voni:r],  come 

avoir  Pintention  de,  intend  to;  il  faut  acheter,  one  (we,  you,  they,  etc.) 
must  buy;  il  lui  (nous,  etc.)  faut  acheter,  he  (we,  etc.)  must  buy 

A.  Continue:  1.  Je  vais  acheter  de  bons  legumes,  tu  .  .  .,  etc. 
2.  Je  ne  peux  pas  en  trouver.     3.  Je  suis  rentre(e)  sans  en  •ache- 
ter.    4.  Puis-je  trouver  des  fruits  au  marche*?    5.  J'ai  re*ussi  a  en 
trouver  de  tres  bons.     6.  Je  tache  de  faire  une  bonne  omelette. 
7.  J'ai  Fintention  d'inviter  des  amis  a  diner.     8.  Je   suis   con- 
tent(e)  de  les  voir.    9.  Je  ne  suis  pas  pret(e)  a  partir.    10.  Je  les 
vois  venir. 

B.  (Madame  X.  et  sa  bonne)     1.  Nous  avons  invite  des  amis  a 
diner  ce  soir.    2.  Nous  allons  en  avoir  six.    3.  Je  vais  au  marche 
et  vous  allez  m'accompagner,  Louise.  —  4.  Bien,  madame,  j'ai  mon 
pariier.    5.  Je  suis  prete  a  partir.  —  6.  Pouvons-nous  trouver  main- 
tenant  de  bons  legumes  au  marche?  —  7.  Oh,  oui,  on  peut  en  avoir 
(get)  de  tres  bons,  je  pense.  —  8.  J'ai  aussi  1'intention  d'acheter  des 
ceufs  pour  faire  une  omelette.  —  9.  Les  bons  oeufs  sont  souvent 
difficiles  a  trouver,  mais  on  reussit  quelquefois  a  en  avoir.  —  10.  II 
faut  chercher  aussi  un  bon  morceau  de  viande.    11.  Les  bons  mor- 
ceaux  ne  sont  pas  tou jours  faciles  a  trouver.     12.  Mais  nous  allons 
tacher  d'en  avoir.  —  13.  II  faut  acheter  des  fruits  et  aussi  des  fleurs 
pour  orner  la  table.     14.  Nous  sommes  contents  de  voir  nos  amis 
quand  nous  avons  un  bon  diner  a  leur  offrir. 

C.  (Oral.)    1.  Votre  mere  invite-t-elle  des  amis  a  diner?    2.  Com- 
bien  d'amis  va-t-elle  avoir  a  table  ce  soir?    3.  Qui  va  Taccompagner 
au  marche?   4.  Sont-elles  pretes  a  partir?   5.  Sont-elles  dej a  parties? 
6.  Que  cherchent-elles  d'abord  au  marche?    7.  Peut-on  trouver  de 


§63]  LESSON  XXVII  55 

bons  legumes  au  marche?  8.  Potirquoi  va-t-elle  acheter  des  ceufs? 
9.  Les  bons  ceufs  sont-ils  faciles  a  trouver?  10.  A-t-elle  reussi  & 
en  trouver?  11.  Pourquoi  va-t-elle  acheter  des  fleurs?  etc. 

Z).  1.  I  am  going  to  invite  some  friends  to  dinner  (to  dine). 
2.  Are  you  going  to  the  market?  3.  Yes,  I  am  (going  there).  4.  You 
can  go  with  me,  can't  you?  5.  Here  is  my  basket;  I  am  ready  to  go. 
6.  Can  we  (on)  find  good  vegetables  in  the  market  to-day?  7.  Yes, 
I  saw  some  very  good  ones.  8.  Do  you  not  intend  to  buy  some  eggs? 
9.  Are  you  going  to  make  an  omelet?  10.  An  omelet  is  easy  to 
make  when  one  has  good  eggs.  11.  Good  eggs  are  not  always  easy 
to  find.  12.  I  am  trying  to  find  some.  13.  I  have  succeeded  in 
finding  some.  14.  We  must  buy  a  good  piece  of  meat.  15.  I 
intend  to  have  cherries  or  strawberries. 

E.  1.  Good  meat  is  hard  to  find.  2.  You  (on)  can  always  find 
good  meat  at  Mr.  Liard's.  3.  Have  you  bought  the  flowers?  4.  We 
must  have  some  to  decorate  the  table.  5.  I  am  not  going  to  buy 
any.  6.  Can  we  not  gather  some  in  the  garden?  7.  Now  we  are 
going  to  look  for  some  fruit  (plur.).  8.  We  must  buy  some  fruit. 
9.  I  intend  to  buy  a  great  deal  of  it.  10.  Are  you  glad  to  see  your 
friends?  11.  Yes,  I  am  glad  to  see  them.  12.  Have  you  a  good 
dinner  to  offer  them?  13.  Yes,  we  are  going  to  give  (offrir)  them  a 
good  dinner.  14.  We  have  invited  them  to  come  early.  15.  We  ' 
see  them  coming.  16.  You  can't  speak  French  without  studying  a 
great  deal. 

LESSON  XXVII 

63.        Imperfect  Indicative  of  donner,finir,  vendre 

I  was  giving,  etc.  I  was  finishing,  etc.          I  was  setting,  etc. 

je  donnais      [done]  finissais      [finise]  vendais      [vade] 

tu  donnais      [done]  finissais      [finise]  vendais      [vade] 

il  donnait      [done]  finissait      [finise]  vendait      [vade] 

nous  dpnnions    [don jo]  finissions    [finis jo]  vendions   [vadjo] 

vous  donniez      [donje]  finissiez      [finisje]  vendiez      [vadje] 

ils  donnaient  [done]  finissaient  [finise]  vendaient  [vade] 


56  LESSON  XXVII  [§64 

64.  Imperfect  Indicative  of  avoir  and  etre 

I  had,  used  to  have,  etc.  I  was,  used  to  be,  etc. 

j 'avais      [ave]  j'e*tais      [ete] 

tu  avais      [ave]  tu  etais      [ete] 

il  avait      [ave]  il  etait      [ete] 

nous  avions    [avjo]  nous  e*tions   [etjo] 

vous  aviez      [avje]  vous  e*tiez      [etje] 

ils  avaient  [ave]  ils  etaient  [ete] 

65.  Use  of  Imperfect.  —  1.  It  denotes  what  used  to  happen 
or  continued  to  happen: 

Nous  parlions  souvent  de  vous.   We  often  used  to  speak  oj  you. 
II  perdait  souvent  sa  plume.        He  would  often  lose  his  pen. 
Mon  oncle  etait  tres  vieux.  My  uncle  was  very  old. 

2.  It  denotes  what  was  happening  when  something  else  hap- 
pened (cf.  §  47)  or  was  happening: 

On  chantait  quand  je  suis  venu.    They  were  singing  when  I  came. 
II   parlait  pendant  que   nous    He   was  speaking  while  we  sang 
chantions.  (were  singing). 

66.  Present  and  Imperfect  Indicative  of  faire  (irreg.) 

/  do,  am  doing,  etc.  I  was  doing,  etc. 

je  fais        [fe]  je  faisais      [faze] 

tu  fais        [fe]  tu  faisais      [faze] 

ilfait        [fe]  il  f aisait      [faze] 

nous  faisons  [fazo]  nous  faisions   [fazjo] 

vous  faites    [fet]  vous  faisiez      [fazje] 

ils  font       [f 5]  ils  faisaient  [faze] 

67.  The  Pluperfect.  —  The  pluperfect  of  a  verb  is  formed 
by  adding  its  past  participle  to  the  imperfect  of  avoir  or  etre 
(cf.  §§  45,  51),  thus: 

I  had  given,  etc.  I  had  arrived,  etc. 

j 'avais  donne*  j'e*tais  arrive"  (e) 

tu  avais  donne",  etc.  tu  etais  arrive*  (e),  etc. 


1 67]  LESSON  XXVII  57 


EXERCISE  XXVII 

Pabeille  [abeij],  f.,  bee  le  miel  [mjel],  honey 

arracher  [araje],  tear  out  (up)  la  mouche  [mu$],  fly 

attraper  [atrape],  catch,  capture  le  nid  [ni],  nest 

chanter  Rate],  sing  la  nuance  [nqais],  shade  (of  colour) 

clair  [kleir],  clear,  bright  Pouvrage  [uvrais],  m.,  work 

commencer  [komase],  begin  pendant    que    [padd    ka],    while, 
couler  [kule],  run  (of  liquids)  whilst 

Peau  [o],  f .,  water  le  poisson  [pwaso],  fish 

hors  de  [oir  do],  prep.,  out  of  le  ruisseau  [rqiso],  brook,  stream 

jamais  [same],  ever  sauter  [sote],  leap,  jump 

le  jour  [suir],  day  sauvage  [sovais],  wild 

ne  .  .  .  jamais     [n9  ,  .  .  same],  terminer  [termine],  finish,  complete 

never  voler  [vole],  fly 

etre  en  fleur(s),  be  in  flower,  blossom,  bloom;  de  branche  en  branche, 
from  branch  to  branch;  de  temps  en  temps,  from  time  to  timet  now  and 
then,  occasionally;  il  y  avait,  there  was,  there  were. 

A.  Continue:  1.  Je  jouais  et  chantais  tout  le  temps,  tu,  etc.  2.  Je 
faisais  souvent  une  promenade.    3.  Est-ce  que  je  ne  finissais  pas 
mes  legons?    4.  J'etais  chez  moi  alors.    5.  J'etais  arrive*  avant  lui. 
6.  Je  vendais  mes  pommes  aux  marchands.    7.  J'avais  termine  mon 
ouvrage  quand  ils  sont  arrives.    8.  N'y  avait-il  pas  de  plumes  dans 
ma  boite?    9.  Qu'est-ce  qfue  je  fais  (faisais)? 

B.  1.  J'ai  fait  1'autre  jour  une  promenade  aux  bois.    2.  C'e'tait 
un  beau  jour  de  printemps.     3.  Les  feuilles  avaient  commence  a. 
pousser.     4.  Elles  e*taient  de  toutes  les  nuances.     5.  II  y  avait 
meme  des  arbres  qui  e*taient  en  fleur(s) .    6.  Les  e*cureuils  sautaient 
de  branche  en  branche.    7.  Les  oiseaux  volaient  d'arbre  en  arbre. 
8.  Ils  chantaient  pendant  qu'ils  faisaient  leurs  nids.    9.  J'ai  trouvd 
de  jolies  petites  fleurs  sauvages.    10.  Je  n'en  ai  pas  cueilli.    11.  Je 
n'arrache  jamais  les  fleurs  sauvages.    12.  II  y  avait  aussi  des  abeilles 
qui  cherchaient  du  miel  de  fleur  en  fleur.     13.  L'eau  du  ruisseau 
coulait  claire  et  abondante.    14.  Les  poissons  y  jouaient  et  sautaient 
hors  de  Feau  de  temps  en  temps  pour  attraper  les  mouches. 

C.  (Oral  exercise  on  B,  above.) 


58 


LESSON  XXVIII 


[§68 


(Be  careful  to  distinguish  between  the  imperfect  and  past  indefinite  in  D 
and  E.) 

D.  1.  What  were  you  doing  the  other  day?    2.  I  was  taking  a 
walk  in  the  woods.    3.  I  spent  some  (quelque)  time  in  the  fields  also. 
4.  It  was  a  beautiful  spring  day.     5.  I  saw  many  little  animals. 

6.  The  squirrels  were  playing  in  the  trees.    7.  They  were  jumping 
from  tree  to  tree.    8.  The  woods  were  full  of  wild  flowers.    9.  There 
were  flowers  of  all  (the)  shades.     10.  The  birds  were  very  merry. 
11.  They  had  begun  to  make  their  nests.    12.  And  they  sang  while 
they  were  building  (faire)  them.    13.  The  bees  were  flying  from 
flower  to  flower.    14.  The  clear  water  was  flowing  in  the  streams. 
15.  Now  and  then  a  fish  would  jump  out  of  the  water.    16.  It  was 
trying  to  catch  the  flies. 

E.  1.  When  I  was  at  school  I  used  to  play  a  great  deal.    2.  I 
was  very  fond  of  skating.    3.  We  were  speaking  of  you  this  morning. 
4.  I  had  finished  my  work  when  the  postman  came.    5.  I  had  com- 
pleted it  already.    6.  We  used  to  sell  all  our  apples  to  Mr.  Liard. 

7.  He  made  large  profits  from  them.    8.  But  we  didn't  sell  him  any 
apples  this  autumn.    9.  We  were  at  the  door  of  the  house  when  you 
were  passing  in  the  street.     10.  You  were  playing  while  we  were 
working.     11.  The  apples  were  ripening,  but  the  pears  were  still 
green.     12.  Robert  never  used  to  lose  his  books.     13.  He  would 
never  come  (arriver)  late  to  school.    14.  The  teacher  was  not  pleased 
with  him.    15.  Did  you  arrive  before  the  others?    16.  No,  sir,  they 
arrived  before  me. 

LESSON  XXVIII 

68.  Position  of  Pronoun  Objects.  —  1.  Conjunctive  personal 
pronoun  objects  (§  23)  and  pronominal  adverbs  (namely  en  and 
y)  come  next  before  the  verb,  unless  it  be  imperative  affirmative 
(§  72). 

2.  When  two  of  these  forms  come  together  before  the  verb, 
their  relative  position  is  as  follows: 
me 
te 

before 


se 

nous 

vous 


before 


le 
la 
les 


lui 
leur 


before  y 


before  en 


§68]  LESSON  XXVIII  59 

II  me  (te,  nous,  vous)  les  donne.     He  gives  them  to  me  (you,  us,  etc.). 
Elle  se  les  achete.  She  buys  them  for  herself. 

Je  ne  les  lui  (leur)  donne  pas.          /  don't  give  them  to  him  (them). 
Je  Py  ai  envoye  pour  le  lui  dire.      /  sent  him  there  to  tell  him  it. 
II  y  en  avait  au  marche.  There  was  (were)  some  at  the  mar- 

ket. 

(a)  Pronouns  of  the  first  and  second  persons  (me,  te,  nous,  vous)  and 
se  of  the  third  person  precede  all  others. 

(b)  The  direct  object  of  the  third  person  precedes  the  indirect  (except 
se,  as  above). 

(c)  Y  and  en  come  last,  y  preceding  en. 

(d)  Ne  precedes  all  pronoun  objects. 

NOTE.  —  When  the  conjunctive  direct  object  is  me,  te,  nous,  vous,  se, 
the  indirect  object  with  a  follows  the  verb,  e.g.  II  me  presente  b  vous,  He 
introduces  me  to  you;  II  vous  presente  &  lui,  He  introduces  you  to  him. 

EXERCISE  XXVIII 

Particle,  m.,  article,  thing  ordinaire,  ordinary 

autrefois,  formerly  ou,  or 

le  besoin,  need,  necessity  1'outil,  m.,  tool 

certain,  certain  le  patin,  skate 

constamment,  constantly  quelconque,  adj.,  some,  any  (what- 

different,  different  ever) 

emprunter,  borrow  (from,  a)  raconter,  relate,  tell 

le  fils,  son  la  reception,  reception 

Intelligence,  f.,  intelligence,  un-     la  vaisselle,  dishes  (collectively) 

derstanding  '  la  vie,  life,  living 

le  lait,  milk  vivre,  live 
mener,  lead,  take,  bring 

avoir  besoin  de,  to  have  need  of,  need;  en  bonne  intelligence,  on  good 
terms. 

A.  Continue:  1.  II  me  les  donne,  il  te,  etc.    2.  II  ne  me  Tavait 
pas  donne,  ...  te  ...  etc.    3.  Ne  me  les  a-t-il  pas  pretes?  ne  te  les 
. .  .  ?  etc.    4.  Je  lui  en  ai  prete*  quelquefois,  tu,  etc.    5.  J'y  en  ai 
cherche",  tu,  etc.     6.  Je  les  leur  ai  emprunte*s,  tu,  etc.     7.  Je  ne 
peux  pas  la  leur  preter,  tu,  etc.    8.  Je  vais  lui  en  acheter,  tu,  etc. 

B.  Substitute  pronouns  for  the  expressions  in  italics:  1.  On  me 
raconte  Vhistoire.    2.  Je  prete  mes  plumes  a  Louise.    3.  Les  avez- 
vous  rencontre's  dans  la  rue?    4.  J'ai  apporte"  la  lettre  a  mon  pere. 


60  LESSON   XXVIII  [§68 

5.  Pourquoi  n'a-t-il  pas  donn6  de  I 'argent  aux  pauvres?  6.  Je  vais 
preter  mes  livres  aux  eleves.  7.  Je  ne  trouve  pas  de  plumes  dans  cette 
boite. 

C.  1.  II  faut  vivre  en  bonne  intelligence  avec  ses  (one's)  voisins. 
2.  Nous  habitions  autrefois  a  la  campagne  et  nous  pretions  constam- 
ment  a  nos  voisins  les  differents  articles  de  la  vie  ordinaire.    3.  Ma 
mere  avait  souvent  besoin  d'un  article  quelconque  et  Mme  Lebrun 
le  lui  pretait.    4.  Moi  je  pretais  a  son  fils  mes  patins  ou  mon  trai- 
neau.    5.  Quand  les  filles  de  Mme  Lebrun  n'avaient  pas  un  certain 
livre  mes  sceurs  le  leur  pretaient.    6.  Quelquefois  nous  n'avions  pas 
de  vache  pour  nous  donner  du  lait;  alors  nos  voisins  nous  en  don- 
naient.    7.  Quand  nous  avions  besoin  d'outils  pour  travailler  au  jar- 
din  nous   leur  en  empruntions.     8.  Quand  Mme  Lebrun  n'avait 
pas  assez  de  vaisselle  pour  son  jour  de  reception,  ma  mere  lui  en 
pretait.     9.  Quand  il  y  avait  du  monde  chez  eux  et  quand  il  n'y  en 
avait  pas  chez  nous  ils  nous  invitaient  a  danser.     10.  Quand  M. 
et  Mme  Lebrun  de"siraient  aller  a  la  ville  mon  pere  les  y  menait 
souvent. 

D.  (Oral.)    1.  Qui  e*taient  vos  voisins  a  la  campagne?   2.  fitaient- 
ce   de  bons  voisins?     3.  Votre  mere  leur  pretait-elle  beaucoup 
d'articles?     4.  Leur  en  empruntait-elle  souvent?     5.  Est-ce  que 
Charles  LebrunVous  pretait  jamais  ses  patins?    6.  Lui  pretiez-vous 
souvent  votre  traineau?    7.  Votre  pere  empruntait-il  des  outils  a 
M.  Lebrun?    8.  Vos  sceurs  de*sirent-elles  aller  a  la  ville?    9.  Qui 
va  les  niener  a  la  ville?     10.  Pouvez-vous  les  accompagner  a  la 
ville?  etc. 

E.  1.  We  had  good  neighbours  in  the  country.    2.  They  used  to 
lend  us  many  articles.    3.  And  we  often  lent  them  some.    4.  They 
used  to  borrow  many  things  from  us.    5.  Can  you  lend  me  your 
skates?    6.  I  cannot  lend  them  to  you  to-day.    7.  Robert  Lebrun 
has  borrowed  them  from  me.    8.  I  lent  them  to  him  this  morning; 
he  needed  them.     9.  My  mother  has  lent  some  dishes  to  Mrs. 
Lebrun.     10.  She  often  lends  her  some.     11.  Does  your  father 
often  borrow  tools  or  nails  from  (a)  Mr.  Lebrun?    12.  He  borrows 
some  from  him  sometimes.    13.  When  we  wished  to  go  to  the  city 
our  neighbour  took  us  there  in  his  carriage. 


S72]  LESSON  XXIX  61 

F.  1.  Charles  often  lends  me  books.  2.  Does  he  lend  you  (thee) 
any?  3.  He  doesn't  lend  me  any.  4.  He  cannot  lend  me  any  to-day. 
5.  He  has  lent  them  to  George;  he  has  lent  them  to  him.  6.  He 
has  lent  him  some.  7.  He  cannot  lend  you  any.  8.  We  met  our 
friends  at  the  church  door.  9.  We  met  them  there.  10.  Here  are 
some  pretty  flowers;  we  are  going  to  give  her  them.  11.  Who 
brought  us  the  letters?  12.  The  postman  brought  them  to  us. 
13.  He  used  to  bring  us  some  every  day. 


LESSON  XXIX 

69.  Imperative  Mood  of  donner,  finir,  vendre 

Give,  let  us  give,  etc.       Finish,  let  us  finish,  etc.      Sell,  let  us  sell,  etc. 
2d  Sing,    donne  finis  vends 

1st  Plur.  donnons  finissons  vendons 

2d  Plur.    donnez  finissez  vendez 

(a)  The  second  person  singular  of  the  first  conjugation  adds  s  before  y 
or  en,  e.g.  donnes-en. 

70.  Imperative  of  avoir  and  etre 
2d  Sing,    aie,  have  sois,  be 

1st  Plur.  ayons,  let  us  have  soyons,  let  us  be 

2d  Plur.    ayez,  have  soyez,  be 

71.  Imperative  Negative 

ne  donne  pas  ne  donnons  pas  ne  donnez  pas 

72.  Pronominal  Objects.  —  1.  Conjunctive  personal  pronoun 
objects  and  pronominal  adverbs  follow  the  imperative  affirma- 
tive, and  are  joined  to  it  and  to  one  another  by  hyphens: 

Donnez-lui  la  plume.  Give  him  the  pen. 

Donnez-la-lui.  Give  it  to  him. 

Donnons-leur-en.  Let  us  give  them  some  (of  it). 

2.  But  if  the  imperative  be  negative,  the  general  rules  of  posi- 
tion (§  68)  hold  good: 

Ne  me  la  donnez  pas.  Do  not  give  it  to  me. 


62  LESSON  XXIX  [§  73 

3.  Moi  for  me  and  toi  for  te  are  used  after  an  imperative,  un- 
less before  en,  in  which  case  an  apostrophe  replaces  the  hyphen: 

Donnez-moi  P argent.  Give  me  the  money. 

Donnez-le-moi ;  donnez-m'en.  Give  me  it;  give  me  some. 

Amuse-toi ;  va-t'en.  Enjoy  yourself;  go  away. 

4.  After  an  imperative,  the  direct  object  precedes  the  indi- 
rect; y  and  en  come  last,  y  preceding  en: 

Donnez-les-moi  (leur).  -   Give  them  to  me  (to  them). 

Menez-nous-y.  Take  us  there. 

73.         Imperative  of  aller  (irreg.)  and  fail e  (irreg.) 

2d  Sing,  va          1st  Plur.  aliens         2d  Sing,  fais        1st  Plur.  faisons 

2d  Plur.  allez  2d  Plur.  faites 

(a)  Before  y,  va  becomes  vas,  e.g.  Vas-y,  Go  there. 

EXERCISE  XXIX 

attendre,  wait  for  la  minute,  minute 

le  biscuit,  biscuit  Pobligeance,  f.,  kindness 

cela,  invar.,  that  plait,  from  plaire,  irreg.,  (it)  pleases 

Pemploye,  m.,  employee,  clerk          le  prix,  price 
envoyer,  send  quinze,  fifteen 

Pepicier,  m.,  grocer  le  sou,  sou  ( =  one  cent) 

le  fromage,  cheese  le  sucre,  sugar 

gouter  (a),  taste  la  suite,  continuation 

mesdames,  pi.  of  madame,  ladies 

et  avec  cela?  what  next?  (lit.  and  with  that?}]  tout  de  suite,  at  once, 
immediately;  s'il  vous  plait,  if  you  please;  trois  sous  la  livre,  three  cents 
a  pound 

A.  Give  orally  the  imperative  affirmative  and  negative  of:  1.  Parler. 
2.  Finir.    3.  Vendre.    4.  Attendre.    5.  fitre.    6.  Aller.    7.  Avoir. 
8.  Faire.     9.  Turn  into  the  negative  form:  donnez-la-moi;  parlez- 
leur-en;  vendez-les-lui;  allez-y. 

B.  (Chez  I'epicier)  Je  vais  chez  Fe*picier.  —  J'y  vais  aussi  tout  de 
suite.    Attendez-moi.  —  Oui,  je  vais  vous  attendre  a  la  porte  du 
magasin.    Soyez-y  dans  quinze  minutes.    Ne  perdons  pas  de  temps. 
(On  y  arrive)  Entrons.    Parlons  a  cet  employe'-la.^Vous  de*sirez,  mes- 


§73]  LESSON  XXIX  63 

dames?  —  Du  sucre,  s'il  vous  plait.  —  Oui,  mesdames.  —  Montrez- 
nous-en.  —  En  voila,  mesdames,  et  du  bon.  —  Quel  en  est  le  prix? 
—  Six  sous  la  livre.  —  Donnez-m'en  quatre  livres,  et  donnez-en 
deux  livres  a  mon  amie.  —  Et  avec  cela,  mesdames?  —  Montrez- 
moi  du  the*.  —  En  voila.  —  Ce  the  n'est  pas  bon,  je  pense.  Ne  m'en 
donnez  pas.  —  Ayez  1'obligeance  d'attendre  une  minute,  madame; 
en  voici  du  bon.  —  Vous  avez  du  fromage?  —  Oui,  mesdames.  — 
Montrez-le-nous.  —  II  est  tres  bon.  Goutez-y.  —  Ou  peut-on  trou- 
ver  des  biscuits?  —  La-bas,  mesdames.  —  Menez-nous-y,  monsieur, 
s'il  vous  plait.  —  Bien,  mesdames. 

C.  (1)  Translate  the  following  sentences;  (2)  substitute  pronouns  for 
the  italics;  (3)  turn  into  negative  form:  1.  Bring  me  the  cane,  please. 
2.  Explain  the  lesson  to  them.     3.  Let  us  give  him  some  money. 
4.  Pass  me  the  bread.    5.  Lend  us  your  books.    6.  Let  us  speak  to 
him  of  his  school.    7.  Pick  up  the  pencils  for  her.    8.  Show  me  some 
tea.    9.  Accompany  us  to  the  city.     10.  Go  and  buy  (imperative  + 
infinitive)   some  fruit.     11.  Notice  the  beauty  of  the  landscape. 
12.  Take  us  to  the  city. 

D.  1.  Are  you  going  to  the  grocer's?    2.  We  are  going  (there)  at 
once.    3.  Wait  for  us  at  the  door.    4.  Come  in,  please;  what  do 
you  wish,  ladies?    5.  Have  you  any  good  tea?    6.  Show  me  some. 
7.  Give  me  two  pounds  of  it,  please.    8.  My  friend  (/.)  wishes  some 
too.    9.  Give  her  a  pound  of  it.     10.  What  next,  ladies?     11.  I 
wish  some  good  cheese.    12.  Here  is  some  good  cheese.    13.  Taste 
it  (see  B,  I.  12).    14.  I  don't  like  it.    15.  Don't  give  me  any  of  it. 
16.  Have  the  kindness  to  wait  a  little,  madam,  here  is  some  of 
another  kind. 

E.  Translate  both  affirmatively  and.  negatively:  1.  Speak  to  that 
clerk;  speak  to  him.     2.  Show  me  some  sugar,  please;  show  me 
some.    3.  Give  my  friend  some;  give  her  four  pounds  of  it.    4.  Give 
me  some  also;  give  me  two  pounds.    5.  Show  me  the  tea,  please; 
show  me  it.    6.  Show  me  some  biscuits.    7.  Send  these  articles  to 
my  father's.    8.  Send  them  there  before  (the)  dinner.    9.  Let  us  go 
home  at  once.    10.  Go  (thou)  there  at  once.    11.  Let  us  be  satisfied. 
12.  Let  us  wait  for  her.    13.  Make  me  an  omelet,  please. 


64  LESSON  XXX  [§74 


LESSON  XXX 

74.  Future  Indicative  of  donner,  finir,  vendre 

I  shall  give,  etc.          I  shall  finish,  etc.         I  shall  sell,  etc. 

je  donnerai  finirai  vendrai 

tu  donneras  finiras  vendras 

il  donnera  finira  vendra 

nous  donnerons  finirons  vendrons 

vous  donnerez  finirez  vendrez 

ils  donneront  finiront  vendront 

75.  Future  Indicative  of  avoir  and  &tre 

I  shall  have,  etc.  I  shall  be,  etc. 

j'aurai  nous  aurons  je  serai  nous  serons 

tu  auras          vous  aurez  tu  seras          vous  serez 

il  aura  ils  auront  il  sera  ils  seront 

76.  Use  of  the  Future.  —  It  is  used  in  general  as  in  English, 
but  must  also  be  employed  when  futurity  is  implied,  e.g.  after 
quand  or  lorsque,  when,  aussitdt  que,  as  soon  as: 

Quand  il  arrivera  je  partirai.  When  he  comes  I  shall  go. 

77.  Future  Indicative  of  aller  (irreg.)  and  fair e  (irreg.) 

/  shall  go,  etc.  I  shall  do,  etc. 

j'irai  nous  irons  je  ferai  nous  ferons 

tu  iras  vous  irez  tu  feras  vous  ferez 

il  ira  ils  iront  il  f era  ils  f eront 

78.  Future  Anterior.  —  It   is   formed  by   adding  the  past 
participle  to  the  future  of  avoir  or  etre: 

j'aurai  donne*,  I  shall  have  given,  etc. 

je  serai  arrive*  (e),  /  shall  have  arrived,  etc. 


§78]  LESSON  XXX  65 

EXERCISE  XXX 

Parchitecte,  m.,  architect  la  menuiserie,  woodwork 

le  bain,  bath  le  menuisier,  joiner,  carpenter 

batir,  build  mince,  thin 

la  bibliotheque,  library  le  mur,  wall 

la  boiserie,  wainscoting  neuf ,  new 

la  chambre,  room  Pouvrier,  m.,  workman 

choisir,  choose,  select  le  parquet,  floor 

coucher,  lie  down,  sleep  peindre,  paint 

la  cuisine,  kitchen  le  peintre,  painter 

epais,  thick  le  plan,  plan 

esperer,  hope  prochain,  next 

Petage,  m.,  story,  flat,  flow  que,  conj.,  that 

etroit,  narrow  la  semaine,  week 

large,  wide,  broad  surveiller,  superintend 

le  macon,  mason  le  terrain,  (building)  lot 
la  chambre  a  coucher,  bedroom;  la  salie  a  manger,  dining  room;  la  salle 
de  bains,  bathroom;  etre  bien,  be  comfortable;  il  y  aura,  there  will  be 

A.  Continue:  1.  J'aurai  une  belle  maison  dans  cette  rue,  tu,  etc. 
2.  J'y  serai  bien.    3.  J'habiterai  cette  maison  au  printemps.    4.  Je 
ne  perdrai  pas  de  temps.    5.  Je  ne  sortirai  pas  ce  matin.    6.  II  y 
aura  dix  pieces  dans  ma  maison,,  .  .  .  ta.    7.  Je  ferai  de  bons  plans. 
8.  Je  n'irai  pas  les  voir. 

B.  1.  Nous  aurons  une  maison  neuve  Pannee  prochaine.    2.  Elle 
sera  dans  une  belle  rue.     3.  Nous  avons  deja  choisi  le  terrain. 
4.  Nous  aurons  un  bon  architecte  qui  fera  les  plans.     5.  II  sur- 
veillera  les  ouvriers.     6.  II  y  en  aura  beaucoup.     7.  Les  magons 
batiront  les  murs.    8.  Les  murs  seront  tres  epais;  mon  pere  n'aime 
pas  les  murs  minces.     9.  Les  menuisiers  feront  les  portes,  les  fe- 
netres,  les  parquets  et  la  boiserie.     10.  Les  peintres  peindront  la 
menuiserie.     11.  La  maison  aura  trois  Stages.     12.  Elle  aura  dix 
pieces.     13.  II  y  aura  le  salon,  la  salle  a  manger,  la  cuisine,  la 
bibliotheque,  la  salle  de  bains  et  plusieurs  chambres  a  coucher. 
14.  EspeVons  que  nous  y  serons  bien. 

C.  (Oral.)     1.  Aurez-vous  bientot  une  maison  neuve?     2.  Qui 
choisira  le  terrain?    3.  Ou  sera  votre  maison?    4.  Ferez-vous  les 
plans  vous-meme?    5.  Que  fera  Tarchitecte?    6.  Combien  dotages 


66  LESSON  XXXI  [§79 

y  aura-t-il?  7.  Combien  de  pieces  aurez-vous?  8.  La  salle  & 
manger  sera-t-elle  &  cote  de  la  cuisine?  9.  Que  feront  les  menui- 
siers?  10.  Qui  batira  les  murs?  11.  Quelles  sont  les  differentes 
pieces  d'une  maison?  etc. 

D.  1.  You  will  soon  have  a  new  house.    2.  It  will  be  in  a  fine 
street.    3.  We  shall  soon  choose  the  lot.    4.  My  father  will  select 
the  plan  next  week.    5.  There  will  be  many  workmen.    6.  There 
will  be  masons,  joiners  and  painters.    7.  The  masons  will  build  the 
walls.    8.  When  the  doors  and  windows  are  ready,  the  joiners  will 
bring  them.     9.  The  painters  will  paint  them.     10.  How  many 
rooms  will  there  be?     11.  We  shall  have  ten  or  eleven  of  them. 
12.  We  shall  have  a  kitchen,  a  dining  room  and  a  library.    13.  There 
will  also  be  several  large  bedrooms.     14.  The  cellar  too  will  be 
very  large.     15.  Shall  you  be  comfortable  in  your  new  house? 
16.  Let  us  hope  so  (le).    17.  You  will  be  very  comfortable  in  it,  I 
think. 

E.  1.  I  shah1  go  out  when  my  sister  is  ready.    2.  Let  us  go  to 
town  when  we  have  (the)  time  (for  it) .    3.  We  shall  go  to  the  grocer's 
at  once.    4.  The  architect  will  make  the  plans.    5.  When  he  has 
made  (fut.  ant.)  them,  he  will  bring  them  to  us.     6.  We  shall  show 
them  to  you  when  he  brings  them.    7.  When  you  go  to  the  grocer's 
bring  me  some  good  tea.    8.  I  shall  do  so  (le).    9.  When  you  take 
a  walk  I  shall  go  with  you.    10.  Shall  we  go  to  see  you  when  you  are 
in  the  country?     11.  They  will  go  to  skate  when  they  have  finished. 
12.  When  the  house  is  ready  we  shah1  live  in  it.     13.    The  dining 
room  will  be  wider  than  the  parlour.     14.  The  bedrooms  are  nar- 
rower. 

LESSON  XXXI 

79.  Demonstrative  Pronouns 

ce,  invar.,  this,  that,  it,  etc. 
ceci,  invar.,  this 
cela,  invar.,  that 

celui,  m.,  celle,  f.,  this  or  that  (one),  the  one,  he  (she) 
ceux,  m.  plur.,  celles,  f.  plur.,  these,  those,  the  ones 
(a)  Cela  is  sometimes  contracted  to  ga  [sa],  colloquially. 


§  82]  LESSON  XXXI  67 

80.  Use  of  ce.  —  1.  For  its  use  as  anticipatory  subject  with  • 
etre,  see  §§  35,  54. 

2.  Ce  =  this  (that),  it,  is  also  used  as  the  real  subject  of  etre: 
C'est  facile  (vrai,  bien).  It  (that)  is  easy  (true,  well). 

81.  Use  of  ceci,  cela.  —  Ceci  =  this  (the  nearer)  and  cela  = 
that  (the  more  remote)  are  used  to  denote  something  indicated 
but  not  named: 

Cela  est  joli  mais  j'aime  ceci.  That  is  pretty,  but  I  like  this. 

J'ai  parle  de  cela.  I  spoke  of  that. 

(a)  If  the  object  referred  to  has  been  named,  or  if  the  name  is  fully  implied, 
celui-ci  (-la)  must  be  used. 

82.  Use  of  celui.  —  1.  The  form  celui  (celle,  etc.)  =  this  or 
that  (one),  the  one,  he,  refers  to  persons  or  things: 

Get  ami  et  celui  qu'il  cherche.  This  friend  and  the  one  he  seeks. 

Mes  plumes  et  celles  de  Marie.  My  pens  and  Mary's  (those  of  M .). 

Celles  que  vous  aimez.  The  ones  (e.g.  flowers)  you  like. 

Celui  qui  cherche  trouve.  He  who  seeks  finds. 

2.  The  particles  -ci  and  -li  are  added  to  celui  (celle,  etc.)  to 
contrast  the  nearer  with  the  more  remote,  of  persons  or  things 
already  mentioned: 

Voici  les  deux  chaines;  gardez  Here  are  the  two  chains;  keep  this 

celle-ci  et  donnez-moi  celle-la.  (one)  and  give  me  that  (one). 

3.  Celui-ci  =  the  latter  and  celui-li  =  the  former: 

Ciceron  et  Virgile  etaient  celebres;  Cicero  and  Virgil  were  celebrated? 
celui-ci  etait  poete  et  celui-la  the  former  was  an  orator  and  the 
orateur.  latter  a  poet. 

(a)  The  order  is  reversed  as  compared  with  English. 

EXERCISE  XXXI 

aller,  fit,  suit,  become  (of  clothing)     le  fond,  bottom,  back  part,  end  (of  a 
le  carton,  cardboard  box  room,  etc.). 

la  cravate,  necktie  merci,  thank  you,  thanks 

demander,  ask  prendre,  take,  get,  catch 

essayer,  try,  try  on  le  rayon,  shelf,  department  (of  a 

la  main,  hand  store),  counter 

monsieur  desire?  what  do  you  wish  (sir)?  ce  chapeau  me  va  bien,  this 
hat  fits  (suits,  becomes)  me;  avoir  a  la  main,  to  have  (hold)  in  one's  hand 


68  LESSON    XXXI  [§  82 

A.  Supply  a  suitable  demonstrative  pronoun:  1.  Ces  pommes-ci 
sont  mures;  c  .  .  .  sont  vertes.    2.  Donnez-moi  ceci;  ne  me  donnez 
pas  c  . . .    3.  Ces  gants-ci  sont  trop  grands;  c  . . .  sont  trop  petits. 
4.  Nos  plumes  et  c .  . .  des  autres  eleves.     5.  Cette  poire-la  est 
douce,  mais  c  ...  est  aigre.    6.  C  . . .  qui  nous  salue  est  ma  cousine. 

7.  C  ...  est  Robert  qui  arrive. 

B.  J'ai  perdu  ma  canne  et  celle  de  mon  frere.    Je  vais  a  un 
grand  magasin  pour   en  acheter   deux.     (Un  employe  demande) 
Monsieur  desire?  —  Des  Cannes,  s'il  vous  plait.  —  Vous  les  trouverez 
la-bas  au  fond.    (J'y  vais)  —  Montrez-moi  des  Cannes.  —  En  voila. 
Aimez-vous  celles-ci  ou  celles-la?  —  Je  prendrai  deux  de  celles-cL 
(Je  vais  an  rayon  des  gants)  —  Je  de*sire  des  gants.  —  De  ceux 
qu'on  vous  a  monfcres  hier?  —  Oui.  —  Des  gants  blancs,  n'est-ce 
pas?    Essayez  ceux-ci.  —  Us  ne  me  vont  pas.    Montrez-moi  ceux 
qui  sont  dans  ce  carton-la.  —  Ceux-ci  vous  vont  bien.    (Je  cherche 
une  cravate) — Avez-vous  de  jolies  cravates  bleues?  —  En  voici. 
Prendrez-vous  celle-ci  ou  celle-la?  —  Je  prendrai  celle  que  vous  avez 
a  la  main.  —  Et  avec  $a?  —  Merci,  c'est  tout  pour  aujourd'hui. 

C.  (Oral.)     1.  Quelles  Cannes  avez-vous  perdues?    2.  Qui  vous 
montre  des  Cannes?   3.  Ou  sont  celles  que  vous  cherchez?   4.  Aimez- 
vous  mieux  celle-ci  ou  celle-la?    5.  Prendrez-vous  celle-ci?    6.  Vous 
de*sirez  des  gants,  n'est-ce  pas?     7.  Ceux-ci  vous  vont-ils  bien? 

8.  Ceux-la   sont-ils   trop    grands?     9.  De*sirez-vous   une    cravate 
blanche?    10.  Celle  qui  est  dans  le  carton  vous  plait-elle?   11.  Celle- 
ci  est  tres  jolie,  n'est-ce  pas?  etc. 

D.  1.  I  have  lost  my  gloves  and  my  brother's  also.    2.  The  ones 
I  lost  were  very  fine.    3.  The  glove  department  is  at  the  back  of  the 
store.    4.  The  clerk  shows  us  some  gloves.    5.  He  asks:  "Do  you 
wish  these  gloves  or  those?"    6.  These  don't  fit  me.    7.  These  are 
too  large.    8.  Those  are  not  too  small.    9.  Give  me  the  ones  you 
have  in  your  hand.     10.  Have  you  tried  on  these?     11.  You  are 
going  to  try  them  on,  are  you  not?    12.  Do  you  like  black  gloves  or 
white  gloves?    13.  We  like  the  latter.     14.  What  pretty  neckties! 
15.  Robert's  is  pretty  too.     16.  You  are  speaking  of  the  one  he 
bought  last  week,  are  you  not?    17.  The  one  he  bought  is  blue: 
this  one  is  white.    18.  Those  I  bought  yesterday  have  come. 


§85]  LESSON  XXXII  69 

E.  1.  Which  necktie  do  you  wish?  2.  Don't  you  like  the  one 
I  have  in  my  hand?  3.  No,  I  like  the  one  which  I  see  in  that  box. 
4.  I  shall  take  that  one.  5.  I  shall  not  take  this  one.  6.  Is  that 
(ce)  aU?  7.  Thanks,  that  is  all.  8.  Those  who  seek  find.  9.  I 
like  this;  I  don't  like  that.  10.  Did  you  speak  of  that  to  the  teacher? 
11.  Gather  up  all  this;  leave  all  that  on  the  table.  12.  Our  house 
is  beside  Mr.  Leduc's.  13.  Our  house  is  very  old;  Mr.  Leduc's  is 
new.  14.  Do  you  like  to  play  with  John  or  with  Robert?  15.  With 
the  latter.  16.  Give  me  two  pounds  of  this  tea  and  one  pound  of 
that.  17.  Did  you  buy  this  picture  yesterday?  18.  No,  it  isn't 
this  one;  it  is  the  one  which  you  see  near  the  window. 


LESSON  XXXII 

83.  The  Possessive  Pronouns 

SINGULAR  PLURAL 

le  mien,  m.  les  miens,  m.    1 

la  mienne,  f.  les  miennes,  L\n 

le  tien,  m.  les  tiens,  m.    1  ., 

,     ,.  ,.  t  „  >  thine,  yours 

la  tienne,  f.  les  tiennes,  f .  j 

le  sien,  m.  les  siens,  m.    1  . 

la  sienne,  f .  les  siennes,  f .  j  hls>  kers'  lts>  ones 

le  notre,  m.  1 

lanAtreif.   J  les  notres,  m.,  f.,  OMrS 

le  vdtre,  m.  ] 

lavotre,  f.    j  les  votres,  m.,  f.,  f/owrs 

le  leur,  m.  ] 

la  leur,  f.  s>  m>>    ''  theirs 

Contractions:  de  +  le  =  du,  de  +  les  =  des;  a  +  le  =  au,  a  +  les  = 
aux,  e.g.  du  mien,  des  siennes,  au  votre,  aux  leurs,  etc. 

84.  Agreement.  —  They  agree  in  gender  and  number  with  the 
noun  denoting  the  object  possessed: 

Ses  amis  et  les  miens  (i.e.  amis).      His  friends  and  mine. 

85.  Use  of  Possessive  Pronouns.  —  1.  With  etre,  the  prepo- 
sition   a  +  a    disjunctive    pronoun    denotes    mere    ownership 


70  LESSON  XXXII  [§86 

(cf.  Lesson  XXIII),  whereas  the  use  of  a  possessive  pronoun  de- 
notes distinction  of  ownership: 

Cette  plume  est  a  moi.  This  pen  belongs  to  me  (is  mine). 

Cette  plume  est  la  mienne.  This  pen  is  mine  (not  yours,  etc.). 

2.  Since  le  sien  (la  sienne,  etc.)  =  his,  hers,  its,  'one's,  the 
meaning  is  determined  by  the  context: 

J'ai  mes  livres;  elle  a  les  siens.    I  have  my  books;  she  has  hers. 

3.  Observe  the  idioms: 

Un  de  mes  amis.  A  friend  of  mine  (one  of  my  friends). 

Un  Fran^ais  de  mes  amis.  A  Frenchman,  a  friend  of  mine. 

86.          Present  Indicative  of  vouloir  (irreg.),  'will,1 
'wish/  'like/  etc. 

I  mil,  wish,  desire,  want  (to),  etc. 
je  veux  nous  voulons 

tu  veux  vous  voulez 

•  il  veut  ils  veulent 

EXERCISE  XXXII 

la  brosse,  brush  propre,  clean 

les  cheveux,  m.,  hair  le  savon,  soap 

la  dent,  tooth  la  serviette,  towel,  napkin 

eh  bien!  well  then  la  toilette,  toilet 

enfin,  at  last  toucher  a,  touch,  meddle  with 

la  maman,  mamma  vouloir,  irreg.,  will,  wish,  want 

oublier,  forget  to,  etc. 

le  peigne,  comb 

faire  sa  toilette,  make  one's  toilet,  dress  (intr.  vb.);  brosse  a  dents,  tooth- 
brush 

A.  Substitute  possessive  pronouns  for  the  expressions  in  italics: 
1.  Voulez-vous  voir  mes  lettresf    2.  Veux-tu  me  preter  tes  livres  f 
3.  Je  veux  chercher  ma  brosse.    4.  Je  parle  de  votre  tableau.    5.  Je 
parlais  a  vos  soeurs.     6.  A-t-il  fait  sa  toilette?     7.  J'admire  leur 
maison.     8.  Marie  a  perdu  ses  patins.     9.  Nous  avons  cueilli  nos 
pommes.    10.  Ils  ont  vendu  leurs  pommes.    11.  Voici  mon  chapeau; 
voila  ton  chapeau.    12.  Elle  veut  etudier  son  lime. 

B.  (Deux .  freres  font  leur  toilette)   As-tu  vu   ma  serviette?  — 
Oui,  la  voila.  —  Mais  non,  ce  n'est  pas  la  mienne,  c'est  la  tienne.  — 


§  86]  LESSON   XXXII  71 

Oui,  c'est  vrai.  Celle-ci  est  &  moi  et  celle-la  est  a  toi.  —  Et  ou  est 
le  savon?  —  Voici  mon  savon,  voila  le  tien.  —  Donne-moi  un  mor- 
ceau  du  tien,  s'il  te  plait;  le  mien  n'est  pas  bon.  —  Eh  bien,  je  t'en 
donne.  —  Je  ne  trouve  pas  ma  brosse  a  dents.  —  La  voila.  —  Mais 
non,  c'est  celle  de  papa.  Et  celle-la  est  a  maman.  Les  leurs  sont 
meilleures  que  les  notres.  Mais  il  ne  faut  pas  y  toucher.  Enfin 
voici  la  mienne.  —  Maintenant  ma  toilette  est  faite. —  Et  tes  che- 
veux?  —  C'est  vrai.  J'ai  oublie  cela,  mais  ou  est  mon  peigne? 
Veux-tu  me  preter  le  tien?  Je  ne  peux  pas  trouver  le  mien.  —  On 
ne  prete  pas  ses  articles  de  toilette.  Ce  n'est  pas  propre. 

C.  (Oral.)     1.  Que  voulez-vous  faire?     2.  Que  vont  faire  les 
deux~freres?    3.  Cette  serviette  est-elle  la  mienne?    4.  Est-elle  a 
vous?     5.  N'est-elle  pas  a  moi?     6.  Ou  est  la  mienne?     7.  Quel 
peigne  est  celui-la?    8.  De  quel  peigne  parlez-vous?    9.  Les  brosses 
de  papa  sont-elles  meilleures  que  les  miennes?     10.  Les  notres 
sont-elles  moins  bonnes  que  les  siennes?    11.  .Ce  peigne-ci  est-il  le 
mien?      12.  A  qui  est  celui-la?      13.  Votre  toilette  est-elle  de*ja 
faite?  etc. 

D.  1.  We  are  dressing.    2.  Have  you  found  your  towel?    3.  I 
have  not.    4.  What  towel  have  you  in  your  hand?    5.  Is  it  mine? 
6.  This  one  is  not  yours,  it  is  mine.    7.  Yours  is  larger,  isn't  it? 
8.  Have  you  my  soap  or  your  own  (=  yours)?    9.  I  haven't  seen 
yours;  I  have  my  own.    10.  Will  you  give  me  a  piece  of  yours? 
11.  Papa's  brushes  are  better  than  ours.    12.  Yes,  but  don't  touch 
his.    13.  Lend  me  your  comb,  please;  I  can't  find  mine.    14.  .Look 
for  yours;  look  for  it  everywhere.     15.  Here  it  is,  at  last  i  have 
found  it.    16.  We  are  dressed  (see  B,  I.  9). 

E.-l.  This  house  is  ours.  2.  That  one  is  our  neighbour's.  3.  His 
is  larger  than  ours.  4.  My  uncle  has  his  gloves  and  my  aunt 
has  hers.  5.  Have  you  forgotten  yours?  6.  Here  is  your  tooth- 
brush, but  where  is  mine?  7.  We  speak  of  our  lessons,  he  speaks 
of  his.  8.  Have  you  Mary's  pens?  9.  Here  are  hers.  10.  The 
other  pupils  have  lost  theirs.  11.  This  necktie  is  mine.  12.  Those 
are  John's;  he  bought  them  yesterday.  13.  Our  lessons  are  longer 
than  theirs.  14.  Theirs  are  easier  than  ours.  15.  Mrs.  Dupont  is  a 
friend  of  ours.  16.  I  lend  my  friends  money;  do  you  lend  yours  any? 


72  LESSON  XXXIII  [§87 


LESSON  XXXIII 

87.  Interrogative  Pronouns 
SINGULAR  PLURAL 

qui?  invar.,  who,  whom? 

que?  invar.,  what? 

quoi?  invar.,  what? 

lequel?  m.  lesquels?  m.  1  which?  which  or 

laquelle?  f .  lesquelles?  f.  J      what  one(s}? 

Contractions:  duquel,  desquel(le)s,  auquel,  auxquel(le)s 

88.  Qui?  —  1.  This  form  regularly  denotes  persons  only: 

Qui  parle?     Qui  a-t-il  vu?  Who  speaks?    Whom  did  he  see? 

De  qui  (a  qui)  parle-t-il?  Of  (to)  whom  is  he  speaking? 

Dites-moi  de  qui  il  parle.  Tell  me  of  whom  he  is  speaking. 

2.  With  etre,  quel?  is  often  used  for  qui? 

Quelle  est  cette  dame?  Who  is  that  lady  (what  lady  is  that}? 

3.  Whose?  denoting  ownership  =  £  qui?  otherwise  de  qui?: 

A  qui  est  cette  maison?  Whose  house  is  this? 

De  qui  6tes-vous  (le)  fils?  Whose  son  are  you? 

89.  Que?  and  quoi?  —  1.  What?  as  direct  object  or  predicate 
of  a  verb  =  que?  but  only  in  direct  questions: 

Qu'avez-vous  trouve"?  What  have,  you  found? 

Que  sont-ils  devenus?  What  has  become  of  them? 

2.  What?  as  a  subject  is  regularly  qu'est-ce  qui?: 
Qu'est-ce  qui  fait  ce  bruit?          What  is  making  that  noise? 

3.  What?  after  a  preposition,  or  absolutely  -  quoi? : 

De  quoi  parlez-vous?  Of  what  are  you  speaking? 

II  a  repondu.  —  Quoi?  He  has  answered.  —  What? 

90.  Quel?  and  lequel?  —  1.  Distinguish  the  adjective  quel? 
«=  which,  what?  immediately  preceding  its  noun  (cf.  §  50)  from 


§91] 


LESSON  XXXIII 


73 


the  pronoun  lequel  ?  =  which  (one)  f  what  (one)  ?  used  apart  from 
a  noun : 


Quelle  dame  est  arrivee  ? 

Laquelle  des  dames  est  arrivee  ? 

Auxquelles  parle-t-il  ? 

Quels  livres  a-t-il? 

Je  demande  lesquels  il  cherche. 


Which  (what)  lady  has  come  ? 
Which  of  the  ladies  has  come  ? 
To  which  (ones)  is  he  speaking  f 
What  (which)  books  has  he  f 
I  ask  which  (ones)  he  seeks. 


91.  Interrogative  Locutions.  —  Certain  expressions  formed 
with  est-ce  +  qui  or  que  are  frequently  used  instead  of  the 
simpler  interrogative  forms,  thus: 


Qui  est-ce  qui  parle  ? 
Qui  est-ce  que  vous  saluez  ? 
A  qui  est-ce  que  vous  parlez  ? 
Qu'est-ce  que  cela  montre? 
Qu'est-ce  que  c'est? 
Qu'est-ce  que  c'est  que  cela? 
De  quoi  est-ce  qu'il  parle? 


for    Qui  parle  ? 

Qui  saluez- vous  ? 

A  qui  parlez-vous  ? 

Que  montre  cela  ? 
"      Qu'est-ce? 

Qu'est-ce  que  cela? 

De  quoi  parle-t-il? 


(a)  Observe  the  use  of  que  to  introduce  the  real  subject :  Qu'est-ce  que 
c'est  que  cela?  What  is  that?  Qu'est-ce  que  c'est  que  la  gloire?  What 
is  glory  ? 


EXERCISE  XXXIII 


Pair,  m.,  air,  atmosphere 

ancien,  old,  ancient,  former 

anglais,  English 

le  cours,  course  of  lectures,  lecture 

couter,  cost 

entendre,  hear 

la  Trance,  France 

Guignol,  m.,  Punch  and  Judy 

important,  important 

le  jar  din,  garden(s),  park 

loin,  adv.,  far,  distant 

Luxembourg,  m.,  Luxembourg 


Marie  de  Medicis  [medisisj,  Marie 

le  marronnier,  chestnut   [de'  Medici 

la  musique,  music 

le  palais,  palace,  large  edifice 

Paris,  Pans 

la  partie,  part,  portion 

la  place,  place,  seat 

le  senat,  senate 

la  Sorbonne,  Sorbonne 

le  tambour,  drum 

les  Tuileries,  f.,  Tuileries 

Puniversite,  f.,  university 


faire  son  cours,  deliver  his  lecture;  chevaux  de  bois,  merry-go-round;  en 
plein  air,  in  the  open  air;  qu'est-ce  que  cela  veut  dire?  what  does  thai 
mean? 


74  LESSON   XXXIII  [§91 

A.  (Au  jardin   du  Luxembourg)   Qu'est-ce   que   c'est   que   le 
Luxembourg?  —  C'est  1'ancien  palais  de  Marie  de  Medicis.    C'est 
aujourd'hui  le  palais  du  Senat  de  France.  —  Lequel  est  le  plus  beau, 
le  jardin  des  Tuileries  ou  le  jardin  du  Luxembourg?  —  J'aime  mieux 
celui-ci.  —  Qui  avez-vous  salue?  —  C'est  un  professeur  de  mes  amis 
qui  va  faire  son  cours  a  la  Sorbonne.  —  Qu'est-ce  que  c'est  que  la 
Sorbonne?  —  C'est  une  partie  importante  de  1'Universite  de  Paris. 
Elle  n'est  pas  loin  d'ici.  —  Quelle  est  la  musique  que  nous  enten- 
dons?  —  C'est  la  musique  des  chevaux  de  bois.  —  Et  maintenant, 
qu'est-ce  que  c'est  que  ga?  —  Quoi?  —  Ce  bruit  qu'on  entend  la-bas. 
—  Qa,  c'est  le  tambour  de  Guignol.    C'est  le  theatre  des  enfants. 
C'est  un  theatre  en  plein  air.    C'est  le  theatre  le  moins  cher  de  Paris. 
Les  bonnes  places  coutent  deux  sous. 

B.  (Oral.)    1.  Auquel  des  jardins  allez-vous?    2.  Quel  palais  est 
celui-la?    3.  Lequel  de  ces    deux  jardins   aimez-vous  le   mieux? 
4.  Qui  est-ce  que  vous  avez  salue*?    5.  Qui  est-ce  qui  nous  a  salues? 
6.  Ou  va-t-il?     7.  Qu'est-ce  qu'il  va  faire?     8.  De  quelle  univer- 
site  la  Sorbonne  fait-elle  partie?      9.  Quelle  musique  entendons- 
nous?    10.  Qu'est-ce  que  veut  dire  en  anglais  " chevaux  de  bois"? 
11.  Qu'est-ce   que  c'est  que  Guignol?     12.  Combien  les   places 
coutent-elles?  etc. 

C.  1.  What  park  is  this?   2.  What  is  the  Luxembourg?   3.  Whose 
palace  was  it  formerly?    4.  What  beautiful  trees!    5.  What  trees 
are  these?    6.  They  are  chestnuts.    7.  Which  is  the  more  important 
of  the  two  parks?    8.  Who  was  (is)  that  gentleman  who  saluted  us? 
9.  He  is  a  professor  of  the  Sorbonne.    10.  He  is  going  to  deliver  his 
lecture.    11.  What  sound  is  that?    12.  It  is  music,  isn't  it?  13.  What 
is  that  yonder?     14.  It  is  (are)  the  merry-go-round.     15.  What 
(how  much)  do  the  seats  cost  in  the  children's  theatre?    16.  You 
can  have  good  seats  in  it  for  two  sous.    17.  Of  which  ancient  palace 
are  you  speaking? 

D.  1.  What  lady  is  that?   2.  Whose  children  are  those?   3.  Whose 
daughter  are  you?    4.  What  are  you  speaking  of?    5.  What  are  you 
listening  to?     6.  What  do  I  hear?    7.  I  hear  Punch  and  Judy's 
drum.    8.  What  has  fallen?    9.  Whose  garden  is  this?    10.  For 
whom  are  you  waiting?    11.  For  what  are  you  waiting?    12.  Which 


§  94]  LESSON  XXXIV  75 

seats  cost  the  least?  13.  Which  of  the  children  is  your  brother? 
14.  Which  of  those  ladies  are  your  aunts?  15.  Which  part  of  the 
field  do  you  wish  to  buy?  16.  What  books  have  you  there?  17.  To 
which  of  the  dealers  did  your  father  sell  his  vegetables?  18.  From 
which  of  your  friends  did  you  borrow  the  money?  19.  What  pic- 
tures do  you  want  to  buy?  20.  Ask  (a)  the  dealer  which  ones  he 
wants  to  sell. 


LESSON  XXXIV 

92.  The  Relative  Pronouns 

qui,  invar.,  who,  which,  that;  (after  prep.)  whom 

que,  invar.,  whom,  which,  that 

dont,  invar.,  whose,  of  whom,  of  which 

ou,  invar.,  to  (in,  at,  etc.)  which;  where 

lequel,  m.  sing.,  lesquels,  m.  plur.   1     ,        , 

'     .    .        ,  -  who,  whom,  which,  that 

laquelle,  f.  smg.,  lesquelles,  f.  plur.j 

quoi,  invar.,  what,  which 

Contractions:  duquel,desquel(le)s,  auquel,  auxquel(le)s 
(a)  For  agreement  and  rule  regarding  omission,  see  §  36. 

93.  Qui,  que.  —  1.  For  the  general  use  of  these  forms,  see  §  36. 
2.  Qui  =  whom  may  stand  after  a  preposition: 

L'ami  de  (a)  qui  je  parle.  The  friend  of  (to)  whom  I  speak. 

94.  Dont.  —  1.  This  form  is  much  used  with  the  force  of  de 
-f-  a  relative  =  of  or  from  whom  (which),  whose: 

Les  amis  dont  je  parle.  The  friends  of  whom  I  speak. 

L/eglise  dont  je  vois  la  tour.  The  church  whose  tower  I  see. 

2.  But  whose,  depending  on  a  noun  governed  by  a  preposi- 
tion, must  be  rendered  by  duquel,  etc.,  or  de  qui,  placed  after 
the  governed  noun: 

La  dame  au  fils  de  laquelle  (or  de   The  lady  to  whose  son  I  give  lessons. 
qui)  je  donne  des  legons. 


76  LESSON  XXXIV  [§95 

95.  Lequel.  —  1.    In    general,   this    form    is    rather    sparingly 
used,  except  for  emphasis,  or  to  avoid  ambiguity: 

Le  livre  lequel  (que)  jetemontre.  The  book  which  I  show  you. 

L'ami  auquel  (a  qui)  je  parle.  The  friend  to  whom  I  speak. 

La  lettre  de  laquelle  (dont) ,  etc.  The  letter  of  which,  etc. 

Une  edition  de  ce  livre,  laquelle  An  edition  of  this  book,  which  (sc. 
on  vend  fort  bon  marche.  edition)  is  sold  very  cheap. 

2.  After    a    preposition,   however,   a   lequel   form   should   be 
used  if  the  antecedent  is  an  animal  or  thing : 
Le  chien  auquel  je  donne  1'os.         The  dog  to  which  I  give  the  bone. 
La  salle  dans  laquelle  il  est.  The  room  in  which  he  is. 

96.  Oil.  —  The  adverb  ou,  where,  has  the  value  of  dans  (a, 
etc.)  +  a  relative,  to  denote  place  or  time : 

La  maison  ou  (dans  laquelle)  je  The  house  in  which(where)  I  lodge. 

loge. 

Le  siecle  ou  nous  vivons.  The  age  in  which  we  live. 

L'endroit  d'ofc  il  vient.  The  place  from  which  he  comes. 

97.  Quoi.  —  This  form  =  what,  which,  without  definite  ante- 
cedent, stands  after  a  preposition,  rarely  otherwise: 

Voila  de  quoi  j'avais  besoin.  That  is  what  I  needed. 

98.  1.  What  meaning  that  which  =  ce  -f-  a  relative: 

Ce  qui  m' amuse.  What  (subj.)  amuses  me. 

Ce  que  je  dis;  ce  dont  je  parle.        What  (obj.)  /  say;  what  I  speak  of. 

2.  Similarly  which  summing  up  a  sentence: 

H  est  pauvre,  ce  qui  est  triste.         He  is  poor,  which  is  sad. 

3.  Observe  the  recapitulatory  use  of  ce : 

Ce  que  je  crains  c'est  sa  colere.       What  I  fear  is  his  anger. 
(a)  For  indefinite  relative  pronouns,  see  Lesson  LXXXVIII. 

99.  Conjunction   que.  —  That  (conjunction)  =  que,   is  never 
omitted  in  French,  as  that  often  is  in  English: 

Je  crois  que  cela  est  vrai.  I  think  (that)  that  is  true. 


§  99]  LESSON   XXXIV  77 

EXERCISE  XXXIV 

chasser,  hunt  remarquable,  remarkable 

le  cours  d'eau,  stream  rendre,  render,  make 

frais,  fresh,  cool  la  riviere,  river 

Pombre,  f.,  shade  la  source,  spring 

par,  for  traverser,  cross,  go  (run,  etc.) 

la  peche,  fishing  through 

la  perdrix,  partridge  la  truite,  trout 

la  propriete,  property,  estate  .  venu,  p.  part,  of  venir,  came 

aller  a  la  peche,  go  fishing;  chasser  la  perdrix,  hunt  partridges 

A.  Supply  suitable  relative  pronoun  forms:  1.  L'eglise  .  .  .  nous 
sommes  entres.    2.  La  table  .  .  .  il  laisse  les  lettres.    3.  L'eleve  .  .  . 
j  'ai  prete  ce  livre.    4.  Ce  .  .  .  nous  avons  besoin.    5.  Les  marchands 
.  .  .  je  vendais  mes  pommes.    6.  Ce  .  .  .  nous  a  amus6s.     7.  L'oncle 
chez  .  .  .  je  demeurais.    8.  La  lettre  de  mon  ami .  .  .  est  arrivee  ce 
matin.     9.  La  ville  de  .  .  .  nous  sommes  venus.    10.  Voila  ce  .  .  . 
il  demande.    11.  La  maison  ...  on  voit  les  fenetres.    12.  Nous 
aimons  ceux  .  .  .  nous  aiment. 

B.  1.  Aimez-vous  la  peche?  —  2.  Oui,  ou  voulez-vous  aller  a  la 
peche?  —  3.  II  y  a  une  petite  riviere  pres  d'ici  ou  on  prend  de  bons 
poissons.    4.  C'est  la  jolie  petite  riviere  dont  je  vous  ai  de"ja  parle*. 
5.  C'est  un  cours  d'eau  qui  traverse  la  propriete  de  M.  Durand 
laquelle  est  remarquable  par  sa  beaute".    6.  M.  Durand  est  le  mon- 
sieur dont  nous  avons  vu  le  fils  bier.    7.  C'est  le  monsieur  dans  les 
bois  duquel  nous  avons  chassS  la  perdrix.    8.  C'est  une  riviere  de 
laquelle  1'eau  est  claire  et  fraiche.    9.  C'est  une  eau  de  source,  et 
ce  qui  la  rend  encore  plus  fraiche  c'est  qu'elle  coule  toujours  a 
1' ombre.    10.  Voila  ce  qui  fait  que  les  truites  y  sont  abondantes. 

C.  (Oral.)     1.  Quel  amusement  aimez-vous  le  mieux?     2.  Que 
voulez-vous  faire  ce  matin?     3,.  Ou  est  la  riviere  dont  vous  par- 
liez  hier?    4.  De  qui  traverse-t-elle  la  propriety?    5.  Qui  est  ce 
M.  Durand  dont  vous  parlez?     6.  Est-ce  le  monsieur  dans  les  bois 
duquel  nous  avons  chass6  la  perdrix?    7.  La  riviere  de  laquelle  vous 
parlez  est-elle  belle?    8.  Qu'est-ce  qui  en  rend  1'eau  bien  fraiche? 
9.  Est-ce  un  cours  d'cau  ou  on  trouve  beaucoup  de  truites?  etc. 


78  LESSON  XXXV  [§  100 

D.  1.  There  is  a  small  stream  yonder  which  crosses  our  prop- 
erty.    2.  It  is  the  stream  of  which  I  have  often  spoken  to  you. 

3.  Mr.  Durand's  house  which  you  saw  this  morning  is  near  the  river. 

4.  He  is  the  gentleman  whose  daughter  dined  at  our  house  yesterday. 

5.  We  hunt  partridges  sometimes  in  his  woods,  where  there  are  a 
great  many  of  them.    6.  Here  is  a  little  river  which  runs  in  the  shade. 
7.  That  is  (voila  or  c'est)  what  makes  the  water  so  cool.    8.  It  is 
a  river  in  which  one  can  always  catch  trout.     9.  It  is  also  a 
river  which  is  remarkable  for  its  beauty.    10.  What  makes  it  so 
beautiful  (it)  is  the  clear  (and)  cool  water  and  the  abundant  shade. 

11.  It  is  there  that  we  shall  go  fishing.    12.  Very  well,  that  is  what 
we  shall  do. 

E.  1.  What  I  spoke  of  is  true.    2.  What  amuses  you?    3.  This 
is  what  amuses  me.     4.  That  is  what  the  postman  has  brought. 
5.  John  has  studied  well,  which  pleases  (plait  a)  his  teacher.   6.  The 
house  in  which  we  were  living  last  year.    7.  The  park  in  which  I 
am  going  to  take  a  walk.    8.  The  bird  to  which  I  give  the  piece  of 
sugar.    9.  The  letter  of  which  I  was  speaking.     10.  The  friends  to 
whom  I  have  lent  my  books.    11.  The  books  which  I  have  lent  them. 

12.  The  lady  whose  daughter  is  at  my  mother's.     13.  The  neigh- 
bours with  whose  child  we  often  play.    14.  The  spring  from  which 
this  river  flows  is  cool.    15.  Have  you  any  of  the  thin  paper  of  which 
I  was  speaking? 


LESSON  XXXV 

100.  Indefinite  Adjectives  and  Pronouns.  —  In  the  following 
sections  are  explained  the  uses  of  the  commoner  words  of  this 
class.     For  the  use  of  on,  see  §  38;  for  the  use  of  tout,  see 
§40. 

101.  Autre  and  autrui.  —  1.  The  various  senses  of  other,  (an-) 
other,  (the)  other,  others  are  regularly  rendered  by  autre : 

Une  autre  fois;  d'autres  arbres.  Another  time;  other  trees. 

D'autres  sont  arriv6(e)s.  Others  have  come. 

Les  autres  ne  sont  pas  ici.  The  others  are  not  here. 


§  104]  LESSON  XXXV  79 

2.  L'un,  Pautre  (as  also  the  feminine  and  plural)  are  com- 
bined into  various  phrases: 

Elles  se  flattent  Tune  Pautre.  They  flatter  each  other. 

Us  parlent  les  uns  des  autres.  They  speak  of  one  another. 

Ils  sont  morts  Pun  et  Pautre  (or  They  are  both  dead. 
tous  deux  or  tous  les  deux). 

3.  Distinguish  un  autre  from  encore  un: 

Une  autre  plume.  Another  (a  different)  pen. 

Encore  une  plume.  Another  (an  additional)  pen. 

4.  Autrui  =  others,  other  people,  stands  regularly  after  a  prepo- 
sition, and  is  somewhat  rarely  used: 

Les  biens  d'autrui  (or  des  autres).     Other  people's  goods. 

102.  Quelqu'un.  —  The  singular  =  somebody ,  some  (any)  one; 
the  plural  =  some,  some  people,  any,  a  few: 

II  y  a  quelqu'un(e)  a  la  porte.  There  is  somebody  at  the  door. 

Voila  quelques-unes  de  vos  amies.      There  are  some  of  your  friends. 
J'en  ai  quelques-uns  (e.g.  livres).        /  have  some  (a  few). 

103.  Quelque  chose  =  something,  anything: 

Quelque  chose  est  tombe.  Something  has  fallen. 

J'ai  vu  quelque  chose  de  beau.  r  have  seen  something  fine. 

(a)  This  form  is  masculine,  though  chose  as  a  noun  is  feminine. 

104.  Negative  Forms.  —  1.  Personne,  rien,  aucun,  mil,  pas 
un,  have  negative  force  when  the  verb  is  preceded  by  ne,  or 
when  no  verb  is  expressed. 

2.  Thus  used,  personne  =  nobody,  no  one,  not  anybody,  and 
rien  =-  nothing,  not  anything: 

Personne  n'est  venu;  je  n'ai  vu  Nobody  has  come;  I  saw  nobody; 

personne ;  ne  parlez  a  personne.  don't  speak  to  anybody. 

Rien  ne  me  fait  peur;  je  n'ai  rien  Nothing  frightens  me;  I  have  seen 

vu.  nothing  (not  anything). 

Que  dit-il?  —  Rien  (de  nouveau).  What  does  he  say? — Nothing  (new). 

Personne  ici!  —  Personne.  Nobody  here!  —  Nobody. 

(a)  Observe  that  personne  as  a  pronoun  is  masculine,  while  personne  ae 
a  noun  is  feminine. 


80  LESSON   XXXV  [§  105 

3.  Similarly  aucun,  mil,  pas  un  =  no,  not  any  (as  adjectives), 
and  none,  no  one,  not  one  (as  pronouns) : 

Aucun  auteur  ne  dit  cela.  No  author  says  that. 

A-t-il  de  Tespoir?  —  Aucun.  Has  he  any  hope?  — None. 

Nulle  esperance  ne  me  reste.  No  hope  remains  to  me. 

4.  If,  however,  the  context  contains  or  implies  a  negative, 
personne,  rien,  aucun  (not  nul  or  pas  un)  are  rendered  in  Eng- 
lish by  an  affirmative: 

II  n'a  rien  dit  a  personne.  He  said  nothing  to  anybody. 

II  refuse  de  rien  dire.  He  refuses  to  say  anything. 

Sans  aucune  cause.  Without  any  cause. 

Sans  rien  faire.  Without  doing  anything. 

5.  Observe  the  following  summary  of  negative  forms  and 
note  that  in  these,  as  well  as  in  the  indefinites  used  negatively, 
the  negation  is  expressed  by  ne  +  a  completing  word : 

ne  .  .  .  pas,  not  ne  .  .  .  jamais,  never          ne  .  . .  plus,  no  longer 

ne  . . .  point,  not        ne  . . .  guere,  hardly          ne  . . .  que,  only 

105.  Tel.  —  Such  a  =t  un  tel  (observe  the  word-order)  : 
Une  telle  maison.  Such  a  house. 

EXERCISE  XXXV 

attacher,  attach,  tie  la  loutre,  otter 

auparavant,  before  mauvais,  bad 

la  bete,  animal,  beast  mechant,  wicked,  cross 

bon,  kind  (to  =  pour),  gentle  parce  que,  because 

le  castor,  beaver  la  plante,  plant 

le  chameau,  camel  porter,  bear,  carry;  wear 

le  dos,  back  refuser,  refuse 

Pelephant,  m.,  elephant  le  rhinoceros,  rhinoceros 

exister,  exist,  live  taquiner,  tease 
la  fois,  time  (repeated) 
jardin  des  plantes,  Botanical  (in  Paris  also  Zoological)  Gardens 

A.  Continue:  1.  Je  n'ai  guere  vu  de  betes  sauvages,  tu.  2.  Je 
n'ai  jamais  rien  vu  de  si  bon.  3.  Je  lui  donnais  quelque  chose  de 
bon.  4.  Je  n'y  ai  vu  personne.  5.  Je  n'y  ai  rien  vu.  6.  Est-ce 
que  j'y  ai  jamais  e*te?  7.  Je  ne  lui  ai  rien  donne*  de  mauvais. 


§  105]  LESSON   XXXV  81 

B.  1.  Nous  avons  e*te*  hier  au  jardin  des  plantes  avec  nos  cousins. 

2.  II  y  a  la  beaucoup  d'animaux  aussi  bien  que  beaucoup  de  plantes. 

3.  Nous  n'y  avions  jamais  etc*  auparavant.     4.  Et  nous  n'avions 
guere  vu  de  betes  sauvages.     5.  Nous  n'avons  jamais  rien  vu  de 
plus  interessant.    6.  II  y  avait  plusieurs  elephants.    7.  On  en  avait 
attache  quelques-uns,  parce  qu'ils  etaient  mechants.     8.  D'autres 
£taient  tres  bons  et  portaient  des  enfants  sur  leur  dos.    9.  Quand 
on  leur  donnait  quelque  chose  de  bon  a  manger  ils  etaient  tres 
contents.    10.  Ils  refusaient  de  rien  manger  de  mauvais.     11.  Mais 
personne  ne  les  taquinait.    12.  Tout  le  monde  etait  bon  pour  eux. 
13.  L'anne*e  passee  mes  cousins  y  avaient  vu  un  rhinoceros,  mais  il 
n'existait  plus.     14.  Un  vieux  chameau  etait  mort  aussi.     15.  II 
n'y  en  avait  que  deux  petits.     16.  II  n'y  avait  plus  ni  castors  ni 
loutres.    17.  Mais  il  y  avait  beaucoup  d'autres  animaux  interessants. 

C.  (Oral.)     1.  Ou  avez-vous  e*te  hier?    2.  Que  veut  dire  "jardin 
des  plantes"?    3.  Y  aviez-vous  ete  auparavant?    4.  Qu'avez-vous 
vu  d'interessant?    5.  Pourquoi  avait-on  attache*  quelques-uns  des 
elephants?    6.  Pourquoi  les  elephants  6taient-ils  contents?    7.  Leur 
a-t-on  donne*  quelque  chose  de  mauvais?     8.  Quelqu'un  les  taqui- 
nait-il?    9.  Pourquoi  n'avez-vous  pas  vu  le  rhinoceros?    10.  Avez- 
vous  vu  beaucoup  d'autres  betes  sauvages?  etc. 

D.  1.  Do  you  never  go  to  the  Botanical  Gardens?    2.  I  go  there 
sometimes.     3.  I   have  been  there  several  tunes  this  summer. 

4.  Some  of  my  cousins  went  with  me.    5.  It  is  something  very  in- 
teresting.   6.  There  is  nothing  more  interesting  for  children.    7.  Yes- 
terday we  saw  some  elephants  that  we  hadn't  seen  before.    8.  Some 
of  these  elephants  had  been  tied  [up]  (use  on),  because  they  were 
cross.     9.  Others  were  very  gentle  (bon),  and  were  carrying  children 
on  their  backs.     10.  Let  us  give  the  beavers  something  good  to  eat. 
11.  Let  us  not  give  them  anything  bad.     12.  They  will  refuse  to 
eat  anything  bad.     13.  Did  anybody  tease  them?     14.  Nobody. 
15.  The  otters  were  no  longer  in  existence.    16.  We  saw  only  two 
camels.    17.  There  were  no  others.    18.  We  didn't  see  any  other 
animals. 


82  LESSON  XXXVI  [§  106 

E.  1.  A  certain  author  relates  this  story.    2.  We  have  a  few  good 
friends,  but  not  (pas)  many.    3.  The  others  have  not  come  yet. 
4.  Somebody  is  knocking  at  the  door;  who  is  it?    5.  It  is  Mr.  Du- 
rand's  son;  he  has  brought  you  something.    6.  I  haven't  seen  any- 
body.   7.  We  have  not  spoken  to  anybody.    8.  Nobody  has  spoken 
to  us.    9.  Has  the  postman  brought  me  no  letters?    10.  Not  one. 
11.  I  have  seen  none  (aucuri)  of  our  neighbours  to-day.    12.  Who 
told  you  such  a  story?     13.  Has  anybody  ever  caught  trout  in 
that  stream?     14.  Yes,  I  have  caught  some  in  it. 

F.  1.  Give  me  my  other  spectacles,  because  these  are  not  good. 
2.  Others  can  do  the  same  thing.    3.  This  pen  is  bad;  give  me  an- 
other.   4.  I  have  never  liked  (de)  such  amusements.     5.  Nobody 
met  us  in  the  street.    6.  There  was  nobody  at  home  when  I  arrived. 
7.  We  haven't  done  anything  wrong  (mauvais).    8.  Do  you  wish 
anything?    9.  Nothing,  thank  you.     10.  No  letter  for  me  to-day! 
11.  None.    12.  Nobody  can  paint  (de)  such  pictures.    13.  Such  is 
the  story  he  has  told  us.     14.  Is  your  soap  not  as  good  as  mine? 
15.  My  brother's  toothbrush  is  much  better  than  my  sister's. 


LESSON  XXXVI 

106.  Orthographical  Peculiarities.  —  Verbs  of  the  first  con- 
jugation in  -cer,  -ger  and  -yer,  as  also  those  with  e  or  e  in  the 
syllable  next  before  the  infinitive  ending,  are  conjugated  like 
donner,   but  have  certain  peculiarities  of  orthography  which 
may  best  be  observed  by  referring  to  Appendix,  D,  where  all 
these  irregularities  are  shown. 

(a)  The  models  avancer,  manger,  payer,  mener,  esperer,  appeler,  Jeter, 
acheter,  should  be  studied  before  doing  the  following  exercise. 

107.  Present  Indicative  of  dire  (irreg.),  'say,'  'tell' 

/  say,  etc. 

je  dis  nous  disons 

tu  dis  vons  dites 
il  dit  iis  disent 


§107]  LESSON  XXXVI  83 

EXERCISE  XXXVI 

amener,  bring,  take  habilement,  cleverly 

appeler,  call  jeter,  throw  (away) 

avancer,  advance,  go  on  lancer,  throw,  fling,  toss 

avidement,  greedily  libre,  free 

les  bonbons,  m.,  sweetmeats,  candy  le  lion,  lion 

la  carotte,  carrot  le  moment,  moment,  time 

le  chat,  cat  Pours,  m.,  bear 

comment,  how?  payer,  pay  (for) 

Pentree,  f.,  entrance,   admission  ressembler  a,  resemble 

(fee)  le  roi,  king 

la  fosse,  ditch,  pit  le  rugissement,  roar  (ing) 

le  gardien,  keeper  le  singe,  monkey 

habile,  clever  vers,  towards 

dormer  a  manger  a,  to  feed;  fosse  aux  ours,  bear  pit;  palais  des  singes, 
monkey  house 

A.  Continue:  1.  Je  ne  paie  (paye)  rien,  tu.    2.  J'achete  (ach&- 
terai)des  bonbons.   3.  J'avance  (avangais)  vers  1'entree.    4.  Je  jette 
(jetterai)  du  pain  aux  ours.    5.  J'espere  qu'il  arrivera  bientot.    6.  Je 
mange  (mangeais)  de  la  viande.    7.  J'appelle  (appellerai)  les  autres. 

B.  (Au  jar  din  des  plantes — suite)  1.  Ce  sont  tou  jours  nos  cousins 
qui  nous  y  amenent.     2.  L'entree  est  libre.     3.  On  ne  paie  rien. 

4.  A  rentre*e  on  achete  plusieurs  choses  pour  donner  aux  animaux. 

5.  Puis  nous  avangons  vers  la  fosse  aux  ours.    6.  On  leur  jette  du 
pain  et  des  carottes.    7.  Us  les  attrapent  tres  habilement.    8.  On 
avance  encore  et  on  arrive  au  palais  des  singes.    9.  Nous  mangeons 
des  bonbons  et  noua  leur  en  langons.     10.  Us  les  mangent  tres 
avidement.    11.  Ensuite  nous  entrons  chez  les  lions.    12.  C'est  au 
moment  ou  on  leur  donne  a  manger.    13.  Les  gardiens  leur  jettent 
de  gros  morceaux  de  viande.    14.  Us  les  attrapent  avec  des  rugisse- 
ments.     15.  Le  lion  ressemble  beaucoup  a  un  gros  chat  sauvage. 
16.  On  Tappelle  sou  vent  le  roi  des  animaux. 

C.  (Oral.)    1.  Qui  est-ce  que  vous  amenez  avec  vous?    2.  Com- 
bien  paie-t-on  a  ]  'entree?     3.  Qu'est-ce  que  vous  achetez  a  Fentre*e? 
4.  Pourquoi  achete-t-on  ces  choses?    5.  Vers  quelle  partie  du  jar- 
din  avangons-nous?     6.  Que  ferons-nous  des  (with  the)  carottes? 
7.  L'ours  est-il  tres  habile?  8.  Pourquoi  dites-vous  cela?  9.  Qu'est-ce 


84  LESSON  XXXVII  [§  108 

que  c'est  que  le  palais  des  singes?  10.  Que  jetez-vous  aux  singes? 
11.  Que  faisaient  les  gardiens  des  lions?  12.  Comment  appelle-t-on 
le  lion?  etc. 

D.  1.  Here  we  are  again  (encore  une  fois)  in  the  home  of  (chez) 
the  animals.    2.  Our  cousins  take  us  there.    3.  They  pay  [for]  the 
price  of  admission.    4.  The  entrance  is  not  free  to-day.    5.  Every- 
body buys  something  to  feed  the  animals.    6.  I  am  buying  candy  for 
the  monkeys.    7.  I  shall  buy  some  bread  and  carrots  for  the  bears. 
8.  Let  us  go  on  now  towards  the  bears.    9.  Here  is  what  they  call 
the  bear  pit.    10.  We  shall  throw  the  bears  some  carrots.    11.  Let 
us  toss  some  candy  to  the  monkeys.    12.  They  catch  it  (les)  cleverly 
and  eat  it  greedily.    13.  What  were  the  lions  doing  when  you  saw 
them?    14.  They  were  eating  big  pieces  of  meat  which  the  keepers' 
were  throwing  them.     15.  What  (how)  do  people  call  the  lion? 
16.  Do  lions  resemble  cats?     17.  I  hope  to  see  these  interesting 
animals  another  day. 

E.  1.  We  are  beginning  to  speak  French.    2.  I  was  beginning  my 
lessons  when  you  came.    3.  He  will  bring  his  brother.    4.  Who  is 
calling  me?     5.  John,  call  your  (thy)  brother.     6.  Throw  [away] 
that  apple;  it  isn't  ripe.    7.  Very  well,  I  shall  throw  it  away.    8.  Give 
me  another  (of  them).    9.  Let  us  go  on  now,  we  are  losing  our  time. 
10.  I  was  advancing  towards  the  entrance  of  the  park.     11.  The 
children  were  eating  candy.    12.  Let  us  not  eat  this  candy;  I  don't 
like  it.    13.  Let  us  go  in;  I  shall  pay  [for]  the  seats.    14.  How  much 
do  we  pay  (use  on)?  15.  I  shall  buy  this  picture  because  I  like  it 
(it  pleases  me).    16.  The  lions  were  eating  the  meat  greedily. 


LESSON  XXXVII 

108.  Article  with  Place-Names.  —  1.  Names  of  continents, 
countries,  provinces,  and  of  most  large  islands  near  Europe, 
regularly  take  the  definite  article,  and  always  so  as  subject  or 
direct  object  of  a  verb: 

L'Asie  est  un  grand  continent.  Asia  is  a  large  continent. 

Us  habitent  le  Mexique.  They  live  in  Mexico. 

Nous  parlons  de  la  France.  We  are  speaking  of  France. 


§  109]  LESSON  XXXVII  85 

2.  With  such  names  en  denotes  where,  to  where,  and  the  arti- 
cle is  omitted;  but  if  the  name  be  plural,  or  be  the  masculine 
name  of  a  country  outside  of  Europe,  &  +  the  definite  article  is 
used: 

II  est  en  (va  en)  Europe.  He  is  in  (is  going  to)  Europe. 

II  voyage  en  France  (Portugal,  m.)  He  travels  in  France  (Portugal). 

II  est  aux  Etats-Unis.  He  is  in  the  United  States. 

II  est  au  (va  au)  Japon.  He  is  in  (goes  to)  Japan. 

3.  The  article  is  usually  omitted  in  adjectival  phrases  formed 
with  de,  unless  the  name  of  the  country  be  plural  or  be  that  of 
a  masculine  country  outside  of  Europe;  and  similarly  for  de 
denoting  mere  point  of  departure: 

Les  vins  d'ltalie;  le  roi  d'Espagne.  Italian  wines;  the  king  of  Spain. 

II  revient  d'ltalie  (de  Portugal).  He  returns  from  Italy  (Portugal). 

But :  La  faience  des  Indes  (du  Ja-  Indian  (Japanese)  porcelain. 

pon), 

II  est  revenu  du  Canada.  He  has  returned  from  Canada. 

4.  To,   at,  in  =  £,  without  article,  before  names  of   cities, 
towns,  villages: 

A  Rome  (Berlin,  Sevres).  To,  at  or  in  Rome  (Berlin,  Sevres). 

5.  Any  place-name  having  a  qualifying  adjunct  requires  the 
definite  article: 

Dans  PAmerique  du  Nord.  In  North  America. 

La  Rome  de  ce  siecle.  Rome  of  this  century. 

(a)  The  definite  article  forms  a  part  of  some  names  of  cities,  e.g.  le 
Caire,  Cairo,  le  Havre,  Havre,  la  Nouvelle-Orleans,  New  Orleans,  la  Havane, 
Havana. 

6.  Names  of  mountains  always,  and  names  of  rivers  regu- 
larly, have  the  definite  article: 

Les  Alpes;  le  Nil;  le  mont  Blanc.    The  Alps;  the  Nile;  Mt.  Blanc. 

109.  Present  Indicative  of  partir  (irreg.),  'set  out,'  'start/ 
'leave/  'go' 

/  set  out,  go,  etc. 

je  pars  nous  partons 

tu  pars  vous  partez 

il  part  fls  partent 


86 


LESSON  XXXVII 


[§109 


EXERCISE  XXXVII 


1'Americain,1  m.,  American 

P  Anglais,1  m.,  Englishman 

PAngleterre,  f.,  England 

le  Canadien,1  Canadian 

la  capitale,  capital 

le  fleuve,  river  (falling  into  the  sea) 

haut,  high 

importer,  import 

le  lac,  lake 

les    lainages,    m.,    woollen   goods, 

woollens 
la  Loire,  Loire 
Londres,  London 
Lyon,  Lyons 
la  Manche,  English  Channel 


la  mer,  sea 

le  Mississipi,  the  Mississippi 

la  montagne,  mountain 

le  nord,  north 

Fouest,  m.,  west 

le  pays,  country 

le  port,  port,  wharf 

le  Rhdne,  Rhone 

le  Saint-Laurent,  St.  Lawrence 

la  Seine,  Seine 

separer,  separate 

situer,  situate 

la  Tamise,  Thames 

le  vin,  wine 


A.  Continue:  1.  Je  suis  en  France,  tu.    2.  Je  demeure  aux  fitats- 
Unis.    3.  J'irai  en  Europe  T6te  prochain.    4.  Je  passerai  quelques 
jours  a  Paris.    5.  Je  ne  vais  pas  au  Canada.    6.  J'aime  le  the  du 
Japon.    7.  J'habite  TAm^rique  du  Nord.    8.  Je  pars  du  Havre. 

B.  1.  La  France  est  un  pays  situe*  dans  Touest  de  FEurope. 
2.  Paris  est  la  capitale  de  la  France.    3.  Quelques  grands  fleuves  de 
la  France  sont  la  Seine,  le  Rhone  et  la  Loire.    4.  Paris  est  sur  la 
Seine.    5.  Lyon  est  sur  le  Rhone.    6.  La  plus  haute  montagne  de 
la  France  c'est  le  mont  Blanc.    7.  II  n'y  a  pas  de  grands  lacs  en 
France.    8.  On  en  trouve  dans  1'Amerique  du  Nord.    9.  Les  fleuves 
des  fitats-Unis  et  du  Canada  sont  tres  importants.    10.  Le  Saint- 
Laurent  et  le  Mississipi  sont  plus  grands  que  le  Rhone  et  la  Loire. 
11.  L'Angleterre  n'est  pas  loin  de  la  France.     12.  Londres,  sur  la 
Tamise,  en  est  la  capitale.    13.  La  Manche  s6pare  les  deux  pays. 
14.  Les  Anglais  vont  souvent  en  France  et  les  Frangais  en  Angle- 
terre.    15.  On  trouve  des  Anglais  a  Paris  et  des  Frangais  &  Londres. 
16.  Les  Anglais  importent  les  vins  de  France  (or  frangais) ;  les  Fran- 
gais  importent  les  lainages  d'Angleterre  (or  anglais).     17.  Le  Havre 
est  un  port  de  mer  sur  la  Manche.    18.  C'est  du  Havre  qu'on  part 


1  Adjectives  of  nationality  used  as  proper  nouns  require  a  capital. 


§  109]  LESSON    XXXVII  87 

pour  les  fitats-Unis  et  le  Canada.  19.  II  y  a  beaucoup  de  Frangais 
aux  fitats-Unis  et  an  Canada.  20.  Les  Americains  et  les  Canadiens 
vont  souvent  en  France. 

C.  (Oral  Exercise  on  B.) 

D.  Supply  the  prepositional  form:   1.  Nos  parents  demeurent 
.  .  .  France,  .  .  .  Paris,  .  .  .  Europe,  .  .  .  fitats-Unis,  .  .  .  Canada, 
.  .  .  Angleterre, .  .  .  TAm^rique  du  Nord.   2.  Je  suis  alle*  .  .  .  Europe, 
.  .  .  Londres,  .  .  .  Angleterre,  .  .  .  fitats-Unis,  ...  la  Nouvelle- 
Orleans,  .  .  .  Paris. 

E.  1.  Where  is  France?    2.  France  is  in  the  west  of  Europe. 

3.  The  Seine  is  one  of  the  great  rivers  of  France.    4.  The  Rhone  ie 
another  of  its  great  rivers.    5.  Paris  is  on  the  former.    6.  Lyons 
is  on  the  latter.     7.  Mt.  Blanc  is  in  France.     8.  It  is  the  high- 
est mountain  in  Europe.    9.  There  are  no  large  lakes  in  France. 
10.  Some  of  the  largest  lakes  are  in  North  America.    11.  England 
is  near  France.     12.  Have  you  ever  been  in  London?    13.  It  is  a 
seaport  and  the  capital  of  England.     14.  The  English  Channel 
separates    France    from    England.      15.  Englishmen    cross    the 
English  Channel  to  go  to  France.    16.  Frenchmen  cross  it  to  go 
to  England.     17.  They  sometimes  start  from  Havre. 

F.  1.  There  are  many  Englishmen  in  Paris.     2.  We  (on)  find 
also  many  Frenchmen  in  London.    3.  Englishmen  like  French  wines. 

4.  Frenchmen  like  English  woollens.     5.  Have  you  ever  been  hi 
Havre?    6.  People  (on)  start  from  Havre  to  go  to  the  United  States 
and  Canada.     7.  Canada  and  the  United  States  are  very  large 
countries.    8.  The  rivers  of  North  America  are  much  longer  than 
those  of  Europe.    9.  The  St.  Lawrence  is  larger  than  the  Seine. 
10.  Americans  like  to  pass  the  winter  in  Europe.     11.  They  set 
out  in  autumn  to  pass  the  winter  in  England  or  in  France.    12.  There 
are  many  Frenchmen  in  the  United  States.     13.  There  are  many 
Americans  and  Canadians  in  Paris.    14.  Are  you  not  going  to  Paris 
this  winter?    15.  Have  you  any  of  the  thick  paper  I  gave  you? 


88  LESSON  XXXVIII  [§  110 

LESSON  XXXVIII 
110.          The  Conditional  of  donner,  finir,  vendre 


I  should  give,  etc. 

/  should  finish,  etc. 

/  should  sell,  etc. 

je  donnerais 
tu  donnerais 
il  donnerait 

finirais 
finirais 
finirait 

vendrais 
vendrais 
vendrait 

nous  donnerions 
vous  donneriez 
ils  donneraient 

finirions 
finiriez 
finiraient 

vendrions 
vendriez 
vendraient 

(a)  In  all  verbs  the  conditional  has  the  same  stem  as  the  future  (cf .  §  74) ; 
the  conditional  endings  are  the  same  as  those  of  the  imperfect  indicative 
(cf.  §  63). 

111.  The  Conditional  of  avoir  and  etre 

I  should  have,  etc. 

j'aurais  nous  aurions 

tu  aurais  vous  auriez 

il  aurait  ils  auraient 

/  should  be,  etc. 

je  serais  nous  serions 

tu  serais  vous  seriez 

il  serait  ils  seraient 

112.  Conditional  Anterior.  —  It  is  formed  by  adding  the  past 
participle  to  the  above  as  auxiliaries  (cf .  §  44) : 

j 'aurais  vendu,  etc.,  /  should  have  sold,  etc. 

je  serais  arrive(e),  etc.,  /  should  have  arrived,  etc. 

113.  Conditional  Sentences.  —  1.  The  conditional  is  used  to 
express  what  would  happen  (result)  in  case  something  else  were 
to  happen  (condition): 

S'il  avait  le  temps  (condition}  il      //  he  had  time,  he  would  play. 
jouerait  (result). 

(a)   si  elides  the  i  only  before  il  or  ils. 


§  113]  LESSON  XXXVIII        §  89 

2.  A  result  clause  in  the  conditional  (English  should  or  would) 
regularly  has  the  if  clause  in  the  imperfect  indicative,  whatever 
be  the  corresponding  English  form: 

Si  j'etudiais  bien  (condition),  mon   //  /  studied  (if  I  were  to  study ,  were 
pere  serait  content  (result).  I  to  study,   if  I  should  study, 

should  I  study)  well,  my  father 
would  be  glad. 

3.  A  result  clause  in  the  present,  the  imperative,  or  the  fu- 
ture, requires  the  if  clause  to  be  in  the  present  indicative,  what- 
ever be  the  corresponding  English  form: 

II  joue  s'il  a  le  temps.  He  plays  if  he  has  time. 

Jouez  si  vous  avez  le  temps.  Play  if  you  have  time. 

S'il  est  ici  demain,  je  lui  parlerai.   //  he  is  (be,  should  be,  should  he  be) 

here  to-morrow,  I  shall  (or  will) 

speak  to  him. 

(a)  Contrast  the  tense  after  si  in  the  last  example  with  §  76:  Quand  il 
arrivera,  je  partirai,  but  s'il  arrive,  je  partirai. 

4.  The    auxiliary   is    considered    as    the    verb    in    compound 
tenses,  and  the  above  rules  apply  to  it : 

Si  j'avais  fini  plus  tot,  j'aurais      If  I  had  finished  sooner,  I  should 
fait  une  promenade.  have  taken  a  walk. 

5.  The  tense  following  si  =  whether  (if),  is  not  restricted  as 
above : 

Je  demande  s'il  partira.  /  ask  whether  (if)  he  will  go. 

J'ai  demande  s'il  partirait.  /  asked  whether  he  would  go. 

EXERCISE  XXXVIII 

la  cascade,  cascade,  waterfall  monter,  go  up,  ascend,  get  into  (car- 
le col,  (mountain)  pass  riage,  etc.) 

demain,  to-morrow  la  saison,  season 

descendre,  descend,  go  down  le  sapin,  fir,  spruce 

Petat,  m.,  state,  condition  la  scierie,  sawmill 

P  excursion,  f.,  excursion  le  sentier,  path(way) 

la  foret,  forest  si,  if,  whether 

le  glacier,  glacier  la  station,  station 

la  gorge,  gorge,  ravine  tant,  so  much,  so  many 

jusqu'a,  as  far  as,  to  le  torrent,  torrent. 
la  station  d'ete,  summer  resort;  je  voudrais  (bien),  I  should  like  to 


90  LESSON  XXXVIII  [§  113 

IMPERFECT  INDICATIVE  OF  aller,  pouvoir,  vouloir 
j'allais  je  pouvais  je  voulais 

tu  allais,  etc.  tu  pouvais,  etc.  tu  voulais,  etc. 

FUTURE  INDICATIVE  OF  pouvoir,  vouloir 
je  pourrai  je  voudrai 

tu  pourras,  etc.  tu  voudras,  etc. 

CONDITIONAL  OF  aller,  fake,  pouvoir,  vouloir 
j'irais  je  ferais  je  pourrais  je  voudrais 

tu  irais,  etc.        tu  ferais,  etc.       tu  pourrais,  etc.       tu  voudrais,  etc. 

A.  Continue:  1.  Si  j'ai  le  temps,  je  ferai  une  promenade,  si  tu 
...  tu  ...    2.    J'aurais  fait  une  promenade  si  j  'avals  eu  le  temps, 
tu  .  .  .  si  tu  .  .  .  3.  S'il  etait  arrive*,  je  serais  parti,  ...  tu  ...    4.  Je 
lui  preterais  le  livre  si  je  1'avais,  tu  .  .  .  si  tu  .  .  .    5.  Je  ne  vendrais 
pas  mes  pommes  a  ce  marchand,  tu  .  .  .  tes  .  .  .    6.  J'irai  au  lac  si 
je  peux,  tu  .  .  .  si  tu  .  .  .    7.  Je  voudrais  y  aller  si  je  pouvais,  tu  .  .  . 
si  tu  .  .  .    8.  Je  pourrai  y  aller  si  je  veux,  tu  .  .  .  si  tu  .  .  . 

B.  1.  Nous  sommes  arrives  de  bonne  heure  au  village  de  Beau- 
lieu.    2.  C'est  une  jolie  petite  station  d'ete.    3.  S'il  n'y  a  pas  trop 
de  neige  aux  cols  et  aux  bois,  nous  ferons  bientot  des  excursions. 
4.  Si  les  sentiers  e*taient  assez  bons,  nous  prendrions  celui  qui  passe 
par  la  foret  de  sapins.     5.  II  nous  menerait  jusqu'a  la  cascade. 
6.  Si  nous  pouvions,  nous  irions  jusqu'au  petit  lac.    7.  Nous  vou- 
drions  bien  le  voir  en  cette  saison.    8.  Si  nous  etions  arrives  plus 
tard,  les  sentiers  auraient  e'te'  en  meilleur  etat.     9.  Nous  serions 
alles  jusqu'au  glacier.    10.  Nous  aurions  vu  le  torrent  qui  en  coule. 
11.  Et  nous  serions  descendus  dans  ia  gorge  ou  il  passe.     12.  Si 
nous  voulions,  nous  pourrions  monter  demain  jusqu'a  la  scierie. 

C.  (Oral.)     1.  Qu'est-ce  que  c'est  que  le  village  de  Beaulieu? 
2.  Que  veut  dire  en  anglais  "station  d'e*t6"?    3.  Qu'allez-vous  faire 
si  les  sentiers  sont  en  bon  e"tat?    4.  Ou  irait-on  s'il  n'y  avait  pas 
tant  de  neige?    5.  Si  on  prend  ce  sentier-ci  ou  arrivera-t-on?    6.  Et 
celui-la  ou  nous  menerait-il?     7.  Pourrait-on  y  aller  ce  matin? 
8.  Ou  voudriez-vous  aller?    9.  fites-vous  monte  jusqu'au  glacier? 
10.  Qu'est-ce  que  vous  auriez  vu  si  vous  y  6tiez  monte?    11.  De- 
scendrez-vous  dans  la  gorge  si  vous  pouvez?    12.  Pourrait-on  monter 
aujourd'hui  jusqu'a  la  scierie?  etc. 


§  113]  LESSON   XXXVIII  91 

D.  Change  the  infinitives  into  the  proper  forms:  1.  Si  vous  (avoir) 
ma  plume  donnez-la-moi.     2.  Si  vous  voulez  ce  livre  je  vous  le 
(donner).     3.  Si  je  (pouvoir),  j'irai  patiner.     4.  S'ils  (etre  arriver) 
je  serais  de*ja  parti.    5.  J'irais  au  marche*  si  je  (pouvoir).    6.  Vou- 
driez-vous  y  aller  si  vous  (pouvoir)^    7.  Nous  jetterons  ces  pommes 
si  elles  ne  (etre)  pas  bonnes.     8.  3' (avoir  acheter)  ce  tableau  s'il 
n'avait  pas  etc"  si  cher. 

E.  1.  Are  you  going  to  the  summer  resort  near  the  village  of 
Beaulieu?    2.  Are  you  going  there  if  you  have  tune  enough  and 
money  enough?    3.  If  we  were  at  Beaulieu,  we  should  make  an 
excursion  in  the  mountains.    4.  If  there  were  not  so  much  snow, 
we  should  go  as  far  as  the  spruce  forest.    5.  If  this  path  led  to 
the  forest,  I  should  take  it.    6.  Our  friends  would  accompany  us 
there.     7.  I  should  go  as  far  as  the  pass  if  I  could.    8.  Should  you 
like  to  see  the  little  lake  at  this  season?    9.  Yes,  I  should  like  to 
go  there  if  the  paths  were  in  good  condition.     10.  They  would  be 
in  better  condition  if  there  were  less  snow.    11.  If  you  had  gone 
as  far  as  the  glacier,  you  would  have  seen  something  very  beauti- 
ful.   12.  If  we  should  be  able,  we  shall  go  down  into  the  gorge  or 
to  the  waterfall.     13.  Had  we  gone  down  there,  we  should  have 
seen  the  torrent.     14.  You  can  go  up  to  the  sawmill  now  if  you 
like.     15.  Ask  (a)  your  friend  if  he  will  be  here  eariy  to-morrow. 

F.  1.  If  you  wish  to  see  the  letter,  here  it  is.    2.  If  he  is  here 
to-morrow,  show  it  to  him.     3.  We  shall  wait  if  we  can.     4.  I 
should  have  waited  for  him  had  I  had  time.    5.  We  should  have 
lent  him  some  money  if  we  had  had  any.    6.  Had  I  not  left  my  books 
at  school,  I  should  study  this  evening.    7.  If  I  were  to  leave  my 
books  at  school,  my  father  would  not  be  pleased  at  it  (en).    8.  Had 
he  been  there,  I  should  have  spoken  to  him  of  it.    9.  Should  he  be 
there  to-morrow,  I  shall  speak  to  him.    10.  I  should  be  very  glad 
if  you  went  with  me.    11.  We  should  be  glad  if  he  were  to  arrive 
before  us.    12.  If  you  should  go  to  the  market,  buy  me  some  flowers, 
if  you  please.    13.  If  there  are  any  flowers  at  the  market,  I  shall 
buy  you  some.    14.  When  you  find  any,  bring  me  some. 


92  LESSON  XXXIX  [§  114 

LESSON  XXXIX 

114.  Impersonal  Verbs.  —  1.  Such  verbs  are  conjugated  in 
the  third  person  singular  only,  with  the  subject  il  =  it: 

H  faut  (fallait,  faudra).  It  is  (was,  will  be)  necessary. 

(a)  II  is  omitted  in  certain  phrases,  e.g.  N'importe  (  =  il  n'importe), 
It  doesn't  matter. 

2.  Many  verbs  may  be  used  both  personally  and  imperson- 
ally, some  having  a  special  meaning  as  impersonals: 

Nous  arriverons  de  bonne  heure.    We  shall  arrive  early. 
II  arrive  souvent  que,  etc.  It  often  happens  that,  etc. 

3.  Conditions  of  the  weather,  etc.,  are  denoted  by  imper- 
sonal verbs,  and  by  faire  used  impersonally: 

II  neige;  il  pleuvra.  It  is  snowing;  it  will  rain. 

II  fait  beau  (temps).  It  is  fine  (weather). 

II  fait  chaud;  il  fait  du  vent.  It  is  hot;  it  is  windy, 

(a)  Distinguish  from  constructions  with  a  personal  subject,  e.g.  Le  temps 
est  beau  (froid) ,  The  weather  is  fine  (cold) . 

4.  For  impersonal  il  y  a  (avait,  etc.),  see  §  31;  for  il  faut 

(fallait,  etc.),  see  §  60,  l. 

5.  Observe  il  y  a  =  ago: 

II  est  arrive  il  y  a  une  heure.  He  arrived  an  hour  ago. 

6.  Further,  an  indirect  object  with  il  faut  denotes  (1)  the 
person  who  lacks,  needs  ( =  avoir  besoin  de),  or  (2)  the  person 
concerned  in  the  action  expressed  by  an  infinitive: 

II  faut  un  chapeau  a  Jean.  John  needs  a  hat. 

II  leur  faudra  cent  francs.  They  will  need  a  hundred  francs. 

II  lui  faudra  etudier  davantage.       He  will  have  to  (must)  study  more, 

EXERCISE  XXXIX 

assez,  rather,  quite  geler,  freeze 

la  boue,  mud  malade,  ill,  sick 

le  cas,  case  neiger,  snow 

le  climat,  climate  pleuvoir,  irreg.,  rain 

davantage,  more,  still  more  sec,  dry 

degeler,  thaw  le  soleil,  sun 

doux,  soft,  mild  le  sport,  sport 

fort,  adv.,  heavily,  hard  superbe,  superb,  splendid 

froid,  cold  le  temps,  weather 


§  114]  LESSON  XXXIX  93 

quel  temps  fait-il?  what  kind  of  weather  is  it?  il  fait  beau  (temps),  it  is 
fine  (weather) ;  le  temps  est  tres  beau,  the  weather  is  very  fine;  il  fait 
du  soleil  (du  vent,  de  la  bpue),  it  is  sunny  (windy ,  muddy);  il  pleut 
(a  plu,  pleuvait,  pleuvra,  pleuvrait,  etc.),  it  is  raining  (rained ,  was 
raining,  will  rain,  would  rain,  etc.) 

A.  (Station  d'hiver)    1.  II  a  neige  il  y  a  quelques  jours.    2.  Puis 
il  a  plu  un  peu.    3.  Ensuite  il  a  gele  assez  fort.    4.  Ce  matin  il 
gele  encore,  mais  il  fait  beau  (temps).    5.  II  fait  du  soleil  et  presque 
pas  de  (hardly  any)  vent.     6.  II  fait  un  temps  superbe.     7.  II  y 
aura  bientot  beaucoup  d'amusements  sur  la  montagne.     8.  S'il 
neigeait  et  s'il  gelait  encore  plus  fort,  il  y  en  aurait  davantage. 
9.  On  est  ici  pour  les  sports  d'hiver,  et  on  ne  serait  pas  content  s'il 
faisait  trop  doux.    10.  S'il  faisait  moins  froid,  il  degelerait.    11.  II 
y  aurait  de  1'eau  et  de  la  boue  partout.    12.  En  ce  cas  on  ne  pourrait 
pas  patiner.    13.  Ce  qu'il  faut  dans  les  stations  d'hiver  c'est  un  air 
sec  et  froid.     14.  Un  tel  climat  est  bon  pour  les  malades  et  aussi 
pour  ceux  qui  aiment  les  sports. 

B.  (Oral.)     1.  Neige-t-il?    2.  Neigeait-il  hier?    3.  Quand  a-t-il 
neige"?    4.  Qu'est-ce  qu'il  a  fait  ensuite?    5.  Quel  temps  fait-il  ce 
matin?    6.  Le  temps  n'est-il  pas  beau  pour  la  saison?    7.  Faisait-il 
du  vent  hier?     8.  Fera-t-il  du  soleil  aujourd'hui?     9.  Pourrions- 
nous  sortir  s'il  neigeait?     10.  Y  aurait-il  beaucoup  d'amusements 
s'il  gelait  bien  fort?    11.  Pourquoi  n'etes-vous  pas  venu  a  la  station 
d'hiver?     12.  Seriez-vous  content  s'il  faisait  doux?     13.  Qu'est-ce 
qui  arriverait  s'il  faisait  un  temps  plus  doux?    14.  Y  aurait-il  de 
la  boue?     15.  Ne  pouvons-nous  pas   patiner    quand  il   degele? 
16.  Quel  temps  nous  faut-il  dans  les  stations  d'hiver?  etc. 

C.  1.  We  are  here  for  the  winter  sports.     2.  We  arrived  two 
days  ago.     3.  The  weather  is  splendid.     4.  Last  week  it  snowed 
heavily.    5.  Then  it  rained.    6.  This  morning  it  is  freezing  quite 
hard,  but  it  is  fine.    7.  It  is  windy,  but  at  the  same  time  it  is  sunny. 
8.  There  will  be  a  great  many  people  (monde)  on  the  mountain  to- 
day.   9.  We  should  not  be  pleased  if  the  weather  were  mild.    10.  If 
it  snowed  still  more,  we  should  be  better  (more)  pleased.    11.  If  it 
should  rain,  we  shall  have  no  ice.     12.  Then  it  will  be  muddy. 
13.  There  will  be  mud  on  all  the  paths.    14.  Should  we  be  able  to 


94  LESSON  XL  [§  115 

skate  if  it  thawed?    15.  To  (pour)  skate  we  must  have  good  ice. 
16.  What  we  need  (it)  is  a  cold  climate. 

D.  1.  What  kind  of  weather  will  it  be  this  evening?  2.  Is  it 
not  going  to  rain?  3.  It  will  not  rain;  it  is  too  windy.  4.  It 
would  rain  if  it  were  not  so  (use  tant)  windy.  5.  It  was  very  cold 
yesterday.  6.  It  will  be  milder  to-day.  7.  In  that  case,  we  shall 
take  a  walk.  8.  We  can't  go  out  when  it  is  raining.  9.  The  weather 
is  always  bad  at  this  season.  10.  If  it  were  fine  to-day,  we  should 
be  glad.  11.  It  has  been  raining,  but  it  is  dry  at  present.  12.  If  it 
freezes,  we  are  going  to  skate.  13.  It  was  mild  yesterday,  but  now 
we  have  (a)  cold  weather.  14.  It  was  muddy  because  it  had  rained. 
15.  We  shall  have  to  (use  faudra)  wait  for  him.  16.  He  hasn't 
come  yet. 

LESSON  XL 

115.  Reflexive  Verbs.  —  A  reflexive  verb  is  one  whose  sub- 
ject is  represented  as  acting  on  itself.     Some  verbs  are  always 
reflexive,  but  any  transitive  verb  may  be  so  used. 

116.  Present  Indicative  and  Imperative  of  se  cacher 

I  hide  myself,  etc. 

je  me  cache  nous  nous  cachons 

tu  te    caches  vous  vous  cachez 

il  (elle)  se   cache  ils  (elles)  se      cachent 

(a)  These  same  pronoun  forms  (me,  te,  etc.)  are  used  also  as  indirect 
objects,  e.g.  Je  me  rappelle  cela,  I  remember  that  (lit.  recall  that  to  myself). 

(6)  Observe  the  imperative:  cache-toi,  cachons-nous,  cachez-vous,  and 
negatively:  ne  te  cache  pas,  ne  nous  cachons  pas,  ne  vous  cachez  pas. 

117.  Use  of  Reflexives.  —  1.  A  French  reflexive  often  renders 
an  English  non-reflexive  (generally  intransitive) : 

II  s'arrete;  il  s' eerie.  He  stops;  he  exclaims. 

2.  Or  a  reflexive  +  a  preposition  has  the  value  of  an  English 
transitive  verb: 

Je  m'approchais  de  la  ville.      I  was  approaching  the  town. 
Vous  souvenez-vous  de  cela?     Do  you  remember  that? 


§117]  LESSON  XL  95 

3.  The   reflexive   often  translates   the   English  passive,   es- 
pecially when  the  agent  is  not  specified: 

Ce  livre  se  public  &  Paris.  This  book  is  published  in  Paris. 

Cela  se  dit  partout.  That  is  said  everywhere. 

4.  When  the  verb  is  plural,  the  meaning  may  be  either  re- 
flexive or  reciprocal,  ambiguity  being  avoided,  where  necessary, 
by  some  modifying  expression: 

Nous  nous  flattens.  We  flatter  ourselves  (or  each  other). 

Us  se  font  mal  Pun  &  Pautre.  They  hurt  one  another. 

5.  Observe  the  use  of  the  definite  article  along  with  an  indi- 
rect reflexive  object  to  denote  possession,  especially  of  parts  of 
the  body,  clothing,  etc. : 

Je  me  lave  les  mains.  I  am  washing  my  hands. 

EXERCISE  XL 

Pabri,  m.,  shelter  Pendroit,  m.,  place 

s'amuser,  enjoy  oneself  excellent,  excellent 

s'approcher  (de),  approach,  gener,  restrain,  confine,  etc. 

come  near,  go  near  nager,  swim 

la  bale,  bay  le  pied,  foot 

se  baigner,  bathe  (intr.)  la  plage,  beach 

balneaire,  bathing  (as  adj.)  plonger,  plunge,  dive 

le  bateau,  boat  se  promener,  take  a  walk,  etc. 

le  bord,  border,  shore  se  rappeler,  remember 

le  cafe-restaurant,  restaurant  la  route,  way,  road 

le  casino,  casino  le  trottoir,  sidewalk,  pavement 

le  concert,  concert  se  trouver,  find  oneself,  be 

deranger,  disturb   -  la  vapeur,  steam 
s'embarquer,  go  on  board 

bains  de  mer,  sea-bathing;  station  balneaire,  seaside  resort;  &  Pabri  de, 
sheltered  from;  se  promener  or  fake  une  promenade  &  pied  (&  cheval, 
en  voiture,  en  bateau,  etc.),  to  take  or  go  for  a  walk  (ride,  drive,  sail, 
row,  etc.)',  bateau  a  vapeur,  steamer,  steamboat;  se  donner  la  main, 
shake  hands;  comment  vous  appelez-vous?  what  is  your  name?  com- 
ment vous  portez-vous?  how  are  you?  je  me  porte  bien,  merci,  I  am 
well,  thank  you;  ne  vous  derangez  pas,  don't  disturb  yourself;  ne  vous 
genez  pas,  make  yourself  at  home 


96  LESSON   XL  [§  117 

A.  (La  station  balneaire)     1.  C'est  une  ville  qui  se  trouve  au 
bord  de  la  mer.    2.  On  s'y  amuse  beaucoup.    3.  On  y  trouve  des 
bains  de  mer  excellents.    4.  La  plage  ou  on  se  baigne  est  tr£s  belle. 

5.  Tout  (quite)  pres  se  trouve  une  jolie  petite  baie  a  1'abri  des  vents. 

6.  La  on  peut  se  promener  en  bateau.    7.  II  y  a  aussi  un  endroit 
ou  on  peut  nager  et  plonger.     8.  Au  port  nous  nous  embarquons 
sur  le  bateau  a  vapeur  pour  faire  des  excursions.     9.  Pres  de  la 
plage  il  y  a  une  rdute  avec  un  trottoir  ou  on  se  promene  a  pied, 
a  cheval  ou  en  voiture.    10.  Le  casino  se  trouve  au  bout  du  trottoir. 
11.  Des  concerts  s'y  donnent  tous  les  jours.     12.  Les  salons  de 
lecture  et  le  cafe-restaurant  s'y  trouvent  aussi. 

B.  Continue:  1.  Je  me  trouve  tres  bien  ici,  tu.    2.  Je  m'amusais 
beaucoup.    3.  Est-ce  que  je  me  baignerai  aujourd'hui?  te  baigneras- 
tu?    4.  Je  ne  m'embarquerai  pas  sur  le  bateau.    5.  Je  ne  vais  pas 
m'y  embarquer.     6.  Je  me  porte  bien.    7.  Je  ne  me  rappelle  pas 
cela.    8.  Give  the  imperative  affirmative  and  negative  of:  se  promener, 
s'embarquer,  se  rappeler. 

C.  (Oral.)    1.  Qu'est-ce   que   c'est    qu'une    station    balneaire? 
2.  Ou  se  trouve  la  station  dont  vous  parlez?    3.  Esperez-vous  vous 
y  amuser  beaucoup?    4.  Ou  allez-vous  vous  baigner?     5.  Aimez- 
vous  a  vous  promener  en  bateau?     6.  Ou  peut-on  s'embarquer? 

7.  Voulez-vous  vous  embarquer  a  present?    8.  Ou  se  promene-t-on 
a  pied?     9.  N'allez-vous  pas  vous  promener  a  cheval  ce  matin? 
10.  Ne  vous  portez-vous  pas  bien?     11.  Ou  se  donnent  les  con- 
certs? etc. 

D.  1.  We  are  going  to  an  excellent  seaside  resort.    2.  It  is1  on  the 
seashore  near  a  village.    3.  It  is1  on  a  pretty  little  bay.    4.  I  shall 
enjoy  myself  very  much  there.     5.  Don't  you  admire  the  beautiful 
beach?     6.  We  are  going  to  bathe  there  this  morning.    7.  Do  you 
like  to  go  boating  sometimes?     8.  Let  us  go  boating.    9.  We  can 
swim  and  dive  here  if  we  wish.     10.  Let  us  go  on  board  the  steamer 
now.    11.  I  shall  take  a  walk  first.    12.  I  am  not  very  well.    13.  If 
you  wish  to  go  for  a  ride,  I  will  accompany  you.     14.  A  concert 
will  be  given  in  the  casino  this  evening.    15.  The  reading  room 
was1  formerly  in  the  casino  at  the  end  of  the  road.     16.  Shall  you 

1  Use  se  trouver. 


§  118]  LESSON  XLI  97 

be  in  the  reading  room  when  we  arrive  there?     17.  Will  you  take 
my  chair?     18.  Don't  disturb  yourself,  I'll  take  this  one. 

E.  1.  Let  us  not  hide  (ourselves).  2.  We  shall  not  hide.  3.  We 
salute  each  other  when  we  meet  (each  other).  4.  We  always  shook 
hands  when  we  met  (each  other).  5.  What  is  his  name?  6.  What 
is  your  name?  7.  How  are  you  to-day?  8.  What  is  the  name  of 
that  village  to  which  the  sidewalk  leads?  9.  It  is  called  Belleroche. 
10.  Do  you  remember  that  story?  11.  People  are  telling  it  at  all 
the  seaside  resorts.  12.  Don't  go  near  the  water.  13.  Don't  cut 
yourself  (2d  sing.).  14.  I  shall  buy  myself  a  fine  house.  15.  These 
two  sisters  love  one  another  very  much.  16.  This  is  my  chair; 
take  it;  make  yourself  at  home. 


LESSON  XLI 

118.  The  Passive  Voice.  —  1.  The  passive  voice  of  a  transi- 
tive verb  is  formed  by  adding  its  past  participle  to  the  aux- 
iliary verb  etre,  thus: 

PRESENT  INDICATIVE  PAST  INDEFINITE  INDICATIVE 

/  am  loved,  etc.  .  I  have  been  lovedj  etc. 

je  suis         aime(e)  j'ai         e"te*  aime*(e) 

tu  es  aime(e)  tu  as        ete  aime(e) 

il  (elle)  est          aime(e)  il  (elle)  a         ete  aime(e) 

nous  sommes  aim£(e)s  nous  avons  e*te  aime*(e)s 

vous  etes        aime(e)s  vous  avez    e*te  aime(e)s 

ils  (elles)  sont        aime(e)s  ils  (elles)  ont     ete  aime(e)s 

(a)  The  past  participle  £te  is  always  invariable,  but  the  participle  of 
the  passive  verb  agrees  with  the  subject  in  gender  and  number,  like  an 
adjective  (cf .  §  14) ;  for  other  tenses  of  the  passive,  see  Appendix,  C,  4. 

2.  After  a  passive,  by  =  par,  usually  when  a  definite  inten- 
tion on  the  part  of  the  agent  is  implied;  otherwise  by  de: 

Elle  a  e*te"  tuee  par  les  voleurs.          She  was  killed  by  the  robbers. 
La  dame  etait  suivie  de  son  fils.      The  lady  was  followed  by  her  son. 
Ils  seront  aimes  de  tous.  They  will  be  loved  by  everybody. 

3.  The  English  passive  is  frequently  translated  into  French 
by  using  on  (cf .  §  38,  3)  with  an  active  verb,  or  by  a  reflexive  con- 


98  LESSON  XLI  [§  118 

struction  (cf.  §  117,  3),  unless  the  agent  is  specified  (cf.  2,  above), 
or  unless  the  passive  denotes  merely  a  resultant  condition: 

On  m'a  trompe".  I  have  been  deceived. 

On  a  re*pondu  &  ma  question.  My  question  has  been  answered. 

Ce  livre  se  publie  &  Paris.  This  book  is  published  in  Paris. 

But:  Les  salles  sont  fermees.        The  halls  are  closed. 

EXERCISE  XLI 

celebre,  celebrated,  famous  Marc-Aurele,  Marcus  Aurelius 

le  chateau,  castle  les  meubles,  m.,  furniture 

la  decoration,  decoration  Napoleon,  Napoleon 

s'elever,  rise,  stand  ouvert,  p.  part,  of  ouvrir,  open 

equestre,  equestrian  la  reine,  queen 

executer,  execute  restaurer,  restore 

fermer,  close,  shut  la  scene,  scene 

generalement,  generally  la  statue,  statue 

Pinterieur,  m.,  interior  la  tapisserie,  tapestry 

italien,  Italian  visiter,  visit 

de  nos  jours,  in  our  day(s),  nowadays 

A.  1.  Nous  avons  visite*  aujourd'hui  un  chateau  celebre.    2.  II 
a  e*te*  bati  par  un  des  rois  de  France  et  restaure*  par  Napoleon.    3.  La 
decoration  a  e*te*  exe*cutee  par  des  peintres  italiens  et  frangais.    4.  La 
plus  grande  partie  du  chateau  est  ouverte  au  public.    5.  Mais  il  y 
a  des  salles  qui  sont  toujours  fermees.    6.  Une  des  cours  s'appelle 
la  cour  du  Cheval-Blanc.    7.  Une  statue  Equestre  de  Marc-Aurele 
s'y  elevait  autrefois.    8.  A  Tinterieur  se  voient  beaucoup  de  tableaux 
et  de  tapisseries.     9.  Les  scenes  de  ces  tableaux  sont  quelquefois 
emprunte*es  aux  vies  des  rois  et  des  reines.    10.  On  y  voit  aussi  de 
beaux  meubles.    11.  Us  sont  generalement  plus  beaux  que  ceux  qui 
se  font  de  nos  jours. 

B.  (Oral.)    1.  Qu'avez-vous  fait  ce  matin?    2.  Le  public  peut-il 
voir  ce  chateau?    3.  Par  qui  ce  chateau  a-t-il  e*t6  bati?    4.  Par  qui 
a-t-il  e*te  restaure*?    5.  La  grande  salle  est-elle  ferm^e  aujourd'hui? 
6.  Comment  s'appelle  cette  cour-la?     7.  Pourquoi  s'appelle-t-elle 
comme  cela?    8.  Qu'est-ce  qu'on  voit  a  rinterieur  de  cette  salle? 
9.  Fait-on  de  beaux  meubles  de  nos  jours?    10.  Sont-ils  aussi  beaux 
que  ceux  qui  se  faisaient  autrefois?  etc. 


§  119]  LESSON  XLII  99 

C.  1.  The  castles  that  we  have  visited  are  very  famous.    2.  We 
visited  one  yesterday.    3.  By  whom  was  it  built?    4.  By  whom  was 
it  restored?    5.  It  was  built  by  an  ancient  French  king  and  restored 
by  Napoleon.    6.  Some  of  the  halls  are  closed  to  the  public.    7.  They 
will  be  open  next  week.    8.  The  decoration  of  this  castle  is  much 
admired.    9.  By  whom  was  it  executed?    10.  What  is  the  name  of 
this  courtyard?     11.  It  is  called  the  court  of  the  White  Horse. 

12.  Many  tapestries  are  [to  be]  seen  in  the  halls  of  the  castle. 

13.  The  scenes  of  the  most  part  of  the  tapestries  have  been  borrowed 
from  the  lives  of  the  kings.     14.  The  furniture  which  is  made  in 
our  days  is  not  always  beautiful. 

D.  1.  This  castle  was  formerly  inhabited  by  the  kings  of  France. 
2.  It  was  built  when  there  were  kings  and  queens  in  France.  3.  There- 
are  none  now  (plus).     4.  The  decoration  was  done  by  Italian 
painters.    5.  Italian  painters  have  always  been  famous.    6.  Their 
pictures  are  to  be  seen  (use  on)  in  all  the  cities  of  Europe.    7.  Such 
pictures  are  not  [to  be]  found  nowadays.    8.  The  most  important 
halls  of  the  castle  are  closed.    9.  These  halls  are  generally  open 
to  the  public.     10.  They  are  closed  now  because  the  walls  are 
being  restored.     11.  They  can  be  seen  next  week.     12.  The  beau- 
tiful statue  no  longer  stands  in  the  court.     13.  Did  you  find  the- 
nails  you  lost?    14.  Do  you  remember  where  you  left  the  keys? 


LESSON  XLII 

119.  Reflexive  Compound  Tenses.  —  They  are  always  formed 
with  the  auxiliary  etre  +  the  past  participle,  thus: 

PAST  INDEFINITE 
I  have  hidden  myself,  etc. 

je  me  suis  cache*  (e)  nous  nous  sommes  cache"  (e)s 

tu     t'es     cache"  (e)  vous  vous  etes         cache*  (e)s 

il  (elle)      s'est    cache  (e)  ils  (elles)  se      sont        cache  (e)s 

(a)  For  other  tenses  and  for  s'en  aller,  see  Appendix,  C,  5. 


100  LESSON  XLII  [§  120 

120.  Agreement  of  Past  Participle.  —  1.  In  compound  tenses 
the  past  participle  agrees  only  with  a  preceding  direct  object, 
whether  such  object  be  the  reflexive  object  or  not: 

Elle  s'est  excusee.  She  excused  herself. 

Elle  s'est  achete  des  gants.  She  bought  herself  some  gloves. 

Les  gants  qu'il  s'est  achetes.  The  gloves  that  he  bought  himself. 

Elles  se  le  sont  rappele.       ) 

•en,       ,  They  remembered  it. 

Elles  s'en  sont  souvenues.  J 

(a)  The  principle  of  agreement  is  the  same  as  that  of  the  past  participle 
in  tenses  formed  with  avoir  (cf .  §  49) . 

2.  If  me,  te,  nous,  vous  refer  to  a  feminine  noun,  the  agree- 
ment will  be  feminine: 

Vous  vous  etes  trompee,  madame.  You  were  mistaken,  madam. 

EXERCISE  XLII 

s'en  aller,  go  away  s'habiller,  dress  (oneself) 

s'arreter,  stop  se  laver,  wash  oneself 

le  billet,  ticket,  note  se  lever,  rise,  get  up  ^. 

le  branle,  movement  mettre,  irreg.,  put,  place 

le  cafe,  coffee,  (first)  breakfast  mis,  p.  part,  of  mettre 

se  coucher,  lie  down,  go  to  bed,  le  paquebot,  packet,  steamer 

retire  (to  rest)  se  precipiter,  rush 

debarquer,    disembark,    go    on  prendre,  irreg.  take,  get,  buy 

shore,  land  pris,  p.  part,  of  prendre 

se  depecher,  make  haste,  hasten  reveiller,  waken  (tr.) 

s'ecrier,  exclaim  se  reveiller,  waken  (intr.) 

la  figure,  figure,  face  se  souvenir  de,  irreg.,  remember 

la  gare,  station  (railway),  depot  le  train,  train 

se  mettre  en  branle,  begin  to  move,  get  started;  de  grand  matin,  very  early 
(in  the  morning) 

PRESENT  INDICATIVE  OF  prendre,  take;  venir,  come 
je  prends        nous  prenons  je  viens         nous  venons 

tu  prends        vous  prenez  tu  viens         vous  venez 

il  prend  ils  prennent  il  vient  ils  viennent 

A.  Continue:  1.  Je  me  suis  couche*(e)  de  bonne  heure,  tu.  2.  Je 
ne  me  suis  leve*(e)  que  tr£s  tard.  3.  Si  je  m'e*tais  habill^(e),  si  tu, 
etc.  4.  Je  ne  me  serais  pas  arrete*(e)  pour  cela.  5.  Est-ce  que  je 
ne  me  suis  pas  vite  habille*(e)?  6.  Je  voulais  m'en  aller  de  grand 


§  120]  LESSON    XLIJL  101 

matin.     7.  Je   m'en   suis    allege)    avanc  iui.    8.  Je    m'en    suis 
souvenu(e). 

B.  Turn  into  the  past  indefinite:  1.  Elles  s'y  amusent  beaucoup. 
2.  Us  se  couchent  toujours  de  bonne  heure.    3.  Ne  vous  couchez- 
vous  pas  de  bonne  heure?    4.  Les  gants  qu'elle  s'achete.    5.  Elle 
ne  s'achete  pas  de  gants.    6.  Vous  en  allez-vous?    7.  Mon  frere  et 
ma  soeur  s'arretent.     8.  Nous  nous   lavons  les  mains.     9.  N'y 
vont-elles  pas?    10.  Us  se  donnent  la  main. 

C.  1.  Mon  frere  et  moi  nous  nous  sommes  couches  de  bonne 
heure  hier  (au)  soir.    2.  Nous  voulions  nous  en  aller  de  bonne  heure 
ce  matin.    3.  Si  nous  ne  nous  etions  pas  couches  de  bonne  heure, 
nous  nous  serions  reveilles  trop  tard  pour  partir  aujourd'hui.    4.  Je 
me   suis   reveille    de   grand   matin.    5.  J'ai  reveille   mon   frere. 
6.  Nous  nous  sommes  leves  tout  de  suite.    7.  Nous  nous  sommes 
lave  la  figure  et  les  mains.     8.  Nous  nous  sommes  vite  habilles. 
9. "  Mon  frere  s'est  6crie* : "  D£pechons-nous."    10.  Nous  nous  sommes 
pr^cipites  dans  la  salle  a  manger.    11.  Nous  prenons  notre  cafe  et 
nous  partons.    12.  A  la  gare  nous  prenons  nos  billets  et  nous  voila. 
dans  le  train.    13.  Le  train  s'est  mis  en  branle.    14.  II  ne  s'arrete 
qu'au  port  de  mer.    15.  Nous  nous  sommes  embarques  sur  le 
paquebot.   16.  Dans  quelques  jours  nous  debarquerons  en  Amerique. 

D.  (Oral.)    1.  Votre  frere  s'est-il  deja  couche*?    2.  Vous  etes-vous 
couches  tard?     3.  Pourquoi  pas  (not}!    4.  Vos  freres  se  sont-ils 
•^eveilles  tard?    5.  Qui  vous  a  reveilles?    6.  Vous  etes-vous  leve*s 
tout  de  suite?    7.  fites-vous  deja  habille?    8.  Votre  frere  s'est-il 
deja   lave   les   mains?      9.    Pourquoi   vous    etes-vous    depeches? 
10.  Pourquoi  etes-vous  alles  dans  la  salle  a  manger?    11.  Ou  avez- 
vous  pris  vos  billets? .  12.  Ou  le  train  s'est-il  arrete?    13.  Ou  vous 
£tes-vous  embarques?    14.  Ou  avez-vous  d^barque?  etc. 

E.  1.  Have  your  brothers  gone  to  bed  yet  (deja)!    2.  Yes,  they 
wanted  to  rise  early  to-morrow.    3.  Waken  your  brothers.    4.  They 
woke  [up]  an  hour  ago.    5.  They  have  risen.    6.  They  have  dressed 
(themselves).     7.  They  are  coming  now.     8.  Let  us  make  haste. 
9.  We  hastened.    10.  They  rushed  into  the  dining  room.    11.  Their 
coffee  was  ready.     12.  They  took  it  at  once.     13.  They  get  their 
tickets  at  the  station.     14.  We  are  getting  our  tickets.     15.  They 


102 


LESSON  XLIII 


[§121 


went  on  board  (mont&f)  at  once.     16.  The  train  has  begun  to  move. 
17.  After  some  days  they  landed  in  America. 

F.  1.  The  gloves  that  I  have  bought  myself  are  too  small.  2.  All 
our  friends  are  going  away.  3.  They  have  gone  away.  4.  We 
remember  our  friends.  5.  We  don't  forget  them.  6.  My  brothers 
are  washing  their  hands.  7.  They  have  washed  their  hands.  8.  My 
sisters  have  dressed  (themselves).  9.  They  (/.)  rushed  into  the 
carriage.  10.  They  (/.)  went  on  board  the  steamer.  11.  The  train 
is  coming.  12.  Has  the  train  stopped?  13.  It  has  not  stopped  yet. 
14.  We  went  on  board  the  steamer.  15.  Let  us  go  on  shore  now. 


121. 


LESSON  XLIII 
Cardinal  Numerals 


1  un,  une 

[ce,  yn 

2  deux 

[d0] 

3  trois 

[trwa] 

4  quatre 

[katr] 

5  cinq 

[seik] 

6  six 

[sis] 

7  sept 

[set] 

8  huit 

fait] 

9  neuf 

[ncef] 

10  dix 

[dis] 

11  onze 

[oiz] 

12  douze 

[duiz] 

13  treize 

[treiz] 

21  vingt  et  un 

22  vingt-deux 

30  trente 

31  trente  et  un 
40  quarante 
50  cinquante 
60  soixante 

70  soixante-dix 

71  soixante  et  onze 

80  quatre-vingts 

81  quatre-vingt-un 

90  quatre-  vingt-dix 

91  quatre-vingt-onze 

100  cent 

101  cent  un 

200  deux  cents 

201  deux  cent  un 

1000  mille 

1001  mille  un 
2000  deux  mille 

un  million;  2,000,000 


14  quatorze  [katorz] 

15  quinze      [keiz] 

16  seize         [seiz] 

17  dix-sept   [dis  set] 

18  dix-huit   [diz  in't] 

19  dix-neuf  [diz  ncef] 

20  vingt        [ve] 

NOUNS  OF  NUMBER:  1,000,000 
1,000,000,000  =  un  milliard. 

Et  serves  as  a  connective  in  21,  31,  41,  51,  61,  71;  otherwise,  com- 
pounds under  100  take  hyphens,  whether  standing  alone  or  forming 
part  of  a  larger  number. 


[vet  e  ce] 
[vend  d0] 
[trait] 
[trait  e  ce] 
[karait] 
[sekait] 
[swasait] 
[swasait  dis] 
[swasait  e  5:z] 
[katra  ve] 
[katro  ve  ce] 
[katra  ve  dis] 
[katra  ve  oiz] 
[sa] 
[sa  ce] 
[d0  sa] 
[d0  sa  ce] 
[mil] 
[mil  ce] 
[d0  mil] 
deux  millions; 


§  124]  LESSON  XLIII  103 

From  61  to  99  counting  is  by  twenties. 

Quatre-vingt  and  multiples  of  cent  (200,  etc.)  require  a  plural  -s, 
except  (1)  when  followed  by  a  numeral  (not  a  noun  of  number),  e.g. 
deux  cent  quatre-vingt-six  francs;  (2)  in  dates,  e.g.  Fan  quatre  cent; 
(3)  as  ordinals,  e.g.  page  trois  cent. 

Cent  =  a  (or  one)  hundred;  mille  =  a  (or  one)  thousand. 

Million  and  milliard  take  -s,  if  plural,  and  require  de  before  a  noun: 
deux  millions  de  francs. 

NOTES  ON  PRONUNCIATION:  1.  The  final  consonant  of  5,  6,  7,  8,  9,  10, 
17,  18,  19,  is  silent  before  initial  consonant  or  h  aspirate  of  a  word  multi- 
plied by  them,  not  elsewhere:  'Cinq  livres'  [se  liivr]  but  'le  cinq  mai'  [te 
se:k  me]. 

2.  No  elision  or  liaison  occurs  before  huit,  onze :  Le  huit  [la  m't] ;  les  huit 
livres  [le  qi  liivr];  le  onze  [la  o:z];  les  onze  francs  [le  o:z  fra]. 

3.  The  t  is  sounded  in  vingt  in  21,  23,  24,  25,  26,  27,  28,  29,  becomes  d 
in  22,  is  silent  from  81  to  99,  is  silent  in  cent  un,  deux  cent  un,  etc. 

122.  Multiplicative s.  —  Once  =  une  fois   (lit.  time),  twice  = 
deux  fois,  three  times  =  trois  fois,  etc. : 

Deux  fois  deux  font  quatre.  Twice  two  are  four. 

Dix  fois  dix  font  cent.  Ten  times  ten  make  a  hundred. 

123.  Money,  Weights,  Measures.  —  In  France  these  are  all 
according  to  the  decimal  system;  observe  the  following: 

le  franc  =  about  20  cents,  or  10  pence  (English  money), 
le  centime  =  rfrtf  franc  (100  centimes  =  1  fr.). 
le  gramme  =  about  -£$  ounce  avoirdupois  (454  gr.  =  1  lb.). 
le  kilogramme  (1000  gr.)  =  about  2-g  Ibs.  (J  kg.  =  slightly  over  1  lb.). 
le  metre  =  3ft.  3f  in.  (about  40  inches), 
le  centimetre  =  T^TT  metre  (5  cm.  =  about  2  inches), 
le  kilometre  (1000  m.)  =  about  f  mile. 

le  litre  =  about  If  pints  (4J  litres  =  about  1  imperial  gallon), 
(a)  Popularly  un  sou  is  used  for  5  centimes;  un  kilo  for  un  kilogramme; 
une  livre  for  i  kilogramme  (un  demi-kilo) . 

124.  Article  Distributively.  —  1.  The  English  a,  an,  used  with 
a  weight,  measure  or  number,  in  referring  to  price,  is  rendered 
by  the  French  definite  article;  elsewhere  generally  by  par: 

Deux  francs  la  livre  (le  metre).  Two  francs  a  pound  (a  metre).    ' 

Dix  sous  la  douzaine  (la  piece).  Ten  cents  a  dozen  (apiece). 

Trois  francs  par  jour  (legon).  Three  francs  a  day  (a  lesson). 

Cent  kilometres  par  or  a  Pheure.  A  hundred  kilometres  an  hour. 


104  LESSON   XLIII  [§  124 

2.  The  definite  article  is  also  used  distributively  with  ex- 
pressions of  time: 

II  vient  le  dimanche.  He  comes  on  Sunday (s) 

Le  vapeur  part  tous  les  lundis.        The  steamer  starts  every  Monday. 

Tous  les  mois.  Every  month  or  once  a  month. 

EXERCISE  XLIII 

les  asperges,  f.,  asparagus  Petoffe,  f.,  stuff,  material,  cloth 

Pautomobile,  f .,  automobile  la  femme  de  chambre,  housemaid 

la  botte,  bunch  se  figurer,  imagine,  fancy 

le  chou,  cabbage  les  gages,  m.,  wages 

la  comparaison,  comparison  gagner,  gain,  earn 

compter,  count  le  mois,  month 

la  cuisiniere,  cook  la  pomme  de  terre,  potato 

depenser,  spend  la  robe,  dress 

la  douzakie,  dozen  le  veau,  calf,  veal 
economiser,  save 

je  les  ai  payes  cher,  /  paid  dear  for  them;  figurez-vous!  just  imagine 
(fancy)  I  (a)  bon  marche,  cheap  or  cheaply;  (a)  meilleur  marche, 
cheaper 

A.  1.  La  vie  est  tr£s  chere  a  present.  2.  On  vivait  a  meilleur 
marche*  il  y  a  trente  ans.  3.  Maintenant  on  gagne  plus  et  on  de- 
pense  plus.  4.  Regardez  ce  morceau  de  veau.  5.  Je  Tai  paye" 
quatre  francs  vingt  (centimes)  (4  fr.  20)  le  kilo  (-gramme).  6.  Ces 
ceufs  m'ont  coute  un  franc  soixante-quinze  (centimes)  la  douzaine. 
7.  En  comparaison  les  legumes  se  vendent  bon  marche.  8.  J'ai 
paye  les  pommes  de  terre  dix  centimes  (or  deux  sous)  le  demi-kilo 
(or  la  livre).  9.  Les  asperges  coutent  maintenant  trente  centimes 
(or  six  sous)  la  botte.  10.  Je  paie  les  choux  vingt-cinq  centimes  (or 
cinq  sous)  la  pi&ce.  11.  Et  les  gages  des  bonnes!  12.  Je  donne 
a  ma  cuisiniere  quatre-vingts  francs  et  a  ma  femme  de  chambre 
soixante-dix  francs  par  mois.  13.  Elles  pourraient  (could)  bien 
Economiser  de  quatre  a  cinq  cents  francs  par  an.  14.  Mais  elles 
ne  veulent  plus  porter  de  robes  bon  marche*.  15.  Elles  paient 
cher  tout  ce  qu'elles  achetent.  16.  Figurez-vous!  Ma  cuisiniere 
porte  une  robe  dont  l^toffe  a  coute  dix  francs  le  m£tre.  17.  Tout 
va  vite  de  nos  jours.  18.  C'est  comme  les  automobiles  qui  vont 
(a)  cinquante  kilometres  a  Fheure. 


§  124]  LESSON   XLIII  105 

B.  (Oral)    1.  Count  in  French  from  1  to  10;  from  10  to  20;  from 
20  to  35;  from  60  to  70;  /rora  70  to  80.    2.  #eod  a&md  m  French: 
40,  41,  42,  45,  50,  51,  53,  55,  60,  61,  64,  65,  70,  71,  75,  80,  81,  85, 
86,  90,  91,  92,  95,  97,  98,  99,  100,  101, 102,  112,  115,  119,  189,  200, 
201,  225,  1000,  2002,  80,025,  2,000,990.    3.  Recite  the  multiplication 
table  (or  parts  of  it),  thus:  Deux  fois  un  font  deux;  deux  fois  deux 
font  quatre,  etc.    4.  Combien  font  2  fois  7;  8  fois  6?  etc. 

C.  (Oral.)    1.  Le  veau  est-il  bon  marche?   2.  Combien  avez-vous 
paye*   ce  morceau-la?     3.  Les  oeufs  sont-ils  chers?     4.  Combien 
coutent-ils  a  present?    5.  Combien  paie-t-on  le  kilo  de  pommes  de 
terre?    6.  Peut-on  en  avoir  a  meilleur  marche*?    7.  M.  Liard  a-t-il 
de  belles  asperges?    8.  Combien  coutent-elles  chez  lui?    9.  Combien 
est-ce  qu'il  vend  ses  choux?    10.  Comptez  jusqu'a  vingt.    Etc. 

'D.  1.  Everything  cost  less  (dear)  thirty  years  ago.  2.  People 
used  to  live  cheaply  formerly.  3.  We  used  to  buy  veal  [at]  one 
franc  seventy-five  centimes  a  kilo.  4.  Now  it  costs  from  four  francs 
twenty  centimes  to  four  francs  fifty.  5.  Ten  years  ago  eggs  used 
to  cost  85  centimes  a  dozen.  6.  Now  we  pay  (from)  1  franc  15  to 
1  franc  75  for  them.  7.  Vegetables  are  (sold,  reflex.)  cheaper.  8.  A 
half  kilo  of  potatoes  costs  two  or  three  sous.  9.  One  can  buy  cab- 
oage(s)  [at]  25  or  30  centimes  apiece.  10.  Our  cook  earns  85  francs 
a  month.  11.  That  makes  1020  francs  a  year.  12.  How  much 
did  the  material  for  (de)  your  dress  cost  you?  13.  I  paid  5  francs 
25  a  metre  for  it.  14.  You  paid  too  dear  for  it.  15.  Mr.  DupomVs 
automobile  goes  60  kilometres  an  hour. 

E.  Give  in  francs  and  centimes  the  equivalents  of:  1.  One  cent; 
5,  7,  10,  12,  15,  17,  20,  25,  35,  50,  75,  85,  90  cents.    2.  One  doUar, 
$1.25,  $1.35,   $1.70,   $1.85,  $2V00,  $75.00,  $1500.00,  $400,000.00. 
3.  Give  in  dollars  and  cents  in  English  the  equivalents  of:  1  fr.,  0  fr. 
85,  0  fr.  75,  1  fr.  25,  1  fr.  55,  65  fr.,  55  fr.  15,  1000  fr.,  2,000,000  fr. 

F.  1.  Living  was  not  so  dear  formerly.    2.  People  spend  twice 
as  much  (plus)  now.     3.  Here  is  a  piece  of  veal  which  cost  me 
4  francs  80  a  kilo.    4.  There  are  3  kilos  of  it,  and  I  paid  14  francs 
40  centimes.     5.  Asparagus  costs  35  centimes  a  bunch.     6.  In 
France  you  buy  potatoes  by  (a)  the  pound.    7.  You  pay  2  or  3 
cents  a  pound  for  them  when  they  are  cheap.    8.  They  were  dear 


106  LESSON  XLIV  [§  125 

last  winter,  but  they  are  cheaper  now.  9.  Wages  too  are  much 
higher  (plus  eleves).  10.  A  good  housemaid  earns  from  60  to  75 
francs  a  month.  11.  She  can  save  300  or  400  francs  a  year. 
12.  People  earn  a  great  deal  and  spend  a  great  deal.  13.  Our  cook 
bought  cloth  for  a  dress  the  other  day.  14.  Just  imagine!  She  paid 
9  francs  80  a  yard  (metre)  for  it.  15.  The  cloth  was  very  heavy 
(=  thick). 

LESSON  XLIV 

125.  Ordinal  Numerals 

1st    premier      [pcsmje]  7th  septieme  [set j  em] 

9  ,  f  second        [sago]  8th  huitieme  fait  j  em] 

\  deuxieme   [d0zjem]  9th  neuvieme  [noevjem] 

3d    troisieme    [trwazjem]  10th  dixieme  [dizjera] 

4th  quatrieme  [katriem]  llth  onzieme  [ozjem] 

5th  cinquieme  [sekjem]  21st  vingt  et  unieme  [vet  e  ynjem] 

6th  sixieme       [sizjem]  22d   vingt-deuxieme  [vend  d0zjem] 

(a)  Except  premier  and  second,  they  are  formed  by  adding  -ieme  to  the 

last  consonant  of  the  corresponding  cardinal,  cinq  adding  u,  and  f  of  neuf 

becoming  v  before  -ieme. 

(6)  The  use  of  deuxieme  for  second  generally  implies  a  series  of  more  than 

two,  but  it  is  always  used  in  compounds. 

126.  Fractions 

1  |  un  demi  i  un  cinquieme 

2  1  une  moitie*  i*r  un  onzieme 
Af  un  tiers  T\  trois  seizi£mes 

3  1  un  troisieme  Totf  sept  ceiitiemes 

!  J  un  quart  iW     dix  cent-uniemes 

*  1  un  quatrieme  liis    onze  milliemes,  etc. 

Une  demi-heure.  Half  an  hour. 

Une  heure  et  demie.  An  hour  and  a  half. 

La  moitie  (les  trois  quarts)  du  temps.       Half  (three  quarters  of)  the' time. 

(a)  For  denominators  above  4  ordinals  only  are  used,  but  note  the  special 
forms  in  J,  ^,  £;  fractional  expressions  with  partie  (part)  are  also  com- 
mon: la  troisieme  partie  =  \. 

(fe)  Demi  before  a  noun  is  invariable  and  joined  to  it  by  a  hyphen,  but 
elsewhere  agrees. 

(c)  Note  the  use  of  the  article  in  the  various  examples. 


§  131]  LESSON  XLIV  107 

127.  Numeral  Adverbs.  —  They  are  formed  from  the  ordi- 
nals by  -ment,  according  to  rule  (cf .  §  216) : 

premierement,  first,  firstly  troisiemement,  thirdly 

secondement      )  etc.  etc. 

,    [  secondly 
deuxiemement  J 

128.  Collectives.  —  Certain  nouns  are  used  with  collective 
force : 

Une  paire  de  gants.        .  A  pair  of  gloves. 

Tine  trentaine  d'eleves.  Some  thirty  (about  30)  pupils, 

(a)  Those  ending  in  -aine,  added  to  the  last  consonant  of  a  cardinal, 
denote  usually  an  approximate  number:  Une  huitaine,  dizaine  (dix  becomes 
diz),  douzaine,  quinzaine,  vingtaine,  centaine,  etc.  =  about  8,  10,  12,  15,  20 
(a  score),  100,  etc.;  so  also  un  millier  =  about  1000. 

129.  Year  Dates.  —  The  year  in  dates  is  expressed  by  a  cardi- 
nal, as  in  English,  but  mil  replaces  mille : 

L'an  quatre  cent.  The  year  four  hundred. 

En  (or  Fan)  mil  neuf  cent  onze.  1        T    ,.,  N  -,^-.1 

'  In  (the  year)  1911. 

En  dix-neuf  cent  onze.  J 

(a)  For  the  year  1000,  A.D.,  and  for  dates  other  than  those  of  the  Chris- 
tian era,  mille  is  commonly  used. 

130.  Numerical  Titles.  —  1.  Titles  of  rulers  are  denoted  by 
cardinal  numerals,  except  premier  =  first: 

Napoleon  premier  (trois).  Napoleon  the  First  (Third), 

(a)   The  in  such  titles  is  untranslated. 

2.  Other  numerical  titles  are  expressed  as  in  English: 

La  sixieme  scene  du  second  acte.        The  sixth  scene  of  the  second  act. 

Acte  deux(-ieme),  scene  six(-ieme).    Act  two  (2d),  scene  six  (Qth). 

Tome  troisieme  (trois).  Volume  third  (three). 

Au  vingtieme  (XXe)  sievcle.  In  the  20th  century. 

131.  Dimensions.  —  The  following  are  some  typical  expres- 
sions: 

Cette  salle  est  longue  de  8  m.  This  room  is  8  metres  long. 

Elle  a  8  m.  de  longueur  (or  de  long)     It  is  8  metres  long  by  5  metres  wide. 

sur  5  m.  de  largeur  (or  de  large). 

Elle  est  plus  longue  de  2  m.  It  is  longer  by  2  metres, 

(a)  By  =  sur  or  de  according  to  meaning;  see  examples. 


108  LESSON   XLIV  [§  131 

EXERCISE  XLIV 

appris,  p.  part.,  learned  Guillaume,  William 

la  Bible,  Bible  Luc,  Luke 

calculer,  calculate  le  nombre,  number 

carre,  square  le  passage,  passage 

le  chapitre,  chapter  la  planche,  board,  plank 

le  cceur,  heart  le  pouce,  inch 

la  composition,  composition  la  prise,  taking,  capture 

la  conquete,  conquest  le  probleme,  problem 

contenu,  p.  part.,  contained  la  retraite,  retreat 

la  date,  date  le  saint,  saint 

le  devoir,  dwZ?/,  exercise,  lesson  selon,  according  to 

le  dollar,  dollar  le  siecle,  century 

ecrire,  write  suivant,  following 

egaler,  equal  le  sujet,  subject 

entourer,  surround  la  surface,  surface 

PEvangile,  m.,  gospel  le  verset,  verse  (e.g.  Bible) 
apprendre  par  coeur,  learn  by  heart;  a  peu  pres,  nearly,  about 

A.  1.  Mon  frere  et  moi  nous  faisons  nos  devoirs  pour  la  semaine 
prochaine.     2.  Nous  sommes  dans  la  bibliotheque  de  mon  pere, 
entoures  de  milliers  de  livres.    3.  Premierement  nous  apprendrons 
par  coeur  un  passage  de  la  Bible.    4.  Ce  passage  se  trouve  dans  le 
neuvieme  chapitre  de  I'Evangile  selon  saint  Luc  du  onzieme  au  dix- 
septieme  verset  (or  saint  Luc,  ix,  11-17;  read:  chapitre  neuf,  versets 
onze  a  dix-sept).     5.  Deuxiemement,  nous  avons  une  composition 
a  Ecrire  sur  un  des  sujets  suivants:  "La  retraite  des  Dix-Mille," 
"La  conquete  de  FAngleterre  en  1066  (read:  mil  soixante-six)  par 
Guillaume  I,"    "La  prise   de  la  Bastille   en   1789"   (read:   dix- 
sept  cent  quatre-vingt-neuf).    6.  Troisiemement,  nous  avons  deux 
petits  problemes:  (1)  Calculer  (cf.  §  191)  le  nombre  de  metres  car- 
res  contenus  dans  une  surface  longue  de  6  m.  40  (read:  six  metres 
quarante  centimetres)  et  large  de  4  m.  75;  (2)  Un  centieme  de 
metre  s'appelle  un  centimetre  et  =  (read:  e"gale),  a  peu  pres,  f  (read: 
deux  cinquiemes)  de  pouce  anglais.     Combien  de  centimetres  en 
20  pouces? 

B.  (Oral.)    1.  Qu'avez-vous  fait  ce  matin?    2.  Combien  de  livres 
y  a-t-il  dans  la  bibliotheque  de  votre  pere?    3.  Qu'avez-vous  appris 
par  cceur?    4.  Ou  se  trouve  ce  passage?    5.  Et  ensuite  qu'avez- 


§  132]  LESSON  XLV  109 

vous  fait?  6.  Quel  est  le  premier  sujet  qu'on  vous  a  donne"?  7.  Et 
le  deuxieme?  8.  Et  le  troisieme?  9.  Combien  de  problemes  avez- 
vous  faits?  10.  Quel  6tait  le  premier?  11.  Et  le  second?  etc. 

C.  1.  Have  you  done  your  lessons  (devoirs)*?   2.  I  have  done  some 
of  them.    3.  I  learned  a  passage  in  (de)  the  Bible  by  heart.    4.  It 
was  (a)  part  of  the  15th  chapter  of  the  gospel  according  to  St. 
John,  verses  1  to  9.    5.  We  had  already  learned  the  14th  chapter. 
6.  What  subject  have  you  chosen  for  your  composition?    7.  The 
life  of  Napoleon  III.    8.  Why  didn't  you  choose  the  life  of  William  I, 
or  the  retreat  of  the  Ten  Thousand?    9.  Those  subjects  were  too 
difficult.   10.  The  date  of  the  taking  of  the  BastiUe  is  1789.    11.  Na- 
poleon I  was  born  in  1769  and  died  in  1821. 

D.  Read  in  French  and  write  in  full:  1.  Les  TQ  d'un  franc;  la 
i  d'un  doUar;  \  de  A;  les  f  du  temps.    2.  L'an  485;  en  1616; 
Tan   1000;   I'Amerique   a  e*te*    decouverte   (discovered)    en   1492; 
Guillaume  III  est  mort  en  1702  et  Louis  XIV  en  1715.     3.  Le 
15e  (quinzieme)  verset  du  20e  chapitre.     4.  Aux  XVe,  XVP,  et 
XVII6  siecles.     5.  Nous  vivons  au  XXe  siecle. 

E.  1.  There  are  about  100  pupils  in  our  school.     2.  There  are 
thousands  of  books  in  my  father's  library.    3.  He  bought  200  books 
last  week.    4.  John  loses  three  quarters  of  his  time.    5.  This  gentle- 
man gives  a  third  of  his  money  to  the  poor.    6.  Our  cook  saves 
half  of  her  wages  and  spends  the  other  half.    7.  About  thirty  of  our 
friends  were  at  the  station  when  the  train  arrived.    8.  This  room 
(salle)  is  5  metres  long  by  4  metres  wide.     9.  That  makes  20 
square  metres.     10.  Edward  (Edouard)  VII,  king  of  England,  was 
born  in  1841  and  (lied  in  1910.     11.  Louis  XIV  was  king  of  France 
in  the  XVII  century.     12. 'This  board  is  three  centimetres  thick. 
13.  We  have  a  ladder  four  metres  long. 


LESSON  XLV 

132.  Days  of  the  Week.  —  They  are  as  follows  (all  masculine) : 
dimanche,  Sunday  mercredi,  Wednesday  vendredi,  Friday 

lundi,  Monday  jeudi,  Thursday  samedi,  Saturday 

mardi,  Tuesday 


110  LESSON  XLV  [§  133 

133.  Months.  —  The  names  of  the  months   (all  masculine) 
may  be  conveniently  learned  from  the  following  rhyme : 

Trente  jours  ont  septembre, 
Avril,  juin,  novembre; 
Trente  et  un  ont  mars  et  mai, 
Aout,  octobre,  puis  juillet, 
Et  decembre  et  Janvier; 
De  vingt-huit  est  fevrier. 

134.  Date  of  Month.  —  1.  Cardinal  numerals  are  employed 
to  denote  days  of  the  month,  except  the  first  =  premier : 

Le  premier  (deux,  dix)  mai.  (On)  the  first  (second,  tenth)  of  May 

Us  sont  arrives  le  six.  They  arrived  on  the  6th. 

Us  arrivent  tou jours  le  lundi.  They  always  come  on  Monday  (s). 

(a)  On  in  such  expressions  remains  untranslated. 

2.  Observe  the  following  date  idioms: 

Quel  jour  du  mois  est-ce  (sommes-  What  day  of  the  month  is  it  to-day? 

nous)  aujourd'hui? 

C'est  aujourd'hui  le  dix.  To-day  is  the  tenth. 

Ce  sera  demain  le  onze.  To-morrow  will  be  the  eleventh. 

D'aujourd'hui  en  huit.  A  week  from  to-day  (future). 

D'aujourd'hui  en  trois  semaines.  Three  weeks  from  to-day. 

II  y  a  quinze  jours.  A  fortnight  (two  weeks)  ago. 

Lundi  prochain;  lundi  dernier.  Next  Monday;  last  Monday. 

135.  Age.  —  Observe  the  following  expressions  denoting  age: 
Quel  age  avez-vous  (a-t-elle)?  How  old  are  you  (is  she)*! 

J'ai  vingt  ans.  T  ,  7  -,. 

T       .    f  ,  ,  /  am  twenty  (years  old). 

Je  sins  age  de  vingt  ans.  J 

Elle  a  dix  ans  et  son  frere  en  a      She  is  ten  (years  old)  and  her  bro- 

huit.  ther  is  eight. 

Elle  est  plus  &ge*e  de  deux  ans.        She  is  older  by  two  years. 
A  1'age  de  dix  ans.  At  ten  years  of  age. 

(a)  An(s)  may  not  be  omitted  in  specifying  age. 

(b)  By  =  de,  after  a  comparison. 

136.  Holidays.  —  The  principal  holidays   (jours  de  fete)   in 
France  are:  les  dimanches,  le  jour  de  TAn  (New  Year's  Day),  le 
lundi  de  Paques   (Easter  Monday),  le  lundi  de  la    Pentecote 
(Whit  Monday),  la  Fete   Nationale  (14  juillet),  la   Toussaint 
(All  Saints'  Day),  le  jour  de  Noel  (Christmas  Day). 


§136]  LESSON   XLV  111 

EXERCISE  XLV 

Page,  m.,  age  fonder,  found,  establish 

age,  old  se  marier,  marry,  get  married 

PAtlantique,  m.,  Atlantic  Marseille,  Marseilles 

le  bureau,  office  le  navire,  vessel,  ship 

le  college,  college,  school  la  place,  position 

le  conge,  leave,  holiday  le  regne,  reign 

considerable,  considerable  sortir,  irreg.,  go  out,  leave 

dernier,  last  le  succes,  success 

devenir,  irreg.,  become  la  traversee,  crossing,  passage 

durer,  last  voyager,  travel 
riche  d'un  million,  worth  a  million 

A.  1.  Mon  pere  est  ne  a  Lyon  le  lundi  8  mars  1825.    2.  C'etait 
sous  (in)  le  regne  de  Charles  X.    3.  Quand  il  avait  pres  de  huit 
ans,  en  1833,  son  pere  Fa  envoye  ail  college.    4.  II  y  a  passe*  neuf 
ans.    5.  Chaque  semaine  il  avait  deux  jours  de  conge,  —  le  jeudi 
et  le  dimanche.   6.  Les  autres  jours  il  travaillait  pendant  dix  heures. 
7.  Au  sortir  (in fin.  as  noun)  du  college  il  entre  dans  un  bureau  ou 
il  passe,  trois  ans.    8.  Un  jour  son  pere  lui  dit:  "D'aujourd'hui  en 
quinze  tu  partiras  pour  FAmerique."    9.  II  s'embarque  a  Marseille 
le  mercredi  20  juin  1845.     10.  Le  navire  a  fait  la  traversee  en  six 
semaines.     11.  II  arrive  a  la  Nouvelle-Orleans  au  mois  d'aout. 

12.  En  septembre  il  trouve  une  place  dans  un  bureau.    13.  Au 
bout  de  dix-huit  mois  il  fonde  un  magasin  a  lui  (of  his  own).    14.  II 
s'est  marie  en  1848.     15.  II  a  eu  un  succes  considerable.     16.  II 
est  devenu  riche  de  deux  millions  et  demi  de  francs.    17.  II  a  beau- 
coup  voyage.    18.  II  a  fait  la  traversee  de  FAtlantique  une  tren- 
taine  de  fois,  la  premiere  fois  en  six  semaines,  la  derniere  fois  en 
six  jours.    19.  II  est  mort  le  vendredi  25  novembre  1910,  a  Fage  de 
85  ans. 

B.  (Oral.)     1.  En  quelle  annee  est  ne  votre  pere?    2.  En  quel 
mois?    3.  Quel  jour  du  mois?    4.  Sous  le  regne  de  quel  roi?    5.  Ra- 
contez-moi  sa  vie  de  college.    6.  Quand  est-il  parti  pour  FAmerique? 
7.  Quel  age  avait-il?    8.  Combien  de  temps  a  dure*  la  traversee? 
9.  Ou   a-t-il   debarque"?     10.  Qu'a-t-il  fait   ensuite?     11.  Quand 
s'est-il  marie?     12.  Combien  de  fois  a-t-il  traverse*  FAtlantique? 

13.  Quand  est-il  mort?    14.  De  combien  £tait-il  riche?  etc. 


112  LESSON   XLV  [§  136 

C.  (Oral.)     Read  the  following  aloud  in  French:  1.  Paris,  le  2 
fe*vrier,  le  15  Janvier,  le  6  avril,  le  14  juillet,  le  21  juin,  le  25  mai, 
le  4  mars,  le  17  octobre,  le  25  decembre,  le  8  novembre,  le  5  aout. 
2.  C'est  aujourd'hui  dimanche,  ce  sera  demain  lundi;  c'est  aujour- 
d'hui lundi,  ce  sera  demain  . . .  (throughout  the  week).    3.  Repeat  the 
rhyme  in  §  133. 

D.  1.  I  was  born  on  the  15th  of  May,  1873.    2.  I  began  to  go  to 
school  at  the  age  of  eight.    3.  My  brother,  who  was  older  than  I 
by  two  years,  went  with  me.    4.  We  had  a  holiday  every  Saturday. 
5.  [On]  the  other  days  we  worked  6  or  7  hours.    6.  When  I  was  17 
my  father  found  me  a  position  in  an  office.    7.  When  I  was  21  my 
brother  and  I  set  out  for  America.    8.  The  vessel  left  Havre  on 
the  1st  of  August,  1894.    9.  We  arrived  in  New  York  in  a  week. 
10.  We  found  English  very  difficult.     11.  But  after  a  few  months 
we  spoke  (impf.)  it  very  well.     12.  In  the  month  of  December  we 
established  a  small  store.     13.  We  have  had  considerable  success, 
and  we  have  become  rich.     14.  My  brother  has  married,  and 
has  a  house  of  his  own.    15.  He  travels  a  good  deal.    16.  He  has 
crossed  the  Atlantic  a  score  of  times. 

E.  1.  There. are  12  months  in  a  year  (annee).    2.  The  first  is 
called  January,  the  second  February,  etc.    3.  The  month  of  Janu- 
ary has  31  days,  the  month  of  February  has  28  days,  etc.    4.  The 
first  day  of  the  week  is  called  Sunday,  the  second  Monday,  etc. 
5.  A  year  has  365  days,  but  a  leap-year  (annee  bissextile)  has  366 
days.    6.  What  day  of  the  month  is  it  to-day?    7.  To-day  is  the 
15th,  to-morrow  will  be  the  16th.    8.  Last  Saturday  was  the  17th. 
9.  Next  Saturday  will  be  the  24th,  will  it  not?    10.  Christmas  day 
comes  (falls)  [on]  the  25th  of  December,  and  New  Year's  day  on  the 
1st  of  January.     11.  It  will  come  on  a  Sunday  this  year.    12.  We 
shall  go  to  see  our  relations  a  week  from  to-day.    13.  We  shall 
spend  a  week  with  them.    14.  A  fortnight  ago  my  aunt  fell  ill. 
15.  She  is  more  than  75  years  old. 


137]  LESSON  XLVI  113 


^LESSON  .JXLVI 

137.  Time  of  Day.  —  Observe  the  following  expressions : 

Quelle  heure  est-il?  What  time  (o'clock)  is  it? 

II  est  une  heure.  It  is  one  o'clock. 

II  est  deux  heures  et  demie.  It  is  half  past  two. 

Trois  heures  (et)  un  quart.  1 

m     .    ,  >          A  quarter  past  three. 

Trois  heures  et  quart.          J 

Six  heures  moms  un  (or  le)  quart.  A  quarter  to  six. 

Trois  heures  trois  quarts.  A  quarter  to  four. 

Trois  heures  dix  (minutes) .  Ten  minutes  past  three. 

Six  heures  moins  cinq  (minutes).  Five  minutes  to  six. 

Six  heures  quinze.  Six  fifteen. 

II  etait  midi  et  demi.  It  was  half  past  twelve  (noon). 

II  est  minuit  (et)  un  quart.  It  is  a  quarter  past  twelve  (night), 

A  huit  heures  du  soir.  At  eight  o'clock  in  the  evening. 

A  quelle  heure?  At  what  o'clock? 

A  dix  heures  precises.  At  ten  o'clock  precisely  (exactly). 

Vers  (les)  deux  heures.  About  two  o'clock. 

(a)  Do  not  omit  heure (s) . 

(6)  Et  is  essential  only  at  the  half  hour. 

(c)  Minutes  is  usually  omitted. 

(d)  Twelve  o'clock  is  never  douze  heures. 


EXERCISE  XLVI 

avancer,  be  too  fast  la  messe,  mass 

le  dejeuner,  breakfast,  lunch  la  minute,  minute 

Pemplette,  f .,  purchase  la  montre,  watch 

la  journee,  day  preparer,  prepare 

le  mari,  husband  retarder,  be  too  slow 

la  menagere,  housewife  la  tasse,  cup 

je  Pai  vu  le  premier  (la  premiere),  /  saw  it  first  or  /  was  the  first  to  see 

it;  se  mettre  &  table,  sit  down  (to  dinner,  etc.)',  faire  des  emplettes, 

make  purchases,  go  shopping 

PRESENT  INDICATIVE  OF  mettre,  sortir 

je  mets               nous  mettons                 je  sors  nous  sortons 

tu  mets               vous  mettez                  tu  sors  vous  sortez 

il  met                    UK  mettent                 il  sort  ils  sortent 


114  LESSON  XLVI  [§137 

A.  (La  journee  de  la  bonne  menagere)  1.  Je  me  suis  leve*e  a  six 
heures  moins  le  quart.  2.  J'ai  reveille*  mes  bonnes  a  six  heures  dix; 
je  me  leve  toujours  la  premiere.  3.  Je  sors  a  six  heures  un  quart 
pour  aller  a  la  messe  de  six  heures  et  demie.  4.  Je  suis  sortie  de 
Feglise  a  sept  heures  vingt.  5.  J'arrive  au  marche  a  huit  heures 
moins  vingt.  6.  Je  rentre  chez  moi  a  huit  heures  precises.  7.  La 
bonne,  qui  e*tait  sortie  pour  faire  des  emplettes,  arrive  dix  minutes 
plus  tard.  8.  Je  prends  mon  cafe  un  quart  d'heure  apres.  9.  A 
dix  heures  et  demie  nous  commengons  a  preparer  le  dejeuner. 
10.  Mon  mari  arrive  de  la  campagne  par  le  train  de  onze  heures 
trente-cinq.  11.  Nous  nous  mettons  a  table  a  midi  precis.  12.  Mes 
filles  rentrent  de  leur  promenade  vers  quatre  heures.  13.  Nous 
prenons  une  tasse  de  the*  a  cinq  heures.  14.  Nous  dinons  a  six 
heures  trois  quarts.  15.  Nous  allons  au  concert  a  huit  heures  et 
quart.  16.  Nous  rentrons  a  onze  heures  moins  un  quart.  17.  Nous 
nous  couchons  une  demi-heure  plus  tard. 

B.  (Oral  exercise  on  A.) 

C.  (Oral.)     Read  A  aloud,  substituting  in  each  case  a  time  five 
minutes  later,  excep^  in  sentence  12. 

D.  Write  out  in  words,  in  two  ways  where  possible,  e.g.:  Trois 
heures  et  demie  or  trois  heures  trente;  midi  (minuit)  un  quart  or 
midi  (minuit)  quinze. 

1.  1  h.  30.  4.  2  h.  25.  7.  minuit  30.          10.  5  h.  35. 

2.  midi  20.  5.  4  h.  50.  8.  1  h.  5.  11.  6  h.  48. 

3.  1  h.  55.  6.  9  h.  3.  9.  11  h.  45.  12.  5  h.  15. 

E.  Write  out  the  time  in  words,  at  intervals  of  five  minutes,  from 
11  o'clock  A.M.  to  half  past  twelve  (noon). 

F.  1.  The  good  housewife  rose  at  6  o'clock  precisely;  she  is  al- 
ways the  first  to  rise.    2.  The  servant's  day  began  at  a  quarter  to 
seven.    3.  What  time  is  it  by  (a)  your  watch?    4.  It  is  exactly  noon. 
5.  Your  watch  is  too  slow  by  (de)  two  minutes.    6.  Yours  is  too 
fast  by  a  minute  and  a  half.    7.  Mine  is  right  (d,  Vheure).    8.  The 
concert  begins  at  8.25.    9.  We  shall  be  home,  I  hope,  before  10.30. 
10.  My  mother  has  gone  to  the  seven  o'clock  mass.    11.  Then  she 
will  go  shopping.    12.  The  coffee  will  be  ready  in  (dans)  a  quarter 


§140]  LESSON  XLVII  115 

of  an  hour.  13.  Give  me  a  cup  of  coffee,  please.  14.  My  husband 
is  in  the  country;  he  will  arrive  by  the  10.12  train.  15.  The  cook 
is  preparing  the  lunch.  16.  The  lunch  is  ready;  we  sit  down. 
17.  At  what  time  do  you  dine? 

LESSON  XLVII 

138.  Present  and  Perfect  Participle 

Giving  Finishing  Selling 

PRES.  dormant  finissant  vendant 

Having  Being 

ayant  e*tant 

PERF,   ayant  donne  (fini,  vendu,  eu,  e*te,  etc.),  having  given,  etc. 

etant  arrive  (e),  having  arrived. 
(a)  For  verbs  in  -cer,  -ger,  see  Appendix,  D. 

139.  Use  of  Present  Participle.  —  1.  When  used  as  an  ad- 
jective it  agrees  like  an  adjective: 

Une  scene  charmante.  A  charming  scene. 

Une  soiree  dansante.  A  dancing  party. 

2.  With  verbal  force  it  is  invariable: 

Pleurant  elle  continue  son  recit.  Weeping  she  continues  her  story. 

Une  boite  contenant  de  1'argent.         A  box  containing  money. 
Generalement  parlant.  Generally  speaking. 

3.  After  en  it  is  used  as  in  English,  en  =  in,  on,  by,' while, 
when,  etc.,  and  is  invariable: 

(En)  disant  ceci  elle  est  sortie.  (While)  saying  this  she  went  out. 

En  rentrant  j'ai  trouve  la  lettre.          On  returning  I  found  the  letter. 

En  lisant  on  apprend  &  lire.  By  reading  one  learns  to  read. 

(a)  Thus  used,  the  participle  regularly  refers  to  the  subject,  but:  L'ap- 
petit  vient  en  mangeant,  lit.  One's  appetite  comes  while  eating,  i.e.  Desire  comes 
with  success,  etc. 

140.  Perfect  Participle.  —  The  forms  ayant,  etant  are  invari- 
able, but  the  past  participle  agrees  like  an  adjective: 

Etant  arrives  de  bonne  heure,  nous  Having  arrived  early,  we  rested  a 
nous  sommes  reposes  un  peu.  little. 

(a)  Etant  is  often  omitted,  and  the  past  participle  becomes  appositive  or 
absolute:  Arrives  de  bonne  heure,  etc.,  Having  arrived  (or  arriving)  early,  etc  ; 
L'honneur  perdu,  que  me  reste-t-il?  Honour  (being)  lost,  what  remains  to  met 


116  LESSON  XLVII  [§  141 

141.  English  -ing.  —  1.   After   a   preposition    (except    en,    cf. 
§  139),  an  -ing  form  is  regularly  translated  by  an  infinitive: 

II  parle  de  partir.  He  speaks  of  going. 

Sans  dire  un  seul  mot.  Without  saying  a  single  word. 

Apres  avoir  dine.  After  dining  (or  having  dined). 

Jean  a  ete  puni  pour  avoir  perdu    John  has  been  punished  for  losing 

ses  livres.  (having  lost)  his  books, 

(a)   The  perfect  infinitive  is  obligatory  after  apres  and  after  other  prepo- 
sitions when  having  is,  or  may  be,  expressed  in  English. 

2.  An  -ing  form  as  subject  or  object  of  a  verb  is  rendered  by 
an  infinitive,  a  noun  or  a  clause: 

Voir  c'est  croire.  Seeing  is  believing. 

J'aime  a  pecher  (or  la  peche).          7  like  fishing. 
II  est  facile  de  parler.  Talking  is  easy. 

3.  After  verbs  of  seeing,  hearing,  etc.,  the  -ing  form  is  com- 
monly translated  by  a  relative  clause  or  an  infinitive,  sometimes 
by  a  participle: 

Je  les  vois  venir  (or  qui  viennent,      7  see  them  coming. 

or  venant). 
Je    1'entendis    parler    (or    qui      7  heard  him  speaking. 

parlait). 

EXERCISE  XLVII 

Pappetit,  m.,  appetite  la  fin,  end 
assis,  p.  part,  of  asseoir,  seated      fumer,  smoke 

le  bonheur,  happiness  le  gout,  taste,  liking 

causer,  chat  jeune,  young 

cependant,  however  lire,  irreg.,  read 

craindre,  irreg.,  fear  la  mort,  death 

deregle,  irregular  '  la  pipe,  pipe 

dire,  irreg.,  say,  tell  le  plaisir,  pleasure 

Pennui,  m.,  tedium,  sorrow  le  proverbe,  proverb 

s'ennuyer,  be  bored,  be  sad,  be     repondre,  reply,  answer 

lonesome,  etc.  seul,  single,  alone,  only 

la  fa$on,  fashion,  way  tromper,  deceive,  beguile 

le  feu,  fire  la  vieillesse,  old  age 

assis  devant  le  feu,  sitting  (seated)  before  the  fire;  couche  dans  son  lit, 
lying  (while  lying)  in  bed;  debout  &  la  porte,  standing  at  the  door 


§141]  LESSON   XLVII  117 

NOTE.  —  The  imperfect  indicative  regularly  has  the  same  stem  as  the 
present  participle,  e.g.  prendre,  prenant,  je  prenais,  etc.,  lire,  lisant,  je 
lisais,  etc.,  dire,  disant,  je  disais,  etc. 

A.  1.  Les  vieux  amis,  assis  devant  le  feu,  fument  leur  pipe. 
2.  S'amusant  comme  cela  ils  passent  leur  temps.    3.  Us  trompent 
leur  ennui  en  causant  de  leur  vie  passee.    4.  A  les  ecouter  (or  en 
les  ecoutant)  on  dirait  qu'ils  ont  e*te  des  hommes  remarquables. 

5.  fitant  jeunes  les  plaisirs  les  interessaient.     6.  Arrives  a  Fage 
mur  ils  trouvaient  leur  plaisir  a  travailler.    7.  Ils  reussissaient  et 
en  reussissant  ils  prenaient  gout  au  succes.    8.  Ils  trouvaient  que 
le  proverbe  dit  vrai:  "L'appe*tit  vient  en  mangeant."     9.  Apres 
avoir  eu  beaucoup  de  succes  la  vieillesse  leur  arrive.    10.  N'ayant 
pas  mene*  une  vie  deregle"e  ils  en  voient  venir  la  fin  sans  rien  craindre. 
11.  Mais  laisses  presque  seuls  par  la  mort  de  leurs  amis  ils  s'ennuient 
un  peu.    12.  G6n6ralement  parlant  cependant  ils  sont  heureux. 

B.  (Oral.)     1.  Comment  les  vieux  amis  passent-ils  leur  temps? 
2.  De  quelle  f agon  (=  comment)  trompent-ils  leur  ennui?   3.  Est-ce 
qu'ils  aimaient  les  plaisirs?    4.  En  quoi  trouvaient-ils  leur  plaisir 
plus  tard?    5.  Expliquez  le  proverbe  qu'on  trouve  dans  la  legon. 

6.  Est-ce  qu'on  voit  venir  la  vieillesse  avec  plaisir?     7.  Quand 
est-ce  qu'on  s'ennuie?  etc. 

C.  1.  Sitting  (seated)  near  the  fire  my  old  friend  smokes  his  pipe. 
2.  He  is  chatting  of  his  past  life  with  another  friend.    3.  (While) 
listening  to  him  you  would  say  that  he  is  a  young  man.    4.  But  he 
is  old  and  he  has  seen  remarkable  men.    5.  He  amuses  himself  by 
chatting  about  them.    6.  When  he  was  young  he  beguiled  the  tedium 
of  life  in  (dans)  pleasures.    7.  When  he  came  (§  140,  a)  to  mature 
age  he  found  his  pleasure  in  working.    8.  He  found  more  pleasure 
in  working  than  in  amusing  himself.    9.  He  used  to  say  that  the 
proverb  I'appetit,  etc.,  is  true.     10.  After  working  with  much  suc- 
cess, old  age  comes  to  -him.    11.  But  he  sees  it  coming  without 
losing  his  happiness.    12.  He  has  nothing  to  fear,  not  having  led 
an  irregular  life.     13.  He  has  lost  his  friends;  however,  he  is  not 
lonesome.    14.  Generally  speaking  he  leads  a  happy  life. 

D.  1.  These  books  are  very  amusing.     2.  Think  well  before 
(avant  de)  answering.    3.  Being  ill,  my  mother  cannot  go  out  to-day. 


118  LESSON   XL VIII  [§142 

4.  On  rising  I  found  that  it  was  already  nine  o'clock.  5.  Our  friends 
having  arrived,  we  can  now  go  on  board  [the  ship].  6.  While  waiting 
for  the  train,  we  shall  take  a  cup  of  coffee.  7.  One  can't  live  without 
eating.  8.  I  thank  you  for  (de)  showing  me  your  library.  9.  Fish- 
ing is  an  amusement  which  I  like  very  much.  10.  We  found  our 
friends  waiting  for  us  (rel.  clause).  11.  I  saw  the  children  playing 
in  the  garden.  12.  Lying  in  (my)  bed  I  was  reading  an  amusing 
book.  13.  Standing  at  the  window  he  looked  (impf.)  at  the  children 
playing. 


LESSON  XLVIII 

142.  Present  Subjunctive  of  donner,  finir,  vendre 

I  (may)  give,  etc.  I  (may)  finish,  etc.  I  (may)  sell,  etc. 

je  donne  finisse  vende 

tu  donnes  finisses  vendes 

il  donne  finisse  vende 

nous  donnions  finissions  vendions 

vous  donniez  finissiez  vendiez 

ils  donnent  finissent  vendent 

(a)  Learn  the  subjunctive  with  que,  e.g.  que  je  donne,  etc.,  since  a  sub- 
junctive is  usually  preceded  by  que  =  that. 

(&)  The  English  meanings  above  are  only  approximate;  observe  that 
the  subjunctive  corresponds  to  various  English  constructions,  see  examples 
below. 

143.  •  Present  Subjunctive  of  avoir  and  etre 

I  (may)  have,  etc.  I  (may)  be,  etc. 

j'  aie  nous  ayons  je  sois  nous  soyons 

tu  aies  vous  ayez  tu  sois  vous  soyez 

il  ait  ils  aient  il  soit  ils  soient 

(a)  A  past  participle  is  added  to  form  the  perfect  subjunctive  (cf .  §  45) : 
{que)  j'aie  donne,  etc.;  (que)  je  sois  arrive(e),  etc. 

144.  Use  in  Noun  Clauses.  —  The  subjunctive  is  required  in 
a  noun  clause  (introduced  by  que)  after  expressions  denoting:  — 


§145]  LESSON   XLVIII  119 

1.  Will,  desire,  command,  consent,  prohibition,  etc.: 

Je  desire  (veux)  que  vous  restiez.      I  desire  (wish)  you  to  remain. 
Je  consens  &  ce  que  vous  restiez.        /  consent  that  you  should  remain. 

2.  Necessity: 

II  faut  que  vous  restiez.  You  must  remain. 

II  est  necessaire  qu'il  soit  pret.         It  is  necesssary  that  he  should  be 

ready. 

3.  Opinion  (e.g.  approval,  etc.,  or  the  contrary) : 

J'approuve  que  vous  Tachetiez.       /  approve  of  your  buying  it. 
II  est  bon  qu'il  soit  ici.  It  is  well  that  he  is  here. 

4.  Emotion  (e.g.  joy,  sorrow,  surprise,  anger,  fear,  etc.): 
Je  regrette  qu'il  soit  parti.  /  regret  that  he  has  gone. 

5.  Doubt,  denial,  ignorance,  improbability,  etc.: 

Je  doute  (nie)  que  cela  soit  vrai.      /  doubt  (deny)  that  that  is  true. 

6.  Que  (  =  that)  is  never  omitted  in  French: 

Je  suis  content  qu'il  soit  ici.  I  am  glad  (that)  he  is  here. 

145.  Tense  Sequence.  —  If  the  verb  of  the  governing  clause 
is  in  the  present,  imperative,  future,  or  future  perfect,  the  gov- 
erned subjunctive  regularly  has  the  following  tenses:  — 

1.  To  denote  incomplete  action,  the  present  subjunctive: 

II  faut  que  vous  parliez.  You  must  speak. 

'  II  ne  faut  pas  que  vous  parliez.  You  must  not  speak. 

Ordonnez  qu'il  parte.  Order  him  to  go. 

II  faudra  que  vous  partiez.  You  mill  have  to  go. 

2.  To  denote  completed  action,  the  perfect  subjunctive: 
Je  doute  qu'il  Fait  vendu.  /  doubt  that  he  (has)  sold  it. 

3.  A  governing  condition  of  deferential  statement  (cf.  §  190,  1) 
commonly  also  follows  the  same  rules: 

Je  voudrais  (bien)  qu'il  parte.          /  should  like  him  to  go. 


120  LESSON  XLVIII  [§  145 

EXERCISE  XLVIII 

approuver,  approve  fache,  angry,  sorry 

le  corsage,  waist,  bodice  garnir,  trim,  adorn 

coudre,  irreg.,  sew  la  garniture,  trimming 

la  coupe,  cut,  cutting  il  importe,  it  is  important 

courir,  irreg.,  run  la  jupe,  skirt 

cousu,  p.  part,  of  coudre,  sewn  necessaire,  necessary 

la  couture,  sewing  richement,  richly 

la  couturiere,  dressmaker  savoir,  irreg.,  know  (how  to),  can 

doubler,  line  simple,  simple,,  plain 

douter,  doubt  tellement,  so  much 

courir  les  magasins,  go  shopping,  shop;  tout  de  meme,  all  the  same, 
also;  je  veux  bien,  I  will  (do  so),  very  well,  all  right,  etc.;  que  voulez- 
vous  que  je  fasse?  what  shall  I  do?  what  am  I  to  do? 

PRESENT  INDICATIVE  OF  savoir 
je  sais  nous  savons 

tu  sais  vous  savez 

il  sait  ils  savent 

PRESENT  SUBJUNCTIVE  OF  aller,  partir,  faire,  savoir 

j 'aille  je  parte  je  fasse                   je  sache 

tu  ailles  tu  partes  tu  f asses                 tu  saches 

il  aille  il  parte  il  fasse                    il  sache 

nous  allions  nous  partions         nous  fassions  nous  sachions 

vous  alliez  vous  partiez  vous  f  assiez  vous  sachiez 

ils  aillent  ils  partent  ils  fassent               ils  sachent 

A.  Continue:  1.  II  faut  que  j 'arrive  a  midi,  . .  .  que  tu  .  .  .    2.  II 
Teut  que  je  sois  pret.  3.  Elle  desire  que  j'aie  une  robe  neuve.    4.  II 
•est  necessaire  que  je  choisisse  Fetoffe.    5.  II  sera  bon  que  j'attende 
un  peu.    6.  II  ne  faut  pas  que  je  fasse  cela.    7.  II  voudrait  bien  que 
j'y  aille.    8.  II  est  content  que  je  sache  le  frangais.    9.  II  est  fache* 
que  je  parte. 

B.  1.  II  faut  que  j 'aille  chez  la  couturiere  ce  matin  avec  ma 
m£re,  et  elle  desire  que  tu  m'accompagnes.  —  2.  Je  veux  bien. 
3.  J'aime  tellement  (a)   courir  les  magasins.     4.  A  quelle  heure 
veux-tu  que  nous  partions?  —  5.  II  faut  que  nous  soyons  chez  la 
•couturiere   vers   dix  heures.     6.  D'abord  nous   de*sirons   que   tu 
choisisses,  avec  nous,  de  l'e*toffe  pour  ma  robe.     7.  Ma  m£re  veut 
qu'elle  soit  tre"s  simple.    8.  Elle  n'approuve  pas  que  les  jeunes  filles 


§  145]  LESSON  XLVIII  121 

soient  richement  habille*es.  9.  Elle  est  contente  que  les  jupes  et 
meme  les  corsages  soient  tres  simples  cette  anne*e,  mais  il  faut  tout 
de  m£me  que  nous  ayons  un  peu  de  garniture  sur  nos  robes,  n'est-ce 
pas?  — 10.  II  est  tres  important  qu'une  robe  soit  bien  garnie  et 
doublee.  11.  Mais  il  importe  surtout  qu'elle  soit  bien  coupee  et 
bien  cousue.  12.  II  est  n^cessaire  qu'une  couturi£re  sache  bien  la 
coupe  et  la  couture.  — 13.  La  notre  sait  bien  couper  et  coudre. 
14.  Je  doute  qu'il  y  en  ait  de  plus  habiles. 

C.  (Oral.)     1.  Ou  allez-vous  ce  matin?    2.  Veux-tu  que  je  t'ac- 
compagne?    3.  Qu'est-ce  que  ta  mere  voudrait  que  je  fasse?    4.  A 
quelle  heure  faut-il  que  je  sois  chez  la  couturiere?    5.  Quelle  espece 
de  robe  ta  mere  veut-elle  que  tu  aies?    6.  Approuve-t-elle  que  les 
robes  soient  riches?    7.  Est-elle  contente  que  les  corsages  soient 
richement  garnis?     8.  Qu'y  a-t-il  d'important  en  faisant  (making) 
une  robe?  (answer  with  il  faut).    9.  Sais-tu  coudre?  etc. 

D.  1.  We  must  go  to  the  dressmaker's  to-day.    2.  I  wish  you  to 
go  with  me.    3.  Very  well;  I  will  (fut.)  go  with  you.    4.  Do  you  like 
to  go  shopping?    5.  Very  much;  when  shall  we  start?    6.  The  dress- 
maker desires  us  to  be  at  her  shop  at  nine.    7.  First  we  must  choose 
cloth  for  my  dress.    8.  I  wish  it  to  be  good  and  not  (pas)  too  dear. 
9.  My  mother  likes  young  girls  to  wear  simple  dresses.    10.  I  am 
glad  that  skirts  are  plain  this  year.    11.  But  one  must  have  trim- 
ming on  the  waists.    12.  It  is  important  that  dresses  should  be  well 
cut  and  well  trimmed.    13.  Can  you  cut  and  sew?    14.  Not  (pas) 
very  well.    15.  Do  you  like  sewing?    16.  I  do;  my  mother  ap- 
proves of  young  girls  knowing  how  to  sew. 

E.  1.  My  father  wishes  the  architect  to  make  the  plans.    2.  I 
am  sorry  that  they  have  gone.    3.  I  am  glad  that  our  neighbour's 
sons  have  dome.    4.  The  fields  must  be  sown.    5.  We  wish  the  har- 
vesters to  cut  the  wheat.     6.  The  baker  must  make  the  bread. 
7.  Little  girls  must  not  be  richly  dressed.    8.  It  is  not  necessary 
that  you  should  go  away  to-morrow.    9.  I  should  like  my  dress  to 
fit  me  well.     10.  Little  children  must  not  tease  animals.     11.  It 
is  important  that  dresses  should  be  well  lined.    12.  I  wish  you 
(tu)  to  do  your  exercises.    13.  Children  must  always  do  their  ex- 
ercises.   14.  We  shall  have  to  begin  our  lessons  at  once.    15.  We 
are  always  the  first  to  begin. 


122  LESSON  XLIX  [§  146 

LESSON  XLIX 

146.  Subjunctive  in  Adjectival  Clause.  —  The  subjunctive  is 
used  in  such  clauses  (introduced  by  a  relative  pronoun) :  — 

1.  To  express,  regarding  the  antecedent,  something  which  is 
implied  as  being  still  unattained  or  in  doubt: 

Je  cherche  un  chapeau  qui  m'aille  /  am  looking  for  a  hat  that  will 
bien.  (may,  such  as  mill)  fit  me. 

(a)  If  the  English  can  be  turned  by  may  +  verb,  or  such  as,  etc.,  use  the 
subjunctive;  otherwise  the  indicative,  e.g.  J'ai  trouve  un  chapeau  qui  me  va 
bien,  I  have  found  a  hat  that  fits  me. 

2.  After  a  negative: 

II  n'y  a  personne  qui  sache  cela.      There  is  nobody  who  knows  that. 

3.  When  the  antecedent  is  qualified  by  a  superlative,  or  by 
seul,  unique,  premier,  dernier: 

C'est  le  meilleur  ami  que  j'aie.         He  is  the  best  friend  I  have. 

C'est  le  seul  ami  que  j'aie.  He  is  the  only  friend  I  have. 

(a)  But  the  indicative  is  used  (1)  if  what  is  said  is  merely  explanatory, 
e.g.  M on  meilleur  ami  qui  6tait  malade,  etc.,  or  (2)  states  a  fact  unreservedly, 
e.g.  C'est  la  seule  chose  qu'il  a  dite,  or  (3)  if  the  superlative  be  used  as  a 
noun,  e.g.  C'est  la  meilleure  des  maisons  que  j'ai  vues. 

t  4.  In  clauses  translating  whoever,  whatever,  however: 
Qui  que  tu  sois,  parle.  Whoever  you  are,  speak. 

Quoi  que  vous  fassiez.  Whatever  you  do. 

Quelles  que  soient  vos  raisons.         Whatever  (may)  be  your  reasons. 
Quelque  bons  qu'ils  soient.  However  good  they  are  (may  be). 

147.  Subjunctive  in  Adverbial  Clause.  —  It  is  thus  used  after 
many  conjunctions,  like  the  following,  expressing: 

TIME:  avant  que  (.  .  .  ne),  before  CONDITION:  au  cas  que,  in  case 

PURPOSE  :  afin  que  or  pour  que,  that;  a  moins  que  .  .  .  ne,  unless 

in  order  that  CONCESSION  :  quoique  or  bien  que, 

FEAR:  de  peur  que  .  .  .  ne,  for  although 

fear  that  NEGATION:  sans  que,  without  (that) 

Parlez  avant  qu'il  (ne)  parte.  Speak  before  he  goes. 

De  peur  que  vous  ne  tombiez.  For  fear  that  you  should  fall. 

Bien  que  je  ne  sois  pas  riche.  Though  I  am  not  rich, 
(a)  For  the  complete  list,  see  §  224. 


148] 


LESSON  XLIX 


123 


148.  Subjunctive  in  Principal  Sentence.  —  1.  Thus  used,  que 
+  the  third  singular  and  third  plural  present  subjunctive  serves 
to  complete  the  imperative,  thus: 

SINGULAR  PLURAL 

donnons,  let  us  give 

donne,  give  donnez,  give 

qu'il  donne,  let  him  give  qu'ils  donnent,  let  them  give 

(a)  Similarly  for  all  verbs;  for  word-order  of  pronouns,  see  §  68. 

2.  It  is  also  sometimes  used  without  que  to  denote  what  is 
wished  or  desired: 

Ainsi  soit-il!    Vive  le  roi!  So  be  it!    Long  live  the  king! 

Plut  (impf.)  a  Dieu  qu'il  fut  ici!      Would  to  God  he  were  here! 


EXERCISE  XLIX 


accepter,  accept 

assister  a,  be  present  at,  attend 

le  bal,  ball}  dance 

le  bouton,  button,  stud 

la  famille,  family 

frais,  fresh,  unsoiled 

les  geng,  pi.,  people 

le  gilet,  waistcoat,  vest 

Phabit,  m.,  dress  coat 

Pinvitation,  f.,  invitation 

la  jaquette,  morning  coat 


se  mettre,  irreg.,  dress  (intr.). 
le  mouchoir,  handkerchief 
la  nacre,  mother-of-pearl 
s'occuper  de,  occupy  oneself  with, 

see  about 

quant  a,  as  to  (for) 
la  redingote,  frock  coat 
la  soiree,  evening 
le  tailleur,  tailor 
le  veston,  sack  coat 


les  jeunes  gens,  young  men;  les  jeunes  filles,  young  ladies;  en  toilette  de 
bal  (or  de  soiree),  in  evening  dress;  une  soiree  dansante,  a  dancing 
party 

PRESENT  SUBJUNCTIVE  OF  pouvoir 


je  puisse 
tu  puisses 
il  puisse 


nous  puissions 
vous  puissiez 
ils  puissent. 


A.   Continue:  1.  Avant  que  je  parte,  .  .  .  tu.    2.  Quoique  je  sois 
malade,  je  partirai,  .  .  .  tu  .  .  .  tu.    3.  Ce  sont  les  seuls  gants  que 


124  LESSON   XLIX'  [§148 

j'aie.    4.  Quoi  que  je  fasse  je  n'y  r£ussirai  pas.    5.  De  peur  que  je 
ne  tombe.    6.  Give  in  full  the  imperative  of  finir,  vendre,  avoir,  etre. 

B.  1.  Mes  sceurs,  mon  frere  et  moi  (nous)  sommes  invites  a  une 
soire*e  dansante  chez  ma  tante.    2.  Toutes  les  jeunes  filles  seront  en 
toilette  de  bal  (or  de  soire*e).    3.  Bien  que  nous  soyons  presque  tous 
de  la  famille,  ma  tante  ne  voudrait  pas  que  les  jeunes  gens  qui  y 
assistent  soient  en  veston  ou  en  jaquette.    4.  II  faut  qu'on  se 
mette  en  habit  pour  danser  chez  elle.    5.  Mon  frere,  quoiqu'il  ne 
soit  pas  beaucoup  plus  age*  que  moi,  a  deja  un  habit  et  une  redin- 
gote.    6.  N'en  ayant  pas  moi-meme,  il  faut  que  j'aille  chez  le 
tailleur  avant  qu'il  soit  trop  tard.    7.  A  moins  que  je  n'aie  un 
habit,  il  faut  que  je  refuse  1'invitation.    8.  Quant  aux  gants  blancs 
j'en  ai,  mais  quelque  bons  qu'ils  soient  ils  ne  sont  plus  frais. 

9.  La  seule  chose  que  je  puisse  faire  c'est  d'en  acheter  de  neufs. 

10.  Et  le  gilet  blanc,  la  cravate  blanche,  les  boutons  de  nacre  et  le 
mouchoir  de  soie  blanche,  il  faut  que  je  m'en  occupe  tout  de 
suite. 

C.  (Oral  on  B.) 

D.  1.  My  aunt  will  give  a  dancing  party  next  week.    2.  Although 
I  am  invited,  I  don't  know  whether  I  can  be  present  (there).    3.  She 
does  not  wish  us  to  wear  our  (the)  sack  coat[s].    4.  We  must  be  in 
dress  coat[s]  if  we  wish  to  dance  at  her  house.    5.  The  young  ladies 
must  be  in  evening  dress.    6.  My  brother  has  a  dress  coat,  though 
he  is  younger  than  I.    7.  Before  (avant  d')  accepting  the  invitation 
I  must  go  to  the  tailor's.    8.  It  is  the  only  thing  I  can  do.    9.  I 
cannot  go  to  my  aunt's  unless  I  have  a  dress  coat  and  a  white  tie. 
10.  However  good  a  frock  coat  may  be,  one  can't  wear  it  at  the 
ball.     11.  Although  these  gloves  are  good,  they  are  no  longer  un- 
soiled.    12.  I  must  buy  others.    13.  Though  I  have  mother-of-pearl 
buttons,  I  have  no  white  tie.    14.  You  must  see  about  these  things 
at  once.    15.  Let  young  men  dress  well,  especially  when  they  are 
going  to  a  (the)  ball. 

E.  1.  My  brother  knows  how  to  swim,  though  he  is  still  young. 
2.  Unless  you  know  how  to  swim,  don't  bathe  here.    3.  Whatever 
you  do,  don't  do  that.    4.  However  large  the  Seine  is  (is  the  Seine), 
it  is  not  so  large  as  the  St.  Lawrence.    5.  Let  us  begin  our  work 


§  151]  LESSON  L  125 

before  it  is  too  late.  6.  Let  the  maid  bring  me  a  pocket  handker- 
chief. 7.  Let  the  children  play  now  if  they  wish.  8.  I  am  looking 
for  a  house  in  which  (oit,)  I  shall  be  comfortable  (bieri).  9.  I  have 
found  some  gloves  that  fit  me.  10.  The  only  ship  which  leaves 
Havre  this  week  is  "La  Lorraine."  11.  It  is  the  only  thing  I  can 
offer  you.  12.  Unless  I  have  a  morning  coat  before  Tuesday,  I 
cannot  go  to  the  reception.  13.  Mr.  L.  is  the  best  friend  we  have 
in  Paris.  14.  As  to  our  family,  we  never  dance.  15.  Let  the  tailor 
bring  me  my  white  waistcoat  when  it  is  ready. 


LESSON  L 

149.  Past  Definite  of  donner,  finir,  vendre 

I  gave,  etc.  I  finished,  etc.  I  sold,  etc. 

je  donnai  finis     .  vendis 

tu  donnas  finis  vendis 

il  donna  finit  vendit 

nous  donnames  finimes  vendimes 

vous  donnates  finites  vendites 

ils  donnerent  finirent  vendirent 

(a)  The  first  and  second  plural  have  the  circumflex  accent  in  all  verbs. 
(6)  Certain  verbs  (all  irregular)  have  the  endings  -us,  -us,  -ut,  -umes, 
-utes,  -urent  (see  courir  below) . 

(c)  For  the  past  definite  of  verbs  in  -cer,  -ger,  see  Appendix,  D. 

150.  Past  Definite  of  avoir  and  etre 

I  had,  etc.  I  was,  etc. 

j'eus  nous  eumes  je  fus  nous  fumes 

tu  eus  vous  eutes  tu  fus  vous  futes 

il  eut  ils  eurent  il  f ut  ils  furent 

151.  Past  Anterior.  — It  is  formed  by  adding  the  past  parti- 
ciple to  the  past  definite  of  avoir  or  etre,  thus: 

j'eus  donne,  etc.,  I  had  given,  etc. 
je  fus  arrive (e),  7  had  arrived,  etc. 


126  LESSON  L  [§  152 

152.  Use  of  Past  Definite.  —  1.  It  is  used  to  denote  what 
happened  (completed  past  action),  or  what  happened  next  (suc- 
cessive events) : 

La  guerre  dura  sept  ans.  The  war  lasted  seven  years. 

On  f ore a  le  palais,  les  scelerats        The  palace  was  forced,  the  villains 
n'oserent  pas  resister  et  ne  did  not  dare  to  resist  and  only 

songerent  qu'a  fuir.  thought  of  fleeing. 

(a)  The  past  definite  is  almost  wholly  confined  to  literary  or  'book' 
French  narrative  and  formal  public  address  (cf.  Note  to  §  47). 

(o)  In  such  a  narrative  the  past  definite  denotes  the  principal  events,  while 
the  imperfect  denotes  accompanying  events;  or,  as  is  sometimes  said,  the 
past  definite  narrates  and  the  imperfect  describes. 

2.  Observe  the  special  force  of  the  following: 

Avoir;  j'eus,  to  have;  I  received  (obtained,  got,  etc.). 
Savoir;  je  sus,  to  know;  I  found  out  (learned,  etc.). 

153.  Pluperfect  and  Past  Anterior.  —  Both  these  tenses  are 
used  to  translate  the  English  pluperfect,  but  the  past  anterior 
denotes  only  what  had  happened  immediately  before  another 
event,  and  is  rarely  employed  except  after  certain  conjunctions 
of  time: 

Apres  qu'il  eut  dine,  il  partit.          After  he  had  dined,  he  set  out. 
(a)  Such  conjunctions  are:  lorsque,  quand,  when,  apres  que,  after,  aussitot 
que,  as  soon  as,  and  others  rarer. 

EXERCISE  L 

arreter,  arrest,  stop  la  hate,  haste 

aupres  de,  with,  as  regards  joindre,  irreg.,  join 

bas,  low  lorsque,  when 

le  baton,  stick,  club  le  paysan,  peasant,  countryman 

la  boutique,  shop  remplacer,  take  the  place  of 

le  bras,  arm  rude,  severe 

casser,  break  saisir,  seize 

le  coup,  blow  a  travers,  through 
la  devanture,  front  (shop)  window   le  trou,  hole 

la  difficulte,  difficulty  violent,  violent 

se  disposer,  prepare,  get  ready  voler,  steal 

dur,  hard  le  voleur,  thief 
emporter,  carry  off  (away) 
en  bas  age,  at  an  early  age;  joindre  les  deux  bouts,  make  (both)  ends  meet 


§  153]  LESSON   L  127 

PAST  DEFINITE  OP  courir,  mourir,  faire,  voir 

je  courus  je  mourus  je  fis  je  vis 

tu  courus  tu  mourus  tu  fis  tu  vis 

il  courut  il  mourut  il  fit  il  vit 

nous  courumes        nous  mourumes        nous  flmes  nous  vfmes 

vous  courutes          vous  mourutes          vous  fites  vous  vites 

ils  coururent  ils  moururent  ils  firent  ils  virent 

IMPERFECT  INDICATIVE  OF  joindre:  je  joignais/ etc. 

A.  Continue:  1.  J'emportai  le  pain.    2.  Je  saisis  le  voleur.    3.  Je 
sortis  en  hate.     4.  J'entendis  un  coup  violent.     5.  Je  fus  arrete* 
par  lui.    6.  Je  courus  apres  lui.    7.  Lorsque  j'eus  arrete  le  voleur. 
8.  Aussitot  que  je  fus  arrive (e). 

B.  Jean  Valjean  6tait  d'une  pauvre  famille  de  paysans.    II  avait 
perdu  en  bas  age  son  pere  et  sa  mere.    II  ne  lui  restait  qu'une  sceur 
qui  etait  mariee  et  qui  avait  sept  enfants.     Mais  un  jour  le  mari 
mourut.    Jean  le  remplaga  aupr£s  des  enfants.    Sa  sceur  et  lui  en 
travaillant  dur  joignaient  les  deux  bouts  avec  difficult^.    Mais  il 
arriva  qu'un  hiver  fut  rude.    Jean  n'eut  pas  d'ouvrage.    Les  enfants 
n'eurent  pas  de  pain.    Un  dimanche  soir  un  boulanger  du  village  se 
disposait  a  se  coucher  lorsqu'il  entendit  un  coup  violent  dans  la 
devanture  de  sa  boutique.     II  arriva  a  temps  pour  voir  un  bras 
passe  a  travers  le  trou  fait  dans  la  devanture.    Le  bras  saisit  un 
pain  (loaf)  et  Temporta.    Le  boulanger  sortit  en  hate,  courut  apres 
le  voleur  et  Tarreta.    C'etait  Jean  Valjean. 

Adapted  from  Les  Miserables  by  VICTOR  HUGO. 

C.  (Oral)    Read  Exercise  XX,  B>  using  past  definite  for  past  in- 
definite. 

D.  1.  Jean  Valjean's  father  and  mother  were  peasants.    2.  He 
lost  them  at  an  early  age.    3.  Then  he  had  only  his  sister  with  her 
family.    4.  When  her  husband  died  Jean  took  his  place  and  began 
to  work  for  her  and  the  children.    5.  He  used  to  work  hard,  and  he 
made  both  ends  meet  without  difficulty.     6.  A  severe  winter  came. 
7.  Jean  got  no  work.    8.  One  evening,  as  the  baker  Vas  getting 
ready  to  go  to  bed,  he  heard  a  violent  blow.    9.  He  saw  an  arm 
passing  through  the  shop  window.     10.  Seizing  a  loaf  the  arm 
carried  it  off.    11.  The  baker  and  his  wife  came  out  of  the  shop 
in  haste.     12.  He  ran  after  the  thief  and  caught  him. 


128  LESSON  LI  [§  154 

E.  1.  Jean  Valjean  struck  the  shop  window  with  a  stick  and 
broke  it.  2.  He  got  a  loaf  of  bread  by  passing  his  arm  through  the 
hole.  3.  Did  the  baker  see  Jean  taking  the  loaf?  4.  No,  he  did 
not  see  him,  but  he  heard  the  blow.  5.  When  he  heard  the  blow 
he  dressed  in  haste.  6.  He  called  his  wife  and  rushed  into  the  shop. 
7.  He  saw  the  hole  in  the  window.  8.  Then  he  rushed  into  the 
street.  9.  He  ran  in  haste  after  Jean  Valjean.  10.  Jean  threw 
away  the  loaf  he  had  stolen.  11.  The  poor  children  did  not  get 
the  loaf.  .12.  They  ate  no  bread  that  evening. 

LESSON  LI 

154.  Imperfect  Subjunctive  of  donner,  finir,  vendre 

I  gave,  might  I  finished,  might  I  sold,  might 

give,  etc.  finish,  etc.  sell,  etc. 

je  donnasse  finisse  vehdisse 

tu  donnasses  finisses  vendisses 

il  donnat  finit  vendit 

nous  donnassions  finissions  vendissions 

vous  donnassiez  finissiez  vendissiez 

ils  donnassent  finissent  vendissent 

(a)  The  third  singular  in  all  verbs  has  the  circumflex  accent. 

155.  Imperfect  Subjunctive  of  avoir  and  etre 

I  had,  might  have,  etc.  I  was,  were,  might  be,  etc. 

j'eusse  nous  eussions  je  fusse  nous  fussions 

tu  eusses          vous  eussiez  tu  fusses  vous  fussiez 

il  eut  ils  eussent  il  fut  ils  fussent 

(a)  A  past  participle  is  added  to  form  the  pluperfect  subjunctive: 
(que)  j'eusse  donne",  etc. 
(que)  je  fusse  arrive (e),  etc. 

•156.  Tense  Sequence.  —  If  the  verb  of  the  governing  clause 
be  in  any  other  tense  than  those  mentioned  in  §  145,  the  gov- 
erned subjunctive  regularly  takes  the  following  forms:  — 
1.  To  denote  incomplete  action,  the  imperfect  subjunctive: 
Je  desirais  qu'il  le  vendit.  1  /  wished  that  he  might  sell  it  or  / 

J'ai  desire  qu'il  le  vendit.  J  wished  him  to  sell  it. 

J'avais  desire  qu'il  le  vendit.  I  had  wished  him  to  sell  it. 


§156]  LESSON  LI  129 

2.  To  denote  completed  action,  the  pluperfect : 
Je  doutais  qu'il  refit  vendu.       /  doubted  that  he  had  sold  it. 
J'aurais  doute  qu'il  f  fit  parti.      /  should  have  doubted  that  he  had  gone, 
(a)  For  the  sequence  after  conditional  of   deferential   statement,   see 
§  145,  3. 

NOTES.  —  1.  An  infinitive  construction  is  often  used  instead  of  the  sub- 
junctive, even  where  the  latter  is  possible,  e.g.  II  nous  ordonne  de  partir  (for 
II  ordonne  que  nous  portions),  He  orders  us  to  go;  Je  le  ferai  avant  de  partir 
(for  avant  que  je  parte),  I  shall  do  it  before  I  go. 

2.  In  ordinary  language  the  present  subjunctive  is  often  used  instead  of 
the  imperfect,  particularly  in  the  case  of  the  first  conjugation,  e.g.  II  de- 
sirait  que  nous  arrivions  a  temps  (for  que  nous  arrivassions) ,  He  desired  us  to 
arrive  in  time.    This  tendency  is  less  strongly  marked,  however,  in  the  case 
of  the  third  person  singular  imperfect. 

3.  Other  exceptions  to  the  general  rules  are  beyond  the  scope  of  an  ele- 
mentary text-book. 

EXERCISE  LI 

agreablement,  agreeably  le  mal  de  mer,  seasickness 
les  bagages,  m.,  luggage,  baggage     la  malle,  trunk 

la  cabine,  cabin,  stateroom  ordonner,  order,  prescribe 

la  cale,  hold  (of  a  ship)  il  prit,  3d  sing.  p.  def.  of  prendre 

le  chemin,  way,  road  recemment,  recently 

Cherbourg,  Cherbourg  remis,  p.  part,  of  remettre,  recovered 

completement,  completely  rouler,  roll 

descendre,  tr.,  take  down,  lower  le  roulis,  rolling 

empecher,  hinder  le  vaisseau,  vessel,  ship 

le  fer,  iron  la  valise,  valise 

habitue,  accustomed  (to,  &)  le  voyage,  journey,  trip 

lourd,  heavy  le  wagon-lit,  sleeping  car 
chemin  de  fer,  railway;  en  pleine  mer,  in  the  open  sea',  il  fallut  (p.  def. 
of  falloir),  it  was  necessary,  had  to,  etc.;  il  faudrait  (condl.  of  falloir), 
would  have  to,  etc. 

IMPERFECT  SUBJUNCTIVE  OF  prendre,  pouvoir,  mettre,  faire 


je  prisse 
tu  prisses 
ilprlt 

je  pusse 
tu  pusses 
ilput 

je  misse 
tu  misses 
ilmit 

je  fisse 
tu  fisses 
ilfft 

nous  prissions 
vous  prissiez 
ils  prissent 

nous  pussions 
vous  pussiez 
ils  pussent 

nous  missions 
vous  missiez 
ils  missent 

nous  fissions 
vous  fissiez 
ils  fissent 

NOTE.  —  For  the  u  throughout  in  pusse,  etc.,  see  §  149,  6. 


130  LESSON   LI  [§  156 

A.  Continue:  1.  II  fallait  que  je  vendisse  ma  maison.    2.  II  fau- 
drait  que  je  finisse  bientot.    3.  Bien  que  je  fusse  habitue (e)  a  voya- 
ger.   4.  Avant  que  j'eusse  debarque.    5.  II  dSsirait  que  je  fisse  un 
voyage.    6.  II  doutait  que  je  pusse  le  faire. 

(The  following  passage  is  given  in  literary  style  to  afford  practice  in  the 
verb-forms.) 

B.  1.  Un  de  mes  amis  fit  recemment  un  voyage  en  Europe.    2.  II 
fallut  qu'il  allat  d'abord  a  la  gare  et  qu'il  prit  son  billet  de  chemin 
de  fer.    3.  Pour  qu'il  put  voyager  agreablement  il  prit  une  place 
dans  le  wagon-lit.    4.  Arrive*  a  New  York  il  fallut  qu'il  s'occupat  de 
ses  bagages.    5.  II  ordonna  qu'on  descendit  sa  grande  malle,  qui 
e*tait  tres  lourde,  dans  la  cale  et  qu'on  mit  ses  valises  dans  la  cabine. 
6.  En  pleine  mer  le  vent  soufflait  et  le  vaisseau  roulait.    7.  Bien 
que  mon  ami  fut  assez  habitue  au  roulis  il  fallut  qu'il  se  couchat 
pour  empecher  le  mal  de  mer.    8.  Avant  qu'on  eut  fait  la  moiti6 
de  la  traversed  il  e"tait  completement  remis.     9.  II  debarqua  a 
Cherbourg  d'ou  il  partit  pour  Paris. 

C.  1.  My  father  recently  had  to  take   (make)   a  journey  to 
Europe.    2.  He  had  to  get  (take)  his  railway  ticket.    3.  He  went 
early  to  the  station.    4.  He  went  (there)  early  in  order  that  he 
might  have  a  good  place  in  the  sleeping  car.    5.  When  he  arrived  at 
New  York  he  had  to  see  after  his  trunk.    6.  He  had  his  other  luggage 
with  him  in  the  train.     7.  But  he  ordered  his  trunk,  which  was 
heavy,  to  be  lowered  (use  on)  into  the  hold.    8.  Although  the  wind 
was  blowing  the  ship  didn't  roll  much.     9.  As  he  was  not  accus- 
tomed to  travelling  he  had  to  lie  down.    10.  He  lay  down  in  order 
not  to  be  (avoir)  seasick.     11.  Before  he  arrived  at  Cherbourg  he 
had  (was)  completely  recovered. 

D.  1.  Before  my  friend  started  he  took  his  ticket.    2.  He  had  to 
take  his  ticket  at  the  station.    3.  He  had  to  be  there  early  in  order 
to  do  that.    4.  Although  he  arrived  there  early,  he  hadn't  much 
time.    5.  I  wished  him  to  get  a  ticket  for  me  also.    6.  I  should  HKO 
you  to  see  about  my  luggage.    7.  We  should  like  you  to  put  our 
valises  into  the  stateroom.    8.  Although  our  friends  hadn't  arrived 
we  couldn't  (impf.)  wait.     9.  We  regretted  that  they  had  been 
hindered.     10.  Although  my  uncle  was  ill,  he  was  able  to  travel. 
11.  We  had  arrived  before  the  train  left  for  Paris. 


§157] 


LESSON  LII 


131 


LESSON  LII 

157.  Principal  Parts.  —  1.  The  whole  conjugation  of  any  regu- 
lar verb,  and  of  most  irregular  verbs,  may  be  known  from  five 
forms  of  the  verb,  called  "principal  parts,"  as  shown  below  for 
ecrire,  write.  These  parts  are  the  infinitive,  the  present  par- 
ticiple, the  past  participle,  the  present  indicative  1st  singular 
and  the  past  definite  1st  singular;  from  each  is  formed  the  mood 
or  tense  in  the  column  below. 


1.  INFIN. 

2.  PRES.  PART. 

3.  PAST  PART. 

4.  PRES.  IND.  1  SG. 

5.  P.  DBF.  1  So. 

ecrire 

£crivant 

ecrit 

j'ecris 

j'ecrivis 

Future 

Impf.  Ind. 

Comp.  Tenses 

Imperative 

Impf.  Subj. 

j'ecrirai,  etc. 

j'ecrivais,  etc. 

j'ai  ecrit,  etc. 

6cris,  etc. 

j'ecrivisse,etc. 

Conditional 

Pres.  Subj. 

j'ecrirais,  etc. 

j'ecrive,  etc. 

RULE:  Add 

RULE  :  Drop 

RULE:  Add 

RULE:  Form 

RULE:  Form 

to  the   Infini- 

-ant and  add 

the  Past  Par- 

the    Impera- 

the Imperfect 

tive  (dropping 

the  endings 

ticiple  to  the 

tive  by  drop- 

Subjunctive 

final  -e) 

proper   auxil- 

ping the  sub- 

by  substitut- 

iary (§  45)  to 

ject    pronoun 

ing 

-ai     -ons 

-ais    -ions 

form  the  Com- 

of the  2d  sing- 

-sse  -ssions 

-as     -ez 

-ais    -iez 

pound  Tenses, 

ular,    1st  and 

-sses  -ssiez 

-a      -ont 

-ait    -aient 

and   also  the 

2d    plural    of 

-At     -ssent 

Passive  Voice 

the      Present 

to    form    the 

to    form    the 

of    transitive 

Indicative  (—  s 

for    the    final 

Future,  and 

Imperf  .,  and 

verbs  (§  118). 

of  the  2d  sing- 

letter   of    the 

ular   1st  con- 

1st     singular 

-ais    -ions 

-e        -ions 

jugation  being 

Past  Definite, 

-ais    -iez 

-es       —iez 

also   dropped, 

placing  a  cir- 

-ait   -aient 

-e        -ent 

except  before 

cumflex      ac- 

cent over  the 

to    form    the 
Conditional. 

to    form    the 
Pres.Subjunct. 

en,  y, 
e.g.  paries-en, 
vas-v^ 

last  vowel  of 
the    3d    sing- 

(a) The  1st  and  2d  Plural 

VdO   J  J  . 

ular. 

Present  Indicative  and  Im- 

perative may  also  be  formed 

by  changing  -ant  into  -ons, 

-ez. 

132  LESSON   LII  |§  158 

2.  A  condensed  form  of  the  above  is  used  in  the  Alphabetical 
List  of  the  Irregular  Verbs  (see  Appendix),  thus: 

e*crire  £crivant  e*crit  e"cris  ecrivis 

(write)  ecrivais  e*crivisse 

e"crirai(s)          derive 
PRESENT  INDICATIVE: 

e"cris,  ecris,  ecrit,  ecrivons,  e*crivez,  ecrivent. 

158.  Remarks  on  Irregular  Verbs.  —  1.  The  infinitive  stem 
of  some  verbs  is  phonetically  modified  in  the  future  and  condi- 
tional, e.g.  venir,  viendrai(s). 

2.  The  stem-vowel  of  the  present  participle  is  phonetically 
modified   in   the    present    subjunctive    of   some   verbs,    where 
stressed  (1st,  2d,  3d  singular  and  3d  plural),  e.g.  venant,  vienne, 
viennes,  vienne,  viennent;  usually  also  in  the  same  persons  of 
the  present  indicative,  e.g.  viens,  viens,  vient,  viennent. 

3.  Many  verbs  have  the  present  indicative  singular  in  -s,  -s, 
-t,  others  in  -x,  -x,  -t,  e.g.  sais,  sais,  sait  (savoir),  veux,  veux, 
veut  (vouloir);  the-t  is  omitted  after  c,  d,  t,  e.g.  vainc  (vaincre), 
vend  (vendre),  met  (mettre). 

4.  Some  verbs  have  the  past  definite  in  -us,  -us,  -ut,  -times, 
-utes,  -urent,  and  the  imperfect  subjunctive  in  -usse,  -usses, 
-ut,  -ussions,  -ussiez,  -ussent,  e.g.  courus,  etc.  (courir),  cou- 
russe,  etc. 

5.  All  verbs  with  the  past  definite  in  -is  continue  the  tense 
like  finis,  e.g.  pris,  pris,  prit,  primes,  prites,  prirent. 

6.  Verbs  in  -oir  (a  separate  conjugation  in  some  grammars) 
are  treated  as  irregular  verbs. 

7.  Exceptions  to  the  rules  of  §  157  will  be  indicated  in  the 
Alphabetical  List;  avoir  and  etre  are  not  included  under  the  rules. 

8.  The  present  indicative  of  each  verb  should  be  learned  in 
fuU. 

159.  Exercise  Form.  —  For  exercises  and  tests  the  following 
tabular  form  is  suggested;  the  form  may  be  ruled  large  enough 
to  contain  several  verbs,  the  different  verbs  being  indicated  by 
numerals,  as  shown  in  the  margin: 


159] 


LESSON  LII 


133 


INFIN. 

PRES.  PART. 

PAST  PART. 

PRES.  IND.  1  So. 

P.DEF.ISG. 

(1)  savoir,  know 
(2)   connaltre,  know 
(3)  naitre,  be  born 

sachant 
connaissant 
naissant 

su 
connu 
ne 

je  sais 
je  connais 
je  nais 

je  sus 
je  connus 
je  naquis 

FUT.  1  SG. 

IMPF.  IND.  1  SG. 

P.  IND.  1  SG. 

IMPVE.  2  So. 

IMP.SUB.1SO. 

(1)  je  saurai 
(2)  je  connaitrai 
(3)  je  naitrai 

je  savais 
je  connaissais 
je  naissais 

j'ai  su 
j'ai  connu 
jesuisne(e) 

sache 
connais 
nais 

je  susse 
je  connusse 
je  naquisse 

CONDL.  1  SG. 

(1)  je  saurais 

(2)  je  connaltrais 

(3)  je  naltrais 


PRES.  SUB  j.  (in  full,  using  abbreviations  if  necessary} 

je  sache,  tu  saches,  il  sache,  nous  sachions,  vous  sa- 

chiez,  ils  sachent. 
je  connaisse,  tu  -s,  il  -e,  nous  connaissions,  vous  -iez, 

ils  — ent. 
je  naisse,   tu  naisses,  il  naisse,  nous  naissions,  voua 

-iez,  ils  -ent. 


PRES.  INDIC.  (in  full,  underlining  forms  common  to  the  Imperative) 

(1)  je  sais,  t.  sais,1  i.  sait,  n.  savons,  v.  savez,  i.  savent. 

(2)  je  connais,  t.  connais,  i.  connait,  n.  connaissons,  v.  connaissez,  i.  con- 

naissent. 

(3)  je  nais,  t.  nais,  i.  nait,  n.  naissons,  v.  naissez,  i.  naissent. 

i  Imperative:  sache,  sachons,  sachez. 

NOTE.  —  Printed  forms,  ruled  as  above,  and  with  space  for  writing  out 
five  verbs,  may  be  obtained  from  the  Publishers  for  classroom  use. 


EXERCISE  LII 

NOTE.  —  Before  doing  this  and  similar  exercises,  study  the  verbs  required 
in  detail  in  the  Alphabetical  List. 

Like  connaitre  is  reconnaitre,  recognize. 

Distinguish  savoir,  know  (what  has  been  learned,  or  is  realized  by  the 
mind),  know  how  to,  can,  from  connaitre,  know  (be  acquainted  with,  recog- 
nize by  the  perceptions) : 

Je  connais  cette  dame  de  vue.  I  know  that  lady  by  sight. 

Je  ne  sais  pas  ou  elle  demeure.  I  don't  know  where  she  lives. 

Usually  was  born  =  est  ne,  of  persons  still  living;  otherwise  etait  ne 
or  naquit,  but  with  numerous  exceptions. 


134  LESSON  LIII  [§  160 

A.  (Oral.)   Continue:   1.  Je  ne  saurai   (connaitrai)  pas.     2.  Je 
connaitrais  (saurais).    3.  Je  n'en  savais  rien.    4.  Je  n'y  connaissais 
personne.    5.  Je  suis  ne(e)  au  19e  siecle.    6.  Je  sais  faire  cela.    7.  Je 
ne  connais  pas  cet  endroit.    8.  II  est  content  que  je  sache  ma  lee.  on, 
.  .  .  tu  .  .  .  ta.    9.  Je  ne  les  ai  pas  reconnus. 

B.  1.  What  do  you  know  of  that  affair?    2.  I  know  nothing  of  it. 
3.  Do  you  not  know  me?    4.  I  do,  but  I  didn't  recognize  you  at 
first.     5.  They  didn't  know  the  date.     6.  Would  you  know  my 
brother?    7.  I  am  glad  that  you  know  your  verses.    8.  They  didn't 
know  the  city  very  well.    9.  It  is  necessary  that  we  should  know 
him.    10.  In  what  year  were  you  born?    11.  I  was  born  in  the  last 
year  of  the  19th  century. 

C.  1.  I  was  acquainted  with  that  lady.    2.  My  mother  knew  her 
very  well.     3.  They  will  not  know  where  we  are.     4.  He  would 
not  know  where  to  find  us.    5.  I  wish  you  to  know  your  lessons  for 
to-morrow.    6.  I  knew  nobody  at  the  concert.    7.  William  I  was 
born  in  1027.    8.  Do  you  know  at  what  o'clock  the  train  arrived? 
9.  My  uncle  knows  America  well.    10.  I  didn't  know  whether  you 
would  recognize  me.    11.  I  was  the  first  to  recognize  you.     12.  He 
didn't  know  how  to  do  his  work.     13.  The  teacher  was  glad  that 
we  knew  our  lessons  to-day. 


LESSON  LIII 

160.  Agreement  of  Verb  and  Subject.  —  Review  §  4  and  ob^ 
serve :  — 

1.  The  agreement  of  the  verb  with  a  simple  subject: 

Le  peuple  frangais  est  vif .  The  French  people  are  lively. 

La  plupart  du  monde  le  croit.  Most  people  believe  it. 

La  plupart  (des  hommes)  le  croient.     Most  men  believe  it. 

(a)  A  collective  noun  singular  requires  a  verb  singular;  so  also  for  col- 
lectives in  general,  if  limited  by  de  +  a  singular. 

(6)  Otherwise  the  agreement  is  usually  with  the  sense  as  in  English,  ex- 
ample 3. 


§  161]  LESSON    LIU  135 

2.  The  agreement  of  the  verb  with  a  compound  subject: 
Toi  et  moi  (nous)  le  croyons.  You  and  I  believe  it. 

Vous  et  lui  (vous)  Favez  vu.  You  and  he  have  seen  it. 

Sa  sceur  et  lui  sont  venus.  His  sister  and  he  have  come. 

L'un  ou  Fautre  Faura.  One  or  the  other  will  have  it. 

Ni  Fun  ni  Fautre  ne  sont  bons.  Neither  are  good. 

(a)  The  verb  is  regularly  plural,  unless,  as  in  Ex.  4,  one  subject  excludes 
the  other;  for  agreement  when  the  subjects  are  of  different  persons* observe 
Ex.  1  and  2,  usually  with  redundant  nous,  vous. 

161.  Position  of  Subject.  —  Apart  from  interrogations  (cf. 
§  8),  the  subject  often  follows  the  verb,  as  in  the  following: 

Fais  comme  moi,  dit-il.  Do  as  I  do,  said  he. 

Que  veux-tu?  demanda  le  fils.  What  do  you  wish?  asked  the  son. 

A  peine  le  jour  fut-il  arrive.  Hardly  had  the  day  arrived. 

Aussi  mon  ami  est-il  venu.  Hence  my  friend  came. 

Peut-etre  a-t-il  raison.     1 

-r,        A  ,.,         .  Perhaps  he  is  right. 

Peut-etre  qu'il  a  raison.  J 

II  fera  ce  que  peut  faire  un  homme  He  will  do  what  a  man  who  re- 

qui  se  respecte.  spects  himself  can  do. 

Je  ne  sais  pas  oft  est  ma  mere.  /  don't  know  where  my  mother  is. 

C'est  en  lui  qu'espere  son  ami.  It  is  in  him  that  his  friend  hopes. 

But:  C'est  en  lui  qu'elle  espere.  It  is  in  him  that  she  hopes. 

(a)  In  remarks  explanatory  of  quotation,  as  in  English,  Ex.  1  and  2. 

(6)  Often  when  an  adverb  heads  the  clause,  Ex.  3,  4  and  5;  always  so  for 
aussi,  hence,  Ex.  4,  but  never  for  peut-etre  que,  Ex.  6. 

(c)  A  subject  (not  a  personal  pronoun)  often  follows  the  verb  in  a  relative 
clause  or  after  c'est  que,  Ex.  7,  8  and  9. 

EXERCISE  LIII 

A.  1.  The  American  people  like  winter  sports.  2.  A  part  of 
our  family  live  in  the  country.  3.  This  kind  of  pears  is  always 
dear.  4.  You  and  he  are  always  together.  5.  You  and  I  have 
always  been  good  friends.  6.  Neither  (the  one  nor  the  other)  of 
the  pictures  has  been  sold.  7.  Few  people  (gens)  know  Paris  better 
than  he.  8.  If  I  do  this,  answered  he,  I  shall  lose  my  time.  9.  Per- 
haps we  shall  catch  the  train;  let  us  hasten.  10.  He  will  do  for 
(pour)  me  all  that  a  good  friend  can  do.  11.  My  mother  is  kind  to 
everybody;  hence  she  is  loved  by  all.  12.  This  dealer  makes  large 


136  LESSON  LIV  [§  162 

profits;  hence  he  is  becoming  rich.  13.  Where  is  your  hat?  I  asked. 
14.  I  know  where  my  hat  is,  he  replied,  but  I  don't  know  where  my 
gloves  are. 

B.   1.  The  French  people  love  the  theatre.     2.  How  is  your 
father?  my  mother  asked  him.    3.  He  is  not  very  well,  he  replied. 

4.  The  man  was  running  very  fast;  perhaps  he  had  stolen  something. 

5.  Do  you  remember  what  they  were  doing?    6.  Does  not  everybody 
love  his  country?    7.  The  architect  will  oversee  what  the  workmen 
are  doing.    8.  You  and  he  were  present  at  the  ball,  were  you  not? 
9.  He  and  I  were  there  and  also  many  of  our  acquaintances.  10.  Will 
you  and  your  friend  not  come  to  see  us  when  you  are  in  town? 
11.  Do  you  know  what  I  wish?    12.  Do  you  know  what  that  man 
wants  who  is  knocking  at  the  door?    13.  Do  you  know  where  the 
reading  room  is?    14.  Is  it  in  this  house  that  your  uncle  and  aunt 
live? 


LESSON  LIV 

162.      Principal  Parts  of  pouvoir,  'be  able,'  etc.;  vouloir, 
'wish/  'will/  'like,'  etc.;  voir,  'see' 

pouvoir  pouvant  pu  peux  or  puis  pus 

vouloir  voulant  voulu  veux  voulus 

voir  voyant  vu  vois  vis 

EXERCISE  LIV 

(The  irregular  verbs  in  this  and  following  exercises  should  be  written  out 
in  full  or  practised  orally  according  to  the  model  at  §  159.) 

A.  (Oral.)    Continue  throughout  the  tense:  1.  Je  pourrai  (voudrai). 

2.  Je  voudrais  (pourrais).     3.  Je  verrai  (verrais).     4.  Je  voulais 
(pouvais,  voyais).    5.  Je  peux  (veux,  vois).    6.  Je  pus  (voulus,  vis). 
7.  Que  je  pusse  (voulusse,  visse).    8.  Que  je  puisse  (voie). 

B.  1.  I  am  not  able  to  do  that.    2.  If  I  (you,  he,  we)  were  able. 

3.  Have  you  been  able?    4.  He  (you,  they)  would  be  able.    5.  What 
do  they  wish?     6.  I  (he,  we,  you,  they)  did  not  wish  to  travel. 
7.  He  (they)  would  like  to  remain  here.     8.  What  books  have 


§165]  LESSON  LV  137 

you  seen?  9.  Shall  I  see  you  to-morrow?  10.  What  do  you  see? 
11.  I  see  nothing.  12.  If  they  had  been  here,  I  should  have  seen 
them. 

C.  1.  He  (you,  they)  would  like  to  study.  2.  What  have  you 
seen?  3.  He  wishes  me  to  see  his  pictures.  4.  I  wish  them  to  see 
my  garden.  5.  He  would  see  you  if  he  were  not  ill.  6.  They  will 
see  you  if  they  can.  7.  I  wished  to  start  yesterday,  but  I  was  not 
able.  8.  They  will  not  be  able  to  sell  their  house.  9.  Shall  we 
be  able  to  catch  the  train?  10.  Do  what  you  wish  (Jut.).  11.  The 
carpenter  wasn't  able  to  carry  the  board;  it  was  too  heavy. 


LESSON  LV 

163.  Auxiliary  Function.  —  Several  verbs,  when  followed  di- 
rectly by  an  infinitive,  have  a  sort  of  auxiliary  function,  and 
serve  to  form  verb-phrases  of  an  idiomatic  character. 

164.  Vouloir,  'will,'  'wish  (want,  desire)  to,'  etc. 

II  ne  veut  pas  vous  voir.  He  will  not  (doesn't  wish)  to  see  you. 

II  vous  parlera  demain.  He  will  speak  to  you  to-morrow. 

II  ne  voulait  pas  partir.  He  was  unwilling  to  (wouldn't)  go. 

II  voudrait  (bien)  le  savoir.  He  would  like  to  know  it. 

II  aurait  voulu  venir.  He  would  have  liked  to  come. 

(a)  Distinguish  will  of  futurity,  Ex.  2,  from  will  of  purpose,  Ex.  1. 

(b)  Distinguish  would  of  the  imperfect,  Ex.  3,  from  would  of  the  condi- 
tional, Ex.  4  and  5. 

165.  Pouvoir,  ' can,'  'be  able  to,'  'be  permitted  to,'  'may,'  etc. 

Je  peux  faire  cela  moi-me'me.  /  can  do  that  myself. 

Est-ce  que  je  puis  entrer?  May  I  come  (go)  in? 

Je  ne  pouvais  pas  lire  la  lettre.        /  couldn't  read  the  letter. 

Je  n'ai  pas  pu  le  faire.  I  could  not  (was  unable  to)  do  it. 

II  pourrait  venir  s'il  voulait.  He  could  come  if  he  would. 

Aurait-il  pu  venir  ce  soir?  Could  he  have  come  this  evening? 

Pourrais-je'  vous  demander  ceci?     Might  (could)  I  ask  you  this? 

(a)  Pouvoir  =  can  or  may,  Ex.  1  and  2. 

(b)  Distinguish  could  =  was  able  in  a  past  tense,  Ex.  3  and  4,  from  could 
=  would  be  able  of  the  conditional,  Ex.  5  and  6. 

(c)  Note  the  English  rendering  of  the  conditional  in  Ex.  7. 


138  LESSON  LV  [§  166 

166.        Savoir,  i  know,'  '  know  how  to,'  '  can,'  etc. 

II  salt  ecrire.  He  can  (knows  how  to)  write. 

II  est  malade  et  ne  peut  pas       He  is    ill,  and   cannot  write    this 

ecrire  ce  soir.  evening. 

Je  ne  saurais  le  croire.  I  cannot  believe  it. 

(a)    .distinguish  can  =  know  how  to,  has  learned  how  to,  Ex.  1,  from  can  of 
physical  ability,  Ex.  2. 

(6)  Note  the  English  rendering  of  the  conditional  in  Ex.  3. 

EXERCISE  LV 

aider,  help  la  fourchette,  fork 

Parmoire,  f.,  cupboard  intelligent,  intelligent 

arranger,  arrange  Jeanne,  Jane 

Passiette,  f .,  plate  le  menage,  household 

le  couteau,  knife  la  nappe,  tablecloth  (white) 
le  convert,  cover  (dishes,  etc.,      la  peur,  fear 

for  one  i^erson)  le  tiroir,  drawer 
la  cuiher,  spoon 

de  peur  de,  for  fear  'of;  mettre  la  nappe,  lay  the  table  (cloth),-  ^.  the 
table;  faire  le  menage,  keep  house;  cafe  au  lait,  coffee  with  milk; 
arranger  les  converts,  arrange  the  dishes  (in  setting  the  table) 

A.  Continue:  1.  Je  sais  compter  jusqu'a  cent,  tu.    2.  Je  voudrais 
bien  y  aller.    3.  J'aurais  voulu  y  aller  si  j'avais  pu,  tu  .  .  .  tu.    4.  Je 
pourrais  y  aller  si  je  voulais,  tu  .  .  .  tu.    5.  Je  ne  pouvais  pas  sortir. 
6.  Je  ferai  ce  que  je  voudrai,  tu  .  .  .  tu.    7.  Aurais-je  pu  faire  cela? 
8.  Je  ne  peux  pas  ecrire  parce  que  je  suis  malade,  tu  .  .  .  tu. 

B.  1.  Jeanne  est  une  petite  fille  habile  et  intelligente.    2.  Elle 
sait  deja  lire  et  e'crire,  mais  elle  ne  peut  pas  aller  tous  les  jours  a 
1'ecole.     3.  Elle  voudrait  savoir  faire  le  menage.    4.  Et  sa  mere 
voudrait  aussi  qu'elle  sache  cela.    5.  Tous  les  matins  elle  se  leve 
de  bonne  heure  pour  qu'elle  puisse  aider  sa  mere.    6.  Elle  sait  mettre 
la  nappe  et  arranger  les  converts.    7.  Elle  sait  dans  quels  tiroirs  se 
trouvent  les  serviettes,  les  couteaux,  les  fourchettes  et  les  cuillers. 
8.  Si  elle  etait  plus  grande,  elle  pourrait  prendre  les  asjsiettes  et  les 
tasses  qui  sont  dans  la  grande  armoire.     9.  Sa  mere  ne  veut  pas 
qu'elle   y  touche  de  peur  de  les  casser.     10.  Son  pere  lui   dit 
quelquefois:  "Jeanne,  si  tu  savais  me  faire  un  bon  cafe  au  lait,  tu 
serais  une  bonne  petite  menagere." 


§  167]  LESSON  LVI  139 

C.  (Oral.)    1.  Savez-vous  parler  frangais?    2.  Savez-vous  1'ecrire 
aussi?     3.  Pourriez-vous  ecrire  line  lettre  en  frangais?    4.  Sauriez- 
vous  me  dire  si  votre  frere  est  deja  leve?     5..  Pourquoi  Jeanne  se 
leve-t-elle  de  bonne  heure?    6.  Que  sait-elle  f aire  ?    7.  Quepourrait- 
elle  faire  si  elle  etait  plus  grande?    8.  Pourquoi  sa  mere  ne  veut- 
elle  pas  qu'elle  touche  a  la  vaisselle?  etc. 

D.  1.  I  cannot  go  to  school  to-day.    2.  I  should  like  to  go  (there) 
every  day.    3.  I  can  read,  but  I  cannot  write  yet.    4.  If  I  could  go 
to  school  every  day,  I  should  soon  learn  to  write.    5.  My  mother 
would  like  me  to  know  how  to  keep  house.    6.  I  know  how  to  lay 
the  table.     7.  I  cannot  get  the  cups  and  plates  in  the  cupboard. 
8.  My  mother  doesn't  want  me  to  touch  them.    9.  But  I  can  get 
the  knives,  forks  and  spoons.    10.  I  know  in  which  drawer  they  are. 

11.  If  I  were  older,  I  could  make  a  cup  of  coffee  for  my  father. 

12.  I  can't  make  the  coffee  yet;  I  am  too  young.    13.  My  mother 
says  that  if  I  could  make  the  coffee,  I  sho  Id  be  a  g   )d  i:ttle  house- 
wif       14.  I  should  like  to  learn  to  make  it. 

£j.  1.  My  sister  can  sing  very  well.  2.  But  she  is  ill  and  can't 
sing  this  evening.  3.  She  would  like  to  sing  if  she  could.  4.  She 
helps  her  mother  to  (a)  arrange  the  dishes.  5.  She  can't  get  the 
dishes  (vaisselle)  in  the  cupboard  for  fear  of  breaking  them.  6.  We 
cannot  always  do  what  we  should  like.  7.  But  we  shall  do  what 
we  can  (fut.) .  8.  I  tried  to  learn  my  lesson,  but  I  couldn't.  9.  Could 
you  tell  me  what  time  it  is?  10.  I  cannot;  my  watch  is  broken. 
11.  If  I  had  my  dress  coat,  I  could  go  to  the  ball.  12.  But  the  tailor 
couldn't  bring  it;  it  wasn't  ready.  13.  He  would  have  brought  it 
if  he  had  been  able.  14.  We  should  like  to  go  to  Europe  this  summer 
if  we  could.  15.  Couldn't  you  go  with  us? 


LESSON  LVI 

167.          Aller,  'go';  devoir,  'owe,'  'be  obliged'; 
venir,  'come' 

aller  allant  alle  vais  allai 

devoir  devant  du  (/.  due)  dois  dus 

venir  venant  venu  viens  vins 


140  LESSON  LVII  [§  168 

• 

EXERCISE  LVI 

A.  (Oral.)    Continue:  1.  J'irai  (irais)  le  voir.    2.  J'allais  et  venais 
tout  le  temps.    3.  Je  ne  lui  dois  (devais,  devrai)  rien.    4.  Je  vien- 
drai  les  voir.    5.  Je  m'en  suis  alle(e).    6.  Je  suis  venu(e)  a  pied. 

7.  J'y  vais  tout  de  suite.    8.  J'irai 1  (irais)  avec  plaisir.    9.  Vas-y. 
10.  Viens.    11.  II  faut  que  j'y  aille  (vienne).    12.  J'y  allai.    13.  Je 
vins  ici  tout  seul.    14.  II  fallait  que  j'y  allasse  (vinsse).    15.  II  est 
fache  que  je  doive  partir,  .  .  .  tu. 

B.  1.  Where  are  you  going?    2.  I  am  going  home.    3.  He  owes 
me   ten   francs.    4.  You   owe   me   nothing.     5.  Come  (2d  sing.) 
with  me.     6.  Do  not  go  there.     7.  We  shall  go  to  the  concert. 

8.  They  will  come  to  see  us.    9.  I  should  go  if  I  could.    10.  Come 
next  week.    11.  Go  there  at  once.    12.  Go  away  (s'en  aller).    13.  I 
desired  him  to  go  to  the  market.    14.  They  came  early.    15.  They 
have  come. 

C.  1.  We  are  going  to  have  some  friends  to  dinner.    2.  Whom 
are  you  going  to  invite?    3.  We  shall  owe  them  much  money.    4.  I 
owed  you  nothing.    5.  When  will  they  come?    6.  When  did  they 
(/.)  come?    7.  Pay  me  what  you  owe  me.    8.  Come  at  once.    9.  I 
must  (use  ilfaut)  go  away.    10.  He  must  come  to  see  us.    11.  Owe 
nothing  to  anybody.     12.  They  (/.)  have  gone  away.     13.  They 
came  in  [a]  carriage.    14.  It  was  necessary  for  him  to  come.    15.  He 
didn't  owe  me  anything. 

LESSON  LVII 

168.  Devoir  =  owe,  but  observe  also  its  force  in  various  tenses 
when  followed  directly  by  an  infinitive: 

PRESENT:        Je  dois  parler.  /  am  to  (have  to,  must)  speak. 

IMPF.  :  Je  devais  parler.         /  was  (had,  was  obliged)  to  speak. 

FUTURE  :          Je  devrai  parler.         7  shall  have  (be  obliged)  to  speak. 
CONDL.  :  Je  devrais  parler.       /  ought  to  (should)  speak. 

PAST  INDEP.  :  J'ai  dti.  parler.  7  have  had  (been  obliged)  to  speak, 

had  to  speak,  must  have  spoken. 

PAST  DEF.  :      Je  dus  parler.  7  had  (was  obliged}  to  speak. 

CONDL.  ANT.  :  J'aurais  dti.  parler.     7  ought  to  have  (should  have)  spoken. 

i  Aller  regularly  requires  a  complement,  but  y  so  used  is  omitted  before  irai,  etc., 
irais,  etc. 


§  170]  LESSON  LVII  141 

169.  Aller.  —  The  present  and  imperfect  +  a  direct  infinitive 
give  a  sort  of  immediate  future,  like  go,  etc.,  in  English: 

II  va  Facheter.  He  is  going  (is  about)  to  buy  it. 

Nous  allions  partir.  We  were  (just)  about  to  start. 

II  allait  se  noyer.  He  was  on  the  point  of  drowning. 

Allez  le  voir  demain.  Go  to  (go  and)  see  him  to-morrow. 

170.  Venir.  —  Observe  its  force  when  followed  by  an  infini- 
tive (1)  without  a  preposition,  (2)  with  de,  (3)  with  &,  the  two 
latter  in  the  present  and  imperfect: 

II  est  venu  me  voir.  He  came  to  see  (came  and  saw)  me. 

Je  viens  de  les  voir.  I  have  just  seen  them. 

Je  venais  de  les  voir.  I  had  just  seen  them. 

S'il  venait  &  voir  le  livre.  //  he  happened  to  see  the  book. 

EXERCISE  LVII 

apres-demain,    the   day   after    to-  le  menu,  menu,  bill  of  fare 

morrow  la  noix,  walnut 

avant-hier,  the  day  before  yesterday  la  personne,  person 

boire,  irreg.,  drink  le  potage,  soup 

car,  for  les  preparatifs,  m.,  preparations 

s'enrhumer,  catch  (take)  cold  le  radis,  radish 

Pentree,  f.,  entree  le  rdti,  roast 

la  fete,  festivity,  holiday  la  salade,  salad 

la  glace,  ice  (cream)  la  sardine,  sardine 

la  grand'mere,  grandmother  servir,  irreg.,  serve 

le  grand-pere,  grandfather  la  sorte,  sort,  kind 

le  hors-d'oeuvre,  side  dish,  relish  t6t,  soon 

Lucie,  Lucy  la  visite,  visit,  call 
d'ici  1£,  from  now  till  then 

A.  Continue:  1.  Je  venais  de  diner  chez  eux,  tu.    2.  Je  dois  m'oc- 
cuper  du  menu.    3.  J'aurais  du  commencer  plus  tot.    4.  Je  devais 
y  aller  mais  je  ne  pouvais  pas,  tu  .  .  .  tu.    5.  J'ai  du  partir  de  bonne 
heure.    6.  Je   devrais   faire   mes   preparatifs,   tu  .  .  .  tes.     7.  Je 
viens  de  leur  parler.    8.  Je  vais  m'occuper  de  cette  affaire.    9.  Je 
suis  venu(e)  le  voir.     10.  Si  je  venais  a  le  voir. 

B.  1.  Nous  venons  de  diner  chez  mon  grand-pere  et  ma  grand' 
mere.     2.  Toute  la  famille  devait  y  etre,  mais  quelques-uns  des 


142  LESSON  LVII  [§  170 

parents  ne  pouvaient  pas  venir.  3.  Mon  pere  s'etait  enrhume  et  a 
du  partir  avant  la  fin.  4.  Avant-hier  ma  tante  Lucie,  a  qui  nous 
devions  line  visite,  a  donne*  une  reception.  5.  Comme  c'est  la  saison 
des  fetes  de  famille,  tous  nos  parents  viendront  diner  chez  nous 
mardi  prochain.  6.  D'ici  la  ma  mere  et  mes  soeurs  vont  avoir  beau- 
coup  a  faire.  7.  Demain  ou  apres-demain  elles  doivent  commencer 
leurs  preparatifs.  8.  Si  on  venait  a  oublier  quelque  chose,  ma  mere 
serait  tres  fachee.  9.  Elles  auraient  du  peut-etre  commencer  plus 
tot,  car  il  va  y  avoir  (to  be)  une  vingtaine  de  personnes  au  diner. 
10.  Ma  mere  doit  s'occuper  du  menu.  11.  Pour  un  bon  diner  on 
devrait  servir  d'abord  un  hors-d'oeuvre  de  radis,  de  sardines  ou  quel- 
que chose  de  la  sorte,  et  puis  un  bon  potage.  12.  Apres  le  potage 
on  devrait  avoir  une  entree,  des  legumes,  un  bon  roti  et  de  la  salade. 
13.  Ensuite  on  devrait  servir  des  glaces,  des  fruits,  des  noix,  et  une 
tasse  de  cafe  noir. 

C.  (Oral  on  B.) 

D.  1.  My  grandfather  and  grandmother  have  just  dined  with 
us.    2.  It  (ce)  was  to  be  a  family  dinner.    3.  The  sons,  daughters 
and  their  children  were  to  be  there.    4.  Some  of  our  relatives  had 
to  refuse  the  invitation.     5.  My  uncle  had  caught  cold  and  was 
obliged  to  stay  at  home.    6.  We  are  all  to  go  to  my  aunt  Lucy's 
reception  the  day  after  to-morrow.     7.  One  should  attend  these 
family  festivities,  you  know.    8.  The  whole  family  is  to  dine  at  my 
aunt's  next  Monday.    9.  She  is  going  to  see  about  the  menu  at  once. 
10.  My  mother  was  to  help  her,  but  she  can't.     11.  She  fell  while 
taking  a  walk.    12.  She  ought  to  have  gone  to  bed  at  once.    13.  You 
ought  to  take  a  little  of  this  salad,  it  is  very  good.    14.  May  I  offer 
you  some  fruit  or  walnuts?     15.  One  shouldn't  drink  too  much 
black  coffee. 

E.  1.  We   have   invited  twenty  people    (personne)   to   dinner. 
2.  We  shall  first  have  radishes  or  sardines  and  then  a  soup.    3.  The 
roast  will  come  after  the  entree.    4.  There  will  be  several  sorts  of 
fruits.    5.  The  ices  and  coffee  will  be  served  at  the  end.    6.  He  ought 
to  come  sooner.     7.  He  ought  to  have  come  sooner.     8.  Here  is  a 
twenty-five  franc  note  which  I  have  just  found.     9.  It  must  be 
yours,    10.  Yes,  it  is  mine,  I  must  have  lost  it  yesterday.    11.  We 


§  171]  LESSON  LVIII  143 

were  to  start  for  the  country  the  day  before  yesterday.  12.  Come 
and  dine  with  us  next  Sunday.  13.  You  owe  us  a  visit.  14.  You 
ought  not  to  have  spoken  of  it.  15.  You  ought  to  begin  your  prep- 
arations at  once.  16.  What  are  we  to  do  now?  The  train  has  gone. 
17.  It  has  just  gone.  18.  It  had  just  gone  when  I  arrived  at  the 
station.  19.  We  shall  have  to  wait  for  another  train. 


LESSON  LVIII 

171.   Dire,  'say,'   'tell';  faire,   'do,'  'make';  mettre,   'put,' 
'  place ' ;  prendre,  '  take ' 

dire  disant  dit  dis  dis 

faire  faisant  fait  fais  fis 

mettre  mettant  mis  mets  mis 

prendre  prenant  pris  prends  pris 

EXERCISE  LVIII 
adieu  or  au  revoir,  good-bye 

A.  (Oral.)    Continue:   1.  Je  mets   (prends,    dis).     2.  Je   disais 
(faisais,  mettais,  prenais).     3.  Je  prendrai  (mettrai,  ferai,  dirai). 
4.  Je  fis  (mis,  pris,  dis).    5.  Je  mettrais  (dirais,  ferais,  prendrais). 
6.  Je  me  suis  mis(e)  a  table.    7.  Je  lui  ai  dit  adieu  (au  revoir). 
8.  Que  je  mette  (dise,  fasse,  prenne).    9.  Que  je  disse  (fisse,  misse, 
prisse).     10.  Prends.    11.  Dis.    12.  Mets.    13.  Fais. 

B.  1.  What  do  you  (will  you,  would  you)  say?   2.  What  have  you 
said  (done,  taken)?    3.  The  others  will  take  (say)  that.    4.  Would 
they  say  (do)  the  same  thing?    5.  I  was  taking  a  walk.    6.  What  was 
he  saying?    7.  He  has  put  [on]  his  overcoat.    8.  Tell  me  what  he 
has  said  (done,  taken).    9.  What  have  you  done?    10.  Take  my 
stick;  don't  take  John's.    11.  We  wish  you  to  say  (do,  take)  what 
you  wish  (fut.).    12.  Do  you  wish  me  to  set  the  table? 

C.  1.  Say  what  you  will  (fut.).    2.  They  have  said  (done,  taken) 
that.    3.  Have  you  put  the  plates  on  the  table?    4.  Saying  that, 
he  went  away.    5.  I  shall  take  some  salad.    6.  They  would  say  the 


144  LESSON'  LIX  [§  172 

same  thing.  7.  They  were  saying  good-bye.  8.  They  wouldn't 
take  any  wine.  9.  Take  my  pen.  10.  Put  the  cups  and  plates  on 
the  table.  11.  Let  us  take  a  walk.  12.  Let  us  tell  them  that. 
13.  I  wished  him  to  tell  me  all  (tout).  14.  I  wished  him  to  take  my 
place. 


LESSON  LIX 

172.  Faire  causatively.  —  1.  This  .verb  +  an  infinitive  cor- 
responds to  a  great  variety  of  expressions  in  English  which  may 
be  explained  by  the  meaning  cause  to  do  or  be  done: 

J'ai  fait  ecrire  les  enfants.  /  have  made  the  children  write. 

II  les  fera  e"couter.  He  will  make  them  listen. 

La  robe  qu'elle  s'est  fait  faire.          The  dress  she  got  made  for  herself. 

(a)  The  past  participle  fait  thus  used  is  invariable. 

2.  A  governed  substantive  follows  the  infinitive,  but  a  gov- 
erned conjunctive  personal  pronoun  goes  with  faire: 

Faites  venir  la  domestique.  Have  the  servant  (get  the  servant  to) 

come. 
Faites-la  venir.  Have  her  come  (send  for  her). 

3.  If  the  infinitive  with  faire   has  a  direct   object,  its  per- 
sonal object  must  be  indirect: 

Je  fis  lire  mon  fils.  /  made  my  son  read. 

Je  fis  lire  ce  livre  a  mon  fils.  I  made  my  son  read  this  book. 

Faites-le-lui  lire.  Make  him  (get  him  to)  read  it. 

(a)  Possible  ambiguity  is  sometimes  avoided  by  par,  e.g.  II  fit  porter 
le  sac  par  le  guide,  He  had  the  sack  carried  by  the  guide. 

(b)  The  infinitive  of  certain  reflexives  (s'asseoir,  se  souvenir,  se  taire, 
etc.)   regularly  omits  se,  e.g.  Faites  asseoir  vos  amis,  Have  your  friends 
sit  down. 

(c)  Laisser,   let,   entendre,   hear,    voir,    see,    sometimes   have   the  same 
construction   as  faire:  Laissez-leur  (or  -les)   faire  cela,  Let  them  do  that; 
J'ai  entendu  dire  cela  a  mon  frere  or  J'ai  entendu  mon  frere  dire  cela,  I 
heard  my  brother  say  that. 


§  172]  LESSON   LIX  145 

EXERCISE  LIX 

blanchir,  whiten,  wash  (linen)  mis,  p.  part,  of  mettre,  dressed 

brosser,  brush  la  mise,  dress,  manner  of  dressing 

le  coiffeur,  barber,  hairdresser  la  negligence,  carelessness 

le  complet,  suit  (of  clothes}  la  pake,  pair 

le  cordonnier,  shoemaker  le  pourboire,  gratuity,  tip 

le  faux  col,  collar  (detachable)  la  proprete,  cleanliness,  neatness, 

le  garcon  coiffeur,  journeyman         tidiness 

barber  respecter,  respect 

les  habits,  m.,  clothes  soigner,  take  care  of  ^ 

Julien,  Julian  soigneusement,  carefully 

le  linge,  linen  le  soulier,  shoe 

la  manchette,  cuff  le  vetement,  sing.,  garment,  suit, 
la  mesure,  measure  pi.  clothes 

faire  payer,  charge;  faire  voir,  show;  laisser  a  desirer,  leave  (something) 

to  be  desired,  not  be  satisfactory;  se  laisser  aller  a,  yield  to,  give  way  to 

A.  Continue:  1.  Je   me  fais   respecter.     2.  Je   ferai  travailler 
les  ouvners.    3.  Je  vais  me  faire  faire  une  robe,  tu  .  .  .  te.    4.  Je 
me  suis  fait  faire  un  complet,  tu  .  .  .  t'.     5.  Je  devrais  me  faire 
couper  les  cheveux,  tu  .  .  .  te.    6.  Je  leur  ai  fait  payer  le  prix.    7.  Je 
me  suis  fait  payer,  tu  .  .  .  t'.    8.  Fais-les  (impve.)  travailler.    9.  Je 
vais  leur  faire  voir  les  beautes  de  la  ville. 

B.  1.  Tout  jeune  homme  devrait  etre  bien  mis.     2.  On  ne  se 
fait  pas  respecter  en  se  laissant  aller  a  la  negligence.     3.  II  faut 
qu'on  fasse  blanchir  soigneusement  son  linge.    4.  Les  faux  cols  et 
les  manchettes  font  voir  tout  de  suite  si  on  aime  la  proprete.   5.  Mon 
frere  Julien  soigne  assez  bien  ses  vetements.    6.  Cependant  sa  mise 
laisse  un  peu  a  desirer,  et  sa  mere  lui  a  dit  d' aller  chez  le  tailleur  se 
faire  faire  un  complet.    7.  Le  tailleur  lui  a  fait  voir  des  etoffes,  et 
puis  il  a  pris  sa  mesure.    8.  Le  tailleur  lui  fera  payer  le  complet 
cent  dix  francs.    9.  Ensuite,  chez  le  cordonnier,  il  s'est  fait  prendre 
mesure  pour  une  paire  de  souliers.     10.  Le  cordonnier  se  la  (or 
les)  fera  payer  vingt  francs.     11.  Entrant  chez  le  coiffeur  il  s'est 
fait  couper  les  cheveux.    12.  II  paie  la  coupe  de  cheveux  dix  sous. 
13.  Apres  s'etre  fait  brosser  ses  habits  il  donne  quatre  sous  de  pour- 
boire au  gargon  coiffeur. 

C.  (Oral  on  B.) 


146  LESSON   LX  [§  173 

D.  1.  That  young  man  is  not  well  dressed.    2.  He  is  going  to 
get  himself  a  suit  made.    3.  He  will  have  his  measure  taken  at  the 
tailor's,    4.  Have  you  had  your  measure  taken?     5.  I  have  had 
(myself)  a  suit  made.     6.  I  didn't  like  the- materials  the  tailor 
showed  me.    7.  He  is  going  to  charge  me  125  francs.    8.  Here  is 
the  pair  of  shoes  which  I  have  had  made  (for  myself).     9.  You 
ought  to  get  your  hair  cut;  it  is  too  long.    10.  I  shall  get  it  cut  to- 
morrow.    11.  After  having  my  clothes  brushed,  I  shall  give  the 
barber  a  tip.    12.  Everybody  should  be  well  dressed.    13.  One  must 
make  oneself  respected  in  this  world.     14.  Get  these  collars  and 
cuffs  washed.    15.  I  have  had  our  linen  washed. 

E.  1.  Take  good  care  of  (soigner  bien)  your  clothes.    2.  Your 
dress  (mise)  is  not  very  satisfactory.    3.  Go  to  the  shoemaker's  to 
get  yourself  a  pair  of  shoes  made.    4.  How  much  am  I  to  pay? 
5.  He  will  charge  you  25  francs,  but  it  (ce)  is  cheap.   6.  I  shall  make 
them  study.    7.  I  shall  make  them  write  their  exercises.    8.  Get  the 
tailor  to  come.     9.  Get  these  collars  washed  carefully.     10.  Your 
cuffs  are  not  clean.    11.  Cleanliness  causes  a  young  man  to  be  re- 
spected.    12.  Show  me  some  (de)  of  your  best  cloths.     13.  How 
much  will  you  charge  me  [for]  the  suit?     14.  This  dress  which  I 
got  (myself)  made  in  Paris  doesn't  fit  me.     15.  I  shall  get  myself 
another  made  as  soon  as  I  arrive  in  New  York. 


LESSON  LX 

173.  Envoy er,  'send';  recevoir,  'receive';  mouvoir,  'move'? 
mourir,  'die' 

envoyer  envoyant  envoye  envoie  envoyai 

recevoir  recevant  regu  regois  regus 

mouvoir  mouvant  mti  (/.  mue)  meus  mus 

mourir  mourant  mort  incurs  mourus 

Like  recevoir:  s'apercevoir  (de),  perceive. 

EXERCISE  LX 

le  cadeau,  present,  gift  la  poste,  post  office 

les  nouvelles,  f.,  news  la  soif,  thirst 

mourir  de  soif,  be  very  thirsty 


§174]  LESSON   LXI  147 

A.  (Oral.)     Continue:  1.  Je  m'en  apergois.     2.  Je  lui  enverrai 
(enverrais)  la  lettre.     3.  Je  recevrai  quelque  chose.     4.  Je  meurs 
(mourais)  de  soif.    5.  Je  recevais  de  bonnes  nouvelles.    6.  II  veut 
que  je  regoive  de  bons  gages.    7.  II  faudra  que  je  meure.    8.  Que 
je  regusse. 

B.  1.  I  send  (shall  send)  my  son  to  school.    2.  He  (you,  they) 
will  receive  a  gift.    3.  What  news  have  you  received?    4.  My  poor 
aunt  died  yesterday.    5.  All  men  will  die.    6.  They  (we)  were  very 
thirsty.     7.  They  (/.)  would  have  died.     8.  Do  you  wish  me  to 
send  the  letters  to  the  post  office?    9.  They  (we,  I)  perceive  (of) 
nothing.    10.  If  he  dies,  his  family  will  have  nothing.    11.  I  wished 
him  to  receive  good  wages. 

C.  1.  They  receive  news  every  day.    2.  Put  the  letters  you  have 
received  into  this  drawer.    3.  My  father  will  send  me  money.    4.  I 
shall  receive  it  soon.    5.  All  men  are  born  and  die.    6.  His  family 
knew  he  was  dying.    7.  They  said  he  would  die.    8.  Many  persons 
have  died.    9.  Napoleon  III  died  in  1873.     10.  I  wish  him  to  re- 
ceive this  letter  to-day.    11.  I  should  like  Mr.  Liard  to  send  me  a 
good  roast. 

LESSON  LXI 

174.  Additional  Verb-Phrases.  —  Observe  the  following: 

faire  savoir,  inform,  let  one  know  entendre  parler  de,  hear  (spoken) 
entendre  dire,  hear  (say  or  said)  of 

aller  chercher,  go  for,  go  and  get  faire  attendre,  keep  (one)  waiting 

envoyer  chercher,  send  for  venir  chercher,  come  for 

venir  prendre,  come  for,  come  and  faire  venir,  send  for 
get 

EXERCISE  LXI 

1'accident,  m.,  accident  Marcel,  Marcellus 

Papres-midi,  f.,  afternoon  le  neveu,  nephew 

aussitot  que,  as  soon  as  la  niece,  niece 

changer,  change  Renee,  Renee  (name,  /.) 

le  courrier,  courier,  post,  mail  retard  (en),  late 

se  demander,  ask  oneself,  wonder  telegraphier,  telegraph 

exact,  exact,  precise  telephoner,  telephone 
j'ai  rec.u  de  ses  nouvelles,  I  have  heard  from  (received  news  of)  him 


148  LESSON  LXI  [§  174 

A.  Continue:  1.  Je  regois  souvent  de  ses  nouvelles.     2.  Je  vais 
le  lui  faire  savoir.    3.  J'en  ai  souvent  entendu  parler.    4.  J'en- 
tends  dire  que  le  train  est  en  retard.    5.  Je  me  demande  si  c'est  vrai. 
6.  Fais-les  (impve.)  attendre.    7.  Je  ferai  venir  une  voiture.    8.  J'en- 
verrai  chercher  mes  neveux,  tu  .  .  .  tes.    9.  Je  suis  venu(e)  les  cher- 
cher.    10.  Je  vais  les  chercher  tout  de  suite. 

B.  1.  J'ai  regu  des  nouvelles  de  mon  neveu  Marcel  il  y  a  quelques 
semaines.    2.  J'ai  regu  encore  de  ses  nouvelles  par  le  courrier  de 
ce  matin.     3.  II  me  fait  savoir  par  sa  lettre,  et  il  me  telegraphic 
aussi,  qu'il  arrivera  avec  ma  ni&ee  Renee  cette  apres-midi.    4.  Mais 
on  entend  tellement  parler  d'accidents!     5.  On  ne  sait  jamais  ce 
qui  peut  arriver.    6.  J'entends  dire  que  leur  train,  celui  de  5  h.  45 
du  soir,  est  presque  tous  les  jours  en  retard.    7.  Je  me  demande 
s'il  va  arriver  a  1'heure  exacte  aujourd'hui.    8.  Je  ne  voudrais  pas 
qu'on  me  fasse  attendre,  car  je  vais  les  chercher  a  la  gare.    9.  J'ai 
entendu  dire  que  Marcel  et  Renee  sont  beaucoup  changes.    10.  Je 
ne  les  reconnaitrai  plus  peut-etre.    11.  Mais  je  telephonerai  a  mon 
mari  de  venir  nous  chercher  a  la  gare.    12.  II  pourra  envoyer  cher- 
cher une  voiture  qui  ira  le  prendre  a  son  bureau.    13.  II  m'aidera  a 
les  reconnaitre.    14.  Aussitot  que  nous  les  aurons  trouves  nous  les 
amenerons  chez  nous  et  nous  ferons  venir  leurs  bagages  plus  tard. 

C.  (Oral.)     1.  Quand  avez-vous  regu  des  nouvelles  de  votre 
neveu  et  de  votre  niece?    2.  Avez-vous  regu  de  leurs  nouvelles 
aujourd'hui?     3.  Quand  vont-ils  arriver?     4.  De  quel  train  parlez- 
vous?    5.  Arrive-t-il  generalement  a  1'heure  exacte?    6.  Qui  allez- 
vous  chercher  a  la  gare?    7.  Votre  niece  est-elle  beaucoup  changee? 
8.  La  reconnaitrez-vous  sans  difficulte?    9.  Qui  doit  envoyer  cher- 
cher une  voiture?     10.  Que  ferez-vous  quand  vous  aurez  trouve* 
votre  niece?    11.  Quand  enverrez-vous  chercher  ses  bagages?  etc. 

D.  1.  We  have  just  received  news  of  my  nephew  and  niece. 
2.  We  don't  often  get  (receive)  news  of  them.    3.  Their  letter  ar- 
rived by  this  morning's  mail.     4.  They  inform  us  that  they  are 
going  to  arrive  this  afternoon.    5.  If  the  train  is  not  late,  they  will 
be  here  at  5.25  P.M.    6.  I  wonder  if  the  train  will  arrive  on  time 
to-day.     7.  I  have  heard  that  it  is  almost  always  late.     8.  My 
husband  and  I  (we)  are  going  to  get  them  at  the  station.    9.  They 
have  telegraphed  us  that  they  will  be  late.    10.  If  they  are  much 


§  175]  LESSON  LXII  149 

changed,  we  shall  not  recognize  them  perhaps.  11.  I  wonder  if 
they  will  recognize  us.  12,  Your  father  has  gone  to  get  a  carriage. 
13.  It  will  come  and  get  us  here.  14.  We  shall  start  as  soon  as  it 
comes.  15.  First  we  shall  bring  my  niece  here,  and  then  we  shall 
send  for  her  baggage. 

E.  1.  Our  friends  heard  from  their  brother  six  weeks  ago.  2.  They 
heard  from  him  again  by  yesterday  evening's  mail.  3.  He  is  going 
to  arrive  by  the  6.00  P.M.  train.  4.  His  sister  will  come  with  him. 
5. .  We  have  heard  of  a  great  many  accidents,  have  we  not?  6.  The 
trains  are  often  late.  7.  We  were  wondering  whether  their  train 
would  be  late.  8.  We  should  not  like  to  be  kept  (use  on)  waiting. 
9.  We  are  going  to  get  our  nephew  and  niece  at  the  station.  10.  We 
have  heard  that  they  are  much  changed.  11.  We  can't  (Jut.)  recog- 
nize them  perhaps.  12.  Let  us  telephone  to  our  father.  13.  He 
will  come  and  get  us.  14.  He  will  send  for  a  carriage.  15.  The 
carriage  will  come  and  get  us. 

LESSON  LXII 

175.  Crozre,  'believe,'  'think';  lire,  'read* 

croire  croyant  cru  crois  cms 

lire  lisant  lu  lis  lus 

Like  lire:  elire,  elect. 

EXERCISE  LXII 
le  journal,  newspaper  lentement,  slowly 

A.  (Oral.)    Continue:  1.  Je  ne  crois  pas  cette  nouvelle.    2.  Je  ne 
lis  (lisais)  pas  bien.    3.  Je  serai  elu.    4.  II  faut  que  je  lise  d'autres 
livres.    5.  Je  lirais  plus  si  j'avais  le  temps,  tu  .  .  .  tu.    6.  Je  ne  croi- 
rais  pas  tout  cela.    7.  Les  journaux  que  j'ai  lus.    8.  Crois-y  (believe 
in  it).    9.  Lis  beaucoup.    10.  II  voulait  que  je  crusse  cette  histoire, 
.  .  .  tu.     11.  Je  lus  la  moitie  du  chapitre. 

B.  1.  Read  more  slowly.     2.  They   (you,   we)   read  too  fast. 
3.  By  reading  we  learn  to  read.    4.  What  do  you  wish  me  (tiiem, 
him)  to  read?     5.  I  (we)  shall  read  those  newspapers.     6.  They 
would  read  better  if  they  read  more  slowly.    7.  Believe  me.    8.  Let 


150  LESSON  LXIII  [§  176 

us  not  believe  them.  9.  Would  you  believe  it?  10.  You  don't 
believe  what  I  say.  11.  We  (I)  shall  never  believe  that  story. 
C.  1.  He  read  (p.  def.)  the  whole  chapter.  2.  They  read  (p.  def.) 
the  half  of  it.  3.  I  wished  him  to  read  good  books.  4.  What 
books  have  you  read?  5.  Charles  used  to  read  badly.  6.  He  reads 
much  better  now.  7.  What  were  you  reading  when  I  came  in? 
8.  I  was  reading  the  newspaper.  9.  I  think  it  is  going  to  rain. 
10.  They  thought  we  were  not  coming.  11.  I  thought  they  would 
be  elected.  12.  You  thought  I  had  gone  away,  didn't  you? 


LESSON  LXIII 

176.  Infinitive  for  Noun  Clause.  —  After  verbs  of  declaring, 
intending,  thinking,  hoping,  the  verb  of  a  that  clause  in  English 
may  often  be  rendered  in  French  by  a  direct  infinitive,  but  only 
when  both  verbs  in  the  sentence  have  the  same  subject: 

Je  croyais  le  voir  passer.  I  thought  (that)  I  saw  him  pass. 

J'avoue  1'avoir  oublie".  /  confess  (that)  I  forgot  it. 

J'espere  reussir.  7  hope  (that)  I  shall  succeed. 

J'ai  cru  devoir  rester.  /  thought  (that)  I  ought  to  stay. 

Je  compte  y  e"tre.  7  expect  (that)  I  shall  be  there. 

But:  Je  crois  qu'il  est  venu.  /  think  (that)  he  has  come. 

(a)  Such  verbs  are:  affirmer,  avouer,  compter,  croire,  declarer,  espe"rer, 

3tC. 

EXERCISE  LXIII 

avouer,  declare,  confess  V election,  f.,  election 

bonjour,  good  morning,  good  day  Pexamen,  m.,  examination 

le  bulletin  (de  vote),  ballot  paper  la  majorite,  majority 

le  candidat,  candidate  municipal,  municipal 

le  citoyen,  citizen  occupe,  busy 

la  commune,  municipality  se  passer,  be  happening,  be  going  on 

compter,  count,  reckon,  purpose,  a  propos  (de),  with  regard  (to),  by 

intend,  expect  the  way 

le  conseiller,  councillor  Purne,  L,  urn,  ballot  box 

deposer,  deposit,  cast  (vote)  le  vote,  voting 

Pelecteur,  m.,  elector  voter,  vote 

&  moins  d'etre,  if  one  (etc.)  is  net;  je  Pespere,  7  hope  so;  etre  refuse, 
fail  (to  pass  an  examination)^  il  compte  etre  recu,  he  expects  to  pass 
(at  an  examination) 


§  176]  LESSON  LXIII  151 

A.  Continue:  1.  J'avoue  1'avoir  oublie*.    2.  Je  comptais  partir 
ce  soir.    3.  J'ai  cru  1'avoir  vu  passer.    4.  Je  crois  pouvoir  passer 
Fexamen.    5.  J'espere  y  reussir  cette  fois.    6.  Je  n'ai  pas  cru  devoir 
voter  pour  M.  Liard.    7.  Je  ne  compte  pas  etre  e*lu.    8.  Je  crois 
qu'il  sera  elu. 

B.  1.  Bonjour,  Raymond,  d'ou  viens-tu?  —  2.  Je  viens  du  vil- 
lage. —  3.  Je  croyais  t'avoir  vu  passer  il  y  a  une  heure.   4.  Qu'est-ce 
qui  se  passe  au  village?  —  5.  C'est  le  jour  des  elections.     6.  On 
e*lit  les   conseillers  municipaux.  —  7.  J'avoue   avoir  oublie   cette 
affaire  importante.     8.  J'etais  si  occupe  a  me  preparer  pour  mes 
'examens.     9.  A  moins  d'etre  bien  prepare*  on  n'y  re*ussit  pas. 
10.  J'y  ai  deja  e*te  refuse.     11.  J'espere  y  etre  regu  la  prochaine 
fois.    12.  Mais  a  propos  des  elections,  est-ce  qu'il  y  a  beaucoup  de 
candidats?  — 13.  Oui,  il  y  en  a  plusieurs;  mon  pere  en  est  un,  et 
il  compte  etre  elu  cette  fois.  —  14.  Je  Tespere  bien.     15.  Est-ce 
que  beaucoup  des  electeurs  ont  vote?  — 16.  Oui,  la  majorite  des 
citoyens  de  la  commune  ont  cru  devoir  deposer  leurs  bulletins 
de  vote  dans  Turne.     17.  Alors  Raymond   dit  "au  revoir"  et 
s'en  va. 

C.  (Oral.)     1.  D'ou  vient  Raymond?    2.  Quand  1'avez-vous  vu 
passer?    3.  Qu'est-ce  qui  se  passait  au  village?    4.  Pourquoi  aviez- 
vous   oublie   les   elections?     5.  Avez-vous   re*ussi   aux   examens? 
6.  Pourquoi?    7.  Combien  de  candidats  y  avait-il  aux  examens? 
8.  Y  ont-ils  reussi  tous?     9.  Avez-vous  deja  vote  aux  elections? 
10.  Croyez-vous  devoir  toujours  voter?     11.  Ou  depose-t-on  son 
bulletin  de  vote?  etc. 

D.  1.  I  saw  many  citizens  going  to  the  village  yesterday  to 
(pour)  vote.    2.  We  thought  we  saw  you  passing  [by].   3.  We  confess 
we  had  forgotten  the  elections.    4.  We  were  preparing  (ourselves) 
for  our  examinations.    5.  If  we  are  not  well  prepared  (see  B,  9),  we 
shall  fail.     6.  My  brother  has  failed  twice.    7.  I  hope  he  will  succeed 
this  time.    8.  He  hopes  he  will  succeed  at  his  examinations.   9.  Does 
your  uncle  expect  that  he  will  be  elected?     10.  He  does.     11.  I 
think  I  can  vote  to-morrow.    12.  I  think  my  uncle  will  have  a  con- 
siderable majority.    13.  How  many  municipal  councillors  are  there 
in  this  municipality? 


152  LESSON  LXIV  •[§  177 

E.  1.  The  thief  confessed  that  he  had  stolen  the  money.  2.  We 
were  very  busy  yesterday.  3.  While  the  electors  were  voting  we 
were  preparing  (ourselves)  for  the  examinations.  4.  Vote  for  Mr. 
Liard  if  you  think  you  ought  to  do  so  (le).  5.  He  expects  to  be 
elected.  6.  I  hope  he  will  be  elected.  7.  I  hope  I  shall  be  able  to 
take  a  trip  next  summer.  8.  I  hope  you  can  (fut.)  go  with  me. 
9.  Where  do  you  expect  to  embark?  10.  I  expect  I  shall  embark 
at  Havre.  11.  With  regard  to  your  examinations,  do  you  expect 
to  pass?  12.  I  do.  13.  I  expected  to  pass  the  last  time,  but  I 
failed.  14.  I  believe  you  will  succeed  this  time.  15.  Let  us  hope 
so  (le). 


LESSON  LXIV 

177.   Boire,  'drink';  coudre,  'sew';  moudre,  'grind'; 
resoudre,  'resolve,'  'solve' 

boire  buvant  bu  bois  bus 

coudre  cousant  cousu  couds  cousis 

moudre  moulant'  moulu  mouds  moulus 

resoudre  resolvant  rSsolu  rSsous  r£solus 


EXERCISE  LXIV 
le  medecin,  doctor  le  verre,  glass 

A.  (Oral.)     Continue:  1.  Je  bois  (j'ai  bu)  du  lait.    2.  Bois  un 
verre  d'eau.    3.  Est-ce  que  je  re*soudrai  les  problemes?    4.  Je<ne 
boirai  (boirais)  pas  de  vin.    5.  Je  buvais  du  the*  ou  du  cafe  au  lait. 
6.  Je  mouds  (moulais)  le  ble*.    7.  Je  coupe  et  couds  bien.    8.  J'ai 
resolu  les  problemes.    9.  Je  bus  un  verre  de  lait.    10.  II  faut  que 
je  couse  la  robe. 

B.  1.  We  (you,  they)  drink  water.    2.  Let  him  drink  a  glass  of 
milk.'    3.  What  were  they  drinking?    4.  He  never  drank  any  wine. 
5.  The  doctor  wished  him  to  drink  a  little  wine.     6.  The  miller 
grinds  (has  ground,  will  grind)  the  wheat.     7.  Let  him  grind  it. 


§  178]  LESSON  LXV  153 

8.  He  (I)  was  grinding  it.    9.  We  (you,  they)  sew  and  cut  well. 

10.  Solve  your  problems.     11.  I  have  solved  mine.     12.  Let  us 
drink  a  cup  of  coffee  and  milk  before  starting. 

C.  1.  I  (we)  shall  not  drink  wine.  2.  It  is  not  necessary  for  us 
to  drink  wine.  3.  I  should  not  drink  wine  if  I  were  not  ill.  4.  If 
you  drank  wine,  you  would  be  ill.  5.  Don't  drink  wine;  don't 
drink  any.  6.  The  dressmaker  sews  (has  sewn,  will  sew)  all  day. 
7.  She  (I)  was  sewing  while  you  were  reading.  8.  Have  the  pupils 
solved  their  problems?  9.  The  problems  that  they  have  solved 
were  not  easy.  10.  The  miller  ground  the  wheat  to  make  flour. 

11.  The  wheat  was  ground  by  the  miller.     12.  The  dressmakers 
sewed  (p.  def.)  the  ladies'  silk  dresses. 


LESSON  LXV 

178.  Use  of  Infinitive.  —  1.  Review  Lesson  XXVI  and  observe 
the  following: 

II  a  fini  par  m'insulter.  He  ended  by  insulting  me  or  He 

finally  insulted  me. 

Je  commencerai  par  apprendre  /  shall  begin  by. learning  (or  /  shall 

ma  legon  de  frangais.  first  learn)  my  French  lesson. 

Je  suis  venu  (pour)  le  consulter.  I  came  (in  order)  to  consult  him. 

II  est  trop  fache  pour  ecouter.  He  is  too  angry  to  listen. 

II  est  assez  riche  pour  voyager.  He  is  rich  enough  to  travel. 

(a)  Par  =  by  usually  only  with  commencer  and  finir,  Ex.  1  and  2. 

(b)  Pour  emphasizes  the  purpose,  with  a  verb  of  motion,  Ex.  3  (cf.  §  170). 

(c)  To  =  pour,  regularly  after  assez  and  trop,  Ex.  4  and  5. 

2.  The  infinitive  often  stands  after  prepositional  phrases,  of 
which  the  last  word  is  de  or  £ : 

Je  me  depe1  che  de  peur  d'etre  en       I  am  hastening  for  fear  of  being  late 

retard.  (for  fear  I  shall,  etc.). 

Agissez  de  fagon  a  reussir.  Act  so  as  to  succeed. 

3.  Observe  the  idiomatic  distinctions  in  the  infinitive  con- 
structions at  the  head  of  the  Exercise  below. 


154  LESSON  LXV  [§  178 

EXERCISE  LXV 

afin  de,  in  order  to  fatigue,  tired 

Palgebre,  f .,  algebra  la  jambe,  leg 

autant,  as  much  latin,  Latin 

boiter,  limp,  be  lame  manquer,  fail,  miss 

la  cause,  cause  ordinairement,  generally 

egal,  equal  precedent,  preceding 

1'exemple,  m.,  example  probablement,  probably 

faillir,  fail  le  vers,  verse,  line  (of  poetry) 

a  cause  de,  because  (on  account)  of;  cela  m'est  egal,  that  is  all  the  same  to 
me,  I  don't  care,  etc.;  aimer  autant,  like  as  well,  just  as  soon;  aimer 
mieux,  like  better  or  prefer  (to  do),  rather  (do) ;  j'ai  fini  de  lire,  /  have 
finished  reading 

j'ai  failli  tomber 

j'sa  pense  tomber  >  I  came  very  near  (was  on  the  point  of)  falling 

j'ai  manque  de  tomber  J 

A.  Continue:  1.  Je  me  suis  d^peche"  afin  de  finir.    2.  Je  suis  trop 
fatigue  pour  finir.    3.  Je  commengai  par  apprendre  les  vers.    4.  J'ai- 
merais  autant  partir  tout  de  suite.    5.  J'aimerais  mieux  rester  a  la 
maison.    6.  Je  n'ai  pas  manque*  le  train.    7.  Je  finirai  par  resoudre 
mes  problemes.    8.  J'ai  fini  de  travailler  pour  ce  soir.    9.  Depeche- 
toi  de  peur  d'arriver  en  retard.    10.  J'ai  pense  (or  failli)  tomber. 

B.  1.  A  notre  ecole  les  classes  commencent  a  neuf  heures.    2.  Afin 
de  pouvoir  preparer  tous  nos  devoirs  nous  en  faisons  une  partie  le 
soir  precedent.    3.  Quelquefois  nous  sommes  trop  fatigues  pour  les 
faire  tous.     4.  Nous  commengons  generalement  par  preparer  la 
legon  de  latin.    5.  J'aimerais  autant  commencer  par  resoudre  nos 
problemes  d'algebre.    6.  Mais  mon  fr£re  aime  mieux,  faire  d'abord 
le  latin.    7.  Tout  cela  m'est  6gal  si  je  prepare  mes  autres  lemons. 
8.  L'autre  jour  par  exemple  nous  n'avons  pas  pu  terminer  nos  pro- 
blemes a  cause  du  latin.    9.  Nous  finissons  ordinairement  par  notre 
legon  d'anglais.    10.  On  finit  de  travailler  chez  nous  a  dix  heures. 
11.  Mon  pere  s'amuse  quelquefois  a  lire  les  journaux  jusqu'a  onze 
heures.     12.  Nous  nous  reveillons  souvent  tard.     13.  Et  de  peur 
d'etre  en  retard  a  1'ecole  nous  nous  depechons.    14.  L'autre  jour 
je  suis  tombe  en  me  depechant  et  j'ai  failli  me  casser  une  jambe. 
15.  Je  boite  encore. 


§  179]  LESSON  LXVI  155 

C.  (Oral  on  B.) 

D.  1.  I  am  too  tired  this  evening  to  do  all  the  lessons.    2.  Let 
us  begin  by  preparing  our  Latin.    3.  On  account  of  my  algebra, 
I  would  rather  not  do  my  Latin.    4.  I  generally  do  my  prob- 
lems first.     5.  But  my  brothers  like  best  to  do  the  easy  lessons 
first.     6.  Let  us  finish  by  learning  something  easy,  for  example, 
our  verses.    7.  I  don't  care,  but  I  would  just  as  soon  learn  them 
first.    8.  I  missed  my  history  lesson  yesterday.    9.  We  must  finish 
working  at  ten.    10.  We  must  go  to  bed  now  for  fear  of  wakening 
too  late.    11.  We  were  very  near  being  late  yesterday,  you  know. 
12.  Yes,  and  I  came  very  near  breaking  my  leg.    13.  I  was  hastening 
in  order  not  to  be  late.    14.  You  see  I  am  limping  yet. 

E.  1.  We  are  too  tired  to  prepare  all  our  exercises  this  evening. 
2.  Has  your  brother  finished  preparing  his?     3.  Yes,  and  he  is 
amusing  himself  now  reading  the  newspaper.    4.  Let  us  hasten  for 
fear  of  being  late.    5.  We  have  hastened  in  order  not  to  be  late  at 
the  station.     6.  My  father  rose  late,  and  (he)  missed  the  train. 
7.  He  had  to  wait  for  the  next  train.    8.  He  came  near  missing 
that  one  too.    9.  Would  you  prefer  to  go  to  the  concert  or  the 
theatre?     10.  It  is  all  the  same  to  us.    11.  As  for  me,  I  would 
rather  see  a  good  play.    12.  We  shall  probably  end  up  by  staying  at 
home.     13.  Most  people  like  best  to  begin  by  doing  something 
easy.     14.  Those  who  work  will  finally  succeed. 


LESSON  LXVI 

179.     Battre,  'beat,'  'thresh';  dormir,  'sleep';  servir, 
'  serve ' ;  nettoyer,  '  clean ' 


battre 

battant 

battu 

bats 

battis 

dormir 

dormant 

dormi 

dors 

dormis 

servir 

servant 

servi 

sers 

servis 

nettoyer 

nettoyant     . 

nettoye* 

nettoie 

nettoyai 

Like  dormir  and  servir:  s'endormir,  go  to  sleep;  se  servir  de,  make  use 
f  use. 


156  LESSON   LXVII  [§  180 

EXERCISE  LXVI 

le  beurre,  butter  le  (la)  malade,  sick  person, 

cruel,  cruel  patient 

mal,  badly  la  nuit,  night 

battre  le  beurre,  churn 

A.  (Oral.)     Continue:  1.  Je  bats  le  ble"  dans  la  grange.    2.  Je 
dors  toujours  bien.     3.  Est-ce  que  je  me  sers  d'un  crayon  bleu? 
4.  Je  n'ai  pas  bien  dormi  cette  (last)  nuit.    5.  Dors  bien.    6.  Je 
dormis  (dormirai)  longtemps.     7.  Bats  le  beurre.     8.  Je  me  suis 
endormi(e)  avant  minuit.    9.  Sers-toi  de  ces  livres-la.    10.  Sers  le 
diner.    11.  Je  nettoie  les  souliers.    12.  Je  nettoierai  la  vaisselle. 

B.  1.  Good  morning,  have  you  slept  well?    2.  Very  well,  thank 
you;  and  you?    3.  Oh,  I  always  sleep  well  now.    4.  I  am  glad  you 
are  sleeping  better.    5.  The  maid  is  churning.    6.  The  harvesters 
are  threshing  the  wheat.    7.  Let  us  thresh  the  wheat.    8.  Serve  the 
lunch,  if  you  please.    9.  Madam,  the  lunch  is  served  (cr  Madam  is 
served).    10.  I  wish  you  to  serve  these  ladies.    11.  They  are  served 
already.     12.  He  was  cleaning  (would  clean)  the  shoes. 

C.  1.  My  father  always  slept  badly.    2.  At  what  time  did  you  go 
to  sleep?    3.  I  went  to  sleep  before  twelve.     4.  I  slept  very  badly 
last  night.     5.  The  children  haven't  gone  to  sleep  yet.     6.  That 
cruel  mother  is  beating  her  child.    7.  George  was  beaten  for  stealing 
apples.    8.  Let  us  make  use  of  these  books.    9.  Use  my  pen  if  you 
wish.    10.  I  have  been  using  it.    11.  The  doctor  wishes  the  patient 
to  sleep.    12.  I  should  like  the  maid  to  clean  the  kitchen.    13.  That 
is  no  use  (use  servir  a). 


LESSON  LXVII 

180.  Government  of  Verbs.  —  1.  An  English  transitive  verb 
is  sometimes  rendered  in  French  by  a  verb  with  de  or  a: 
II  s'approchait  de  la  ville.  He  was  approaching  the  town. 

Je  me  souviens  de  vous.  I  remember  you. 

II  obeit  a  son  pere.  He  obeys  his  father. 

Je  lui  obeirai.  /  shall  obey  him. 


§  180]  LESSON  LXVII  157 

2.  A  French  transitive  verb  sometimes  has  the  force  of  an 
English  verb  +  a  preposition: 

J'attends  le  train.  /  am  waiting  for  the  train. 

3.  De  and  £  are  sometimes  not  translated  literally: 
Cela  depend  de  vous.  That  depends  on  you. 
Pensez  a  votre  devoir.                       Think  of  your  duty. 

4.  Compare  the  French  and  English  constructions: 
Je  paie  le  the.  /  pay  for  the  tea. 

Je  le  paie  a  Fepicier.  /  pay  the  grocer  for  it. 

Je  le  lui  ai  paye.  /  have  paid  him  for  it. 

Je  lui  prends  le  fusil.  /  take  (away)  the  gun  from  him. 

II  demande  du  pain  a  son  pere.        He  asks  his  father  for  bread. 

(a)  Further  examples:  acheter  quelque  chose  a  quelqu'un,  buy  something 
from  somebody;  emprunter  .  .  .  a  .  .  .,  borrow  .  .  .  from  .  .  .;  oter  .  .  .  a  .  .  ., 
take  away  .  .  .  from  .  .  .;  voler  .  .  .  a  .  .  .,  steal  .  .  .  from  .  .  .;  pardonner  . . . 
a  .  .  .,  pardon  somebody  for  .  .  . 

5.  In  many  verbs  the  meaning  varies  with  the  preposition: 
Us  jouent  aux  cartes.  They  play  (at)  cards. 

Elle  joue  du  piano.  She  plays  (on)  the  piano. 

(a)  Further  examples:  penser  a,  think  of,  think  about  (turn  over  in  one's 
mind)',  penser  de,  think  of  (have  an  opinion  about);  servir,  serve;  servir  a, 
serve  as  or  for;  se  servir  de,  make  use  of,  use. 

EXERCISE  LXVII 

ainsi,  thus,  so  pardonner,  pardon 

la  baratte,  churn  le  piano,  piano 

dependre,  depend  poser,  place,  put,  ask  (question) 

employer,  employ  le  pre,  meadow 

Petable,  f.,  stable  (for  cattle)  la  qualite,  quality 

la  faute,  fault  la  question,  question 

former,  form  sage,  wise,  well-behaved,  good  (of 

les  grands-parents,  grandparents         children) 

la  laiterie,  dairy  le  seau,  pail 

marcher,  march,  go,  run  tirer  or  traire,  irreg.,  milk 

Marguerite,  Margaret  Pustensile,  m.,  utensil 

obeir,  obey 

et  ainsi  de  suite,  and  so  forth,  and  so  on;  faire  marcher,  make  or  cause 
to  go,  work  (of  machines) ;  battre  des  mains,  clap  one's  hands 


158  LESSON   LXVII  [§180 

A.  Continue:  1.  J'ob&s  a  mon  pere,  tu  .  .  .  ton.    2.  Je  lui  obe*is. 
3.  Je  lui  prends  son  livre.    4.  Je  me  sers  d'encre  noire.    5.  Je  m'en 
sers.     6.  J'emploie  de  1'encre  noire.     7.  Je  m'approche  du  feu. 
8.  Je  lui  demande  de  1'argent.    9.  Je  m'apergois  de  cela.     10.  Je 
m'en  suis  apergu(e).     11.  Je  pensais  a  elles.    12.  Je  ne  m'en  suis 
pas  servi.    13.  Je  n'y  ai  pas  pense". 

B.  1.  Paul  et  Marguerite  sont  chez  leurs  grands-parents  a  la  cam- 
pagne.    2.  Us  sont  sages  et  ob&ssent  a  leur  grand'mere.    3.  Elle  leur 
pardonne  facilement  leurs  petites  fautes.     4.  Us  s'amusent  beau- 
coup  a  la  regarder  travailler  et  1'aident  aussi.    5.  Quelquefois  elle 
leur  dit  d'aller  au  pre"  chercher  les  vaches.    6.  Us  amenent  les  vaches 
a  ratable  et  grand'mere  les  tire.    7.  Grand-pere  lui  prend  les  seaux 
pleins  de  lait  et  les  emporte  a  la  laiterie.    8.  Deux  fois  par  semaine 
on  fait  du  beurre.    9.  On  se  sert  d'une  baratte  pour  battre  le  beurre. 

10.  On  nettoie  soigneusement  la  baratte,  car  la  qualite  du  beurre 
depend  beaucoup   de  la  proprete*   des  ustensiles  qu'on  emploie. 

11.  Grand-pere  fait  marcher  la  baratte  et  les  enfants  s'approchent 
de  lui  pour  voir.    12.  Us  lui  posent  (or  font)  beaucoup  de  questions. 

13.  Us  lui  demandent:  "Grand-pere,  tu  ne  dis  rien;  a  quoi  penses-tu? 

14.  Combien  le  marchand  te  paie-t-il  le  beurre?    15.  Combien  as-tu 
paye*  la  baratte? "    16.  Et  ainsi  de  suite.    17.  Bientot  on  s'apergoit 
que  le  beurre  se  forme  et  les  enfants  battent  des  mains. 

C.  (Oral.)     1.  Ou  e"taient  les  deux  enfants?    2.  Comment  s'ap- 
pellent-ils?    3.  A  qui  obe*issaient-ils?    4.  Que  leur  pardonnait-elle? 
5.  A  quoi  s'amusaient-ils?     6.  Qu'est-ce  que  la  grand'mere  leur 
disait  quelquefois?    7.  Qui  tirait  les  vaches?    8.  A  qui  le  grand-pere 
prenait-il  les  seaux?    9.  De  quoi  se  servait-on  pour  faire  le  beurre? 
10.  A  quoi  sert  la  baratte?     11.  Qui  faisait  marcher  la  baratte? 

12.  Dites-moi  les  questions  que  les  enfants  posaient  a  leur  grand- 
pere.    13.  Pourquoi  battaient-ils  des  mains?  etc. 

D.  1.  Children  be  good;  obey  your  parents.    2.  Obey  them  al- 
ways.   3.  These  children  go  to  the  meadow  for  the  cows.    4.  They 
have  brought  them  to  the  stable.    5.  Grandmother  will  milk  the 
cows.    6.  Grandfather  will  take  from  her  the  pails  of  milk.    7.  I 
work  the  churn  in  the  dairy.    8.  Clean  the  churn.   9.  The  quality  of 
the  butter  will  depend  on  cleanliness.    10.  The  dairy  and  the  uten- 


§  181]  LESSON  LXVIII  159 

sils  must  be  clean.    11.  We  ask  our  grandparents  many  questions. 

12.  What  are  you  thinking  of?    13.  I  am  not  thinking  about  any- 
thing.    14.  How  much  did  the  dealer  pay  you  for  the  butter? 
15.  The  butter  has  come.    16.  We  clapped  our  hands  because  the 
work  was  finished.    17.  What  use  is  a  churn? 

E.  1.  Did  you  perceive  that  he  didn't  obey  his  father?  2.  I 
didn't  perceive  it.  3.  What  do  you  think  of  this  book?  4.  Use  my 
pen,  yours  is  bad.  5.  I  shall  use  it  with  pleasure.  6.  He  took  the 
pail  from  me.  7.  I  took  the  pail  from  him.  8.  Think  of  your  lessons. 
9.  We  were  thinking  of  them.  10.  Pay  the  tailor  for  your  clothes. 
11.  I  have  paid  him  for  them.  12.  Ask  your  friend  for  some  money. 

13.  I  have  borrowed  some  from  him  already.    14.  My  little  brothers 
are  playing  marbles.     15.  Can  your  sister  play  the  piano?    16.  It 
is  very  cold;  draw  near  the  fire.     17.  Pardon  me  for  this  fault. 
18.  Twice  two  make  four,  twice  three  make  six,  and  so  forth. 


LESSON  LXVIII 

181.  Partir.  *  set  out,'  etc.;  sentir,  'feel/  'smell,'  etc.; 
suivre,  'follow* 

partir  partant  parti  pars  partis 

sentir  sentant  senti  sens  sentis 

suivre  suivant  suivi  suis  suivis 

Like  partir:  sortir,  go  out. 

EXERCISE  LXVIII 

le  chien,  dog  le  maitre,  master 

le  facteur,  porter  se  sentir,  feel  (of  health) 

le  froid,  cold  sortir,  tr.,  take  (get)  out 

A.  (Oral.)  Continue:  1.  Je  ne  sens  (sentais)  pas  le  froid.  2.  Je 
pars  (partirai)  de  grand  matin.  3.  Je  partis  sans  dire  adieu.  4.  Pars 
avant  midi.  5.  Sens  ces  fleurs.  6.  Sors  d'ici.  7.  Je  suis  mon 
maitre,  tu  .  .  .  ton.  8.  Je  les  ai  suivis.  9.  Je  suivais  .le  colonel. 
10.  Que  je  suivisse  (partisse,  sentisse). 


160  LESSON   LXIX  [§  182 

B.  1.  She  is  leaving  (has  left)  for  France.    2.  My  sisters  set  out 
yesterday.    3.  He  is  going  out  to  take  a  walk.    4.  Let  him  not  go 
out  now.    5.  Let  him  stay  at  home  if  he  doesn't  feel  well.    6.  Do 
you  feel  the  cold?    7.  They  didn't  feel  the  cold.    8.  These  flowers 
smell  sweet  (bori).    9.  The  dog  follows  his  master.    10.  He  was  fol- 
lowed by  his  dog.    11.  Let  him  follow  us.    12.  Don't  follow  me. 
13.  Let  us  not  go  out  this  morning.     14.  Let  the  others  go  out 
if  they  wish. 

C.  1.  They  (/.)  have  gone  out.    2.  Let  us  go  out  [for]  a  little. 
3.  Don't  go  away  without  saying  good-bye.    4.  Go  away  from  here 
at  once.     5.  If  I  were  to  follow  him  he  would  be  angry.     6.  We 
followed  (p.  def.)  our  parents.    7.  The  parents  were  followed  by  their 
children.    8.  They  will  not  feel  well  to-morrow.    9.  They  felt  well. 
10.  Don't  you  feel  well?    11.  Let  the  porter  get  out  our  luggage. 
12.  Porter,  please  get  out  our  luggage.     13.  When  you  have  got 
it  out,  bring  it  to  the  carriage. 


LESSON  LXIX 

182.  C'est  and  il  est.  —  Observe  the  following  typical  sen- 
tences: 

C'est  facile  (clair,  bien).  It  (that)  is  easy  (clear,  well). 

C'est  a  desirer.  It  (that)  is  to  be  desired. 

C'est  facile  a  faire.  It  (that)  is  easy  to  do. 

^ll  est  facile  de  parler.  It  is  easy  to  talk. 

II  est  clair  que  j'ai  raison.  It  is  clear  that  I  am  right. 
H  est  a  desirer  que  la  guerre  finisse     It  is  to  be  desired  that  the  war 
bientot.  should  soon  end. 

(a)  In  Ex.  1,  2  and  3,  ce  =  it  or  that,  is  the  real  subject. 

(b)  But  when  the  real  subject  follows  etre  in  such  constructions  it  is  ex- 
pressed by  de  +  infinitive,  as  in  Ex.  4,  or  by  a  que  clause,  Ex.  5  and  6,  and 
il  =  it  regularly  stands  as  anticipatory  subject. 

NOTE.  —  Colloquially,  c'est  is  somewhat  freely  used  for  il  est,  e.g.  C'est 
clair  que  j'ai  raison,  and  is  always  found  in  certain  phrases,  e.g.  c'est  dom- 
mage,  c'est  pitie,  etc. 


§  183]  LESSON  LXIX  l61 

183.  Ce  and  i7(s),  elle(s\  etc.  —  Care  must  be  taken  to  dis- 
tinguish constructions  of  the  following  types: 

Elle  est  Frangaise.  She  is  French  (a  Frenchwoman). 

Ils  sont  Allemands.  They  are  German  (Germans). 

Sa  femme  est  couturiere.  His  wife  is  a  dressmaker. 

C'est  une  Frangaise.  She  is  a  Frenchwoman. 

C'est  une  couturiere.  She  is  a  dressmaker. 

Ce  sont  des  Allemands.  They  are  Germans. 

Quel  Frangais  est-ce?  What  Frenchman  is  it? 

(a)  Observe  in  Ex.  1,  2  and  3  that  the  noun  of  nationality,  calling  or 
description  omits  the  article;  in  such  case  a  personal  subject  must  precede 
€tre. 

(b)  But  if  the  predicate  noun,  as  in  Ex.  4,  5,  6  and  7,  has  un,  des  or  any 
other  determinative  (definite  article,  partitive,  possessive  adjective,  demon- 
strative, interrogative  adjective),  it  becomes  the  real  subject,  and  ce  precedes 
etre  (cf.  §§  35,  80). 

EXERCISE  LXIX 

agreable,  agreeable,  pleasant  la  medecine,  medicine 

brave,  brave,  worthy  nombreux,  numerous 

la  clientele,  customers,  practice  normand,  Norman 

consequent  (par),  consequently  la  Normandie,  Normandy 

le  dommage,  damage,  pity  observer,  observe 

se    fournir,    buy    or    get    one's  la  reputation,  reputation 

provisions  (supplies,  etc.)  le  rez-de-chaussee,  ground  floor 

heureux,  happy,  fortunate  superieur,  superior,  upper 

c'est  pourquoi,  that  is  why;  faire  de  bonnes  affaires,  do  a  good  business 
(trade) ;  a  partir  de  deux  heures,  beginning  at  two  o'clock;  c'est  dom- 
mage que  (+  subjunctive),  it  is  a  pity  that 

A.  Complete  by  supplying  ce  or  il  and  the  correct  preposition: 
1.  ...  est  difficile  .  .  .  faire.    2.  ...  sera  difficile  .  .  .  faire  cela. 
3.  ...  est  a  desirer  qu'il  parte  bientot.    4.  ...  facile  .  .  .  apprendre. 
5.  ...  est  clair  que  la  legon  est  difficile.    6.  ...  est  interessant  de 
voyager.    7.  ...  serait  mieux  .  .  .  ne  rien  dire.    8.  ...  serait  mieux. 
9.  ...  est  tres  bon;  j'aime  cela. 

B.  Complete   by  supplying  c'est,   ce   sont,   il   (elle)    est,   ils 
(elles)  sont,  as  required:  1.  ...  des  Anglaises.    2.  ...  cordonniers. 
3.  ...  une  Franchise.     4.  ...  Americains.     5.  ...  couturieres. 


162  LESSON  LXIX  [§  183 

6.  ...  m£decin.    7.  .  .  .  un  medecin  habile.    8.  ...  des  Normands. 
9.  ...  une  vieille  Normande. 

C.  1.  II  est  tres  interessant  d'observer  les  nombreux  voisins  que 
nous  avons  dans  cette  maison.     2.  Au  rez-de-chaussee  il  y  a  un 
epicier.    3.  C'est  chez  lui  que  nous  nous  fournissons  souvent.    4.  II 
est  Normand,  et  vend  de  bon  beurre  et  de  bon  fromage  qui  lui 
viennent  de  Normandie.     5.  C'est  un  tres  brave  homme.     6.  C^st 
pourquoi  il  a  tant  de  clients,    7.  II  est  facile  de  faire  de  bonnesx 
affaires  si  on  a  une  bonne  reputation.    8.  C'est  facile  a  expliquer. 
9.  Notre  voisin  du  premier  (e*tage)   est  medecin.     10.  C'est  un 
homme  tres  agreable.    11.  II  a  une  clientele  importante.    12.  C'est 
aujourd'hui  mercredi  et  il  va  recevoir  beaucoup  de  malades.    13.  II 
n'est  que  neuf  heures,  mais  on  commence  deja  a  arriver.    14.  C'est 
jeudi  qu'il  fait  son  cours  a  Fecole  de  medecine.    15.  Par  consequent 
il  ne  recevra  demain  qu'a  partir  de  deux  heures.    16.  II  est  heureu^f 
que  nous  ayons  deux  si  bons  voisins.    17.  C'est  dommage  que  nous 
en  ayons  de  moins  bons  aux  etages  superieurs. 

D.  (Oral.)    1.  Qui  est  votre  voisin  du  rez-de-chausse*e?    2.  Est-il 
Frangais?     3.  Qu'est-ce  qu'il  vend?    4.  Est-ce  un  brave  homme? 
5.  Pourquoi  a-t-il  une  bonne  clientele?    6.  Est-il  facile  d'avoir  beau- 
coup  de  clients?    7.  Qui  est  votre  voisin  du  premier?    8.  Est-ce  un 
bon  medecin?    9.  Quel  jour  de  la  semaine  est-ce?    10.  Quelle  heure 
est-il?    11.  Quand  est-ce  que  votre  voisin  fait  son  cours?    12.  Quand 
regoit-il  ses  malades?  etc. 

E.  1.  It  is  pleasant  to  have  good  neighbours.    2.  Our  neighbour 
on  (of)  the  ground  floor  is  a  Norman.    3.  He  is  a  grocer.    4.  His 
wife  is  a  Norman  also.    5.  They  are  very  worthy  people.    6.  Is  it 
at  his  shop  that  you  get  your  provisions?    7.  Why  is  it  that  he  has 
so  many  customers?    8.  It  is  because  he  has  a  fgood  reputation. 
9.  It  is  easy  to  have  plenty  (beaucoup)  of  customers  if  one  sells 
cheap.    10.  That  is  very  true.    11.  Who  is  it  who  has  just  come  in? 
12.  It  is  our  neighbour  of  the  first  flat.    13.  He  is  a  clever  doctor 
who  has  a  large  practice.    14.  It  is  to-day  that  he  sees  (receives) 
his  patients.    15.  It  is  a  pity  that  there  are  so  many  sick  people  this 
winter.    16.  It  is  fortunate  that  you  have  such  (de  si)  good  neigh- 
bours. 


§  184]  LESSON   LXX  163 

F.  1.  That  gentleman  is  one  of  our  numerous  neighbours.  2.  His 
wife  is  French.  3.  Are  you  an  American,  madam?  4.  No,  sir,  I 
am  an  Englishwoman.  5.  It  is  interesting  to  study  medicine.  6.  It 
is  difficult  to  learn  French.  7.  It  is  easier  to  read  it  than  to  write  it. 
8.  It  is  a  very  difficult  language.  9.  Should  we  not  start  now? 
10.  I  don't  know;  it  is  a  pity  we  didn't  start  yesterday.  11.  That 
is  true;  it  is  raining  so  much  to-day.  12.  There  is  the  lady  who  lives 
in  one  of  the  upper  stories.  13.  Yes,  it  is  she.  14.  It  is  easy  to 
see  that  she  is  not  a  Frenchwoman.  15.  What  day  is  it  to-day? 
16.  What  time  is  it? 

LESSON  LXX 
184.  Traduire,  'translate';  construire,  'construct,'  'build' 

traduire          traduisant          traduit          traduis          traduisis 
construire       construisant       construit       construis       construisis 
Like  construire:  instruire,  instruct,  educate. 

EXERCISE  LXX 
le  poeme,  poem  le  poete,  poet 

A.  (Oral.)     Continue:  1.  Je  traduis  (traduisais)  de  F  anglais  en 
frangais.     2.  Je  construisais  (construis)  une  maison.    3.  Les  mor- 
ceaux  que  j'ai  traduits.    4.  Les  maisons  que  j'ai  construites.    5.  Tra- 
duis ces  vers  en  frangais.    6.  Ne  les  traduis  pas  en  anglais.    7.  Je 
traduisis  un  gros  livre.  *8.  Le  maitre  voudrait  que  je  traduise  beau- 
coup,  .  .  .  tu.    9.  J'instruisis  mes  neveux. 

B.  1.  We  learn  much  by  translating.    2.  I  wish  you  to  translate 
this  poem.     3.  Let  us  translate  our  exercises.     4.  Which  verses 
have  you  translated?    5.  Architects  build  houses.    6.  What  houses 
has  this  architect  built?    7.  He  (they)  built  (p.  def.)  many  houses  in 
this  city.  8.  The  children  whom  I  was  instructing  have  learnt  much. 

C.  1.  The  master  has  wished  John  to  translate  a  piece  of  Latin. 
2.  What  pieces  have  you  translated?     3.  That  poet  translated 
(p.  def.)  many  poems  into  English.    4.  Translate  these  verses  for 
me.    5.  Mr.  Potin  was  building  a  fine  castle  in  Normandy.    6.  We 
were  building  fine  houses.    7.  Let  him  translate  this  French  poem. 
8.  They  (m.)  are  well  educated.    9.  She  is  a  very  [well]  educated  lady. 


164  LESSON   LXXI  [§  185 

LESSON  LXXI 

185.  Impersonal  Verbs.  —  1.  Review  §  114. 

2.  Many  verbs  may  stand  in  the  third  person  singular  with 
impersonal  il  anticipating  a  real  subject,  singular  or  plural,  fol- 
lowing the  verb : 

n  etait  tombe  de  la  neige.  Some  snow  had  fallen. 

H  en  reste  trois  livres.  There  remain  three  pounds  of  it. 

n  est  arrive  des  lettres.  Some  letters  have  arrived. 

H  est  arrive  des  accidents.  Some  accidents  have  happened. 

(a)  Observe  that  the  past  participle  is  invariable. 

3.  n  est  (e"tait,  etc.)  may  be  used  for  il  y  a: 

H  est  des  hommes  qui  le  croient.      There  are  some  men  who  believe  it. 

4.  Y  avoir  is  often  used  to  form  expressions  of  time  reckoned 
backwards,  or  of  distance: 

II  y  a  trois  ans  (de  cela).  Three  years  ago. 

Combien  y  a-t-il  d'ici  a  Paris?         How  far  is  it  to  Paris? 

5.  Observe  the  following: 

De  quoi  s'agit-il?  What  is  the  matter?  etc. 

II  s'agit  de  1'acheter.  It  is  a  question  of  buying  it. 

II  se  peut  qu'il  vienne.  It  may  be  that  he  will  come. 

EXERCISE  LXXI 

s'agir  de,  be  a  question  of  1'hdpital,  m.,  hospital 
Vaide-macon,  m.,  mason's  helper,     les  materiaux,  m.,  materials) 

hodman  outre,  in  addition  to 

la  chute,  fall  parmi,  among 

la  construction,  building  la  pierre,  stone 

se  detacher,  get  loose  la  pluie,  rain 

Pechafaudage,  m.,  scaffolding  reparer,  repair 

s'en  falloir,  be  near  la  tete,  head 

glissant,  slippery  le  toit,  roof 

grave,  serious  se  tuer,  kill  oneself,  be  killed 

guerir,  get  well,  recover  la  tuile,  tile 
heureusement,  fortunately 

se  faire,  take  place;  faire  glissant,  be  slippery;  se  faire  mal,  hurt  oneself^ 

get  hurt;  peu  s'en  est  fallu  .  .  .  ne,  came  very  near,  almost  happened 


§  185]  LESSON   LXXI  165 

A.  Continue:  1.  Je  me  suis  fait  mal,  tu  t'.    2.  Peu  s'en  est  fallu 
que  je  ne  fisse  cela,  ...  tu  ...    3.  Je  m'en  suis  detache(e),  tu  t'. 

4.  J'ai  failli  tomber. 

B.  Supply  the  proper  past  indefinite  forms:  1.  II (tomber) 

de  la  pluie.    2.  La  pluie (tomber).    3.  II (arriver) 

des  lettres.    4.  Des  lettres (arriver).    5.  II  s' (de- 
tacher) une  tuile.    6.  Une  tuile  s' (detacher). 

C.  1.  On  a  construit  cette  maison  il  y  a  trois  ans.    2.  II  est  ar- 
rive un    certain   nombre    d'accidents    pendant    la    construction. 
3.  II  s'est  fait  plusieurs  chutes  parmi  les  ouvriers.    4.  Un  jour  il 
e*tait  tombe*  de  la  neige  et  Fechafaudage  e*tait  glissant.    5.  A  cause 
de  cela  deux  aides-magons,  qui  apportaient  des  materiaux  aux 
magons,  sont  tombes.     6.  Heureusement  ils  ne  se  sont  pas  fait 
beaucoup  de  mal.    7.  Un  autre  jour  il  a  fallu  qu'un  ouvrier  montat 
sur  le  toit.    8.  II  s'agissait  d'une  tuile  qui  s'etait  detachee.    9.  Mais 
il  etait  tombe  de  la  neige  et  en  reparant  la  tuile  F  ouvrier  est  tombe. 
10.  Peu  s'en  est  fallu  qu'il  ne  se  tuat.    11.  II  lui  a  fallu  deux  mois 
d'hopital  pour  gu£rir.    12.  Une  autre  fois  un  ouvrier  a  regu  sur  la 
tete  une  tuile  qui  tombait.    13.  II  a  failli  en  mourir.    14.  Outre  ces 
trois  cas  il  n'y  a  pas  eu  d'accidents  graves. 

D.  1.  This  house  was  built  (use  on)  five  years  ago.    2.  Many 
accidents  happened  (there  happened,  etc.).     3.  Several  falls  oc- 
curred.   4.  Many  masons  fell  who  were  working  on  the  scaffolding. 

5.  Some  of  the  masons  hurt  themselves  [very]  much.    6.  One  day 
a  workman  was  to  repair  the  roof.    7.  What  was  the  trouble  (use 
s'agir)?   8.  It  was  a  matter  of  a  tile  which  had  fallen.    9.  Snow  had 
fallen  and  it  was  slippery.     10.  He  fell  and  he  had  to  stay  three 
months  in  the  hospital.    11.  It  may  be  that  he  will  stay  there  four 
months.     12.  Another  workman  got  hurt  also.     13.  A  stone  fell 
(see  C,  12)  on  his  head. 

E.  1.  Fortunately  not  many  serious  accidents  happened  among 
the  workmen.    2.  Several  tiles  had  become  loose.    3.  In  repairing 
them  a  workman  fell,  and  came  near  being  killed.    4.  It  had  rained. 
5.  Much  rain  had  fallen  that  summer.    6.  There  were  several  acci- 
dents but  no  one  was  killed.    7.  Amongst  the  workmen  two  hodmen 
hurt  themselves.    8.  They  recovered,  but  they  had  to  stay  a  month 


166  LESSON  LXXII                                  [§  186 

in  the  hospital.  9.  The  building  of  that  castle  lasted  ten  years. 

10.  In  addition  to  the  masons,  there  were  painters  and  other 
workmen. 


LESSON  LXXII 

186.  Cuire,  'cook,'  'bake,'  etc.;  courir,  'run'; 

valoir,  'be  worth' 

cuire  cuisant  cuit  cuis  cuisis 

courir  courant  couru  cours  courus 

valoir  valant  valu  vaux  valus 

EXERCISE  LXXII 

cuire  (or  faire  cuire),  cook  (tr.);  cuire,  cook  (intr.);  valoir  la  peine,  be 
worth  while;  valoir  mieux,  be  better 

A.  (Oral.)    Continue:  1.  Je  fais  cuire  la  viande.    2.  Je  cuis  du 
pain.     3.  Je  cuirai  des   poissons.     4.  Cours  vite.     5.  J'ai   couru. 
6.  Je  vaux  (valais,  valus,  vaudrai)  autant  que  lui.     7.  Je  cours 
(courais,  courrai)  en  toute  hate.    8.  Que  je  vaille  (valusse).    9.  II 
faut  que  je  cuise  les  legumes.    10.  II  fallait  que  je  courusse. 

B.  1.  He  was  running.    2.  We  were  cooking.     3.  If  they  had 
fish,  they  would  cook  them.    4.  The  horse  ran  fast.    5.  That  cow 
will  be  worth  five  hundred  francs.    6.  That  is  no  good  ( =  is  worth 
nothing).    7.  He  wishes  us  to  run.    8.  Bake  the  bread.    9.  That 
was  better.    10.  They  will  (would)  run.    11.  He  wished  me  to  cook 
the  vegetables.    12.  They  have  not  run.    13.  The  blackboard  was 
no  good. 

(7.  1.  The  horses  will  run.  2.  That  is  not  worth  while.  3.  If 
you  had  baked  the  bread,  it  would  be  worth  five  cents  a  pound. 
4.  He  wishes  us  not  to  run.  5.  Do  not  run  so  fast.  6.  It  would 
be  better  [to]  go  slowly.  7.  The  baker  has  baked  the  bread.  8.  That 
bread  will  not  be  worth  six  cents  a  pound.  9.  I  am  sorry  that  that 
is  worth  nothing.  10.  You  must  cook  the  meat.  11.  This  meat  is 
not  well  cooked.  12.  We  did  not  wish  them  to  run  fast.  13.  We 
were  running.  14.  The  vegetables  were  cooking. 


§  190]  LESSON  LXXIII  167 

LESSON  LXXIII 

[In  §§  187-191  are  explained  some  uses  of  tenses  and  moods  not  dealt 
with  in  the  more  elementary  lessons.] 

187.  Present  Indicative.  —  1.  Observe  its  use  with  depuis, 
since:  depuis  quand?  since  when?  il  y  a  .  .  .  que,  voici  (voila)  .  .  . 
que,  to  denote  how  long  an  action  has  been  continuing : 

Depuis  quand  etes-vous  ici?  How  long  have  you  been  here? 

Je  suis  ici  depuis  dix  jours.  /  have  been  here  for  ten  days  (past). 

II  y  a  (or  voici,  voila)  deux  mois  /  have  been  expecting  a  letter  fof, 
que  j 'attends  une  lettre.  two  months. 

2.  But  if  the  action  is  denoted  as  being  entirely  past,  a  past 
tense  must  be  used: 

Combien  de  temps  a-t-il  attendu?  How  long  did  he  wait? 
II  a  attendu  (pendant)  dix  jours.  He  waited  for  ten  days, 
(a)  Pendant  emphasizes  the  duration  of  the  time. 

3.  Observe: 

C'est  la  que  je  Pai  vu.  It  was  (is)  there  that  I  saw  him. 

188.  Imperfect  Indicative.  —  Observe  its  use  to  denote  what 
had  been  continuing  (cf .  §  187) : 

Depuis  quand  etiez-vous  la?  How  long  had  you  been  there? 

(a)  The  imperfect  stands  occasionally  for  the  conditional  anterior  in  a 
result  clause,  e.g.  Si  je  ne  1'avais  pas  saisi,  il  tombait  du  train,  If  I  hadn't 
seized  him,  he  would  have  fallen  from  the  train. 

189.  Future.  —  This  tense,  as  also  the  future  anterior,  some- 
times denotes  probability,  possibility,  supposition,  or  the  like: 

Ce  seront  nos  amis  qui  viennent       Those  are  (I  suppose,   no  doubt) 
d'arriver.  our  friends  who  have  just  come. 

Je  me  serai  trompe.  7  must  have  made  a  mistake. 

190.  Conditional.  —  1.  It  is  used  in  deferential  statement  or 
request: 

Je  le  croirais  du  moins.  7  should  think  so  at  lea*st. 

Auriez-vous  la  bonte  de  rester?        Would  you  kindly  stay? 

2.  It  sometimes  denotes  probability,  etc.  (cf.  §  189): 
Serait-il  vrai?  Can  (could)  it  be  true? 


168  LESSON  LXXIII  [§  191 

3.  It  sometimes  denotes  concession  ( =  even,  even  if,  though), 
after  quand,  quand  meme,  or  with  que : 

Quand  (meme)  il  me  tuerait.  Even  if  he  should  kill  me. 

II  me  le  dirait  que  je  ne  le  croirais     Even  though  he  told  me  so,  I  should 
pas.  not  believe  it. 

4.  It  may  denote  implied  futurity  (cf.  §  76) : 

Je  prendrais  ce  qui  resterait.  /  should  take  what  remained. 

5.  It  is  sometimes  used  in  giving  the  substance  of  hearsay 
information,  or  the  like: 

A  ce  qu'on  dit  le  roi  serait  malade.    By  what  they  say  the  king  is  ill. 

191.  Infinitive.  —  Observe  its  exceptional  uses:  — 

1.  In  brief  phrases  with  imperative  force: 
S'adresser  a  cote*.  Apply  next  door. 
Repondre  aux  questions  suivantes.   Answer  the  following  questions. 

2.  With  de  =  a  finite  verb  (historical  infinitive) : 

Et  Pennemi  de  s'enfuir.  And  the  enemy  fled  (or  flees). 

EXERCISE  LXXHI 

Parrivee,  f .,  arrival  la  pate,  paste,  dough 

la  cuisson,  cooking,  baking  le  petrin,  kneading  trough 

le  four,  oven  petrir,  knead 

impatiemment,  impatiently  Pierre,  Peter 

le  lendemain,  day  after,  next  day     rassis,  stale  (of  bread) 

le  levain,  yeast  la  servante,  servant 

lever,  rise  la  tartine,  slice 

oser,  dare  la  veille,  evening  before 

le  pain  de  menage,  homemade  bread;  une  tartine  de  beurre,  a  slice  oj 
bread  and  butter;  etre  en  visite,  be  on  a  visit;  etre  dans  la  joie,  be  in 
(great)  glee;  cela  ne  fait  rien,  that  makes  no  difference,  doesn't  matter; 
au  moins,  at  least;  mais  si,  yes  (it  does,  yes,  yes,  etc.) 

A.  Continue:  1.  J'attends  depuis  dix  jours.  2.  J'y  £tais  depuis 
trois  semaines.  3.  II  y  a  (voici  or  voila)  un  mois  que  j'attsnds  une 
lettre.  4.  J'ai  travaille  pendant  toute  la  soiree.  5.  C'est  a  Londres 
que  je  Pai  vu  pour  la  premiere  fois, . . .  tu.  6.  Je  me  serai  tromp£(e), 
peut-etre.  7.  Je  ne  saurais  le  croire. 


§191]  LESSON  LXXIII  169 

B.  (Pain  de  menage)    1.  Pierre  et  Jacqueline  sont  en  visite  chez 
tante  Julie  depuis  quelques  jours.    2.  Depuis  le  moment  de  leur 
arrive*e  ils  sont  dans  la  joie.    3.  Le  lendemain  de  leur  arrivee  ils  ont 
vu  faire  du  beurre.    4.  Un  jour  ils  ont  assiste*  a  la  cuisson  du  pain. 
5.  Ils  attendaient  impatiemment  depuis  la  veille.    6.  Le  moment 
arriva.    7.  La  vieille  servante  Celestine  avait  mis  la  farine  et  le 
levain  dans  le  petrin.     8.  La  pate  commengait  a  lever.     9.  Les 
enfants  voulaient  tout  voir.    10.  "  Laissez-nous  approcher;  nous  n'y 
toucherons  pas.  — 11.  Mais  non,  mes  enfants.     12.  Quand  meme 
vous  n'y  toucheriez  pas  je  n'oserais  pas  vous  laisser  approcher.  — 
13.  Je  crois,  dit  Pierre,   que  cela  ne  ferait  rien.  — 14.  Mais  sir 
mon  petit  homme,  cela  ferait  beaucoup.     15.  Tu  ne  dois  pas  y 
regarder."    16.  Plus  tard  Celestine  petrit  la  pate.    17.  Elle  en  fait 
des  pains  qu'elle  met  au  four  pour  les  faire  cuire.    18.  Et  apres  cela 
elle  les  sort  du  four.     19.  Les  enfants  en  voudraient  pour  faire 
des  tartines  de  beurre.     20.  Mais  le  pain  frais   est  moins  bon 
que  le  pain  rassis.    21.  II  vaudrait  mieux  attendre  au  moins  vingt- 
quatre  heures. 

C.  (Oral  on  B.) 

D.  1.  The  two  children  are  on  a  visit  at  their  aunt's.    2.  They 
have  been  in  [great]  glee  for  several  days.    3.  Since  their  arrival 
they  have  been  very  happy.    4.  They  wanted  to  be  present  at  the 
baking  of  the  homemade  bread.    5.  The  old  servant  had  brought 
the  kneading  trough  into  the  kitchen.    6.  The  flour  and  yeast  had 
been  in  it  since  the  evening  before.    7.  The  next  day  the  dough 
had   begun  to  rise.     8.  The   children  had   waited    impatientty. 
9.  Celestine,  why  won't  you  let  us   come  near?    10.  You  may 
come  near  (reflex.),  but  you  mustn't  touch  the  dough.    11.  That 
will  make  no  difference,  said  Pierre.    12.  We  should  like  to  have 
a  slice  of, bread  and  butter.     13.  Give  us  a  piece  when  you  take 
the  bread  out  of  the  oven.    14.  It  will  be  too  fresh;  I  shouldn't 
dare  to  give  you  it.    15.  Yes,  do;  give  it  to  us  now.    16.  No,  no, 
not  now.    17.  Stale  bread  is  better  for  children. 

E.  1.  They  had  long  been  saying  that  that  would  happen.   2.  We 
have  been  wondering  for  some  days  where  you  were.    3.  This  castle 


17C  LESSON  LXXIV  [§  192 

has  existed  since  the  14th  century.  4.  It  was  in  that  century  that 
it  was  built.  5.  It  had  been  freezing  for  three  days.  6.  It  froze 
for  three  days.  7.  It  had  been  snowing,  which  was  very  good  for 
the  sports.  8.  How  long  had  you  been  there  when  we  came? 
9.  More  than  three  weeks.  10.  How  long  did  your  uncle  remain  in 
America?  11.  He  remained  there  more  than  ten  years.  12.  Could 
you  tell  me  what  time  (I'heure  qu')  it  is? 

F.  Turn  the  following  into  the  ordinary  form  of  conditional  sen- 
tence (cf.  §  113):  1.  II  le  dirait  que  je  ne  le  croirais  pas.  2.  La 
maison  serait  dix  fois  plus  belle  que  je  ne  Facheterais  pas. 


LESSON  LXXIV 

192.    Asseoir,  'seat';  suffire,  'suffice,'  'be  sufficient' 

asseoir  asseyant  assis  assieds  assis 

suffire  suffisant  suffi  suffis  suffis 

Like  asseoir :  s'asseoir,  sit,  sit  down,  be  seated. 


EXERCISE  LXXIV 

le  fauteuil,  armchair  suffisant,  conceited 

prier,  pray,  beg,  ask 

A.  (Oral.)     Continue:  1.  Je  m'assieds  (assois).     2.  Je  me  suis 
assis(e).     3.  Assieds-toi  pres  du  feu.     4.  Je  m'assierai  pres  de  la 
fenetre.    5.  II  desire  que  je  m'asseye  (assoie),  .  .  .  tu.    6.  Je  suffis 
(suffisais).    7.  Je  suffirai  a  cet  ouvrage.    8.  II  ne  croit  pas  que  j'y 
suffise.    9.  Que  je  suffisse. 

B.  1.  How  conceited  he  is!    2.  That  is  sufficient  (pres.).    3.  Let 
that  suffice.    4.  That  will  be  sufficient.    5.  We  shall  be  sufficient 
for  everything.    6.  Sit  down  (or  be  seated)  if  you  please.    7.  I  used 
to  sit  there.     8.  We  often  sit  there.     9.  They  will  not  sit  there. 
10.  He  sat  down  in  the  armchair.    11.  Let  us  sit  down.    12.  The 
ladies  have  not  sat  down.    13.  She  was  sitting  in  an  armchair. 


§  193]  LESSON  LXXV  171 

C.  1.  It  was  necessary  that  we  should  sit  down.  2.  We  shaD 
not  sit  down.  3.  Two  francs  will  be  sufficient.  4.  Mary  sat  down 
beside  the  fire.  5.  That  had  to  (use  fallait)  suffice.  6.  The  children 
will  sit  down  on  those  chairs.  7.  Ask  the  ladies  to  sit  down.  8.  We 
were  asked  to  sit  down.  9.  When  you  (tu)  are  in  the  room  you  will 
sit  down.  10.  Let  no  one  sit  there.  11.  Do  not  sit  beside  the  win- 
dow. 12.  Everybody  is  seated. 


LESSON  LXXV 

193.  Remarks  on  Subjunctive.  —  1.  Review  §§  142-148,  and 
note  that  many  expressions,  ordinarily  followed  by  the  indica- 
tive, require  the  subjunctive  whenever  doubt  is  implied  (usu- 
ally by  interrogation,  negation  or  condition) : 

Je  ne  crois  pas  que  ce  soit  lui.  /  don't  think  it  is  Tie. 

Esperez-vous  qu'il  reussisse?  Do  you  expect  he  will  succeed? 

Si  je  pretendais  qu'il  cut  tort.  %  //  /  asserted  that  he  was  wrong. 

But:  Je  crois  que  c'est  lui.  /  think  it  is  he. 

J'espere  qu'il  reussira.  I  hope  he  will  succeed. 

(a)  Such  are:  s'apercevoir,  sentir,  voir  (perceiving);  croire,  esperer,  penser, 
trouver  (thinking) ;  etre  certain,  etre   probable,  savoir   (knowing) ;    avouer, 
dire  (declaring),  etc. 

(b)  After  questions,  the  indicative  usually  stands  if  the  answer  yes  is 
expected,  and  the  subjunctive  if  no  is  expected. 

(c)  Also,  when  the  statement  of  the  subordinate  clause  is  assumed  to  be 
a  fact,  the  indicative  is  used,  e.g.  S'il  savait  que  tu  es  ici,  //  he  knew  that 
you  are  here;  Savez-vous  qu'il  est  arrive?    Do  you  know  that  he  has  come? 

2.  II  semble  (more  or  less  doubt  being  implied)  regularly  re- 
quires the  subjunctive,  while  il  me  (te,  etc.)  semble  (  =  je  crois, 
je  pense)  takes  the  indicative: 

II  semble  qu'elle  ait  tort.  It  seems  that  she  is  wrong. 

II  me  semble  qu'elle  a  tort.  It  seems  to  me  she  is  wrong, 

(a)  H  me  semble  also  comes  under  1,  above. 

3.  The  present  subjunctive  of  savoir  is  sometimes  used  to 
denote  deferential  statement  in  a  principal  sentence: 

Je  ne  sache  rien  He  ci  bon.  I  know  of  nothing  so  good. 


172  LESSON   LXXV  [§193 

4.  The  pluperfect  subjunctive  stands  exceptionally  for  the 
pluperfect  indicative  in  an  if  clause,  and  for  the  conditional  an- 
terior in  a  result  clause  (cf.  §  113): 

S'il  cut  ( =  avait)  su  cela,  il  ne      //  he  had  known  that,  he  would  not 
Feut  ( =  aurait)  pas  dit.  have  said  it. 

5.  The  subjunctive  is  used  after  que  replacing  a  conjunction 
requiring  the  subjunctive  (cf.  §  147),  and  also  after  que  replac- 
ing si  =  if: 

Venez  que  ( =  afin  que,  pour  que)     Come,  in  order  that  I  may  see  you. 

je  vous  voie. 
Si  j'y  vais  et  que  je  le  voie.  //  I  go,  and  if  I  see  him. 


EXERCISE  LXXV 

la  bibliotheque,  bookcase  la  mode,  fashion 

le  (la)  camarade,  comrade,  com-  probable,  probable 

panion  le  rideau,  curtain 

commander,  order  sjerrer,  press,  put  away 

la  commode,  chest  of  drawers,  bu-  le  store,  (window)  blind 

reau  le  tapis,  carpet,  tablecloth  (coloured) 

Pebeniste,  m.,  cabinet-maker  la  toilette,  dressing  table 

la  gravure,  engraving  le  travail,  work 
le  miroir,  mirror 

a  la  mode,  in  fashion,  fashionable;  faire  visite  a,  to  visit;  de  sorte  que,  so 
that 

A.  Continue:  1.  Je  crois  que  cela  est  vrai.     2.  Je  ne  crois  pas 
que  ce  soit  vrai.    3.  II  est  certain  que  j'en  aurai  besoin.    4.  Est-il 
certain  que  j'en  aie  besoin?    5.  II  croit  que  c'est  moi, .  .  .  toi.    6.  S'il 
espere  que  je  reussisse.    7.  II  est  probable  que  je  partirai  demain. 
8.  Est-il  probable  que  je  le  sache?    9.  II  semble  que  j'aie  besoin 
d'un  tapis.    10.  II  me  semble  que  j'en  ai  besoin. 

B.  Give  the  correct  form  of  the  verb  in  italics:  1.  Je  ne  dis  pas  que 
ce  etre  vrai.     2.  Espe*rez-vous  qu'ils  y  etre  demain?     3.  J'espere 
qu'ils  y  etre.    4.  Je  n'espere  pas  qu'il  venir.    5.  N'espe*rez-vous  pas 
qu'il  venir?    6.  II  leur  semble  que  cela  etre  ainsi.    7.  II  semble  qu'il 
avoir  besoin  de  meubles.    8.  Attendez  que  je  le  faire. 


§193]  LESSON  LXXV  173 

C.  1.  Paul  croit  avoir  besoin  de  meubles  pour  sa  chambre.    2.  Sa 
mere  et  lui  vont  chez  1'ebeniste  en  commander.    3.  Paul  croit  qu'il 
lui  faut  un  lit  neuf.    4.  "Mais,  crois-tu,  dit  sa  mere,  que  cela  te 
soit  necessaire? —  5.  Oui,  maman,  1'ancien  n'est  plus  a  la  mode. 
6.  II  me  semble  aussi  que  j'ai  besoin  d'un  fauteuil.  — 7.  Tu  crois? 
Moi,  je  ne  pense  pas  que  tu  en  aies  besoin.    8.  Nous  mettrons  trois 
ou  quatre  chaises  dans  ta  chambre,  de  sorte  que  tes  camarades 
puissent  s'asseoir  quand  ils  te  feront  visite,  et  cela  suffira.  —  9.  J'es- 
pere  au  moins  que  j'aurai  une  table  de  travail  et  une  petite  biblio- 
theque.  — 10.  Oui,  mon  enfant.     11.  II  est  clair  quq  tu  as  besoin 
de  ces  choses-la.     12.  Je  crois  qu'il  te  faudra  aussi  une  commode 
pour  serrer  ton  linge.    13.  Mais  je  ne  crois  pas  que  tu  aies  besoin 
d'une  toilette.     14.  II  faut  aussi  que  nous  garnissions  ta  chambre 
de  quelques  gravures  et  d'un  miroir.  —  15.  Ne  trouves-tu  pas  aussi 
que  j'ai  besoin  d'un  tapis  pour  le  parquet  et  d'un  autre  pour  ma 
table?  —  16.  C'est  vrai.    17.  II  te  faut  aussi  un  store  et  des  rideaux 
pour  ta  fenetre." 

D.  (Oral  on  C.) 

E.  1.  We  think  we  need  new  furniture.    2.  These  chairs  are  not 
fashionable  now.     3.  I  do  not  think  you  need  a  new  bed.     4.  It 
seems  to  us  that  we  need  a  bookcase  to  put  our  books  in  (use  y). 
5.  I  hope  you  will  have  an  armchair.    6.  We  shall  order  one,  so 
that  you  may  sit  down  when  you  visit  us.    7.  It  is  not  certain  that 
we  need  a  carpet  for  the  floor.    8.  Do  you  think  you  need  a  table- 
cloth for  your  table?    9.  I  hope  my  mother  will  adorn  my  room 
with  a  few  engravings.    10.  I  think  you  will  need  a  mirror.    11.  I 
shall  need  a  window  blind  and  curtains  also.     12.  Put  away  your 
linen  in  the  drawers.    13.  We  shall  put  our  books  in  the  bookcase. 

F.  1.  Sit  down  that  I  may  be  able  to  speak  to  you.    2.  We  hope 
our  comrades  will  come  by  the  first  train.    3.  I  do  not  think  they 
will  come  early.    4.  Is  it  not  probable  that  the  train  will  be  late? 
5.  All  the  trains  have  been  late  for  several  days.    6.  Is  it  certain 
that  you  leave  this  afternoon?    7.  It  is  probable  that  I  shall.   8.  But 
perhaps  I  shall  not  leave  before  to-morrow.    9.  You  don't  think  I 
need  a  dressing  table,  do  you?    10.  Yes,  I  do  (mais  si),  and  I  think 
you  need  a  bureau  and  a  study  table.    11.  I  must  order  them  at  the 


174  LESSON   LXXVI  [§  194 

cabinet-maker's.  12.  If  they  knew  I  was  (am)  here,  they  would 
pay  me  a  visit.  13.  Don't  they  know  you  have  come?  14.  Draw 
near  that  I  may  hear  you  better.  15.  Do  you  know  who  has  just 
come? 


LESSON  LXXVI 

194.          Offrir,  c  offer';  souffrir,  '  suffer/  *  endure' 

offrir  offrant  offert  offre  offris 

souffrir  souffrant  souffert  souffre  souffris 


EXERCISE  LXXVI 
lo  malheur,  misfortune  souffrant,  ailing,  not  (very)  well 

A.  (Oral.)    Continue:  1.  Je  souffre  (souffrais)  beaucoup.    2.  Je 
ne  souffrirai  pas  cela.    3.  Je  lui  offre  de  1'argent.    4.  II  faut  que 
je  souffre  cela.    5.  Souffre  que  cela  se  fasse.    6.  II  fallait  que  je  lui 
offrisse  la  main.    7.  J'en  ai  beaucoup  souffert.    8.  Offre-lui  ce  que 
tu  as,  ...  nous.    9.  Les  malheurs  que  j'ai  soufferts,  .  .  .  tu. 

B.  1.  He  is  always  ailing.    2.  They  have  suffered  a  great  deal. 
3.  We  will  not  endure  that.    4.  Let  us  offer  to  (de)  help  them. 
5.  Suffer  us  to  say  that.    6.  He  had  to  endure  it.    7.  He  offered 
(p.  def.)  me  his  hand.    8.  We  have  offered  them  money.    9.  Let 
them   offer  us  that.      10.  I   have   suffered   a   great   misfortune. 
11.  We  shall  offer  them  what  we  have.    12.  We  offer  you  every- 
thing.   13.  What  place  have  you  offered  him? 

C.  1.  Nobody  can  suffer  him.    2.  I  did  not  offer  (p.  def.)  him  any 
wine.     3.  Have  you  offered  them  bread?    4.  Offer  him  a  cup  of 
tea.    5.  You  had  to  suffer  that,  hadn't  you?    6.  Do  not  suffer  him 
to  speak.    7.  Do  not  offer  them  what  you  have.    8.  They  suffer 
their  misfortunes  without  saying  anything.     9.  Our  friends   suf- 
fered nothing.    10.  We  offered  (p.  def.)  them  all  (that  which)  we 
had.    11.  We  used  to  suffer  a  great  deal  because  of  that.    12.  You 
will  never  suffer  for  that.    13.  If  you  knew  the  misfortunes  I  have 
suffered. 


195]  LESSON  LXXVII  175 


LESSON  LXXVII 

195.    Infinitive  or  Subjunctive.  —  The  subjunctive  is  often 
avoided  by  the  use  of  an  infinitive  (cf.  §  156,  note  1),  thus:  — 

1.  With  verbs  taking  an  indirect  personal  object: 

Je  conseille  &  ma  fille  de  lire  ces      /  advise  my  daughter  to  read  these 

livres-ci.  books. 

Je  lui  defends  de  lire  ceux-la.  I  forbid  her  to  read  those. 

(a)  Such  verbs  are:  conseiller,  defendre,  demander,  dire,  ecrire,  ordonner, 
permettre,  reprocher,  etc. 

2.  With  verbs  taking  a  direct  personal  object: 

Je  Fai  priee  de  monter.  /  asked  her  to  go  up. 

Cela  les  empeche  de  sortir.  That  prevents  them  from  going  out. 

(a)  Such  verbs  are:  empecher,  prier,  remercier,  etc. 

3.  Observe  also  the  construction  with  two  objects: 

Je  le  lui  reproche.  /  reproach  him  (her)  for  it. 

Je  le  lui  demande.  /  ask  him  (her)  for  it. 

Je  le  remercie  de  sa  bonte\  /  thank  him  for  his  kindness. 

Je  Fen  remercie.  /  thank  him  for  it. 

Je  vous  en  prie.  I  beg  you  to  do  (etc.)  so. 

EXERCISE    LXXVII 

s'adresser,  apply  ennuyer,  annoy,  trouble 

Pardeur,  f.,  ardour ,  warmth  le  jeu,  game,  play 

Pattention,  f.,  attention  la  loi,  law 

attirer,  attract,  call  mechant,  bad,  naughty 

le  bien,  good  (noun)  moderer,  moderate 

se  conduire,  irreg.,  conduct  one-      permettre,  irreg.,  permit 

self  peut-etre,  perhaps 

la  condtiite,  conduct  la  police,  police 

conseiller,  advise  preferer,  prefer 

corriger,  correct  proteger,  protect 

defendre,  defend,  forbid  reprocher,  reproach,  tax 

elever,  bring  up  sinon,  if  not,  otherwise 

mal   eleve,  rude,  impolite,  ill-mannered;  pere  de  famille,  father  (of  a 
family) 


176  LESSON  LXXVII  [§  195 

A.  Continue:  1.  Le  roi  ordonne  que  je  fasse  cela.     2.  Le  roi 
m'ordonne  de  faire  cela.    3.  Elle  me  Fa  conseille.    4.  La  loi  defend 
que  je  fasse  cela.    5.  La  loi  me  le  defend.    6.  II  est  d£fendu  que  je 
fasse  cela.    7.  II  m'est  de*fendu  de  faire  cela. 

B.  1.  Notre  voisin  a  des  enfants  tres  mal  Sieves.    2.  Je  vais  lui 
demander  de  les  corriger.    3.  Je  devrais  lui  reprocher  de  manquer 
a  son  devoir.    4.  Un  bon  pere  empeche  ses  enfants  de  se  conduire 
mal.    5.  Tout  le  monde  devrait  conseiller  aux  enfants  d'etre  sages. 

6.  On  ne  devrait  jamais  permettre  a  personne  d'etre  mechant. 

7.  Le  bon  pere  de  famille  ordonne  a  ses  enfants  de  faire  toujours 
le  bien.    8.  Si  je  disais  a  notre  voisin  de  moderer  1'ardeur  de  ses 
enfants  dans  leurs  jeux,  le  ferait-il?    9.  Peut-etre.    Sinon,  dois-je 
e*crire  a  la  police  de  me  proteger?    10.  La  police  defend  aux  enfants 
d'ennuyer  le  public,  mais  je  n'aime  pas  m'adresser  a  elle.     11.  Je 
prefere  prier  encore  une  fois  mon  voisin  de  corriger  ses  enfants. 
12.  II  me  remerciera  peut-etre  d'avoir  attire*  son  attention  sur  leur 
conduite. 

C.  (Oral  on  B.) 

D.  1.  Are  your  friend's  children  ill-mannered?    2.  Yes,  and  we 
have  often  asked  him  to  correct  them.     3.  We  "have  taxed  him 
with  failing  in  his  duty.     4.  A  good  father  does  not  permit  his 
children  to  be  naughty.    5.  Everybody  should  advise  them  to  do 
good.    6.  Does  not  a  good  father  always  order  his  children  to  be 
good?    7.  Does  your  friend  moderate  his  children's  ardour  in  their 
games?    8.  Did  you  tell  that  little  boy  to  be  good?    9.  Shall  I 
write  to  the  police  to  protect  you?    10.  I  shall  ask  my  friend  to 
correct  his  children.    11.  I  beg  you  not  to  apply  to  the  police. 

E.  1.  I  thanked  her  for  having  called  my  attention  to  (sur) 
their  conduct.    2.  I  thanked  her  for  it.    3.  It  is  forbidden  to  annoy 
the  public.    4.  You  should  not  conduct  yourself  badly.     5.  Ask 
your  father  to  come  with  you.    6.  Permit  me  to  say  to  you  that  1 
do  not  like  your  conduct.    7.  Do  you  advise  your  brother  to  go 
away?    8.  No,  I  advise  him  to  stay.    9.  He  has  conducted  himself 
badly,  but  he  will  not  be  naughty  any  more  (plus).    10.  If  you  are 
ill-mannered,  you  will  attract  (the)  attention  to  yourself.    11.  Take 
some  of  these  pears,  I  beg  of  you.    12.  I  thank  you  for  them. 


196]  LESSON   LXXVIII  177 


LESSON  LXXVIII 

196.  Agreement  of  Past  Participle.  —  All  cases  of  agreement 
of  the  past  participle  depend  on  the  general  principles  already, 
stated  (§§  49,  120),  but  observe  the  following: 

La  belle  journee  qu'il  a  fait!  What  a  fine  day' we  have  had! 

La  lettre  que  j'ai  voulu  e"crire.  The  letter  I  unshed  to  write. 

La  dame  que  j'ai  entendue  chan-  The  lady  that  I  heard  sing. 

ter. 

La  chanson  que   j'ai   entendu  The  song  that  I  heard  sung. 

chanter. 

Les  medecins  qu'il  a  fait  venir.  The  doctors  he  sent  for. 

(a)  The  past  participle  of  an  impersonal  verb  is  invariable,  Ex.  1. 
(6)   In  verbal  phrases  when  an  infinitive  governs  a  preceding  direct  object, 
the  past  participle  is  invariable,  Ex.  2;  but  note  II  nous  a  pries  d'y  aller. 

(c)  Entendu,  vu,  laisse  agree  if  the  following  infinitive  has  active  force, 
but  are  invariable  if  it  has  passive  force,  Ex.  3  and  4. 

(d)  Fait  +  infinitive  is  invariable,  Ex.  5  (cf.  172,  i,a). 

NOTE.  —  When  the  direct  object  is  an  expression  of  quantity  or  a  collec- 
tive, the   past   participle   regularly  agrees  with  the  prevailing  sense  (cf. 
§  160),  but  it  has  been  thought  unnecessary  to  include  examples  in  an  ele- 
:  mentary  text-book. 

EXERCISE  LXXVIII 

la  chanteuse,  singer  la  piece,  piece  (of  money) 

embrasser,  embrace,  kiss  le  pouls,  pulse 

exquis,  exquisite,  delicious  ravissant,  charming 

femme    docteur,    woman    doc-  le  regime,  regimen,  diet 

tor,  lady  physician  le  remede,  medicine 

le  gateau,  cake  la  sante,  health 

s'informer  (de),  inquire  (about)  sonner,  ring 

la  merveille,  wonder  tater,  feel 

la  patisserie,  pastry  tirer,  put  out  (the  tongue) 

le  pharmacien,  chemist,  druggist  la  voix,  voice 
le  (la)  pianiste,  pianist 

mettre  au  regime,  prescribe  diet  for,  put  on  diet;  faire  entrer,  show  in; 
£  merveille,  marvellously,  wonderfully;  comment  trouvez-vous  cela? 
what  do  you  think  of  that? 


178  LESSON  LXXVIII  [§196 

A.  Supply  the  proper  form  of  the  past  participle  of  the  infinitive 
in  italics:  1.  Voila  mes  cousines;  je  les  ai  prier  de  venir.    2.  La  belle 
saison  qu'il  &faire.    3.  Les  morceaux  qu'elle  a  vouloir  jouer.   4.  C'est 
ma  soeur;  nous  ne  1'avons  pas  laisser  partir.    5.  C'est  la  maison  que 
j'ai  voir  batir.    6.  Ce  sont  les  personnes  que  j'ai  entendre  sonner. 
"7.  La  servante  que  j'ai  envoy er  chercher  le  remede. 

B.  1.  Genevieye  est  souffrante.    2.  Elle  s'est  enrhumee  au  con- 
cert.   3.  Sa  cousine  Denise  vierft  la  voir.    4.  Genevieve  l'a  envoye* 
chercher  ce  matin.    5.  La  femme  de  chambre  l'a  entendue  sonner, 
et  elle  l'a  fait  entrer.    6.  Denise  embrasse  sa  cousine  et  s'informe 
de  sa  sante.     7.  "On  a  fait  venir  le  me*decin  j'espere. —  8.  Oh 
oui,  c'est  Mme  Lecomte,  la  femme  docteur,  que  ma  m£re  a  fait 
venir.    9.  Elle  m'a  tate  le  pouls  et  m'a  fait  tirer  la  langue.    10.  Puis 
elle  m'a  ordonne  un  remede  que  la  servante  a  pris  (got)  ensuite  chez 
le  pharmacien.     11.  Outre  cela  elle  m'a  mise  au  regime.     12.  Je  ne 
dois  prendre  que  du  pain  et  du  lait.     13.  Pas  de  gateaux,  pas  de 
patisserie  pendant  trois  ou  quatre  jours.  —  14.  A  propos,  comment 
as-tu  trouve  la  chanteuse  que  nous  avons  entendue  chanter  au  con- 
cert? —  15.  Elle  chante  a  merveille.  —  16.  Elle  a  une  voix  exquise, 
n'est-ce  pas?    17.  Et  les  deux  morceaux  que  nous  avons  entendu 
jouer  par  le  pianiste?  —  18.  Us  e*taient  ravissants." 

C.  (Oral  on  B.) 

D.  1.  We  caught  cold  at  the  theatre.    2.  We  (/.)  are  not  very 
well  to-day.    3.  Our  cousins  Denise  and  Jeanne  have  come  to  see 
us;  we  sent  for  them.    4.  The  housemaid  heard  them  ring.    5.  She 
has  shown  them  in.    6.  They  inquired  about  our  health.    7.  They 
asked  us  if  we  had  had  the  doctor.    8.  It  was  a  woman  doctor  that 
my  mother  sent  for.    9.  Did  she  feel  your  pulse?    10.  Yes,  and  she 
made  me  show  my  tongue.    11.  The  old  servant  went  to  the  chem- 
ist's to  get  the  medicine.     12.  The  doctor  has  prescribed  a  diet  for 
me  (/.).     13.  I  am  not  to  have  either  cakes  or  pastry  for  several 
days.    14.  The  singer  whom  you  heard  singing  at  the  concert  sang 
wonderfully,  did  she  not?     15.  Yes,  and  the  pieces  of  music  we 
heard  played  were  charming. 

E.  1.  There  are  the  housos  that  we  saw  being  built  last  year. 
2.  By  the  way,  where  are  the  medicines  you  sent  for?    3.  Is  it  my 


§197]  LESSON  LXXIX  179 

cousin  (/.)  whom  you  have  shown  in?  4.  It  is  (she) ;  I  have  shown 
her  upstairs  (faire  monter) .  5.  Who  is  the  lady  whom  I  heard  sing  at 
your  house  yesterday  evening?  6.  She  is  an  Englishwoman  with 
an  exquisite  voice.  7.  What  did  you  think  of  the  songs  she  sang? 
8.  They  were  charming.  9.  She  and  her  sister  are  still  here;  we 
didn't  let  them  go  away.  10.  We  begged  them  to  stay  another  week 
(still  eight  days).  11.  My  aunt  has  been  put  on  diet  because  she 
has  caught  a  cold.  12.  Here  is  a  two-franc  piece  which  you  dropped 
(let  fall)  when  (en)  going  out.  13.  I  saw  it  fall,  and  I  picked  it  up. 


LESSON  LXXIX 

197.  Ecrire,  *  write';  vivre,  'live' 

ecrire  e'crivant  ecrit  ecris  e"crivis 

vivre  vivant  vecu  vis  vecus 

Like  ecrire:  decrire,  describe. 

EXERCISE  LXXIX 

le  mot,  word,  note  le  roman,  novel 

la  paix,  peace  le  volume,  volume 

A.  (Oral.)    Continue:  1.  J'ecris  des  lettres.    2.  Je  decrivais  mon 
voyage,  tu  .  .  .  ton.    3.  Je  lui  ecrirai  un  mot.    4.  Je  vis  de  peu. 

5.  Je  ne  lui  ecris  pas.    6.  II  faut  que  je  leur  ecrive.    7.  Decris  ce 
que  tu  as  vu.    8.  II  fallait  que  je  vecusse  seul.    9.  Je  vivrai  de  mon 
travail.    10.  Je  vivais  en  paix.    11.  J'ecrivis  des  romans. 

B.  1.  That  novel  will  live.    2.  Describe  the  play  to  me.    3.  I 
was  writing  a  letter.    4.  I  wrote  him  a  note.    5.  They  lived  on  little. 

6.  They  have  to  write.    7.  We  live  by  (from)  our  work.    8.  If  he 
had  a  pen,  he  would  write.    9.  He  had  to  write.     10.  They  will 
describe  their  travels.     11.  Here  are  the  letters  I  have  written. 
La   viator  Hugo  wrote  (p.  def.)  this  poem  in  1840. 

0.  1.  He  livea  annosi,  ninety  years.  2.  He  wrote  seventy  vol- 
umes. 3.  She  is  still  living  (lives  ^till).  4.  You  have  to  write. 
5.  1  do  not  think  he  will  live  long.  6.  He  thinks  that  novel  will 


180  LESSON   LXXX  [§  198 

live.  7.  He  has  described  his  travels.  8.  The  poems  that  he 
wrote  are  exquisite.  9.  Let  us  live  in  peace.  10.  They  were  living 
in  peace  with  everybody.  11.  I  wish  you  may  live  a  long  time. 
12.  Victor  Hugo  was  still  living  when  I  was  born. 


LESSON  LXXX 

198.  Partitives.  — 1.  Review  §§  25,  28,  29,  and  observe  the  fol- 
lowing : 

N'a-t-il  pas  des  amis?  Has  he  no  friends? 

Pas  du  lait  mais  du  the".  Not  milk  but  tea. 

II  n'a  que  des  dettes.  He  has  nothing  but  debts. 

C'etaient  des  grands  hommes.  They  were  great  men. 

Des  petits-fils;  des  petits  pois.  Grandsons;  green  peas. 

(a)  With  negatives  the  article  remains  when  the  existence  of  the  object 
referred  to  is  implied,  Ex.  1;  in  contrasts,  Ex.  2;  with  ne  .  .  .  que  =  only,  Ex.  3; 
.and  when  adjective  and  noun  form  a  real  or  virtual  compound,  Ex.  4  and  5, 

2.  When  de  forms  part  of  a  phrase  governing  a  partitive,  the 
partitive  sign  is  wholly  omitted: 

II  vit  de  pain.  He  lives  on  bread. 

II  se  sert  d'encre  noire.  He  uses  black  ink. 

Un  arbre  couvert  de  feuilles.        A  tree  covered  with  leaves. 

199.  Article  with  Titles.  —  1.  A  title  before  the  name  of  a 
person  takes  the  definite  article,  except  in  direct  address: 

La  reine  Victoria  fut  aimee.         Queen  Victoria  was  beloved. 
Le  docteur  Bibot  est  arrive.         Doctor  Ribot  has  come. 
But:  Bon  jour,  docteur  Ribot.      (rood  morning,  Dr.  Ribot. 

2.  If  the  title  is  preceded  by  a  title  of  courtesy  (e.g.  mon- 
sieur, etc.),  it  keeps  the  article  in  all  cases: 

Bon  jour,  monsieur  le  docteur.      Good  morning,  doctor. 

Son  altesse  le  prince  Pa  dit.         His  Highness  the  prince  said  so. 

,(a}  For  other  titles,  see  §  211. 


§200]  LESSON  LXXX  181 

200.  Apposition.  —  1.  Appositive  nouns  used  in  parenthetical 
explanation  regularly  take  no  article: 

L'Avare,  comedie  de  Moliere.  The  Avare,  a  comedy  by  Moliere. 

Paris,  fils  de  Priam.  Paris,  (the  or  a)  son  of  Priam. 

2.  Apparent  apposition  is  frequent  in  expressions  like: 
L'eglise  (sc.  de)  Saint-Pierre.  St.  Peter's  (the  church  of,  etc.). 

Des    meubles    (sc.   du  temps  de)      Louis  XV  furniture. 

Louis  XV. 

EXERCISE  LXXX 

1'appartement.  m.,  suite  of  rooms,     dejeuner,  take  lunch,  lunch 

flat  le  dessert,  dessert 

1'argenterie,  f.,  silverware  le  (la)  domestique,  servant 

le  beau-frere,  brother-in-law  a  droite  (sc.  main),  to  or  on  the 

le  boeuf,  ox,  beef  right. 

la  bonne  chere,  good  cheer,  good     Pescalier,  m.,  stairway 

living  a  gauche,  to  or  on  the  left . 

le  bon  vivant,  'jolly  fellow,'  etc.        meubler,  furnish 
le  buffet,  sideboard  moderne,  modern 

le  capitaine,  captain  Notre-Dame,  Notre  Dame 

le  caviar,  caviare  r6tir,  roast 

le  confort,  comfort  le  siege,  seat,  chair 

le  corridor,  passage,  hall  la  verrerie,  glassware 

decorer,  decorate,  adorn 

etre  en  train  de,  be  occupied  in,  be  busy  (Eng.  +  -ing  form) ;  mettre  le 
couvert,  set  (lay)  the  table;  (en)  robe  de  chambre,  in  their  jackets  or 
skins  (of  potatoes) ;  les  petits  pains,  breakfast  rolls,  rolls;  les  petits  pois, 
green  peas 

A.  Continue:  1.  Je  me  sers  de  farine  pour  faire  du  pain.    2.  J'em- 
ploie  de  la  farine.    3.  Je  le  fais  avec  de  la  farine.  .  4.  Je  le  fais  de 
farine.    5.  Je  vis  de  pain.    6.  Je  ne  mange  que  du  pain.    7.  N'ai-je 
pas  des  amis  ici?    8.  J'ai  achete*  des  meubles  Louis  XVI. 

B.  1.  Ma  sceur  et  mon  beau-frere  habitent  un  appartement,  125 
rue  Notre-Dame,  a  droite  de  1'eglise  Saint-Pierre.     2.  C'est  une 
belle  maison  avec  tout  le  confort  m6derne.    3.  Meme  les  escaliers 
et  les  corridors  sont  beaux  a  voir.    4.  Mon  beau-frere  est  capitaine 
et  le  capitaine  Pictet  lui  fait  visite  de  temps  en  temps.    5.  Tous  les 
deux  (or  1'un  et  Pautre)  aiment  la  bonne  chere,  quoiqu'ils  ne  soient 
pas  des  bons  vivants.     6.  Le  capitaine  Pictet  vient  dejeuner  au- 


182  LESSON   LXXX  [§200 

jourd'hui.  7.  On  est  en  train  de  mettre  le  couvert  dans  la  salle  a 
manger.  8.  Cette  piece  est  meublee  avec  gout  et  de*coree  de  jolies 
gravures  du  XVIII6  siecle.  9.  Les  sieges  et  le  buffet  sont  "des 
meubles  Louis  XVI.  10.  Quand  le  buffet  est  garni  de  vaisselle, 
d'argenterie  et  de  verrerie  il  est  tres  beau.  11.  Les  assiettes  et  les 
verres  sont  sur  la  table.  12.  On  va  servir  du  caviar,  du  bceuf  roti, 
des  pommes  de  terre  (en)  robe  de  chambre,  des  petits  pois  et  des 
petits  pains.  13.  Au  dessert  on  aura  du  fromage  et  du  cafe. 

C.  (Oral.)     1.  Ou  habitez-vous?    2.  Decrivez-moi  votre  apparte- 
ment.     3.  Qui  est  1'ami  de  votre  beau-frere?     4.  Sont-ils  des  bons 
vivants?    5.  Qui  vient  dejeuner  chez  vous  aujourd'hui?     6.  Que 
fait-on  dans  la  salle  a  manger?    7.  Decrivez  les  meubles  de  cette 
piece.    8.  Qu'est-ce   qu'on  va  servir  au  dejeuner?    9.  Qu'est-ce 
que  vous  prendrez  au  dessert? 

D.  1.  We  used  to  live  [at  number]  75  Lafayette  Street.    2.  The 
house  was  on  the  left  of  St.  Paul's  church.    3.  We  lived  in  a  flat 
which  hadn't  all  the  modern  comfort[s].    4.  The  stairway  wasn't 
beautiful.    5.  My  father  was  a  colonel.    6.  Colonel  Henri  used  to 
visit  him  from  time  to  time.    7.  They  are  not  'jolly  fellows/  but 
they  like  good  living.    8.  The  servants  are  busy  setting  the  table. 
9.  When  the  table  is  adorned  with  glassware  and  silverware  it  is 
very  beautiful.     10.  We  have  some  Louis  XVI  chairs  and  a  side- 
board of  the  same  century.    11.  At  the  lunch  they  will  have  first  a 
hors-d'oeuvre.    12.  They  will  be  served  (use  on)  with  roast  beef  and 
green  peas.    13.  At  dessert  they  will  have  good  cheese  and  black 
coffee. 

E.  1.  We  use  flour  to  make  bread.    2.  Use  my  pen  to  write  your 
letter.    3.  The  passages  are  adorned  with  engravings  of  the  XVII 
century.     4.  We  have  Louis  XVI  furniture  in  our  dining  room. 
5.  We  are  looking  for  a  house  which  is  well  furnished.    6.  Queen 
Victoria  was  born  in  1819.    7.  When  Captain  Lesage  used  to  come 
to  see  us  he  would  often  lunch  with  us.    8.  My  brother-in-law  and 
he  liked  good  living.    9.  People  use  glasses  to  drink  wine.    10.  They 
use  cups  to  drink  coffee.   11.  Both  rose  early  and  took  some  rolls  and 
coffee  with  milk.    12.  Give  me  some  of  the  black  coffee.    13.  This 
cup  is  full  of  coffee.    14.  We  didn't  have  any  of  the  good  cheese 
which  we  bought  at  Potin's. 


t201]  LESSON   LXXXI  183 


LESSON  LXXXI 

201.  Plaire,  '  please ' ;  rire,  '  laugh ' 

plaire  plaisant  plu  plais  plus 

rire  riant  ri  ris  ris 

Like  plaire :  se  plaire,  be  pleased ',  enjoy  oneself,  like  it,  etc. 

EXERCISE  LXXXI 

je  vous  demande  pardon,  monsieur,  or  pardon,  monsieur,  I  beg  your 
pardon,  sir 

A.  (Oral.)    Continue:  1.  Je  plais  (plairai,  plus)  a  tout  le  monde. 
2.  Je  ne  plaisais  (plairais)  a  personne.    3.  Je  ne  lui  plais  pas.    4.  Je 
m'y   plaisais   beaucoup.     5.  II   ne  croit   pas  que  je  leur  plaise. 
6.  Pourquoi  est-ce  que  j'en  ris?     7.  Ne  ris  pas  des  malheureux. 

8.  II  faut  que  je  rie.    9.  J'ai  beaucoup  ri.    10.  Je  riais  souvent  en 
classe. 

B.  1.  That  pleases  (will  please)  him.    2.  The  play  pleased  (would 
please)  nobody.    3.  Do  you  like  it  in  the  country?   4.  I  do.    5.  Come 
when  it  pleases  you.    6.  At  what  are  you  laughing?    7.  I  beg  your 
pardon,  I  didn't  laugh.    8.  Don't  laugh  at  the  misfortunes  of  others. 

9.  They  always  laughed  at  us.     10.  We  shall  laugh  if  it  (that) 
pleases  us.    11.  They  laughed  very  much  at  it. 

C.  1.  The  architect  desired  the  plan  to  please  you.    2.  We  never 
liked  it  in  the  country.    3.  I  don't  think  you  will  enjoy  it  there. 
4.  He  tries  to  please  everybody.    5.  He  will  please  nobody.    6.  That 
child  was  always  laughing  and  singing.    7.  Why  do  you  laugh  at 
that?    8.  I  don't  wisri  you  to  laugh  at  it.    9.  Why  did  you  laugh  a 
moment  ago?    10.  It  wasn't  necessary  that  he  should  laugh.    11.  I 
always  have  to  laugh  when  I  see  that. 


184  LESSON  LXXXII  [§202 

LESSON  LXXXII 

202.  Omission   of   Article.  —  1.  The    article   is    omitted   in 
many  expressions  made  up  of  a  verb  +  a  noun: 

J'ai  soif ;  il  a  bien  faim.  /  am  thirsty;  he  is  very  hungry. 

Je  vous  demande  pardon.  I  beg  your  pardon. 

(a)  Examples  are:  avoir  besoin,  need;  avoir  chaud  (froid),  be  warm  (cold); 
avoir  faim  (soif,  sommeil),  be  hungry  (thirsty,  sleepy);  avoir  raison  (tort),  be 
right  or  be  in  the  right  (wrong) ;  f aire   chaud  (froid) ,  be  warm   (cold) ;  f aire 
attention,  pay  attention;  prendre  garde,  take  care;  very,  quite,  are  expressed 
commonly  by  bien  (sometimes  tres). 

(b)  Compare  also  the  omission  of  the  article  in  prepositional  phrases  like 
•apres  (le)  diner,  after  dinner;  avec  plaisir,  with  pleasure,  and  many  others. 

2.  Contrary  to  English  usage,  un  (une)  stands  before  an  ab- 
stract noun  adjectivally  modified: 

II  montra  un  soin  extreme.  He  showed  extreme  care. 

Une  patience  a  toute  epreuve.          Patience  equal  to  anything. 

(a)  Compare  also  expressions  like  J'ai  une  soif  ardente,  I  have  (a)  burning 
thirst;  II  fait  un  froid  terrible,  It  is  terribly  cold. 

203.  Article  for  Possessive  Adjective.  —  1.  The  definite  arti- 
cle is  frequently  so  used  when  no  ambiguity  results,  but  is  not 
always  obligatory: 

Donnez-moi  la  main.  Give  me  your  hand. 

II  a  perdu  la  vie.  He  has  lost  his  life. 

Elle  s'est  dechire  la  main.  She  has  torn  her  hand. 

Son  (le)  bras  lui  fait  mal.  His  arm  hurts  him. 

2.  So  also  with  avoir  mal  (froid,  chaud,  etc.,  cf.  §  202),  and 
in  phrases  of  description  with  avoir : 

J'ai  mal  a  la  tete  (aux  dents).          I  have  a  headache  (toothache). 
Avez-vous  froid  aux  mains?  Are  your  hands  cold? 

H  a  le  nez  long  (or  un  long  nez).     He  has  a  long  nose. 

3.  When  the  object  possessed  is  singular  as  regards  each  pos- 
sessor, it  regularly  remains  singular,  even  though  more  than  one 
possessor  is  denoted: 

Us  ont  perdu  la  vie.  They  have  lost  their  lives. 

Us  ont  ote  leur  chapeau.  They  took  off  their  hats. 

Us  sont  entre*s,  le  chapeau  sur  la  They  came  in  with  their  hats  on 

tete.  their  heads. 


§204]  LESSON  LXXXII  185 

204.  Observe  the  constructions  in  the  following: 

II  fait  froid.  It  (the  weather)  is  cold. 

Il*fait  froid  ce  matin.  It's  a  cold  morning. 

II  fait  froid  dans  cette  salle.  It  is  cold  in  this  hall  (this  hall  is 

cold). 

J'ai  froid.  /  am  cold. 

L'eau  est  froide.  The  water  is  cold. 

J'ai  froid  aux  mains.  My  hands  are  cold. 

Vous  avez  les  mains  froides.  Your  hands  are  cold. 

EXERCISE  LXXXII 

ardent,  ardent,  burning  Pordonnance,  f.,  prescription 

bonsoir,  good  evening  (night)  le  pore,  pore 

le  corps,  body  retaWi,  restored  (in  health),  well 

la  douleur,  pain  again 

eleve,  high  le  rhume,  cold 

eternuer,  sneeze  secouer,  shake 

garder,  keep  le  sejour,  sojourn,  stay 

la  gorge,  throat  la  temperature,  temperature 

gravement,  gravely  terrible,  terrible 

la  grippe,  l  grippe,'  influenza  le  thermometre,  thermometer 

humide,  damp  tousser,  cough 

le  midi,  south  transpirer,  perspire 

cette  dent  me  fait  mal,  this  tooth  pains  (hurts)  me;  j'ai  un  .mal  de  dents 
terrible,  /  have  a  dreadful  toothache;  comment  allez-vous?  how  are 
you?  comment  ca  va-t-il?  (fam.),  how  are  you?  ca  va  mal  (fam.),  / 
am  not  (very)  well;  prenez  garde  a  vous,  take  care  of  yourself;  faire 
une  ordonnance,  write  (give)  a  prescription;  qu'avez-vous?  what  is 
the  matter  with  you? 

A.  1.  Depuis  quelque  temps  il  fait  trop  froid  et  trop  humide. 
2.  Beaucoup  de  gens  ont  des  rhumes.  3.  Moi  j'ai  pris  la  grippe. 
4.  J'ai  mal  a  la  tete  et  a  la  gorge.  5.  Je  tousse  et  eternue  beau- 
coup.  6.  J'ai  des  douleurs  par  tout  le  corps.  7.  Les  bras  et  les 
jambes  me  font  bien  mal.  8.  J'ai  un  mal  de  dents  terrible.  9.  Je 
n'ai  pas  tres  faim,  mais  j'ai  une  soif  ardente.  10.  J'ai  tellement 
chaud  que  je  transpire  par  tous  les  pores.  11.  Mon  pere  a  envoy  e* 
chercher  le  medecin.  12.  Le  voila  qui  sonne.  13.  "Bonsoir,  mon- 
sieur le  docteur.  — 14.  Bonsoir,  Pierre,  comment  Qa  va-t-il?  — 
15.  Qa  va  mal,  docteur.  16.  Je  souffre  partout."  17.  En  me  ta- 


186  LESSON  LXXXII  [§204 

tant  le  pouls  il  me  dit  que  j'ai  les  mains  bien  chaudes.  18.  II  me 
met  un  thermometre  sous  la  langue.  19.  II  regarde  son  thermometre 
et  secoue  gravement  la  tete.  20.  "  Vous  avez  la  temperature  ^ien 
eleve*e.  21.  Prenez  garde  a  vous.  22.  Vous  garderez  le  lit  quelques 
jours,  n'est-ce  pas?  23.  Je  vous  ferai  une  ordonnance.  24.  Quand 
vous  aurez  pris  le  remede  vous  irez  mieux.  25.  Puis  le  temps 
changera;  il  fera  plus  beau.  26.  Vous  serez  bientot  completement 
retabli.  27.  Vous  pourrez  peut-etre  aussi  faire  un  petit  sejour  dans 
le  Midi.  28.  On  guerit  souvent  en  changeant  d'air." 

B.  (Oral  on  A.) 

C.  1.  The  weather  has  been  very  damp.    2.  You  have  a  cold, 
haven't  you?    3.  Yes,  and  .my  head  is  aching.    4.  My  sister  has  a 
sore  throat.    5.  Everybody  is  sneezing  and  coughing.    6.  My  father 
is  ill.     7.  What  is  the  matter  with  him?     8.  He  has  taken  the 
'grippe/     9.  He  has  pains  all  over  his  body.    10.  These  children 
are  very  cold.    11.  They  were  playing  in  the  yard  and  their  hands 
and  feet  are  cold.    12.  They  are  very  hungry  and  very  thirsty  too. 

D.  1.  How  are  you?    2.  What  is  the  matter  with  you?    3.  The 
doctor  will  put  a  thermometer  under  your  tongue.    4.  Take  care 
of  yourself.    5.  You  must  keep  to  your  bed.    6.  You  will  be  better 
to-morrow.    7.  Your  hands  are  hot,  but  your  temperature  is  not 
very  high.    8.  Here  is  a  prescription  I  have  written  (faire)  for  you. 
9.  This  medicine  will  do  you  good  (du  bien).     10.  Make  a  short 
(petit)  stay  in  the  south  and  you  will  be  completely  restored  [to 
health].    11.  You  are  quite  right;  I  shall  do  so  (it).    12.  I  shall  get 
well  by  changing  climate. 

E.  1.  It  is  warm  in  winter  in  the  south  of  France.    2.  When  I 
was  skating  my  feet  were  very  cold.    3.  I  suffered  a  great  deal  from 
it.     4.  But  I  am  quite  warm  now.     5.  I  have  a  bad  (use  bien) 
headache,  and  I  have  a  toothache  also.    6.  Our  professor  has  a  sore 
throat  and  must  keep  [to]  the  house.    7.  Are  you  too  warm?   8.  No, 
I  am  too  cold.    9.  When  we  are  hungry  we  eat  slices  of  bread  and 
butter.    10.  If  we  are  thirsty,  we  like  water  better  than  wine.    11.  I 
am  terribly  thirsty.    12.  Give  me  a  glass  of  water,  if  you  please. 

F.  1.  It  was  so  cold  that  I  had  to  put  on  warmer  clothes.    2.  If 
you  are  cold,  take  a  cup  of  hot  coffee.    3.  You  said  it  was  warmer 


§205]  LESSON  LXXXIII  187 

to-day,  but  I  think  you  are  wrong.  4.  It  is  colder.  5.  I  beg  your 
pardon;  I  am  right.  6.  Monkeys  have  long  arms  and  small  heads. 
7.  Those  bad  boys  entered  the  classroom  with  their  hats  on  their 
heads.  8.  My  father  almost  lost  his  life  in  a  railway  accident. 
9.  He  has  (is)  not  completely  recovered  yet.  10.  His  arm  hurts 
him  still. 

LESSON  LXXXIII 

205.  Tenir,  'hold' 

tenir  tenant  tenu  tiens  tins 

(a)  Tenir  is  conjugated  precisely  like  venir  (cf.  §  167). 
Like  tenir:  appartenir,  belong;  obtenir,  obtain;  contenir,  contain. 
Like  venir:  devenir,  become  (of). 

EXERCISE  LXXXIII 

la  permission,  permission  tenir  de,  take  after 

le  porte-monnaie,  purse 

A.  (Oral.)     Continue:  1.  Qu'est-ce  que  je  deviendrai  (devien- 
drais)?     2.  Je  suis  devenue  heureuse.     3.  Je  devenais  tres  riche. 
4.  Ma  mere  desire  que  je  devienne  plus  sage,  .  .  .  tu.    5.  J'obtiens 
(obtins)  ainsi  un  bon  prix.    6.  J'obtiendrai  (obtiendrais)  la  permis- 
sion d'y  entrer.    7.  J'appartiens  a  cet  endroit. 

B.  1.  The  boxes  contained  pencils  and  pens.     2.  A  glass  con- 
taining milk  was  on  the  table.    3.  This  purse  contains  all  my  money. 
4.  They  have  become  very  poor.     5.  What  has  become  of  him 
(her)?    6.  What  has  become  of  my  pens?    7.  To  whom  did  that 
castle  belong?    8.  I  ask  [for]  what  belongs  to  me.    9.  Some  pictures 
belonging  to  this  artist  have  been  stolen.    10.  What  price  will  you 
obtain? 

C.  1.  This  young  man  has  become  [a]  doctor.     2.  What  will 
(would)  become  of  us?    3.  This  field  belonged  to  my  father's  prop- 
erty.   4.  It  will  become  my  property  when  my  uncle  dies.    5.  They 
say  that  living  will  become  dearer.    6.  We  shall  obtain  (the)  per- 
mission to  stay.    7.  He  held  the  letter  in  his  hand.    8.  I  wish  that 
you  may  become  happier.    9.  The  son  takes  after  his  father.    10.  I 
hope  the  letter  will  contain  money.    11.  Don't  hold  your  pen  like 
that. 


188  LESSON  LXXXIV  [§206 


LESSON  LXXXIV 

206.  Adjectives  and  Nouns.  —  1.  Review  §  34,  and  observe: 
causeur,  m.,  causeuse,  f.,  chatty  (adj.),  a  chatty  person  (noun) 
flatteur,  m.,  flatteuse,  f.,  flattering  (adj.),  a  flatterer  (noun) 
createur,  m.,  creatrice,  f.,  creative  (adj.),  a  creator  (noun) 

(a)  When  a  corresponding  present  participle  exists,  -eur  of  nouns  and 
adjectives  becomes  -euseinthe  feminine,  Ex.  1  and  2  (cf.  causant,  flattant); 
otherwise  -teur  becomes  -trice  in  the  feminine,  Ex.  3. 

2.  The  feminine  of  many  nouns  is  formed  like  that  of  adjec- 
tives of  the  same  ending: 

ecolier,  -ere,  schoolboy  instituteur,  -trice,  teacher 

paysan,  -anne,  peasant  citadin,  -e,  inhabitant  of  the  town 

207.  Agreement  of  Adjectives.  —  Review  §  14,  and  observe 
the  following  special  cases:  — 

1.  Adjectives  used  as  adverbs  are  regularly  invariable: 
Ces  roses  sentent  bon.  These  roses  smell  sweet. 

2.  Nouns  serving  as  adjectives  of  colour  are  invariable: 
Des  robes  lilas  (citron) .  Purple  (lemon-coloured)  dresses, 
(a)  But  rose,  cramoisi,  pourpre,  agree  like  adjectives. 

3.  A  very  few  adjectives  are  always  invariable: 
Vingt  livres  sterling.  Twenty  pounds  sterling. 

4.  With  avoir  1'air,  the  adjective  agrees  either  with  air  (m.), 
or  with  the  subject  (d'etre  being  expressed  or  implied): 

Elle  a  1'air  doux.  She  has  a  gentle  air  (appearance). 

Elle  a  1'air  (d'etre)  douce.  She  seems  or  looks  gentle.  0 

(a)  Either  expression  may  be  used  without  distinction. 

5.  The  peculiar  agreement  with  gens : 

Les  vieilles  gens  sont  positifs.  Old  people  are  practical. 

Toutes  les  vieilles  gens.  All  the  old  people. 

Tous  les  (ces)  habiles  gens.  All  the  (those)  clever  people. 

Les  gens  sont  tous  ici.  The  people  are  all  here. 


§208]  LESSON  LXXXIV  189 

(a)  All  forms  agreeing  with  gens  are  plural. 

(6)  An  adjective  is  feminine  before  gens  and  masculine  after  it,  Ex.  1 
and  2,  but  cf.  c. 

(c)  All  =  toutes  only  when  separated  from  gens  by  an  adjective  vari- 
able for  the  feminine,  Ex.  2;  otherwise  tous,  Ex.  3  and  4. 

NOTE.  —  Jeunes  gens  =  young  men,  young  people,  is  always  masculine, 
and  also  gens  used  as  an  antecedent,  e.g.  Les  gens  qui  sont  venus. 

208.  Comparatives.  —  1.  Review  §  56,  and  contrast  the 
French  and  English  forms  of  the  following: 

De  plus  en  plus  violent.  More  and  more  violent. 

Plus  il  devient  riche  moins  il  est    The  richer  he  becomes  the  less  gen- 

genereux.  erous  he  is. 

II  en  sera  d'autant  plus  riche.  He  will  be  the  richer  for  it. 

Le  carnage  fut  d'autant  plus  grand    The  carnage  was  the  greater  because 

qu'ils  etaient  plus  nombreux.  they  were  more  numerous. 

2.  A  finite  verb  completing  a  comparison  is  preceded  by  ne, 
unless  the  preceding  verb  is  negative: 

C'est  meilleur  que  je  ne  croyais.      It  is  better  than  I  thought. 
Ce  n'est  pas  si  mal  que  je  croyais.     It  is  not  so  bad  as  I  thought. 

3.  When  aussi  (or  si)  is  omitted,  comme  (not  que)  is  used: 
Un  r6i  riche  comme  Cresus.  A  king  as  rich  as  Croesus. 

EXERCISE  LXXXIV 

agricole,  agricultural  gai,  gay,  merry,  cheerful 

Pair,  m.,  air,  appearance  horticole,  horticultural 

le  bouquet,  bouquet,  nosegay  Pinstituteur,  m.,  f.  -trice,  teacher 

la  bouquetiere,  flower  girl  •  le  lilas,  lilac;  adj.,  purple 

la  boutonniere,  buttonhole  nouveau,  new,  novel 

charmant,  charming  le  parterre,  flower  garden 

le  citadin,  f .  -e,  townsman  le  produit,  product 

coiffer,  dress  the  hair  (head)  promener,  lead  or  take  about 

le  concours,  competition,  show  la  prosperite,  prosperity 

doux,  gentle,  mild  la  rose,  rose 

Pecolier,  m.,  f.  -ere,  schoolboy  serieux,  serious 

(girl)  le  signe,  sign 

les  environs,  m.,  neighbourhood  la  tente,  tent 

coup  d'oail,  glance,  prospect,  sight,  view;  a  la  (sc.  mode)  francaise,  in  the 
French  style  or  fashion;  neuf,  new  (not  old),  nouveau,  new,  fresh, 
novel 


190  LESSON  I/XXXIV  [§208 

A.  (Concours  agricole  et  horticole)    1.  Tous  les  braves  gens  des 
environs  y  arrivent  a  pied  ou  en  voiture.     2.  Les  paysans  y  ap- 
portent  les  produits  des  champs,  les  paysannes  ceux  du  verger  et  du 
parterre.    3.  On  y  amene  aussi  lee  boeufs  et  les  vaches.    4.  Us  sont 
au  pare  a  Tombre.    5.  Les  vaches  ont  Fair  tres  douces,  n'est-ce 
pas?    6.  Les  paysans  sont  bons  pour  leurs  betes  et  leur  donnent  a 
manger.    7.  On  met  les  fleurs  et  les  fruits  sous  des  tentes.    8.  Les 
fleurs  sentent  bon  et  offrent  un"  coup  d'ceil  charmant.     9.  Les 
pommes  ont  Fair  d'etre  mures.    10.  II  fait  beau  et  il  y  a  beaucoup 
de  monde.     11.  Les   citadins,   hommes   d'affaires,   observent  les 
signes  de  la  prosperite  du  pays.     12.  Les  citadines  cherchent  de 
nouvelles  especes  de  fleurs  ou  de  fruits.    13.  Un  instituteur  et  une 
institutrice  promenent  leurs  ecoliers  et  leurs  ^coheres  pour  les  ins- 
truire.    14.  Une  jolie  bouquetiere  en  robe  lilas  et  coiffee  a  Tita- 
lienne  vend  des  fleurs.     15.  Tous  les  jeunes  gens  en  achetent  pour 
mettre  a  leur  boutonniere.    16.  Toutes  les  vieilles  gens  s'occupent 
d'affaires  serieuses. 

B.  (Oral.)    Read  A  aloud,  turning  present  tenses  into  the  imperfect. 

C.  1.  The  country  people  of  the  neighbourhood  are  coming  to 
the  agricultural  show.    2.  They  will  bring  to  it  the  products  of  the 
fields.    3.  The  oxen  and  cows  will  be  brought  too.    4.  And  they 
do  not  forget  the  products  of  the  orchard  and  flower  garden.    5.  The 
animals  look  so  gentle.    6.  Look  at  the  flowers  in  ( =  under)  the 
tents.     7.  What  a  pretty  sight!     8.  And  they  smell  so  sweet! 
9.  Smell  this  bouquet.    10.  These  pears  look  ripe.    11.  It  is  a  new 
kind  of  pear.    12.  These  are  business  men.    13.  They  are  townsmen. 

14.  The  townswomen  hope  to  find  new  kinds  of  roses  or  of  fruits. 

15.  The  teachers  (/.)  will  bring  their  schoolgirls  here.     16.  All  the 
young  men  will  buy  flowers  from  the  flower  girls.    17.  Do  you  see 
that  young  countrywoman  dressed  in  the  Italian  fashion?     18.  I 
mean  the  young  woman  in  [a]  purple  dress. 

D.  1.  All  the  young  people  are  merry.    2.  All  the  old  people  are 
more  serious.    3.  The  older  you  are  the  more  serious  you  become. 
4.  These  worthy  people  are  kind  to  everybody.    5.  Everybody  is 
kind  to  them.    6.  We  observed  many  signs  of  prosperity  at  the  hor- 
ticultural show.     7.  The  teachers  (m.)  were  taking  their  scholars 
about  (there).     8,  They  wanted  to  show  them  something  new. 


§209]  LESSON  LXXXV  191 

9.  The  schoolboys  asked  their  teachers  many  questions.  10.  The 
schoolgirls  admired  the  flowers.  11.  They  have  bought  some  pretty 
ones  for  their  teachers  (/.).  12.  Old  people  are  more  serious  than 
young  people.  13. 1  am  more  serious  than  I  used  to  be  (I') .  14.  This 
young  countrywoman  looks  very  intelligent.  15.  She  sold  a  good 
many  flowers  to  the  young  men.  16.  The  younger  one  is  the  more 
one  spends.  17.  We  become  wiser  and  wiser  as  we  become  old. 
18.  My  old  friend  has  become  as  rich  as  Croesus  in  South  America. 


LESSON  LXXXV 

209.         Cueillir,  *  pluck,'  *  gather';  ouvrir,  'open'; 
tressaillir,  'start,'  'Ifgqfifif* 

cueillir  cueillant  cueilli  cueille  cueillis 

ouvrir  ouvrant  ouvert  ouvre  ouvris 

tressaillir       tressaillant       tressailli        tressaille       ,tressaillis 
Like  ouvrir:  couvrir,  cover;  decouvrir,  discover;  s'ouvrir,  open  (intr.). 

EXERCISE  LXXXV 
Colomb,  Columbus  Pexposition,  f.,  exhibition 

A.  (Oral.)    Continue:  1.  Je  tressaille  (tressaillais,  tressaillis)  de 
joie.     2.  J'ouvre  (ouvrais,  ouvris)  la  malle.     3.  Ouvre  la  porte. 

4.  Couvre-toi  la  tete,  .  .  .  nous.    5.  Je  cueille  (cueillais,  cueillis) 
des  fleurs  pour  en  faire  un  bouquet.    6.  Leslettres  que  j'ai  ouvertes. 
7.  J'ouvrirai  les  fenetres.    8.  II  faut  que  je  les  ouvre. 

B.  1.  She  starts  when  she  hears  a  noise.    2.  They  were  trem- 
bling with  fear.    3.  Open  the  door,  please.    4.  I  have  opened  it. 

5.  The  door  opens  (reflex.).    6.  I  was  opening  my  letters  when  he 
came.    7.  I  am  (was)  gathering  flowers  to  make  a  bouquet.    8.  Here 
are  the  flowers  I  have  gathered  for  the  exhibition.    9.  Let  her  gather 
the  prettiest  flowers.    10.  When  will  you  pick  your  apples?    11.  The 
fields  were  covered  with  snow. 

C.  1.  The  windows  are  not  open;  open  them.    2.  I  wish  him  to 
open  his  valise.    3.  The  king  in  person  opened  (p.  def.)  the  exhi- 
bition.   4.  On  opening  the  letter  she  trembled.    5.  Cover  your  head 
or  you  will  catch  cold.     6.  The  table  was  covered1  with  papers. 


192  LESSON   LXXXVI  [§210 

7.  She  trembles  (trembled)  with  joy.  8.  They  started  at  the  noise 
of  the  train.  9.  We  are  covering  the  apples  with  straw.  10.  Where 
are  the  flowers  that  you  were  gathering?  11.  Columbus  .discovered 
America  in  1492. 

LESSON  LXXXVI 

210.  Personal   Pronoun.  —  The    following    special    cases    of 
agreement  should  be  noted :  — 

1.  The  invariable  forms  il  (subject)  and  le  (direct  object)  are 
used  when  the  antecedent  is  indefinite  or  absent: 

Y  en  a-t-il?  —  Je  le  crois.  Is  there  any?  —  /  think  so. 

Je  le  ferai  si  vous  le  desirez.  /  shall  do  so  if  you  wish  (it). 

Nous  Pavons  emporte.  We  have  carried  the  day. 

2.  So  also  the  pronominal  adverbs  en  and  y: 

Voyons!  oil  en  etions-nous?  Let  me  see!  where  were  wef 

Quoiqu'il  en  soit.  However  it  may  be. 

Votre  pere  y  est-il?  7s  your  father  in  (at  home)? 

3.  Le  (la,  les)  sometimes  has  predicative  force: 
Etes-vous  sa  mere?  —  Je  la  suis.         Are  you  his  mother?  —  /  am. 
Etes-vous  Mme  B.?  —  Je  la  suis.          Are  you  Mrs.  B.f  —  I  am. 
Etes-vous  fatiguee?  —  Je  le  suis.         Are  you  tired?  —  /  am. 
Sont-ils  soldats?  —  Us  le  sont  Are  they  soldiers?  —  They  are. 
Soyez  braves  et  je  le  serai.                   Be  brave  and  I  shall  be  so. 

(a)  If  le  refers  to  a  determinate  substantive  (not  partitive),  it  agrees, 
Ex.  1  and  2;  otherwise  it  is  invariable,  Ex.  3,  4  and  5. 

211.  Possessives.  —  Review  §§  15,  16,  83-85,  and  observe:  — 

1.  The  use  of  the  possessive  adjective  in  polite  address: 
Bon  jour  mon  pere  (mon  colonel).        Good  morning,  father  (colonel). 
Mademoiselle  votre  soeur  y  est-      7s  your  sister  at  home? 

elle? 

(a)  In  direct  address  mon  (ma,  etc.)  commonly  precedes  a  noun  of  re- 
lationship (but  not  papa,  maman)  or  the  title  of  a  superior  officer;  votre  (vos) 
is  often  preceded  by  monsieur  (madame,  etc.). 

2.  Own  =  propre,  or  is  expressed  by  a+  a  pronoun: 

Je  Pai  fait  de  mes  propres  mains.        I  did  it  with  my  own  hands. 
C'est  mon  opinion  a  moi.  It  is  my  own  opinion. 

II  a  une  maison  a  lui.  He  has  a  house  of  his  own. 


§212]  LESSON  LXXXVI  193 

3.  Ambiguity  is  sometimes  avoided  by  using  &,  thus: 
Son  pere  &  lui  (a  elle).  His  (her)  father. 

4.  The  possessive  pronoun  may  be  used  absolutely: 
Je  ne  demande  que  le  mien.  /  ask  only  what  is  mine. 

Les  miens.  My  family  (friends,  party,  etc.). 

212.  Relative  Pronoun.  —  1.  For  the  general  rules,  see  §§  92- 
98. 

2.  Qui  without  antecedent  means  he  who,  the  one(s)   who, 
those  who,  and  when  repeated  some  .  .  .  others: 

Qui  s'excuse  s'accuse.  He   who    excuses    himself  accuses 

himself. 
Qui  d'un  cote  qui  de  Fautre.  Some  on  one  side  some  on  the  other. 

3.  Observe  de  quoi  =  " ce  qui  est  necessaire  pour": 
II  a  de  quoi  vivre.  He  is  well  off. 
Donnez-moi  de  quoi  ecrire.  Give  me  something  to  write  with. 
Merci!  —  II  n'y  a  pas  de  quoi.         Thanks!  —  Don't  mention  it  (e(c.). 

EXERCISE  LXXXVI 

Pachat,  m.,  purchase  faible,  weak 

Pavoine,  f .,  oats  la  ferme,  farmhouse 

la  basse-cour,  farmyard  le  foin,  hay 

la  charrue,  plough  Phectare,  m.,  about  2%  acres 

comprendre,  irreg.,  understand         le  labour,  ploughing 
le  cultivateur,  farmer  la  moissonneuse,  reaping  machine 

le  cure,  parish  priest,  cure    •  nommer,  name,  appoint 

le  droit,  right  Porge,  f.,  barley 

Pecurie,  f.,  (horse)  stable  pareillement,  equally,  likewise,  also 

enchante,  charmed,  delighted  le  proprietaire,  proprietor,  landlord 

Pexistence,  f .,  existence  le  republican!,  republican 

exploiter,  exploit,  work  la  terre,  earth,  land 

ils  se  serrent  la  main,  they  shake  hands;  c'est  la  ma  maison,  that  is  my 
house  (there)',  il  m'en  veut,  he  has  a  grudge  against  me;  je  n'y  com- 
prends  rien,  I  don't  understand  it  at  all;  oft  en  etes-vous  de  .  .  .? 
how  far  are  you  on  with  .  .  .?  j'en  ai  pour  .  .  .,  7  have  .  .  .  worth  of  it; 
ils  Pont  emporte,  they  have  won,  have  carried  the  day;  il  y  va  de  ma  vie, 
my  life  is  at  stake;  e'en  est  fait  de  moi,  it  is  all  over  (all  up)  with  me; 
que  voulez-vous  que  j'y  fasse?  what  am  I  to  do?  hoy>  can  I  help  it? 
what  can  you  expect?  etc. 


194  LESSON  LXXXVI  [§212 

A.  Continue:  1.  Je  ne  lui  en  veux  pas.     2.  Je  n'y  ai  rien  compris. 
3.  Ou  en  suis-je  de  mes  preparatlfs?  .  .  .  tu  .  .  .  tes.     4.  Est-ce  que 
j'y  comprends  quelque  chose?    5.  Je  Femporterai  sur  eux.    6.  C'en 
est  fait  de  mqi, .  .  .  toi.     7.  II  y  va  de  ma  vie,  .  .  .  ta.     8.  J'ai  une 
maison  a  moi,  tu  .  .  .  a  toi.     9.  Je  ne  demande  que  le  mien,  tu  .  .  . 
le  tien. 

B.  (Dans  la  basse-cour)  1.  "Bonjour,  monsieur  le  cure.  —  2.  Bon- 
jour,  mon  enfant.    Monsieur  votre  pere  y  est-il?  —  3.  Je  vais  Fap- 
peler."      4.  M.   Legrand,  gros    cultivateur,   arrive.     5.  Le  cure, 
recemment  nomine,  et  lui  se  serrent   la   main.      6.  "Vous   etes 
monsieur  le  cure?  —  7.  Et  vous,  monsieur  Legrand?    Je  suis  en- 
chante  de  faire  votre  connaissance.  —  8.  Moi  pareillement,  mon- 
sieur le  cure.  —  9.  C'est  la  votre  maison?  — 10.  Oui,  c'est  la  la 
ferme.    11.  Et  plus  loin  c'est  le  chateau  du  proprietaire.    12.  J'ex- 
ploite  quatre-vingts  hectares  dont  la  moitie  est  a  lui  et  Fautre 
moitie  a  moi.    13.  C'est  de  la  bonne  terre.    14.  Les  miens  et  moi 
sommes  tres  heureux.     15.  Mais  depuis  Fachat  de  mes  quarante 
hectares  notre  proprietaire  nous  en  veut.     16.  Je  n'y  comprends 

•  rien.  17.  Quoi!  je  n'aurais  pas  le  droit  d'acheter  des  terres?  — 
18.  Mais  ou  en  etes-vous  de  votre  re*colte,  dit  le  cure.  — 19.  Nous 
en  sommes  aux  trois  quarts.  20.  Le  foin,  Favoine  et  Forge  sont 
tres  bons.  21.  J'en  aurai  pour  dix  mille  francs.  22.  Voici  Fe*curie. 
23.  Les  chevaux  n'y  sont  pas.  24.  Us  font  marcher  la  moissonneuse 
dans  les  bles,  et  les  boeufs  sont  au  labour.  25.  Nous  labourons  en 
ce  moment  avec  trois  charrues.  26.  A  propos,  avez-vous  des  nou- 
velles  des  elections  d'hier?  —  27.  Les  republicans  Font  emporte* 
sur  les  notres.  28.  Quel  dommage!  29.  II  y  va  de  Fexistence  de 
Feglise,  et  peut-etre  de  la  France.  30.  C'en  est  fait  de  nous. 
31.  Mais  que  voulez-vous  que  nous  y  fassions?  32.  Nous  sommes 
les  plus  faibles." 

C.  (Oral  on  B.) 

D.  Supply  the  proper  form  of  le:  1.  fites-vous  Anglais?    Nous 
.  .  .  sommes.    2.  fites-vous  Finstitutrice?    Je  .  .  .  suis.    3.  Sont-ils 
heureux?    Us  ...  sont.    4.  Sont-ce  de  braves  gens?    II  ,  .  .  sont. 
5.  fites-vous  fatigue*es?    Nous  .  .  .  sommes.    6.  fites-vous  la  femme 
du  cultivateur?    Je  .  .  .  suis. 


§213]  LESSON  LXXXVII  195 

E.  1.  The  new  parish  priest  met  the  boy  in  the  barnyard.    2.  He 
asked  him  if  his  father  was  in.    3.  He  went  to  get  his  father.    4.  The 
big  farmer  and  the  priest  shook  hands.    5.  The  priest  was  delighted 
to  make  his  acquaintance.     6.  That  is  the  farmhouse  behind  the 
trees.    7.  That  is  my  landlord's  castle.    8.  The  farmer  had  land  of 
his  own.     9.  Half  the  land  he  worked  belonged  to  him.     10.  He 
and  his  [family]  were  well  off.    11.  But  their  landlord  had  a  grudge 
against  them.     12.  They  couldn't  understand  it  at  all.     13.  The 
priest  asked  him  how  far  he  was  on  with  his  harvest.     14.  The 
hay,  oats  and  barley  were  already  cut.     15.  He  had  5000  francs' 
worth  of  them.    16.  Some  of  the  harvesters  were  cutting  the  wheat 
(plur.).     17.  We  use  reaping  machines  for  that.     18.  Other  men  are 
ploughing  the  fields  with  two  ploughs.    19.  To  plough  they  use 
oxen.     20.  The  republicans  won  at  the  elections.     21.  Our  party 
(§  211,  4)  was  beaten,   said  the  priest.    22.  But  what  can  you 
expect? 

F.  1.  However  it  may  be,  I  am  not  satisfied.    2.  I  shall  accom- 
pany you  if  you  wish  (it).    3.  I  should  be  delighted  if  you  did  so. 
4.  He  is  wrong,  but  I  will  not  tell  him  so.    5.  I  have  made  this 
bread  with  my  own  hands.    6.  Have  you  a  house  of  your  own,  or 
do  you  live  with  your  relations?    7.  You  have  been  very  kind  to  me 
and  mine.    8.  I  thank  you  for  it.    9.  Don't  mention  it.    10.  Our 
party  will  carry  the  day  at  the  elections,  I  am  certain  (of  it).  11.  Are 
you  republicans?    12.  We  are.     13.  Good  evening,  aunt;  are  you 
ready  to  (a)  go?    14.  I  am;  let  us  go.     15.  You  seem  to  have  a 
grudge  against  me.     16.  We  have  read  this  work  (ouvrage),  but 
we  don't  understand  it  at  all.     17.  If  you  don't  change  [your] 
manner-of -living  (vie),  it  is  all  up  with  you. 


LESSON  LXXXVII 

213.     Craindre,  i  fear ' ;  joindre,  i  join ' ;  peindre,  '  paint ' 

craindre  craignant        craint  crains  craignis 

joindre  joignant          joint  joins  joignis 

peindre  peignant         peint  peins  peignis 

(a)   Note  the  similarity  of  these  verbs  in  conjugation. 

Like  craindre:  plaindre,  pity;  se  plaindre,  complain. 


196  LESSON  LXXXVIII  (§214 

EXERCISE  LXXXVH 

Partiste,  m.  or  f.,  artist  le  portrait,  portrait 

malheureux,  unfortunate 

A.  (Oral.)    Continue:  1.  Je  crains  (craignais)  de  tomber.    2.  Ne 
crains  rien.    3.  Ne  te  plains  pas  de  cela.    4.  Je  peins  (peignais)  un 
paysage.    5.  Les  paysages  que  j'ai  peints  .  .  .  que  tu.    6.  II  voudrait 
que  je  lui  peigne  un  tableau,  .  .  .  tu.    7.  Je  joignis  les  bouts  et  les 
cousis  ensemble.    8.  Je  peignis  la  boiserie.    9.  Je  plaignais  les  pau- 
vres  par  (in)  ce  temps  d'hiver. 

B.  1.  You  paint  very  well.    2.  Which  (plur.)  of  the  pictures  have 
you  painted?    3.  Pity  my  misfortunes.    4.  I  pity  you;  you  are  very 
unhappy.    5.  We  do  not  complain.    6.  Join  the  ends  of  this  piece 
of  cloth  and  sew  them  together.    7.  They  feared  to  miss  the  train. 
8.  Would  you  fear  to  arrive  too  late?    9.  The  fortunate  do  not  al- 
ways pity  the  unfortunate. 

C.  1.  Where  is  the  portrait  you  were  painting?    2.  I  should  like 
you  to  paint  my  portrait.    3.  Who  painted  this  landscape?    4.  That 
artist  painted  (p.  def.)  many  landscapes.    5.  Let  us  pity  the  unfor- 
tunate.   6.  What  does  he  fear?    7.  He  will  fear  to  meet  us.    8.  We 
feared  to  say  a  single  word.    9.  They  were  always  complaining. 


LESSON  LXXXVIII 

214.  On.  —  Review  §  38,  and  observe  further: 

On  est  triste  quand  on  a  faim.  A  man  is  sad  when  he  is  hungry. 

On  se  demands  si,  etc.  People  wonder  whether,  etc. 

On  perdrait  son  temps.  You  would  lose  your  time. 

Lorsqu'on  presse  trop  un  poisson  When  you  hold  a  fish  too  tightly  it 
il  vous  echappe.  escapes  you. 

(a)   On  as  subject  is  repeated  if  necessary,  Ex.  1. 

(6)  The  reflexive  pronoun  corresponding  to  on  is  se  and  the  possessive 
is  son,  Ex.  2  and  3. 

(c)  Since  on  serves  only  as  subject,  the  corresponding  objective  forms 
are  borrowed  from  vous,  etc.,  Ex.  4. 


§215]  LESSON   LXXXVIII  197 

215.  Whoever,  whatever.    Observe  the  following: 
Qui  que  tu  sois  (vous  soyez).  Whoever  you  are  (=  may  be). 

Quiconque  parlera  sera  puni(e).       Whoever  speaks  will  be  punished. 
Une  plume  quelconque.  Any  pen  whatever  (some,  any  kind 

of  a  pen,  some  pen  or  other). 
Quelques  efforts  qu'il  fasse.  Whatever    efforts   he   makes    (may 

make) . 

Quelle  qu'en  soit  la  cause.  Whatever  (may)  be  the  cause  of  it. 

Quoi  que  ce  soit.  Whatever  it  be  (is,  may  be). 

Quoi  que  vous  fassiez.  Whatever  you  (may)  do. 

(a)  Whoever  =  qui  que  with  etre  (subjunctive),  Ex.  1,  and  elsewhere  qui- 
conque,  Ex.  2;  other  equivalents  are:  celui  qui  (cf.  §  82),  or  qui  (cf.  §  212,  2). 

(6)  Any  .  .  .  whatever  =  quelconque,  which  follows  its  noun  and  agrees 
like  an  ordinary  adjective,  Ex.  3. 

(c)  Whatever,   preceding  a  noun  =  quelque(s)   .   .  .  que  +  subjunctive, 
Ex.4. 

(d)  Whatever,  preceding  to  be  =  quel  que  +  subjunctive,  Ex.  5. 

(e)  Whatever,  absolutely  =  quoi  que  +  subjunctive,  Ex.  6  and  7. 

(f)  Observe  also :  Lequel  desirez-vous?  —  N'importe  lequel,  .  .  .  Any  one 
at  all  (whatever);  Qui  doit  lire?  —  N'importe  qui  .  .  .  Any  one  at  all  (what- 
ever) . 

EXERCISE  LXXXVIII 

<• 

allumer,  light,  kindle  le  fluide,  fluid 

Pavenir,  m.,  future  le  gaz,  gas 

la  bougie,  wax  candle  Phabitation,  f .,  habitation,  dwelling 

bruler,  burn  Phuile,  f.,  oil 

la  chaleur,  warmth,  heat  humain,  human 

la  chandelle,  candle  inflammable,  inflammable 

le  charbon,  coal  la  lampe,  lamp 

le  chauffage,  heating  la  lumiere,  light 

chauffer,  warm,  heat  la  maniere,  manner,  way 

echapper  (a),  escape  (from)  mysterieux,  mysterious 

Peclairage,  m.,  lighting  Pobscurite,  f.,  darkness 

eclairer,  light,  illuminate  ^observation,  f.,  observation 

Pelectricite,  f.,  electricity  le  petrole,  petroleum 

electrique,  electric 

lampe  a  petrole,  petroleum  lamp;  a  Pavenir,  in  the  future 

A.  Continue:  1.  Qui  que  je  sois  j'ai  besoin  cTamis,  .  .  .  tu  .  .  .  tu. 
2.  Quelques  remedes  que  je  prenne  je  ne  gueris  pas,  .  .  .  tu  .  .  .  tu. 


198  LESSON   LXXXVIII  [§215 

3.  Quelle  que  soit  mon  habitation  il  faut  la  chauffer,  .  .  .  ton,  etc. 

4.  Quoi  que  je  fasse  je  ne  reussirai  pas,  .  .  .  tu  .  .  .  tu,    5.  Je  pourrai 
me  servir  de  n'importe  quel  livre,  tu  .  .  .  te. 

B.  1.  Quelles  que  soient  les  habitations  humaines,  il  faut  les 
chauffer  et  les  eclairer.    2.  Qui  que  vous  soyez  vous  avez  besoin  de 
chaleur  et  de  lumiere.    3.  Dans  1'obscurite  il  faut  allumer  quelque 
chose  d'inflammable.     4.  Quoi  qu'on  fasse  il  faut  un  chauffage 
quelconque  par  le  temps  froid.     5.  Pour  se  chauffer  on  brule  du 
bois  ou  du  charbon.    6.  De  ce  dernier  on  tire  aussi  le  gaz  dont  on 
e*claire  les  maisons  et  les  rues.     7.  On  se  sert  aussi  de  lampes  a 
p£trole.    8.  On  peut  se  demander  ce  qu'on  ferait  si  le  petrole  venait 
a  manquer.     9.  De  quelle  esp&ce  d'huile  se  servirait-on  dans  ce 
cas?    10.  De  n'importe  quelle  espece,  car  toutes  les  especes  servent 
a  l'£clairage.    11.  On  pourrait  employer  aussi  des  chandelles  et  des 
bougies.    12.  Les  unes  et  les  autres  ont  souvent  servi  a  e*clairer  les 
maisons.    13.  II  y  a  aussi  la  lumiere  electrique.    14.  Qu'est-ce  que 
c'est  que  relectricite*?    15.  C'est  un  fluide  remarquable  qui  echappe 
a  notre  observation.    16.  De  quelque  maniere  qu'on  1'emploie  elle 
reste  toujours  mysterieuse.    17.  Nous  ne  savons  pas  ce  que  c'est 
que  relectricite. 

C.  (Oral.)     1.  Pourquoi  faut-il  que  nos  habitations  soient  chauf- 
fe*es  et  6clairees?    2.  Que  nous  faut-il  pour  cela?    3.  Que  nous  faut-il 
faire  dans  1'obscurite?   4.  D'ou  tirons-nous  le  gaz?    5.  Qu'est-ce  que 
nous  faisons  pour  nous  chauffer?     6.  Qu'est-ce  que  nous  faisons 
du  gaz?    7.  A  quoi  servent  les  lampes  a  petrole?    8.  Que  ferions- 
nous  s'il  n'y  en  avait  pas?    9.  De  quelle  autre  lumiere  nous  servons- 
nous?    10.  Que  dit-on  ici  de  1'electricite?  etc. 

D.  1.  One  must  heat  the  houses  in  cold  climates.    2.  Whoever 
we  are  we  must  have  light.    3.  In  darkness  we  must  have  some  kind 
of  a  lamp.    4.  Whatever  the  dwellings  of  men  may  be  they  must 
be  lighted.    5.  Whatever  you  do  you  must  have  fire  in  cold  weather. 
6.  We  use  wood  and  coal  to  heat  our  houses.    7.  We  use  coal  to 
make  gas.    8.  We  light  our  houses  with  (de)  gas.     9.  Do  you  use 
petroleum  lamps  in  your  house?    10.  I  wonder  what  people  would  do 
without  petroleum.    11.  Could  they  use  any  sort  of  oil  whatever? 
12.  Yes,  and  they  could  use  electric  light.    13.  Do  you  know  what 


§217]  LESSON  LXXX1X  199 

electricity  is?  14.  They  call  it  a  mysterious  fluid,  but  nobody  knows 
what  it  is.  15.  In  whatever  way  it  may  be  employed  (use  on),  it 
will  probably  remain  mysterious. 

E.  1.  Heating  is  necessary  in  cold  climates.  2.  Lighting  is 
necessary  everywhere.  3.  The  ancients  used  oil  lamps  or  candles. 
4.  Light  the  gas.  5.  Do  not  light  the  fire  yet.  6.  We  used  to  burn 
wood  formerly,  but  we  burn  coal  now.  7.  In  the  future  we  shall 
use  electricity  to  give  us  heat.  8.  We  use  it  now  to  give  us  light. 
9.  Whoever  you  are,  you  must  work  in  this  country.  10.  You  can't 
escape  work  here.  11.  You  can't  use  any  wood  whatever  (use 
riimporte)  to  make  furniture.  12.  Whoever  comes  to  see  me  is  well 
received.  13.  Whatever  you  have  to  say,  say  it  at  once.  14.  What- 
ever be  the  cause  of  it,  they  don't  come  to  see  us  now. 


LESSON  LXXXIX 

216.  Adverbs   from   Adjectives.  —  Adverbs    of   manner    are 
formed  from  many  adjectives  by  adding  -ment,  thus:  — 

1.  Added  directly  to  adjectives  ending  in  e,  e,  i,  u:    / 

facilement,     decidement,     poliment,     absolument 

2.  Otherwise  added  to  the  feminine  of  the  adjective: 

pur,  purement,     doux,   doucement,     actif,  activement 
(a)  Exceptionally  -e  changes  to  -6  on  adding -ment,  e.g.  enorme,  enorme'- 

ment,  precise,  precisement. 

(6)   Most  adjectives  in  -ant,  -ent  change  -nt  to  -m,   and  add  -ment, 

e.g.  constant,  constamment,  prudent,  prudemment;  but  not  lentement  and 

some  others. 

(c)  Observe  gentiment  (gentil),  brievement  (bref),  impunement  (impuni). 

217.  Adverbial    Distinctions.  —  1.  Si  =  yes    implies    contra- 
diction of  or  dissent  from  a  negative  assertion  or  question: 

Je  n'irai  pas.  —  Si,  si,  venez.  /  shall  not  go.  —  Yes,  yes,  come. 

II  ne  s'en  va  pas?  —  Mais  si.  He  is  not  going?  —  Yes,  certainly, 

2.  Observe  the  following  expressions: 

Je  dis  que  oui  (non).  I  say  yes  (no\ 

Je  crois  que  oui  (non).  I  think  so  (not}. 


200  LESSON  LXXXIX  [§217 

3.  Autant  =  as  much  (many) ;  tant  =  so  much  (many) : 

J'ai  tant  d'amis;  j'en  ai  autant        /  have  so  many  friends;  I  have  as 
que  n'importe  qui.  many  as  anybody. 

4.  Only  =  seulement  (1)  when  no  verb  is  present,  (2)  when 
only  refers  to  the  subject,  (3)  or  to  the  verb,  (4)  or  to  a  que 
clause,  and  (5)  it  may  be  used  to  strengthen  ne  .  .  .  que ;  other- 
wise only  =  ne  .  .  .  que  or  seulement : 

Seulement  les  braves.  Only  the  brave. 

Seulement  mon  frere  le  sait.  Only  my  brother  knows  it. 

Ecoutez  seulement.  Only  listen. 

II  dit  seulement  qu'il  vient.  He  only  says  he  is  coming. 

II  n'a  seulement  qu'a  venir.  He  has  only  to  come. 

But:  Je  n'ai  que  dix  francs  (or  j'ai  seulement  dix  francs);  II  n'a 
qu'a  demander  (il  a  seulement  a  demander),  etc. 

(a)  Only  referring  to  the  subject,  may  be  turned  also  by  il  n'y  a  que, 
ce  n'est  que;  only  referring  to  the  verb  may  be  turned  by  the  help  of  faire: 
II  n'y  a  que  les  morts  qui  ne  reviennent  pas,  The  dead  only  do  not  come  back; 
Elle  ne  fait  que  pleurer,  She  does  nothing  but  weep. 

(6)  Observe  also  the  frequent  use  in  modern  French  of  ne  .  .  .  pas  que, 
not  only,  e.g.  II  n'y  a  pas  que  les  pauvres  qui  aient  besoin  d'etre  aides,  It 
isn't  only  the  poor  that  need  to  be  helped. 

5.  Certain  adverbs  of  place  are  used  like  en,  y  (cf.  §§  27,  39)  as 
equal  to  a  preposition  +  a  pronoun  (of  things) : 

Voyez  sur  la  table,  cherchez  des-      Look  on  the  table,  search  on  it  and 
sus  et  dessous.  under  it. 

(a)  Thus:  dedans,  dehors,  dessus,  dessous,  devant,  derriere,  etc. 

6.  Que  has  adverbial  force  in  exclamations: 

Que  vous  etes  heureux!  How  happy  you  are! 

\ 

7.  Tout  used  adverbially  agrees  like  an  adjective  when  im- 
mediately preceding  a  feminine  adjective  beginning  in  a  con- 
sonant or  h  aspirate,  but  is  elsewhere  invariable: 

Elles  e*taient  toutes  pales  et  tout      They   were    quite   pale   and   very 
agitees.  much  excited. 


§217]  LESSON  LXXXIX  201 

8.  Observe   the   following   renderings    of   however,    wherever, 
whenever: 

Quelque  riche  qu'il  soit.  However  rich  he  is  (may  be). 

Quelque  bien  que  vous  parliez.  However  well  you  (may)  speak. 

Toutes  bonnes  qu'elles  sont.  However  kind  they  are  (may  be). 

Si  (Pour)  bonne  qu'elle  soit.  However  kind  she  is  (may  be)* 

Partout  oil  je  le  vois. 

En  quelque  lieu  que  je  le  voie.        Wherever  I  see  him. 

Ou  que  je  le  voie. 

Toutes  les  fois  que  je  le  vois.  Whenever  I  see  him. 

EXERCISE  LXXXIX 

Paiguille,  f.,  needle  oisif,  idle 

aise,    easy,    comfortable,  well-         Poisivete,  f.,  idleness 

to-do  paraitre,  irreg.,  appear 

le  canard,  duck  la  paresse,  laziness 

les  ciseaux,  m.,  scissors  paresseux,  lazy 

le  de,  thimble  la  poule,  hen 

dehors,  outside  pourtant,  however 

enseigner,  teach  la  richesse,  wealth 

Strange,  strange  la  tdche,  task 

le  fil,  thread  utile,  useful 

Helene,  Helen  le  vice,  vice 

Inoccupation,  f.,  occupation  la  volaille,  poultry 

je  ne  saurais  qu'en  faire,  I  don't  know  what  to  do  with  it 

A.  Continue:  1.  Je  crois  que  non.    2.  J'ai  autant  d'amis  que  n'im- 
porte  qui.    3.  J'ai  tant  de  foin  que  je  ne  saurais  qu'en  faire,  tu  .  .  . 
tu.    4.  Je  n'aurai  qu'a  demander.    5.  Je  n'avais  que  peu  d'argent. 

6.  Je  Pai  cherche*  sur  la  table  et  dessous.    7.  Quelque  habile  que  je 
sois.    8.  Toute  fatigue*e  que  je  parais.    9.  Je  ne  suis  pas  paresseux. 

B.  1.  L'oisivete  est  (la)  mere  de  tous  les  vices.    2.  Tout  aise*e 
qu'elle  est  Mme  Legrand  de*sire  que  sa  fille  Helene  apprenne  a  faire 
les  choses  utiles.    3.  II  n'y  a  pas  que  les  pauvres  qui  aient  besoin 
d'apprendre  a  travailler.   4.  Quelque  etrange  que  cela  puisse  paraitre 
les  riches  en  ont  autant  besoin  que  les  pauvres.     5.  Les  pauvres 
n'ont  qu'a  gagner  leur  vie.    6.  Les  riches  ont  une  tache  encore  plus 
difficile,  —  celle  d'employer  leur  richesse  pour  le  bien  d'autrui. 

7.  Que  la  petite  Helene  est  heureuse!    8.  Elle  n'a  pas  que  des 


202  LESSON   LXXXIX  [§217 

amusements  pourtant.  9.  Elle  a  ses  devoirs,  son  ouvrage.  10.  Elle 
a  deja  son  de,  son  aiguille,  son  fil  et  ses  ciseaux.  11.  Sa  mere,  si 
occupe'e  qu'elle  soit,  trouve  le  temps  de  lui  montrer  a  faire  des 
vetements.  12.  Elle  coupe,  coud,  garnit.  13.  Elle  a  tant  a  faire 
qu'elle  n'a  pas  le  temps  d'etre  oisive.  14.  Non  seulement  elle  a  des 
occupations  dans  la  maison,  elle  en  a  aussi  dehors.  15.  Elle  s'occupe 
de  la  volaille  de  la  basse-cour.  16.  Elle  donne  a  manger  aux  poules 
et  aux  canards.  17.  Elle  cherche  des  ceufs  partout  ou  il  y  en  a. 

C.  (Oral)     1.  Que    dit-on  ici    de   1'oisivete*?     2.  Que  desirait 
Mme  Legrand?    3.  La  tache  des  riches  est-elle  difficile?    4.  Pour- 
quoi  dites-vous  cela?    5.  Que  dit-on  ici  des  pauvres?    6.  La  petite 
Helene  est-elle  oisive?    7.  Decrivez  ses  occupations,  etc. 

D.  1.  The  mother  would  like  her  daughter  to  learn  useful  things. 
2.  Laziness  is  a  vice.    3.  If  we  (m.)  are  idle  we  shall  learn  nothing 
useful.    4.  It  is  not  children  only  who  need  lessons.    5.  However 
stra-nge  it  may  seem,  everybody  needs  them.     6.  You  have  as 
much  need  of  them  as  I.    7.  You  and  I  have  only  to  earn  our  liv- 
ing.   8.  The  task  of  the  rich  man  is  still  more  difficult.    9.  He  must 
work  as  much  as  we.    10.  He  must  learn  to  use  his  wealth  for  the 
good  of  others. 

E.  1.  How  fortunate  we  are!    2.  He  who  has  work  to  do  is  for- 
tunate.    3.  Little  girls  should  have  needles,  thread,  thimbles  and 
scissors.     4.  They  must  have  plenty  of  duties  and  occupations. 
5.  However  busy  I  am,  I  have  time  to  teach  my  little  sister.    6.  I 
teach  her  [how]  to  make  clothes.    7.  We  have  so  much  to  do  that 
we  haven't  time  to  be  idle.    8.  We  are  busy  not  (nori)  only  at  school 
but  at  home.    9.  We  have  tasks  in  the  house  and  outside  [of  it]. 
10.  We  feed  the  poultry  every  morning.     11.  Whenever  we  feed 
the  hens  and  ducks  we  look  for  eggs. 

F.  1.  Is  it  going  to  rain?    2.  I  think  so.    3.  I  think  not,  for  it 
is  windy.   4.  Mr.  Legrand  has  as  much  land  as  his  neighbour.   5.  He 
has  never  had  so  much  hay  as  he  has  (of  it)  this  year.    6.  If  you 
need  anything,  you  have  only  to  ask  [for  it].    7.  Only  ask  for  that 
and  you  shall  have  it.    8.  The  patient  only  said  that  he  was  tired 
and  that  he  wanted  to  sleep.    9.  He  had  been  ill  for  a  few  days  only. 
10.  I  had  only  five  francs,  but  I  gave  him  the  half  of  it. 


§218]  LESSON  XC  203 

G.  I.I  looked  for  my  pen  on  the  table  and  under  it,  but  without 
finding  it.  2.  You  haven't  electric  lighting  in  your  house?  3.  Oh 
yes,  we  have  had  it  for  two  years.  4.  Those  boys  are  lazy;  they 
will  not  work.  5.  However  well-to-do  you  are,  you  must  work. 
6.  Whenever  I  meet  Mr.  Brunot  he  asks  after  your  health.  7.  Wher- 
ever you  are,  never  forget  that  you  are  a  Frenchman.  8.  It  isn't 
only  my  Latin  that  I  find  difficult.  9.  Only  work,  and  you  will 
finally  succeed.  10.  I  have  done  nothing  but  work  all  my  life. 


LESSON    XC 

218.  Negation.  —  1.  Apart  from  a  verb,  no,  not  =  non: 

L'avez-vous  dit?  —  Non  (pas).         Did  you  say  so?  —  No. 
Non  content  de  cela.  Not  satisfied  with  that. 

Peut-etre  que  non.  Perhaps  not. 

(a)  Observe  also  pas  du  tout,  not  at  all. 

2.  Along  with  a  verb  a  negation  consists  regularly  of  two 
parts,  ne  +  some  other  word  or  words,  thus: 

ne  .  .  .  pas,  not  ne  .  .  .  aucunement  1  not  at     ne  .  .  .  rien,  nothing 

ne  .  .  .  point,  not  ne  .  .  .  nullement     J     all        ne  .  .  .  ni  .  .  .  ni, 


ne  .  .  .  guere,  hardly     ne  .  .  .  aucun 


neither  .  .  .  nor 


ne  .  .  .  jamais,  never     ne  .  .  .  nul 

ne  .  .  .  plus,  no  more     ne  .  .  .  pas  un 

ne  .  .  .  que,  only  ne  .  .  .  personne,  nobody 

(a)  Point  is  usually  more  emphatic  than  pas,  and  is  less  common  in  ordi- 
nary language. 

(6)  Negation  is  often  denoted  by  pas  without  ne,  in  familiar  language: 
Ai-je  pas  dit  cela?  (  =  n'ai-je  pas  dit  cela?). 

3.  Ne  always  precedes  the  verb,  and  pas,  etc.,  regularly  fol- 
lows it: 

Je  ne  le  leur  ai  pas  dit.  I  did  not  tell  them  so. 

Je  n'en  ai  guere  eu.  /  hardly  had  any  of  it. 

(a)  But  pas  (point),  usually,  and  plus,  often,  precede  a  simple  infinitive; 
they  may  precede  or  follow  avoir,  etre,  either  when  alone  or  in  the  infini- 
tive perfect:  II  parle  de  ne  pas  y  aller;  J'etais  fache  de  ne  vous  avoir  pas  vu 
(or  de  ne  pas  vous  avoir  vu) . 


204  LESSON  XC  [§219 

4.  If  the  verb  is  omitted,  but  implied,  ne  is  omitted: 
Qui  est  venu?  —  Personne.  Who  has  come?  —  Nobody. 

Est-il  venu?  —  Pas  encore.  Has  he  come?  —  Not  yet. 

(a)  Pas  (point)  so  used  may  not  stand  alone. 

219.  Omission  of  pas,  etc.  —  Ne  alone  serves  as  a  negative :  — 

1.  In  a  que  clause  after  negation: 

II  n'y  a  rien  qu'il  ne  sache.  There  is  nothing  he  doesn't  know. 

(a)  So  also  after  prendre  garde  que,  take  care  lest  (that  not),  and  similar 
expressions. 

2.  Sometimes  in  an  if  clause  with  si : 

Si  je  ne  me  trompe.  //  7  am  not  mistaken. 

3.  Sometimes  in  questions,  such  as: 

Que  ne  ferais-je  pour  lui?  What  wouldn't  I  do  for  him? 

Que  n'attendez-vous?  Why  don't  you  wait? 

4.  Always  in  je  ne  saurais,  etc.,  Je  ne  sais  quoi: 

Ne  sauriez-vous  m'aider?  Can't  you  help  me? 

Un  je  ne  sais  quoi  de  noble.  Something  indefinably  noble. 

(a)  Pas  is  sometimes  omitted  with  pouvoir  and  with  other  tenses  of 
savoir. 

5.  In  a  few  set  expressions,  such  as: 

N'importe;  nj  avoir  garde.  It  matters  not;  not  to  care. 

220.  Redundant  ne.  —  In  a  que  clause  (subjunctive)  ne  is 
often  redundant,  as  compared  with  English,  thus:  — 

1.  After  expressions  of  fearing  (but  see  a,  6,  below): 
Je  crains  qu'il  ne  vienne.  7  fear  he  will  come. 

(a)  But  after  not  fearing,  expressed  or  implied,  ne   is  omitted:  Je  ne 
crains  pas  qu'il  vienne,   7  do  not  fear   he  will  come;   Craignez-vous  qu'il 
vienne?   Do  you  fear  he  will  come  (surely  not)  ? 

(b)  When  the  not  happening  is  feared,  the  full  negative  form  stands  in 
the  que  clause:  Je  crains  qu'il  ne  vienne  pas,  7  fear  he  will  not  come;  Je  ne 
crains  pas  qu'il  ne  vienne  pas,  7  do  not  fear  he  will  not  come. 

2.  With  compound  tenses  after  il  y  a,  etc. : 

II  y  a  dix  jours  que  je  ne  1'ai  vu.     7  haven't  seen  him  for  ten  days. 
Depuis  que  je  ne  vous  ai  vu.  Since  I  saw  you. 


§220]  LESSON  XC  205 

3.  After  s'en  falloir,  negatively,  interrogatively,  or  with  peu, 
guere,  etc.: 

Peu  s'en  est  f allu  que  je  ne  partisse.    I  came  very  near  starting. 

4.  After  empecher,  eviter,  &  moins  que,  avant  que  (the  latter 
optionally) : 

Empejchez  qu'il  ne  sorte.  Prevent  him  from  going  out. 

J'eviterai  qu'on  ne  me  voie.  7  shall  avoid  being  seen. 

A  moins  qu'il  ne  soit  malade.  Unless  he  is  ill. 

Avant  qu'il  (ne)  parte.  Before  he  goes. 

(a)  This  ne  is  not  infrequently  omitted  after  empecher  and  e>iter; 
after  empecher  mostly  when  negative  or  interrogative. 

5.  After  expressions  of  doubt  or  denial,  used  negatively  or 
with  implied  negation: 

Je  ne  doute  pas  que  ce  ne  soit  lui.     7  don't  doubt  that  it  is  he. 
Niez-vous  que  ce  ne  soit  lui?  Do  you  deny,  etc.  (surely  not)? 

(a)  But:  Je  doute  que  ce  soit  lui;  Doutez-vous  que  ce  soit  lui?  (question 
as  to  a  presumed  fact) . 

NOTE.  —  Rules  4  and  5  are  less  strictly  observed  than  1-3,  but  always 
use  a  moins  que  .  .  .  ne;  for  ne  with  comparatives,  see  §  208,  2. 

EXERCISE  XC 

Pagent  (de  police),  m.,  policeman    eviter,  avoid 

d'avance,  beforehand,  too  soon  la  locomotive,  locomotive,  engine 

la  bicyclette,  bicycle  le  moyen,  means,  way 

le  (la)  bicycliste,  bicyclist  le  pas,  step 

caser,  put  in  place,  settle  rarement,  rarely,  seldom 

la  collision,  collision  sain,  healthy,  sound 

le  compartiment,  compartment  sauf ,  safe 

depasser,  exceed  siffler,  whistle 

derailler,  go  off  the  track  timide,  timid 

ecraser,  crush  le  tramway,  tramway,  tram(car) 

escorter,  escort  la  vitesse,  speed 

avoir  peur  de,  be  afraid  of;  faire  peur  a,  frighten;  avoir  peur  que,  be 
afraid  that,  fear  that;  de  peur  que,  for  fear  that;  faire  collision,  collide; 
sain  et  sauf,  safe  and  sound;  se  faire  ecraser,  get  crushed  (run  over) 


206  LESSON  XC  [§  220 

A.  1.  Tante  Clemence  habite  la  campagne.    2.  Elle  regoit  1'invi- 
tation  (Taller  voir  ses  amis  de  la  ville.    3.  II  y  a  des  annees  qu'elle  ne 
les  a  vus.    4.  Ayant  rarement  voyage  elle  est  assez  timide.     5.  Elle 
a  peur  de  tout.    6.  En  partant  elle  a  peur  de  manquer  le  train  et  elle 
arrive  a  la  gare  une  demi-heure  d'avance.    7.  Une  fois  casee  dans 
le  compartiment  elle  a  peur  que  quelque  accident  n'arrive  en  route. 
8.  II  n'y  a  rien  qui  ne  lui  fasse  peur.    9.  Toutes  les  fois  que  siffle  la 
locomotive  elle  tressaille.     10.  Elle  craint  que  le  train  ne  deraille, 
qu'il  ne  fasse  collision  avec  un  autre,  qu'il  ne  s'arrete  pas  a  la  gare 
ou  elle  doit  descendre.    11.  Mais  elle  arrive  saine  et  sauve.    12.  Dans 
les  rues  ses  amis  1'accompagnent  de  peur  qu'elle  ne  se  fasse  ecraser 
par  les  tramways.     13.  Elle  ne  sort  guere  a  moins  qu'une  autre 
personne  ne  1'escorte.     14.  En  sortant  seul  on  ne  saurait  toujours 
eViter  qu'une  voiture  vous  attrape.    15.  Et  les  bicyclettes,  n'y  a-t-il 
pas  moyen  d'empecher  qu'elles  marchent  si  vite?   16.  Je  doute  qu'on 
puisse  empecher  les  bicyclistes  de  de*passer  la  vitesse  permise  par  la 
police,  a  moins  d'avoir  des  agents  a  chaque  pas.    17.  II  est  defendu 
d'aller  vite,  mais  que  voulez-vous  qu'on  y  fasse? 

B.  (Oral  on  A.)     1.  Read  aloud  sentences  2-13,  turning  the  nar- 
rative into  the  past.    2.  Give  the  rule  for  all  cases  where  ne  is  used 
alone  with  a  verb. 

C.  1.  Our  friends  haven't  seen  us  for  a  long  time.    2.  I  haven't 
travelled  much,  but  I  am  not  timid.    3.  I  am  not  afraid  of  every- 
thing.   4.  You  are  not  afraid  of  anything.    5.  We  were  afraid  of 
missing  the  train.    6.  We  were  afraid  you  would  miss  (pres.)  the 
train.     7.  I  fear  that  an  accident  has  happened.     8.  There  was 
nothing  that  frightened  me.    9.  Are  you  afraid  the  train  will  run 
off  the  track?    10.  Do  not  go  out  unless  your  friends  escort  you. 
11.  Take  care  that  you  do  not  get  run  over  by  the  tramway. 

D.  1.  We  are  bicyclists.     2.  The  police  can't  prevent  us-  from 
going  (infin.)  fast.    3.  It  is  against  the  law  (see  A,  17)  to  exceed  a 
speed  of  more  than  five  kilometres  an  hour.    4.  Not  satisfied  with 
the  speed  allowed  by  the  police,  you  want  to  go  faster  and  faster. 
5.  Unless  there  is  a  policeman  at  every  step,  that  can't  be  pre- 
vented (use  on).    6.  There  is  nobody  who  doesn't  go  fast  some- 
times.    7.  What    bicyclist  obeys  the  police?  —  None.    8.  There 


§221]  LESSON  XCI  207 

was  a  collision  on  the  railway,  but  nobody  was  killed.    9.  Every- 
body arrived  safe  and  sound. 

E.  1.  It  is  months  since  I  was  in  the  country;  I  rarely  go  there. 
2.  I  shall  pay  you  a  visit  to-morrow,  unless  the  weather  should  be 
bad.    3.  In  any  (tout)  case  you  must  pay  us  a  visit  before  you  go. 

4.  If  I  am  not  mistaken,  the  engine  of  our  train  has  just  whistled. 

5.  I  am  afraid  we  shall  not  be  comfortable  in  this  compartment. 

6.  Let  us  find  (chercher)  another,  no  matter  what  one.    7.  Do  you 
fear  the  train  will  not  stop  at  your  station?    8.  I  am  not  afraid  it 
will  not  stop.    9.  Take  care  that  your  aunt  doesn't  get  run  over  by 
the  tramway. 

F.  1.  The  police  can't  prevent  automobiles  from  running  too 
fast.    2.  There  is  not  one  of  them  that  doesn't  exceed  the  speed 
limit  (see  A,  16).    3.  If  we  go  too  fast,  we  can't  avoid  the  police 
catching  us  now  and  then.    4.  I  do  not  doubt  that  the  policemen 
are  in  the  right.    5.  There  is  nothing  that  that  young  man  cannot 
learn.     6.  Nobody  doubts  that  he  will  finally  succeed.    7.  I  am 
afraid  you  are  cold;  draw  near  the  fire.    8.  It  is  years  since  we 
had  a  winter  like  this  one,  if  I  am  not  mistaken. 


LESSON  XCI 

221.  Observe  the  use  of  £,  de,  en,  sur,  in  forming  adjectival 
phrases,  often  rendered  in  English  by  compound  nouns,  or  by 
nouns  used  as  adjectives:  — 

1.  De,  en,  denoting  material: 

Une  maison  en  (de)  brique(s).         A  brick  house. 
Une  robe  de  (en)  soie.  A  silk  dress. 

Un  collier  de  perles.  A  pearl  necklace. 

2.  De  denoting  source,  purpose,  destination,  etc. : 

La  porcelaine  de  Sevres.  Sevres  porcelain. 

Les  vins  d'Espagne.  Spanish  wines. 

La  salle  de  bains.      .  The  bathroom. 

Le  train  de  Paris.  The  Paris  train. 


208  LESSON  XCI  [§222 

3.  A  denoting  purpose  for  which,  or  characteristic: 
Une  salle  a  manger.  A  dining  room. 

Une  tasse  a  the.  A  teacup. 

Un  coffret  a  bijoux.  A  jewel  case. 

Un  ver  a  sole.  A  silkworm. 

Une  porte  a  deux  battants.  A  folding  door  (i.e.  with  two  leaves). 

Un  bateau  a  vapeur.  A  steamboat. 

L'homme  au  chapeau  noir.  The  man  with  a  black  hat. 

4.  A  and  sur  describing  processes  in  art: 

Une  peinture  a  Phuile.  An  oil  painting  (painting  in  oils). 

Une  gravure  sur  acier.  A  steel  engraving  (engraving  on  steel). 

222.  Observe  the  following  prepositional  distinctions :  — 

1.  Environ  =  about  (of  quantity) ;  vers,  towards,  about  (of  time) : 
Environ  dix  kilometres   (cent  francs);  vers  (les)  dix  heures;  vers 

1830. 

2.  Entre,   between,   among   (also    distributively   and    recipro- 
cally); parmi,  among  (in  the  midst  of): 

Une  station  entre  Paris  et  Rouen;  entre  dix  et  douze  heures; 
partagez-le  entre  vos  amis;  il  fut  trouve  entre  les  morts;  entre  (in) 
les  mains  de  mon  ami;  ils  parlaient  entre  eux;  une  brebis  parmi  les 
loups. 

3.  Avant,  before  (of  time,  order,  rank);  devant,  before  (in  front 
of,  in  presence  of): 

Avant  midi;  mettez  1'article  avant  le  nom;  devant  le  feu:  devant  le 
roi. 

4.  Vers,  towards  (physical  tendency):  envers,  towards  (moral 
tendency) : 

Levez  les  yeux  vers  le  ciel;  il  est  juste  envers  tous. 

5.  Au-dessous    de,    under,    underneath    (more   specific   than 
sous);  au-dessus  de,  over,  above,  higher  than: 

Au-dessous  du  tableau;  au-dessous  de  la  valeur;  au-dessus  de  la 
porte;  les  nombres  au-dessus  de  cent. 

6.  Pres  de,  near  (physical) :  aupres  de,  near,  with,  as  regards, 
etc. '  (moral) : 

Pres  du  feu;  aupres  de  sa  famille. 


§222]  LESSON   XCI  209 


EXERCISE  XCI 

Pacajou,  m.,  mahogany  le  musee,  museum 

Pacier,  m.,  steel  le  noyer,  walnut 

le  battant,  part  of  a  double  or  Pobjet,  m.,  object 

folding  door  Por,  m.,  gold 

le  bijou,  jewel  la  parure,  adornment 

la  brique,  brick  le  pastel,  pastel 

le  chene,  oak  la  peinture.,  painting 

le  cocon,  cocoon  la  perle,  pearl 

le  coffret,  casket,  case  la  porcelaine,  porcelain 

le  collier,  necklace  la  princesse,  princess 

le  cuivre,  copper  sculpter,  carve 

Peau-forte,  f.,  aquafortis;  etching  la  soierie,  silk  (collect.) 

forge,  forged,  wrought  la  taille,  cutting 

Jllustrer,  illustrate  le  vase,  vase 

Pindustrie,  f.,  industry       .  vaste,  vast 

Pivoire,  m.,  ivory  Venus,  Venus 

le  marbre,  marble  le  ver,  worm 
le  mobilier,  furniture  (collect.) 

K  boit  dans  un  verre,  he  drinks  from  (out  of)  a  glass;  je  mange  dans  une 
assiette,  /  eat  from  a  plate;  je  Pai  pris  dans  un  tiroir  (sur  la  table),  / 
took  it  from  a  drawer  (from  the  table) 

A.  1.  Hier  nous  avons  visits  un  grand  muse*e.  2.  II  se  trouve 
dans  un  ancien  chateau  bati  en  brique  et  en  pierre  de  taille  (free- 
stone).  3.  Nous  entrons  par  la  belle  porte  en  chene  a  deux  battants. 
4.  Au  rez-de-chaussee  on  trouve  les  objets  qui  illustrent  Thistoire 
de  Pindustrie.  5.  Dans  la  salle  des  soieries  on  voit  le  cocon  du  ver 
a  soie  aussi  bien  que  les  belles  robes  de  soie  et  les  tapisseries  des 
Gobelins.  6.  Dans  une  autre  salle  se  voient  des  tasses  a  the  et  a 
cafe  qui  ont  passe  par  des  mains  de  reines.  7.  Nous  montons  au 
premier  par  le  bel  escalier  en  marbre.  8.  On  entre  dans  la  pre- 
miere piece  par  une  porte  magnifique  en  fer  forge.  9.  Cette  salle 
s'appelle  le  "Salon  des  Fleurs."  10.  Le  gardien  appelle  notre  atten- 
tion sur  le  mobilier  en  acajou  a  tapisseries  de  Beauvais.  11.  II 
nous  mohtre  de  beaux  vases  en  porcelaine  de  Sevres.  12.  Nous  ad- 
mirons  un  coffret  a  bijoux  en  ivoire.  13.  Le  gardien  prend  dans  le 
coffret  un  collier  de  perles,  autrefois  la  parure  d'une  princesse.  14.  II 
y  a  ici  en  outre  un  beau  tableau  nomme  "  Venus  aux  cheveux  d'or." 


210  LESSON   XCII  [§223 

15.  Ensuite  nous  entrons  dans  la  vaste  ancienne  salle  a  manger  a 
boiseries  sculptees  en  noyer.  16.  On  y  voit  beaucoup  de  tableaux: 
des  peintures  a  1'huile  et  des  portraits  au  pastel.  17.  II  y  a  aussi  des 
gravures  sur  cuivre  (copperplate),  sur  acier  et  a  1'eau-forte  (etching). 

B.  (Oral  on  A.) 

C.  1.  My  grandfather  lives  in  an  old  stone  house.    2.  There  is 
a  beautiful  oak  table  in  his  dining  room.    3.  The  chairs  and  side- 
board are  also  of  oak.     4.  Silk  is  the  product  of  the  silkworm. 
5.  The  product  of  thousands  of  silkworms  is  required  (use  il  faut) 
to  make  a  silk  dress.    6.  In  the  museum  we  admired  especially  the 
Gobelin  tapestries  and  the  Sevres  porcelain.    7.  The  tapestries  are 
to  be  seen  in  the  silk  room.    8.  We  use  teacups  to  drink  tea.    9.  We 
don't  drink  (the)  tea  from  coffee  cups.    10.  Kings  and  queens  have 
drunk  from  these  wineglasses.    11.  Give  me  a  wineglass.     12.  Give 
me  another  glass  of  wine.    13.  At  the  entrance  to  (of)  the  "  Flower 
Hall"  we  observed  a  fine  wrought-iron  door.    14.  My  mother  has 
a  jewel  casket  of  carved  ivory.    15.  Among  the  queen's  jewels  was 
a  pearl  necklace.    16.  The  London  train  arrived  half  an  hour  ago. 

D.  1.  We  are  going  to  have  a  brick  house  built.    2.  The  castle 
was  built  half  in  brick,  half  in  freestone.    3.  All  the  stairways 
are  of  marble.    4.  The  entrance  doors  are  large  folding  doors  of  oak. 

5.  Permit  me  to  call  your  attention  to  this  fine  mahogany  furniture. 

6.  Don't  you  admire  these  Beauvais  tapestries?     7.  Frenchmen 
think  that  Sevres  porcelain  is  the  finest  in  the  world.    8.  The  vases 
of  Sevres  porcelain  are  the  finest  objects  in  the  museum.    9.  I  keep 
my  jewels  in  a  little  casket  of  carved  walnut.    10.  The  gentleman 
with  the  straw  hat  is  Mr.  Brunot.     11.  The  artist  showed  us  the 
portrait  of  a  charming  little  girl  with  golden  hair.     12.  This  artist 
is  very  clever  at  (a)  painting  in  oils.     13.  Most  people  prefer  oil 
paintings  to  steel  engravings  or  etchings. 

LESSON  XCII    . 

223.  Conjunctions.  —  1.  Que  =  that   is   followed  by  the  in- 
dicative  or  subjunctive  according  to  the  context: 

Je  vois  qu'il  est  malade.  /  see  that  he  is  ill. 

Je  suis  faclie"  qu'il  soit  malade.  I  am  sorry  he  is  ill. 


§223]  LESSON  XCII  211 

2.  Que,  standing  for  another  conjunction,  regularly  takes  the 
same  construction  as  the  conjunction  it  replaces: 

Quand  vous  aurez  fini  et  que  vous  When  you  have  finished  and  (when 
aurez  le  temps.  you)  have  time. 

Venez  que  ( =  afin  que,  pour  que)  Come  that  I  may  see  you. 
je  vous  voie. 

(a)  For  que  =  si,  if,  see  §  193,  5. 

3.  When  =  quand   or   lorsque   (the    latter    never   interroga- 
tively) : 

Quand  (lorsque)  je  Pai  vu.  When  I  saw  him. 

Dites-moi  quand  il  arrivera.  Tell  me  when  he  will  arrive. 

4.  Pendant   que  =  while,  whilst;   tandis  que  =  while,  whilst, 
whereas,  on  the  contrary: 

Lisez  le  journal  pendant  que  Read  the  newspaper  while  I  am 

j'ecris  ce  billet.  writing  this  note. 

Tandis  que  vous  etes  ici.  Whilst  (while)  you  are  here. 

Le  pere  travaille,  tandis  que  le  The  father  works,  while  (whereas) 

fils  est  tou jours  oisif.  ,  the  son  is  always  idle. 

5.  Depuis  que  denotes  time;  puisque  denotes  cause  assigned: 

Je  suis  bien  seul  depuis  que  mon  /  am  very  lonely  since  my  brother 

frere  est  parti.  went  away. 

II  faut  que  je  reste  puisqu'il  n'y  a  I  must  remain,  since  there  is  no 

p#s  de  train  ce  soir.  train  this  evening. 

6.  Certain  prepositions  and  prepositional  phrases,  governing 
an  infinitive,  correspond  to  conjunctional  forms   in   que;   the 
prepositional  construction  is  usually  employed  when  one  sub- 
ject is  common  to  two  verbs,  but  if  not,  the  que  form  must  be 
used: 

Je  partis  de  peur  de  le  voir.  I  left  for  fear  of  seeing  him. 

Je  partis  de  peur  qu'il  ne  me  vit.     /  left  for  fear  he  might  see  me. 

(a)  Other  examples:  afin  de  (afin  que);  de  crainte  de  (de  crainte  que); 
&  moins  de  (a  moins  que);  avant  de  (avant  que);.apres  de  (apres  que);  de 
peur  de  (de  peur  que);  pour  (pour  que);  sans  (sans  que);  jusqu'a  (jusqu'& 
ce  que),  etc. 


212 


LESSON  XCII 


[§224 


224.  Reference  list  of  conjunctions  requiring  the  subjunctive: 


a  (la)  condition  que1 

afin  que 

a  moins  que  .  .  .  ne 

au  cas  ou2 

au  cas  que 

avant  que 

bien  que 

ce  n'est  pas  que 

dans  le  cas  ou2 

de  crainte  que  .  .  .  n 

de  facon  que3 

de  maniere  que3 

de  peur  que  .  .  .  ne 


de  (telle)  sorte  que3 
en  attendant  que 
en  cas  que 
encore  que 
en  sorte  que3 
en  supposant  que 
jusqu'a  ce  que4 
loin  que 
malgre  que 
nonobstant  que 
non  (pas)  que 
pour  peu  que 
pour  que 


pourvu  que 

quand  meme  5 

que6 

quoique 

sans  que 

si7 

si  bien  que3 

si  peu  que 

soit  que  .  .  .  soit  que 

soit  que  .  .  .  ou  que 

suppose  que 

tellement  .  .  .  que3 


i  Also  indie,  or  condl.  2  More  usually  condl.  3  Subj.  of  purpose,  but  not  of  result. 
*  Sometimes  indie,  of  completed  past  event.  6  Condi,  ant.  or  plupf.  subj.  6  See  §  223,  lf 
above.  1  See  §  193,  5. 


EXERCISE  XCII 


les  ancetres,  m.,  ancestors 

augmenter,  increase 

le  bailment,  building 

le  bucheron,  woodcutter 

la  civilisation,  civilization 

la  consommation,  consumption 

contmuer,  continue 

defricher,  clear  (land) 

Penclume,  f.,  anvil 

exagerer,  exaggerate 

la  faucille,  sickle 

la  fonte,  cast  iron 

le  forgeron,  blacksmith 

la  hache,  axe 

imaginer,  imagine,  conceive 

inventer,  invent,  find  out 

cela  va  en  augmentant, 


le  laboureur,  ploughman 

la  marche,  march 

le  marteau,  hammer 

a  mesure  que,  in  proportion  as 

la  moisson,  harvest,  crop 

moissonner,  harvest 

le  perfectionnement,  improvement 

le  pont,  bridge 

pour  que,  in  order  that,  so  that 

la  poutre,  beam 

le  precede,  process 

realiser,  realize,  effect 

soit  que  .  .  .,  whether 

tant  que,  so  (as)  long  as 

utiliser,  utilize 

that  keeps  increasing 


A.  1.  Que  la  figure  du  forgeron  est  inte*ressante!  2.  Depuis  que 
la  civilisation  existe  il  aide  les  hommes  par  ses  travaux.  3.  Jusqu'a 
ce  qu'il  eut  fait  une  hache  le  bucheron  ne  pouvait  pas  couper  les 


§224]  LESSON  XCII  213 

arbres.  4.  Apres  que  le  Mcheron  eut  defriche  la  terre  le  laboureur 
eut  besoin  de  la  charrue.  5.  Aussitot  qu'il  y  eut  une  moisson  il 
fallut  faire  une  faucille  pour  la  moissonner.  6.  A  mesure  que  la 
civilisation  avangait  on  imaginait  de  nouveaux  precedes  d'utiliser 
le  fer.  7.  Pour  que  la  hache  et  la  faucille  coupassent  bien  on  inventa 
Facier.  8.  Puisqu'il  fallait  travailler  vite  et  a  bon  marche  on  inventa 
la  fonte.  9.  Du  moment  qu'on  a  realise  ces  perfectionnements  le 
fer  a  commence  a  remplacer  le  bois  et  la  pierre.  10.  Dans  les 
batiments  nous  employons  des  poutres  d'acier  tandis  que  nos  an- 
cetres  ne  se  servaient  que  de  poutres  de  bois.  11.  Les  nouveaux 
chemins  meme  sont  des  chemins  de  fer.  12.  Mais  soit  qu'on  fasse 
des  routes  ou  des  ponts  ou  des  na vires,  la  consommation  du  fer  va 
en  augmentant.  13.  On  pourrait  dire  sans  exag£rer  que  tant  que 
continuera  la  marche  de  la  civilisation  elle  sera  accompagn6e  de  la 
musique  du  marteau  et  de  renclume. 

B.  (Oral  on  A.) 

C.  1.  What  an  interesting  figure  that  (que  celle)  of  the  blacksmith! 
2.  His  work  has  helped  civilization  very  much.    3.  The  woodcutter 
could  not  cut  trees  until  he  had  an  axe.    4.  The  ploughman  needs  a 
plough  as  soon  as  the  ground  is  cleared.    5.  The  harvester  cannot 
cut  his  wheat  until  he  has  a  sickle.    6.  People  invent  new  processes 
in  proportion  as  civilization  advances.     7.  Steel  is  used  to  make 
axes.    8.  Cast  iron  was  invented  so  that  people  could  work  faster 
and  cheaper.    9.  Many  improvements  have  been  effected.    10.  Iron 
must  take  the  place  of  wood  and  stone.    11.  Steel  beams  are  used 
in  our  days,  whilst  formerly  wooden  beams  were  used.     12.  The 
consumption  of  iron  keeps  increasing.    13.  Whether  we  make  ships 
or  bridges,  we  need  iron.     14.  We  shall  need  iron  as  long  as  civiliza- 
tion continues.    15.  The  march  of  civilization  is  accompanied  by  the 
music  of  the  anvil.    16.  Man  cannot  advance  without  new  processes 
being  invented. 

D.  1.  When  Captain  Pictet  arrives  I  shall  ask  him  to  come  in. 

2.  Since  our  relatives  arrived  we  have  been  (pres.)  very  busy. 

3.  Since  you  need  money  I  shall  lend  you  some.    4.  We  started  at 
eight  o'clock  in  order  not  to  be  late.     5.  I  heard  from  my  sister 
before  she  left  (quitter)  London.    6.  Do  not  run  for  fear  you  may 


214  LESSON  XCII  [§  224 

fall.  7.  If  he  had  ploughed  the  ground  and  if  (que)  he  had  sown  the 
wheat,  the  crop  would  have  been  abundant.  8.  Unless  we  are 
diligent  we  shall  not  succeed.  9.  I  shall  be  busy  until  you  come. 
10.  They  will  not  finish  early  without  your  helping  them. 

E.  1.  Before  we  had  electric  light  we  used  gas.  2.  Our  neigh- 
bours still  have  (the)  gas,  whilst  we  have  electric  light.  3.  Wait 
until  we  have  (the)  time  to  see  you.  4.  He  will  wait  until  his 
brother  comes.  5.  While  we  were  taking  a  cup  of  coffee  the  train 
started.  6.  I  work  in  order  to  become  rich.  7.  You  work  that  your 
children  may  be  rich.  8.  Do  not  speak  without  thinking.  9.  Do 
nothing  without  telling  me  what  you  are  going  to  do.  10.  We  shall 
be  glad  when  we  have  finished. 


.      MATERIAL  FOR   CONVERSATION 

NOTE.  —  This  "Material  for  Conversation"  is  placed  after  the  Lessons  for  the 
sake  of  convenience,  and  not  to  suggest  that  the  Lessons  should  be  mastered  before 
conversation  is  begun.  Conversation  should  begin  early,  and  certain  parts  of  the 
"Material,"  such,  for  example,  as  the  "Fundamental  Expressions,"  should  be  learned 
and  used  as  soon  as  possible. 

The  classroom  and  its  activities  will  naturally  furnish  the  first  topics  for  conversa- 
tion. Hence  the  teacher  should  provide  his  class  early  with  the  vocabulary  necessary 
for  speaking  about  the  objects,  studies,  etc.,  which  pertain  to  the  classroom.  The 
vocabulary  necessary  for  other  topics  should  be  furnished  as  the  needs  of  the  class 
demand. 

1.  Fundamental   Expressions 

(a)  When  pointing  to  objects: 

Qu'est-ce  que  c'est  que  cela  (ga)?  What  is  that? 

C'est  un  crayon.  It's  a  pencil. 

Comment  appelle-t-on  cela  (ga)?  What  is  that  called? 

On  appelle  cela  (ga)  un  livre.  That's  called  a  book. 

(b)  When  speaking  of  objects,  actions,  ideas,  etc.: 
Comment  dit-on  '  house'  en  fran-      How  do  you  say  'house1  in  French? 

gais? 

En  frangais  on  dit  'maison.'  You  say  'maison'  in  French. 

Comment  dit-on   'run'   en  fran-  How  do  you  say  'run'  in  French  f 

gais? 

On  dit  'courir'  en  frangais.  You  say  'courir'  in  French. 

Que  veut  dire  le  mot  'pain'?  What  does  the  word  'pain'  mean? 

Le  mot  'pain'  veut  dire  'bread.'  The  word  (pain}  means  'bread' 

(c)  When  speaking  of  spelling,  pronunciation,  etc.: 
Comment  ecrivez-vous  (ecrit-on) 

le  mot  '  livre  '  ?  RQW  ^  u  ^  word  (  Rvre  ,  f 

Quelle  est  1  orthographe  du  mot 

'livre'? 
On    ecrit    le    mot    'livre'    ainsi,       You  spell  the  word  'livre'  thus. 

1-i-v-r-e. 

(For  names  of  French  letters,  see  Introd.,  A.) 

Comment    prononcez-vous    (pro- 
nonce-t-on)  ce  mot? 


uwx  this  word? 
Quelle  est  la  prononciation  de  ce 

mot? 

On  prononce  ce  mot  ainsi.  You  pronounce  this  word  thus. 

215 


216 


MATERIAL  FOR  CONVERSATION 


2.  Politer  Forms 

(a)  In  addressing  people: 


Monsieur, 
selle. 


Madame,     Mademoi-      Sir,  Madam,  Miss. 


//  you  please  or  please. 

Thank  you  or  thanks. 

No,  thank  you  or  no,  thanks. 

With  pleasure. 

I  thank  you  very  much. 


Excuse  me  Sir,  Madam,  Miss. 


What 


(b)  In  asking  and  receiving: 
S'il  vous  plait. 

Merci  (after  accepting). 
Merci  (in  declining). 
Avec  plaisir. 

Je  vous  remercie  beaucoup  (bien, 
mille  fois,  infiniment). 

(c)  When  not  understanding: 
Monsieur?    Madame?    Mademoi- 

selle? 

Plait-il?  or  Pardon?  or  Je  vous  de- 
mande  pardon.  (More  familiar: 
Comment?  or  Vous  dites?) 

(d)  When  desiring  consent: 
Voulez-vous  (bien)  .  .  .?  or  Veuillez. 
Ayez  la  bonte  (1'obligeance)  de  .  .  . 

(e)  Politeness  is  often  increased  by  the  use  of  the  conditional: 
Pourriez-vous  me  dire,  madame,      Could  you  tell  me,  madam,  what 

1'heure  qu'il  est?  o'clock  it  is? 

Voudriez-vous  (bien)  me  dire  ou      Would  you  kindly  tell  me  where  we 
nous  en  sommes  aujourd'hui?  begin  to-day? 

3.  Model  Conversation 


I  beg  your  pardon  (What? 
do  you  say?) 


Will  you  kindly  .  .  , 
Be  kind  enough  to  . 


On  sonne   (frappe)  a  la  porte.     J'ouvre 
moi-meme  et  je  dis: 

—  Bon  jour    (bonsoir),   mon    cher 
ami.    Entrez  done.    Je  suis  en- 
chante  (charme)  de  vous  voir. 

—  Merci,  je  ne  vous  derange  pas? 

—  Oh  non!   pas   du  tout.     Per- 
mettez-moi  de  vous  debarras- 
ser  de  votre  chapeau. 

—  Merci,  vous  e'tes  trop  bon. 


There's  a  ring  (knock)  at  the  door.   1 
open  the  door  myself  and  say: 

—  Good  day  or  good  morning  (good 
evening) ,  my  dear  friend.  Do  come 
in.    I  am  delighted  to  see  you. 

—  Thank  you,  I  hope  I  am  not  dis- 
turbing you?  , 

—  Oh  no,  not  at  all.    Allow  me  to 
take  your  hat. 

—  Thanks,  you  are  too  kind. 


MATERIAL  FOR  CONVERSATION 


217 


—  Ayez  la  bonte  (donnez-vous  la 
peine)  de  vous  asseoir  (less  for- 
mal:   asseyez-vous    done);    ici 
dans  ce  fauteuil. 

—  Merci  beaucoup,  mais  j'ai  peur 
de  vous  deranger. 

—  Pas  du  tout.   Ne  vous  genez  pas. 
Et  comment  vous  portez-vous 
depuis  si  longtemps?  (less formal: 
Comment  allez-vous?  comment 
c.a  va-t-il?  comment  ga  va?) 

—  Tres  bien  (pas  mal),  merci,  et 
vous(-meme)? 

—  J'ai  ete  un  peu  souffrant. 

—  J'en  suis  desole !    Qu'est-ce  que 
vous  aviez? 

—  C'etait  une  espece  de  neuras- 
thenic.   Mais  ga  va  deja  mieux. 

—  Tant  mieux.     J'espere  que  ga 
passera  vite. 

—  Mais  vous  n'etes  pas  bien;  ce 
fauteuil   n'est   pas   bon    (com- 
mode, confortable). 

—  Si!  si! 

—  Mais  non,  permettez-moi.     Je 
vais   vous   donner   ce   coussin. 
Levez-vous,  s'il  vous  plait.    La ! 
maintenant,  asseyez-vous.  Vous 
etes  mieux,  n'est-ce  pas? 

—  Oh,  oui!  mais  vous  etes  trop 
aimable. 

Apres  avoir  cause  un  peu,  mon  ami  s'ex- 
cuse.    II  faut  qu'il  s'en  aille.    E  dit: 

—  Mes  compliments  a  monsieur  vo- 
tre  pere  et  amadame  votremere. 

• —  Merci,  je  n'y  manquerai  pas. 

Bien  des  choses  (de  ma  part)  a 

votre  frere. 
Nous  nous  disons :  *  au  revoir,' '  a  ce  soir,' 

'  a  demain  matin,* '  a  lundi  (mardi,  etc.) 

prochain.'    Nous  nous  serrons  la  main, 

et  le  voila  parti. 


—  Kindly  be  seated;  here  in  this 
chair. 


—  Thank  you  very  much,  but  I  am 
afraid  of  disturbing  you. 

—  Not  at  all.     Make  yourself  at 
home.     And  how  have  you  been 
this  long  time? 


—  Very  well,  thanks,  and  how  are 


—  /  have  not  been  very  well. 

—  /  am  very  sorry.    What  was  the 
matter? 

—  It  was  a  sort  of  nervous  exhaus- 
tion.   But  I  am  better  now. 

—  7  am  glad  to  hear  it.    I  hope  it 
will  soon  disappear. 

—  But  you're  not  comfortable;  that 
chair  doesn't  suit  you. 

—  Oh  yes,  it  does. 

—  No,  no,  allow  me.    I'll  give  you 
this  cushion.    Rise,  please.  Now 
then,  sit  down.     That's    better, 
isn't  it? 

—  Yes,  indeed,  but  you  are  too  kind. 

After  chatting  a  little  my  friend  begs  to 
be  excused.  He  must  go.  He  says: 

—  Remember  me  to  your  father  and 
mother. 

—  Thanks,  I  shall  (will) .    Remem- 
ber me  to  your  brother. 

We  say  to  one  another  'good-bye,'  'good- 
bye till  this  evening,'  'till  to-morrow 
morning,'  'till  Monday  (Tuesday  etc.), 
next.'  We  shake  hands  and  he's  gone. 


REVIEW  EXERCISES 


NOTE.  —  These  sentences  have  been  selected  for  the  most  part  from 
Harvard,  Yale  and  other  College  Entrance  Papers,  and  are  grouped  so  as 
to  illustrate  important  points  of  grammar. 

I.   The  Article 

A.  1.  I  have  no  friends.    2.  I  have  a  great  many  flowers  and 
will  give  you  some.    3.  He  has  neither  father  nor  mother.    4.  They 
haven't  any  money.     5.  There  were  many  houses  in  the  town. 
6.  Here  are  some  fine  pears;  do  you  wish  any?    7.  Are  there  any 
pencils  in  that  box?    There  are  none  now.    8.  Here  are  some  fine 
apples.     9.  They  are  all  going  to  France  to-morrow.     10.  If  you 
are  thirsty  you  may  drink  some  cold  water.     11.  He  wanted  to 
buy  some  apples  but  he  didn't  have  any  money.     12.  You  are 
wrong  in  thinking  so.    13.  Have  you  any  books?    Give  me  some. 
I  have  no  books  now.    14.  We  had  a  good  deal  of  snow  last  winter. 

15.  There  are  many  things  we  can  learn  by  reading  good  books. 

16.  I  beg  your  pardon;  I  am  right  and  you  are  wrong.     17.  I 
am  always  cold  [on]   the  days  when  it  is   cold.     18.  Are  you 
warm?    Yes,  and  I  am  thirsty  also.    19.  Is  there  any  water  here? 
Yes,  here  is  some  good,  cool  water.    20.  There  are  white  hens  and 
black  ones  in  the  barn. 

B.  1.  Don't  you  need  your  hat  when  you  go  out?    2.  Won't 
you  buy  her  some  good  red  apples?    3.  Have  you  good  friends? 
4.  We  saw  pebbles  and  sand  in  the  water  of  the  river.     5.  In 
Canada  people  eat  a  great  deal  of  fruit  in  autumn.    6.  I  am  sure 
he  asked  for  ripe  apples;  these  are  green  ones.    7.  The  weather  has 
been  very  warm  and  the  flowers  need  water.     8.  The  little  bird 
said,  "Open  the  window  for  me,  I  am  very  hungry."     9.  When 
horses   are   thirsty  they  need  water  and  they  go  to  the  river. 
10.  There  are  good  books  and  bad  ones.    11.  I  have  no  friends  in 
this  country,  but  I  have  some  in  America.     12.  He  has  potatoes, 
cabbage  (s)  and  onions.    He  planted  them  on  the  second  of  May. 
13.  There  were  some  very  pretty  flowers  at  the  market  this  morn- 
ing.    14.  Perhaps  you  are  right,  but  certainly  I  am  too  warm. 
15.  That  pupil  likes  history  better  than  grammar.     16.  Children 

218 


REVIEW  EXERCISES  219 

sometimes  have  wonderful  courage.  17.  The  boys  rushed  in  with 
their  hats  on  their  heads.  18.  I  had  my  hair  cut  this  morning. 
19.  Mrs.  Brown  is  a  Frenchwoman.  20.  Queen  Victoria  was  born 
in  1819. 

II.   Numerals 

1.  I  shall  be  eighteen  years  old  in  nineteen  hundred  and  seven- 
teen. 2.  What  time  was  it?  It  was  half  past  ten.  3.  When  did 
your  brother  return  from  Europe?  He  arrived  last  night  at  a  quar- 
ter past  eight.  4.  Write  out  in  French  21,  63,  177,  46th,  ^  f. 
5.  What  day  of  the  month  is  it?  It  is  the  fifteenth  of  May,  1911 
(write  date  in  full).  6.  They  were  born  on  the  same  day,  the  17th 
of  July,  1893  (write  date  in  full).  7.  I  was  born  on  the  15th  of 
August,  1895  (write  date  in  full) .  8.  What  time  was  it  when  the 
train  left?  9.  It  was  twenty  minutes  to  eleven.  10.  Can  you  tell 
me  the  time?  It  is  half  past  two.  11.  I  have  here  a  box  full  of 
cherries.  How  many  are  there?  Ninety-one.  12.  I  have  been  in 
Toronto  a  fortnight  and  I  like  the  city.  13.  We  did  not  go  there 
yesterday  at  ten  o'clock.  14.  You  say  that  he  is  twenty  years  old. 

15.  Is  his  oldest  brother  not  ten  years  older?    16.  Does  the  train 
start  for  Boston  at  a  quarter  to  nine?     17.  We  have  been  here 

•  three  weeks.  18.  My  grandfather  is  eighty  years  old.1  19.  During 
the  first  two  years  he  did  not  study.  20.  Fifteen  cents  make  sev- 
enty-five centimes.  21.  Victor  Hugo  was  born  in  1802  (write  date 
in  full).  22.  He  died  in  1885  (write  date  in  full).  23.  It  is  half  past 
eleven;  we  must  go  home. 

III.   Personal  Pronouns 

1.  Will  you  introduce  me  to  her?  2.  Are  you  angry  with  me? 
3.  Give  it  to  me.  4.  I  took  him  there  a  week  ago.  5.  We  have 
given  the  books  back  to  them.  6.  Show  them  to  us,  please. 
7.  Don't  send  them  to  him.  8.  Hide  yourself  behind  the  door. 
9.  Will  you  kindly  give  me  some?  10.  Give  it  to  us,  do  not  give 
it  to  them.  11.  They  have  made  fun  of  us  all  day.  12.  He  lends 
it  to  me  every  Sunday.  13.  Give  us  some,  but  do  not  give  us  so 
many.  14.  John's  watch  is  [made]  of  (en)  gold.  His  father  gave  it  to 
him.  15.  I  have  your  books,  I  shall  finish  one  of  them  next  week. 

16.  Did  you  sell  that  lady  any  sugar?    17.  Yes,  I  sold  her  some, 
but  I  sold  none  to  her  sister.    18.  Don't  sell  her  any.    19.  Where 
will  he  find  a  better  neighbour  than  I?    20.  We  have  none,  but  we 
should  like  to  have  some  to-morrow.     21.  His  coat  does  not  fit 


220  REVIEW  EXERCISES 

him  well;  he  has  just  been  trying  it  on.  22.  How  many  prizes  have 
you?  I  have  only  one.  23.  I  have  given  them  to  my  sister;  they 
were  hers.  24.  Go  away,  we  cannot  be  friends,  but  I  have  no 
grudge  against  you.  25.  You  have  taken  my  pen.  Please  give  it 
to  her.  26.  I  saw  him  this  morning,  but  I  did  not  speak  to  him 
about  it.  27.  Here  are  some  also;  keep  them  for  me.  28.  I  do 
not  doubt  it;  he  will  win  the  day. 

IV.   Demonstratives 

1.  He  who  does  not  talk  too  much  is  wise.  2.  Don't  give  me 
this  pencil,  give  me  that  one.  3.  These  cakes  are  not  as  good  as 
the  ones  we  bought  here  yesterday.  4.  It  is  easier  to  do  this  than 
that.  5.  This  house  and  the  one  in  which  our  cousins  live  will  be 
sold  to-morrow.  6.  This  is  worse  than  that.  7.  Have  you  learned 
to-day's  lesson  better  than  yesterday's?  8.  Which  of  these  pears 
do  you  like  the  best?  The  one  you  have  brought.  9.  Is  it  you 
who  told  him  so?  10.  This  book  is  mine,  but  that  is  my  sister's. 
11.  Those  who  leave  will  never  return.  12.  These  little  children 
are  the  ones  you  met  yesterday.  13.  This  pen  and  that  one  are 
mine.  Where  is  your  brother's?  14.  It  is  easy  to  do.  15.  Those 
are  Germans..  16.  Victor  Hugo  and  Michelet  are  Frenchmen,  the 
former  is  a  poet,  the  latter  an  historian.  17.  It  was  we  who  did 
the  work.  18.  Those  who  are  not  killed  will  fight.  19.  Here  are 
two  books;  give  me  this  one  and  keep  that  one.  20.  This  man  is 
my  friend,  that  one  is  my  enemy. 

V.   Possessives 

1.  Is  that  your  umbrella?  No,  this  one  is  mine,  that  one  is 
yours.  2.  This  is  my  friend's  watch.  3.  Where  do  your  parents 
live?  In  Montreal.  4.  Here  are  my  pens.  Where  are  yours? 
5.  I  don't  know  where  mine  are.  6.  Didn't  your  parents  see  our 
friends  and  hers  in  England?  7.  No,  they  saw  only  hers,  because 
yours  had  already  gone  to  Paris.  8.  My  watch  and  his  are  on  the 
table,  are  they  not?  9.  Your  party  will  not  be  stronger  than  ours. 
10.  This  is  my  house;  where  is  yours?  11.  Mine  is  yonder  behind 
the  church.  12.  A  friend  of  mine  has  come  from  Chicago.  13.  A 
relative  of  mine  who  lives  in  Chicago  has  become  very  rich. 
14.  An  Englishman,  a  friend  of  mine,  told  me  that.  15.  Do  you 
know  the  difference  between  mine  and  thine?  16.  Is  that  watch 
yours?  17.  No,  sir,  it  is  not  mine,  I  think  it  is  my  brother's. 


REVIEW  EXERCISES  221 

18.  My  dress  is  not  ready  yet,  but  yours  was  ready  yesterday. 

19.  Your  harvest  is  better  than  ours  this  year.    20.  My  book  is 
on  the  table,  yours  is  under  it. 

VI.   Relatives  and  Interrogatives 

A.  1.  Do  not  forget  what  I  told  you.    2.  I  do  not  like  the  flow- 
ers which  she  sold  me.    3.  Is  the  church  of  which  you  have  spoken 
near  your  house?    4.  Here  are  two  books,  which  is  the  more  in- 
teresting?    5.  Your  father  told  me  what  your  brother  had  done. 

6.  Take  what  you  need  and  leave  the  rest  beside  my  table. 

7.  What  is  the  matter  with  that  little  boy?    8.  What  have  you 
given  back  to  him?    9.  This  is  the  boy  whose  father  is  in  England. 
10.  I  don't  know  what  you  have  just  said.     11.  Which  of  those 
horses  do  you  like  best?     12.  Whom  did  you  see?     13.  Who  is 
your  neighbour?    14.  What  have  you  written?    15.  What  is  that 
beside  you?    16.  What  kind  of  weather  is  it?    17.  The  gentleman 
for  whose  farm  I  offered  $10,000  has  not  sold  it  yet.    18.  What  is 
there  in  that  box?    19.  There  is  the  book  I  spoke  of  to  you  last 
week.    20.  Is  that  the  house  you  spoke  to  me  about?    21.  He  who 
has  never  suffered  does  not  know  what  joy  is. 

B.  1.  The  king  asked  whose  was  the  field  where  they  were 
reaping.    2.  I  cannot  express  to  you  my  gratitude  for  (de)  what 
you  have  done.    3.  What  are  you  doing  now?    Have  you  not  be- 
gun yet?    4.  There  is  the  apple  tree  of  which  I  have  spoken  so 
often.    5.  Why  do  people  give  the  best  things  to  those  who  do  not 
need  them?    6.  Have  you  finished  the  books  I  gave  you  last  week? 
7.  Didn't  you  buy  the  pictures  I  saw  in  your  room?    8.  Tell  me 
what  you  want  me  to  do.    9.  Do  you  know  what  they  thought? 
They  thought  you  had  no  friends.     10.  He  did  not  tell  me  what 
the  Louvre  is.     11.  Those  are  the  flowers  which  I  have  bought. 
12.  There  is  a  man  whose  son  I  know.    13.  All  that  he  has  to  do 
is  to  tell  you  what  he  has  seen.    14.  What  a  big  apple!    Who  gave 
it  to  you?    15.  What  are  you  going  to  do  to-day?    I  do  not  know 
yet.     16.  What  is  a  pear  tree?     It  is  a  tree  which  yields  pears. 
17.  Whose  is  that  house  on  the  other  side  of  the  road?    18.  My 
brother  owed  me  the  half  of  what  he  had  received.     19.  Who  is 
she?    Whose  daughter  is  she? 

C.  1.  We  are  going  to  eat  the  fruit  of  the  apple  tree  which  is  in 
our  garden.     2.  You  will  send  her  a  box  of  the  coffee  which  I 
brought  from  France.    3.  What  is  a  classroom?    It  is  a  room  in 


222  REVIEW  EXERCISES 

which  we  tell  the  teacher  what  we  know.    4.  Who  is  it?    It  is  my 
father's  friend,  the  general  of  whom  I  was  speaking  yesterday. 

5.  Tell  me  what  you  have  been  doing  to-day.    6.  Which  of  these 
two  towns  is  the  larger?    7.  Has  he  read  the  letter  which  she  has 
written  him?    8.  You  see  what  it  is  to  be  a  stranger.    9.  Which  of 
these  gentlemen  is  the  one  I  want  to  speak  to?    10.  A  dictionary 
is  a  book  which  is  used  to  explain  the  meaning  of  words.    11.  Which 
of  your  friends  has  gone  to  Europe?    12.  I  met  two  men  last  week 
whose  names  I  have  forgotten.     13.  That  is  the  man  whose  son 
lives  in  the  United  States.    14.  Whose  son  was  Alexander?    What 
did  he  do?    15.  Can  you  tell  me  which  is  the  largest  lake  in  North 
America?    16.  Has  he  all  the  money  he  needs?    He  has  all  I  had. 
17.  My  two  brothers  who  live  in  Germany  will  remain  with  me 
until  next  Friday.     18.  He  would  not  tell  me  what  he  had  said. 

19.  Do  you  need  the  books  we  have  read  this  year?    20.  We  shall 
need  those  you  read  and  others  also. 

VII.   Indefinites 

1.  I  will  say  nothing  about  it  to  any  one.  2.  Nothing  is  the 
matter  with  him.  3.  Perhaps  something  better  will  be  offered  us. 
4.  I  have  seen  no  one  to-day,  but  I  saw  everybody  at  church  yes- 
terday. 5.  The  old  lady  wishes  to  give  the  boy  something  good. 

6.  What  do  you  need?    I  don't  need  anything.    7.  You  never  saw 
any  one  so  contented.    8.  Everybody  was  hungry,  and  yet  nobody 
wanted  to  make  peace  just  to  have  bread.    9.  Each  of  his  fables 
is  the  story  of  a  day.    10.  If  one  has  books  enough,  one  can  amuse 
himself  reading.    11.  There  is  never  anybody  at  his  house.    12.  We 
were  informed  that  his  ship  was  to  leave  at  noon  on  Saturday. 
13.  None  of  my  friends  has  gone  this  year.    14.  Give  them  some- 
thing good  to  drink.     15.  Has  your  father  anything  good  in  his 
garden?    Nothing.     16.  There  is  no  fire  in  this  room.    How  cold 
it  is!     17.  We  were  told  not  to  come.     18.  Did  you  see  anybody 
you  knew  at  the  station?    19.  I  saw  nobody  there  whom  I  knew. 

20.  -What  did  you  give  him?    I  gave  him  nothing. 

VIII.   Irregular  Verbs 

1.  Give  the  future  indicative,  first  person  singular  of  valoir,  faire 
and  cueillir.  2.  Give  the  imperative,  second  person  plural  of 
avoir,  boire  and  conduire.  3.  Give  the  present  subjunctive,  first 
person  singular  of  lever,  plaire  and  acquerir.  4.  Give  the  future 


REVIEW  EXERCISES  223 

indicative,  first  person  singular  of  savoir,  courir  and  venir.  5.  Give 
the  present  subjunctive,  third  person  singular  of  avoir,  envoy er  and 
jeter.  6.  Give  the  past  participle  of  prendre,  dire  and  lire.  7.  Give 
the  past  definite  in  full  of  voir,  vivre  and  tenir.  8.  Give  the  im- 
perfect subjunctive  in  full  of  savoir,  taire  and  ecrire.  9.  Give  the 
present  indicative  in  full  of  vouloir,  se  taire  and  s'en  oiler.  10.  Give 
the  past  definite  in  full  of  craindre,  devoir  and  boire.  11.  Give  the 
principal  parts  of  suivre,  plaindre  and  paraitre.  12.  Give  the  prin- 
cipal parts  of  aller,  boire,  venir  and  courir.  13.  I  have  sat  down. 
14.  It  has  opened.  15.  They  are  sleeping.  16.  They  were  eating. 

17.  Let  us  run.    18.  He  will  run.    19.  They  are  drinking.    20.  He 
is  dying.    21.  She  died  this  morning.    22.  Where  was  she  born? 

IX.   Government  of  Verbs 

1.  Think  of  me  when  I  am  (fut.)  not  here.  2.  I  shall  never  be 
able  to  use  them.  3.  Do  you  ever  think  of  England  when  you  are 
in  the  United  States?  I  never  think  of  it.  4.  I  was  going  to  ask 
my  brother  for  some  tickets.  5.  He  always  has  some  and  I  shall 
ask  him  for  two.  6.  How  much  did  you  pay  for  the  shoes  you 
bought?  7.  I  paid  twenty  francs  ninety-five  centimes  for  them. 
8.  Will  you  buy  me  some  paper  to-morrow?  9.  I  cannot  wait  for 
you  any  longer;  the  breakfast  is  on  the  table.  10.  Look  in  your 
dictionary  for  the  meaning  of  all  the  words.  11.  Listen  to  her, 
and  when  she  makes  mistakes,  tell  her.  12.  I  bought  this  hat  at 
your  hatter's  and  I  paid  ten  francs  for  it.  13.  She  bought  several 
hats  in  that  shop  and  she  paid  very  high  for  them.  14.  He  paid 
twelve  thousand  francs  for  the  automobile  (motor-car)  he  bought  in 
London.  15.  I  have  paid  twenty-five  francs  for  my  hat.  How 
much  did  you  pay  for  yours?  16.  The  children  are  looking  for  the 
book.  17.  How  much  did  you  pay  for  those  beautiful  red  roses? 

18.  She  has  lost  it,  but  I  am  going  to  look  for  it.    19.  Did  he  ap- 
proach the  house?    He  did.    20.  Did  you  remember  what  I  told 
you?    I  didn't.    I  forgot  it.    21.  What  do  you  use  when  you  write? 
22.  I  use  paper  and  ink. 

X.   The  Infinitive 

A.I.  Tell  your  friend  to  come  and  see  me.  2.  I  wish  I  were  in 
France  now.  3.  The  teacher  makes  the  boys  study  their  lessons. 
4.  Where  can  he  be?  5.  He  won't  be  long  in  arriving.  6.  I  saw 
her  leave  the  house  half  an  hour  ago.  7.  Please  send  for  him. 


224  REVIEW  EXERCISES 

8.  Are  you  going  to  have  a  house  built  this  year?  9.  The  ladies  I 
saw  this  morning  have  just  set  out  for  Paris.  10.  I  made  him  write 
a  letter  to  his  brother.  11.  Make  them  send  us  another  box  of 
cakes.  12.  Make  them  write  slowly.  13.  Make  them  write  it 
slowly.  14.  Their  teacher  made  them  write  their  exercises. 
15.  We  have  just  given  him  what  he  wanted.  16.  We  heard  them 
say  that  their  friends  had  gone  to  Germany.  17.  He  stayed  at 
home  all  day,  but  his  friends  could  not  come  to  see  him.  18.  It 
would  be  better  to  talk  less  and  work  more.  19.  I  still  have  sev- 
eral pages  to  read  before  (the)  evening.  20.  I  had  a  house  built 
for  my  son  who  has  just  married. 

B.  1.  I  nearly  fell  on  leaving  your  house.    2.  You  have  only  to 
bathe  in  the  river.    3.  You  have  only  one  thing  to  do,  that  is  to 
confess  everything  to  your  father.    4.  The  king  has  just  left  the 
palace,  but  he  will  be  back  to-morrow.    5.  Don't  try  to  tell  the 
whole  story;  it  is  too  long.    6.  How  much  water  did  I  tell  you  to 
put  in?    7.  They  have  just  arrived  from  France,  and  will  return 
in  the  spring.    8.  When  are  you  coming  to  see  us?    9.  We  shall 
not  go  to  see  you  this  week.    10.  After  reading  the  letter  I  gave  it 
to  him.    11.  He  has  just  left  his  friends  in  the  street.    12.  We  do 
not  want  to  return  home,  we  want  to  stay  here.     13.  He  amuses 
himself  by  describing  to  his  family  wJiat  he  has  seen.    14.  I  shall 
not  fail  to  follow  your  advice.    15.  It  isn't  worth  doing   (the 
trouble  of  being  done).    16.  Make  him  do  his  work  before  he  goes 
away.    17.  I  see  a  gentleman  at  the  door;  will  you  be  good  enough 
to  show  him  in?    18.  Be  good  enough  to  give  me  what  you  have 
in  your  hand.     19.  Could  you  tell  me,  sir,  what  the  name  of  this 
street  is?    20.  We  shall  not  go  on  foot  to-day;  we  prefer  to  drive. 

C.  1.  Where  are  you  going  to  spend  your  holidays?     In  the 
country.     2.  Be  good  enough  to  tell  me  all  you  have  seen  and 
heard.    3.  I  am  having  my  house  painted.    It  will  be  finished  a 
week  from  to-day.     4.  We  intended  to  go  for  a  walk,  but  the 
weather  was  bad.    5.  Show  the  ladies  up  and  make  the  children 
be  quiet.    6.  Tell  them  to  have  it  sent  to  her.    7.  We  cannot  wait. 
Something  must  be  done.    8.  My  neighbour  told  me  that  he  was 
to  leave  [on]  the  next  day.     9.  I  heard  my  name  called  three 
times.     10.  Do  you  not  see  those  two  men  coming?     11.  They 
had  the  sick  [man]  carried  into  the  other  room.    12.  Tell  them  to 
go  away;  they  are  making  too  much  noise.    13.  He  has  tried  to  do 
so  twice  already.     14.  He  is  to  set  out  for  Germany  to-morrow. 
15.  I  was  to  meet  my  cousin  here.    She  is  to  marry  my  friend  to- 


REVIEW  EXERCISES  225 

morrow.  16.  After  the  marriage,  the  newly  married  couple  intend 
to  live  in  Boston.  17.  I  had  just  visited  my  old  friend  who  lives 
near  the  church.  18.  I  have  had  my  boys  read  this  book.  19.  The 
young  girls  had  (out  du)  to  read  it  the  day  before  yesterday. 
20.  He  finally  accepted  the  conditions. 

XI.    The  Imperfect,  Past  Definite  and  Past  Indefinite 

1.  My  brother  was  reading  when  they  entered  the  room.  2.  Did 
they  receive  as  much  of  them  as  you  [did]?  3.  We  were  translat- 
ing our  exercises  when  the  professor  entered  the  classroom.  4.  Why 
did  he  go  downstairs  a  few  minutes  ago?  He  went  to  send  for  the 
doctor.  5.  When  were  you  born?  6.  On  which  chair  did  you 
place  my  valise?  7.  I  placed  it  on  the  one  beside  the  window. 
8.  I  didn't  hear  the  man  who  was  talking.  9.  Many  children 
have  already  gone  to  school,  but  tkere  are  some  still  at  home. 
10.  Where  did  you  go  after  breakfast?  11.  Did  you  buy  a  pair  of 
shoes  when  you  went  for  a  walk?  12.  I  did  not  see  him  at  the 
station  last  night.  13.  I  did  not  buy  (prendre)  a  ticket  because 
my  friends  had  not  come.  14.  There  were  many  people  who  were 
going  to  take  the  train  for  Boston.  15.  We  drank  some  hot  milk, 
we  went  to  bed  and  we  slept  all  night.  16.'  The  river  froze  during 
the  winter  and  we  skated  every  Saturday.  17.  With  whom  were 
they  taking  a  walk  when  we  met  them?  18.  I  have  not  finished 
those  books  yet.  19.  Did  you  buy  some  pears  yesterday?  20.  No, 
I  didn't  buy  any,  because  I  didn't  have  any  money.  21.  Didn't 
we  sell  you  any  tickets?  22.  I  bought  the  four  pictures  you  saw, 
and  my  old  aunt  gave  me  the  others.  23.  Were  there  many  boys 
in  the  country  when  you  went  there?  24.  No,  there  were  not 
many.  25.  What  were  you  doing  when  I  entered?  26.  When  I 
told  him  who  I  was  and  what  I  wanted,  he  came  at  once.  27.  How 
long  has  the  king  been  reigning? 

XII.   The  Future 

1.  When  you  come  I  will  introduce  you  to  them.  2.  Come  when 
you  please  and  I  will  help  you.  3.  When  we  come  to  see  you  we 
shall  tell  you  about  it.  4.  When  I  am  in  the  country  I  shall  have 
him  work  for  me.  5.  I  shall  wear  my  dress  coat  when  I  go  to  the 
theatre.  6.  When  I  have  no  more  money,  I  shall  go  and  tell  (it 
to)  my  father.  7.  As  soon  as  you  have  read  the  book  tell  me  how 
you  liked  ( =  found)  it.  8.  Give  it  him  when  next  ( =  the  next 


226  REVIEW  EXERCISES 

time)  you  see  him.  9.  After  we  have  dined  we  shall  go  back  to 
the  town.  10.  Will  you  go  away  when  your  brother  arrives? 
11.  There  are  many  interesting  things  which  you  will  see  when 
you  go  to  Paris.  12.  When  you  enter  the  church  you  will  see 
your  friend  in  front  of  the  window.  13.  I  will  give  it  to  him  when 
I  see  him  this  evening.  14.  When  they  have  seen  all  the  pictures 
in  the  museum  they  are  going  to  leave  the  town.  15.  When  you 
come  to  Toronto,  come  and  see  me.  16..  As  long  as  I  live  I  shall 
not  forget  you.  17.  When  you  have  been  there  a  year  or  two,  you 
will  know  better  what  you  should  do.  18.  As  long  as  iron  lasts 
civilization  will  last.  19.  I  shall  go  when  my  father  comes. 
20.  Come  when  you  will. 

XIII.   The  Conditional 

A.  1.  If  I  had  met  him  I  should  have  spoken  to  him.    2.  Would 
you  not  have  sold  it  to  them  if  they  had  offered  you  more  money? 

3.  If  I  go,  who  will  remain?  if  I  remain,  who  will  go?    4.  That 
(young)  girl  could  write  if  she  wished.    5.  If  I  should  say  so,  would 
you  believe  me?    6.  If  I  'had  been  you  (say:  in  (a)  your  place)  I 
would  not  have  given  him  anything.     7.  We  shall  take  a  long  walk 
to-morrow  if  it  is  pleasant  (=  fine).    8.  He  would  speak  to  me  if 
he  were  here.    9.  He  would  have  spoken  to  me  ten  days  ago  if  he 
had  been  here.     10.  If  they  worked  they  would  not  be  poor.    11.  If 
you  need  money,  will  you  not  work  for  me?    12.  If  the  door  opens, 
shut  your  book  at  once.     13.  If  that  house  were  larger  and  (if  it) 
had  more  rooms  I  would  buy  it.    14.  He  would  lend  it  me  if  I 
asked  him  for  it.     15.  If  he  spoke  more  slowly  I  could  understand 
him.     16.  A  friend  of  mine  told  me  that  he  would  come  to  see 
me  at  five  o'clock,  if  it  was  not  raining.    17.  If  he  comes,  I  shall 
go  for  a  walk  with  him  after  dinner.    18.  If  they  should  give  you 
some  white  roses  would  you  give  them  to  your  sister?     19.  Per- 
haps that  man  will  give  you  some  milk,  if  you  ask  him  for  it. 
20.  If  he  had  gone  home  with  me,  I  should  have  given  him  his 
dinner. 

B.  1.  If  you  had  called  me,  I  should  have  got  up  at  six  o'clock. 
2.  If  you  have  no  money,  how  can  you  buy  anything  to  eat?    3.  If 
I  were  he  (see  XI II,  A,  6),  I  should  tell  them  what  B  think  of  them. 

4.  I  should  be  very  much  obliged  to  you  if  you  would  tell  me  what 
you  are  thinking  of.    5.  You  could  have  come  earlier  if  you  had 
wanted  to.    6.  If  people  tried  to  learn  that  language  they  would 


REVIEW  EXERCISES  227 

not  find  it  difficult.  7.  Should  you  have  been  able  to  see  us  if 
we  had  come  here  on  Thursday?  8.  If  we  had  a  great  deal  of 
money  we  should  not  be  much  happier.  9.  If  he  had  seen  his 
friend  he  would  have  told  us  so.  10.  If  you  will  kindly  lend  me 
your  pencil  I  shall  write  all  the  words.  11.  I  asked  him  if  he 
would  come  to-day,  but  he  would  not  answer.  12.  If  you  give  men 
what  they  desire  they  are  happy.  13.  These  children  would  have 
gone  to  school  if  it  had  not  rained.  14.  Would  his  brother  give 
him  the  money  if  he  were  to  ask  for  it?  15.  The  other  could  have 
done  so,  if  she  had  tried.  16.  If  I  had  spoken  to  him  he  would 
have  fallen.  17.  Come  if  you  wish.  18.  Come  if  you  please. 
19.  I  should  have  been  very  thankful  to  them  if  they  had  prevented 
me  from  doing  that.  20.  If  he  should  be  there  tell  him  to  come 
at  once. 

XIV.  The  Imperative 

1.  Ask  him  whether  he  has  bought  them.  2.  Do  not  be  afraid. 
3.  Don't  talk  to  me  about  it.  4.  Help  yourself  (2d  sing.)  and 
Heaven  will  help  you.  5.  Sit  down  here,  you  must  be  tired.  6.  Let 
us  not  go  there  at  once.  7.  Don't  go  there,  John,  you  will  hurt 
yourself.  8.  Don't  send  it  to  me  yet.  9.  My  brother  is  not  here 
yet,  but  don't  wait  for  him.  10.  Permit  me  to  thank  you  for  it 
(en).  11.  Let  him  not  go  away,  we  need  him.  12.  Tell  them  to 
come.  13.  It  is  ten  o'clock,  let  us  write  our  letters.  14.  Will  you 
kindly  lend  me  your  pen?  15.  Lend  me  your  pen,  but  do  not  lend 
it  to  her.  16.  Let  them  stay  with  us.  17.  Let  them  not  do  what 
you  have  forbidden.  18.  Go  away,  dog,  you  are  disturbing  us. 
19.  You  have  bread;  give  me  some.  20.  I  have  some,  don't  give 
me  any. 

XV.  The  Subjunctive 

A.  1.  Before  you  go  I  should  like  to  see  you.  2.  I  am  sorry 
you  could  not  come.  3.  I  took  care  that  she  did  not  fall.  4.  Un- 
less they  come  I  shall  be  at  home  until  five  o'clock.  5.  I  am  glad 
you  are  here.  6.  They  fear  that  you  may  believe  it.  7.  I  am  glad 
he  has  read  this  book.  8.  Do  you  wish  me  to  return  without  see- 
ing him?  9.  I  was  astonished  that  he  did  not  get  up  earlier.  10.  It 
would  be  a  pity  that  that  should  happen.  11.  I  am  anxious  that 
(a  ce  que)  he  should  read  this  book.  12.  The  doctor  is  at  home; 
shall  I  send  for  him?  13.  I  am  afraid  they  do  not  know  the  dif- 
ference between  him  and  me.  14.  You  must  return  before  my 


228  REVIEW  EXERCISES 

father  goes  away.  15.  I  am  afraid  he  is  ill.  16.  I  did  not  think 
it  would  rain.  17.  I  am  sorry  that  she  did  not  come  early.  18.  I 
wish  you  would  bring  what  I  asked  you  to  bring.  19.  Whether 
the  weather  is  good  (=  fine)  or  bad  we  accept  it.  20.  You  must 
bring  your  books  with  you  to-morrow. 

B.  1.  I  am  very  much  afraid  your  father  is  ill.    2.  I  am  glad 
you  will  be  able  to  come.    3.  Do  you  think  it  will  rain?    4.  I  think 
it  will  not  rain  to-day.     5.  I  do  not  know  any  one  who  is  truly 
happy.     6.  Whatever  his  reasons  were,  he  has  been  obliged  to 
change  them.    7.  Would. you  like  me  to  speak  to  him  or  to  write 
to  him?    8.  When  did  he  come  here?    I  want  him  to  return  home. 

9.  I  don't  want  you  to  be  unhappy.     10.  Do  you  think  he  will 
come?    11.  I  think  he  will  come.    12.  He  is  looking  for  some  one 
who  may  know  him.     13.  Take  care  that  he  does  not  see  you. 
14.  He  is  very  sorry  that  you  have  a  grudge  against  him.    15.  It 
is  necessary  that  you  should  not  do  it.     16.  There  is  nothing  in 
these  books  which  can  interest  you.    17.  Do  they  want  us  to  stay 
in  the  country  till  the  autumn?    18.  I  should  like  you  to  show  me 
the  house  which  you  have  had  built.     19.  Your  young  friend  has 
painted  a  large  picture,  but  I  don't  think  he  has  succeeded  well 
this  time.    20.  He  does  not  want  you  to  tell  him  everything  (tout 
ce  que)  you  know. 

C.  1.  My  brother  said  that  he  wished  me  to  write  to  him  often. 
2.  I  am  glad  that  you  were  so  well  during  my  absence.    3.  I  wish 
you  to  stay  here  until  my  return.    I  am  not  going  far.    4.  It  is 
necessary  that  you  put  out  this  lamp.     It  does  not  burn  well. 
5.  I  am  sorry  that  you  did  not  both  go  away  before  he  came.    6.  I 
am  not  sure  that  I  know  what  has  become  of  him.    7.  It  is  possible 
that  we  may  see  him  when  he  comes.    8.  He  is  the  richest  man  I 
know.    9.  Could  you  show  me  a  grammar  which  has  all  the  rules? 

10.  I  am  looking  for  a  house  which  is  large  enough  for  seven  peo- 
ple.   11.  Do  you  know  a  man  who  can  build  a  better  wall  than  he? 
12.  Whatever  the  conditions  are  I  cannot  accept  them  without 
reflecting.    13.  Whoever  he  is,  I  am  sure  that  he  is  no  gentleman. 

14.  Whenever    we    saw    them    they    were    always    very    busy. 

15.  Wherever  one  may  be,  one  will  always  find  that  politeness  is 
useful.     16.  I  am  glad  that  you  have  found  your  blue  necktie. 
17.  My  brothers  must  go  to  Europe  next  summer.     18.  I  am 
afraid  he  will  come  before  noon.    19.  Wherever  you  go,  remember 
that  I  shall  be  thinking  of  you.     20.  You  must  not  waste  your 
money. 


REVIEW  EXERCISES  229 


XVI.   Reflexives  and  Passives 

A.  1.  His  mother  has  hurt  her  arm.     2.  He  is  well  to-day. 
3.  Did  you  go  for  a  drive  yesterday  morning?    No,  I  took  a  ride 
in  the  park.    4.  Don't  be  mistaken.    What  we  say  is  true.    5.  My 
mother  did  not  hurt  herself.    6.  What  is  your  name?    7.  My  name 
is  Henry.    8.  The  French  were  very  brave,  they  let  themselves  be 
killed  (se  faire  tuer)  by  thousands.    9.  He  never  complains  of  the 
weather.    10.  We  will  go  for  a  walk  and  we  shall  have  a  good  time 
all  afternoon.     11.  At  what  time  did  you  get  up  this  morning? 
12.  He  was  followed  by  a  small  yellow  dog.     13.  He  is  not  at  all 
well  this  morning;  he  ought  to  take  a  walk.    14.  She  has  cut  her 
finger.     15.  It  is  late;  get  up  quickly  if  you  want  to  see  the  sun 
rise.     16.  Go  with  them  and  you  will  enjoy  yourself  a  great  deal. 

17.  What  is  the  name  of  the  lake  which  he   has    discovered? 

18.  Don't  be  angry  with  me.     19.  This  was  the  question  which 
people  were  asking  of  one  another  almost  every  day.     20.  My 
two  sisters  have  always  written  each  other  long  letters. 

B.  I.I  think  they  are  going  to  be  married  next  week.    2.  Which 
amusement  do  you  like  best,  to  go  riding  on  horseback  or  on  (a)  [a] 
bicycle?    3.  I  went  to  the  play  last  night,  but  I  did  not  enjoy  my- 
self.   4.  The  two  little  girls  bade  each  other  good  morning  and 
shook  hands.    5.  It  is  never  hard  to  amuse  oneself  if  one  is  well. 
6.  Come,  make  haste;  it  is  half  past  nine  and  we  are  late.    7.  When 
they  get  up  they  wash  their  hands  and  face[s].     8.  These  ladies 
bowed  to  each  other  and  shook  hands.    9.  Have  you  not  washed 
your  face  yet?     I  cannot  wait  for  you.     10.  How  many  letters 
have  these  young  men  written  to  each  other?     11.  They  have 
written  letters  to  each  other,  but  they  have  not  seen  each  other 
yet.    12.  Let  us  all  sit  down  around  this  large  table.    13.  The  two 
armies  fought  well.     14.  I  do  not  like  your  conduct.    Such  things 
are  not  done  in  (the)  good  society.     15.  Men  who  build  houses 
and  barns  are  called  carpenters.    16.  A  robbery  was  committed  in 
the  bank,  but  the  thief  was  caught.     17.  I  remember  all  that  he 
said.     18.  They  will  get  up  early  to  go  to  the  station.     19.  Have 
these  two  (young)  girls  promised  to  write  to  each  other?     Yes, 
every  week.    20.  Here  are  the  two  letters  which  they  have  written 
to  each  other  during  ten  months. 


230  REVIEW  EXERCISES 

XVII.   Impersonate 

1.  When  the  weather  is  bad,  we  remain  at  home.  2.  If  it  is 
warm  to-morrow  we  shall  go  into  the  forest.  3.  It  is  very  hot,  but 
not  so  hot  as  yesterday.  4.  I  think  it  will  be  fine  to-morrow.  We 
are  going  for  a  drive.  5.  It  is  impossible  for  you  to  know  what  I 
am  thinking  of.  6.  How  warm  it  is!  I  think  it  will  rain.  7.  It  is 
very  cold;  it  will  snow  perhaps  before  long.  8.  Although  it  is 
windy  it  is  warmer  than  yesterday.  9.  It  was  easy  to  shut  the 
gate  when  there  was  no  wind.  10.  What  kind  of  weather  is  it 
now?  11.  It  was  fine  a  moment  ago,  but  now  it  is  raining.  12.  In 
winter  it  is  dark  at  half  past  four.  13.  It  is  not  easy  to  read  when 
people  are  chatting  about  you.  14.  It  will  be  fine  weather  to-mor- 
row, and  our  celebration  will  take  place.  15.  When  it  is  warm, 
horses  and  men  are  thirsty.  16.  There  has  fallen  much  snow. 
17.  It  froze  last  night;  it  is  fine  now.  18.  There  were  many  people 
at  the  ball.  19.  You  must  not  go  away.  20.  You  must  do  what  I 
tell  you. 

XVIII.   Adverbs 

1.  I  do  not  wish  to  read  or  write.  2.  Perhaps  he  will  remain  at 
home  to-day.  3.  There  are  some  pencils  in  the  box  and  a  few 
books  under  it.  4.  Where  do  you  live?  I  live  opposite  you.  5.  In 
Paris  there  are  many  children  who  have  never  seen  anything  but 
poor  people.  6.  They  have  never  been  in  France  and  they  now 
say  they  will  not  go  there.  7.  It  was  only  a  small  thing.  8.  I  have 
never  seen  such  a  fine  picture.  9.  It  often  happens  that  we  prom- 
ise to  do  what  we  can  never  do.  10.  Neither  you  nor  I  sing. 
11.  We  have  no  more  paper,  we  cannot  write  any  more.  12.  I 
speak  neither  English  nor  German,  but  I  understand  both  a  little. 
13.  How  tired  I  am!  I  have  been  working  hard.  14.  He  has 
neither  friends  nor  money.  15.  She  had  only  a  few  francs  in  her 
pocket.  16.  Have  you  ever  read  that  play  by  Labiche?  17.  Does 
that  woman  sing  as  well  as  your  sister?  18.  He  does  not  like  the 
languages  at  all,  nor  I  either.  19.  The  books  are  not  on  the  table 
now.  20.  Perhaps  you  are  right,  but  one  must  go  somewhere. 

XIX.    Conjunctions 

1.  Take  him  there  yourself,  that  he  may  see  what  you  are  doing 
for  him.  2.  Although  he  is  not  very  strong,  he  has  travelled  every- 
where. 3.  Although  we  get  up  rather  late  we  never  miss  the  train. 
4.  Tell  it  to  him  before  you  forget  it.  5.  Unless  one  is  ill  one 


REVIEW  EXERCISES  231 

ought  always  to  work.  6.  I  shall  miss  the  train  unless  you  arrive 
on  time.  7.  Some  of  his  pupils  came  to  see  him  before  he  went 
away.  8.  It  is  a  long  time  since  I  have  seen  you.  9.  You  should 
not  have  done  that  without  asking  my  permission.  10.  He  missed 
his  train  because  he  would  not  get  up  early  enough.  11.  I  shall  not 
give  it  to  her  unless  she  asks  for  it.  12.  In  order  to  make  grain 
grow,  the  farmer  must  plough  the  land.  13.  The  grandfather  died 
six  months  before  John  was  born.  14.  Remain  here  until  your 
brother  returns.  15.  I  was  wondering  yesterday  whether  I  should 
be  able  to  speak  to  you.  16.  He  spoke  in  such  a  way  that  one 
could  not  understand  him.  17.  It  is  a  long  time  since  I  spoke  to 
him.  18.  We  shall  not  leave  until  our  father  comes.  19.  They 
will  not  go  away  without  speaking  to  you.  20.  He  went  home  for 
fear  of  catching  cold. 

XX.   Miscellaneous 

A.  1.  He  had  not  seen  him  for  three  years.     2.  After  looking 
at  the  two  books  I  asked  him  which  one  he  wanted.    3.  I  think  he 
is  right.    4.  The  more  he  works  the  more  I  will  give  him.    5.  That 
poor  little  child  must  have  been  ill;  he  ought  not  to  remain  there 
any  longer.    6.  I  am  not  going  to  Canada  unless  I  can  make  more 
money  there  than  at  home.    7.  I  have  a  grudge  against  all  those 
who  do  not  like  French.     8.  How  long  have  you  been  reading 
those  old  newspapers?    For  fifteen  or  twenty  minutes.    9.  Have 
you  been  in  Paris  long?    No,  we  have  been  here  only  two  weeks. 
10.  You  ought  to  know  how  that  is  done.    11.  Where  is  my  sister? 
She  has  gone  downstairs  to  get  her  books.     12.  Although  those 
children   can't  read  yet,   they  can  play  a  little  on  the  piano. 
13.  That  gentleman  must  have  been  in  Paris,  for  he  speaks  French 
like  a  Parisian.    14.  What  is  the  matter  with  you?    I  have  a  terri- 
ble toothache.    15.  These  are  the  poems  I  heard  read  when  I  was 
in  France.    16.  He  was  sitting  in  front  of  the  fire,  thinking  of  all 
he  had  suffered.    17.  Do  not  say  that  you  do  not  remember  it,  for 
I  told  you  about  it  two  hours  ago.    18.  Have  your  friends  come? 
Oh,  yes!     They  have  been  here  several  weeks.     19.  Nearly  all 
Parisians  are  fond  of  the  country  and  each  Sunday  every  family 
is  eager  to  go  and  spend  the  whole  day  in  the  woods  and  fields. 
20.  He  is  the  best  pupil  in  the  school,  because  he  works  better  than 
all  the  rest. 

B.  1.  One  should  sometimes  read  French  newspapers  to  learn 
the  language.    2.  I  hope  you  will  accept  the  sixteen  francs  I  offer 


232  REVIEW  EXERCISES 

you.  3.  I  think  you  are  right;  he  is  far  too  lazy.  4.  Your  sister  is 
older  than  you,  but  she  is  not  so  tall.  5.  We  are  Americans,  but 
we  have  been  living  in  France  for  ten  years.  6.  We  came  here  in 
the  spring,  having  brought  with  us  only  three  trunks  and  little 
money.  7.  Are  we  not  to  meet  our  friends  here?  8.  We  are  going 
to  meet  them  to-morrow  in  London.  9.  They  must  have  been 
very  stupid;  they  never  saw  us.  10.  Most  of  the  students  are  un- 
happy now.  11.  It  is  the  largest  town  in  America.  12.  She  ought 
not  to  have  taken  them  so  far  from  home.  13.  Can  you  tell  me 
how  long  that  man  has  been  ill?  14.  We  enjoyed  ourselves  there; 
the  songs  we  heard  sung  were  excellent.  15.  When  I  used  to 
know  Henry,  he  did  not  know  how  to  write.  16.  The  poor  fellow 
had  not  eaten  for  two  days;  he  was  weak  and  hungry.  17.  What 
do  you  say  when  you  ask  for  anything  in  French?  18.  I  like  read- 
ing very  much.  Do  you  wish  me  to  read  as  many  books  as  you 
do?  19.  It  was  last  Saturday  that  I  went  to  the  theatre.  20.  What 
a  pity  that  it  is  so  late! 

C.  1.  They  say  that  he  died  a  few  days  ago,  but  few  people  be- 
lieve it.  2.  This  is  the  oldest  tree  in  the  whole  country.  3.  That 
gentleman  had  lived  two  years  in  France  before  he  came  to  the 
United  States.  4.  We  had  been  living  for  two  years  in  that  house 
at  the  time  (moment,  m.)  of  his  arrival.  5.  That  boy  is  lazy;  he 
will  often  sleep  (pres.)  till  ten  o'clock.  6.  I  have  been  working 
hard  all  day  and  I  am  tired.  7.  The  master  tells  the  pupils  that 
they  should  not  be  so  idle.  8.  We  ought  not  to  have  gone  away 
before  the  others  arrived.  9.  When  do  you  begin?  We  begin  as 
soon  as  my  brother  has  finished.  10.  Send  for  the  doctor;  my 
cousin  has  hurt  himself.  11.  Do  not  get  angry,  but  pardon  your 
enemies.  12.  The  doctor  has  gone  out;  he  will  return  at  a  quarter 
to  eleven.  13.  We  had  to  sell  our  house  cheap.  14.  Never  mind, 
bring  your  sister  if  she  wishes  to  come.  15.  Take  off  your  gloves 
and  sit  down.  16.  I  did  not  answer  because  I  was  afraid.  17.  I 
like  to  go  sleighing  when  the  weather  is  fine.  18.  Do  you  know 
where  Mr.  T.  lives?  I  know  his  father  very  well.  19.  He  is  in  the 
country  and  will  remain  there.  20.  My  brother  is  rich  and  is  very 
fond  of  me.  21.  There  is  a  window  which  is  open;  tell  John  to 
close  it.  22.  One  ought  not  to  sit  down  here;  it  is  too  cold.  23.  She 
ought  to  have  come  yesterday;  I  was  expecting  her.  24.  The 
train  must  have  been  two  hours  late.  25.  I  have  been  ill  for  a 
week  and  I  wish  them  to  stay  until  I  am  better. 


APPENDIX 

A.     GENDER  OF  NOUNS 

1.  Gender  by  Derivation.  —  French  nouns  from  Latin  are 
regularly  derived  from  the  accusative  form,  and  their  gender 
may  usually  be  determined  thus:  — 

(a)  Latin  masculines  and  neuters  give  French  masculines: 
L.  murum,  w.       mur,  m.  L.  librum,  m.  livre,  m. 

L.  corpus,  n.         corps,  m.  L.  ferrum,  n.  fer,  m. 

EXCEPTIONS:  Latin  abstracts  in  -or,  m.  (ace.  -orem)  are  all  /.  in  French,  except 
honneur,  labeur,  amour;  many  neuter  plurals  in  -a  give  a  French  feminine  singular, 
e.g.  L.  folia  =  feuille,  L.  opera  =  oeuvre,  etc. 

(6)  Latin  feminines  give  French  feminines: 
L.  libram,  /.         livre,  /.  L.  mansionem,  /.       maison,  /. 

2.  Gender  by  Endings.  —  The  following  general  rules  apply 
to  nouns  denoting  inanimate  objects:  — 

Masculine  endings  are:  Feminine  endings  are: 

(a)  Vowels  (not  -e  or  abstracts  (a)  -e  following  a  vowel  or 

in  -te,  -tie).  double  consonant;  abstracts  in 

-te,  -tie*. 

(6)  Consonants  (not  -son,  -ion  (6)  -son,  -ion  and  most  ab- 

or  abstracts  in  -eur) .  stracts  in  -eur. 

(c)  -acle,  -age,  -asme,  -ege,  (c)  -ace,  -ade,  -ance,  -ence, 

-erne,  -isme,  -tere.  -euse,  -iere,  -oire,  -ude,  -ure. 

EXCEPTIONS:  Numerous,  especially  for  masculine  rules  (a)  and  (6);  six  nouns  in 
-age  are  feminine:  cage,  image,  nage,  page  (book),  plage,  rage. 

3.  Double  Gender.  —  In  some  words  the  gender  is  deter- 
mined by  the  sense;  in  others  the  sense  by  the  gender,  thus:  — 

(a)  Most  nouns  in  -e  (and  adjectives  so  used)  denoting  persons 
may  be  masculine  or  feminine : 

un  or  une  artiste         un  or  une  malade         un  or  une  enfant 

(6)  The  meaning  varies  according  to  the  gender: 
un  livre,  book  un  voile,  veil  un  manche,  handle 

une  livre,  pound          une  voile,  sail  une  manche,  sleeve 

233 


234  APPENDIX 

4.  Formation  of  Feminine.  —  Most  nouns  denoting  living 
beings  distinguish  the  gender  thus:  — 

(a)  By  means  of  a  different  word:  oncle,  tante;  boeuf,  vache,  etc. 

(6)  By  adding  -esse  to  the  last  consonant:  abbe,  abbesse,  prince, 
princesse,  etc. 

(c)  A  few  by  -ine:  heros,  heroine,  etc. 

(d)  Most  nouns  of  professions,  and  a  few  others,  lack  a  feminine 
form:  docteur,  ange,  etc. 

(e)  Some  nouns  are  feminine,  whether  denoting  males  or  females: 
une  personne,  a  person,  etc. 

(/)  Some  names  of  lower  animals  are  masculine  only,  and  some 
feminine  only:  un  elephant,  une  fourmi,  etc.;  male  or  femelle  is  added 
to  avoid  ambiguity:  un  elephant  male,  un  elephant  femelle. 

(g)  Most  other  nouns  follow  the  analogy  of  adjectives. 


B.    PLURAL   OF  NOUNS  AND   ADJECTIVES 

The  following  rules  are  given  for  reference;  see  also  the  gen- 
eral rules,  §§  2,  32:  - 

1.  Seven  nouns  in  -ou  take  -x:  bijou(x),  caillou(x),  chou(x),  genou(x), 
hibou(x),  joujou(x),  pou(x);  other  nouns  in  -ou  are  regular:  clou(s), 
sou(s),  etc. 

2.  Regular  are:  bal(s),  carnaval(s),  chacal(s)  and  rarer  words. 

3.  The  ending  -ail  becomes  -aux  in  bail,  baux,  corail,  coraux,  tra- 
vail, travaux  and  in  rarer  words;  but  detail(s),  etc.,  are  regular. 

4.  Most  common  adjectives  in  -al  have  a  plural  in  -aux;  for  doubt- 
ful cases  consult  dictionary. 

5.  Adjectives  in  -eu  have  the  plural  in  -s,  but  observe  .hebreu,  he- 
breux. 

6.  Some  nouns  have  two  plurals,  mostly  with  varying  meaning;  ex- 
amples are:  ai'eul,  pi.  aieux,  ancestors,  ai'euls,  grandfathers;  ciel,  pi. 
cieux,  skies,  heavens,  climates,  but  ciels,  bed-canopies,  etc. ;  ceil,  pi.  yeux 
but  ceils  in  compounds,  e.g.  ceils-de-bceuf,  oval  windows;  travail,  pi. 
travaux,  works,  but  travails,  reports,  etc. ;  ail,  pi.  ails  or  aulx,  garlic. 

7.  In  compound  nouns,  only  a  component  which  is  a  noun  or  an 
adjective  may  take  the  plural  sign. 

8.  Compounds  without  hyphen  follow  the  general  rules:  porteman- 
teau(x),  grand'mere(s);  but  exceptionally:  bon(s)homme(s),  gentil(s)- 
homme(s)  and  compounds  of  mon-,  ma-:  monsieur,  messieurs,  madame, 
mesdames,  etc. 


APPENDIX  235 

9.  In   compounds  with  hyphen,   both   components  usually   vary: 
grand  (s)  -pere  (s) ,  chou  (x) -fleur (s) . 

10.  In  compounds  with  preposition  and  hyphen,  the  first  component 
is  variable  when  the  plural  force  belongs  to  it:  chef(s)-d'ceuvre,  etc.; 
but  tete-a-tete,  singular  or  plural,  where  the  plural  idea  belongs  to 
the  expression  as  a  whole. 

11.  When  the  first  component  is  invariable,  the  compound  follows 
the  general  rule,  but  only  when  the  plural  idea  belongs  to  the  variable 
component:  vice-roi(s);  but  abat-jour,   singular  or  plural,  where  the 
plural  idea  belongs  to  the  expression  as  a  whole. 

12.  The  word  garde  in  compounds  is  variable  only  when  denoting 
persons:  garde (s)-malades,  sick-nurse(s) ,  but  garde-robes,  wardrobes. 

13.  Names  of  persons  are  regularly  invariable:  les  deux  Racine,  les 
Duval;  but  a  few  historic  family  names  take  a  plural  sign:  les  Cesars, 
etc.;  usage  varies  for  names   denoting   ' persons   like7:  les  Corneilles, 
les  Goethe,  sont  rares. 

14.  Invariable  words  used  as  nouns  take  no  plural  sign:  les  on  dit, 
etc.;  so  also  foreign  nouns,  unless  fully  naturalized:  les  post-scriptum, 
etc.;  but:  les  biftecks,  etc. 

15.  A  few  Italian  words  retain  their  plural  in  -i:  dilettante,  pi. 
dilettanti,  etc. 


C.     VERB   PARADIGMS 
1.  THE    REGULAR   CONJUGATIONS 

I                                               II  III 

Infinitive  Mood 

PRESENT                                PRESENT  PRESENT 

donner,  give                            finir,  finish  rompre,  break 

Participles 

PRESENT  PRESENT  PRESENT 

donnant,  giving  finissant,  finishing  rbmpant,  breaking 

PAST  PAST  PAST 

donne,  given  fini,  finished  rompu,  broken 


236 


APPENDIX 


Indicative  Mood 

PRESENT 

PRESENT 

PRESENT 

/  give,  am  giving,  etc. 

I  finish,  am  finishing, 

7  break,,  am  break- 

etc. 

ing,  etc. 

je  donne 

je  finis 

je  romps 

tu  donnes 

tu  finis 

tu  romps 

il  donne 

ilfinit 

il  rompt 

nous  donnons 

nous  finissons 

nous  rompons 

vous  donnez 

vous  finissez 

vous  rompez 

ils  donnent 

ils  finissent 

ils  rompent 

IMPERFECT 

IMPERFECT 

IMPERFECT 

7  was  giving,  used  to 

I  was  finishing,  used 

7  was  breaking, 

to  give,  etc. 

to  finish,  etc. 

used  to  break,  etc. 

je  donnais 

je  finissais 

je  rompais 

tu  donnais 

tu  finissais 

tu  rompais 

il  donnait 

il  finissait 

il  rompait 

nous  donnions 

nous  finissions 

nous  rompions 

vous  donniez 

vous  finissiez 

vous  rompiez 

ils  donnaient 

ils  finissaient 

ils  rompaient 

PAST  DEFINITE 

PAST  DEFINITE 

PAST  DEFINITE 

/  gave,  etc. 

I  finished,  etc. 

7  broke,  etc. 

je  donnai 

je  finis 

je  rompis 

tu  donnas 

tu  finis 

tu  rompis 

il  donna 

ilfinit 

il  rompit 

nous  donnames 

nous  finimes 

nous  rompimes 

vous  donnates 

vous  finites 

vous  rompites 

ils  donnerent 

ils  finirent 

ils  rompirent 

FUTURE 

FUTURE 

FUTURE 

/  shall  give,  etc. 

7  shall  finish,  etc. 

7  shall  break,  etc. 

je  donnerai 

je  finirai 

je  romprai 

tu  donneras 

tu  finiras 

tu  rompras 

il  donnera 

il  finira 

il  rompra 

nous  donnerons 

nous  finirons 

nous  romprons 

vous  donnerez 

vous  finirez 

vous  romprez 

ils  donneront 

ils  finiront 

ils  rompront 

APPENDIX 


237 


CONDITIONAL 
/  should  give,  etc. 
je  donnerais 
tu  donnerais 
il  donnerait 
•    nous  donnerions 
vous  donneriez 
ils  donneraient 


PRESENT 
(That)  I  (may)  give, 

etc. 

(que)  je  donne 
(que)  tu  donnes 
(qu')il  donne 
(que)  nous  donnions 
(que)  vous  donniez 
(qu')ils  donnent 

IMPERFECT 
(That)  I  (might)  give, 

etc. 

(que)  je  donnasse 
(que)  tu  donnasses 

(qu')il  donnat 
(que)  nous  donnassions 
(que)  vous  donnassiez 
(qu')ils  donnassent 


CONDITIONAL 

CONDITIONAL 

/  should  finish,  etc. 

/  should  break,  etc. 

je  finirais 

je  romprais 

tu  finirais 

tu  romprais 

il  finirait 

il  romprait 

nous  finirions 

nous  romprions 

vous  finiriez 

vous  rompriez 

ils  finiraient 

ils  rompraient 

Subjunctive  Mood 

PRESENT 
(That)  I  (may)  finish, 

etc. 

(que)  je  finisse 
(que)  tu  finisses 
(qu')il  finisse 
(que)  nous  finissions 
(que)  vous  finissiez 
(qu')ils  finissent 

IMPERFECT 
(That)  I  (might)  finish, 

etc. 

(que)  je  finisse 
(que)  tu  finisses 

(qu')il  finit 
(que)  nous  finissions 
(que)  vous  finissiez 
(qu')ils  finissent 

Imperative  Mood 


PRESENT 
(That)  I  (may)  break, 

etc. 

(que)  je  rompe 
(que)  tu  rompes 
(qu')il  rompe 
(que)  nous  rompions 
(que)  vous  rompiez 
(qu')ils  rompent 

IMPERFECT 
(That)  I  (might) 

break,  etc. 
(que)  je  rompisse 
(que)  tu  rompisses 

(qu')il  rompit 
(que)  nous  rompissions 
(que)  vous  rompissiez 
(qu')ils  rompissent 


PRESENT 

PRESENT 

PRESENT 

Give,  etc. 

Finish,  etc. 

Break,  etc. 

donne1 

finis 

romps 

qu'il  donne 

qu'il  finisse 

qu'il  rompe 

donnons 

finissons 

rompons 

donnez 

finissez 

rompez 

qu'ils  donnent 

qu'ils  finissent 

qu'ils  rompent 

1  This  form  becomes  'donnes'  when  followed  by  -y  or  -en. 


238 


APPENDIX 


2.  THE   AUXILIARY   VERBS 

Infinitive 
PRES.  avoir,  have  PRES.  £tre,  be 


PRES.  ay  ant,  having 
PAST,  eu,  had 


Participles 


PRES.  6tant,  being 
PAST,  et6,  been 


Indicative 


PRESENT 
/  have,  am  having,  etc. 


J7ai 

tu  as 

ila 


nous  avons 

vous  avez 

ils  ont 


IMPERFECT 

/  had,  was  having,  etc. 

j'avais  nous  avions 

tu  avais  vous  aviez 

il  avait  ils  avaient 

PAST  DEFINITE 

/  had,  etc. 

j'eus  nous  eumes 

tu  eus  vous  eutes 

il  eut  ils  eurent 

FUTURE 

/  shall  have,  etc. 
j'aurai           nous  aurons 
tu  auras          vous  aurez 
il  aura  ils  'auront 

CONDITIONAL 

7  should  have,  etc. 

j'aurais         nous  aurions 


PRESENT 

7  am,  am  being,  etc. 
je  suis  nous  sommes 

tu  es  vous  etes 

il  est  ils  sont 

IMPERFECT 
7  was,  was  being,  etc. 
j'e"tais  nous  etions 

tu  e"tais  vous  £tiez 

il  e"tait  ils  etaient 

PAST  DEFINITE 

7  was,  etc. 

je  fus  nous  fumes 

tu  fus  vous  futes 

il  f ut  ils  f urent 

FUTURE 

7  shall  be,  etc. 

je  serai  nous  serons 

tu  seras  vous  serez 

il  sera  •    ils  seront 

CONDITIONAL 
7  should  be,  etc. 
je  serais         nous  serions 


tu  aurais 
il  aurait 


vous  aunez 
ils  auraient 


tu  serais 
il  serait 


vous  senez 
ils  seraient 


APPENDIX 


239 


Subjunctive 


PRESENT 

(That]  I  (may)  have,  etc. 
(que)  j'aie        (que)  nous  ayons 
(que)  tu  aies      (que)  vous  ayez 
(qu')il  ait  (qu')ils  aient 

IMPERFECT 

(That)  I  (might)  have,  etc. 
(que)  j'eusse    (que)  nous  eussions 
(que)  tu  eusses  (que)  vous  eussiez 
(qu')il  eut  (qu')ils  eussent 


PRESENT 

(That)  I  (may)  be,  etc. 
(que)  je  sois      (que)  nous  soyons 
(que)  tu  sois      (que)  vous  soyez 
(qu')il  soit  (qu')ils  soient 

IMPERFECT 

(That)  I  (might)  be,  etc. 
(que)  je  fusse    (que)  nous  fussions 
(que)  tu  fusses  (que)  vous  fussiez 
(qu')il  fut  (qu')ils  fussent 


Imperative 


aie 
qu'il  ait 


PRESENT 

Have,  etc. 

ayons 
ayez 
qu'ils  aient 


sois 
qu'il  soit 


PRESENT 
Be,  etc. 

soyons 
soyez 
qu'ils  soient 


3.  THE 


COMPOUND 
Infinitive 


PERFECT 

To  have  given 
avoir  donne" 


PERFECT 
Having  given 
ayant  donne 


PAST  INDEFINITE 
I  have  given,  etc. 

j'ai  donne 
ifcu  as  donne 
etc. 


Participle 


Indicative 


TENSES 

PERFECT 

To  have  arrived 
etre  arrive  (e)(s) 


PERFECT 

Having  arrived 

etant  arrive  (e)(s) 


PAST  INDEFINITE 
7  have  arrived,  etc. 
je  suis  arrive (e) 
tu  es     arrive  (e) 
etc. 


240  APPENDIX 

PLUPERFECT  PLUPERFECT 

I  had  given,  etc.  I  had  arrived,  etc. 

j 'avals  donne,  etc.  j'e*tais  arrive  (e),  etc. 

PAST  ANTERIOR  PAST  ANTERIOR 

7  had  given,  etc.  I  had  arrived,  etc. 

j'eus  donne",  etc.  je  fus  arrive(e),  etc. 

FUTURE  ANTERIOR  FUTURE  ANTERIOR 

7  shall  have  given,  etc.  I  shall  have  arrived,  etc. 

j'aurai  donne,  etc.  je  serai  arrive(e),  etc. 

CONDITIONAL  ANTERIOR  CONDITIONAL  ANTERIOR 

7  should  have  given,  etc.  I  should  have  arrived,  etc. 

j'aurais  donne,  etc.  je  serais  arrive(e),  etc. 

Subjunctive 

PERFECT  PERFECT 

(That)  I  (may)  have  given,  etc.  (That)  I  (may)  have  arrived,  etc. 

(que)  j'aie  donne,  etc.  que  je  sois  arrive"(e),  etc. 

PLUPERFECT  PLUPERFECT 

(That)  I  (might)  have  given,  etc.  (That)  I  (might)  have  arrived,  etc. 

(que)  j'eusse  donne,  etc.  (que)  je  fusse  arrive  (e),  etc. 


4.  THE    PASSIVE    VOICE 

Infinitive 

PRESENT  PERFECT 

etre  aime(e)(s),  to  be  loved          avoir  et6  aime(e)(s),  to  have  been  loved 

Participle 

PRESENT  PERFECT 

e*tant  aime(e)(s),  being  loved         ayant  ete  aime(e)(s),  having  been  loved 


APPENDIX 


241 


Indicative 


PRESENT 

/  am  (being)  loved,  etc. 
je  suis         aime*(e) 
tu  es  aime(e) 

il  (elle)  est          aime"(e) 
nous  sommes  aime(e)s 
vous  etes         aime(e)s 
ils  (elles)  sont        aime(e)s 

IMPERFECT 

/  was  (being)  loved,  etc. 
j'etais  a-ime(e),  etc. 

PAST  DEFINITE 

I  was  loved,  etc. 

je  fus  aime(e),  etc. 

.  FUTURE 

7  shall  be  loved,  etc. 
je  serai  aime(e),  etc. 

CONDITIONAL 
/  should  be  loved,  etc. 
je  serais  aime(e),  etc. 

PRESENT 

(That)  I  may  be  loved,  etc. 
(que)  je  sois  aime(e),  etc. 

IMPERFECT 

(That)  I  might  be  loved,  etc. 
(que)  je  fusse  aime(e),  etc. 


sois  aime(e) 
qu'il  (elle)  soit  aime(e) 


PAST  INDEFINITE 
/  have  been  (was)  loved,  etc. 
j'ai        ete  aime(e) 
tu  as        ete  aime(e) 
il  (elle)  a          ete  aime"(e) 
nous  avons  ete  aim6(e)a 
vous  avez    ete  aime(e)s 
ils  (elles)  ont      ete  aime(e)s 

PLUPERFECT 

/  had  been  loved,  etc. 

j'avais  ete  aime(e),  etc. 

PAST  ANTERIOR 
I  had  been  loved,  etc. 
j'eus  ete  aime(e),  etc. 

FUTURE  PERFECT 

7  shall  have  been  loved,  etc. 

j'aurai  e*te  aime(e),  etc. 

CONDITIONAL  ANTERIOR 
7  should  have  been  loved,  etc. 
j'aurais  ete*  aime(e),  etc. 

Subjunctive 

PERFECT 

( That)  I  may  have  been  loved,  etc. 
(que)  j'aie  e"te  aime(e),  etc. 

PLUPERFECT 

(That)  I  might  have  been  loved,  etc. 
(que)  j'eusse  e*te  aime(e),  etc. 

Imperative 

Be  loved,  etc. 

soyons  aime(e)s 

soyez    aim4(e)s 

qu'ils  (elles)   soient   aime(e)s 


242 


APPENDIX 


5.   THE    REFLEXIVE    VERB 
Infinitive 


PRESENT 
se  couper,  to  cut  oneself 


PERFECT 
s'etre  coupe*  (e)(s),  to  have  cut  oneself 


Participle 

PRESENT  PERFECT 

se  coupant,  cutting  oneself  s'etant  coupe(e)(s),  having  cut  oneself 


Indicative 


PRESENT 

/  cut  (am  cutting}  myself,  etc. 
je  me  coupe 
tu  te  coupes 
il  se  coupe 
nous  nous  coupons 
vous  vous  coupez 
ils       se  coupent 

IMPERFECT 

/  was  cutting  (cut)  myself,  etc. 
je  me  coupais,  etc. 

PAST  DEFINITE 
/  cut  myself,  etc. 
je  me  coupai,  etc. 

FUTURE 

I  shall  cut  myself,  etc. 
je  me  couperai,  etc. 

CONDITIONAL 
I  should  cut  myself,  etc. 
je  me  couperais,  etc. 

PRESENT 

\That)  I  may  cut  myself,  etc. 
(que)  je  me  coupe,  etc. 


PAST  INDEFINITE 
/  have  cut  (cut)  myself,  etc. 
je  me  suis      coupe (e) 
,    tu      t'es          coupe  (e) 
il  (elle)      s'est        coupe  (e) 
nous  nous  sommes  coupe  (e)s 
vous  vous  etes         coupe  (e)s 
ils  (elles)      se  sont         coupe (e)s 

PLUPERFECT 

I  had  cut  myself,  etc. 

je  m'etais  coupe(e),  etc. 

PAST  ANTERIOR 

/  had  cut  myself ,  etc. 

je  me  fus  coupe"  (e),  etc. 

FUTURE  PERFECT 

7  shall  have  cut  myself,  etc. 

je  me  serai  coupe"  (e) 

CONDITIONAL  ANTERIOR 

7  should  have  cut  myself,  etc. 

je  me  serais  coupe* (e),  etc. 

Subjunctive 

PERFECT 

(That)  I  may  have  cut  myself,  etc. 
(que)  je  me  sois  coupe*  (e),  etc. 


APPENDIX 


243 


IMPERFECT 

(That)  I  might  cut  myself,  etc. 
(que)  je  me  coupasse,  etc. 


PLUPERFECT 

(That)  I  might  have  cut  myself,  etc. 
(que)  je  me  fusse  coupe  (e),  etc. 


Imperative 

Cut  thyself  (yourself),  etc. 

coupons-nous 

coupe-toi  coupez-vous 

qu'il  se  coupe  qu'ils  se  coupent 

NOTE.  —  The  reflexive  verb  s'en  aller,  go  away,  presents  special  difficulty  in  the 
arrangement  of  the  pronoun  objects  as  seen  in  the  following  examples;  in  practice, 
partir  often  takes  its  place. 

Present  Indicative 

NEGATIVE 

I  do  not  go  away,  etc. 
je  ne  m'en  vais  pas 
tu  ne  t'en   vas  pas 
il   ne  s'en  va  pas 


AFFIRMATIVE 
7  go  away,  etc. 
je  m'en  vais 
tu.  t'en  vas 
il   s'en  va 
nous  nous  en  allons 
vous  vous  en  allez 
Us         s'en  vont 

INTERROGATIVE 
Do  I  go  away?  etc. 
m'en  vais-je? 
t'en  vas-tu? 
s'en  va-t-il? 
nous  en  allons-nous? 
vous  en  allez-vous? 
s'en  vont-ils? 


nous  ne  nous  en  allons  pas 
vous  ne  vous  en  allez  pas 
ils        ne  s'en  vont  pas 

INTERROGATIVE  NEGATIVE 

Do  I  not  go  away?  etc. 
ne  m'en  vais-je  pas? 

ne  t'en  vas-tu  pas? 

ne  s'en  va-t-il  pas? 
ne  nous  en  allons-nous  pas? 
ne  vous  en  allez-vous  pas? 

ne  s'en  vont-ils  pas? 


Past  Indefinite 

NEGATIVE 

7  have  not  gone  away,  etc. 
je  ne  m'en  suis  pas         allege) 
tu     ne  t'en  es  pas  alle(e) 

il  (elle)     nes'en  est  pas  alle*(e) 

nous  ne  nous  en  sommes  pas  alle(e)s 
vous  ne  vous  en  etes  pas         alle(e)s 
ils  (elles)     ne  s'en  sont  pas       alle(e)s 


244  APPENDIX 

INTERROGATIVE  NEGATIVE 
Have  I  not  gone  away?  etc. 
ne  m'en  suis-je  pas  alle(e)? 

ne  t'en  es-tu  pas  alle(e)? 

ne  s'en  est-il  (elle)  pas      alle(e)? 
ne  nous  en  sommes-nous  pas  alle(e)s? 
ne  vous  en  ^tes-vous  pas         alle(e)s? 
ne  s'en  sont-ils  (elles)  pas  alle(e)s? 

Imperative 

AFFIRMATIVE  NEGATIVE 

Go  away,  etc.  Do  not  go  away}  etc. 

va-t'en  ne  t'en  va  pas 

qu'il  s'en  aille  qu'il  ne  s'en  aille  pas 

allons-nous-en  ne  nous  en  allons  pas 

allez-vous-en  ne  vous  en  allez  pas 

qu'ils  s'en  aillent  qu'ils  ne  s'en  aillent  pas 

D.     ORTHOGRAPHICAL  PECULIARITIES  —  FIRST   CON- 
JUGATION 

1.  Verbs  ending  in  -cer,  e.g.  avancer  [avase],  advance,  must 
preserve  the  [s]  sound  of  c  throughout  their  conjugation,  and 
hence  c  becomes  £  when  it  precedes  a  or  o  of  an  ending,  but  not 
elsewhere;  for  the  sounds  of  c  and  £,  see  Introduction,  p.  xviii. 


avanjant 


?RES.  INDIC. 

IMPF.  INDIC. 

PAST  DBF. 

IMPF.  SUBJ. 

avance 

avanfais 

avan^ai 

avangasse 

avances 
avance 

avangais 
avan^ait 

avanfas 
avanga 

avangasses 
avangat 

avanfons 
avancez 
avancent 

avancions 
avanciez 
avangaient 

avangames 
avangates 
avancerent 

avanfassions 
avan^assiez 
avan^assent 

NOTE.  —  Pronoun  subjects  are  omitted  to  save  space. 


2.  Verbs  ending  in  -ger,  e.g.  manger  [mase],  eat,  must  preserve 
the  [3]  sound  of  g  throughout  their  conjugation,  and  hence  g 
becomes  ge  when  it  precedes  a  or  o  of  an  ending,  but  not  else- 
where; for  the  sounds  cf  g  and  ge,  see  Introduction,  p.  xviii. 


APPENDIX 


245 


PRES.  PART. 

PRES.  INDIC. 

IMPF.  INDIC. 

PAST  DBF. 

IMPF.  SUBJ. 

mangeant 

mange 

mangeais 

mangeai 

mangeasse 

manges 
mange 

mangeais 
mangeait 

mangeas 
mangea 

mangeasses 
mangeat 

mangeons 
mangez 

mangions 
mangiez 

mangeames 
mangeates 

mangeassions 
mangeassiez 

mangent         mangeaient      mangerent        mangeassent 


3.  Verbs  ending  in  -oyer  and  -uyer, 
essuyer,  wipe,  change  y  to  i  whenever  it 
in  conjugation,  but  not  elsewhere;  verbs 
pay,  may  retain  y  throughout,  or  change 
for  e  mute,  see  Introduction,  p.  xiii. 


e.g.  nettoyer,  clean, 
comes  before  e  mute 

in  -ayer,  e.g.  payer, 
y  to  i  before  e  mute; 


PRES.  INDIC. 

PRES.  SUBJ. 

FUTURE 

CONDITIONAL 

nettoie 

nettoie 

nettoierai 

nettoierais 

nettoies 

nettoies 

nettoieras 

nettoierais 

nettoie 

nettoie 

nettoiera 

nettoierait 

nettoyons 

nettoyions 

nettoierons 

nettoierions 

nettoyez 

nettoyiez 

nettoierez 

nettoieriez 

nettoient 

nettoient 

nettoieront 

nettoieraient 

essuie 

essuie 

essuierai 

essuierais 

etc. 

etc. 

etc. 

etc. 

paie  1 
\  etc. 
payej 

paie  1 
\  etc. 
payej 

paierai  1 
.  \  etc. 
payerai  J 

paierais    1 
etc. 
payerais  j 

4.  Verbs  having  the  stem  vowel  e,  e.g.  mener,  lead,  change 
this  e  to  e  wherever  in  conjugating  the  verb  it  is  followed  by 
a  syllable  containing  e  mute  (but  for  verbs  in  -eler,  -eter,  see 
below). 


PRES.  INDIC. 

PRES.  SUBJ. 

FUTURE 

CONDITIONAL 

mene 

mene 

menerai 

menerais 

menes 

menes 

meneras 

menerais 

mene 

mene 

menera 

menerait 

menons 

menions 

menerons 

menerions 

menez 

meniez 

menerez 

meneriez 

menent 

menent 

meneront 

meneraient 

NOTE.  —  The  principle  involved  here  is  that  if  e  mute  occurs  in  two  successive 
syllables,  the  first  e  takes  the  sound  [e],  indicated  above  by  e. 


246  APPENDIX 

5.  Verbs  having  the  stem  vowel  e  followed  by  a  consonant, 
e.g.  ceder,  yield,  change  e  to  e  in  the  present  indicative  and 
subjunctive,  but  retain  e  in  the  future  and  conditional  when 
followed  by  a  syllable  containing  e  mute,  e  in  the  future  and 
conditional  having  exceptionally  the  [e]  sound. 

PRES.  INDIC.  PRES.  SUBJ.  FUTURE  CONDITIONAL 

cede,  etc.  cede,  etc.  cederai,  etc.  cederais,  etc. 

NOTE.  —  Verbs  with  stem  vowel  e  -f-  vowel  are  regular,  e.g.  creer. 

6.  Verbs  in  -eler,  -eter,  e.g.  appeler,  call,  Jeter,  throw,  usu- 
ally double  1  or  t  before  an  e  mute  syllable  in  conjugation  (but 
with  some  important  exceptions,  see  below). 

PRES.  INDIC.  PRES.  SUBJ.  FUTURE  CONDITIONAL 

appelle  appelle  appellerai  appellerais 

appelles  appelles  appelleras  appellerais 

appelle  appelle  appellera  appellerait 

appelons  appelions  appellerons  appellerions 

appelez  appeliez  appellerez  appelleriez 

appellent  appellent  appelleront  appelleraient 
So  also  jeter: 

jette,  etc.  jette,  etc.  jetterai,  etc.  jetterais,  etc. 

NOTE.  —  The  same  principle  is  involved  as  that  explained  in  the  Note  to  4,  above, 
but  here  the  [e]  sound  of  e  is  indicated  by  a  doubled  consonant. 

7.  A    few    verbs    in    -eler,    -eter    (the    commonest    being 
acheter,  buy,  geler,  freeze)   take  the  grave  accent  like  mener, 


see  4,  above. 

PRES.  INDIC. 

achete,  etc. 
gele,  etc. 

PRES.  SUBJ. 

achete,  etc. 
gele,  etc. 

FUTURE 
acheterai,  etc. 
gelerai,  etc. 

CONDITIONAL 
acheterais,  etc. 
gelerais,  etc. 

E.     LIST   OF  PRINCIPAL  IRREGULAR  VERBS 

1.  The  rules  for  inferring  the  various  moods  and  tenses  from  the  principal  parts 
are  given  in  §§  157,  158. 

2.  The  pronoun  subjects  are  omitted  for  brevity,  but  should  be  supplied  in  learning 
or  reciting  the  verbs. 

3.  The  future  and  conditional  are  combined  for  brevity,  e.g.  j'acquerrai(s)  =  j'ac- 
querrai  and  j'acquerrais. 

4.  Compounds  are  usually  to  be  found  under  the  principal  verb. 

5.  The  more  difficult  tenses  are  given  in  full. 

6.  The  auxiliaries  avoir  and  etre  are  not  included. 

7.  For  key  to  the  list,  see  p.  259. 


APPENDIX  247 

INFIN.  PRES.  PART.      PAST  PART.        PRES.  INDIC.         PAST  DBF. 

Acquerir  acquerant        acquis  acquiers          acquis 

(acquire)  acquerais  acquisse 

acquerrai(s)  acquiere 

PRES.  IND.:     acquiers,    acquiers,    acquiert,    acquerons,    acquerez,    ac- 

quierent. 
PRES.  SUBJ.:  acquiere,     acquieres,     acquiere,    acquerions,    acqueriez, 

acquierent. 
conquerir,  conquer  reconquerir,  reconquer 

Aller  allant  alle  vais2  allai 

(go)  allais  allasse 

irai(s)1  aille 

PRES.  IND.:  vais,2  vas,2  va,2  aliens,  allez,  vont.2 

PRES.  SUBJ.:  aille,  ailles,  aille,  allions,  alliez,  aillent. 

1  From  Lat.  ire.  2  From  Lat.  vadere. 

Assaillir  assaillant          assailli  assaille          assaillis 

(assail)  assaillais  assaillisse 

assaillirai(s)  assaille 

PRES.  IND.:  assaille,  assailles,  assaille,  assaillons,  assaillez,  assaillent. 

tressaillir,  start  saillir,  jut  out 

Asseoir  asseyant2          assis  f  assieds          assis 

(seat)  asseyais3  \assois  assisse 

assierai  (s) l  assey  e 

p          T       .      f  assieds,  assieds,  assied,  asseyons,  assey ez,  assey ent. 

{  assois,  assois,  assoit,  assoyons,  assoyez,  assoient. 
p          ~         .    f  asseye,  asseyes,  asseye,  asseyions,  asseyiez,  asseyent. 

[  assoie,  assoies,  assoie,  assoyions,  assoyiez,  assoient. 
T  m  I  assieds,  asseyons,  assey  ez. 

{  assois,  assoyons,  assoyez. 

i  or  asseyerai(s)  or  assoirai(s).  2  or  assoyant.  8  or  assoyais 

s'asseoir,  sit  down  rasseoir,  reseat,  calm  se  rasseoir,  sit  down  again 

Battre  battant  battu  bats  battis 

(beat)  battais  battisse 

battrai(s)  batte 

PRES.  IND.:  bats,  bats,  bat,  battons,  battez,  battent. 

abattro,  fell  debattre,  debate  rabattre,  beat  down 

combattre,  fight  se  debattre,  struggle 


248 


APPENDIX 


PRES.  PART.      PAST  PART. 
buvant  bu 

buvais 
boive 


PRES.  INDIC.       PAST  DBF. 
bois  bus 

busse 


INFIN. 
Boire 

(drink} 
boirai(s) 

PRES.  IND.:     bois,  bois,  boit,  buvons,  buvez,  boivent. 
PRES.  SUBJ.:  boive,  boives,  boive,  buvions,  buviez,  boivent. 

reboire,  drink  again 


Bouillir  bouillant         bouilli  bous  bouillis 

(boil)  bouillais  bouillisse 

bouillirai(s)  bouille 

PRES.  IND.:     bous,  bous,  bout,  bouillons,  bouillez,  bouillent. 

ebouillir,  boil  away  rebouillir,  boil  again 

Conclure  concluant        conclu  conclus         conclus 

(conclude)  concluais  conclusse 

conclurai(s)  conclue 

PRES.  IND.;     conclus,  conclus,  conclut,  concluons,  concluez,  concluent. 

exclure,  exclude  inclure,1  include 

1  Past  part,  inclus. 


Conduire                 conduisant      conduit 
(conduct)                  conduisais 
conduirai(s)             conduise 

conduis         conduisis 
conduisisse 

PRES.  IND.:     conduis,  conduis,  conduit, 
duisent. 

conduisons,  conduisez,   con- 

econduiie,  show  out            induire,  induce 
recondujr^,  lead  back         introduire,  introduce 
deduire,  deduct                    produire,  produce 
enduire,  piaster                  reduire,  reduce 

reproduire,  reproduce 
seduire,  mislead 
traduire,  translate 

C  onfire                    confisant          confit 
(preserve)                  confisais 
connrtii(s)                confise 

conns            confis 
confisse 

PRES.  IND.      confis,  confis,  confit,  confisons,  confisez,  confisent. 

suffire  (p.  part,  suffi),  suffice 


APPENDIX  249 

INFIN.  PRES.  PART.     PAST  PART.        PRES.  INDIC.      PAST  DEF. 

Connaitre  connaissant      connu  connais        connus 

(know)  connaissais  connusse 

connattrai(s)  connaisse 

PRES.  IND.:     connais,  connais,  connait,  connaissons,  eonnaissez,  con- 
naissent. 

meconnaitre,  not  to  know  comparaitre,  appear  paltre,1  graze 

reconnaitre,  recognize  disparaitre,  disappear  repaitre,  feed,  feast 

paraitre,  appear  reparaitre,  reappear  se  repaitre,  feed,  feast 
apparaltre,  appear 

1  Lacks  the  past  part.,  past  def.,  and  impf.  subj. 

Construire  construisant    construit       construis       const ruisis 

(construct)  construisais  construisisse 

construirai(s)  construise 

PRES.  IND.:     construis,  construis,  construit,  construisons,  construisez, 
construisent. 

deconstruire,  take  apart  reconstruire,  reconstruct 

instruire,  instruct  detruire,  destroy 


Coudre  cousant  cousu  couds  cousis 

(sew)  cousais  cousisse 

coudrai(s)  couse 

PRES.  IND.:  couds,  couds,  coud,  cousons,  cousez,  cousent. 

decoudre,  rip,  unsew  recoudre,  sew  again 

Courir  .  courant  couru  cours  courus 

(run)  courais  cours  courusse 

courrai(s)  coure 

PRES.  IND.:  cours,  cours,  court,  courons,  courez,  courent. 

accourir,  run  up  encourir,  incur  secourir,  help 

concourir,  concur  parcourir,  run  over 

discourir,  discourse  recourir,  apply 

Craindre  craignant         craint  crains  craignis 

(fear)  craignais  craignisse 

craindrai(s)  craigne 

PRES.  IND.:  crains,  crains,  craint,  craignons,  craignez,  craignent. 

contraindre,  constrain  plaindre,  pity  se  plaindre,  complain 


250 


APPENDIX 


INFIN.  PRES.  PART.      PAST  PART.       PRES.  INDIC. 

Croire  croyant  cru  crois 

(believe)  croyais 

croirai(s)  croie 

PRES.  IND.:  crois,  crois,  croit,  croyons,  croyez,  croient. 

PRES.  SUBJ.:  croie,  croies,  croie,  croyions,  croyiez,  croient. 


PAST  DBF. 
crus 
crusse 


Croitre 

(grow) 
croitrai(s) 
PRES.  IND.: 


cru 

(f.  crue) 


crois 


croissant 
croissais 
croisse 
crois,  crois,  croit,  croissons,  croissez,  croissent. 


crus 
crusse 


cueilli 


cueille 


cueillis 
cueillisse 


Cueillir  cueillant 

(gather)  cueillais 

cueillerai(s)  .        cueille 

PRES.  IND.:  cueille,  cueilles,  cueille,  cueillons,  cueillez,  cueillent. 

accueillir,  welcome  recueillir,  gather,  collect 

Cuire  cuisant  cuit  cuis  cuisis 

(cook)  cuisais  cuisisse 

cuirai(s)  cuise 

PRES.  IND.:  cuis,  cuis,  cuit,  cuisons,  cuisez,  cuisent. 

recuire,  cook  again  reluire,2  glisten  nuire,3  injure 

luire,1  shine 

1  Past  part.  lui.  2  Past  part,  relui.  3  Past  part.  nui. 

Devoir  devant  du  dois  dus 

(owe,  must)  devais  (/.  due,  dusse 

devrai(s)  doive  pi.  du(e)s) 

PRES.  IND.:     dois,  dois,  doit,  devons,  devez,  doivent. 
PRES.  SUBJ.:  doive,  doives,  doive,  devions,  deviez,  doivent. 
redevoir,  still  owe 

Dire  disant  dit  dis  dis 

(say)  disais  disse 

dirai(s)  dise 

PRES.  IND.:  dis,  dis,  dit,  disons,  dites,  disent. 

contredire,1  contradict  interdire,1  interdict  predire,1  predict 

dedire,1  retract  medire,1  slander  redire,  say  again 

1  The  2d  pi.  pres.  indie,  and  impve.  is  -disez. 


APPENDIX 


251 


INFIN. 
Dormir 

(sleep) 
dormirai(s) 


PRES.  PART. 
dormant 
dormais 
dorme 


PAST  PART.     PRES.  INDIC. 
dormi  dors 


PAST  DEF. 

dormis 

dormisse 


PRES.  IND.:     dors,  dors,  dort,  dormons,  dormez,  dorment. 

redormir,  sleep  again 


endormir,  put  to  sleep 
s'endormir,  fall  asleep 


rendormir,  put  to  sleep  again 
se  rendormir,  go  to  sleep  again 


Ecrire  ecrivant          ecrit  6cris 

(write)  ecrivais 

ecrirai(s)  ecrive 

PRES.  IND.:  £cris,  ecris,  ecrit,  e*crivons,  ecrivez,  ecrivent. 


e*crivis 
ecrivisse 


circonscrire,  circumscrib 
decrire,  describe 
inscrire,  inscribe 


prescrire,  prescribe 
proscrire,  proscribe 
recrire,  rewrite 


souscrire,  subscribe 
transcrire,  transcribe 


Envoyer  envoyant        envoye          envoie  envoyai 

(send)  envoyais  envoyasse 

enverrai(s)  envoie 

PRES.  IND.:  envoie,  envoies,  envoie,  envoyons,  envoyez,  envoient. 

PRES.  SUBJ.  :  envoie,  envoies,  envoie,  envoyions,  envoyiez,  envoient. 

renvoyer,  send  away 


Faire  faisant  fait  fais 

(do,  make)  faisais 

ferai(s)  fasse 

PRES.  IND.:  fais,  fais,  fait,  faisons,  faites,  font. 

PRES.  SUBJ.:  fasse,  fasses,  fasse,  fassions,  fassiez,  fassent. 


fis 
fisse 


contrefaire,  imitate 
defaire,  undo 
mefaire,  harm 


parfaire,  complete 
redefaire,  undo  again 
refaire,  do  again 


satisfaire,  satisfy 
surfaire,  overcharge 


Falloir  (impers.) 

(must) 

il  faudra(it) 


il  f  allait 
il  faille 


fallu 


il  f aut 


il  f allut 
il  f allftt 


Fleurir 

(flourish) 


florissant1 
florissais1 


1  Has  these  irreg.  forms  when  used  of  persons  or  collections  of  persons ;  impf .  fleu- 
rissais,  etc.,  is  used  of  things;  literally  =  blossom,  bloom,  it  is  regular  throughout. 


252  APPENDIX 

INFIN.  PRES.  PART.       PAST  PART.       PRES.  INDIC.      PAST  DBF. 

Fuir  fuyant  fui  fuis  fuis 

( fly,  flee)  f uyais  fuisse 

fuirai(s)  fuie 

PRES.  IND.  :     fuis,  fuis,  fuit,  fuyons,  fuyez,  fuient. 
PRES.  SUBJ.:  fuie,  fuies,  fuie,  fuyions,  fuyiez,  fuient. 

s'enfuir,  escape 

Gesir  gisant  il  git 

(lie  buried)  gisais 

PRES.  IND.:    , ,  git,  gisons,  gisez,  gisent. 

Hair  haissant         hai  hais  hai's 

(hate)  haissais  hai'sse 

hairai(s)  haisse 

PRES.  IND.:  hais,  hais,  hait,  haissons,  haissez,  haissent. 

PAST  DEF.:  hai's,  hais,  hait,  haimes,  haites,  hairent. 

IMPF.  SUBJ.:  haisse,  haisses,  hait,  haissions,  haissiez,  haissent. 

Joindre  joignant         joint  joins  joignis 

(join)  joignais  joignisse 

joindrai(s)  joigne 

PRES.  IND.:  joins,  joins,  joint,  joignons,  joignez,  joignent. 

adjoindre,  adjoin  disjoindre,  disjoin  oindre,  anoint 

conjoindre,  conjoin  enjoindre,  enjoin  poindre,  dawn 

de  joindre,  disjoin  re  joindre,  rejoin 

Lire  lisant  lu  lis  lus 

(read)  lisais  lusse 

lkai(s)  lise 

PRES.  IND.:  lis,  lis,  lit,  lisons,  lisez,  lisent. 

elire,  elect  reelire,  reeled  relire,  read  again 

Maudire  maudissant    maudit          maudis          maudis 

(curse)  maudissais  maudisse 

maudirai(s)  maudisse 

PRES.  IND.:     maudis,  maudis,  maudit,  maudissons,  maudissez,  mau- 
dissent. 


APPENDIX  253 

INFIN.  PRES.  PART.         PAST  PART.        PRES.  INDIC.          PAST  DEF. 

Mettre  mettant  mis  mets  mis 

(put)  mettais  misse 

mettrai(s)  mette 

PRES.  IND.:     mets,  mets,  met,  mettons,  mettez,  mettent. 

se  mettre,  begin  emettre,  emit  remettre,  put  back,  hand  to 

admettre,  admit  s'entremettre,  interpose  repromettre,  promise  again 

commettre,  commit  omettre,  omit  soumettre,  submit 

compromettre,  compromise  permettre,  permit  transmettre,  transmit 

demettre,  dismiss  promettre,  promise 

Moudre  moulant  moulu  mouds  moulus 

(grind)  moulais  moulusse 

moudrai(s)  moule 

PRES.  IND.:     mouds,  mouds,  moud,  moulons,  moulez,  moulent. 

emoudre,  whet  remoudre,  grind  again        remoudre,  sharpen 

Mourir  mourant          mort  meurs  mourus 

(die)  mourais  mourusse 

mourrai(s)  meure 

PRES.  IND.:     meurs,  meurs,  meurt,  mourons,  mourez,  meurent. 
PRES.  SUBJ.:  meure,  meures,  meure,  mourions,  mouriez,  meurent. 

se  mourir,  be  dying  (usually  pres.  indie,  and  impf.  only) 

Mouvoir  mouvant          mu  meus  mus 

(move)  mouvais  (/.  mue,  musse 

mouvrai(s)  meuve  pi.  mu(e)s) 

PRES.  IND.:     meus,  meus,  meut,  mouvons,  mouvez,  meuvent. 
PRES.  SUBJ.:  meuve,  meuves,  meuve,  mouvions,  mouviez,  meuvent. 

emouvoir,  arouse  (past  part,  emu)  promouvoir,  promote  (past  part,  promu) 

se  mouvoir,  move  (intr.) 

Naitre  naissant  ne  nais  naquis 

(be  born)  naissais  naquisse 

naitrai(s)  naisse 

PRES.  IND.:     nais,  nais,  natt,  naissons,  naissez,  naissent. 

renaitre,  revive 


254 


APPENDIX 


INFIX. 

PRES.  PART. 

PAST  PART. 

PRES.  INDIC. 

PAST  DBF. 

Offrir 

offrant 

offert 

offre 

offris 

(offer} 
ofifrirai  (s) 

offrais 
offre 

offrisse 

PRES.  IND.  :     offre,  offres,  offre,  offrons,  offrez,  offrent. 

souffrir,  suffer 


Ouvrir  ouvrant  ouvert  ouvre  ouvris 

(open)  ouvrais  ouvrisse 

ouvrirai(s)  ouvre 

PRES.  IND.:  ouvre,  ouvres,  ouvre,  ouvrons,  ouvrez,  ouvrent. 


couvnr,  cover 
decouvrir,  discover 


entr'ouvrir,  open  slightly 
recouvrir,  cover  again 


rouvrir,  open  again 


Partir  partant  parti  pars  partis 

(set  out)  partais  partisse 

partirai(s)  parte 

PRES.  IND.:  pars,  pars,  part,  partons,  partez,  partent. 

departir,  distribute  repartir,  set  out  again  sortir,  go  out 

se  departir,  desist 


repartir,  set  out  again 
ressortir,  go  out  again 


Peindre  peignant          peint  peins  peignis 

(paint)  peignais  peignisse 

peindrai(s)  peigne 

PRES.  IND.:  peins,  peins,  peint,  peignons,  peignez,  peignent. 

enceindre,  gird  repeindre,  paint  again 

enfreindre,  infringe  restreindre,  restrain 

eteindre,  extinguish  teindre,  dye 

etreindre,  draw  tight  deteindre,  fade 

feindre,  feign  reteindre,  dye  again 
geindre,  groan 


astreindre,  subject 
atteindre,  attain 
ceindre,  enclose,  gird,  gird 

on  (a  sword,  etc.) 
depeindre,  depict 
empreindre,  imprint 


Plaire  plaisant  plu  plais 

(please)  plaisais 

plairai(s)  plaise 

PRES.  IND.:     plais,  plais,  plait,  plaisons,  plaisez,  plaisent. 
complaire,  humour  deplaire,  displease 


plus 
plusse 


Pleuvoii(impers.)    pleuvant 
(rain)  il  pleuvait 

il  pleuvra(it)        il  pleuve 


plu 


il  pleut 


il  plut 
il  plut 


APPENDIX 


255 


INFIN.  PRES.  PART.       PAST  PART.       PRES.  INDIC.       PAST  DEF. 

Pourvoir  pourvoyant     pourvu          pourvois       pourvus 

(provide)  pourvoyais  pourvusse 

pourvoirai(s)  pourvoie 

PRES.  IND,:     pourvois,    pourvois,    pourvoit,    pourvoyons,   pourvoyez, 

pourvoient. 
PEES.  SUBJ.:  pourvoie,  pourvoies,  pourvoie,  pourvoyions,  pourvoyiez, 

pourvoient. 

depourvoir,  strip,  leave  destitute 


peuxorpuis  pus 
,  pusse 


Pouvoir  pouvant  pu 

(be  able)  pouvais 

pourrai(s)  puisse 

PRES.  IND.  :     peux  or  puis,  peux,  peut,  pouvons,  pouvez,  peuvent. 

PRES.  SUBJ.:  puisse,  puisses,  puisse,  puissions,  puissiez,  puissent. 


Prendre  prenant  pris  prends  pris 

(take)  prenais  prisse 

prendrai(s)  prenne 

PRES.  IND.:     prends,  prends,  prend,  prenons,  prenez,  prennent. 
PRES.  SUBJ.  :  prenne,  prennes,  prenne,  prenions,  preniez,  prennent. 


apprendre,  learn 
desapprendre,  unlearn 
comprendre,  understand 


entreprendre,  undertake 
s'eprendre,  be  taken  with 
se  meprendre,  be  mistaken 


rapprendre,  learn  again 
reprendre,  take  back 
surprendre,  surprise 


Recevoir  recevant          regu  regois  regus 

(receive)  recevais  regusse 

recevrai(s)  receive 

PRES.  IND.:  regois,  regois,  regoit,  recevons,  recevez,  regoivent. 

PRES.  SUBJ.:  regoive,  regoives,  regoive,  recevions,  receviez,  regoivent. 

apercevoir,  perceive  decevoir,  deceive  percevoir,  perceive,  levy 

concevoir,  conceive 


Resoudre  resolvant         re*solu  or        resous  r^solus 

(resolve)  resolvais  resous  resolusse 

resoudrai(s)  resolve 

PRES.  IND.:  resous,  resous,  resout,  resolvons,  resolvez,  resolvent. 

absoudre,1  absolve  (p.  part,  absous)  dissoudre,  dissolve  (p.  part,  dissous) 

1  Lacks  past  def.  and  impf.  subj. 


256 


APPENDIX 


INFIN.  PRES.  PART.       PAST  PART.          PRES.  INDIC. 

Rire  riant  ri  ris 

(laugh)  rials 

rirai(s)  rie 

PRES.  IND.:  ris,  ris,  rit,  rions,  riez,  rient. 

PRES.  SUBJ.:  rie,  ries,  rie,  riions,  riiez,  rient. 

sourire,  smile 


PAST  DEF. 
ris 
risse 


Savoir  sachant  su  sais  sus 

(know)  savais  susse 

saurai(s)  sache 

PRES.  IND.:  sais,  sais,  sait,  savons,  savez,  savent. 

PRES.  SUBJ.:  sache,  saches,  sache,  sachions,  sachiez,  sachent. 

IMPVE.:  sache,  sachons,  sachez. 

Sentir  sentant  senti  sens  sentis 

( feel)  sentais  sentisse 

sentirai(s)  sente 

PRES.  IND.:  sens,  sens,  sent,  sentons,  sentez,  sentent. 

consentir,  consent  ressentir,  resent  dementir,  contradict 

pressentir,  forebode  mentir,  lie  se  repentir,  repent 

Servir  servant  servi  sers  servis 

(serve)  servais  servisse 

servirai(s)  serve 

PRES.  IND.:  sers,  sers,  sert,  servons,  servez,  servent. 

se  servir,  make  use  of  desservir,  clear  the  table 

Suivre  suivant  suivi  suis  suivis    . 

(follow)  suivais  suivisse 

suivrai(s)  suive 

PRES.  IND.:  suis,  suis,  suit,  suivons,  suivez,  suivent. 

s'ensuivre,  it  follows  (impers.)  poursuivre,  pursue 


Taire  taisant  tu  tais 

(be  silent)  taisais 

tairai(s)  taise 

PRES.  IND.:  tais,  tais,  tait,  taisons,  taisez,  taisent. 


tus 
tusse 


APPENDIX 


257 


INFIN. 


PKES.  PART.         PAST  PART.        PRES.  INDIC.      PAST  DEF. 


tenu 


tiens 


tins 
tinsse 


Tenir  tenant 

(hold)  tenais 

tiendrai(s)  tienne 

PRES.  IND.:  tiens,  tiens,  tient,  tenons,  tenez,  tiennent. 

PRES.  SUBJ.:  tienne,  tiennes,  tienne,  tenions,  teniez,  tiennent. 

PAST  DEF.:  tins,  tins,  tint,  tinmes,  tintes,  tinrent. 

IMPF.  SUBJ.:  tinsse,  tinsses,  tint,  tinssions,  tinssiez,  tinssent. 

NOTE.  —  Compare  conjugation  of  venir. 

s'abstenir,  abstain  detenir,  detain  obtenir,  obtain 

appartenir,  belong  entretenir,  entertain  retenir,  retain 

contenir,  contain  maintenir,  maintain  soutenir,  sustain 


Traire 

(milk) 
trairai(s) 
PRES.  IND.: 


trait 


trais 


trayant 
trayais 
traie 
trais,  trais,  trait,  trayons,  trayez,  traient. 


PRES.  SUBJ.:  traie,  traies,  traie,  trayions,  trayiez,  traient. 

soustraire,  subtract 


abstraire,  abstract 
attraire,  attract 


distraire,  distract 
extraire,  extract 


vaincs 


vainquis 
vainquisse 


Vaincre  vainquant        vaincu 

(conquer)  vainquais 

vaincrai(s)  vainque 

PRES.  IND.:  vaincs,  vaincs,  yainc,  vainquons,  vainquez,  vainquent. 

NOTE.  —  The  stem  c  becomes  qu  before  any  vowel  except  u. 
convaincre,  convince 

Valoir  valant  valu  vaux  valus 

(be  worth)  valais  valusse 

vaudrai(s)  vaille 

PRES.  IND.:  vaux,  vaux,  vaut,  valons,  valez,  valent. 

PRES.  SUBJ.:  vaille,  vailles,  vaille,  valions,  valiez,  vaillent. 

equivaloir,  be  equal  to  revaloir,  pay  back 

prevaloir,  prevail  (pres.  subj.  prevale,  etc.) 

Vendre  vendant  vendu  vends  vendis 

(sell)  vendais  vendisse 

vendrai(s)  '  vende 

PRES.  IND.:  vends,  vends,  vend,  vendons,  vendez,  vendent. 

revendre,  sell  again 


258  APPENDIX 

INFIN.  PRES.  PART.  PAST  PART.       PRES.  INDIC.      PAST  DBF. 
Venir                        venant  venu  viens  vins 

(come)  venais  vinsse 

viendrai(s)  vienne 

PRES.  IND.  :  viens,  viens,  vient,  venons,  venea,  viennent. 

PRES.  SUBJ.  :  vienne,  viennes;  vienne,  venions,  veniez,  viennent. 

PAST  DBF.:  vins,  vins,  vint,  vinmes,  vintes,  vinrent. 

IMPF.  SUBJ.:  vinsse,  vinsses,  vint,  vinssions,  vinssiez,  vinssent. 

NOTE.  —  Compare  conjugation  of  tenir. 

advenir,  happen  intervenir,  intervene  se  souvenir,  recollect 

convenir,  agree,  suit  parvenir,  attain  subvenir,  aid 

contrevenir,  violate  prevenir,  prevent  survenir,  occur 

circonvenir,  circumvent  provenir,  proceed  (from,  de)  se  ressouvenir,  recoiled 

devenir,  become  revenir,  come  back 

disconvenir,  be  discordant  redevenir,  become  again 

Vetir  vetant  v^tu  vets  vetis 

(clothe)  vetais  vetisse 

vetirai(s)  vete 

PRES.  IND.:     vets,  vets,  vet,  vetons,  vetez,  vetent. 

devetir,  divest  revetir,  invest  se  revetir,  dress 

se  devetir,  undress 

NOTE.  —  Instead  of  vetir  use  generally  habiller. 

Vivre  vivant  vecu  vis  ve*cus 

(live)  vivais  ve"cusse 

vivrai(s)  vive 

PRES.  IND.:     vis,  vis,  vit,  vivons,  vivez,  vivent. 

revivre,  revive  survivre,  survive 


Voir  voyant  vu  vois  vis 

(see)  voyais  visse 

verrai(s)  voie 

PRES.  IND.:     vois,  vois,  voit,  voyons,  voyez,  voient. 

PRES.  SUBJ.:  voie,  voies,  voie,  voyions,  voyiez,  voient. 

entrevoir,  catch  sight  of  revoir,  see  again  prevoir,  foresee  (fut.  pr6voirai) 


APPENDIX 


259 


INFIN.  PRES.  PART.        PAST  PART.         PRES.  INDIC.      PAST  DBF. 

Vouloir  voulant  voulu  veux  voulus 

(will)  voulais  voulusse 

voudrai(s)  veuille 

PRES.  IND.  :  veux,  veux,  veut,  voulons,  voulez,  veulent. 

PRES.  SUBJ.:  veuille,  veuilles,  veuille,  voulions,  vouliez,  veuillent. 

NOTE.  —  The  regular  impve.  veux,  voulons,  voulez  is  rare;  veuillez,  have  the  kindness 
to,  generally  serves  as  2d  plur.  impve. 


F.    KEY  TO   LIST   OF  IRREGULAR  VERBS 

[The  references  are  to  the  pages  of  the  Alphabetical  List.    For  the  orthographical 
irregularities  of  verbs  of  the  first  conjugation,  see  pp.  244-246.] 


A 

C 

coudre  .    .    .    . 

249 

abattre  .    .    . 

.     247 

ceindre  .... 

254 

courir    .    .    .    . 

249 

absoudre  .    . 

.     255 

circonscrire  .    . 

251 

couvrir  .... 

254 

abstenir    .    . 

.     257 

circonvenir   .    . 

258 

craindre    .    .    . 

249 

abstraire   .    . 

.     257 

combattre     .    . 

247 

croire     .    .    .    . 

250 

accourir    .    . 

.     249 

commettre    .    . 

253 

croitre   .    .    .    . 

250 

accueillir  .    . 

.     250 

comparaitre  .    . 

249 

cueillir  .  '  .    .    . 

250 

acquerir    .    . 

..  247 

complaire      .    . 

254 

cuire  

250 

adjoindre  .    . 

.     252 

comprendre  .    . 

255 

admettre  .    . 

.     253 

compromettre  . 

253 

D 

advenir     .    . 

.     258 

concevoir  .    .    . 

255 

de"battre    .    .    . 

247 

aller  .... 

247 

conclure    .    .    . 

248 

decevoir    .    .    . 

255 

apercevoir    . 

.     255 

concourir  .    .    . 

249 

deconstruire     . 

249 

apparaitre     . 

.     249 

conduire    .    .    . 

248 

decoudre  .    .    . 

249 

appartenir    . 

.     257 

confire  .... 

248 

decouvrir  .    .    . 

254 

apprendre 

.     255 

conjoindre    .    . 

252 

decrire  .    .    .    . 

251 

assaillir     .    . 

.     247 

connaitre  .    .    . 

249 

dedire    .    .    .    . 

250 

asseoir  .    .    . 

.     247 

conquerir  .    .    . 

247 

deduire      .    .    . 

248 

astreindre  .    . 

.     254 

consentir  .    .    . 

256 

defaire  .    .    .    . 

251 

atteindre  .    . 

.     254 

construire     .    . 

249 

dejoindre  .    .    . 

252 

attraire     .    . 

.     257 

contenir    .    .    . 

257 

dementir  .    .    . 

256 

contraindre  .    . 

249 

demettre  .    .    . 

253 

contredire     .    . 

250 

departir     .    .    . 

254 

B 

contrefaire    .    . 

251 

depeindre      .    . 

254 

battre    .    .v  . 

.     247 

contrevenir  .    . 

258 

deplaire     .    .    . 

254 

boire      .    .    . 

.     248 

convaincre    .    . 

257 

depourvoir    .    . 

255 

bouillir  .    .    . 

.     248 

convenir    .    .    . 

258 

de*sapprendre   . 

255 

260 


APPENDIX 


desservir  .    .    . 

256 

eteindre    .    .    . 

254 

medire  .... 

250 

deteindre  .    .    . 

254 

4treindre  .    .    . 

254 

mefaire      .    .    . 

251 

detenir  .... 

257 

exclure  .... 

248 

mentir  .... 

256 

detruire     .    .    . 

249 

extraire     .    .    . 

257 

meprendre    .    . 

255 

devenir      .    .    . 

258 

mettre  .... 

253 

devetir  .... 

258 

F 

moudre     .    .    . 

253 

devoir    .... 

250 

faire  

251 

mourir  .... 

253 

dire    .    . 

250 

f  11  • 

OKI 

mouvoir    .    .    . 

253 

disconvenir  .    . 

258 

lalloir    .... 
feindre  .... 

ZiOL 

254 

discourir   .    .    . 

249 

fleurir    .... 

251 

N 

disjoindre     .    . 

252 

fuir    .    *    .    .    . 

252 

disparaitre    .    . 

249 

naitre    .... 

253 

dissoudre  .    .    . 

255 

G 

nuire     .... 

250 

distraire    .    .    . 

257 

dormir  .... 

251 

geindre  .... 

254 

O 

scesir  . 

252 

obtemr  .... 

257 

E 

offrir  

254 

£bouillir    .    .    . 

248 

H 

oindre    .... 

252 

hair   

252 

omettre.    .    .    . 

253 

econduire  .    .    . 

248 

ecrire     .... 

251 

ouvrir    .... 

254 

elire  

252 

I 

6mettre     .    .    . 

253 

inclure  .... 

248 

P 

emoudre   .    .    . 

253 

induire  .... 

248 

paitre    .... 

249 

emouvoir  .    .    . 

253 

inscrire  .... 

251 

paraltre     .    .    . 

249 

empreindre  .    . 

254 

instruire    .    .    . 

249 

parcourir  .    .    . 

249 

enceindre  .    .    . 

254 

interdire    .    .    . 

250 

parfaire     .    .    . 

251 

encourir    .    .    . 

249 

intervenir     .    . 

258 

partir    .... 

254 

endormir  .    .    . 

251 

introduire     .    . 

248 

parvenir    .    .    . 

258 

enduire      .    .    . 

248 

peindre     .    .    . 

254 

enfreindre     .    . 

254 

J 

percevoir  .    .    . 

255 

enfuir    .... 
enjoindre  .    .    . 

252 
252 

joindre  .... 

252 

permettre     .    . 
plaindre    .    .    . 

253 
249 

ensuivre    .    .    . 

256 

L 

plaire     .... 

254 

entremettre  .    . 

253 

pleuvoir    .    .    . 

254 

lire 

252 

entreprendre    . 
entretenir     .    . 

255 
257 

luire  

250 

poindre     .    .    . 
poursuivre    .    . 

252 
256 

entrevoir  .    .    . 

258 

pourvoir    .    .    . 

255 

entr'ouvrir   .    . 

254 

M 

pouvoir     .    .    . 

255 

envoyer     .    .    . 

251 

maintenir     .    . 

257 

predire  .... 

250 

e"prendre   .    .    . 

255 

maudire    .    .    . 

252 

prendre     .    .    . 

255 

e*quivaloir     .    . 

257 

me*connaftre     . 

249 

prescrire    .    .    . 

251 

APPENDIX 


261 


pressentir     .    . 

256 

reluire    .    .    . 

.     250 

sentir     .    .    . 

.     256 

preValoir  .    .    . 

257 

remettre    .    . 

.     253 

servir     .    .    . 

.     256 

prevenir    .    .    . 

258 

remoudre  .    . 

.     253 

sortir     .    .    . 

.     254 

prevoir  .    .    .    . 

258 

re*moudre  .    . 

.     253 

souffrir  .    .    . 

.     254 

produire    .    .    . 

248 

renaitre     .    . 

.     253 

soumettre     . 

.     253 

promettre     .    . 

253 

rendormir     . 

.     251 

sourire  .    .    . 

.     256 

promouvoir  .    . 

253 

renvoyer  .    . 

.     251 

souscrire   .    . 

.     251 

proscrire    . 

251 

repaitre     .    . 

.     249 

soustraire 

.     257 

provenir    .    .    . 

258 

reparaltre 

.     249 

soutenir     .    . 

.     257 

repartir     .    . 

.     254 

souvenir    .    . 

.     258 

R 

repeindre  .    . 

.     254 

subvenir    .    . 

.     258 

rabattre 

247 

repentir     .    . 

.     256 

suffire    .    .    . 

.     248 

rapprendre   .    . 
rasseoir 

255 

247 

reprendre  .    . 
reproduire     . 

.     255 

.    .248 

suivre    .    .    . 
surf  aire     .    . 

.     256 
.     251 

reboire 

248 

repromettre  . 

.     253 

surprendre    . 

.     255 

rebouillir 

248 

resoudre    .    . 

.     255 

survenir    .    . 

.     258 

ressentir    .    . 

.     256 

survivre    .    . 

.     258 

recevoir     .    .    . 

255 

reconduire    .    . 

248 

ressortir    .    . 

.     254 

reconnaitre  .    . 
reconquerir  .    . 
reconstruire  .    . 

249 

247 
249 

ressouvenir  . 
restreindre    . 
reteindre  .    . 

.     258 
.     254 
.     254 

T 

taire  .    .    .    . 
teindre  .    .    . 

.     256 
.     254 

recoudre    .    .    . 

249 

retenir  .    .    . 

.     257 

tenir  .    .    .    . 

.     257 

recouvrir  .    .    . 

254 

revaloir     .    . 

.     257 

traduire     .    . 

.     248 

recourir     .    .    . 

249 

revendre   .    . 

.     257 

traire     .    .    . 

.     257 

r^crire 

251 

revenir  .    .    . 

.     258 

transcrire  .    . 

.     251 

recueillir   .    .    . 

250 

revetir  .    .    . 

.     258 

transmettre  . 

.     253 

recuire  .    .    .    . 

250 

revivre  .    .    . 

.     258  ~ 

tressaillir  .    . 

.     247 

redefaire   .    .    . 

251 

revoir    .    .    . 

.     258 

rire 

256 

redevenir  .    .    . 

258 

V 

redevoir    .    .    . 

250 

rouvrir  .    .    . 

.     254 

vaincre  .    .    . 

.     257 

redire    .    .    .    . 

250 

valoir     .    .    . 

.     257 

redormir   .    .    . 

251 

S 

vendre  .    .    . 

.     257 

re*duire  .    .    .    . 

248 

saillir     .    .    . 

.     247 

venir      .    .    . 

.     258 

reelire 

252 

satisfairc 

251 

vctir 

258 

refaire   .    .    .    . 

251 

savoir    .    .    . 

.     256 

vivre      .    .    . 

.     258 

r6ioindr6 

252 

secourir     .    . 

.     249 

voir    .    .    .    . 

258 

relire      .    .    .    . 

252 

seduire  .    .    . 

.     248 

vouloir  .    .    . 

.     259 

FRENCH-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 


a,  at,  to,  in;  —  moi,  mine;  —  de- 
main,  good-bye  (till  to-morrow). 

a,  see  avoir. 

abeille,  /.,  bee. 

abondant,  abundant,  plentiful. 

abord,  ra.,  approach;  dj — ,  at  first, 
firstly. 

abri,  ra.,  shelter;  a  P —  de,  shel- 
tered from. 

acajou,  ra.,  mahogany. 

accident,  ra.,  accident. 

accepter,  accept. 

accompagner,  accompany,  go  with, 
come  with. 

achat,  ra.,  purchase. 

acheter,  buy. 

acier,  ra.,  steel;  gravure  sur  — , 
steel  engraving. 

adieu,  adieu,  good-bye. 

admirer,  admire. 

adresser,  address;  s' — ,  apply. 

affaire,  /.,  affair,  thing,  business; 
faire  des  — s,  do  business. 

afin,  in  order;  —  de,  —  que,  in 
order  to,  in  order  that. 

age,  ra.,  age. 

age,  aged,  old. 

agent,  ra.,  agent,  policeman. 

agir,  act;  il  s'agit  de,  it  is  about, 
it  is  a  question  of. 

agr cable,  agreeable,  pleasant. 

agreablement,  agreeably,  com- 
fortably. 

agricole,  agricultural. 

ai,  see  avoir. 

aide-mason,  ra.,  mason's  helper, 
hodman. 


aider,  aid,  help. 

aigre,  sharp,  sour. 

aiguille,  /.,  needle. 

aille,  see  aller. 

aimable,  amiable,  kind,  nice. 

aimer,  love,  like,  be  fond  of;  — 
mieux,  prefer;  —  autant,  like  as 
well. 

ainsi,  thus,  so;  et  —  de  suite,  and 
so  forth. 

air,  ra.,  air,  look;  avoir  P — ,  look, 
seem;  en  pi  em  — ,  in  the  open 
air. 

aise,  easy;  at  ease,  well-to-do. 

algebre,  /.,  algebra. 

aller,  go,  go  on,  fit;  be;  comment 
allez-vous?  how  are  you?  s'en 
— ,  go  away;  y  —  de,  be  at 
stake. 

allumer,  light,  kindle. 

alors,  then,  so. 

amener,  take,  bring. 

ameficain,  American. 

Amerique,  /.,  America;  —  du 
Nord,  North  America. 

ami,  -e,  ra.,  /.,  friend. 

amusement,  ra.,  amusement. 

amuser,  amuse,  interest,  enter- 
tain; s* — ,  amuse  (enjoy)  one- 
self, have  a  good  time. 

an,  ra.,  year. 

ancetre,  ra.  or/.,  ancestor. 

ancien,  ancient,  old,  former. 

anglais,  English. 

Angleterre,  /.,  England. 

animal,  ra.,  animal. 

anime,  animated,  lively. 

annee,  /.,  year. 

aout  [u],  ra.,  August. 


263 


264 


FRENCH-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 


apercevoir,  perceive;  s* —  de  (que), 
perceive,  notice. 

appartement,  m.,  suite  of  rooms, 
flat. 

appartenir,  belong. 

appeler,  call;  s* — ,  be  called,  be 
named. 

appetit,  m.,  appetite;  P —  vient 
en  mangeant,  desire  comes  with 
success,  etc. 

apporter,  carry  to,  bring. 

apprendre,  learn. 

approcher,  bring  near;  come  near; 
s* —  de,  draw  near,  approach. 

approuver,  approve. 

apres,  after,  later;  —  que,  after. 

apres-demain,  the  day  after  to- 
morrow. 

apres-midi,  m.  or/.,  afternoon. 

arbre,  m.,  tree. 

architecte  [ar$itekt],  m.y  archi- 
tect. 

ardent,  burning. 

ardeur,  /.,  ardour,  warmth. 

argent,  m.,  silver;  money. 

argenterie,  /.,  silverware. 

armoire,  /.,  cupboard. 

arracher,  tear  (out),  tear  off. 

arranger,  arrange,  place. 

arreter,  arrest,  stop;  s' — ,  stop. 

arrivee,  /.,  arrival. 

arriver,  arrive,  come;  happen. 

article,  m.,  article. 

artiste,  m.  or/.,  artist. 

as,  see  avoir. 

asperges,  /.  pi.,  asparagus. 

asseoir,  seat;  sj — ,  sit  down. 

assez,  enough;  rather,  quite. 

assiette,  /.,  plate. 

assis,  p.  part,  of  asseoir,  seated, 
sitting. 

assister,  be  present  (at  =  a). 

Atlantique,  m.  or/.,  Atlantic. 

attacher,  tie,  tie  up. 

attendre,  wait,  wait  for;  faire  — , 
keep  waiting. 


attention,  /.,  attention ;  appeler  P — 
sur,  call  attention  to. 

attirer,  attract,  call. 

attraper,  catch. 

augmenter,  increase. 

aujourd'hui,  to-day. 

auparavant,  before,  formerly. 

aupres  de,  with,  as  regards. 

aurai,  see  avoir. 

aussi,  also,  too;  —  ...  que,  as  ... 
as. 

aussitot  que,  as  soon  as. 

autant,  as  much,  as  many. 

auteur,  m.,  author. 

automne  [oton],  m.  or/.,  autumn. 

automobile  [otomobil],  m.  or  /., 
motor-car,  automobile. 

autre,  other;  Pun  et  P — ,  both. 

autrefois,  formerly,  once. 

autrui,  others. 

avance,  /.,  advance;  d' — ,  before- 
hand, too  soon. 

avancer,  advance,  go  on;  be  too 
fast. 

avant,  before;  — de,  —  que,  before. 

avant-hier  [ava(t)je:r],  the  day  be- 
fore yesterday. 

avec  [avek],  with. 

avenir,  m.,  future. 

avidement,  eagerly,  greedily. 

avoine,  /.,  oats. 

avoir,  have,  get;  y  — ,  be;  il  y  a, 
there  is,  there  are;  qu'avez-vous? 
what  is  the  matter  with  you? 

avouer,  confess. 

avril  [avri(l)],  m.,  April. 

ayons,  ayez,  see  avoir. 

B 

bagages,  m.  pi,  luggage,  baggage. 
baie,  /.,  bay.  \ 

baigner,  bathe;  se  — ,  bathe. 
bain,  m.,  bath. 
bal,  m.,  ball,  dance, 
bameaire,  bathing. 


FRENCH-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY  • 


265 


baratte,  /.,  churn. 

bas,  low;  —  age,  early  age. 

basse-cour,  /.,  farmyard,  poultry- 
yard. 

Bastille,  /.,  Bastille  (taken  July 
14,  1789). 

bateau,  m.,  boat. 

batiment,  m.,  building. 

batir,  build. 

baton,  m.,  stick. 

battant,  m.,  leaf  (of  door)]  porte  a 
deux  — s,  folding  door. 

battre,  beat,  thresh,  churn;  —  des 
mains,  clap  (their)  hands. 

beau,  bel,  fine,  beautiful,  hand- 
some; il  fait  — ,  it  is  fine 
(weather) . 

beaucoup,  much,  very  much,  a 
great  deal;  many,  very  many. 

beau-frere,  m.,  brother-in-law. 

beaute,  /.,  beauty,  fine  sight,  beau- 

•  tiful  thing. 

Beauvais,  m.,  Beauvais,  a  town 
some  50  miles  n.  w.  of  Paris, 
where  there  is  a  government 
tapestry  manufactory. 

benefices,  m.  pi.,  profit. 

besoin,  m.,  need;  avoir  — ,  have 
need,  need. 

bete,  /.,  beast,  animal. 

beurre,  m.,  butter. 

Bible,  /.,  Bible. 

bibliotheque,  /.,  library,  bookcase. 

bicyclette,  /.,  bicycle. 

bicycliste,  m.  or/.,  bicyclist. 

bien  [bje],  well,  very  well;  very; 
much,  many;  really,  indeed; 
comfortable;  —  que,  although; 
as  n.  m.,  good. 

bientot  [bjeto],  soon. 

bijou,  m.,  jewel. 

bille,  /.,  marble  (plaything). 

billet,  m.,  ticket. 

biscuit,  m.,  biscuit. 

blanc,  white. 

blanchir,  whiten;  wash  (linen). 


ble,  m.  s.  and  pi.,  wheat. 

bleu,  blue. 

boeuf  [boef],  m.,  ox;  beef;  pi.  bceufs 

boire,  drink. 

bois  [bwa],  m.,  wood. 

boiserie,  /.,  wainscoting. 

boite,  /.,  box. 

boiter,  limp. 

bon,  good,  gentle;  kind  (to  =pour) ; 
right,  suitable;  sentir  — ,  smell 
sweet.  , 

bonbons,  m.  pi.,  sweets,  candy. 

bonheur,  m.,  good  fortune,  hap- 
piness. 

bonjour,  m.,  good  day,  good  morn- 
ing. 

bonne,  /.,  servant,  maid. 

bonsoir,  good  evening. 

bonte,  /.,  kindness. 

bord,  m.,  bank,  shore,  edge,  side. 

botte,  /.,  bunch. 

boue,  /.,  mud. 

bougie,  /.,  wax  candle. 

boulanger,  m.,  baker. 

bouquet,  m.,  bouquet. 

bouquetiere,  /.,  flower  girl. 

bout,  m.,  end;  au  —  de,  at  the  end 
of,  after  (of  time) . 

boutique,  /.,  shop  (small). 

bouton,  m.,  button,  stud. 

boutonniere,  /.,  buttonhole. 

branche,  /.,  branch. 

branle,  m.,  swinging,  moving, 
movement,  going. 

bras,  m.,  arm. 

brave,  brave;  good,  worthy. 

brique,  /.,  brick. 

brosse,/.,  brush;  —  a  dents,  tooth- 
brush. 

brosser,  brush. 

brouter,  browse,  crop,  eat. 

bruit,  m.,  noise. 

bruler,  burn. 

bucheron,  m.,  woodcutter. 

buffet,  m.,  sideboard. 


266 


FRENCH-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 


bulletin,  m.,  list;  —  de  vote,  bal- 
lot (paper). 
bureau,  m.,  office. 


ca  [sa],  see  cela. 

cabine,  /.,  cabin  (on  ship). 

cacher,  hide. 

cadeau,  m.,  present,  gift. 

cafe,  m.,  coffee,  (first)  breakfast; 
'cafe' ;  —  au  lait,  coffee  with  milk. 
restaurant,  restaurant. 

cahier,  m.,  exercise  book,  copy- 
book. 

calculer,  calculate. 

cale,  /.,  hold  (of  ship). 

camarade,  m.  or  /.,  comrade,  com- 
panion. 

campagne,  /.,  country. 

Canada,  m.,  Canada. 

canadien  [kanadje],  Canadian. 

canard,  m.,  duck. 

candidat,  m.,  candidate. 

canne,  /.,  cane,  walking-stick. 

capitaine,  m.,  captain. 

capitale,  /.,  capital. 

car,  con/.,  for. 

carotte,  /.,  carrot. 

carre,  square. 

carte,  /.,  card,  map. 

carton,  m.,  cardboard,  cardboard 
box,  box. 

cas,  m.,  case. 

cascade,  /.,  cascade,  waterfall. 

caser,  put  in  place,  settle. 

casino,  m.,  casino. 

casser,  break. 

castor,  m.,  beaver. 

cause,  /.,  cause;  a  —  de,  on  ac- 
count of. 

causer,  chat. 

cave,  /.,  cellar. 

caviar,  m.,  caviar(e).. 

ce,  it,  this,  that,  he,  she,  they, 
these,  those. 


ce,  cet,  cette,  ces,  this,  that,  these, 
those;  — ...  -ci,  — ...  -la,  this, 
that. 
ceci,  this. 

cela,  that,  this;  avec  — ?   what 
next?  comment  ca  va-t-il?  how 
are  you?  '  how  goes  it? ' 
celebre,  celebrated,  famous. 

celui,  celle,  ceux,  celles,  this  (one), 

that  (one),  these,  those; ci 

.  .  . la,   this  one  .  .  .  that 

one,  the  latter  .  .  .  the  former. 

cent,  (a)  hundred. 

centieme,  m.,  one  one^hundredth. 

centime,  m.,  centime  (T^-g-  of  a 
franc,  about  j  of  a  cent  or  half- 
penny). 

centimetre,  m.,  centimetre  (TJ^ 
of  a  metre,  about  f  of  an  inch) . 

cependant,  however,  still,  yet. 

cerise,  /.,  cherry. 

certain,  certain. 

chaise,  /.,  chair. 

chaleur,  /.,  heat. 

chambre,  /.,  room;  —  a  coucher, 
bedroom. 

chameau,  m.,  camel. 

champ,  m.,  field. 

chandelle,  /.,  candle. 

changer,  change;  —  d'air,  change 
air,  take  a  change  of  air. 

chant,  m.,  singing,  song. 

chanter,  sing. 

chant euse,  /.,  singer. 

chapeau,  m.,  hat. 

chapitre,  m.,  chapter. 

chaque,  each,  every. 

charbon,  m.,  coal. 

charge,  loaded,  laden. 

charmant,  charming. 

charme,  charmed,  delighted, 

charrue,  /.,  plough. 

chasser,  chase,  hunt. 

chat,  m.,  cat. 

chateau,  m.,  castle,  mansion. 

chaud,  adj.,  warm;  n.  m.,  warmth; 


FRENCH-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 


267 


avoir  — ,  be  warm;  fake  — ,  be 
warm  (of  weather). 

chauffage,  m.,  heating. 

chauffer,  warm,  heat ;  se  — ,  warm 
oneself. 

chernin,  m.,  road;  —  de  fer,  rail- 
way. 

chene,  ra.,  oak. 

cher,  adj.,  adv.,  dear;  le  moins  — , 
the  cheapest. 

Cherbourg  [Jerbuir],  m.,  Cher- 
bourg. 

chercher,  look  for,  seek,  search; 
venir  — ,  come  for;  aller  — ,  go 
for,  go  and  get,  go  to  meet. 

chere,  /.,  living,  cheer. 

cheval,  m.,  horse;  chevaux  de 
bois,  merry-go-round;  a  — ,  on 
horseback. 

cheveu,  m.,  (a)  hair;  pi.,  hair. 

chez,  at  the  house  (shop,  etc.)  of; 
—  lui,  at  his  house,  with  him. 

chien  [$je],  m.,  dog. 

choisir,  choose,  select. 

chose,  /.,  thing. 

chou,  m.,  cabbage. 

chute,  /.,  fall. 

cinq  [sek],  five. 

cinquante,  fifty. 
'cinquieme,  m.,  fifth. 

ciseaux,  m.  pi.,  scissors. 

citadin,  m.,  townsman. 

citoyen  [sitwaje],  m.,  citizen. 

civilisation,  /.,  civilization. 

clair,  clear. 

Claire,  /.,  Claire,  Clara. 

classe,  /.,  class,  classroom. 

clef  [kle],  /.,  key. 

Clemence,  /.,  Clementina. 

client  [klia],  m.,  client,  customer, 
patient. 

clientele,  /.,  customers;  practice. 

climat,  m.,  climate. 

clou,  m.,  nail. 

cocher,  m.,  coachman,  driver. 

cocon,  m:,  cocoon. 


coeur,  m.,  heart. 

coffret,  m.,  casket. 

coiffer,  dress  the  head  (hair). 

coiffeur,  m.,  hairdresser,  barber. 

col,  m.,  collar;  pass  (in  mountains). 

college,  m.,  college,  school. 

collier,  m.,  necklace. 

collision,  /.,  collision. 

Colomb  [kolo],  m.,  Columbus. 

colonel,  m.,  colonel. 

combien  [kobje],  how  much,  how 

many. 

commander,  order, 
comrne,  like,  as. 
commencer,  commence,  begin;  — 

par,  begin  by,  firstly, 
comment,  how. 

commode,  convenient,  comforta- 
ble, 
commode,    /.,    bureau,    chest   of 

drawers. 

commune,  /.,  municipality. 
comparaison,  /.,  comparison, 
compartiment,  m.,  compartment, 
complet,  m.,  suit  (of  clothes). 
completement,  completely, 
compliment,  m.,  compliment, 
composition,  /.,  composition, 
comprendre,  understand. 
compter    [k5te],     count;    expect, 

hope. 

comtesse,  /.,  countess. 
concert,  m.,  concert, 
concours,     m.,     competition;    — • 

agricole,  agricultural  show, 
conduire,  conduct;  se  — ,  conduct 

oneself,  behave, 
conduite,  /.,  conduct, 
confort,  m.,  comfort, 
confortable,  comfortable, 
conge,  m.,  leave,  holiday, 
connaissance,  /.,  acquaintance, 
connaitre,  know, 
conquete,  /.,  conquest, 
conseiller,  m.,  councillor, 
conseiller,  counsel,  advise. 


268 


FRENCH-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 


consequent,  par  — ,  consequently. 

considerable,  considerable. 

consommation,  /.,  consumption. 

constamment  [kostama],  constant- 
ly, often. 

construction,  /.,  construction, 
building. 

construire,  construct,  build. 

contenir,  contain. 

content,  satisfied,  pleased,  glad. 

contenu,  p.  part,  of  contenir. 

continuer,  continue. 

cordonnier,  ra.,  shoemaker. 

corps,  m.,  body. 

corridor,  m.,   corridor,  hall,   pas- 


corriger,  correct. 

corsage,  m.,  waist,  bodice. 

cote,  m.,  side;  a  —  de,  beside. 

coucher,  put  to  bed;  sleep;  se  — , 
lie  down,  go  to  bed,  retire. 

coudre,  sew. 

couler,  flow,  run. 

coup,  m.,  blow;  —  d'oeil,  glance, 
view,  sight. 

coupe,  /.,  cutting,  cut. 

couper,  cut,  cut  down. 

cour,  /.,  yard,  court  (yard). 

courir,  run. 

counier,  m.,  courier;  mail. 

cours,  m.,  course  (of  lectures),  lec- 
ture; fake  son  — ,  (deliver)  his 
lecture;  —  d'eau,  stream. 

court,  short. 

cousin,  -e,  m.,  /.,  cousin. 

coussin,  m.,  cushion. 

cousu,  see  coudre. 

couteau,  m.,  knife. 

couter,  cost. 

couture,  /.,  sewing. 

couturier  e,  /.,  dressmaker.      „ 

couvert,  m.,  cover  (dishes,  etc.,  for 
one  person)',  tablecloth;  mettre 
le  — ,  lay  (set)  the  table. 

couvrir,  cover. 

craie,  /.,  chalk. 


craindre,  fear. 

cravate,  /.,  necktie. 

crayon,  m.,  pencil. 

crier  [krie],  cry  (out),  shout,  yelL 

croire,  believe,  think. 

cruel,  cruel. 

cueillir,  gather,  pluck,  pick. 

cuiller  [km'jeir],  /.,  spoon. 

cuire,  cook,  bake;  faire  — ,  cook, 

bake. 

cuisine,  /.,  kitchen, 
cuisiniere,  /.,  cook, 
cuisson,  /.,  cooking,  baking. 
cuivre,  m.,  copper;  gravure  sur  — , 

copperplate  (engraving) . 
cultivateur,  m.,  farmer, 
cure,  m.,  parish  priest,  'cureV 


dame,  /.,  lady. 

dans,  in,  into. 

danser,  dance. 

date,  /.,  date. 

davantage,  more. 

de,  of,  from. 

de,  m.,  thimble. 

debarquer,  disembark,  land. 

debarrasser,  rid  of. 

debout,  upright,  standing. 

decembre,  m.,  December. 

decoration,  /.,  decoration. 

decorer,  decorate. 

decouvrir,  discover. 

decrire,  describe. 

defendre,    defend,    forbid;   il   est 

defendu,  it  is  forbidden,  it  is 

against  the  law. 
defricher,  clear  (land). 
degeler,  thaw. 
dehors  [dao:r],  outside, 
deja,  already,  yet. 
dejeuner,  m.,  breakfast,  lunch, 
dejeuner,  breakfast,  lunch,  take 

lunch, 
demain,  to-morrow. 


FRENCH-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 


269 


demander,  ask,  ask  for;  se  — ,  ask 
oneself,  wonder. 

demeurer,  live,  dwell. 

demi,  half. 

demi-kilo,  m.}  pound,  half -kilo- 
gram. 

dent,  /.,  tooth. 

depasser,  exceed. 

depecher,  dispatch;  se  — ,  hasten, 
make  haste. 

dependre,  depend. 

depenser,  spend. 

deposer,  deposit;  cast. 

depuis,  since;  —  que,  since. 

derailler,  go  off  the  track. 

deranger,  disturb;  se  — ,  disturb 
oneself. 

deregle,  irregular. 

dernier,  last. 

derriere,  behind. 

descendre  [desaidr],  descend,  go 
down;  get  down,  alight,  get  out; 
take  down,  put  down. 

desirer,  desire,  wish;  laisser  a  — , 
not  be  satisfactory. 

desole,  sorry. 

dessert,  m.,  dessert. 

dessous  [dasu],  underneath. 

detacher,  detach,  unfasten;  se  — , 
detach  oneself,  come  loose. 

deux,  two;  tous  les  — ,  both. 

deuxieine,  second. 

deuxiemement,  secondly. 

devant,  before,  in  front  of. 

devanture,  /.,  front  (shop)  win- 
dow. 

devenir,  become. 

devoir,  owe;  be  to;  ought,  be  one's 
duty. 

devoir,  m.,  duty;  exercise  (school). 

dictionnaire,  m.,  dictionary. 

different,  different. 

difficile,  difficult. 

difficulte,  /.,  difficulty. 

diligent,  diligent,  industrious. 

dimanche,  m.,  Sunday. 


diner,  m.,  dinner. 

diner,  dine. 

dire,  say,  tell;  se  — ,  say  to  oneself 

(one  another);  be  said;  vouloir 

— ,  mean. 

disposer,  arrange;  se — ,  get  ready, 
dix  [dis],  ten. 
docteur,   m.,   doctor;  femme  — , 

woman  doctor,  lady  physician. 
dois,  see  devoir, 
dollar,  m.,  dollar, 
domestique,  m.  or  /.,  servant, 
dommage,  m.,  pity;  c'est  —  que, 

it's  a  pity  that. 
done,  then. 
donner,  give,  give  away;  yield;  se 

—  la  main,  shake  hands. 
dont,  of  which,  of  whom,  whose, 

with  which,  etc. 
dormir,  sleep. 
dos,  m.,  back, 
doubler,  line  (clothing). 
douleur,  /.,  pain, 
douter,  doubt. 

doux,  sweet;  soft,  gentle,  mild, 
douzaine,  /.,  dozen, 
droit  [drwa],  right;  a  — e,  to  the 

right. 

du,  see  devoir, 
dur,  adj.  or  adv.,  hard, 
durer,  last. 

E 

eau,  /.,  water. 

eau-forte,  /.,  aquafortis,  etching; 
gravure  a  P — ,  etching. 

ebeniste,  m.,  cabinet-maker. 

echafaudage,  m.,  scaffolding. 

echapper  (a),  escape. 

echelle,  /.,  ladder. 

eclairage,  m.,  lighting. 

eclairer,  light,  illuminate,  en- 
lighten. 

ecole,  /.,  school. 

e" cotter,  -ere  m.,  /.,  schoolboy, 
schoolgirl. 


270 


FRENCH-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 


economiser,  save. 

ecouter,  listen  (to). 

ecraser,   crush;  se  faire  — ,   get 

run  over. 

eerier  (s')  [ekrie],  exclaim, 
ecrire,  write, 
ecureuil,  m.,  squirrel, 
ecurie,  /.,  stable  (for  horses). 
effet,  m.j  effect;  en  — ,  in  fact,  in- 
deed, 
egal,  equal;  cela  m'est  — ,  that's 

(all)  the  same  to  me,  I  don't 

care. 

egaler,  equal, 
eglise,  /.,  church. 
eh  [e],  —  bien!  well!  well  then! 
electeur,  m.,  elector, 
election,  /.,  election, 
electricite,  /.,  electricity, 
electrique,  electric, 
elephant,  m.,  elephant, 
eleve,  m.  or/.,  pupil, 
eleve,  high. 
elever,  raise,  bring  up;  s* — ,  rise, 

stand;  mal  eleve,  rude,  impolite, 

ill-mannered, 
elire,  elect. 
elle,  she,  it,  her. 
elles,  they, 
embarquer,  put  on  board;  s' — , 

go  (get)  on  board,  take  ship, 
embrasser,  embrace,  kiss. 
empecher,  hinder,  prevent, 
emplette,  /.,  purchase;  faire  des 
— s,  buy  things,  go  shopping. 
employe,  m.,  employee,  clerk, 
employer,  employ,  use. 
emporter,   carry  off,  take  away; 

P —  sur,  win  the  day  over, 
emprunter,  borrow. 
en,  of  it,  of  them,  some;  from  it, 

from  them. 
en,  in,  at;  —  meme  temps,  at  the 

same  time;  de  .  .  .  — ,  from  .  .  . 

to. 
enchante,  delighted. 


enclume,  /.,  anvil. 

encore,  yet,  still,  again,  more. 

encre,  /.,  ink. 

endormir,  put  to  sleep;  s' — ,  go  to 
sleep. 

endroit,  m.,  place. 

enfant,  m.  or  /.,  child,  boy,  girl. 

enfin,  at  last,  finally;  in  short. 

ennui  [anui],  m.,  weariness,  lone- 
liness, tedium,  sorrow. 

ennuyer  [anqije],  weary,  annoy; 
s* — ,  grow  weary,  feel  lonely,  be 
bored,  be  sad. 

enrhumer  (s'),  catch  (a)  cold. 

enseigner,  teach. 

ensemble,  together. 

ensuite,  then,  next,  afterwards. 

entendre,  hear;  —  parler  de,  hear 
of;  —  dire,  hear  said;  —  chan- 
ter, hear  sing  (or  sung). 

entourer,  surround. 

entree,  /.,  entrance,  admission; 
'  entree.' 

entrer,  go  in,  come  in,  enter;  faire 
— ,  show  in. 

environ,  around,  about;  n.  pi., 
surrounding  parts,  neighbour- 
hood. 

envoyer,  send;  —  chercher,  send 
for. 

epais,  thick. 

epi,  m.,  ear  (of  grain),  head. 

epicier,  m.,  grocer. 

equestre  [ekwestr  or  ekestr],  eques- 
trian. 

es,  see  etre. 

escalier,  m.,  stairway. 

escorter,  escort. 

espece,  /.,  kind,  sort,  species. 

esperer,  hope. 

essayer,  try,  try  on. 

et,  and. 

etable,  /.,  stable  (for  cattle). 

etablir,  establish. 

etage,  m.,  story,  floor . 

etais,  see  etre. 


FRENCH-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 


271 


etat,  ra.,  state,  condition. 

Etats-Unis  [etaz  yni],  ra.  pi., 
United  States. 

etc,  ra.,  summer. 

ete,  see  etre. 

eternuer,  sneeze. 

etes,  see  etre. 

etoffe,  /.,  cloth,  material. 

etrange,  strange. 

etre,  be;  en  —  de,  the  stage  one 
is  at;  y  — ,  be  in,  be  at  home. 

etroit,  narrow. 

etudier,  study. 

eu,  eus,  eusse,  see  avoir. 

Europe,  /.,  Europe. 

eux,  them,  they. 

Evangile,  ra.,  Gospel. 

eviter,  avoid. 

exact  [egzakt],  exact;  a  Pheure 
— e,  on  time. 

exagerer,  exaggerate. 

examen  [egzame],  ra.,  examination. 

excellent,  excellent. 

excursion,  /.,  excursion. 

excuser,  excuse;  s* — ,  excuse  one- 
self, offer  excuses. 

executer,  execute. 

exemple,  ra.,  example. 

existence,  /.,  existence. 

exister,  exist,  live. 

expliquer,  explain. 

exploiter,  work. 

exposition,  /.,  exhibition. 

exquis,  exquisite,  delicious. 


fache,  sorry,  angry,  annoyed, 
facile,  easy. 
facilement,  easily, 
facon,  /.,  way,  manner, 
facteur,  ra.,  postman;  porter, 
faible,  weak, 
faillir,  fail;  be  near (ly). 
faim,  /.,  hunger;  avoir  — ,  be  hun- 
gry. 


faine,  /.,  beechnut. 

faire,  do,  make,  take,  cause;  se 
— ,  be  made,  happen;  se  —  — , 
cause  to  be  made  for  oneself; 
il  fait  beau,  it  is  fine;  cela  ne 
fait  rien,  that  makes  no  differ- 
ence. 

fait,  p.  part,  of  faire-;  en  etre  —  de, 
be  all  over  with. 

falloir,  be  necessary,  must,  have 
to;  il  faut,  it  is  necessary,  we 
(you,  etc.)  must;  il  ne  faut  pas, 
we  (you,  etc.)  must  not;  s'en 
— ,  be  near. 

famille,  /.,  family. 

farine,  /.,  flour. 

fasse,  see  faire. 

fatigue,  tired,  weary. 

fatiguer,  fatigue,  tire. 

faucille,  /.,  sickle. 

faut,  see  falloir. 

faute,  /.,  fault,  mistake. 

fauteuil,  ra.,  arm-chair. 

faux  col,  ra.,  collar  (detachable). 

femme  [fam],  /.,  woman,  wife;  — 
de  chambre,  housemaid. 

fenetre,  /.,  window. 

fer,  ra.,  iron. 

ferai,  see  faire. 

ferme,  /.,  farmhouse,  farm. 

fermer,  close,  shut. 

fete,  /.,  holiday,  festivity. 

feu,  m.,  fire. 

feuillage,  m.,  foliage,  leaves. 

feuille,  /.,  leaf. 

fevrier,  m.,  February. 

figure,  /.,  figure;  face. 

figurer  (se),  imagine. 

fil  [fil],  m.,  thread. 

fills  [fiij],  /.,  daughter,  girl;  jeune 
— ,  young  girl,  young  lady. 

fils  [fis],  m.,  son. 

fin,  /.,  end. 

finir,  finish,  end;  —  par,  finish  by, 
lastly. 

fis,  fisse,  see  faire. 


272 


FRENCH-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 


fleur,  /.,  flower,  blossom,  bloom, 
fleurir,  flower,  bloom,  blossom. 
fleuve,  ra.,  river  (falling  into  the 

sea). 

flocon,  m.,  flake, 
fluide,  m.,  fluid, 
foin,  m.,  hay. 
fois,  /.,  time;  une  — ,  once;  toutes 

les  —  que,  whenever, 
fond,  m.,  bottom,  back  part, 
fonder,  found,  establish, 
font,  see  faire. 
fonte,  /.,  cast  iron, 
foret,  /.,  forest. 
forge,  wrought, 
forgeron,  m.,  blacksmith, 
former,  form. 

fort,  adj.,  adv.,  strong;  hard,  sharp. 
fosse  [fois],  /.,  ditch;  grave;  pit; 

—  aux  ours,  bear  pit. 
four,  m.,  oven, 
fourchette,  /.,  fork, 
fournir,    furnish,   supply;   se  — , 

get  one's  supplies,  buy  (provi- 
sions). 

frais,  fresh,  cool;  unsoiled. 
f raise,  /.,  strawberry, 
franc,  m.,  franc  (about  20  cents  or 

ten  pence) . 
francais,  French. 
France,  /.,  France, 
frapper,  knock,  strike. 
frere,  m.,  brother. 
froid  [frwa],  cold;  faire — ,  be  cold 

(of   temperature)]  avoir  — ,   be 

(feel)  cold, 
fromage,  m.,  cheese, 
fruit,  m.,  fruit, 
fumer,  smoke. 
fus,  see  etre. 


gages,  m.  pi.,  wages, 
gagner,  earn,  gain. 
gai  [ge],  gay,  merry,  cheerful, 
gant,  m.,  glove. 


garcon,  m.,  boy,  waiter,  journey- 
man. 

garde,  /.,  care;  prendre  — ,  take 
care. 

garder,  keep. 

gardien  [gardje],  m.,  keeper,  care- 
taker. 

gare,  /.,  station  (railway). 

garnir,  trim,  decorate,  adorn;  fill, 
cover. 

garniture,  /.,  trimming. 

gateau,  m.,  cake. 

gauche,  left. 

gaz  [gaiz],  m.,  gas. 

geler,  freeze. 

gener,  embarrass;  restrain;  se  — , 
restrain  oneself. 

gene"ralement,  generally. 

Gene  vie  ve,  /.,  Gene  vie  ve. 

gens,  m.  or  /.,  people;  jeunes  — , 
young  men. 

gentil  feati],  nice. 

geographic,  /.,  geography. 

George(s),  m.,  George. 

gilet,  m.,  waistcoat,  vest. 

glace,  /.,  ice. 

glacier,  m.,  glacier. 

glissant,  slippery. 

Gobelins,  m.  pi.,  Gobelins,  gov- 
ernment tapestry  works  in 
Paris. 

gorge,  /.,  throat;  gorge. 

gout,  m.,  taste. 

gouter  (a),  taste. 

grammaire,  /.,  grammar. 

grand,  tall,  large,  £reat;  de  —  ma- 
tin, early  in  the  morning. 

grand'mere,  /.,  grandmother. 

grand-pere,  m.,  grandfather. 

grange,  /.,  barn. 

grands-parents,  m.  pi.,  grand- 
parents. 

grave,  grave,  serious. 

gravement,  gravely. 

gravure,  /.,  engraving. 

grippe,  /.,  'grippe,'  influenza. 


FRENCH-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 


273 


gros,  big,  large. 

grossir  [grosiir],  grow  larger. 

groupe,  m.,  group. 

guere,  ne  .  .  .  — ,  hardly,  scarcely. 

guerir,  get  well,  recover. 

Guignol,  m.,  Punch  and  Judy. 

Guillaume,  m.,  William. 


H 

h  aspirate  is  indicated  thus:  'h. 

habile,  clever. 

habilement,  cleverly. 

habiller,  dress,  clothe;  s* — ,  dress 
(oneself) . 

habit,  m.,  coat;  dress  coat;  pi., 
clothes. 

habitation,  /.,  habitation,  dwell- 
ing. 

habiter,  inhabit,  live  in. 

habituer,  accustom. 

'hache,  /.,  axe. 

'hate,  /.,  haste. 

'haut,  high. 

'Havre,  m.,  Havre. 

hectare,  m.,  hectare  (about  2^ 
acres). 

Helene,  /.,  Helen. 

herbe,  /.,  grass. 

heure,  /.,  hour;  o'clock;  time;  de 
bonne  — ,  early. 

heureusement,  fortunately. 

heureux,  happy,  fortunate. 

,hier  [je:r],  yesterday. 

jhistoire,  /.,  history;  story. 

Shiver,  m.,  winter. 

}homme,  m.,  man. 

Mpital,  m.,  hospital. 

'*hors  de,  out  of. 

*4hor£-d'ceuvre,  m.,  side  dish,  relish. 

]horticole,  horticultural. 

;huile,,  /.,  oil. 

l<huit  hit],  eight. 

humain,  .human. 


ici,  here;  d»—  la,  till  then. 

il',  he,  it;  (with  impers.  verbs), 
there. 

illustrer,  illustrate. 

ils,  they. 

image,  /.,  image,  picture. 

imaginer,  imagine,  conceive. 

impatiemment  [epasjama],  impa- 
tiently. 

important,  important. 

importer,  import;  be  important; 
n'importe  quel,  no  matter  what, 
any  .  .  .  (whatever). 

Industrie,  /.,  industry. 

infiniment,  infinitely,  very  much. 

inflammable,  inflammable. 

informer  (s'),  enquire  about  (de). 

instituteur,  m.,  teacher  (primary). 

institutrice,  /.,  teacher. 

instruire,  instruct,  teach. 

intelligence,  /.,  intelligence;  un- 
derstanding. 

intelligent,  intelligent. 

intention,  /.,  intention. 

interessant,  interesting. 

interesser,  interest. 

interieur,  adj.,  n.  m.,  interior. 

inventer,  invent. 

invitation,  /.,  invitation. 

inviter,  invite. 

irai,  see  aller. 

italien,  Italian. 

ivoire,  m.,  ivory. 


jamais,  ever;  ne  .  .  .  — ,  never, 
jambe,  /.,  leg. 
Janvier,  m.,  January. 
Japon,  m.,  Japan, 
jaquette,  /.,  morning  coat, 
jardin,   m.,   garden,   gardens;  — 
des  plantes,  Botanical  Gardens, 
jaune,  yellow. 


274 


FRENCH-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 


jaunir,  become  yellow. 

je,  j',  I. 

Jean  [50],  m.,  John. 

Jeanne  [sain],/.,  Jane,  Joan(na). 

jeter,  throw,  throw  away. 

jeu,  m.,  game,  play. 

jeudi,  m.,  Thursday. 

jeune,  young. 

joie,  /.,  joy,  gladness,  happiness. 

joindre,  join;  —  les  deux  bouts, 

make  (both)  ends  meet, 
joli,  pretty, 
jouer,  fewe]  play. 
jour,  m.,  day;  de  nos  — s,  in  our 

day(s). 

journal,  m.,  newspaper, 
journee,  /.,  day. 
joyeux,  joyous,  merry, 
juillet  fem'je],  m.,  July, 
juin  [sqe],  m.,  June. 
Julie,  /.,  Julia. 
Julien,  m.,  Julian, 
jupe,  /.,  skirt, 
jusqu'a,  as  far  as,  to,  up  to;  —  a 

ce  que,  until. 


kilogramme,  m.,  kilogram  (about 

2  Ibs.). 
kilometre,  m.,  kilometre  (about  f 

of  a  mile). 


la,  there. 

la-bas,  yonder,  over  there. 

labour,  m.,  ploughing. 

labourer,  plough. 

laboureur,  m.,  ploughman,  hus- 
bandman. 

lac  [lak],  m.,  lake. 

lainage,  m.,  woollen  goods. 

laisser,  leave,  let;  se  —  aller, 
yield. 

lait,  m.,  milk. 

laiterie,  /.,  dairy. 


lampe,  /.,  lamp. 

lancer,  throw,  cast,  toss. 

langue,  /.,  tongue,  language. 

large,  wide,  broad. 

latin,  Latin. 

laver,  wash;  se  — ,  wash  oneself. 

le,  la,  1',  les,  the. 

le,  la,  P,  les,  him,  her,  it,  them. 

lecon,  /.,  lesson. 

lecture,  /.,  reading. 

legume,  m.,  vegetable. 

lendemain,   m.,    day   after,   next 

day. 

lentement,  slowly, 
lequel,  laquelle,  etc.,  who,  which 

(one),  what  (one), 
lettre,  /.,  letter, 
leur,  leurs,  their;  le  — ,  theirs. 
leur,  to  them,  of  them,  them, 
levain,  m.,  leaven,  yeast. 
lever,  raise,  lift  up;  rise;  se  — , 

rise. 

libre,  free. 

lilas  [lila],  m.,  lilac;  adj.,  purple, 
linge,  m.,  linen. 
lion,  m.,  lion. 
lire,  read. 
lit,  m.,  bed. 
livre,  m.,  book, 
livre,  /.,  pound. 
locomotive,  /.,  locomotive. 
loge,  /.,  box  (theatre). 
loi,  /.,  law. 
loin,  far. 
lointain,  distant. 
Loire,  /.,  Loire. 
Londres,  m.,  London. 
long,  long, 
longtemps,  long,   a  long  time,  a 

long  while. 
lorsque,  when. 
Louis,  m.,  Louis,  Lewis. 
Louise,  /.,  Louise,  Louisa, 
lourd,  heavy, 
loutre,  /.,  otter. 
Luc  [lyk],  m.,  Luke. 


FRENCH-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 


275 


Lucie,  /.,  Lucy. 

lui,  to  him,  to  her,  of  him,  of  her, 
him,  her,  he. 

lumiere,  /.,  light. 

lundi,  ra.,  Monday. 

lunettes,/,  pi.,  spectacles,  glasses. 

Luxembourg  [lyksabuir],  ra.,  Lux- 
embourg, a  palace  and  park  in 
Paris. 

Lyon,  ra.,  Lyons. 

M 

M.  contr.  of  Monsieur. 

mac  on,  ra.,  mason. 

madame,  /.,  madam,  Mrs. 

mademoiselle,  /.,  Miss. 

magasin,  ra.,  shop,  store;  courir 
les  — s,  go  shopping,  shop. 

magnifique,  magnificent. 

mai  [me],  ra.,  May. 

main,  /.,  hand. 

maintenant,  now. 

mais,  but;  —  non,  no,  no;  not  at 
all. 

maison,  /.,  house;  a  la  — ,  at 
home,  home. 

maitre,  ra.,  master. 

majorite,  /.,  majority. 

mal,  adv.,  badly;  n.  ra.,  evil,  pain, 
sickness;  —  de  mer,  seasickness; 
faire  — ,  hurt;  se  faire  — ,  hurt 
oneself;  —  a  la  tete,  —  de  tete, 
headache. 

malade,  sick,  ill;  sick  person,  pa- 
tient. 

malheur,  ra.,  misfortune. 

malheureux,  unhappy,  unfortu- 
nate. 

malle,  /.,  trunk. 

maman,  /.,  mamma. 

manche,  /.,  sleeve;  la  Manche,  the 
English  Channel. 

manche tte,  /.,  cuff. 

manger,  eat;  donner  a  —  a,  feed. 

maniere,  /.,  manner,  way. 


manquer,  miss,  be  lacking,  fail;  be 
near. 

marbre,  ra.,  marble. 

Marc-Aurele  [mark  oreil],  ra.,  Mar- 
cus Aurelius,  Roman  emperor 
(A.D.  121-181). 

Marcel,  ra.,  Marcellus. 

marchand,  ra.,  merchant,  dealer. 

marche,  /.,  march. 

marche,  ra.,  market;  (a)  bon  — , 
cheap,  cheaply. 

marcher,  march,  go,  run;  faire  — , 
drive,  work. 

mardi,  ra.,  Tuesday. 

Marguerite,  /.,  Margaret. 

mari,  m.,  husband. 

Marie,/.,  Mary,  Marie,  Maria. 

marier,  marry  (of  parents,  clergy- 
man, etc.)',  se  — ,  get  married. 

marronnier,  ra.,  chestnut. 

mars  [mars],  ra.,  March. 

Marseille,  /.,  Marseilles. 

marteau,  ra.,  hammer. 

materiaux,  ra.  pi.,  materials. 

matin,  ra.,  morning. 

mauvais  [move],  bad. 

me,  m',  me,  to  me. 

mechant,  bad,  naughty,  cross. 

medecin,  ra.,  doctor. 

medecine,  /.,  medicine;  ecole  de 
— ,  medical  school. 

Medicis  (de)  [medisis],  de'  Medici, 
famous  Florentine  family,  of 
which  two  members,  Catherine 
(1519-1589)  and  Marie  (1573- 
1642),  were  queens  of  France. 

meilleur,  adj.,  better,  best. 

meme,  adj.,  same,  self;  lui , 

himself;  as  adv.,  even;  tout  de 
— ,  all  the  same;  quand  — ,  even 
if. 

menage,  ra.,  household,  house- 
keeping; pain  de  — ,  homemade 
bread. 

menagere,  /.,  housewife. 

mener,  lead,  take,  bring. 


276 


FRENCH-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 


menu,  ra.,  menu,  bill  of  fare. 

menuiserie,  /.,  woodwork, 

menuisier,  m.,  joiner,  carpenter. 

mer,  /.,  sea;  port  de  — ,  seaport; 
bord  de  la  — ,  seaside. 

merci,  thanks;  no,  thanks. 

mercredi,  m.,  Wednesday. 

mere,  /.,  mother. 

merite,  m.,  merit. 

merveille,  /.,  wonder;  a  — ,  mar- 
vellously, wonderfully. 

mesdames,  /.  pi.,  ladies  (only  in 


messe, /.,  mass  (religious). 

mesure,  /.,  measure;  a  —  que,  in 
proportion  as. 

metre,  ra.,  metre  (about  40  in.). 

mettre,  put,  place;  se  —  en 
branle,  begin  to  move;  se  —  a 
table,  sit  down  to  dinner  (etc.); 
se  — ,  dress;  mis,  dressed;  se 
—  en  habit,  put  on  dress  coat. 

meuble,  ra.,  piece  of  furniture;  pi., 
furniture. 

meubler,  furnish. 

meunier,  ra.,  miller. 

midi,  m.,  noon;  South. 

miel,  ra.,  honey. 

mien  (le),  mienne  (la),  etc., 
mine. 

mieux,  adv.,  better,  best;  etre  — , 
be  better  (more  comfortable). 

mil,  thousand  (in  dates). 

mille  [mil],  (a)  thousand. 

millier  [milje],  m.,  (a)  thousand  (ap- 
proximately) . 

million  [miljo],  m.,  million. 

mince,  thin. 

minuit,  m.,  midnight. 

minute,  /.,  minute. 

miroir,  m.,  mirror. 

mis,  misse,  see  mettre. 

mise,  /.,  dress. 

Mississipi,  ra.,  Mississippi. 

Mme,  contr.  of  madame. 

mobilier,  m.,  furniture. 


mode,  /.,  fashion ;  a  la  — ,  in  fashion, 
fashionable. 

moderer,  moderate. 

moderne,  modern. 

moi,  me,  to  me,  I. 

moins,  less,  least;  —  bon,  worse; 
a  —  que  .  .  .  ne,  unless;  a  —  de, 
unless,  except;  au  (du)  • — ,  at 
least. 

mois  [mwct],  ra.,  month. 

moisson,  /.,  harvest. 

moissonner,  harvest. 

moissonneur,  ra.,  harvester. 

moissonneuse,  /.,  reaping-ma- 
chine. 

moitie,  /.,  half. 

moment,  ra.,  moment,  time;  au  — • 
ou,  when;  en  ce  — ,  now;  du  — 
que,  as  soon  as. 

mon,  ma,  mes,  my. 

monde,  ra.,  world;  people,  com- 
pany; tout  le  — ,  everybody. 

mont,  m.,  mount;  le  —  Blanc, 
Mt.  Blanc. 

monsieur  [masj0],  m.,  sir,  gentle- 
man, Mr. 

montagne,  /.,  mountain. 

monter,  mount,  ascend,  go  up;  get 
in;  put  up. 

montre,  /.,  watch. 

montrer,  show. 

morceau,  m.,  bit,  piece. 

mort,  /.,  death. 

mort,  see  mourir. 

mot,  m.,  word;  note. 

mouche,  /.,  fly. 

mouchoir,  m.,  handkerchief. 

moudre,  grind  (mill). 

mourir,  die. 

mouton,  m.,  sheep. 

mouvoir,  move,  drive. 

moyen  [mwaje],  m.,  means,  way; 
il  n'y  a  pas  — ,  there  is  no  way. 

municipal,  municipal. 

mur,  m.,  wall. 

mur,  ripe,  mature. 


FRENCH-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 


277 


murir,  ripen, 
musique,  /.,  music, 
musee,  m.,  museum, 
mysterieux,  mysterious. 


H 

nacre,  /.,  mother-of-pearl. 

nager,  swim. 

naitre,  be  born. 

Napoleon,  Napoleon. 

nappe,  /.,  tablecloth  (white} ;  met- 
tre  la  — ,  lay  the  cloth,  set  the 
table. 

navire,  m.,  ship. 

ne,  n',  no,  not;  —  ...  pas,  no,  not; 
n'est-ce  pas?  aren't  you?  etc. 

ne,  see  naitre. 

necessaire,  necessary. 

negligence,  /.,  negligence. 

neige,  /.,  snow. 

neiger,  snow. 

nettoyer,  clean. 

neuf,  new. 

neuf,  nine. 

neurasthenic,  /.,  nervous  exhaus- 
tion. 

neveu,  m.,  nephew. 

ni,  neither,  nor;  ne  .  .  .  —  ...  — , 
neither  .  .  .  nor. 

nid,  m.,  nest. 

niece,  /.,  niece. 

noir,  black. 

noix,  /.,  walnut. 

nombre,  m.,  number. 

nombreux,  numerous. 

nommer,  name,  call;  appoint. 

non,  no,  not. 

nord,  m.,  north. 

normand,  Norman. 

Normandie,  /.,  Normandy. 

notre,  nos,  our. 

Notre-Dame,  /.,  Notre  Dame. 

n6tre  (le),  notre  (la),  etc.,  ours; 
pi.,  our  party,  etc. 

nous,  we,  us,  to  us. 


nouveau,  -el,  new. 

nouvelle,  /.,  news;  also  pi. ;  j'ai  recu 

de  ses  — s,  I  have  heard  from 

him. 

Nouvelle-Orleans,/.,  New  Orleans, 
novembre,  m.,  November. 
noyer,  m.,  walnut. 
nu,  naked,  bare. 
nuance,  [nuxiis]  /.,  shade,  colour, 
nuit,  /.,  night. 


obeir  (a),  obey. 

objet,  m.,  object. 

obligeance,  /.,  kindness. 

obscurite  [opskyrite],  /.,  darkness. 

observation  [opservasjo],  /.,  ob- 
servation. 

observer  [opserve],  observe,  notice. 

obtenir  [optaniir],  obtain. 

occupation,  /.,  occupation. 

occupe,  busy. 

occuper,  occupy,  make  busy;  s' — 
de,  be  busy  with,  see  about,  at- 
tend to. 

octobre,  m.,  October. 

ceil  [ceij],  m.,  eye;  pi.,  yeux  [j0]. 

oeuf  [cef],  m..  egg;  pi.,  oeufs  [0]. 

offrir,  offer. 

oh  [o],  O,  oh. 

oiseau,  m.,  bird. 

oisif,  idle. 

oisivete,  /.,  idleness. 

ombre,  /.,  shade. 

omelette,  /.,  omelet. 

on,  one,  people,  they,  we,  you, 
some  one,  etc. 

oncle,  m.,  uncle. 

ont,  see  avoir. 

onze,  eleven. 

or,  m.,  gold. 

ordinaire,  ordinary. 

ordinairement,  generally. 

ordonnance,  /.,  prescription. 

ordonner,  order,  prescribe. 


278 


FRENCH-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 


orge,  /.,  barley. 

orner,  decorate,  adorn. 

orthographe,/.,  orthography,  spell- 
ing. 

oser,  dare. 

ou,  or. 

oft,  where,  in  which;  d* — ,  whence, 
from  where. 

oublier,  forget. 

ouest  [west],  ra.,  west. 

oui,  yes. 

ours  [urs],  m.,  bear. 

outil  [uti],  m.,  tool. 

outre,  beyond,  in  addition  to;  en 
— ,  also,  moreover. 

ouvert,  see  ouvrir. 

ouvrage,  ra.,  work. 

ouvrier,  ra.,  workman. 

ouvrir,  open;  s* — ,  open. 


paille,  /.,  straw. 

pain,  ra.,  bread;  loaf;  petit  — ,  roll. 

pake,  /.,  pair. 

paix,  /.,  peace. 

palais,  ra.,  palace;  large  (public) 
building;  —  des  singes,  mon- 
key house. 

panier,  m.,  basket. 

papa,  ra.,  papa. 

papier,  ra.,  paper. 

paquebot  [pakbo],  ra.,  packet, 
steamer. 

par,  by,  for,  through,  throughout, 
per,  in. 

paraitre,  appear,  seem. 

pare  [park],  ra.,  park. 

parce  que,  because. 

pardessus  [pardesy],  m.,  overcoat. 

pardon,  ra.,  pardon;  je  vous  de- 
mande  — ,  I  beg  your  pardon. 

pardonner,  pardon,  excuse. 

pareillement,  equally,  also. 

parent,  ra.,  relation,  relative, 
parent. 


paresse,  /.,  laziness. 

paresseux,  lazy. 

Paris,  m.,  Paris. 

parler,  speak,  talk. 

parmi,  among,  amongst. 

parquet,  ra.,  floor. 

part,  /.,  share;  de  ma  — ,  from  me. 

parterre,  ra.,  flower  garden. 

parti,  m.,  party  (political,  etc.). 

partie,  /.,  part;  faire  —  de,  be  part 

of. 
partir,  depart,  leave,  go,  go  away, 

start;  a  —  de,  from  ...  on  (up). 
partout,  everywhere;  —  oft,  where- 

ever. 

parure,  /.,  adornment,  ornament, 
pas,  ra.,  step. 
pas,  not;  ne  .  .  .  — ,  no,  not,  not 

any,  none. 

passage,  ra.,  passage. 
passe,  past,  last;  Pannee  — ,  last 

year, 
passer,  pass,  go,  run;  spend  (time); 

go  by,  disappear;  se  — ,  take 

place,  go  on. 
pastel,  ra.,  pastel, 
pate,  /.,  dough. 
patin,  ra.,  skate. 
patiner,  skate, 
patisserie,  /.,  pastry. 
Paul  [pol],  ra.,  Paul, 
pauvre,  poor, 
payer,   pay,    pay   for;    faire   — , 

charge. 

pays  [pei],  ra.,  country, 
paysage  [peizais],  ra.,  landscape. 
paysan  [peiza],  ra.,  peasant, 
peche,  /.,  fishing. 
peigne,  ra.,  comb, 
peindre,  paint, 
peine,  /.,  trouble;  valoir  (etre)  la 

— ,  be  worth  while, 
peintre,  ra.,  painter. 
peinture,  /.,  painting, 
pendant,    during,    for;    —    que, 

while. 


FRENCH-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 


279 


penser,  think;  be  near. 

perdre,  lose. 

perdrix,  /.,  partridge. 

pere,  ra.,  father;  —  de  famille, 
father  (of  a  family),  citizen. 

perfectionnement,  m.,  improve- 
ment. 

perle,  /.,  pearl. 

permettre,  permit,  allow. 

permission,  /.,  permission. 

personne,  /.,  person;  pi.,  people. 

personne,  anybody;  ne  .  .  .  — ,  no- 
body. 

perte,  /.,  loss. 

petit,  little,  small,  short;  young. 

petrin,  m.,  kneading  trough. 

petrir,  knead. 

petrole,  m.,  petroleum. 

peu,  little,  few;  un  — ,  a  little. 

peur,  /.,  fear;  avoir  — ,  be  afraid, 
fear;  fake  —  a,  frighten;  de  — 
que,  for  fear  that;  de  —  de,  for 
fear  of. 

peut-etre,  perhaps. 

peut,  peux  [p0],  see  pouvoir. 

pharmacien,  m.,  druggist,  chem- 
ist. 

pianiste,  m.  or  /.,  pianist. 

piano,  m.,  piano. 

piece,  /.,  piece,  room;  play;  la  — , 
apiece. 

pied,  m.,  foot;  a  — ,  on  foot. 

pierre,  /.,  stone. 

Pierre,  m.,  Peter. 

pin,  m.,  pine. 

pipe,  /.,  pipe. 

place,  /.,  room,  seat,  place,  posi- 
tion, berth. 

plage,  /.,  beach. 

plaindre,  pity;  se  — ,  complain. 

plaire  a,  please;  se  — ,  be  pleased, 
enjoy  oneself,  like  it;  s'il  vous 
plait,  if  you  please,  please; 
plait-il?  I  beg  your  pardon. 

plaisir,  m.,  pleasure. 

plan,  m.,  plan. 


planche,  /.,  plank,  board. 

plante,  /.,  plant. 

plein,  full;  en  — e  mer,  in  the  open 
sea. 

pleuvoir,  rain. 

plonger,  dive. 

pluie,  /.,  rain. 

plume,  /.,  pen. 

plupart,  /.,  majority,  (the)  most, 
the  most  part. 

plus,  more;  ne  .  .  .  — ,  no  more,  no 
longer,  not  now, 

plusieurs  [plyzjoeir],  several,  a 
good  many. 

poche,  /.,  pocket. 

poeme,  m.,  poem. 

poete,  m.,  poet. 

poire,  /.,  pear. 

poirier,  m.,  pear  tree. 

pois  [pwa],  m.,  pea;  petits  — , 
green  peas. 

poisson,  m.,  fish.  • 

police,  /.,  police. 

pomme,  /.,  apple;  —  de  terre,  po- 
tato. 

pommier,  m.,  apple  tree. 

pont,  m.,  bridge. 

porcelaine,  /.,  porcelain. 

pore,  m.,  pore. 

port,  m.,  port;  wharf. 

porte,  /.,  door. 

porte-monnaie,  m.,  purse. 

porter,  bear,  carry,  wear;  se  — ,  be 
(of  health). 

portrait,  m.,  portrait. 

poser  [poze],  place;  ask  (questions).. 

poste,  /.,  post,  post  office. 

potage,  m.,  soup. 

pouce,  m.,  thumb;  inch. 

poule,  /.,  hen. 

pouls  [pu],  m.,  pulse. 

pour,  prep.}  for,  in  order  to,  to;  en 
avoir  — ,  have  so  much  worth 
of;  —  que,  in  order  to,  so  that, 

pourboire,  m.,  gratuity,  'tip'. 

pourquoi,  why. 


280 


FRENCH-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 


pourrai,  see  pouvoir. 

pourrir,  rot,  decay. 

pourtant,  however. 

pousser,  grow. 

poutre,  /.,  beam. 

pouvoir,  be  able,  can,  may. 

pre,  ra.,  meadow. 

precedent,  preceding. 

precipiter,  hurl;  se  — ,  rush. 

precis,  precise,  exact. 

preferer,  prefer. 

premier,  first. 

premierement,  firstly. 

prendre,  take,  take  away,  catch, 

get,  buy. 

preparatifs,  m.  pi.,  preparation (s). 
preparer,  prepare;  se  — ,  prepare 

(oneself),  get  ready, 
pres  (de),  near,  close  by;  a  peu  — , 

nearly,  almost, 
present,  present;  a  — ,  at  present, 

now.  % 

presque,  almost,  nearly;  —  pas, 

hardly  any. 
presse,  in  haste. 
pret,  ready, 
preter,  lend. 

prier  [prie],  pray,  ask,  beg  (of), 
princesse,  /.,  princess, 
printemps,  m.,  spring, 
pris,  see  prendre. 
prise,  /.,  taking. 
prix,  m.,  price, 
probable,  probable, 
probablement,  probably, 
probleme,  m.,  problem, 
procede,  m.,  process, 
prochain,  next)  Pannee  — e,  next 

year. 

produit,  m.,  product, 
professeur,  m.,  professor,  teacher, 
promenade,  /.,  walk,  drive,  etc. 
promener,  lead  about;  se  — ,  take 

a  walk  (drive,  etc.). 
prononcer,  pronounce. 
prononciation,  /.,  pronunciation. 


propos,  m.,  remark;  3.  —  de  ,  with 
regard  to;  a  — ,  by  the  way. 

propre,  clean. 

proprete,  /.,  cleanliness. 

proprietaire,  m.,  landlord. 

propriete,  /.,  property,  estate. 

prosperite,  /.,  prosperity. 

proteger,  protect. 

proverbe,  m.,  proverb. 

public  [pyblik],  public;  n.  m.. 
public. 

puis,  then,  next,  afterward. 

puis,  puisse,  see  pouvoir. 

puisque  [pin'sko],  since. 

pus,  pusse,  see  pouvoir. 


qualite,  /.,  quality. 

quand,  when,  whenever. 

quant  a,  as  to,  as  for. 

quarante,  forty. 

quart,  m.,  quarter. 

quatre,  four. 

que,  qu',  pron.,  what,  which,  that, 

whom;   qu'est-ce  —    c'est   — 

cela?  what  is  that? 
que,  qu',  conj.,  that,  than,  as;  how! 

ne . . .  — ,  only;  ne  . . .  pas  — ,  not 

only;  je  crois  —  oui,  I  think  so. 
quel,  quelle,  quels,  quelies,  which, 

•  what;  —  que,  whatever, 
quelconque,  some,  some  or  other, 
quelque,  some,  any;  —  ...  que, 

however,  whatever, 
quelqu'un,  some  one,  any  one. 
quelquefois,  sometimes. 
question,  /.,  question. 
qui,  who,  which,  that,  whom;  de 

— ?  whose?  ce  — ,  which,  what; 

—  que,  whoever. 

quinze,  fifteen;  —  jours,  a  fort- 
night;   d'aujourd'hui  en  — ,  a 

fortnight  from  to-day, 
quoi,  what;  —  que,  whatever, 
quoique,  although,  though. 


FRENCH-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 


281 


raconter,  relate,  tell. 

radis,  w.,  radish. 

raison,  /.,  reason;  avoir  — ,  be  (in 
the)  right. 

ramasser,  gather,  pick  up. 

rappeler,  recall;  se  —,  remember. 

rarement,  rarely. 

rassis,  stale  (of  bread). 

ravissant,  charming,  delightful. 

rayon,  m.,  shelf;  department, 
counter. 

realiser,  realize,  effect. 

recemment  [resama],  recently. 

reception,  /.,  reception. 

recevoir,  receive;  etre  recu,  pass 
(at  examinations). 

recolte,  /.,  crop,  harvest. 

reconnaitre,  recognize. 

redingote,  /.,  frock  coat. 

refuser,  refuse;  etre  refuse,  fail 
(at  examinations). 

regarder,  look  (at). 

regime,  m.,  regimen,  diet;  mettre 
au  — ,  put  on  diet. 

regne,  m.,  reign.     . 

reine,  /.,  queen. 

remarquable  [ramarkabl],  remark- 
able. 

remarquer,  remark,  notice,  ob- 
serve. 

remede,  m.,  remedy,  medicine. 

remercier,  thank. 

remettre,  restore;  se  — ,  recover 
(from  illness) ;  remis,  recovered. 

remplacer,  take  the  place  of. 

rencontrer,  meet. 

rendre,  render,  make. 

rentrer,  go  back,  go  (come)  in 
again^  return  home. 

reparer,  repair. 

repondre,  reply,  answer. 

representer,  represent. 

reprocher,  reproach,  tax. 

republican!,  m.,  republican. 


reputation,  /.,  reputation. 

resoudre,  resolve,  solve. 

respecter,  respect. 

ressembler  [rasable],  resemble. 

restaurant,  m.,  restaurant. 

restaurer,  restore. 

rester,  stay,  remain. 

retablir,  restore. 

retard,  m.,  delay;  en  — ,  late. 

retarder,  be  too  slow. 

retraite,  /.,  retreat. 

reussir,  succeed;  pass  (examination), 

reveiller,  waken;  se  — ,  waken. 

revendre,  sell  again. 

revoir,  see  again;  au — ,  good-bye. 

rez-de-chaussee  [retjose],  m.r 
ground  floor. 

rhinoceros  [rinoseros],  m.,  rhino- 
ceros. 

Rhone,  m.,  Rhone. 

rhume,  m.,  cold. 

riche,  rich;  —  d'un  million,  worth 
a  million. 

richement,  richly. 

richesse,  /.,  wealth. 

rideau,  m.,  curtain. 

rien  [rje],  anything;  ne  .  .  .  — > 
nothing,  not  anything. 

rire,  laugh. 

riviere,  /.,  river. 

robe,/.,  dress,  gown;  —  de  cham- 
bre,  dressing-gown. 

roi  [rwa],  m.,  king. 

role,  m.,  role,  part. 

roman,  m.,  novel. 

rose,  /.,  rose. 

rdti  [roti],  m.,  roast. 

rotir  [rotiir],  roast. 

rouge,  red. 

rouler,  roll. 

roulis,  m.,  rolling  (of  ship). 

route,  /.,  road;  en  — ,  on  the  way. 

rude,  harsh,  severe. 

rue,  /.,  street. 

rugissement,  m.,  roar. 

ruisseau,  m.,  brook,  stream. 


282 


FRENCH-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 


sac  [sak],  w.,  sack,  bag. 

sache,  see  savoir. 

sage,  well-behaved,  good. 

sain,  healthy,  sound. 

saint,  m.,  Saint. 

Saint-Laurent,  m.,  St.  Lawrence. 

sais  [se],  see  savoir. 

saisir,  seize. 

saison,  /.,  season. 

salade,  /.,  salad. 

salle,  /.,  hall,  room;  —  de  classe, 
classroom;  —  a  manger,  din- 
ing-room; —  de  bains,  bath- 
room. 

salon,  m.,  drawing-room,  par- 
lour; —  (salle)  de  lecture,  read- 
ing room. 

saluer,  salute,  bow  to,  take  one's 
hat  off  to. 

sans,  without. 

sante,  /.,  health. 

sapin,  m.,  fir,  spruce. 

sardine,  /.,  sardine. 

sauf  [soif],  safe. 

saurai,  see  savoir. 

sauter,  jump,  leap. 

sauvage,  wild. 

savoir,  know,  know  how  to;  faire 
— ,  let  one  know;  on  ne  saurait, 
one  cannot. 

savon,  m.,  soap. 

scene,  /.,  scene. 

scierie  [siri],  /.,  saw  mill. 

sculpter  [skylte],  carve. 

se,  s',  oneself,  himself,  herself, 
themselves. 

seau  [so],  m.,  pail 

sec  [sek],  dry. 

secouer,  shake. 

Seine,  /.,  Seine. 

sejour,  m.,  stay. 

selon,  according  to. 

semaine,  /.,  week. 

semblable,  similar,  alike,  like. 


sembler,  seem,  appear, 

semer,  sow. 

senat,  m.,  senate. 

sentier,  m.,  path. 

sentir,  feel,  smell;  se  — ,  feel 
(health). 

separer,  separate. 

sept  [set],  seven. 

septembre  [septaibr],  m.,  Septem- 
ber. 

serai,  see  etre. 

serieux,  serious. 

serrer,  press;  put  away;  se  —  la 
main,  shake  hands. 

servante,  /.,  servant. 

service,  m.,  service. 

serviette,  /.,  towel,  napkin. 

servir,  serve;  —  a,  be 'of  use  for; 
se  —  de,  make  use  of. 

seul,  alone,  only. 

settlement,  only. 

Sevres,  m.,  Sevres,  a  town  some 
five  miles  w.  of  Paris  where 
there  is  a  government  porcelain 
manufactory. 

si,  if,  whether. 

si,  so,  such;  however;  yes  (em- 
phatic) ;  mais  — ,  yes,  it  would. 

siecle,  m.,  century. 

siege,  m.,  seat,  chair. 

sien  (le),  sienne  (la),  etc.,  his,  hers, 
its. 

siffler,  whistle. 

signe,  m.,  sign. 

simple,  simple,  plain. 

singe,  m.,  monkey. 

sinon,  if  not,  otherwise. 

situe,  situated. 

six  [sis],  six. 

soeur,  /.,  sister. 

soie,  /.,  silk. 

soieries,  /.  pi.,  silks. 

soif  [swaf],  /.,  thirst;  avoir  — ,  be 
thirsty;  mourir  de  — ,  be  very 
thirsty. 

soigner,  take  care  of. 


FRENCH-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 


283 


soigneusement,  carefully, 
soir,  ra.,  evening,  afternoon, 
soiree,  /.,  evening,  evening  party; 

—  dansante,  dancing  party, 
sois,  see  etre. 

soit  que,  whether. 

soixante  [swasait],  sixty. 

soleil,  ra.,  sun. 

sommes,  see  etre. 

son,  sa,  ses,  his,  her,  its,  one's. 

sonner,  ring. 

sont,  see  etre. 

Sorbonne,  /.,  Sorbonne  (founded 
A.D.  1257),  now  part  of  the  Uni- 
versity of  Paris. 

sorte,  /.,  sort,  kind;  de  —  que,  so 
that,  in  order  that. 

sortie,  /.,  going  out,  leaving. 

sortir,  go  out,  come  out;  bring  out, 
take  out. 

sou,  ra.,  cent,  halfpenny. 

souffler,  blow. 

souffrant,  ailing,  not  very  well. 

souffrir,  suffer,  endure. 

soulier,  ra.,  shoe. 

source,  /.,  spring. 

souvenir  (se),  remember. 

sous,  under,  beneath,  below,  in. 

souvent,  often. 

soyons,  see  etre. 

sport  [spoir],  ra.,  sport. 

station,  /.,  station,  stand;  resort; 

—  d'ete,  summer  resort, 
statue,  /.,  statue. 

store,  ra.,  (window)  blind. 

succes,  ra.,  success. 

sucre,  ra.,  sugar. 

sud  [syd],  ra.,  south. 

suffire,  suffice. 

suffisant,  conceited. 

snis,  see  etre. 

suite,  /.,  sequel,  what  follows,  con- 
tinuation ;  tout  de — ,  immediate- 
ly, at  once. 

suivant,  following. 

suivre,  follow. 


sujet,  m.,  subject. 

superbe,  superb,  very  fine. 

superieur,  upper. 

sur,  on,  upon. 

surface,  /.,  surface. 

surtout,    above   all,   particularly. 

especially, 
surveiller,  oversee. 


table,  /.,  table. 

tableau,  ra.,  picture;  —  noir, 
blackboard. 

tache,  /.,  task. 

tacher,  try. 

taille,  /.,  cutting;  pierre  de — ,  free- 
stone. 

tailleur,  ra.,  tailor. 

tambour,  ra.,  drum. 

Tamise,  /.,  Thames. 

tandis  que  [tadi  or  tadis  ka],  whilst. 

tant,  so  much,  so  many;  —  que,  as 
long  as;  —  mieux,  so  much  the 
better,  I  am  glad  to  hear  it. 

tante,  /.,  aunt. 

tapis,  m.,  carpet;  tablecloth  (col- 
oured) . 

tapisserie,  /.,  tapestry. 

taquiner,  tease. 

tard,  late;  plus  — ,  later,  after- 
wards. 

tartine,  /.,  slice;  —  de  beurre,  slice 
of  bread  and  butter. 

tasse,  /.,  cup. 

tater,  feel. 

te,  t',  thee,  to  thee,  you,  to  you. 

telegraphier,  telegraph. 

telephoner,  telephone. 

tel,  telle,  tels,  telles,  such  (a). 

tellement,  so,  so  much. 

temperature,  /.,  temperature. 

temps,  ra.,  time;  weather;  a  — 
pour,  in  time  to;  de  —  en  — , 
now  and  then. 

tendre,  tender. 


284 


FRENCH-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 


tenir,  hold,  keep;  —  de,  take  after. 

tente,  /.,  tent. 

terminer,  end,  finish,  complete. 

terrain,  m.,  ground,  lot. 

terre,  /..  earth,  land. 

terrible,  terrible. 

tete,  /.,  head. 

the,  m.,  tea. 

theatre,  m.,  theatre. 

thermometre,  m.,  thermometer. 

tien  (le),  tienne  (la),  etc.,  thine, 

yours. 

timide,  timid, 
tirer,  draw,  derive;   milk  (cows)', 

put  out  (of  tongue). 
tiroir,  m.,  drawer, 
toi,  thee,  to  thee,  thou,  you,  to 

you. 

toilette,  /.,  toilet;  dressing  table; 
faire  sa  — ,  dress;  —  de  bal,  — 
de  soiree,  evening  dress  (ladies). 
toit,  m.,  roof, 
tomber,  fall. 
ton,  ta,  tes,  thy,  your, 
torrent,  m.,  torrent,  stream. 
tort,  m.,  wrong;  avoir  — ,  be  (in  the) 

wrong. 
t6t,  soon. 
toucher,  touch;  —  a,  come  close 

to,  meddle  with, 
tou jours,  always,  still,  yet. 
toupie, /.,  top  (plaything). 
tousser,  cough. 

tout,  all,  every  (thing),  every  one; 
tous  les  ans,  every  year;  —  ce 
que,  whatever;  pas  du  — ,  not  at 
all;  adv.,  quite;  however, 
traduire,  translate. 
train,  m.,  train;  en  —  de,  busy 

at. 

traire,  milk, 
traineau,  m.,  sleigh, 
tramway  [tramwe],  m.,  tramway, 

tram  (car). 

tranquille  [trokil],  tranquil,  quiet, 
peaceful. 


transpirer,  perspire. 

transporter,  transport,  carry, 
bring. 

travail,  m.,  work;  table  de  — , 
study  table. 

travailler,  work. 

travers  (a),  through. 

traversee,  /.,  crossing;  passage, 
voyage. 

traverser,  cross,  run  across 
(through). 

trentaine,  /.,  about  thirty. 

trente,  thirty. 

tres,  very. 

tressaillir,  start,  jump,  tremble. 

trois  [trwa],  three. 

troisiemement,  thirdly. 

tromper,  deceive,  cheat,  beguile; 
se  — ,  make  a  mistake,  be  mis- 
taken; si  je  ne  me  trompe,  if  I 
am  not  mistaken. 

trop  [tro  or  tro],  too,  too  much, 
too  many. 

trottoir,  m.,  sidewalk,  pavement. 

trou,  m.,  hole. 

trouver,  find,  have;  think;  com- 
ment trouvez-vous  cela?  what  do 
you  think  of  that?  se  — ,  be. 

truite,  /.,  trout. 

tu,  thou,  you. 

tuer  [tiie],  kill;  se  — ,  kill  oneself, 
be  killed. 

tuile,  /.,  tile  (for  roof). 

Tuileries,  /.  pi,  Tuileries  (lit. 
'tile-field'),  a  royal  palace  in 
Paris,  destroyed  in  1871,  of 
which  the  gardens  still  exist. 

U 

un,  une,  a,  an,  one. 
universite,  /.,  university, 
urne,  /.,  urn,  ballot  box. 
ustensile,  m.,  utensil. 
utile,  useful. 
utiliser,  utilize. 


FRENCH-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 


285 


va,  vas,  see  aller. 

vache,  /.,  cow. 

vais,  see  aller. 

vaisseau,  ra.,  vessel,  ship. 

vaisselle,  /.,  dishes. 

valise,  /.,  valise. 

valoir,    be    worth,    be    good;   — 

mieux,  be  better;  ne  —  rien,  be 

no  good, 
vapeur,  /.,  steam;  bateau  a  — , 

steamer,  steamboat, 
vase,  ra.,  vase, 
vaste,  vast,  large, 
vaudrai,  see  valoir. 
veau,  ra.,  calf;  veal, 
veille,  /.,  day  (evening)  before, 
vendre,  sell;  se  — ,  sell,  be  sold, 
vendredi,  ra.,  Friday, 
venir,  come;  —  a,  happen  to;  — 

de,  have  just;  faire  — ,  send  for. 
vent,  ra.,  wind;  il  fait  du  — ,  it  is 

windy. 

venu,  see  venir. 
Venus  [venys],  /.,  Venus, 
ver,  ra.,  worm;  —  a    sole,  silk- 
worm. 

verger,  ra.,  orchard, 
verre,  ra.,  glass. 
verrerie,  /.,  glassware. 
vers,  towards;  about  (of  time). 
vers,  ra.,  verse,  line  (of  poetry). 
verset,  ra.,  verse  (of  Bible). 
vert,  green. 

veston,  ra.,  sack  coat,  sacque. 
vetement,  ra.,  garment;  suit;  pi., 

clothes, 
veuillez  (see  vouloir),  be  so  kind 

as  to. 

veux,  veut,  see  vouloir. 
viande,  /.,  meat. 
vice,  m.,  vi.se. 
vie,/.,  life;  living, 
vieillesse,  /.,  old  age. 
viens  [vje],  see  venir. 


vieux,  vieil  [vj0,  vjeij],  old. 

village,  [vilas]  ra.,  village. 

ville  [vil],  /.,  city,  town;  a  la — ,  in 

(the)  town. 
vin,  ra.,  wine, 
vingt  [ve],  twenty, 
vingtaine,  /.,  about  twenty,  score, 
violent,  violent, 
visit e,  /.,   visit;   en  — ,   visiting; 

faire  —  a,  visit. 
visiter,  visit,  inspect,  examine, 
vite,  quickly,  fast. 
Vitesse,  /.,  speed, 
vivant,  ra.,  living  person;  bon  — , 

'jolly  fellow.' 
vivre,  live,  exist. 
voici,  see  here,  here  is,  here  are, 

this  is. 
voila,  see  there,  there  is,  there  are, 

here  is,  this  is,  that  is;  nous  — , 

here  we  are. 
voir,  see;  se  — ,  be  seen;  faire  — , 

show;  venir  — ,   come  to  see; 

aller  — ,  go  to  see,  visit. 
voisin,  -e,  ra.,  /.,  neighbour, 
voiture,  /.,  carriage. 
voix,  /.,  voice, 
volaille,  /.,  poultry, 
voler,  fly. 
voler,  steal, 
voleur,  ra.,  thief, 
volume,  ra.,  volume, 
vont,  see  aller. 
vote,  ra.,  voting, 
voter,  vote, 
votre,  vos,  your. 

votre  (le),  v6tre  (la),  etc.,  yours, 
vouloir,  will,  wish,  want;  je  veux 

bien,   very   well,   all  right;   je 

voudrais  (bien),  I  should  like; 

en  —  a,  have  a  grudge  against; 

que  voulez-vous  (que  j'y  fasse)? 

what  can  you  expect?  what  can 

be  done  about  it? 
vous,  you,  to  you. 
voyage,  ra.,  journey,  trip. 


286       FRENCH-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 

voyager,  travel. 
vrai,  adj.,  adv.,  true,  truly. 

vu,  see  voir.  y,  there,  in  it,  at  it,  in  them,  etc.; 

™  il  —  a,  there  is,  there  are;  ago; 

il  —  en  a,  there  is  (are)  some, 
wagon-lit,  m.,  sleeping  car.  yeux  [j0],  see  osil. 


ENGLISH-FRENCH  VOCABULARY 


h  aspirate  is  indicated  thus:  'h. 


a,  an,  un,  m.,  une,  /. 
able,  be  — ,  pouvoir. 
about,  environ,  vers,  &  peu 
autour  de;  think  — ,  penser  a; 
speak  — ,  parler  de. 
absence,  absence,  /. 
abundant,  abondant. 
accept,  accepter, 
accident,  accident,  ra. 
accompany,  accompagner. 
according  to,  selon. 
account,  on  —  of,  a  cause  de. 
accustomed,  accoutume,  habitue, 
ache,  n.j  mal,  m.,  douleur,  /. 
ache,  v.,  faire  mal,  avoir  mal;  my 

head  aches,  j'ai  mal  a  la  tete. 
acquaintance,  connaissance,  /. 
acquainted,  be  —  with,  connaitre. 
addition,   addition,  /.;   in  —  to, 

outre. 

admire,  admirer, 
admission,  entree,  /. 
adorn,  orner,  decorer. 
adornment,  parure,  /. 
advance,  avancer. 
advice,  conseil(s),  m. 
advise,  conseiller. 
affair,  affaire,  /.    • 
afraid,  be  — ,  avoir  peur,  craindre; 

be  much  — ,  avoir  grand'-  (bien) 

peur,  craindre  beaucoup. 
after,  apres;  apres  que;  —  some 

tune,  au  bout  de  quelque  temps. 
afternoon,  apres-midi,  m.  or  f. 
afterwards,  apres,  puis,  ensuite. 


again,  encore  (une  fois). 

age,  age,  m. 

ago,  il  y  a,  voila  .  .  .  que. 

agreeable,  agreable. 

agreeably,  agreablement. 

agricultural,  agricole. 

ailing,  be—,  souffrir,  etre  souffrant. 

air,  air,  m. 

Alexander,  Alexandre. 

algebra,  algebre,  /. 

Alice,  Alice. 

alike,  semblable. 

all,  tout,  tous,  toute(s);  —  that, 

tout  ce  qui  (que). 
allow,  permettre. 
almost,  presque,  environ,  pres  de; 

—  fall,  manquer  de  tomber. 
alone,  seul. 

already,  deja. 

also,  aussi,  pareillement. 

although,  bien  que,  quoique. 

always,  tou jours. 

America,  Amerique,  /.;  North  — , 

F  Amerique  du  Nord;  South  — , 

1J  Amerique  du  Sud. 
American,  americam. 
amiable,  aimable. 
among,  parmi. 
amuse,  amuser;  —  oneself,  s'amu- 

ser. 

amusement,  amusement,  m. 
amusing,  amusant. 
ancestor,  ancetre,  m.  or  f. 
ancient,  ancien. 
and,  et. 
angry,  fache,  en  colere;  be  (get) 

—  at,  se  facher  contre. 


287 


288 


ENGLISH-FRENCH  VOCABULARY 


animal,  animal,  w.,  be"te,  /. 

animated,  anime. 

annoy,  ennuyer. 

another,    un    autre,    encore    un 

(autre),  un  deuxieme. 
answer,  repondre,  repliquer. 
anvil,  enclume, /. 
anxious,  inquiet;  be  —  to,  tenir 

beaucoup  a;  desirer  beaucoup. 
any,  du,  etc.;  quelconque;  en; — of 

them,  en. 
anybody,  quelqu'un;  not  .  .  .  — , 

ne  .  .  .  personne. 
anything,  quelque  chose;  not  .  .  . 

— ,  ne  .  .  .  rien. 
apiece,  la  piece, 
appear,  paraitre. 
appetite,  appetit,  m. 
apple,  pomme,  /.;  —  tree,  pom- 

mier,  m. 

apply,  s'adresser. 
appoint,  nommer. 
approach,  s'approcher  (de). 
approve,  approuver. 
architect,  architecte,  m. 
ardour,  ardeur,  /. 
are,  see  be. 
arm,  bras,  m. 
armchair,  fauteuil,  m. 
army,  armee,  /. 
around,  autour  de. 
arrange,  arranger, 
arrival,  arrivee,  /. 
arrive,  arriver. 
article,  article,  m.,  objet,  m. 
artist,  artiste,  m.  or  f. 
as,  comme,  puisque,  aussi,  si,  que; 
-  well  — ,  aussi  bien  que;  — 

for,  quant  a;  —  much  — ,  autant 

que. 
ask,   demander  (a),   prier;   —  a 

question,     poser     (faire)     une 

question;  he  has   only  to  — , 

il  n'a  qu'a  demander;  —  after, 

s'informer  de;  —  for,  demander; 

—  of  one  another,  se  demander. 


asparagus,  asperges,  /.  pi. 
astonished,  etonne,  surpris. 
at,  a;  chez;  not  —  all,  pas  du  tout 
Atlantic,  Atlantique,  m.  or  f. 
attend,  assist er  a. 
attention,  attention,  /. ;  call  —  to, 
appeler  (attirer)  F  attention  sur. 
attract,  attirer. 
August,  aout,  m. 
aunt,  tante,  /. 
author,  auteur,  m.  or  f. 
automobile,  automobile,  m.  or  f. 
autumn,  automne,  m.  or  f. 
avoid,  eviter. 
axe,  'hache,  /. 


back,  fond,  m. ;  dos,  m. ;  be  — ,  etre 

de  retour. 
bad,    mauvais;   be    —    weather, 

faire  mauvais  (temps). 
badly,  mal. 

baggage,  bagages,  m.  pi. 
bake,  cuire,  faire  cuire. 
baker,  boulanger,  m. 
baking,  cuisson,  /. 
ball,  bal,  m. 
ballot,  — •  box,  urne,  /.;  —  paper, 

bulletin  (m.)  de  vote, 
bank,  banque,  /. 
barber,  coiffeur,  m. 
bare,  nu. 
barley,  orge,  /. 
barn,  grange,  /.;  — yard,   basse- 

cour,  /. 

basket,  panier,  m. 
Bastille,  Bastille,  /. 
bath,  bain,  m.;  — room,  salle  (/.) 

de  bains. 

bathe,  se  baigner. 
bay,  baie,  /. 
be,  sign  of  the   progressive  form 

untranslated  in  French;  etre,  se 

porter,   aller,  y  avoir,  se  trou- 

ver,  faire  (of  weather),  devoir;  we 


ENGLISH-FRENCH  VOCABULARY 


289 


are  to  stay,  nous  devons  rester; 

—  better,  valoir  inieux. 
beach,  plage,  /. 
beam,  poutre,  /. 
bear,  ours,  ra.;  —  pit,  fosse  (/.) 

aux  ours, 
beast,  bete,  /. 
beat,  battre. 
beautiful,  beau, 
beauty,  beaute,  /. 
beaver,  castor,  m. 
because,    parce  que;  —  of  that,  a 

cause  de  cela. 
become,  aller,  convenir;  devenir; 

what  has  —  of  her?,  qu'est-elle 

devenue? 

bed,  lit,    m.;    — room,    chambre 
(/.)    a    Voucher;   go  to  — ,   se 
coucher. 

bee,  abeille, /. 
beechnut,  faine,  /. 
beef,  bceuf,  m. 

before,   devant  (of  place),  avant 

(of  time) ;  auparavant;  avant  de, 

avant  que. 

beforehand,  d'avance. 
beg,  prier,  demander;  I  —  of  you, 

je  vous  (en)  prie. 
begin,  commencer. 
beguile,  tromper. 
behind,  derriere. 
believe,  croire. 
belong,  etre  a,  appartenir  a. 
beside,  pres  de,  a  cote  de. 
best,    adj.,    le   meilleur;    adv.,    le 

mieux. 

better,  adj.,  meilleur;  adv.,  mieux. 
between,  entre. 
Bible,  Bible,  /. 
bicycle,  bicyclette,  /.;  on  a  — ,  a 

bicyclette. 

bicyclist,  bicycliste,  m.  or  f. 
bid,  —  good  morning,  dire  bon- 

jour. 

big,  gros. 
bird,  oiseau,  m. 


biscuit,  biscuit,  m. 

black,  noir. 

blackboard,  tableau  (m.)  noir. 

blacksmith,  forgeron,  m. 

bloom,  fleur,  /.;  be  in  — ,  £tre  en 

fleur(s). 

blossom,  n.,  fleur,  /. 
blossom,  v.,  fleurir. 
blow,  n.,  coup,  m. 
blow,  v.,  souffler. 
blue,  bleu. 
board,  planche,  /.;  go  on —  (ship), 

s'embarquer;  go   on  —  (train), 

monter. 
boat,  bateau,  m.;  go  boating,  se 

promener  en  bateau. 
bodice,  corsage,  m. 
body,  corps,  m. 
book,  livre,  m. 
bookcase,  bibliotheque,  /. 
bore,.ennuyer. 
born,  be  — ,  naitre;  he  was  — ,  il 

est  ne,  il  naquit. 
borrow,     emprunter;    —     from, 

emprunter  a. 
Boston,  Boston,  m. 
Botanical,  —  Gardens,  jardin  (m.) 

des  plantes. 
both,  (tous)   les   deux,    Fun    (et) 

Pautre. 

bouquet,  bouquet,  m. 
bow    (to),     saluer;    —    to    each 

other,  se  saluer. 
box,    boite,    /.;    pasteboard    — , 

carton,  m.;  (theatre)  loge, /. 
boy,  enfant,  m.,  gargon,  m. 
branch,  branche,  /. 
brave,  brave,  courageux. 
bread,  pain,  m. 
break,  casser. 
breakfast,  dejeuner,  m. 
brick,  brique,  /. 
bridge,  pont,  m. 

bring,  apporter,     amener,     trans- 
porter. 
broad,  large. 


290 


ENGLISH-FRENCH  VOCABULARY 


brother,  frere,  m. ; in-law,  beau- 

frere. 

brush,  n.,  brosse,  /. 
brush,  v.,  brosser. 
build,  batir,  construire,  faire. 
building,   construction,    /.,    bati- 

ment,  m. 
bunch,  botte,  /. 
bureau,  commode,  /. 
burn,  bruler. 
burning,  ardent, 
business,  affaires,  /.  pi. ;  —  man, 

homme  d'affaires, 
busy,  occupe*;  en  train  de. 
but,  mais;  que;  ne  .  .  .  que. 
butter,  beurre,  m. 
button,  bouton,  m.;  — hole,  bou- 

tonniere,  /. 

buy,  acheter;  —  oneself,  s'acheter. 
by,  par,  de;  sur;  en. 


cabbage,  chou,  m. 

cabinet-maker,  ebeniste,  m. 

cafe,  cafe,  m. 

cake,  gateau,  m. 

calculate,  calculer. 

call,   appeler;  attirer;  be  called, 

s'appeler;  what  do  you  —  that? 

comment  appelez-vous  cela? 
camel,  chameau,  m. 
can,  pouvoir,  savoir. 
Canada,  Canada,  m. 
Canadian,  canadien. 
candidate,  candidat,  m. 
candle,  (tallow)  chandelle,/.,  (wax) 

bougie,  /. 

candy,  bonbons,  m.  pi. 
cane,  canne,  /. 
capital,  capitale, /. 
captain,  capitaine. 
capture,  prise,  /. 
care,  soin,  m.;  —  for,  soigner;  I 

don't  — ,  cela  m'est  e*gal;  take 

— ,  prendre  garde;  avoir  som. 


carefully,  soigneusement. 
carelessness,  negligence,  /. 
carpenter,  charpentier,  m.,  menui- 

sier,  m. 

carpet,  tapis,  m. 
carriage,  voiture,  /. 
carrot,  carotte,  /. 
carry,  porter,  transporter;  —  off, 

emporter;    —   the    day,    Fern- 
porter. 

carve,  sculpter. 
case,  cas,  m. 
casino,  casino,  m. 
casket,  coffret,  m. 
cast,    jeter,    de*poser;    (of  metals) 

fondre. 

cast  iron,  fonte,  /. 
castle,  chateau,  m. 
cat,  chat,  m. 
catch,  attraper,  prendre;  get  (be) 

caught,   se  laisser   prendre,    se 

faire  prendre. 
cause,  n.,  cause,  /. 
cause,  v.,  faire. 
caviare,  caviar (e),  m. 
celebrated,  celebre,  fameux. 
celebration,  fete,  /. 
Celestine,  Celestine. 
cellar,  cave,  /. 

cent,  sou,  m.,  cinq  centimes,  m. 
centime,  centime,  m. 
centimetre,  centimetre,  m. 
century,  siecle,  m. 
certain,  certain, 
certainly,      certainement,      sure- 

ment. 
chair,  chaise,  /.,  siege,  m.,  fauteuil, 

m. 

chalk,  craie,  /. 
change,  changer  (de). 
Channel,  English  — ,  la  Manche, 
chapter,  chapitre,  m. 
charge,  faire  payer. 
Charles,  Charles. 
charming,  charmant,  ravissant. 
chat,  causer. 


ENGLISH-FRENCH  VOCABULARY 


291 


cheap,  (a)  bon  marche*;  cheaper, 

a  meilleur  marche*. 
cheaply,  (a)  bon  marche". 
cheese,  fromage,  m. 
chemist,  pharmacien,  m. 
Cherbourg,  Cherbourg,  m. 
cherry,  cerise,  /. 
chestnut,  marronnier,  m. 
Chicago,  Chicago,  m. 
child,  enfant,  m.  or  f. 
choose,  choisir. 
Christmas,  Noel,  m.;  —  day,  le 

jour  de  Noel, 
church,  eglise,  /. 
churn,  n.,  baratte,  /. 
churn,  t;.,  battre  le  beurre. 
citizen,  citoyen,  m. 
city,  ville,  /. 

civilization,  civilisation,  /. 
clap,  battre;  —  hands,  battre  des 

mains. 

Clara,  Claire,  Clara, 
class,  classe,  /.;  — room,  classe, 

/.,  salle  (/.)  declasse, 
clean,  adj.,  propre. 
clean,  v.,  nettoyer. 
cleanliness,  proprete,  /. 
clear,  adj.,  clair. 
clear,  v.,  de"fricher. 
clerk,  employe,  m.,  commis,  m. 
clever,  habile. 
cleverly,  habilement. 
climate,  climat,  m. 
close,  fermer. 
cloth,  etoffe,  /.,  drap,  m. 
clothes,  habits,  m.  pi.,  vetements, 

m.  pi. 

coachman,  cocher,  m. 
coal,  charbon,  m. 
coal-oil,  petrole,  m. 
coat,  habit,  m. 
cocoon,  cocon,  m. 
coffee,    cafe",   m.;  —  and    (with) 

milk,  cafe  au  lait;  —  cup,  tasse 

(/.)  a  cafe. 
cold,  adj.,   froid;   n.t  rhume,  m.; 


catch  — ,  s'enrhumer;  be  — ,  (of 

weather)  faire   froid,   (of  living 

beings)  avoir  froid. 
collar,  col,  m.;  (detachable)  faux 

col,  m. 

college,  college,  m. 
collision,  collision,  /. 
colonel,  colonel,  m. 
comb,  peigne,  m. 
come,  venir,  arriver;  —  out,  sortir; 

— home,  rentrer ; — in,  entrer ;  — 

and  (to)  see,  venir  voir;  —  near, 

approcher,   s'approcher;   come! 

voyons!  —  with,    venir    avec, 

accompagner. 
comfort,  confort,  m. 
comfortable,  be  — ,  etre  bien,  etre 

confortable. 
commit,  commettre. 
comparison,  comparaison,  /. 
compartment,  compartiment,  m. 
complain,  se  plaindre. 
complete,  terminer,  achever. 
completely,  completement,  tout  £ 

fait. 

composition,  composition,  /. 
comrade,  camarade,  m.  or  f. 
conceited,  suffisant. 
conceive,  imaginer. 
concert,  concert,  m. 
condition,  etat,  m.,  condition,  /. 
conduct,  n.,  conduite,  /. 
conduct  oneself,  se  conduire. 
confess,  avouer. 
conquest,  conquete,  /. 
consequently,  par  consequent. 
considerable,  considerable. 
constantly,  const amment. 
consumption,  consommation,  /c 
contain,  contenir. 
contented,  content,  satisfait. 
continue,  continuer. 
cook,  n.,  cuisiniere,  /. 
cook,  v.,  cuire,  faire  cuire. 
cool,  frais. 
copper,  cuivre,  m. 


292 


ENGLISH-FRENCH  VOCABULARY 


coral,  corail,  m. 

correct,  corriger. 

cost,  couter. 

cough,  tousser. 

could,  pouvais,    pourrais;    I    — 

have,  j'aurais  pu. 
councillor,  conseiller,  m. 
count,  compter. 
countess,  comtesse. 
country,  pays,  m.,  campagne,  /.; 

—  people,  paysans;  —  man,  pay- 

san;  —  woman,  paysanne. 
courage,  courage,  m. 
court,  courtyard,  cour,  /. 
cousin,  cousin,  m.,  cousine,  /. 
'cover,'  n.,  couvert,  m. 
cover,  v.,  couvrir. 
cow,  vache. 
Cro3sus,  Cresus. 
crop,  n.,  recolte,  /.,  moisson,  /. 
crop,  v.,  brouter. 
cross,  adj.,  mechant. 
cross,  v.,  traverser. 
cruel,  cruel, 
cuff,  manchette,  /. 
cup,  tasse,  /. 
cupboard,  armoire,  /. 
curtain,  rideau,  m. 
customer,  client,  m. 
cut,  cutting,  n.,  coupe,  /.,  taille,  /. 
cut,  v.,  couper,  tailler;  —  down, 

couper. 


dairy,  laiterie,  /. 

damp,  humide. 

dance,  danser;  dancing  party, 
soiree  dansante. 

dare,  oser. 

dark,  obscur;  it  is  — ,  il  fait  obscur. 

darkness,  obscurite,  /. 

date,  date,  /. 

daughter,  fille,  /. 

day,  jour,  m.,  journee,/.;  every — , 
tous  les  jours;  in  our  — ,  de  nos 
jours;  all  — ,  toute  la  journee. 


deal,  a  great  (good)  — ,  beaucoup, 

dealer,  marchand,  m. 

dear,  adj.,  adv.,  cher. 

death,  mort,  /. 

decay,  pourrir. 

deceive,  tromper. 

December,  decembre,  m. 

decorate,  decorer,  orner. 

decoration,  decoration,  /. 

delighted,  enchante. 

deliver  (a  lecture),  faire. 

department,  rayon,  m. 

depend,  dependre. 

deposit,  deposer. 

derive,  tirer. 

describe,  decrire. 

desire,  desirer. 

dessert,  dessert,  m. 

dictionary,  dictionnaire,  m. 

die,  mourir;  he  died,  il  est  mort,  il 
mourut. 

diet,  regime,  m.',  prescribe  a  — , 
mettre  au  regime. 

difference,  difference,  /.;  that 
makes  no  — ,  cela  ne  fait  rien. 

different,  different. 

difficult,  difficile. 

difficulty,  difficulte,  /. 

diligent,  diligent. 

dine,  diner. 

dining  room,  salle  (/.)  a  manger. 

dinner,  diner,  m. 

discover,  decouvrir. 

dish,  plat,  m. ;  dishes,  vaisselle,  /. 

distant,  lointain. 

disturb,  deranger. 

dive,  plonger. 

do,  sign  of  emphatic  form,  untrans- 
lated in  French;  faire,  rendre; 
be  done,  se  faire. 

doctor,  medecin,  m.,  docteur,  m. 

dog,  chien,  m. 

dollar,  dollar,  m.,  piastre,  /. 

door,  porte,  /. 

doubt,  douter  (de). 

dough,  pate,  /. 


ENGLISH-FRENCH  VOCABULARY 


293 


downstairs,  en  bas;  go  — ,   des- 

cendre  (Fescalier). 
dozen,  douzaine,  /. 
draw  near,  s'approcher  (de). 
drawer,  tiroir,  m. 
drawing-room,  salon,  m. 
dress,  n.,  mise,  /.;  robe,  /. 
dress,  v.,  faire  sa  toilette;  s'habil- 

ler,  se  mettre. 
dressed,  mis,  habille. 
dress  coat,  habit,  m. 
dressing  table,  toilette,  /. 
dressmaker,  couturiere,  /. 
drink,  boire. 
drive,  n.,  promenade  (/.)  en  voi- 

ture;  go  for  a  — ,  (aller)  se  pro- 

mener  en  voiture. 
drive,  v.,  se  promener  en  voiture, 

aller  en  voiture. 
drop,  laisser  tomber. 
drum,  tambour,  m. 
dry,  sec. 

duck,  canard,  m. 
during,  pendant, 
duty,  devoir,  m. 
dwelling,  habitation,  /. 

E 

each,  chaque,  chacun,  tout,  tous 
les;  —  other,  Fun  (a)  Fautre. 

eager,  desirer  beaucoup,  tenir 
beaucoup  a. 

early,  de  bonne  heure;  —  in  the 
morning,  de  grand  matin;  at  an 
—  age,  en  bas  age;  earlier,  de 
meilleure  heure,  plus  tot. 

earn,  gagner. 

earth,  terre,  /. 

easily,  facilement. 

easy,  facile. 

eat,  manger. 

educated,  instruit. 

Edward,  Edouard. 

effect,  v.,  realiser. 

egg,  ceuf,  m. 


eight,  huit. 

eighteen,  dix-huit. 

eighty,  quatre-vingts. 

eighty-five,  quatre-vingt-cinq. 

either,  ou;  —  ...  or,  ou  ...  ou; 
not  ...  — .  :  .  or,  ne  .  .  .  ni  .  .  . 
ni;  nor  I  — ,  ni  moi  non  plus. 

elect,  elire. 

election,  election,  /. 

elector,  electeur,  m. 

electric,  electrique. 

electricity,  electricite,  /. 

elephant,  elephant,  m. 

eleven,  onze. 

embark,  s'embarquer. 

employ,  employer. 

end,  n.,  bout,  m.,  fin,  /. 

end,  v.,  finir. 

endure,  endurer,  souffrir,  suppor- 
ter. 

enemy,  ennemi,  m. 

engine,  locomotive,  /. 

England,  Angleterre,  /. 

English,  anglais;  — man,  Anglais; 
— woman,  Anglaise. 

engraving,  gravure,  /. 

enjoy,  —  oneself,  s'amuser;  se 
plaire. 

enough,  assez;  time  — ,  assez  de 
temps. 

enter,  entrer  (dans). 

entrance,  entree,  /. 

equal,  adj.,  egal. 

equal,  v.f  egaler. 

equestrian,  equestre. 

escape,  echapper  (a). 

escort,  escorter. 

especially,  surtout. 

establish,  etablir,  fonder. 

etching,  (gravure  (/.)  a)  Feau-forte, 

Europe,  Europe,  /. 

even,  meme. 

evening,  soir,  m. ;  —  dress,  toilette 
(/.)  de  soiree  (bal);  the  —  be- 
fore, la  veille;  good  — ,  bonsoir. 

ever,  jamais. 


294 


ENGLISH-FRENCH  VOCABULARY 


every,  tout,  chaque;  —  morning, 

tous  les  matins, 
everybody,  tout  le  monde. 
everything,  tout, 
everywhere,  partout. 
exact (ly),  precis,  exact, 
exaggerate,  exage"rer. 
examination,  examen,  m. 
example,  exemple,  m.;  for  — ,  par 

exemple. 

exceed,  depasser. 
excellent,  excellent, 
exclaim,  s'ecrier. 
excursion,  excursion,  /. 
execute,  ex£cuter. 
exercise,  devoir,  m. 
exercise  book,  cahier,  m. 
exhibition,  exposition,  /. 
exist,  exister. 
existence,  existence,  /. 
expect,  espe*rer,  compter,  attendre, 

s'attendre  a;  what  can  you  — ? 

que  voulez-vous  qu'on  (y)  f asse? 
explain,  expliquer. 
express,  exprimer. 
exquisite,  exquis. 
eye,  ceil,  m.;  pi.,  yeux. 


fable,  fable,  /. 

face,  figure,  /. 

fact,  fait,  m. ;  in  — ,  en  eff et. 

fail,   manquer;    (at    examination) 

ne  pas  etre   regu,   etre  refuse, 

echouer. 
fall,  n.,  chute,  /. 
fall,  v.,  tomber. 
family,  f amille,  /. 
famous,  celebre. 
far,  loin;  as —  as,  aussi  loin  que; 

how  —  on  is  he?  ou  en  est-il? 

—  too,  beaucoup  trop. 
farm,  ferme,  /.,  proprie'te,  /. 
farmer,  cultivateur,  m. 
farmhouse,  ferme,  /. 


fashion,  mode,  /. ;  in  the  Italian  — , 
,  a  1'italienne. 

fashionable,  a  la  mode. 

fast,  vite;  be  too  — ,  avancer. 

father,  pere,  m.;  pere  de  famille. 

fault,  f aute,  /. 

fear,  n.,  crainte,  /.,  peur,  /. ;  for  — 
of  (that)  de  crainte  de  (que). 

fear,  v.,  cfaindre,  avoir  peur. 

February,  fevrier,  m. 

feed,  donner  a  manger  a. 

feel,  sentir,  tater;  (of  health)  se 
sentir. 

fellow,  gargon. 

festivity,  fete,  /. 

few,  peu,  quelques.   j 

field,  champ,  m. 

fifteen,  quinze. 

fifty,  cinquante. 

fight,  se  battre. 

figure,  figure,  /. 

finally,  enfin,  a  la  fin;  finir  par. 

find,  trouver. 

fine,  beau,  bel,  belle;  it  is  —  (of 
weather),  il  fait  beau;  — look- 
ing, beau. 

finger,  doigt,  m. 

finish,  finir,  terminer,  achever. 

fire,  feu,  m. 

first,  premier;  (at)  — ,  d'abord;  I 
was  the  —  to  see  it,  je  1'ai  vu  le 
premier. 

fish,  poisson,  m. 

fishing,  peche,  /. ;  go  — ,  aller  a  la 
peche. 

fit,  aller. 

five,  cinq. 

flake,  flocon,  m. 

flat,  etage,  m.,  appartement,  m. 

floor,  parquet,  m.;  6tage,  m. 

flour,  f  arine,  /. 

flow,  couler. 

flower,  fleur,  /.;  —  garden,  par- 
terre, m. 

flower  girl,  bouquetiere. 

fluid,  fluide,  m. 


ENGLISH-FRENCH  VOCABULARY 


295 


-  fly,  n.,  mouche,  /. 

fly,  v.,  voler. 

folding  door,  porte  (/.)  a  deux 
battants. 

foliage,  feuillage,  ra. 

follow,  suivre;  following,  suivant. 

fond,  be  —  of,  aimer. 

foot,  pied,  m. ;  on  — ,  a  pied. 

for,  prep.,  pour,  par,  depuis,  pen- 
dant. 

for,  conj.f  car. 

forbid,  defendre. 

forest,  foret,  /. 

forget,  oublier. 

fork,  fourchette,  /. 

form,  former,  se  former. 

former,  ancien;  celui-la. 

formerly,  autrefois,  anciennement. 

forth,  and  so  — ,  et  ainsi  de  suite. 

fortnight,  quinze  jours,  une  quin- 
zaine. 

fortunate,  heureux. 

fortunately,  heureusement. 

forty,  quarante. 

four,  quatre. 

fourteen,  quatorze. 

fourth,  quatrieme;  a  — ,  un  quart. 

franc,  franc,  m. 

France,  France,  /. 

free,  libre. 

freeze,  geler. 

French,  frangais;  — man,  Fran- 
gais. 

fresh,  frais. 

Friday,  vendredi,  m. 

friend,  ami,  ra.,  amie,  /. 

frighten,  faire  peur  a. 

frock  coat,  redingote,  /. 

from,  de;  —  them,  en;  a  week  — 
to-day,  d'aujourd'hui  en  huit. 

front,  in  —  of,  devant. 

fruit,  fruit,  m. 

full,  plein. 

fun,  make  —  of,  se  moquer  de, 
rire  de. 

furnish,  meubler. 


furniture,  meubles,  m.  pi.,  mobi- 

lier,  m.  s. 
future,  avenir,  m. 


game,  jeu,  m. 

garden,  jardin,  m. 

garment,  vetement,  m. 

gas,  gaz,  m. 

gate,  porte,  /.,  barriere,  /. 

gather,  cueillir;  —  up,  ramasser. 

general,  general,  m. 

generally,  gene"ralement,  ordinaire- 
ment. 

gentle,  bon,  doux. 

gentleman,  monsieur;  homme(tres) 
comme  il  faut;  galant  homme, 
homme  de  bonne  societe. 

geography,  geographic,  /. 

George,  George  (s). 

German,  allemand. 

Germany,  Allemagne,  /. 

get,  avoir,  prendre,  recevoir,  ob- 
tenir,  faire;  —  himself . . .  made, 
se  faire  faire;  —  them  to  come, 
faites-les  venir;  go  to  (and)  — , 
aller  chercher;  come  to  (and) 
— ,  venir  chercher  (trouver,  pren- 
dre); —  out,  sortir;  —  up,  se 
lever. 

gift,  cadeau,  m. 

girl,  fille,  jeune  fille. 

give  (away),  donner;  (offer)  offrir; 

—  back,  rendre. 
glacier,  glacier,  m.  » 
glad,  heureux,  content. 

glass,  verre,  ra.;  glasses,  lunettes, 

f.pl 

glassware,  verrerie,  /. 
glee,  joie,  /. 
glove,  gant,  m. 
go,  aller,  passer,  marcher,  partir; 

—  away,  s'en  aller,  partir;  — 
with,     accompagner;    —    out, 
sortir;    —    in     (into),     entrer 
(dans);  —  home,  rentrer,  aller 


296 


ENGLISH-FRENCH  VOCABULARY 


chez  soi;  —  on,  avancer;  — 
down,  descendre;  —  up,  monter; 
—  near,  s'approcher  (de) ;  —  to 
(and)  see,  aller  voir;  —  on,  se 
passer;  —  for,  aller  chercher;  — 
back,  retourner. 

Gobelin,  Gobelins,  m.  pi. 

going  out,  sortie,  /.,  sortir,  m. 

gold,  or,  m.;  golden,  d'or. 

good,  n.,  bien,  m. 

good,  adj.,  bon,  sage;  be  no  — , 
ne  valoir  rien;  will  you  be  — 
enough,  be  —  enough,  veuillez, 
voulez-vous  bien. 

good-bye,  adieu,  au  revoir. 

gorge,  gorge,  /. 

gospel,  Evangile,  m. 

grain,  grain,  m. 

grammar,  grammaire,  /. 

grandfather,  grand-pere. 

grandmother,  grand'mere. 

grandparents,  grands-parents. 

grass,  herbe,  /. 

gratitude,  reconnaissance,  /. 

gravely,  gravement. 

great,  grand;  a  —  deal,  beaucoup. 

greedily,  avidement. 

green,  vert. 

grind,  moudre. 

'grippe,'  grippe,  /. 

grocer,  Spicier,  m. 

ground,  terre,  /. 

ground  floor,  rez-de-chausse'e,  m. 

group,  groupe,  m. 

grow,  ppusser,  croitre;  —  large  (r), 
grossir. 

grudge,  have  a  —  against,  en 
vouloir  a. 

H 

hair,  cheveux,  m.  pi.',   dress   the 

— ,  (se)  coiffer. 
half,  demi;  moitie",  /.;  —  past  one, 

une  heure  et  demie. 
hall,  salle,  /. ;  corridor,  m. 
hammer,  marteau,  m. 


hand,  main,  /. 

handkerchief,     mou  choir,     m.\ 

pocket  — ,  mouchoir  de  poche. 
handsome,  beau. 
happen,  arriver,   se  passer,   avoir 

lieu. 

happiness,  boisheur,  m. 
happy,  heureux,  content, 
hard,  dur;  difficile;  fort, 
harvest,  n.,  moisson,  /.,  re*colte,  /. 
harvest,  v.,  moissonner. 
harvester,  moissonneur,  m. 
haste,  'hate,  /.;  make  — ,  se  de- 

pe'cher. 

hasten,  se  'hater,  se  depecher. 
hat,  chapeau,  m. 
hatter,  chapelier,  m. 
have,   avoir,   e^re,    faire;   —   to, 

falloir,   devoir;   shall  —  to,   il 

faudra;  to  —  made,  faire  faire; 

you  —  only  to,  vous  n'avez  qu'a. 
Havre,  le  'Havre. 
hay,  foin,  m. 
he,  il,  lui;  celui. 
head,  tete,  /. ;  (of  grain)  e*pi,  m. ; 

ache,  mal  (m.)  de  tete,  mal  a  la 

tete. 

health,  sante",  /. 
hear,    entendre;    —    say    (tell), 

entendre    dire;    —    from,    re- 

cevoir  des  nouvelles  de;  —  of, 

entendre    parler  de;   we   have 

heard,  nous  avons  entendu  dire 

or  on  nous  a  dit. 
heart,  coeur,  m. 
heat,  n.,  chaleur,  /. 
heat,  v.,  chauffer. 
heating,  n.,  chauffage,  m. 
heaven,  ciel,  m. 
heavily,  fort, 
heavy,  lourd;  e*pais. 
Helen,  Helene. 

help,  aider;  —  oneself,  s'aider. 
hen,  poule,/. 

hence,  aussi,  par  consequent. 
Henry,  Henri. 


ENGLISH-FRENCH  VOCABULARY 


297 


her,  son,  sa,  ses;  la,  lui,  elle;  hers, 

a  elle,  le  sien  (etc.). 
here,  ici;  —  is,  voici,  voila;  —  he 

is,  le  voici,  le  voila. 
hide,  cacher;  se  cacher. 
high,  haut,  eleve;  cher. 
him,  le,  lui. 
hinder,  empecher. 
his,  son,  sa,  ses;  a  lui,  le  sien  (etc.). 
historian,  historien,  m. 
history,  histoire,  /. 
hodman,  aide-ma^on,  m. 
hold,  n.j  cale,  /. 
hold,  v.j  tenir. 
hole,  trou,  m. 
holiday,  fete,  /.,   (jour  de)   conge, 

m. ;  holidays,  vacances,  /.  pi. 
home,   maison,  /.;  (at)   — ,   a  la 

maison,  chez   lui  (etc.);  make 

yourself  at  — ,  ne  vous   genez 

pas. 
homemade,  — bread,  pain  (m.)  de 

menage, 
honey,  miel,  m. 
hope,  esperer,  compter. 
horse,  cheval,  m.;  on  — back,    a 

cheval. 

horticultural,  horticole. 
hospital,  hopital,  m. 
hot,  chaud. 
hour,  heure,  /. 
house,  maison,  /. ;  menage,  m. ;  at 

the  —  of,  chez ;  — maid,  femme 

de  chambre;  — wife,  menagere. 
household,  menage,  m. 
how,  comment?  comme!  que!  — 

many,  —  much,  combien? 
however,     cependant,     pourtant; 

quelque  .  .  .  que;  —  it  may  be, 

quoi  qu'il  en  soit. 
human,  humain. 
hundred   (a),   cent;  about  a  — , 

une  centaine. 
hunger,  faim,  /. 
hungry,  be  — ,  avoir  faim. 
hunt,  chasser. 


hurt,    faire   mal    a;    —   oneself, 

se  faire  mal. 
husband,  mari. 


I,  je,  moi. 

ice,  glace,  /. 

idle,  oisif,  paresseux. 

idleness,  oisivete,  /. 

if,  si;  (before  il,  ils)  s'. 

ill,  malade. 

ill-mannered,  mal  eleve". 

illustrate,  illustrer. 

imagine,  se  figurer. 

impatiently,  impatiemment. 

import,  importer. 

important,  important;  it  is  — ,  il 
importe,  il  est  important. 

impossible,  impossible. 

improvement,  perfect ionnement, 
m. 

in,  dans,  en,  a,  de;  —  it  (them),  y; 
to  be  — ,  y  etre. 

inch,  pouce,  m. 

increase,  augmenter;  keeps  in- 
creasing, va  en  augment  ant. 

indeed,  bien,  en  effet. 

industrious,  diligent. 

inflammably  inflammable. 

influenza,  grippe,  /. 

inform,  informer,  faire  savoir. 

inhabit,  habiter. 

ink,  encre,  /. 

inquire,  s' informer. 

instruct,  instruire. 

intelligence,  intelligence,  /. 

intelligent,  intelligent. 

intend,  avoir  rintention  de. 

interest,  interesser. 

interesting,  interessant. 

interior,  interieur,  m. 

into,  dans,  en. 

introduce,  presenter. 

invent,  inventer,  imaginer, 

invitation,  invitation,  /. 

invite,  inviter. 


298 


ENGLISH-FRENCH   VOCABULARY 


iron,  fer,  m. 

irregular,  deregle. 

is,  see  be. 

it,  il,  elle;  le,  la;  cela;  ce. 

Italian,  italien. 

its,  son,  sa,  ses. 

ivory,  ivoire,  m. 


kiss,  embrasser. 
kitchen,  cuisine,  /. 
knead,  petrir.  • 
kneading  trough,  petrin,  m. 
knife,  couteau,  m. 
knock,  frapper. 

know,  connaitre,  savoir;  —  how  to, 
savoir. 


James,  Jacques. 

Jane,  Jeanne. 

January,  Janvier,  m.    ' 

jewel,  bijou,  m. 

John,  Jean. 

join,  joindre. 

joiner,  menuisier,  m. 

*  jolly  fellow/  bon  vivant,  m. 

journey,  voyage,  m. 

joy,  joie,  /. 

Julian,  Julien. 

July,  juillet,  m. 

jump,  sauter. 

just,  seulement;  have   — ,  venir 

de;  have  —  come,  venir  d'ar- 

river. 


keep,    tenir,    garder;    —   house, 

faire  le  menage;  —  to  the  house, 

garder  la  maison. 
keeper,  gardien,  m. 
key,  clef,  /. 
kill,  tuer. 
kilo,  contr.  of  kilogramme  (about 

2  Ibs.). 

kilometre,  kilometre,  m. 
kind,  n.j  espece,  /.,  sorte,  /.;  what 

—  of  weather  is  it?  quel  temps 

fait-il? 
kind,  adj.,  aimable,  bon;  — •  to, 

bon  pour. 
kindly,  will  you  — ,  veuillez  (bien), 

ayez  la  bonte"  de. 
kindness,  bonte,  obligeance,  /. 
king,  roi. 


ladder,  echelle,  /. 

laden,  charge. 

lady,  dame;  ladies,  dames,  mes- 

dames;    young   ladies,    demoi- 
selles, jeunes  filles. 
lake,  lac,  m. 
lamp,  lampe,  /. 
land,  n.,  terre,  /. 
land,  v.,  debarquer. 
landlord,  proprietaire,  m.  or  f. 
landscape,  paysage,  m. 
language,  langue,  /. 
large,     grand,     gros;     grow    — , 

grossir. 
last,  adj.,  dernier,  passe;  at  — ,  a 

la  fin,  enfin;  —  year,  Fannee 

passee  (derniere). 
last,  v.,  durer. 
late,  tard,  en  retard;  later,  plus 

tard. 

Latin,  latin,  m. 
latter,  dernier;  celui-ci. 
laugh,  rire. 

law,  loi,  /. ;  against  the  — ,  de"f  endu. 
lay,  placer,  poser;   —  the   cloth, 

mettre  le  couvert. 
laziness,  paresse,  /. 
lazy,  paresseux. 
lead,  mener. 
leaf,  feuille,/.;  leaves,  feuilles,  pi., 

feuillage,  m. 

leap-year,  annee  (/.)  bissextile, 
learn,  apprendre. 
least,  adj.,  moindre;  adv.,  moins; 

at  — ,  au  (du)  moins. 
leave,  laisser;  partir  (de);  quitter. 


ENGLISH-FRENCH  VOCABULARY 


299 


lecture,  cours,  w. 

left,  gauche;    on   the   — ,    a    (la) 

gauche, 
leg,  jambe,  /. 
lend,  preter. 
less,  moins. 

lesson,  legon,  /.,  devoir,  m. 
let,    laisser,    faire;    (with   impve.) 

que;  —  us  go,  partons;  —  him 

go,  qu'il  parte;  —  us  sit  down, 

asseyons-nous. 
letter,  lettre,  /. 
library,  bibliotheque,  /. 
lie,    etre    couche;    —    down,    se 

coucher. 
life,  vie,  /. 
light,  n.,  lumiere,  /. 
light,    adj.,    leger;    lighter,    plus 

leger,  moins  lourd. 
light,  v.,  eclairer;  (kindle)  allumer. 
lighting,  n.,  eclairage,  m. 
like,  v.,  aimer;  vouloir,  trouver,  se 

plaire;  I  should  — ,  je  voudrais 

(bien);  —  better  (best),  aimer 

mieux. 

like,  adv.,  comme. 
likewise,  pareillement. 
limp,  boiter. 

line,  n.,  ligne,/. ;  (of  poetry)  vers,  m. 
line,  v.j  doubler. 
linen,  linge,  m. 
lion,  lion,  ra. 
listen  (to),  e"couter. 
little,  adj.,  petit;  adv.,  peu. 
live,  vivre;  demeurer;  —  (in),  ha- 

biter;  —  on,  vivre  de. 
living,    vie,  /.;   good   — ,    bonne 

chere,  /. 

loaf  (of  bread),  pain,  m. 
Loire,  Loire,  /. 
London,  Londres,  m. 
lonesome,  be  — ,  s'ennuyer. 
long,  long,  longtemps;  a  —  time, 

longtemps;  no  longer,  ne  .  .  . 

plus;  how  — ?,  depuis   quand? 

as  —  as,  tant  que;  be  — ,  tarder. 


look  (at),  regarder;  —  for,  cher- 

cher;  they  (/.) — gentle,  elles  ont 

Fair  douces. 
loose,  detache;    become    — ,     se 

detacher, 
lose,  perdre. 
loss,  perte,  /. 
lot,  terrain,  m. 
Louis,  Lewis,  Louis. 
Louisa,  Louise. 
Louvre,  Louvre,  m. 
love,     aimer;    —    one    another, 

s' aimer. 
low,  bas. 

lower,  v.  tr.,  descendre. 
Lucy,  Lucie. 
luggage,  bagages,  m.  pi. 
Luke,  Luc. 

lunch,  n.,  dejeuner,  m. 
lunch,  v.j  dejeuner. 
Luxembourg,  Luxembourg,  m. 
Lyons,  Lyon,  m. 

M 

madam,  madame. 
magnificent,  magnifique. 
mahogany,  acajou,  m. 
maid,    bonne,    /.,    servante,    /., 

domestique,  /. 
mail,  courrier,  m. 
majority,  majorite",  /. 
make,  faire,  rendre;  have  made 

for   oneself,    se   faire  faire;  is 

made  of,  fait  de  (en). 
mamma,  maman. 
man,  homme;  young  men,  jeunes 

gens. 
manner,  maniere,  /.; of-living, 

vie,  /. 
many,  beaucoup;  a  great  (good) 

— ,  beaucoup  de;  bien  des;  as  — 

as,  autant. 
map,  carte,  /. 
marble,  marbre,  m. ;  ( for  playing) 

bille,  /. 


300 


ENGLISH-FRENCH  VOCABULARY 


march,  marche,  /. 

Marcus  Aurelius,  Marc-Airrele. 

Margaret,  Marguerite. 

market,  marche,  m. 

marriage,  manage,  m. 

marry,    marier    (of   parents    and 

officials),  epouser  (of  contracting 

parties)^  be   (get)   married,   se 

marier. 

Marseilles,  Marseille,/. 
Mary,  Marie, 
mason,  magon,  m. 
mass,  messe,  /. 

master,  maitre,  m.,  professeur,  m. 
material,    e"toffe,    /.;    materiaux, 

m.  pi. 
matter,  affaire,  /. ;  it  is  a  —  of,  il 

s'agit  de;  what  is  the  —  with 

you?      qu'avez-vous?      no     — 

which,  n'importe  lequel. 
mature,  mur. 
May,  n.  mai,  m. 

may,  v.  pouvoir;  it  —  be,  il  sepeut. 
me,  me,  moi. 
meadow,  pre,  m. 
mean,  vouloir  dire, 
meaning,  signification,  /. 
means,  moyen,  m. 
measure,  mesure,  /. 
meat,  viande,  /. 

medicine,  medecine,  /. ;  remede,  m. 
meet,  rencontrer;  —  each  other,  se 

rencontrer;  make  (both)  ends — , 

joindre  les  deux  bouts, 
mention,   mentionner,   parler  de; 

don't  —  it,  il  n'y  a  pas  de  quoi. 
menu,  menu,  m. 
merchant,  marchand,  m. 
merit,  merite,  m. 
merry,  gai,  joyeux. 
merry-go-round,  chevaux  (m.  pi.) 

de  bois. 

metre,  metre,  m. 
midnight,  minuit,  m. 
mild,  doux. 
milk,  n.,  lait,  m. 


milk,  v.,  tirer,  traire. 

miller,  meunier,  m. 

mind,  never  — ,  n'importe. 

mine,  a  moi,  le  mien;  a  friend  of 

— ,  un  de  mes  amis. 
minute,  minute,  /.,  moment,  m. 
mirror,  miroir,  m. 
misfortune,  maiheur,  m. 
Miss,  n.,  mademoiselle, 
miss,  v.j  manquer. 
Mississippi,  Mississipi,  m. 
mistake,  erreur,  /.;  make  — (s),  se 

tromper. 
mistaken,  be  — ,  se  tromper;  if  I 

am  not  — ,  si  je  ne  me  trompe. 
moderate,  moderer. 
modern,  moderne. 
moment,  moment,  m. 
Monday,  lundi,  m. 
money,  argent,  m. 
monkey,  singe,  m. 
month,  mois,  m. 
Montreal,  Montreal,  m. 
more,    encore,    plus,    davantage; 

any  — ,  encore;  no  — ,  ne  .  .  . 

plus;  some  — ,  encore;  the  — 

.  .  .  the  — .  .  .,  plus  .  .  .  plus. 
morning,  matin,  m.;  —  coat,  ja- 

quette,  /.;  good  — ,  bonjour. 
most,  le  plus,  la  plupart  de. 
mother,  mere,  /. 
mother-of-pearl,  nacre,  /. 
motor-car,  automobile,  m.  or  f. 
mountain,  montagne,  /. 
move,  remuer,  mouvoir;  se  mettre 

en  branle. 

Mr.,  Monsieur  (contr.  M.). 
Mrs.,  Madame  (contr.  Mme). 
Mt.  Blanc,  le  mont  Blanc, 
much,  beaucoup;  very  — ,  beau- 

coup,  bien;  as  —    as,   autant 

que;  so  — ,  tant,  tellement. 
mud,  boue,  /. 

muddy,  be  — ,  faire  de  la  boue. 
municipal,  municipal, 
municipality,  commune,  /. 


ENGLISH-FRENCH  VOCABULARY 


301 


museum,  musee,  m. 

music,  musique,  /. 

must,  falloir,  devoir;  we  — ,  il  nous 
faut,  il  faut  que  nous,  nous  de- 
vons;  —  not,  il  ne  faut  pas;  — 
have  been,  a  du  etre. 

my,  mon,  ma,  mes. 

myself,  moi-meme. 

mysterious,  mysterieux. 

N 

nail,  clou,  m. 

name,  n.,  nom,  m. ;  what  is  his  — ?, 

comment  s'appelle-t-il?  my  —  is, 

je  m'appelle. 
name,  v.,  nommer. 
Napoleon,  Napoleon, 
narrow,  etroit. 
naughty,  mechant. 
near,  pres   (de);   be    (come)    — , 

manquer  de,  penser,  faillir,  s'en 

falloir  de  peu. 
nearly,  a  peu  pres,  pres  de,  presque; 

I  —  fell,  j'ai  manque  de  tomber. 
necessary,  necessaire;  be  — ,  etre 

necessaire,  falloir. 
necklace,  collier,  m. 
necktie,  cravate,  /. 
need,  avoir  besoin  de;  il  faut. 
needle,  aiguille,  /. 
neighbour,  voisin,  m. 
neighbourhood,  environs,  m.  pi. 
neither,  ni;  —  .  .  .  nor,  ne  .  .  .  ni 

.  .  .  ni. 

nephew,  neveu. 
nest,  nid,  m. 
never,  ne  .  .  .  jamais. 
new,  neuf,  nouveau. 
newly,    recemment;    —    married 

couple,  les  nouveaux  maries. 
New    Orleans,    la    Nouvelle-Or- 

leans. 

news,  nouvelle(s),  /. 
newspaper,  journal,  m. 
New  Year's  Day,  le  jour  de  1'An. 


New  York,  New-York. 

next,     ensuite,     puis;     procham; 

what  — ?   et   avec  c.a?  the  — 

day,  le  lendemain. 
nice,  gentil,  aimable. 
niece,  niece. 
night,  nuit,  /. ;  last  — ,  hier  au  soir, 

cette  nuit. 
nine,  neuf. 
nineteen,  dix-neuf. 
ninety,  quatre-vingt-dix. 
no,  non;  mais  non;  ne  .  .  .  pas;  — 

letter,  pas  de  lettre ;  —   one, 

personne. 

nobody,  ne   .    .   .   personne;   per- 
sonne. 

noise,  bruit,  m. 
none,  ne  . . .  aucun  (pasun) ;  aucun; 

pas;  there  are  —  now,  il  n'y  en 

a  plus. 

noon,  midi,  m. 
nor,  ni;  —  I  either,  ni  moi  non 

plus. 

Norman,  normand. 
Normandy,  Normandie,  /. 
north,  nord,  m. 
not,   ne  .  .  .  pas,  non;  is  it  — ? 

n'est-ce  pas?  —  one,  pas  un(e); 

—  at  all,  pas  du  tout, 
note,  billet,  m.,  mot,  m. 
nothing,  ne  .  .  .  rien,  rien;  —  but, 

rien  que. 

notice,  observer,  remarquer. 
Notre  Dame,  Notre-Dame. 
novel,  roman,  m. 
now,  maintenant;  a  present;  — 

and  then,  de  temps  en  temps; 

— adays,  de  nos  jours;  not  — , 

ne  .  .  .  plus. 

number,  nombre,  m.,  nurnero,  m. 
numerous,  nombreux. 


oak,  chene,  m. 
oats,  avoine,  /.  s. 
obey,  obeir  a. 


302 


ENGLISH-FRENCH  VOCABULAItt 


object,  objet,  m. 

obliged,   oblige;  he  was  — ,  il  a 

du. 

observation,  observation,  /. 
observe,  observer,  remarquer. 
obtain,  obtenir. 
occupation,  occupation,  /. 
occur,  arriver,  se  faire. 
o'clock,  heure(s),  /. 
of,  de;  —  it  (them),  en;  —  the,  du 

(etc.). 

offer,  offrir. 
office,  bureau,  m. 
often,  souvent. 
oil,  huile,  /.;  — lamp,  lampe  (/.)  a 

huile;  —  painting,  peinture  (/.) 

a  1'huile. 
old,  vieux,  age;  she  is  more  than 

three  years  — ,  elle  a  plus  de 

trois  ans;  how  —  is  he?   quel 

age  a-t-il?  —  age,  vieillesse,  /. 
omelet,  omelette,  /. 
on,  sur,  dans;  de. 
once,  une  fois;  at  — ,  tout  de  suite. 
one,  un,  m.,  une,  /.;  on;  the  — , 

celui   (celle);  this  — ,   celui-ci; 

that  — ,  celui-la;  the  white  ones, 

ies  blancs. 
onion,  oignon,  m. 
only,  ne  .  .  .  que,  seulement;  seul. 
open,  ouvrir,  s'ouvrir;  —  p.  part. 

ouvert;  in  the  —  air,  en  plein 

air. 

opposite,  en  face  de. 
or,  ou. 

orchard,  verger,  m. 
order,  in  —  that,  pour  que,  de 

sorte   que,  afin  que;  in  —  to, 

pour,  afin  de. 

order,  v.,  commander,  ordonner. 
ordinary,  ordinaire, 
other,  autre;  others,   Ies   autres, 

d'autres. 
otter,  loutre,  /. 
ought,  one  — ,  on  devrait;  he  — 

not  to  have,  il  n'aurait  pas  du. 


our,  notre,  nos;  ours,  a  nous,  le 

notre  (etc.) 
out  of,  hors  de. 
outside  (of  it),  dehors. 
oven,  four,  m. 
over,  par;  au-dessus  de. 
overcoat,  pardessus,  m. 
oversee,  surveiller. 
owe,  devoir. 

own,  propre,  a  lui;  my  — ,  le  mien. 
ox,  bosuf. 


page,  page,  /. 

pail,  seau,  m. 

pain,  douleur,  /.,  mal,  m. 

paint,  peindre;  —  in  oils,  peindre 

a  1'huile. 
painter,  peintre. 

painting,  peinture,  /.,  tableau,  m. 
pair,  paire,  /. 
palace,  palais,  m. 
papa,  papa. 
paper,  papier,  m. 
pardon,  n.,  pardon,  m. ;  I  beg  your 

— ,  je  vous  demande  pardon, 
pardon,  v.,  pardonner. 
parent,  parent,  m. 
Paris,  Paris,  m. 
Parisian,  parisien. 
(parish)  priest,  cure, 
park,  pare,  m.,  jardin,  m. 
parlour,  salon,  m. 
part,  role,  m.,  partie,  /.;  the  most 

— ,  la  plupart,  la  plus  grande 

partie. 

partridge,  perdrix,  /. 
party,  soiree,  /. ;  parti,  m. ;  our  — , 

Ies  notres. 

pass,  n.,  (of  mountains)  col,  m. 
pass,  v.,  passer;  (at  examination) 

reussir,  £tre  re$u. 
passage,  passage,  ra.;  traversee,/.; 

corridor,  m.  . 
past,  pass6. 
pastel,  pastel,  m. 


ENGLISH-FRENCH  VOCABULARY 


303 


pastry,  patisserie,  /. 

path,  sentier,  m. 

patient,  malade,  m.  or  f. 

pay  (for),  payer;  —  a  visit,  faire 

une  visit e. 
pea,  pois,  m.;  green  peas,  petits 

pois. 

peace,  paix,  /. 

pear,  poire,  /. ;  —  tree,  poirier,  m. 
pearl,  perle,  /. 
peasant,  paysan,  m. 
pebble,  caillou,  m. 
pen,  plume,  /. 
pencil,  crayon,  rri. 
people,  peuple,  m.;  personnes,  /. 

pi.,  gens,  m.  or  f. ;  on,  monde,  m. 
perceive,  apercevoir,  s'apercevoir 

de. 

perhaps,  peut-etre  (que). 
permission,  permission,  /. 
permit,  permettre. 
person,  personne,  /. 
perspire,  transpirer. 
Peter,  Pierre, 
petroleum,  petrole,  m. 
pianist,  pianiste,  m.  or  f. 
piano,  piano,  m. 
pick,  cueillir;  —  up,  ramasser. 
picture,  image,  /.,  tableau,  m. 
piece,   morceau,   m.;    (of  money) 

piece,  /. 
pine,  pin,  m. 
pipe,  pipe,  /. 
pit,  fosse,  /. 
pity,  n.,  dommage,  m.;  pitie*,  /.; 

what  a  — ,  quel  dommage. 
pity,  v.j  plaindre. 
place,  n.,  endroit,  m.,  place,  /.,  lieu, 

m.;  take  —  of,  remplacer;  take 

— ,  avoir  lieu. 

place,  v.,  placer,  poser,  mettre. 
plain,  simple. 
plan,  plan,  m. 
plank,  planche,  /. 
plant,  planter. 
plate,  assiette,  /. 


play,  n.j  piece,  /. ;  go  to  the  — ,  aller 

au  theatre, 
play,  v.,  jouer;  —  on  the  piano, 

jouer  du  piano. 
pleasant,    agreable;    (of   weather) 

beau. 
please,  plaire  a;  if  you  — ,  please, 

s'il  vous  plait. 
pleased,  content, 
pleasure,  plaisir,  m. 
plenty,  assez  de,  beaucoup  de. 
plough,  n.,  charrue,  /. 
plough,  v.,  labourer, 
ploughing,  n.,  labour,  m. 
ploughman,  laboureur,  m. 
p.m.,  du  soir. 
pocket,  poche,  /. 
poem,  poeme,  m. 
poet,  poete,  m. 
police,   police,  /.;  — man,   agent 

(de  police). 

politeness,  politesse,  /. 
poor,  pauvre. 
porcelain,  porcelaine,  /. 
pore,  pore,  m. 
port,  port,  m. 
porter,  facteur. 
portrait,  portrait,  m. 
position,  place,  /.,  poste,  m. 
possible,  possible, 
postman,  facteur. 
post  office,  poste,  /. 
potato,  pomme  (/.)  de  terre. 
poultry,  volaille,  /. 
pound,  livre,  /. 
practice,  clientele,  /. 
preceding,  precedent, 
precise  (ly),  precis. 
prefer,  preferer,  aimer  mieux. 
preparation (s),  preparatifs,  m.  pi. 
prepare,  preparer;  se  preparer. 
prescribe,  ordonner. 
prescription,  ordonnance,  /. 
present,  cadeau,  m.,  present,  m.\ 

at  — ,  a  present;  be  — ,  assister, 

etre  present. 


304 


ENGLISH-FRENCH  VOCABULARY 


pretty,  joli. 

prevent,  empecher. 

price,  prix,  m. 

priest,  pretre,  cure. 

princess,  princesse. 

prize,  prix,  m. 

probable,  probable. 

probably,  probablement. 

problem,  probleme,  m. 

process,  precede,  m. 

product,  produit,  m. 

professor,  prof esseur,  m.  or  f. 

profit (s),  benefices,  m.  pi.',  make 

— ,  tirer  des  benefices. 
promise,  promettre. 
property,  propriete*,  /. 
proportion,  proportion,  /. ;  in  —  as, 

a  mesure  que. 
prosperity,  prosperity,  /. 
protect,  proteger. 
proverb,  proverbe,  m. 
provisions,  vivres,  m.  pl.'}  get  — , 

se  fournir. 

public,  n.,  public,  m. 
public,  adj.,  public, 
pulse,  pouls,  m. 
Punch  and  Judy,  Guignol,  m. 
pupil,  eleve,  m.  or  f. 
purchase,  achat,  m. 
purple,  lilas. 

purse,  porte-monnaie,  m. 
put,  mettre,  placer;  —  on,  mettre; 

—  away    (in),    serrer;    —    in 
place,  caser;  —  in,  y  mettre; 

—  out,  eteindre. 


quality,  qualite,  /. 

quarter,  quart,  m.;  quinze  minu- 
tes, /.;  at  a  —  past  one,  a  une 
heure  (et)  un  quart;  at  a  —  to 
one,  a  une  heure  moins  le  (un) 
quart. 

queen,  reine,  /. 

question,  question,  /. 


quickly,  vite. 

quiet,  tranquille;   be,  become  — , 

se  taire. 
quite,  assez,  tout  a  fait,  tres,  bien. 


radish,  radis,  m. 

railroad,  railway,  chemin  (m.)  de 
fer. 

rain,  n.,  pluie,  /. 

rain,  v.,  pleuvoir. 

rarely,  rarement. 

rather,  assez;  I  would  — ,  j'aime- 
rais  mieux. 

read,  lire. 

reading,  lecture,  /. ;  —  room  (salle, 
/.)  or  salon  (m.)  de  lecture. 

ready,  pret;  fait;  get  — ,  se  dis- 
poser. 

reap,  moissonner. 

reaping  machine,  moissonneuse,  /. 

reason,  raison,  /.,  motif,  m. 

receive,  recevoir. 

recently,  recemment. 

reception,  reception,  /. 

recognize,  reconnaitre. 

recover,  se  remettre,  se  retablir, 
guerir. 

recovered,  remis,  retabli. 

red,  rouge. 

reflect,  reflechir. 

refuse,  refuser. 

regard,  with  —  to,  a  propos  de. 

regret,  regretter. 

reign,  n.,  regne,  m. 

reign,  v.,  regner. 

relate,  raconter. 

relation,  relative,  parent,  m. 

relish,  'hors-d'oeuvre,  m. 

remain,  rester. 

remarkable,  remarquable. 

remember,  se  rappeler,  se  souve- 
nir de,  retenir. 

render,  rendre. 

repair,  reparer. 


ENGLISH-FRENCH  VOCABULARY 


305 


reply,  repondre,  repliquer. 
represent,  representer. 
republican,  republicain,  ra. 
reputation,  reputation,  /. 
required,  is  — ,  il  faut. 
resemble,  ressembler  (a). 
resort,    station,  /.;    summer  — , 

station  d'6te. 
respect,  respecter, 
rest,  the  — ,  le  reste;  les  autres. 
restaurant,  restaurant,  m. 
restore,  restaurer,    remettre,    re- 

tablir. 

retreat,  retraite,  /. 
return,  n.,  retour,  m. 
return,  v.t  revenir  (come  back),  re- 

tourner  (go  back) ;  —  home,  ren- 

trer  (chez  soi). 
rhinoceros,  rhinoceros,  m. 
Rhone,  Rhone,  m. 
rich,  riche. 
richly,  richement. 
ride,  go  for  (take)  a  — ,  se  pro- 

mener  a  cheval. 
right,  droit,  m. ;  raison,  /. ;  (of  time) 

a  1'heure;  on  the  — ,  a  (la)  droit e; 

he  is  (hi  the)  — ,  il  a  raison. 
ring,  sonner. 
ripe,  mur. 
ripen,  murir. 

rise,  se  lever,  s'elever;  lever, 
river,  riviere,  /.;  (falling  into  the 

sea)  fleuve,  m. 
road,  chemin,  m.,  route,  /. 
roaring,  rugissement,  m. 
roast,  n.j  roti,  m. 
roast,  v.,  rotir. 
robbery,  vol,  m. 
Robert,  Robert, 
role,  role,  m. 
roll,  n.,  petit  pain,  m. 
roll,  v.,  rouler. 
rolling,  n.,  roulis,  m. 
roof,  toit,  m. 

room,  pi£ce,  /.,  salle,  /.,  chambre,  /. 
*ose,  rose,  /. 


rule,  regie,  /. 

run,  courir,  marcher;  (of  liquids) 

couler ;  —  off  the  track,  derailler ; 

get  —  over,  se  faire  ecraser. 
rush,  se  precipiter. 


sack,  sac,  m. 

sack  coat,  veston,  m. 

safe,  sauf;  — -  and  sound,  sain  et 

sauf. 

saint,  saint,  m. 
salad,  salade,  /. 
salute,  saluer;  —  each  other,  se 

saluer. 
same,  meme;  at  the  —  time,  en 

meme  temps;  it  is  all  the  —  to 

me,  cela  m'est  egal. 
sand,  sable,  m. 
sardine,  sardine,  /. 
satisfactory,   satisfaisant;  not  be 

— ,  laisser  a  desirer. 
satisfied,  satisfait,  content. 
Saturday,  samedi,  m. 
save,  economiser,  epargner. 
sawmill,  scierie,  /. 
say,  dire;  they  — ,  on  dit. 
scaffolding,  e"chafaudage,  m. 
scene,  scene,  /. 
scholar,  ecolier,  -£re. 
school,  ecole,  /.,  college,  ra.;  at — , 

a  Tecole;  — boy,  ecolier;  — girl, 

ecoliere. 

scissors,  ciseaux,  m.  pi. 
score,  vingtaine,  /. 
sea,  mer,  /.;  — port,  port  (m.)  de 

mer;  be  — sick,  avoir  le  mal  de 

mer. 

seashore,  bord  de  la  mer. 
seaside  resort,  station  (/.)  balne- 

aire,  bains  (m.)  de  mer. 
season,  saison,  /. 

seat,  place,  /.,  siege,  m.,  bane,  m. 
seated,  be  — ,  s'asseoir,  etre  assis. 
second,  deuxieme,  second;  deux. 


306 


ENGLISH-FRENCH  VOCABULARY 


see,   voir;  be  seen,   se  voir;  — 

about  (after),  s'occuper  de;  — 

each  other,  se  voir. 
seek,  chercher. 
seem,  sembler,  paraitre. 
Seine,  Seine,  /.      . 
seize,  saisir. 
select,  choisir. 
sell,  vendre,  se  vendre;  —  again, 

revendre. 
senate,  senat,  m. 
send,   envoyer;   —  for,   envoyer 

chercher,  faire  venir. 
separate,  separer. 
serious,  grave,  s£rieux. 
servant,    bonne,  /.,    servante,  /., 

domestique,  m.  or  f. 
serve,  servir. 
service,  service,  m. 
set,  mettre;  —  out,  partir;  —  the 

table,     mettre    la    nappe     (le 

convert) . 
seven,  sept, 
seventeen,  dix-sept. 
seventy,  soixante-dix. 
seventy-five,  soixante-quinze. 
several,  plusieurs. 
severe,  rude, 
sew,  coudre. 
sewing,  couture,  /. 
shade,  nuance,  /.;  ombre,  /.;  in 

the  — ,  a  1' ombre, 
shake,    secouer;    —    hands,    se 

donner  la  main,   se    serrer    la 

main, 
shall,  sign  of  jut.;  what  —  I  do? 

que  voulez-vous  que  je  fasse? 
she,  elle,  ce. 
sheep,  mouton,  m. 
shelter,  abri,  m.;  sheltered  from, 

a  Tabri  de. 

ship,  navire,  m.,  vaisseau,  m. 
shoe,  soulier,  m. 
shoemaker,  cordonnier,  m. 
shop,  magasin,  m.,  boutique,  /.; 

at  the  —  of,  chez;  go  shopping, 


faire  des  emplettes,   courir  les 

magasins. 
shore,  bord,  m.,  cote,  /.;  go  on  — , 

d6barquer. 
short,  court, 
should,  sign  of  condl.;  one  — ,  on 

devrait;    you    —    have,    vous 

auriez  du. 
shout,  crier, 
show,  n.,  concours,  m. 
show,  v.,  montrer;  faire  voir;  — 

in,  faire  entrer;  —  up  (stairs), 

faire  monter. 
shut,  fermer. 

sick,  malade;  —  people,  malades. 
sickle,  f  aucille,  /. 
side,  cote,  m. ;  by  the  —  of,  a  cote 

de. 

sideboard,  buffet,  m. 
sidewalk,  trottoir,  m. 
sight,  vue,/.,  coup  (m.)  d'ceil;  fine 

sights,  beautes,  /.  pi. 
sign,  signe,  m. 
silk,  soie,  /.;  — worm,  ver  (m.)  & 

soie;  —  dress,  robe  (/.)  de  soie; 

—  goods,  soieries  /.  pi. ;  — room, 

salon  (m.)  des  soieries. 
silver,  argent,  m. 
silverware,  argenterie,  /. 
simple,  simple. 
since,    depuis    (que);    que;   puis- 

que;  it  is  a  long  tune  — ,  il  y  a 

longtemps  que  ...  ne  ... 
sing,  chanter. 
singer,  chanteuse,  /. 
singing,  chant,  m. 
single,  seul. 
sir,  monsieur, 
sister,  sceur. 
sit  (down),  s'asseoir,  se  mettre  a 

table. 

sitting,  assis. 
situated,  situe\ 
six,  six. 
sixteen,  seize, 
sixty,  soixante. 


ENGLISH-FRENCH  VOCABULARY 


307 


skate,  ft.,  patin,  m. 

skate,  v.,  patiner. 

skirt,  jupe,  /. 

sleep,  dormir;  coucher;  go  to  — , 

•  s'endormir. 

sleeping  car,  wagon-lit,  m. 

sleigh,  traineau,  m.;  go  sleighing, 

aller  (se  promener)  en  traineau. 
slice,  tranche,  /. ;  —  of  bread  and 

butter,  tartine  (/.)  de  beurre. 
slippery,  glissant. 
slow,  lent;  be  too  — ,  retarder. 
slowly,  lentement,  doucement. 
small,  petit. 

smell,  sentir;  —  sweet,  sentir  bon. 
smoke,  fumer. 
sneeze,  eternuer. 
snow,  n.t  neige,  /. 
snow,  v.,  neiger. 
so,  si,  ainsi ;  le ;  not — ,  pas  si,  moins ; 

—  much,  —  many,  tant,  telle- 

ment;  —  that,   de  sorte   que, 

pour  que. 
soap,  savon,  m. 
society,  societe,  /. 
solve,  resoudre. 
some,  du,  etc.;  quelque;  quelcon- 

que;  quelques-uns;  en. 
somebody,  some  one,  quelqu'un, 

on. 

something,  quelque  chose  (de). 
sometimes,  quelquefois. 
somewhere,  quelque  part, 
son,  fils. 

song,  chanson,  /. 

soon,  bientot;  sooner,  plus  tot;  as 
—  as,  aussitot  que;  I  would  as 

— ,  j'aimerais  autant. 
sore,  I  have  a  —  throat,  j'ai  mal  a 

la  gorge. 
sorry,  fache;  be  — ,  regretter,  6tre 

fache. 

sort,  espece,  /.,  sorte,  /. 
sound,  n.,  bruit",  m. 
sound,  adj.,  sain, 
soup,  potage,  m.,  soupe,  /. 


sour,  aigre. 

south,  sud,  m.,  midi,  m. 

sow,  semer. 

speak,  parler. 

spectacles,  lunettes,  /.  pi. 

speed,  vitesse,  /. 

spend,   depenser   (money),  passer 

(time) . 

splendid,  superbe,  magnifique. 
spoon,  cuiller,  /. 
sport,  sport,  m. 
spring,  printemps,  m.;  (of  water) 

source,  /. 
spruce,  sapin,  m. 
square,  carre. 
squirrel,  ecureuil,  m. 
stable,  (for  cows)  etable,  /.,  (for 

horses)  ecurie,  /. 
stairway,  escalier,  m. 
stale,  rassis. 
stand,    se   trouver,    etre   debout, 

s'elever;  standing,  debout. 
start,  partir;  tressaillir. 
state,  etat,  m. ;  — room,  cabine,  /. 
station,  gare,  /. 
statue,  statue,  /. 
stay,  n.,  sejour,  m. 
stay,  v.,  rester. 
steal,  voler. 
steam,  vapeur,  /. 
steamer,  bateau   (m.)   a    vapeur, 

paquebot,  m. 
steel,    acier,    m.;    —    engraving,. 

gravure  (/.)  sur  acier. 
step,  pas,  m. 

stick,  baton,  m.,  canne,  /. 
still,  encore,  tou jours. 
St.  John,  saint  Jean. 
St.  Lawrence,  Saint-Laurent,  m. 
stone,  pierre,  /. 
stop,  arreter;  s'arreter. 
?store,  magasin,  m. 
story,  etage  (of  a  house),  m. 
story,  histoire,  /. 
strange,  Strange. 
stranger,  Stranger,  m. 


308 


ENGLISH-FRENCH  VOCABULARY 


straw,  paille,  /. ;  —  hat,  chapeau 

(m.)  de  paille. 
strawberry,  fraise,  /. 
stream,  ruisseau,  m.,  cours  (m.) 

d'eau. 

street,  rue,  /. 
strike,  frapper. 
strong,  fort, 
student,  etudiant,  m. 
study,  e"tudier. 

study  table,  table  (/.)  de  travail, 
stupid,  bete,  stupide. 
subject,  sujet,  m. 
succeed,  reussir;  (at  examination) 

etre  re9U. 

success,  succes,  m. 
such,  tel;  —  a,  un  tel;  si. 
suffer,  souffrir. 
suffice,  be  sufficient,  suffire. 
sugar,  sucre,  m. 
suit   (of  clothes),   vehement,   m., 

complet,  m. 
summer,  ete*,  m. 
sun,  soleil,  m. 
Sunday,  dimanche,  m. 
sunny,  be  — ,  faire  du  soleil. 
superintend,  surveiller. 
sure,  stir,  certain, 
surface,  surface,  /. 
surround,  entourer. 
sweet,  doux. 
swim,  nager. 


table,  table,  /.;  — cloth,  nappe,  /., 
couvert,  m.,  tapis,  m.;  set  the 
— ,  mettre  la  nappe  (le  couvert). 

tailor,  tailleur,  m. 

take,  prendre;  mener,  conduire;  — 
from,  prendre  a;  —  to,  transpor- 
ter a;  —  a  walk,  faire  une  prome- 
nade, se  promener  a  pied;  — 
away,  emporter;  —  out,  sortir; 
—  after,  tenir  de;  —  about,  pro- 
mener; —  off,  oter,  quitter. 

taking,  prise,  /. 


talk,  parler. 

tall,  grand. 

tapestry,  tapisserie,  /. 

task,  tache,  /.,  devoir,  m. 

taste,  n.j  gout,  m. 

taste,  v.,  gotiter. 

tax,  reprocher. 

tea,  the,  m. ;  — cup,  tasse  (/.)  a  the., 

teach,    enseigner,    instruire,    ap- 

prendre,  montrer. 
teacher,  professeur,  m.  or/.;  (pri- 
mary] instituteur,   m.,   institu- 

trice,  /. 

tear  (out),  arracher. 
tease,  taquiner. 
tedium,  ennui,  m. 
telegraph,  telegraphier. 
telephone,  telephones 
tell,  dire,  raconter. 
temperature,  temperature,  /. 
ten,  dix. 
tender,  tendre. 
tent,  tente,  /. 

terms,  good  — ,  bonne  intelligence, 
terrible,  terrible. 
Thames,  Tamise,  /. 
than,  que;  (before  numerals]  de*. 
thank,  remercier;  thanks,  merci, 

je  vous  remercie. 
thankful,  reconnaissant. 
that,  qui,  que;  ce,  cet,  cette;  cela; 

celui(-la);   que,  de    sorte    que; 

—  one,   celui-la;  —  is,  voila, 

c'est;  is  —  your  book?   est-ce 

la  votre  livre? 
thaw,  degeler. 
the,  le,  la,  les, 
theatre,  theatre,  m. 
thee,  te,  toi. 
their,    leur,    leurs;   theirs,  a   eux 

(etc.);  leleur  (etc.). 
them,  les,  eux,  elles,  leur;  of  — , 

d'eux,  en. 

then,  alors,  puis,  ensuite. 
there,  la,  y;  —  (it)  is,  voila;  —  i» 

(are),  il  y  a. 


ENGLISH-FRENCH  VOCABULARY 


309 


thermometer,  thermometre,  m. 
they,  Us,  m.,  eux,  m.,  elles,  /.;  ce; 

on. 

thick,  epais. 
thief,  voleur,  m. 
thimble,  de",  m. 
thin,  mince. 

thine,  a  toi,  le  tien  (etc.) 
thing,  chose,/.,  affaire,  /.;  some- 

— ,  quelque  chose, 
think,    penser,     croire,    reflechir, 

trouver;  what  do  you  —  of  it? 

qu'en  pensez-vous?  comment  le 

trouvez-vous?  —  of  me,  pensez  a 

moi;  what  are  you  thinking  of? 

a  quoi  pensez-vous? 
third,  troisieme;  tiers,  m. 
thirst,   soif,  /.;  be  thirsty,   avoir 

soif;  be  very  thirsty,  avoir  bien 

(tres)  soif,  mourir  de  soif. 
thirty,  trente;  about  — ,  une  tren- 

taine. 
this,  ce,  cet,  cette;  ce  .  .  .  -ci;  ceci; 

—  is,  voici;  —  one,  celui-ci. 
thou,  tu,  toi. 

though,  bien  que,  quoique. 
thousand  (a),  mille,  mil,  millier. 
thread,  fil,  m. 
three,  trois. 
thresh,  battre. 
throat,  gorge,  /. 
through,  par,  a  travers  de. 
throw,    jeter,    lancer;    —    away, 

jeter. 

thumb,  police,  m. 
Thursday,  jeudi,  m. 
thy,  ton,  ta,  tes. 
ticket,  billet,  m. 
tie,  n.,  era  vat  e,  /. 
tie  (up),  v.,  attacher. 
tile,  tuile,  /. 
till,  jusque,  jusqu'a. 
time,  temps,  m.,  fois,  /.,  heure,  /.; 

moment,    m.;  three   — s,    trois 

fois ;  at  what  — ?  a  quelle  heure? 

on    — ,    a    Fheure,    a    Fheure 


exacte;  from  —  to  — ,  de  temps 

en    temps;    have    a    good    — , 

s'amuser  (bien). 
timid,  timide. 
tip,  pourboire,  m. 
tired,  fatigue".  *> 

to,  a,  en,  pour;  chez;  jusqu'a. 
to-day,  aujourd'hui. 
together,  ensemble. 
to-morrow,  demain;  the  day  after 

— ,  apres-demain. 
tongue,  langue,  /.;  show  the  — . 

tirer  la  langue. 

too,  aussi;  trop;  —  much,  trop. 
tool,  outil,  m. 
tooth,   dent,  /.;  — brush,   brosse 

(/.)  a  dents;  — ache,  mal  (m.) 

aux  dents. 
top,  toupie,  /. 
Toronto,  Toronto,  m. 
torrent,  torrent,  m. 
toss,  jeter,  lancer. 
touch,  toucher  (a). 
towards,  vers. 
towel,  serviette,  /. 
town,  ville, /.;  in  — ,  en  ville;  to 

— ,  a  la  ville. 
townsman,  citadin. 
toy,  joujou,  m. 
train,  train,  m. 
tramway,  tramway,  m. 
translate,  traduire. 
travel,  n.,  voyage,  m. 
travel,  v.,  voyager, 
tree,  arbre,  m. 
tremble,  tressaillir. 
trim,  garnir. 
taimming,  garniture,  /. 
trip,  voyage,  m.,  promenade,  /. 
trouble,  peine,  /. ;  what  is  the  — ? 

de  quoi  s'agit-il? 
trout,  truite,  /. 
true,  vrai. 

truly,  vraiment,  reellement. 
trunk,  malle,  /. 
try,  tacher;  —  (on),  essayer. 


310 


ENGLISH-FRENCH   VOCABULARY 


Tuesday,  mardi,  m. 

twelve,  douze;  —  o'clock,  midi, 

m.,  minuit,  m. 
twenty,  vingt. 
twenty-five,  vingt-cinq. 
twice,  deux  fods. 
two,  deux. 

U 

umbrella,  parapluie,  m. 

uncle,  oncle,  m. 

under,  sous;  —  it,  dessous. 

understand,  comprendre;  not  — 

at  all,  n'y  comprendre  rien. 
unfortunate,  malheureux. 
unhappy,  malheureux. 
United  States,  Etats-Unis,  m.  pi. 
university,  universite,  /. 
unless,  a  moins  de,  a  moins  que 

.  .  .  ne. 

unsoiled,  frais. 
until,  jusque,  jusqu'a;  jusqu'a  ce 

que,  que. 
up,  en  haut;  be  all  —  with,  en 

etre  fait  de. 
upper,  superieur. 
upstairs,  en  haut;  show  — ,  faire 

monter. 
us,  nous, 
use,  n.,  usage,  m.;  make  —  of,  se 

servir  de;  what  —  is  that?  a  quoi 

sert  cela?  that  is  no  — ,  cela 

ne  sert  a  rien. 
use,  v.y  se  servir  de,  employer;  I 

used  to  play,  je  jouais. 
useful,  utile. 
utensil,  ustensile,  m. 
utilize,  utiliser. 


valise,  valise,  /. 
vase,  vase,  m. 
vast,  vaste. 
veal,  veau,  m. 
vegetable,  legume,  m. 
Venus,  Venus. 


verse,  A^erset,  m.;  (line  of  poetry) 

vers,  m. 

yery,  tres,  bien,  fort;  beaucoup. 
vessel,  vaisseau,  m. 
vice,  vice,  m. 
village,  village,  m. 
violent,  violent, 
visit,  n.,  visit e,  /.;  on  a  — ,   en 

visite. 
visit,    v.,    visiter,  faire    visite    a, 

rendre  visite  a,  aller  voir. 
voice,  voix,  /. 

volume,  volume,  m.,  tome,  m. 
vote,  n.,  voix,  /.;  voting,  vote,  m. 
vote,  v.,  voter. 

W 

wages,  gages,  m.  pi. 

wainscoting,  boiserie,  /. 

waist,  corsage,  m. 

waistcoat,  gilet,  m. 

wait  (for),  attendre;  keep  waiting, 

faire  attendre. 

waken,  reveiller;  se  reVeiller. 
walk,  promenade,  /. ;  go  for  a  — , 

(aller)  faire  une  promenade. 
wall,  mur,  m. 
walnut,  noix,  /. ;  —  tree  (or  wood), 

noyer,  m. 

want  to,  vouloir,  desirer. 
warm,  adj.,  chaud;  it  is  — ,  il  fait 

chaud. 

warm,  v.,  chauffer. 
warmth,  chaleur,  /. 
wash,  laver;  se  laver;  (linen) 

blanchir. 
waste,  gaspiller. 
watch,  montre,  /. 
water,  eau,  /.;  —fall,  cascade,  /. 
way,  fagon,  /.,  maniere,  /.;  chemin, 

m.j  moyen,  m.;  by  the  — ,  a  pro- 

pos;  there  is  no  — ,  il  n'y  a  pas 

moyen;  in  such  a  —  that,  de 

telle  fagon  que. 
we,  nous;  on. 
weak,  faible. 


ENGLISH-FRENCH  VOCABULARY 


311 


wealth,  richesse(s),  /. 

wear,  porter. 

weather,   temps,   m.;   the    —  is 

fine,  il  fait  beau;  in  cold  — , 

par  le  temps  froid. 
week,  semaine,  huit  jours;  next  — , 

la  semaine  prochaine;  a  —  from 

to-day,  d'aujourd'hui  en  huit; 

two     weeks,     deux     semaines, 

quinze  jours,  une  quinzaine. 
well,  bien;  —  then,  eh  bien;  very 

— ,  tres  bien,  je  veux  bien;  not 

be  very  — ,  etre  souffrant;  get 

— ,  guerir;  —  off  (-to-do),  heu- 

reux,  aise;  be  — ,  se  porter  bien. 
were,  see  be. 
west,  ouest,  m. 
what,  que,  quoi,   ce  qui,  ce  que; 

quel?  qu'est-ce    qui?    qu'est-ce 

que? 
whatever,    quoi   que;    quel   que; 

quelconque;  quelque  .  .  .  que, 

n'importe  quel. 
wheat,  ble,  m. 
when,  quand,  lorsque,  ou;  a  quelle 

heure? 
whenever,  quand,  toutes  les  fois 

que. 

where,  ou. 
wherever,   en   quelque  lieu   que, 

partout  ou,  ou  que. 
whether,  si;  soit  que,  que. 
which,   qui,  que,  ce  qui,   ce  que, 

lequel;  quel;  of  — ,  dont. 
while,  whilst,  pendant  que,  tandis 

que;  en. 
whistle,  sifner. 
white,  blanc. 
who,  qui,  lequel  (etc.). 
whoever,  qui  que,  quiconque. 
whole,  tout,   seule;  the  —  day, 

toute  la  journee. 
whom,  qui,  que,  lequel  (etc.). 
whose,  de  qui,  a  qui,  dont,  duquel 

(etc.). 
why,  pourquoi. 


wide,  large. 

wife,  femme. 

wild,  sauvage. 

will,  sign  of  fut.\  vouloir;  when 

you  — ,   quand  vous  voudrez; 

— you  kindly?  voulez-vous  bien? 
William,  Guillaume. 
win,    gagner,    1'emporter;    —  the 

day,  Temporter. 
wind,  vent,  m.;  there  is  — ,  il  fait 

du  vent, 
window,  f  enetre,  /. ;  (front)  shop  — , 

devanture,  /. 
window  blind,  store,  m. 
windy,  be  — ,  faire  du  vent, 
wine,  vin,  m.;  — glass,  verre  (m.) 

a  vin. 

winter,  hiver,  m. 
wise,     sage,    intelligent,    raison- 

nable. 
wish,  desirer,  vouloir;  I  —  (should 

like),  je  voudrais. 
with,  avec,  de,  chez,  contre,  au- 

pres  de. 

without,  sans,  sans  que. 
woman,  femme;  —  doctor,  femme 

docteur. 

wonder,  se  demander. 
wonderful,     remarquable,     eton- 

nant,  merveilleux. 
wonderfully,  a  merveille. 
wood,  bois,  m. 
woodcutter,  bucheron,  m. 
wooden,  de  bois,  en  bois. 
woollens,  lainages,  m.  pi. 
word,  mot,  m. 

work,  n.j  travail,  m.,  ouvrage,  m. 
work,  v.,  travailler;  faire  marcher; 

exploiter;  fonctionner. 
workman,  ouvrier,  m. 
world,  monde,  m. 
worm,  ver,  m. 
worse,  adj.,  pire,   plus   mauvais; 

adv.,  pis,  plus  mal. 
worth,    be  — ,   valoir;  —  while, 

valoir  la  peine;  have  5  francs  — 


312 


ENGLISH-FRENCH  VOCABULARY 


of,  en  avoir  pour  5  francs;  —  a 

million,  riche  d'un  million, 
worthy,  brave,  digne. 
would,  sign  of  condl.  and  of  impf. 

ind.;  voudrais,  voulais. 
write,   ecrire;  —  to  each  other, 

s'ecrire. 
wrong,  mauvais;  tort,  m.;  he  is  — , 

il  a  tort, 
wrought-iron,  fer  (m.)  forge. 


yard,  cour,  /. ;  metre,  m. 
year,  an,  m.,  annee,  /.;  every  — , 
tons  les  ans;  this  — ,  cette  annee. 


yeast,  levain,  m. 

yellow,  jaune;  become  — ,  jaunir. 

yes,  oui,  si. 

yesterday,  hier;  the  day  before  — , 

avant-hier. 
yet,  encore;  deja;  cependant;  not 

— ,  pas  encore, 
yield,  donner. 
yonder,  la-bas. 
you,  vous;  tu,  te,  toi;  on. 
young,  jeune. 
your,    votre,    vos;    ton,    ta,   tea; 

yours,  a  toi,  a  vous;  le  tien  (etc.), 

le  votre  (etc.). 
yourself,  vous,  vous-meme. 


INDEX 


a :  denoting  place,  §  12 ;  rep- 
etition of,  §  12;  contrac- 
tion with  definite  article, 
§§12,  83,  87,  92;  denoting 
indirect  object,  §  21;  be- 
fore infinitive,  §  60;  with 
place-names,  §  108;  before 
venir,  §  170;  required  after 
certain  verbs,  §  180;  a 
disjunctive  pronoun  for 
possessive,  Lesson  XXII 
and  §  211;  forming  ad- 
jectival phrases,  §  221. 

accents,  Introduction,  A. 

adjectives:  feminine,  plural 
and  agreement,  §§  14,207; 
irregular  plural  of,  §  32; 
position  of,  §  33 ;  irregular 
feminine  of,  §  34;  adjec- 
tives and  nouns,  feminine 
of,  §  206 ;  when  invariable, 
§  207;  with  avoir  Pair, 
§  207;  agreement  with 
gens,  §  207;  adverbs 
from  adjectives,  §  216; 
see  also  possessive,  de- 
monstrative, etc. 

adverb:  position,  §  48;  com- 
parison, §  59;  numeral  ad- 
verb, §  127;  from  adjec- 
tives, §  216;  distinctions, 
§  217. 

age,  expressions  of,  §  135. 

agir,  impersonal,  §  185. 

agreement:  verb  and  sub- 
ject, §§  4,  160;  personal 
pronoun  and  antecedent, 
§  7;  adjectives,  §§  14,  207; 
possessive  adjective,  §  16; 
relative  pronoun,  §  36; 
past  participle,  §§  49,  51, 
120,  196. 

aller  +  infinitive,  §  169; 
+  chercher,  §  174. 

alphabet,  Introduction,  A. 

a  moins  que,  with  ne,  §  220. 

apposition,  §  200;  apparent, 
§  200. 

article,  see  definite  and  in- 
definite. 


au=a+le,  §§12,  83,87,92. 

aucun,  §  104. 

au-dessous  de,  §  222. 

au-dessus  de,  §  222. 

aupres  de,  §  222. 

aussi,  in  comparison,  §§  56- 
59;  =  hence,  word-order, 
§  161. 

autant,  §  217. 

autre,  §  101;  Pun  Fautre, 
§  117. 

autrui,  §  101. 

aux=a  +  les,  §§  12,  83,  87, 
92. 

auxiliary  function,  §  163  and 
following. 

auxiliary  verbs:  conjuga- 
tion, Appendix,  C,  2;  in 
compound  tenses,  §§  45, 
51,  113;  in  passive,  §  118; 
word-order  with,  §§  48, 
113. 

avant,  §  222. 

avant  que,  with  ne,  §  220. 

avoir:  conjugation,  Appen- 
dix, C,  2;  use  in  compound 
tenses,  §  45  ;y  avoir,  §§31, 
114,  185,  187;  avoir  -fbe- 
soin  (chaud,  etc.),  §  202; 
avoir  1'air,  §  207. 

bien,  of  quantity,  §  26. 

fa,  for  cela,  §  79. 

can,  distinctions,  §§  165, 166. 

capitals,  Introduction,  Q. 

cardinals,  §  121. 

ce,  demonstrative  adjec- 
tive, §  43. 

ce:  pronoun,  §  35;  +e~tre, 
§  54 ;  as  real  subject,  §§  80, 
182;  ce  qui  (que),  recapit- 
ulatory use,  §  98;  c'est 
and  il  est,  §  182;  ce  and 
il(s),  elle(s),  §  183. 

conditional  anterior;  §  112; 
replaced  by  imperfect  in- 
dicative, §  188;  replaced 
by  pluperfect  subjunc- 
tive, §  193. 

313 


conditional  sentences,  §  113. 

conditional  tense,  §§  110, 
111;  of  deferential  state- 
ment, §  190;  of  probabil- 
ity, etc.,  §  190;  of  conces- 
sion, with  quand  (meme) 
or  que,  §  190;  of  implied 
futurity,  §  190;  of  hear- 
say information,  §  190. 

conjunctions:  requiring  sub- 
junctive, §§  147,  224; 
requiring  past  anterior, 
§  153;  various  distinctions 
of,  §  223;  corresponding 
to  prepositional  phrases, 
§223. 

conjunctive  personal  pro- 
nouns, §§  22,  23;  position, 
§§  68,  72;  as  indirect  ob- 
ject of  reflexives,  §  116. 

consonants,  pronunciation, 
Introduction,  M . 

contractions :  de  -f-  definite 
article,  §§  10,  83,  87,  92; 
a  +  definite  article,  §§  12, 
83,  87,  92. 

could,  distinctions,  §  165. 

dans  =  in,  §  12,  note. 

dates:  year,  §  129;  month, 
§  134. 

days,  of  week,  §  132. 

de:  of  possession,  §  10;  rep- 
etition of,  §  10;  contrac- 
tion with  definite  article, 
§§  10,  83,  87,  92;  in  ad- 
jectival phrases,  §§  30, 
221;  with  superlative, 
§  57;  after  plus,  moins, 
§  59 ;  before  infinitive,  §  60 ; 
with  place-names,  §  108; 
with  passive,  §  118;  of  di- 
mension, §  131;  before 
venir,  §  170;  after  certain 
verbs,  §  180;  with  histor- 
ical infinitive,  §  191 ;  caus- 
ing omission  of  partitive 
de,  §  198. 

definite  article:  forms,  repe- 
tition, §  2;  contractions 


314 


INDEX 


with  de  and  a,  §§  10,  12, 
83,  87,  92;  omission  with 
partitive,  §  28;  use  in  su- 
perlative, §  57;  with  place- 
names,  §  108;  denoting 
possession,  §  117;  distrib- 
utively,  §  124;  with  titles, 
§  199;  with  appositive 
noun,  §  200;  omitted  in 
certain  expressions,  §  202 ; 
for  possessive  adjective, 
§  203. 

demi,  agreement,  §  126. 

demonstrative  ad  j  ecti  ve : 
forms,  repetition,  §  43. 

demonstrative  pronoun, 
§§  35,  79;  see  also  ce,  ce- 
lui,  etc. 

depuis  (quand?),  with  pres- 
ent and  imperfect  indica- 
tive, §§  187,  188. 

depuis  que  and  puisque, 
§223. 

dernier  +subjunctive,  §  146. 

des  =  de  +  les,  §§  10,  83,  87, 
92;  denoting  plural  of  un, 
§25. 

dessous,  §  217. 

dessus,  §  217. 

devant,  §  222. 

devoir  +  infinitive,  §  168. 

dimensions,  §  131. 

disjunctive  personal  pro- 
nouns, §§  52-54. 

dormer,  conjugation,  Ap- 
pendix, C,  1. 

dont,  §  94. 

du=de  +  le,  §§  10,  83,  87, 
92. 

e,  6,  of  stem  syllable,  Ap- 
pendix, D. 

-eler,  verbs  in,  Appendix, 
D. 

elision,  Introduction,  O. 

empecher,  with  ne,  §  220. 

en:  pronominal  adverb,  §  27 ; 
position,  §§  68,  72;  with 
indefinite  antecedent, 
§  210. 

en:  preposition,  with  place- 
names,  §  108;  with  par- 
ticiple, §  139;  forming 
adjectival  phrases,  §  221. 

encore  un,  §  101. 

en  quelque  lieu  que  =  where- 
ever,  §  217. 

entendre  -f-  infinitive,  §  172; 
+  dire, +parlerde,§  174. 


entendu,  agreement,  §  196. 

entre,  §  222. 

envers,  §  222. 

environ,  §  222. 

envoyer  chercher,  §  174. 

est-ce  que,  §  20. 

ete,  invariable,  §  118. 

-eter,  verbs  in,  Appendix, 
D. 

etre:  conjugation,  Appen- 
dix, C,  2;  use  in  compound 
tenses,  §§  51,  119. 

-eur,  feminine  of,  §  206. 

eviter,  with  ne,  §  220. 

faire:  of  weather,  tempera- 
ture, etc.,  §§  114,  204; 
causatively,  and  govern- 
ment of,  §  172;  +at- 
tendre,  +savoir,  +  venir, 
§  174. 

fait,  when  invariable,  §  172. 

finir:  conjugation,  Appen- 
dix, C,  1;  +par,  §  178. 

fois  (une  fois,  etc.),  §  122. 

fractions,  §  126. 

future  anterior,  §  78;  of 
probability,  etc.,  §  189. 

future  tense,  §§  74-76;  of 
probability,  etc.,  §  189. 

gender,  of  nouns,  §  1,  also 
Appendix,  A. 

general  noun,  §  24. 

gens,  gender  and  agree- 
ment, §  207. 

-ger,  verbs  in,  Appendix,  D. 

guere,  with  ne,  §§  104,  218. 

holidays,  §  136. 
however,  §§  146,  217. 

il:  impersonal,  §  114;  invari- 
able, §  210;  anticipating 
real  subject,  §  185. 

il  est  and  c'est,  §  182;  =il  y 
a,  §  185. 

il(s),  elle(s)  and  ce,  §  183. 

il  s'agit,  §  185. 

il  se  peut,  §  185. 

ily  a,  §§  31,  114,  185;  ily  a 
que,  with  present  and  im- 
perfect indicative,  §  187. 

imperative  mood,  §§  69,  70; 
negatively,  §  71 ;  with  pro- 
noun objects,  §  72;  of 
reflexives,  §  116;  3d  sin- 
gular and  plural  of,  §  148; 
replaced  by  infinitive, 
§  191. 


imperfect  indicative,  §§  63- 
65;  with  depuis,  etc.,  de- 
noting how  long,  §  188; 
replacing  conditional  an- 
terior, §  188. 

imperfect  subjunctive, 
§§  154-156. 

impersonal  verbs,  §§  114, 
185. 

indefinite  adjectives,  §§  40, 
100-105,  207. 

indefinite  article:  forms,  re- 
petition, §  1;  omission, 
§§  200,  202;  employed 
contrary  to  English  us- 
age, §  202. 

indefinite  pronouns,  §§  40, 
100-105. 

indirect  object,  §  21. 

-ing  forms,  §§  60,  141. 

infinitive  mood:  after  verbs, 
nouns,  adjectives,  §  60; 
for  -ing  forms,  §§  60,  141 ; 
replacing  subjunctive, 
§  156,  note;  for  noun 
clause,  §  176;  preceded  by 
par,  pour,  §  178;  after 
prepositional  phrases, 
§  178;  for  imperative, 
§  191;  historical  infinitive, 
§  191;  infinitive  or  sub- 
junctive, §  195. 

interrogation,  §§  8,  9,  20, 
87-91;  forms  with  rela- 
tive pronoun,  §  37. 

interrogative  adjective,  §  50. 

interrogative  locutions,  §  91. 

interrogative  pronouns, 
§§  87-91. 

irregular  verbs,  remarks  on; 
§  158;  exercise  form  for, 
§  159;  list  of,  Appendix, 
E. 

jamais,  with  ne,  §  104. 

la,  compared  with  y,  §  39. 

-ft,  §§  43,  82. 

laisse,  agreement,  §  196. 

laisser+infinitive,  §  172. 

le  (la,  les),  see  also  definite 
article  and  personal  pro- 
noun; le,  invariable,  §210; 
le,  predicative,  §  210. 

lequel,  §  95. 

lequel?  §  90. 

liaison,  Introduction,  N. 

lorsque  and  quand,  §  223. 

Tun,  Pautre,  §  117. 


INDEX 


315 


measures,  French,  §  123. 
mil,  in  dates,  §  129. 
moi,  for  me,  §  72. 
moins,  in  comparison,  §§  56- 

59;  as  adverb  of  quantity, 

§59. 

mon,  in  address,  §  211. 
money,  Frenc/a,  §  123. 
months,  §  133. 
multiplicatives,  §  122. 

nasal  vowels,  Introduction, 
K. 

ne:  with  pas,  point,  etc., 
§§  11,  104,  218;  position, 
§§  48, 218;  in  comparisons, 
§  208;  omitted,  §  218; 
without  pas,  etc.,  §  219; 
redundant,  §  220;  ne  .  .  . 
que,  §§  104,  198,  217;  ne 
.  .  .  pas  que,  §  217. 

negation:  ne  .  .  .  pas,  §  11; 
with  indefinites,  §  104; 
summary  of  forms,  §§104, 
218;  pas,  etc.,  omitted, 
§  219;  ne  redundant, 
§220. 

neither  .  .  .  nor,  §  218. 

n'importe,  §§  215,  219. 

non,  §  218;  que  non,  §  217. 

noun:  general  and  partitive, 
§§  24,  25;  plural  of,  §§  2, 
32  and  Appendix,  B; 
gender  of,  §  1  and  Ap- 
pendix, A ;  in  -eur,  -teur, 
feminine  of,  §  206;  femi- 
nine like  adjectives,  §  206. 

mil,  §  104. 

numerals,  §§  121-137;  car- 
dinals, §  121;  ordinals, 
§  125. 

on   (1'on),   §   38;  replacing 

passive,  §  38;  repetition 

of,  §  214. 

only,  how  expressed,  §  217. 
ordinals,  §  125. 
ou,     as    relative    pronoun, 

§  96;   ou  q\ie=wherever, 

§  217. 

oui:  que  oui,  §  217. 
own,  how  expressed,  §  211. 

par,  with  passive,  §  118;  of 
price,  §  124;  with  faire, 
construction,  §  172;  after 
commencer  and  finir, 
§  178. 

parmi,  §  222. 

participles:  used  as  adjec- 


tives, §  33;  see  also, 
present,  past,  perfect  par- 
ticiples. 

partitive  noun,  §  25;  omis- 
sion of  article,  §  28;  omis- 
sion of  partitive  sign, 
§§  29,  198;  exceptional 
cases  of,  §  198. 

partout  ou  =  wherever,  §  217. 

pas,  with  ne,  §§11, 104,  218; 
ne  omitted,  §  218;  posi- 
tion, §  218;  pas  un,  §  104. 

passive  voice,  §  118;  re- 
placed by  on,  §§  38,  118; 
replaced  by  reflexives, 
§  117. 

past  anterior,  §§  151,  153. 

past  definite,  §§  149,  150, 
152,  153. 

past  indefinite,  §§  46,  47. 

past  participle,  §  44 ;  in  com- 
pound tenses,  §§  45,  51; 
agreement  of,  §§  49,  118, 
120,  140,  196;  with  im- 
personal verb,  §§  185, 
196;  special  cases,  §  196. 

pendant  que  and  tandis  que, 
§  223. 

perfect  participle,  §§  138, 
140. 

personal  pronouns:  in  ad- 
dress, §  5;  agreement  with 
antecedent,  §§  7,  210;  use 
and  position  as  objects, 
§§  18,  21,  23,  68,  72;  con- 
junctive, §§  22,  23;  dis- 
junctive, §§  52-54;  re- 
flexive object,  §  116. 

personne,  §  104. 

peut-etre  (que),  word-order 
after,  §  161. 

pluperfect  indicative,  §  67; 
pluperfect  and  past  an- 
terior, §  153;  replaced  by 
pluperfect  subjunctive, 
§  193. 

pluperfect  subjunctive, 
§§  155,  156;  replacing  plu- 
perfect indicative  or  con- 
ditional anterior,  §  193. 

plural:  of  nouns  and  adjec- 
tives, §§  2,  32. 

plus:  in  comparison,  §§  56- 
59;  as  adverb  of  quanti- 
ty, §  59;  with  ne,  §§  104, 
218;  position  of,  §  218. 

point,  with  ne,  §§  104,  218. 

possession,  how  denoted, 
§§  10,  85,  117,  203. 


possessive  adjective:  forms, 
§  15;  agreement  and  re- 
petition, §  16;  replaced  by 
definite  article,  §  203;  in 
polite  address,  §  211;  in* 
definite  son,  §  214. 

possessive  pronoun,  §§  83^ 
85;  absolutely,  §  211. 

pour,  of  purpose,  §  178;  after 
assez,  trop,  §  178;  =  how- 
ever, §  217.  ' 

pouvoir  +  infinitive,  §  165; 
il  se  peut,  §  185. 

premier:  in  dates,  §  134;  in 
titles,  §  130;  +  subjunc- 
tives, §  146. 

preposition:  with  infinitive, 
§  60;  distinctions,  §  222; 
corresponding  to  con- 
junctions, §  223. 

pres  de,  §  222. 

present  indicative,  idiomat- 
ic use,  §  187. 

present  participle,  §§  138, 
139. 

present  subjunctive,  §§142- 
148;  for  imperfect  sub- 
junctive, §  156. 

principal  parts,  formation 
of  tenses  from,  §  157. 

pronominal  adverbs,  §§  27, 
39;  position,,  §§  68,  72. 

pronouns,  see  personal,  pos- 
sessive, etc. 

propre,  §  211. 

puisque  and  depuis  que, 
§  223. 

punctuation,  Introduction, 
P. 

quand  and  lorsque,  §  223. 

quand  (meme),  cpnditional 
after,  §  190. 

quantity:  expressions  of, 
§  26;  agreement  of  past 
participle  with,  §  160, 196. 

quantity,  of  vowels,  Intro- 
duction, F. 

que,  relative  pronoun,  §  36. 

que?  §§  9,  89. 

que,  conjunction:  in  com- 
parison, §  56;  with  sub- 
junctive, §  142;  not  omit- 
ted, §  144;  replaced  by 
comme,  §  208;  replacing 
other  conjunctions,  §  193. 

quel?  §  50;  for  qui?  §  88; 
compared  with  lequel? 
§  90. 


316 


INDEX 


quel!  §  50. 

quelconque,  §  215. 

quel      que  +  subjunctive, 

§  146. 

quelque  =  however,  §  217. 
quelque  chose,  §  103. 
quelque  .  .  .  que+subjunc- 

tive,  §  215. 
quelqu'un,  §  102. 
qu'est-ce  qui?  §§  37,  89. 
qui:  relative  pronoun,  §  36; 

after   preposition,    §    93; 

=he  who,  etc.,  §  212;  qui 

.  .  .  qui,  §  212. 
qui?  §§  9,  88. 
quiconque,  §  215. 
qui  que  -f-  subjunctive,  §  215. 
quoi,  §  97;  de  quoi,  §  212. 
quoi?  §  89, 
quoi      que   +  subjunctive, 

§  215. 

reciprocal  verbs,  §  117. 

reflexive  verbs,  §§  115-117; 
for  English  passive,  §117; 
compound  tenses,  §  119; 
omission  of  se,  §  172. 

relative  pronoun,  §§36,  92- 
98,  212;  agreement,  §  3.6; 
not  omitted,  §  36;  in  in- 
terrogative locutions,  §  37. 

rien,  §  104. 

rompre,  conjugation,  Ap- 
pendix, C,  1. 

sache,  deferential  state- 
ment, §  193. 

savoir+ infinitive,  §  166. 

se,  reflexive  to  on,  §  214. 

sembler,  il  (me)  semble, 
construction,  §  193. 

semi-vowels,  Introduction, 
/,. 

s'en  aller,  conjugation,  Ap- 
pendix, C,  5. 

seul+ subjunctive,  §  146. 

seulement,  §  217. 

si:  =aussi,  §  56;  =  whether 
(if),  §  113;  replaced  by 


que,  §  193;  =  yes,  §  217; 
=  however,  §  217. 

soi,  indefinitely,  §  54. 

subject,  position  of,  §  161. 

stress,  Introduction,  E. 

subjunctive  mood,  §§  142- 
148,  154-156;  in  noun 
clause,  §  144;  in  adjec- 
tival clause,  §  146;  in  ad- 
verbial clause,  §  147;  in 
principal  sentence,  §  148; 
tense  sequence,  §§  145, 
156;  after  negation,  etc., 
§  193;  subjunctive  or  in- 
finitive, §  195;  required 
after  certain  conjunc- 
tions, §  224. 

superlative  of  adjectives, 
§  57;  of  adverbs,  §  59. 

sur:  of  dimension,  §  131;  in 
adjectival  phrases,  §  221. 

syllabication,  Introduction, 
D. 

-t-,  in  interrogation,  §  8. 

tandis  que  and  pendant  que, 
§  223. 

tant,  §  217. 

tel,  §  105. 

tenses:  various  English 
forms,  §  19;  formation  of 
compound  tenses,  §§  45, 
51,  119;  from  principal 
parts,  §  157;  see  also  pres- 
ent, imperfect,  etc. 

-teur,  feminine  of,  §  206. 

there  is  (are),  §§  17,  31. 

time,  how  denoted,  §  137. 

titles:  numerical,  §  130;  with 
definite  article,  §  199. 

toi,  for  te,  §  72 

tout,  §  40;  with  gens,  §  207; 
as  adverb,  §  217;  =  how- 
ever, §  217;  toutes  les  fois 
que,  §  217. 

tu  =  you,  §  5. 

un,  article  or  numeral,  §  1. 
unique  +  subjunctive,  §  146. 


venir+  infinitive,  or+  a,  or 
+  de,  §  170;  +  chercher, 
prendre,  §  174. 

verb:  regular  conjugations, 
Appendix,  C,  1 ;  auxiliary, 
Appendix,  C,  2,  agree- 
ment with  subject,  §§  4, 
160;  government  of, 
§  180;  constructions  with 
two  objects,  §  195. 

verb-phrases,  §§  164-166, 
168-170;  172,  174. 

vers,  §  222. 

void,  §  17;  voici  .  .  .  que, 
with  present  indicative, 
§  187. 

voila,  §  17;  voild.  .  .  .  que, 
with  present  indicative, 
§  187;  compared  with  il 
y  a,  §§  17,  31. 

vouloir  +  infinitive,  §  164. 

vous  =  you,  §  5. 

vowels,  pronunciation,  In- 
troduction, G-K. 

vu,  agreement,  §  196. 

weights,  French,  §  123. 

what  =  that  which,  §  98. 

what?  §§  9,  89. 

whatever,  §§  146,  215. 

whenever,  §  217. 

wherever,  §  217. 

which,  in  summing  up,  §  98* 

whoever,  §§  146,  215. 

whose,  §  94. 

whose?  §  88. 

will,  distinctions,  §  164. 

would,  distinctions,  §  164. 

y,  pronominal  adverb,  §  39; 
y  and  la,  §  39;  position, 
§§  39,  68,  72;  omission 
with  irai(s),  §  168,  note; 
with  indefinite  antece- 
dent, §  210. 

-yer,  verbs  in,  Appendix. 
D. 

you,  how  translated,  §  5. 


ADVERTISEMENTS 


lbeatb'8  flDo&ern  ^Language  Series 

FRENCH  GRAMMARS,  READERS,  ETC. 

Armand's  Grammaire  Elementaire. 

Blanchaud's  Progressive  French  Idioms. 

Bouvet's  Exercises  in  French  Syntax  and  Composition. 

Bowen's  First  Scientific  French  Reader. 

Bruce's  Dictees  Franjaises. 

Bruce's  Grammaire  Francaise. 

Brace's  Lectures  Faciles. 

Capus's  Pour  Charmer  nos  Petits. 

Chapuzet  and  Daniels'  Mes  Premiers  Pas  en  Francais. 

Clarke's  Subjunctive  Mood.     An  inductive  treatise,  with  exercises. 

Comfort's  Exercises  in  French  Prose  Composition. 

Davies's  Elementary  Scientific  French  Reader. 

Edgren's  Compendious  French  Grammar. 

Fontaine's  En  France. 

Fontaine's  Lectures  Courantes. 

Fontaine's  Livre  de  Lecture  et  de  Conversation. 

Fraser  and  Squair's  Abridged  French  Grammar. 

Fraser  and  Squair's  Complete  French  Grammar. 

Fraser  and  Squair's  Shorter  French  Course. 

French  Verb  Blank  (Fraser  and  Squair) . 

Grandgent's  Essentials  of  French  Grammar. 

Grandgent's  French  Composition. 

Grandgent's  Short  French  Grammar. 

Heath's  French  Dictionary. 

Benin's  Methode. 

Hotchkiss's  Le  Premier  Livre  de  Francais. 

Knowles  and  Favard's  Grammaire  de  la  Conversation. 

Mansion's  Exercises  in  French  Composition. 

Mansion's  First  Year  French.     For  young  beginners. 

Martin's  Essentials  of  French  Pronunciation. 

Martin  and  Russell's  At  West  Point. 

Meras'  Le  Petit  Vocabulaire. 

Pattou's  Causeries  en  France. 

Pellissier's  Idiomatic    French  Composition. 

Perfect  French  Possible  (Knowles  and  Favard) 

Prisoners  of  the  Temple  (Guerber).     For  French  composition. 

Roux's  Lessons  in  Grammar  and  Composition,  based  on  Colomba. 

Schenck's  French  Verb  Forms. 

Snow  and  Lebon's  Easy  French. 

Story  of  Cupid  and  Psyche  (Guerber).     For  French  composition. 

Super's  Preparatory  French  Reader. 


Ibeatb's  /IDo&ern  ^Language  Series 

ELEMENTARY  FRENCH  TEXTS. 

Assolant's  R6cits  de  la  Vieille  France.    Notes  by  E.  B.  Wauton. 
Berthet's  Le  Pacte  de  Famine  (Dickinson). 
Bruno's  Les  Enfants  Patriotes  (Lyon).     Vocabulary. 
Bruno's  Tour  de  la  France  par  deux  Enfants  (Fontaine).     Vocabulary, 
Claretie's  Pierrille  (Fran?ois).     Vocab.  and  exs. 
Daudet's  Trois  Contes  Choisis  (Sanderson).     Vocabulary. 
Desnoyers'  Jean-Paul  Choppart  (Fontaine).     Vocab.  and  exs. 
Enault's  Le  Chien  du  Capitaine  (Fontaine).     Vocabulary. 
Erckmann-Chatrian's  Le  Conscrit  de  1813  (Super).     Vocabulary. 
Erckmann-Chatrian's  L'Histoire  d'un  Paysan  (Lyon). 
Erckmann-Chatrian's  Le  Juif  Polonais  (Manley).    Vocabulary. 
Erckmann-Chatrian's  Madame  Therese  (Manley).     Vocabulary. 
Fabliaux  et  Contes  du  Moyen  Age  (Mansion).     Vocabulary. 
France's  Abeille  (Lebon). 

French  Fairy  Tales  (Joynes).     Vocabulary  and  exercises. 
French  Plays  for  Children   (Spink).     Vocabulary. 
Gervais's  Un  Cas  de  Conscience  (Horsley).     Vocabulary. 
La  Bedolliere's  La  Mere  Michel  et  son  Chat  (Lyon).     Vocabulary. 
Labiche's  La  Grammaire  (Levi).    Vocabulary. 
Labiche's  La  Poudre  aux  Yeux  (Wells).     Vocabulary. 
Labiche's  Le  Voyage  de  M.  Perrichon  (Wells).     Vocab.  and  exs. 
Laboulaye's  Contes  Bleus  (Fontaine).     Vocabulary. 
La  Main  Malheureuse  (Guerber).     Vocabulary. 
Laurie's  Memoires  d'un  Collegien  (Super).     Vocab.  and  exs. 
Legouve  and  Labiche's  Cigale  chez  les  Fourmis  (Witherby). 
Lemaitre,  Contes  (Rensch).     Vocabulary. 
Mairet's  La  Tache  du  Petit  Pierre  (Super).    Vocab.  and  exs. 
Maistre's  La  Jeune  Siberienne  (Fontaine).     Vocab.  and  exs. 
Malot's  Sans  Famille  (Spiers).     Vocabulary  and  exercises. 
Meilhac  and  Halevy's  L'Ete  de  la  St.  Martin  (Francois)      Vocab. 
Moinaux's  Les  deux  Sourds  (Spiers).     Vocabulary. 
Muller's  Grandes  Decouvertes  Modernes.     Vocabulary. 
Recits  de  Guerre  et  de  Revolution  (Minssen).     Vocabulary. 
Recits  Historiques  (Moffett).     Vocabulary  and  exercises. 
Saintine's  Picciola  (Super).     Vocabulary. 
Segur's  Les  Malheurs  de  Sophie  (White).     Vocab.  and  exs. 
Selections  for  Sight  Translation  (Bruce). 
Verne's  L'Expedition  de  la  Jeune-Hardie  (Lyon) .    Vocabulary. 


Ibeatb's  /IDofcern  ^Language  Series 

INTERMEDIATE  FRENCH  TEXTS.     (Partial  List.) 
About's  La  Mere  de  la  Marquise  (Brush).     Vocabulary. 
About's  Le  Roi  des  Montagnes  (Logic).  With  vocab. 

Balzac:  Cinq  Scenes  de  la  Comedie  Humaine  (Wells).     Glossary. 
Balzac's  Eugenie  Grandet  (Spiers).     Vocabulary. 
Balzac's  Le  Cure  de  Tours  (Super).     Vocabulary. 
Chateaubriand's  Atala  (Kuhns).     Vocabulary. 
Contes  des  Romanciers  Naturalistes  (Dow  and  Skinner).     Vocab. 
Daudet's  La  Belle-Nivernaise  (Boielle).     Vocabulary. 
Daudet's  Le  Petit  Chose  (Super).     Vocabulary. 
Daudet's  Tartarin  de  Tarascon  (Hawkins).     Vocabulary. 
Dumas's  Due  de  Beaufort  (Kitchen).     Vocabulary. 
Dumas's  La  Question  d'Argent  (Henning) .     Vocabulary. 
Dumas's  La  Tulipe  Noire  (Fontaine).  With  vocabulary. 

Dumas's  Les  Trois  Mousquetaires  (Spiers).     Vocabulary. 
Dumas's  Monte-Cristo  (Spiers).     Vocabulary. 

Feuillet's  Roman  d'un  jeune  homme  pauvre  (Bruner).     Vocabulary. 
Gautier's  Voyage  en  Espagne  (Steel). 
Greville's  Dosia  (Hamilton).     Vocabulary. 
Hugo's  Bug  Jargal  (Boi'elle). 

Hugo's  La  Chute.     From  Les  Miser  able  s  (Huss).    Vocabulary. 
Hugo's  Quatre-vingt-treize  (Fontaine).    Vocabulary. 
Labiche's  La  Cagnotte  (Farnsworth) . 
La  Brete's  Mon  Oncle  et  mon  Cure  (Colin).    Vocabulary. 
Lamartine's  Graziella  (Warren). 
Lamartine's  Jeanne  d'Arc  (Barrere).    Vocabulary. 
Lamartine's  Scenes  de  la  Revolution  Francaise  (Super).    Vocab. 
Lesage's  Gil  Bias  (Sanderson). 

Maupassant:  Huit  Contes  Choisis  (White).    Vocabulary. 
Michelet:  Extraits  del'histoire  de  France  (Wright). 
Musset:  Trois  Comedies  (McKenzie). 
Sarcey's  Le  Siege  de  Paris  (Spiers).     Vocabulary. 
Taine's  L'Ancien  Regime  (Giese).     Vocabulary. 
Theuriet's  Bigarreau  (Fontaine).     Vocab.  and  exercises. 
Tocqueville's  Voyage  en  Amerique  (Ford).     Vocabulary. 
Vigny's  Cinq-Mars  (Sankey).     Abridged. 
Vigny's  Le  Cachet  Rouge  (Fortier). 
Vigny's  La  Canne  de  Jonc  (Spiers). 
Voltaire's  Zadig  (Babbitt).     Vocabulary, 


Ibeatb's  /IDo&ern  ^Language  Series 

INTERMEDIATE  FRENCH  TEXTS.     (Partial  List.) 
Augier's  Le  Gendre  de  M.  Poirier  (Wells).     Vocabulary. 
Bazin's  Les  Oberle  (Spiers) .     Vocabulary. 
Beaumarchais's  Le  Barbier  de  Seville  (Spiers).     Vocabulary. 
French  Lyrics  (Bowen). 
Gautier's  Jettatura  (Schinz). 

Halevy's  L'Abbe  Constantin  (Logie) .    Vocabulary. 
Halevy's  Un  Mariage  d'Amour  (Hawkins).     Vocabulary. 
Historiettes  Modernes  (Fontaine).     Vol.1,  Vol.11. 

La  France  quitravaille  (Jago).     Vocabulary. 
Lectures  Historiques  (Moffett).    Vocabulary » 
Loti's  Le  Roman  d'un  Enfant.    (Whittem).    Vocabulary. 
Loti's  Pecheur  d'Islande  (Super).     Vocabulary. 
Loti's Ramuntcho  (Fontaine). 

Marivaux's  Le  Jeu  del  'amour  et  du  hasard  (Fortier).     Vocab. 
Merimee's  Chronique  du  Regne  de  Charles  IX  (Desages). 
Me"rimee's  Colomba  (Fontaine).     Vocabulary  . 
Moliere  en  Recits  (Chapuzet  and  Daniels).     Vocabulary. 
Moliere's  L'Avare  (Levi). 

Moliere's  Le  Bourgeois  Gentilhomme  (Warren).     Vocabulary. 
Moliere's  Le  Medecin  Malgre  Lui  (Hawkins).     Vocabulary. 
Pailleron's  Le  Monde  ou  1'on  s'ennuie  (Pendleton).     Vocabulary. 
Poemes  et  Chants  de  France  (Daniels  and  Travers) .     Vocabulary. 
Racine's  Andro ma que    (Wells).     Vocabulary. 
Racine's  Athalie  (Eggert). 
Racine's  Esther  (Spiers).     Vocabulary. 
Renan's  Souvenirs  d'Enfance  et  de  Jeunesse  (Babbitt). 
Sand's  La  Mare  au  Diable  (Sumichrast).     Vocabulary. 
Sand's  La  Petite  Fadette  (Super).     Vocabulary. 
Sandeau's  Mile  de  la  Seigliere  (Warren).     Vocabulary. 
Sardou's  Les  Pattes  de  Mouche  (Farnsw  trth).     Vocabulary. 
Scribe's  Bataille  de  Dames  (Wells).     Vocabulary. 
Scribe's  Le  Verre  d'Eau  (Eggert).     Vocabulary. 
Sept  Grands  Auteurs  du  XIXe  Siecle  (Fortier).     Lectures. 
Souvestre's  Un  Philosophe  sous  les  Toits  (Fraser).     Vocabulary. 
Thiers's  Expedition  de  Bonaparte  en  Egypte  (Fabregou). 
Verne's  Tour  du  Monde  en  quatre-vingts  jours  (Edgren).     Vocab. 
Verne's  Vingt  mille  lieues  sous  les  mers  (Fontaine).     Vocab. 
Zola's  La  Debacle  (Wells).     Abridged. 


I 


RETURN  TO  the  circulation  desk  of  an, 
University  of  California  Library 

NORTHERN  REGIONAL  LIBRARY  FACILITY 
Bldg.  400,  Richmond  Field  Station 
University  of  California 
Richmond,  CA  94804-4698 

ALL  BOOKS  MAY  BE  RECALLED  AFTER  7  DAYS 
• 


be  rechar9ed  by  ***** 


DUE  AS  STAMPED  BELOW 


1 0 1999 


it 


_^ 


Tb    UlObO 


803 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  LIBRARY 


